JP6498160B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a "slot machine").

  Conventionally, as seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game is performed in which a large amount of awards can be obtained when a winning is made.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening. Then, when there is a winning of the game ball to the starting opening, a determination process is performed in which a hit or the like is determined. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on a predetermined display for a predetermined fluctuation time. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode in which it is shown that the player wins the win, and the opening and closing member of the big winning opening is operated to increase the number of players. Provide a special game that can be won the award of.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to execute movable effect to operate the effects for presentation at specific timing based on the result of the determination process. Through such a movable effect, it is intended to improve the effect until the special game is performed. Also, in recent years, a special movable effect that operates a part or all of the movable operation unit is performed by targeting the operation unit operable by the player as one of the rendering use items without the player's operation. It is also known.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-187791

  By the way, in such a conventional gaming machine, when an abnormality occurs in the operation unit to be a movable target of a special movable effect, an effect using the operation unit (for example, an operation system effect or a player requiring an operation by the player) Operation-related effects that do not require the operation of (1), etc.) are disturbed, and there is a risk that the interest in playing the game will be reduced.

  This invention is made in view of such a situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a decrease in amusement can be suppressed.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A determination unit that makes a determination based on the establishment of the game start condition;
Symbol variation means for performing symbol variation based on the result of the determination;
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to the player when a predetermined result is derived in the symbol variation;
Production control means for performing control related to production;
An operation means operable by the player;
The operating means can be changed to a normal state and a specific state different from the normal state,
The effect control means can execute an operation effect requiring an operation of the operation means,
For the operation effects,
Is capable of executing a notification informing that it is possible to accept the operation to the operating means, a normal operation effect capable of undergoing an operation on the operation means of at least the normal state,
Wherein it is capable of executing a notification informing availability for operation to the operating means, a specific operation effect that is capable of undergoing an operation to the operating means before Symbol specific state, are included,
Wherein the condition for executing a specific operation effect that the operating means holds said normal state near Ru case, the operation means is changed to the specific state by performing the specific operation effect, the specific operation effect after the operation means by operation on the operation unit is movable in, a process for returning the operating means to the normal state,
Wherein the normal operating conditions for executing effect is regardless the operation means also is met the have field if such a normal state, the operation means performs the normal operation effect while not in the normal state, the even if the operating means is variable dynamic by operation on the operation means in the normal operation effect, characterized in that said operating means is not performed the process of returning to the normal state.

  According to the present invention, a decrease in game interest can be suppressed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side without the left frame member, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.34 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of a production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the rendering operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A portion of the operation button is cut out and a portion that is about to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown by the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in Fig.51 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.51 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 56 taken along the line PP. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front with the gaming board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, as viewed from the front together with the front component, the substrate holder and the main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from the rear. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a delivery control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board which relays the electrical connection of the delivery control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram of a sound source built-in VDP periphery in a liquid crystal and sound control part. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control substrate and the peripheral control substrate. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payment control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 89. FIG. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power-on of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection fault judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection check signal to the INIT terminal of transmitter IC for upper dish side liquid crystal. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine of an embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine of an embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine of an embodiment. It is a figure showing the operation state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure showing the circuit composition when a plurality of sensor signal input parts respectively connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors were connected in parallel with a plurality of base terminals of a transistor of a detection circuit part. (A) shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in a prior art example, (B) is the figure which shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in an Example. (A) shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in a prior art example, (B) is the figure which shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in an Example. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another example. It is a figure which shows an example of the circuit structure which arrange | positioned the voltage output part, the voltage raising part, and the detection circuit part on the same board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which arrange | positions a voltage raising part and a detection circuit part on the same board | substrate, and arrange | positions a voltage output part in another board | substrate (sensor board | substrate). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage output unit and a voltage raising unit are disposed on the same substrate, and a detection circuit unit is disposed on another substrate (for example, a main control substrate). The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected the several sensor in parallel to the voltage output part. FIG. 7 is a view schematically showing a state in which integration is achieved only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud in the first control unit MCG. It is a figure which shows the partial area | region in this base substrate about the base substrate of the main control substrate concerning a modification. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the acquisition principle of the operation information in the opening window vicinity. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. The figure which shows typically the relationship between the special operation receiving part when the pachinko machine 1 is seen by a plain view, and the various presentation members arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps with this special operation receiving part by a plain view. is there. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st operation control mode to a display part, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd operation control mode to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a flow chart which shows the example of control about detection information analysis processing of a physical object performed within perimeter control part regular processing. (A) is a time chart showing control when generation reception occurs in a plurality of operation parts, and (b) shows a state of generation of production operation when generation reception is respectively generated in a plurality of operation parts FIG. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of presentation using the special operation reception part. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of presentation using the special operation reception part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of presentation using the special operation reception part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of presentation using the special operation reception part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special motorized prize control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting opening passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 2nd starting opening passage processing (step S5234). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol process processing (Step S5238). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol normal processing (Step S5280). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about big hit judging processing (Step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (Step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol change processing (Step S5283). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop processing (Step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a common motorized prize control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about gate part passage processing (step S5402). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about usual symbol normal processing (Step S5403). It is a figure showing judgment table T1 of a production pattern (variation production) referred to by the above-mentioned production symbol fluctuation start processing when it is in a normal gaming state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the processing procedure about a lottery (notice lottery performed in a production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process) regarding a preliminary announcement effect which appears within the execution period (pattern fluctuation time) of a production pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of timer notice determination table T2 referred when the said fluctuation | variation (due | hold by which it is digested) is not the object of timer pre-reading effect in 2nd game state (2nd timer notice lottery). (A) is a figure showing an example of the 1st mission effect determination table T3a (1st mission effect lottery) referred when a notice side timer effect is performed in a normal game state, and (b) is a normal game It is a figure which shows an example of 2nd mission presentation determination table T3b (2nd mission presentation lottery) referred when when advance | attraction side timer presentation is not performed in a state. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification side timer type determination table T4 referred in the notification side timer type lottery (step S5505). The reach type and the processing status (when the decision to execute the mission effect (to make the conversation announcement appear) is made and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation announcement to appear) are not made It is a figure which compares and shows the appearance upper limit number of the timer object candidate production defined according to the 5th processing status and the 6th processing status which are mentioned below etc. besides the 1st-4th processing status. Step S5508 in the first processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5507) is made. It is a figure showing an example of table T5a referred in processing of a. Step S5523 in the second processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5507) It is a figure showing an example of table T5b referred in processing of a. Step S5533 in the third processing state where the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5532) is made. It is a figure showing an example of table T5c referred in processing of a. Step S5543 in the fourth processing state in which the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision to not execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5532) is made. It is a figure showing an example of table T5d referred in processing of a. In the first processing situation, which is a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506) and determination to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5507), the process of step S5508 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 a-1 referred when it is decided to make notice number into 1 as a result of performing (step S5509). In the second processing situation, which is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5507), the process of step S5523 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6b-1 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing (step S5524). The processing of step S5543 in the fourth processing situation, which is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6d-2 referred when it is decided to make notice number into 2 as a result of performing (step S5544). This is equivalent to Character Reach in the second processing situation where it is a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506) and it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not to be executed) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the change number to be selected is selected. This is equivalent to SP reach in the second processing situation where it is a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506) and it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not to be executed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the change number to be selected is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of table T7a referred by the 1st timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512). It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b referred by the 2nd timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). In the fifth processing situation where it is determined that the advance effect timer effect is not performed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display conversation advance is displayed) is determined (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5e referred in the process of step S5553. In the sixth processing state where it is determined that the advance presentation side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display conversation announcement) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5 f referred in the process of step S5563. In the fifth processing situation in which it is determined that the advance effect timer effect is not performed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display conversation advance is displayed) (YES in step S5552), step S5553. It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 e-1 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing process of (step S5554). In the fifth processing situation in which it is determined that the advance effect timer effect is not performed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display conversation advance is displayed) (YES in step S5552), step S5553. It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 e-2 referred to when it is decided to make notice number into 2 as a result of performing processing of (step S5554). In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined that the advance announcement timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display the conversation advance announcement) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6f-1 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing process of (step S5564). In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined that the advance announcement timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display the conversation advance announcement) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 f-2 referred when it is decided to make notice number into 2 as a result of performing process of (step S5564). In (a), hold information (first special symbol) in a state where variable display is being executed and three hold information (all first special symbols) in a state where variable display is not executed are stored. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7a referred within the 1st special figure pre-reading processing, when the new winning a prize (1st special symbol) occurs in a state. In addition, in (b), holding information (first special symbol) in the state where variable display is being executed and two holding information (in the first special symbol) in which variable display is not being executed are stored. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7b referred within the 1st special figure pre-reading processing, when a new winning a prize (1st special symbol) occurs in the state which is. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the example about table T8a-1 and table T8a-2 referred when deciding the execution mode of timer pre-reading effect in the situation where pre-reading fluctuation possible number is 4 . (A), (b) is a figure which shows the example about Table T8 b-1 and Table T8 b-2 referred when determining the execution mode of timer pre-reading effect in the situation where the pre-reading changeable number is 3 . It is usually referred to when there is nothing to make the jackpot symbol appear among the pending information in the state where the variable display is being executed and the pending information (for example, the hold 1 to the hold 3) in which the variable display is in the unexecuted state It is a figure showing time reserve change table T9a. It is referred when there is something to make a big hit symbol appear among the pending information which is in the state that the variable display is under execution and the pending information (for example, the hold 1 to the hold 3) in which the variable display is not in the state It is a figure showing time reserve change table T9b. It is a figure which shows an example of the process sequence about the process performed in order to implement | achieve an unusual presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. (A) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer object exclusion production performed. (B) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing state in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer object exclusion production performed. This is a single timer mode (YES in step S506), and a timer object is sent out in the second processing situation in which determination to not execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S507) is made. It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of production. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination processing about whether a timer object advance effect is generated, and also at which timing a timer object advance effect is generated. When performing timer object advance presentation effect in any one timing of timing Ta1 to Ta3, it is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination processing about what kind of production | presentation aspect generated at this timing is used. When performing timer object advance presentation effect in any two timings of timing Ta1 to Ta3, it is a figure showing the example about the contents of judgment processing about what kind of production mode made at those timings. When performing timer object advance presentation effect at all timings of timing Ta1 to Ta3, it is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination processing about what kind of production | presentation aspect generated at those timings. The number of notices is 2 in the second processing situation in which it is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S507). It is determined that it is one (step S523), and that it is determined that the "announcement on conversation" is performed at the earlier timing and the "character A action 1" is performed at the later timing. It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in a second processing situation in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer object control control performed. (B) is a figure showing an example about a table referred in timer object control control when changing a rate which a control period generates according to classification of a production mode which appears as a production for timer object. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in a second processing situation in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer production which made the new timer performed the production object. (B) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in a second processing situation in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer production which made the new timer performed the production object. A timer mode presentation performed in a second processing situation in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S506) and determination is made not to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of. (A) to (c) are modes of a single timer (YES in step S506), and a determination to not execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S507) is made It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of count output cancellation control performed in the processing situation of 3. It is a flowchart which shows the example about the process sequence when implement | achieving count output cancellation control. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of timer plus production. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of timer stagnation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of the advancing presentation linked to timer object presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of the operation production in a timer. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of timer concealment production. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of timer presentation concretely. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the game state, the reproduction sound and the reproduction channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure showing relation with a game state, reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area | region for AUTO group channel control provided in peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a search process of the free channel at the time of performing sound control at the time of defining only one AUTO group in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete content of a vacant channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction | regeneration channel in sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a free channel search process in, when performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching the output of the sound (stopping the reproduction of the sound) when the channel is not available at the time of the output of the new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing to which a sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel where each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority of the sound effect in the presentation example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of volume change of a sound effect in the first half change of this embodiment, (A) shows an output timing of a rendering effect, (B) shows a volume change of each rendering effect. It is a figure showing an example of screen composition of an effect in a modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table of the reproduction | regeneration channel in sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of volume change of a sound effect in the second half of a change of a modification of this embodiment, (A) shows an output timing of a rendering effect, (B) shows a volume change of each rendering effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (sound volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by sound effects which shows volume (sound volume) control for every total reproduction | regeneration time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is the first half of a flow chart showing the procedure of volume control processing that performs sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a second half of the flowchart showing the procedure of volume control processing of performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect in the present embodiment. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the conditions (cancellation conditions) by which alerting | reporting is complete | finished besides the alerting | reporting content, alerting | reporting mode, alerting | reporting time according to the kind of alerting | reporting sound illustrated in FIG. (A) shows an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced Is a figure. (B) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about a process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alarm | sound belonging to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled, when the notification sound which belongs to 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated It is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (C) is a figure showing an example of processing when output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced It is. (D) is a figure which shows the example about a process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alarm | sound belonging to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled, while the alarm | sound of 1 which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as a mode which reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure which illustrates separately about the information state of the said pachinko machine 1 about the contents of the information progress under production processing. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about channel reservation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process concerning the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction | limiting content defined separately of a channel restriction | limiting level. It is a figure which shows the other example about the restriction | limiting content defined separately of a channel restriction | limiting level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when channel special release processing is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when operation sound output processing under control is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel when processing related to channel assignment cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the assignment status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the jackpot determination, and the state on the movable decorative body side It is a time chart which shows. The allocation situation of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in processing other than the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment, the movable state It is a time chart which shows those examples about the condition by the side of a decoration. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the assignment situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable ornaments at a specific timing in a period in which symbol variation is performed, and the condition on the movable ornaments side. . In the time chart showing an example of the assignment situation of each channel when the movable body abnormality occurs respectively in a plurality of movable ornaments at two different timings in the period in which the symbol variation is performed, and the condition on the movable ornaments side is there. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of control in order to realize automatic plural operation operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example about the display content when operation is performed in multiple times. It is a time chart which shows the example about the contents of control in order to realize automatic plural operation operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of a presentation using the automatic several times operation function (automatic consecutive hit function). It is a time chart which shows the example of a presentation using the automatic several times operation function (automatic consecutive hit function). It is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right side view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a selection table of a production pattern in production mode which can perform a blowout production, (A) It shows an example of a selection table which chooses existence of a blowout preparation shift production according to classification of a fluctuation pattern. ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of scribble effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the extraction operation of the sword decoration body in case an aura member is provided in the sword part (sword part) itself, (A) a state of a sword, (B) a first state of a sword, (C) a second Indicates the cutting state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation | movement of an aura member. It is a state transition figure explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body in case an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) a knapsack state, (B) the 1st gutter state, and (C) the 2nd gutter state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation | movement of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a scout effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of a sword ornament, and the operation effective period concerning operation means. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production | presentation transition diagram of the scout effect of the modification 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of the sword decorative body of modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; FIG. 18 is an example of a transition diagram of scribbling effect according to modification 2; It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in princess reach production, and the operation transition of a sword decoration body. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration body used for a false rendition effect. It is a figure which shows the example transition of production | presentation of the pseudo-series effect common to all the production | presentation patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of presentation of whether the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body is provided while the pseudo reunion (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of transition of production | presentation (fall production of specific decoration member SDY (a jade object)) after operation of the sword decoration body in the pseudo ream common to all production patterns (re-variation). FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a presentation transition used as the feature of a false revival sword LV1 presentation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of presentation pattern which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo-series effect, and shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo-series effect, showing a false sword LV1 weak effect pattern (false sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) in the pseudo-series effect, and shows a simulated resurrected sword LV1 production pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during reach production by lottery with the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of the 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during reach production by lottery with the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of the 1st suggestion pattern is performed. As in the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during the reach effect, in the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Even though the second suggestion pattern has been performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the step decoration is temporarily activated without the sword decoration becoming effective, and the operation button becomes effective once, and then the sword decoration becomes effective. It is a figure showing about the indication production before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows a 1st presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 1st presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 2nd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows a 3rd presentation mode regarding a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related presentation. It is a figure explaining the example about the production when the "specific operation relation production" is set up as a production object of timer production. It is a time chart explaining an example of the contents of an effect for every type about production when a plurality of types (prompt effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a omen effect. It is a figure which shows those example of presentation about the contents of a production when a omen production which is not specific operation related production is performed, and the contents of a production when a omen effect as a specific operation related performance is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the contents of an effect when specific operation related rendition is performed as a omen effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the button image BTG is displayed in the aspect (specific presentation aspect) to which the princess character was added. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode occurs on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode occurs on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation when displaying sword decoration image SYG in a special aspect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of presentation when the first precursor production is performed. It is a time chart which shows the processing content at the time of operating a movable ornament when specific conditions are satisfied. It is a time chart which shows the modification to the example shown in FIG. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when timing tm1 to which a new design variation is started in the situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state comes. It is a time chart which shows processing contents when timing tm11 when a special effect pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the processing until the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the original position. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in a series of operation check periods. (A) is a time chart which shows abnormality determination timing of the operation button in other than an arbitrary operation confirmation period, (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in an arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the sword decorative body in the operation reception period, (B) is a time chart which shows the relation between the operation state of the sword decorative body and the abnormality detection other than the operation reception period And (C) is a time chart which shows the relation between the operation state of the sword decorative body and the abnormality detection in the operation reception period. (A) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of an operation button, (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the movable decoration provided in the game board. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the button projection effect at the normal time, (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the button projection effect at the abnormal occurrence . (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the button normal effect production at the time of normal, (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the button normal effect production at the time of abnormality occurrence . (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button and the notification mode at the time of abnormality occurrence in the operation reception period, and (B) is the operation button at the time of abnormality occurrence in the automatic operation confirmation period It is a time chart which shows the relation between an operation state and a notice mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the production | presentation at the time of abnormality generation | occurrence | production of a movable decorative body. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button in the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the operation reception period It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button at the time of abnormality occurrence in the non-time-short state, (B) is the operation button cover and the operation button at the time of the abnormality occurrence in the time-short state It is a time chart which shows an operation state.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a quadrangle in which the external shape of the front view extends vertically and which has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which penetrates back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the front lower right corner below the side 111 and operable by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is attached to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game unit being attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and the dish unit 320 which are attached to the lower front on the lower side and the dish unit 320 It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the presentation operation unit 400 capable of presenting participatory effects. A door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530 And a door frame top unit 570 attached to a front upper portion above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 in a front view. 4, A lock unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped character attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player -Like payout unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 openably and closably And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950 and a gaming ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward An upper full-ball path unit 850 which causes the game balls to be released from either the normal outlet 850d or the full tank outlet 850e according to the storage state of the gaming balls in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320 and the payout unit A normal guiding path 861 and a full guiding path 861 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the gaming ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 in a front view left side of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and the lower portion for bass inside A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls are housed in the inside And a dispensing control board box 950, There.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launcher 680. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a are received by the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a disassembled (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same surface. It is done.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is mounted on the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached at a position from the left to right center of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 And a flat right sliding member 82 mounted at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. , Equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached to the inside of the engagement notch 11. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is equipped with the mounting step part 12 which was depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a front view left end. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed in the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower lengths of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the lower frame member 20 are equal to those of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engagement notch 21 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 which is recessed rearward from the front surface of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded shape of a metal such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward between the position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the rear end It has the convex recessed parts 31 and 41, and the protrusion parts 32 and 42 which bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recessed parts 31 and 41, and the inside is formed in the cavity. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the projecting portions 32 and 42, an upper left connecting member 85A, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left slide member 81 and the right slide member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the main frame 4 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
The lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is, as shown in FIG. 16, a band-plate shaped lock main body 66a having a predetermined width on the left and right and extending back and forth, and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending diagonally forward to the left after extending from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and an attachment hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member It extends forward so as to be in contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a main frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main frame upper upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view by rotating the lock main body 66a in the direction in which the front end moves to the left by the operation of the operation portion 66b. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontally extending flat horizontal portion 71 and the horizontal portion 71. A flat plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 are vertically penetrated, and only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 of a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape whose left side is a base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached at a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 to the left. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is inserted into the main frame lower lower hinge member (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, whereby the outer frame lower upper hinge pin 70 is inserted. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 matches the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. Specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game frame 4 from rolling to the rear side, the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 from the front and rear both sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided separately in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are respectively fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the projecting portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. As a result, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. Ru.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. Fig.17 (a) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 The lock main body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip end portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the supporting mechanism of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a The right side face of the lock body 66 is in close proximity to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side face of the front end of the lock main body 66a and the right hanging In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally offset and opposed It is in the state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. There is. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the slope of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and abuts on the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force A component force F1 (a normal direction of an arc of a front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arc shaped front end face, a body frame upper hinge pin 622 and a bearing groove 63 The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment that the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 rotates in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right does not work, and the hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is one of the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal pivotally supported state or a state where the action force of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  Note that even if the shape of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the forward extension portion 62. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, and therefore the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper side of the main frame in the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63 Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 pivots around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is moved by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 is pivoted so that the front end of the arm moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can rotate at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upright wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraud from being conducted through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from invading the rear side of the main body frame 4, and cheating is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the gaming ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Because the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 Between the game ball and the game ball can be reduced.

  Therefore, by the game ball being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged or the main frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross section taken along the line C-C in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape with the outline of the front view extending vertically and the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the dish unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left of the 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side Door frame top attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  Although details will be described later, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back in a rectangular shape (square shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view are hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; A door frame 3 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and a main body frame 4 and an outer frame 2 An open / close cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending gaming balls to the ball launcher 680, and a ball attached to the lower surface of the door frame base 110 And a fall cover unit 270 for receiving the game balls which have been fired by the launch device 680 and have not reached the game area 5a and discharged to the lower tray 322.

  The details of the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described later, but the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player turning the rotatable handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with an extra strength.

  The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for extracting the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a cash obtained by subtracting a game ball loaned from a ball lending machine or a return button 329 for returning a prepaid card, a cash inserted into the ball lending machine And a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the number of remaining prepaid cards and the like, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332, which allow reception of the player's operation at the time of presentation, and a lower tray Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player It can be done. Although this effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, a door frame side effect capable of displaying the effect image, which is disposed so as to be visible from the player side in the operation button 410 and the large operation button 410 operable by the player And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the right outside of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes to the front more largely than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both right and left sides. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can emit and decorate the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the left and right sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the front center, and the top middle decoration member 576 A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in a front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 300 is attached to the front lower corner, and the plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 which has a rectangular shape whose front view outline extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 are projected forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640, and a front face of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and is attached to the cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 for closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 for covering a lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to project forward through the door frame base 110. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a rear cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending display portion 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) And a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the upper speakers 573 and the like and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the penetration opening 111 formed in the substantially rectangular shape which the inner peripheral shape in the plain view extended up and down. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 110 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 110 vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front view, and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 112, and the through hole 111. The cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is attached is recessed toward the front from the rear surface in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting portion 113 penetrates back and forth The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114, the cylinder insertion hole 114, and the handle mounting surface 112 in a front view on the left side, and penetrates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 forward. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, The lower plate passage port 116 and the front side of the door frame base 110 are penetrated forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the vicinity of the left end, and the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270 is faced forward A recess for the plate 117, a recess from the rear to the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, a glass unit attachment portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and left and right on the door frame base 110 It has the speaker insertion port 119 which penetrates back and forth in the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1 b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110, thereby enhancing the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a laterally extending middle reinforcement attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side in a front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in the front surface on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 It has a sheet metal 134 and a locking / locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame wedge 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending a metal sheet. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 which are bent in the front-rear direction, The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the portion, and the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire and a screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1 c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame upper hinge member 140 is a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141 a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrates the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 Between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 And a lock spring 144 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of projecting pieces 141a although not shown, and the shape of the side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, mounting pieces connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper projecting piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the site | part which protrudes below rather than the lower side piece 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

  The wedge member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. The upper end is in contact with the wedge member 143, and the lower end is in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141 a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the wedge member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By coming into contact with the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 to open the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved entirely downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it down. Can. Thereby, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is obtained. , And can be rotatably supported relative to the body frame 4.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 described later. It is coaxially supported with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a good state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1 d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket And a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the flat extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and the overall shape of the side view Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) of the lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The lower end of the lower door frame hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Support.

[3-1 e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side in a front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height at a position lower than the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through opening 111 A door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height at the lower position of the frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage 117 And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161 a and 162 a capable of emitting light forward on the front surface. The LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161 a and 162 a provided on the front surface By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be lighted and decorated.

[3-1 f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit attachment member 170 has a disk-like base 171 rotatably mounted about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a bar-like projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion outside the glass unit attachment portion 118 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 in the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  By setting the glass unit attachment member 170 to rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is more outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In the state of being positioned, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 is glass The rear side of the mounting piece 191 a of the unit 190 abuts against the rear side of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 projects from the disk-like base 171 rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located in the projection 172 . From this, in the state where the glass unit attachment member 170 can freely rotate, the protrusion 172 is stabilized in the state of protruding downward from the base 171. And, in the glass unit attachment member 170, since the projection 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171, the glass unit attachment Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the projection 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the projection 172 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 from the rear end of the cylindrical cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181. A plurality of annular flanges 182 extending, and a plurality of protruding into the cylindrical portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and disposed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, the three protruding ridges 183 are provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. The three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. The axis 181 is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1 h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 is for closing the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-like glass frame 191 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 118 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110, and the inside of the glass frame 191 closed. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 26 etc.).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be in contact with the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated to make the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 a mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110.

[3-1 i. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The crime prevention cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 200 is disposed with a flat main body portion 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection piece 202 which protrudes backwards short along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 201, and is separated left and right And a pair of locking pieces 203 that project forward relative to the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward more than the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer periphery of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear projection 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the gaming ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the gaming ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not abut the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and the inside of the gaming area 5a There is no impediment to hitting the game ball into.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the crime prevention cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191). The removed rear projection 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. In addition, the security cover 200 has a state in which the rear projection 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward more than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1 j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending in the front and rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and locking operation of a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmitting member 212 to be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of 700 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

  The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. And a pair of notched portions 212a. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (a key inserted into the key hole 211 a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

  The cylinder mounting plate metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a rectangular plate-like front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend in a flat plate shape rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in the form of a flat plate in the direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right in front view is of the reinforcing unit 130 It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  In the open / close cylinder unit 210 assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are accommodated in a box-like cylinder mounting portion 113 which is inserted into the housing 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35 (a) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 34 (b). Fig.39 (a) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present a rendering image to the player It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 which the player can press and operate, and the outer periphery of the operation button 410 surrounds the operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height in the vertical direction of the pan unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 is formed on the front side of the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 and the outer periphery of the button lens 411, which are formed in a curved surface (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to pass light.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface having no unevenness on the surface side. The button lens 411 is extended in a predetermined length to the center side (inner side) in a state of being recessed in a W shape in cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and The first button decorative portion 411a and an outer circumferential side of the first button decorative portion 411a are recessed in a circular arc shape in cross section and extend on an axis toward the central side and in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction And a plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b provided.

  The first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state to the operation button 410 as shown, and a group of both right and left sides is a group of upper and lower sides It extends longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decorative portions 411 b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three by three on each of the left and right sides. The second button decorative portion 411 b is formed to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect that light is refracted by the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the portions of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration parts 411 b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic gloss on the surface.

  The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer periphery of the main body 413a, and a plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape along the outer periphery of the body and arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction; A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d projecting in the shape of a band plate to the rear and arranged in the circumferential direction and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outer side than the main body portion 413a and having a predetermined length along the outer periphery And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and cylindrically extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer periphery of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension portion 413 f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413 b. The four guide bosses 413c are disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners in the upper, lower, left, and right directions with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. The four guide bosses 413 c are respectively slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be disposed two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These three detection pieces 413 d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided three each on the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the region of the base opening 413 e in the button base 413, parts of the main body 413 a and the inner extension 413 f are recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension portion 413 f which is narrowed inward substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side The display screen of can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 is an operation button spring 438 in which four guide bosses 413 c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 and are inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431. Is biased forward by the Since the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 is in contact with the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, the further movement to the front is restricted. The rear end is moved backward until it abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against it. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the assembled state of the rendering operation unit 400 The gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made less visible to the player by the portion 411a.

  Furthermore, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is operated by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion visible in the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button of the base unit 430.

  Further, in a state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in the state where it projected backward. Thus, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 42 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is a button The inside of the base 413 can be prevented from leaking inward, and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower area Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration substrate unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being light emitting decorated other than the light emitting decoration target part, and the light emitting decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4 b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in an outer shape that matches the front end side of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a, and a frame main body 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a. There is.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and which penetrates back and forth, and which penetrates back and forth on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a plurality of (six) peripheral opening portions 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the frame, and notches 416c cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening portion 416a And. The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be in contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416 b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416 a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch portion 416 c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  In addition, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylindrical portion 416d, when the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (rendering operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attaching portions 416e and the notch portion 416c are attached to the effect operating unit attaching portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metal on the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A shiny plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes, from the rear side, outer peripheral openings 416 b formed three on each side of the frame main body 416. The frame side lens 417 is formed to have a smooth surface without irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 can not be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout 416 c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 is formed to be smooth on the front side. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 can not be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second outer LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the light emitting decoration is possible by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them. .

[3-4 c. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413. And, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 422 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 422 a And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 423 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 423 a And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has a weight 424a eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Moreover, in the state assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is formed between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 causes only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light and decorate by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. It is possible to emit and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from each of the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, by rotating the weight 424 a of the vibration motor 424, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration to vibrate the entire rendering operation unit 400.

[3-4 f. Operation effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A part of the operation button is cut away to hide it by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player is operated. The player can be made to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 and the player can be entertained.

  The rendering operation unit 400 is formed to have a height substantially equal to the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the full width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the gaming area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. In the effect operation unit 400, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 serving as the bottom surface in a state attached to the dish unit 320 is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As attached. Thus, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the dish unit 320 (rendering operation unit 400) The central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5. Therefore, when the player drops his eyes from the game area 5a to the rendering operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 or the like in the operation button 410 can be viewed in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416.

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the central opening 416 a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 to the center side (central axis line CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 which is bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the outlined arrows in FIG. The part away from the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the effects of operation.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper portion is dished so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Because it is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration is generated at the most distant part from the attached portion The whole of the rendering operation unit 400 can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the rendering operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the player is pressing the operation button 410. The strong vibration can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the bottom surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck down, the frame is held between the abutment of the lower surface of the leg portion 442a with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by bending downward the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the mounting of the tray unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the part 326a and the like, and damage to the rendering operation unit 400 and the like can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is presented when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400 is presented to the player. Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side is increased by making the breakage difficult. It can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, it is flat. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even if it is strongly hit, making it difficult to break.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the in-operation button decorative member 432 are formed of transparent members, as shown in FIG. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the first button inner decoration 432f, and the second button inner decoration 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side Can be viewed from In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the rendering operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration of the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to view the rear at a portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner circumferential surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation member inner decoration member 432 There is a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button in-operation decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the depressible operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 is seen. While being able to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, in the rendering operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the in-operation button decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411 a, the second button decoration portion 411 b and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. A unit base 431 and a decoration board unit 420, etc., which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the unit, are formed so as to be invisible to the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden and concealed It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the entire rendering operation unit 400.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decorative member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, the concavo-convex line of the first button decorative part 411a and the concavo-convex line of the second in-button decorative part 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decorative portion 411a and The second button inner decoration portion 432 g can show the player a geometrical pattern with a deep three-dimensional feel, and can enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, the unevenness of the first button decorative portion 411a occurs when the player's eyes move. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g changes, it is possible to show the player a moving decoration, and the player can be entertained.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 allows the player to have a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located in the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412) and behind the in-operation button decoration member 432, the operation button left inward decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inward decoration substrate 434, the operation button The upper inner decorative substrate 435 and the lower operating button inner decorative substrate 436 are disposed, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the upper and lower decorative substrates 435 emit light, thereby emitting the inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 It can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are as shown in FIG. 38, As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the light is transmitted from the light to the outside of the main portion 413a because it is disposed inside the cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The light emission decoration can be performed well only in the operation button 410.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LEDs 423a of the first LED 422a and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 are lighted by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. Can. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. A second LED 423 b of 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, a plurality of frame top lens decoration substrates 437 in the base unit 430 are disposed behind the frame top lenses 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrates 437 The frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the LED of From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, the flat light shielding wall portion 431 c protrudes forward to the rear lower end of the frame top lens 418 The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably decorated by light emission.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame upper left side decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 (door frame left side decoration substrate 160) above the plate unit 320 It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 at 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front, and a translucent unit disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit mounted on the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and projecting like a cylindrical frame to the front and extending vertically It is attached to the lower part of the front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the decorative base 534 and the left unit decorative lens member, and it is on the left unit. To cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit lower decoration base 535 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decoration base 534 A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened, and has a plurality of openings 531 a penetrating in the front and rear directions on the front surface. The plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically as shown. The left unit base 531 includes the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face the front. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting upright wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. The left reflection upright wall portion 538 has a flat surface shape, and an inner side surface facing the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. In addition to providing the inner side surface of the left reflection upright wall portion 538 itself from a material for reflection such as metal or resin, the reflection surface may also be provided by attaching a reflection seal to the inner side surface. It is possible. And although mentioned later, this left reflective standing wall part 538 is formed of the left unit base 531, and serves as a part which bears a part (left part) of the reflective standing wall part 33 mentioned above.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided up and down into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a square lens 532a in a front view, which corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square in a front view, which corresponds to a square opening 531a. And a lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be emitted forward in a point-like manner by the circular lens portion 532a. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes: a central diffuse reflection portion 532c which is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface; and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c at the front surface , The input lens portion 532e bulging backward in the form of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusive reflection portion 532c), and as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e as a whole on the outside of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface And a front reflector 532 f inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front surface diffusing lens portion 532d, the groove portion is concaved in a circular arc shape to the rear in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forwardly It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflection portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed into a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed rearwardly. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center is increased. Further, the front reflection portion 532 f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The circumferentially dividing radially extending lines coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532 d.

  In the square lens portion 532b, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens portion 532b, light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens portion 532e into the rectangular lens portion 532b. Since this input lens portion 532 e is bulging back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161 a and 162 a is refracted so as to advance in parallel in the forward direction. Substantially all can be directed to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffusive reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffusive reflector 532c. In the square lens portion 532b, and travels from the center side to the outer side along the front surface. The light reflected by the central diffusive reflector 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffusive reflector 532c) over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens 532b.

  When light reflected inside the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection portion 532f, the front reflection portion 532f faces the front Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflection portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b becomes thinner as it goes away from the center (See Figure 50). As a result, light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532 f is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 532 b through the front diffusion lens portion 532 d. At this time, since the front surface diffusion lens portion 532 d is formed to have a wave-like cross section, it can diffuse light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532 f in various directions, and the square lens portion 532 b Light can be emitted to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  The square lens portion 532b is divided into a plurality of concentrically extending grooves by a plurality of radially extending grooves in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves bordering the dividing line. Of the circular arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has concentric stripes of light and shade. Light can be avoided, and more uniform light can be emitted forward. Thereby, the multi-faced decorative part in front of the square lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be lighted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the front of the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 And a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and which extends short in the front and back direction. In the multifaceted decorative part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular solid extending in the vertical direction, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular solid. It is formed in the same shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-sided decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the multi-sided decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faced decorative portion is moved forward from the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. Each of the lights is decorated by light emitted.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and is formed in a square tube shape extending in the front and rear direction. In the left unit upper decoration base 534, a portion constituting the lower surface in the outer periphery is inclined so as to protrude downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape which is opened upward in a front view. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves upward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534; A V-shaped portion whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 and a lower end of the upper V-shaped portion and an upper end of the lower V-shaped portion are connected And a linear portion.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at the upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line N-N in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line O-O in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is a box-shaped right unit base 551 mounted on the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in a front view and a front surface of the right unit base 551. Is mounted on the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 attached to the front of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and extends in the vertical and longitudinal directions A transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and being decorated, a right unit left decoration member A transparent flat right unit left cover mounted on the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side and a right unit left diffusion lens from a front view center on a front surface of the right unit base 551 in front view right of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. A transparent flat light unit right diffusion lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions and a right unit side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are decorated and decorated A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557; There is.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and extends vertically and longitudinally with the front and right opened. A box-shaped non-light transmitting right unit left light shielding member 559 and a light shielding attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 And a right unit right light shielding member 560 in the form of a flat plate.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 mounted on the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 mounted on the front side of 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to penetrate the right unit base 551 up and down, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay substrate 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a rectangular shape which is elongated in the vertical direction in a front view, extends in a short and short rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape closed near the center in the longitudinal direction. It is done. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting upright wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. The right side reflective upright wall portion 568 has a flat surface shape, and an inner side surface provided to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner side surface of the left reflection upright wall portion 538, in addition to providing the inner side surface of the right reflection upright wall portion 568 itself from a material for reflection such as metal or resin, the reflection surface reflects the inner side surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for the like. And although mentioned later, this right side reflective standing wall part 568 is formed of the right unit base 551, and serves as a part which bears a part (right side part) of the reflective standing wall part 33 mentioned above.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending band plate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction at the front in the left-right direction with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left from the center in the left-right direction at the front And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for emitting and decorating the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552 b is for emitting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552 c is for emitting and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Both front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided up and down into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes: a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction; and a rear wall portion 553b short in a plan view right short in plan view from the rear side of the main body portion 553a; The right unit left decorative member is notched in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left and formed in plural in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the left side of the main portion 553a in front view An accommodation recess 553d which is recessed so as to be able to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 553a in a front view And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the rectangular shape extending vertically is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes to the front It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the whole of the main body portion 553a moves with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move rightward in front view Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553 b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall 553b.

  The plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a portion thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emit the right unit decoration lens member 561 It can be decorated.

  The bottom of the accommodation recess 553 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553 e are projected rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 553 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion where the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. The input lens portions 553 e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side surface reflecting portions 553 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion It extends perpendicularly to the plane of the surface 553a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, with the mountain portion between the grooves facing the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553 e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and in the main portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves toward the right in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main portion 553a strikes the flat left surface in the main portion 553a. However, direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main portion 553a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in a front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (right side in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left through the main body portion 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side are left at the left surface of the right unit left light blocking member 559 The light reflected to the left and transmitted through the main body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, so that the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a emits light and decorates with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided into a plurality of radially extending grooves, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated to the outside (left) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. It is possible to irradiate the left with more uniform light. Thus, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553 d on the left surface of the main body portion 553 a can emit and decorate substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side in the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. The side portion can be decorated by the side reflection portion 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decoration member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a rear wall short in a plan view left from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. A portion 556b and a plurality of notches 556c which are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction A front view of the main body portion 556a, an accommodation concave portion 556d recessed so as to be able to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a A plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are disposed in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view, with the upper corner of the front end side of the rectangular shape extending up and down being beveled in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side going upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main body portion 553a. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the whole of the main body portion 556a moves with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the left in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556 a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556 b is assembled with the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 556 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening which is penetrated back and forth by the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 The inner LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c can favorably emit and decorate the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The bottom surface of the accommodation recess 556 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decoration member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556 e project rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 556 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. These input lens portions 556 e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552 b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

  A plurality of (six) side reflectors 556 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main portion 556a in each groove, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 556e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e such that a mountain portion between the groove and the groove is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e is formed in the main portion 556a. It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main portion 556a strikes the flat right surface in the main portion 556a. However, direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the left side Since the light reflected toward and transmitted through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 mounted on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by the radially extending plural lines, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form concentric circular arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. Can be emitted to the right with more uniform light. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556 d on the right surface of the main body portion 556 a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body portion 556a (the side on which the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decoration member 557 Parts can be decorated by the side reflectors 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations provided to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side unit of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front and right sides are open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 has a flat main body 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction, a rear wall 559b short in a plan view right from the rear side of the main body 559a, and a rear A plurality of notches 559c which are cut in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the wall 559b to the left and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and extend from the right surface of the main body 559a to the right And a plurality of flat plate-like reinforcements 559 d extending from the wall 559 b to the front end of the main body 559 a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending rectangular is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upwardly directed toward the front It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and its outer shape is formed in substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The left end of the rear wall 559 b extends to the right more than the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 559 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c and 556 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emits the right unit decorative lens member 561. It can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in a pair at a height substantially the same as the width of the left and right, and three pairs of the reinforcing portions 559d are spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending square is notched like a C-chamfer and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines, and is formed in the substantially same shape as the main-body part 559a in the right unit left light-shielding member 559. As shown in FIG. The right unit right light shielding member 560, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. 55, and the main unit 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 The left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed in proximity to each other. Thus, the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . The light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration The light is irradiated to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-light transmitting members, and are emitted forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 respectively. Left light 552a, right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561, respectively. The light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559 d. The light can be prevented from interfering between the spaces by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 which is located, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be , Each can be decorated independently luminous. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide into plural (four) areas in the vertical direction and emit and decorate each of them independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed along the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and extends short back and forth. In the multifaceted decorative part 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are vertically arrayed on the front face of a rectangular solid extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular solid part. It is formed in the shape as it was set.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561 a and multi-faced decorative portions 561 b respectively divided into four spaces by three reinforcing portions 559 d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the part located forward, in the three parts from the top, the multifaceted decorative part 561b is disposed one by one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative part 561a disposed at the center in the vertical direction. Only the portion 561 b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated to emit light by the inner LED 552 c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape following the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects largely in the form of a plate to the front beyond the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly to the front from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the pan unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently separates the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on the left and right both sides which are protruded and the right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. Can be made to emit light.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right with the pachinko machine Can exert an effect like a partition. In this way, it is possible for the player playing a game with the pachinko machine 1 to feel as if playing in the private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without disturbing other players around. Can.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 largely protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, an island facility The pachinko machine 1 can be made visible in the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are lighted and decorated, the present from a distance, even if not located in front of The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens By making the members 561 and the like emit light and decorate in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify the staff in the game hall of the occurrence of the problem and make it possible to quickly respond to the problem. As a result, the interruption of the game by the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can feel frustrated and suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (c) is a door frame top unit as viewed from the back It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571 at the center of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the center of the through hole 111 above the through hole 111 A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached respectively to the fronts of the pair of side bases 572 A pair of openings 574a penetrating in the front and back at a front position of a pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having an open rear, and from a position closer to the center in the lateral direction than the pair of openings 574a A plurality of (three on the left and three on the left and three on the left and right sides) which extend in the longitudinal direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction and are separated vertically. A unit main body 271 having 574b and attached to the front of the center base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and a front of the pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close the pair of openings 574a And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal mounted on the rear side of the unit body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) respectively have internal spaces opened only toward the side on which the opening window is provided. In the inner space of the opening window so as to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window (the left outer periphery outer emitting unit 34a, the right outer periphery outer emitting unit 34b) and the inner periphery of the opening window An outer peripheral light detector 35 (a left outer peripheral light detector 35a and a right outer peripheral light detector 35b) for detecting light outside the outer periphery is provided.

  That is, although described later, according to such a structure, since the outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 and the outer peripheral light detecting unit 35 are disposed outside the outer periphery of the opening window, the opening as viewed from the front view Almost the entire area of the window can be made to function as a portion (operation receiving portion) to be operated by the player. In addition, the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 is not disposed in an open state, and is disposed in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided Thus, when detecting light by the outer peripheral light detection unit 35, it is possible to preferably exclude the effect light that may be a disturbance.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the lateral direction of the unit main body 271 and attached to the top middle decoration member 576 having translucency and the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front of the unit main body 271 and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 extending in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 from the vicinity and near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271; Top left decorative lens member 579 attached to the left and right sides respectively and covering the front surface of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front side, and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 The top middle left decoration member 581 and the top middle right decoration member 582 extend to near the center side end portion of

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both right and left side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and the LED is mounted on the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 at the portions facing the lateral outer end. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction A door with a pair of substrate bases 585 attached to each of the parts and a front face of the pair of substrate bases 585 with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271 Frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587, and door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 attached to the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit body 271 and the door frame top unit relay substrate 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271 And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of asperities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572 respectively. When assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely such that the front sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward in the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, such that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the square extending in the left and right direction bulges downward. In other words, the unit body 271 is formed in the shape of a front view in which a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction is cut away in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a square shape extending in the right and left directions, and a half of the entire width (length in the left-right direction) around the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the square It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid which protruded forward, and the quadrangle which protruded short for the front by making the front end side of the trapezoid into a long side. Therefore, in the unit body 271, a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 271 and the left and right ends of the front end of the portion protruding forward on both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface It is located more backward (is recessed).

  The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating in the front and rear directions at positions from the left and right direction both ends in the front surface to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit body 271 is a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a diagonally extending portion of the front side projecting in a trapezoidal shape in the front. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574 b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 obliquely forward to the vicinity of the opening 574 a. In addition, the plurality of slits 574 b are formed on the both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to be separated vertically by three each.

  Further, the unit body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is notched toward the front from the rear end in the lateral center on the upper surface and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end in the horizontal direction on the lower surface. And. The upper opening 574 c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574 d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit body 271 further includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decoration 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decoration member 576 extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper end of the left and right sides of the metapentagon in which the shape of the front view is bent so that the left and right direction central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward. It is formed in the shape which combined the substantially right-angled triangle which connected the front-end | tip of the edge and the lower end of the right and left of a side pentagon. The top middle decoration member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

  In the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, after the top middle decoration member 576, the front surface is inclined to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decoration member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making the LEDs emit light, it is possible to make the top middle decoration member 576 emit light and decorate.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that protrudes forward. When the side near both lateral ends of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side near the center is described as the central side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight from the end side toward the central side A straight portion 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in the form of a large radius arc so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a to the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction of the arc portion 578b is formed to be smaller toward the center. In the light guide member 578 assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. There is.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c having saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and a diffusion input portion 578d having a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. Is equipped.

  In the light guide member 578 assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction face the LED frame 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the LEDs 586a and 587a of the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident from the end portions in the left and right direction on the light guide member 578, the light is a straight portion 578a The light travels from the end to the front side sequentially by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. The top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of these members is illuminated and decorated.

  In the light guide member 578, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is incident from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thus, the portion located in front of the circular arc portion 578 b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 and the door frame top middle decoration substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to emit and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center of the front of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a each accommodating the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 579a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574 e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center of the front of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a each accommodating three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 580a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574 f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the LEDs 584 a and 587 a of the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top via the three light guiding members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a in the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the right opening 574a in the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is the top right It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583 a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 (see FIG. 59) ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located forward of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decoration portion 574f) in the unit body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front on the right side from the center of the unit main body 271 in the lateral direction (see FIG. 59) ). The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently of one another. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located forward of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 in which the plurality of slits 574 b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed so as to be substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and back and forth, a rear wall of a front view rectangular shape extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall The upper wall of a substantially right triangle with the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse and the lower side of the side wall with the lower wall The lower wall of the right triangle is formed in the shape of a triangular prism box in which the upper and lower oblique sides are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open part is closed by the unit body 271. In the substrate base 585, the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached such that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that a box-like open portion is closed from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center in the unit body 271 Be The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it goes to the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 with respect to the laterally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thereby, the front surface of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled in the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 586 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586. Thereby, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 causes the plurality of LEDs 586 a to emit light, thereby allowing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578 b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached on the rear side on the right of the left and right center in the unit body 271 Be The right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 in the door frame top, so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the horizontally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thus, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b right of the center of the unit body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 on the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side from the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes the plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, and thereby causes a portion near the middle middle decoration member 576 of the top right decoration lens member 580 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle middle decoration member 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially in left-right symmetry with each other by an opaque member. A light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of a plurality of LEDs 586 a and 587 a of a left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top and a plurality of right decorative substrates 587 in the door frame top arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574 b in the unit main body 271. I am divided. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guiding member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guiding member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration Luminescent decoration can be performed in a state where the respective decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is attached to the front of the center base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, a door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a door frame top right decoration substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and a door The connection between the frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is connected to the door main body relay substrate via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is covered by a relay substrate cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 turn to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes largely forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 disposed at the center, It is formed to extend from the both sides to the top left decoration portion 574e and the top right decoration portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 271. Thereby, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, a front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the rear of each of both left and right direction both ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are disposed. The speaker cover 575 is provided so as to face forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be made to be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is a door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580 The light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580, and the top left decoration lens member The entire front surface of the lens 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Operation effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is made smaller. Thereby, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible visible to the player (forward) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the large game board 5 of the game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through hole 111 (second effect operation unit 400A) And the front half of the lower half (the lower part of the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the front of the lower front decoration part 326c) is recessed to turn backward (dish unit The front surface of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned backward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 ing. As a result, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the front in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to be largely protruded forward, so that the rendering operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized for the player. It can be made to pay attention to the rendering operation unit 400 strongly.

  In the door frame 3, the rendering operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 is inclined so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Because the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 because it is attached in the state, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player loses his sight and effects operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly viewed, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be enhanced. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image is sufficiently facilitated. Maseru can be.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 has the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the entire height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, the operation of the operation button 410 requires a short distance of hand movement. It is possible to touch any part of the operation button 410, and "early pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can not only be pressed from the top like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also it can be operated left or right The operation can be performed well even from the front, and the operation using the operation button 410 can be more enjoyable by the operation button 410 having a good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. According to the state, when the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibration, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, and the player is surprised by the operation button The presentation using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) across the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the front center of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 below is not noticeable, it can be made easy to make the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine clearly recognize that it is clearly different, and the player's attention is strongly attracted It can be a high power pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 forms the lower plate 322 so as to wrap around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening portion 326 d opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 in the front surface of the plate unit 320 Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower plate opening portion 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear of the lower plate 322 turns to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts the left hand in the lower plate 322 or places the left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can also be recognized that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than the height by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the gaming balls of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray 322 from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 into the lower portion of the tray unit 320 or the like. The countersink holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front and rear direction, and are arranged on the right outside (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) of the lower plate opening 326d in front view. That is, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball extraction hole 322a, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326, the front end of the lower plate cover 340 Since the player is disposed behind the side, etc., the player can not see the lower ball supply port 323c and the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, since the lower countersink hole 322a is disposed below (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322, the lower frame ball opening 322a is opened. Then, the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a can not be seen from the player side, the flow of gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box is also I can not see it. In this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the payout device 830 in a state that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the upper plate 321 are full for the player are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the troublesomeness of passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower flat ball opening hole 322a at the front left position of the lower flat ball supply opening 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands upright on the right side of the lower flat ball opening 322a. Since the upper wall portion is bent obliquely so as to face the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is directly moved to the lower ball ball. The light can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be reflected to the right side wall and indirectly guided to the lower circular ball hole 322a. Thus, in the state where the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is a region on the lower plate 322 on the left side of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a. (The lower plate first area A1) can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 without showing the gaming balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes the lower plate opening portion 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward, between the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be output forward well, and the sound by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player places his hand on the lower plate 322 or approaches it, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. The player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrudes forward largely from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an operation effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing a game with this pachinko machine 1 can play a game in a private room It is possible to give an illusion of a feeling of being present, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation to other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can emit light and decorate the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 lined up Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can be informed of the presence of the pachinko machine even from a distance from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to players. It can be machine 1.

  In the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 A shape recessed so as to be turned backwards (A top middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 The front surfaces of the left and right sides of the 576 are formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be positioned rearward. As a result, only the decorative member 576 at the top of the door frame top unit 570 appears to be projected forward largely, so that the decorative member 576 can be made to be highlighted and highlighted to the player, The inner decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right direction ends are provided with the speaker 573, The entire front face of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper portion of the door frame 3, and a decoration distinctly different from conventional pachinko machines is provided It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. Because each of the left and right direction is largely projected forward, it is possible to show the player a decoration having a sense of unity in the upper and lower sides where the virtual line passing through the left and right direction center is noticeable, and by the refined decoration. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 causes the top middle decorative member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction to project forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the light emitting decoration of the effect operation unit 400 is performed, the light emission line extending vertically at the center in the left and right direction of the front face of the door frame 3 can be shown to the player, and the player's gaze is arranged at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a game board of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view disassembled and seen from back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit in an enlarged manner from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a, which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge array (not shown) at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front face of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. While the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the back surface of the back unit 3000, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the back surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open to accept the game balls driven into the game area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 always openable to receive the ball, a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball pass the gate unit 2003 In accordance with the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by the second game, it is possible to receive the game ball according to the result of the second lottery, and the first special game lottery by receiving the game ball to the first game opening 2002 or the second game machine 2004 A large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a start port unit. Lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the left side of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center product 2500 attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located outside the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005, In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1008 has a rear projection 202 protruding to the rear of the crime prevention cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  The front component 1000 also includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that project rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rails 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 to position between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is cut away from the lower end in the lower left corner in a front view. The notch portion 1011 corresponds to the notch portion 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to lower full ball path The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 of the unit 860 are adapted to face forward.

5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, FIG. 64 and FIG. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is provided with an out-concave portion 1111 which is recessed upward from the lower end at a portion which becomes the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Further, panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating in the front-rear direction And. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are disposed outside the game area 5 a and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1115 having a front side depressed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are not cut to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a, similarly to the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114, This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1121 in the front-rear direction And a through hole 1122 penetrating therethrough.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120 It becomes almost the same plane as the front. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1121 is formed in a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  The panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, from the front of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1123 which are extended and which can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned to each other.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 which engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed on the upper side of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends from the front of the holding step 1121 to the front. It projects toward the end and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so as not to protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface It extends a predetermined amount toward the center). The panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws 1124 and the engagement piece 1125.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position which is the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with the notch part 1127 which is notched upward from the lower end in a front view lower left corner. This notch portion 1127 is coincident with the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, these notch portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated and the lower full ball passage unit 860 is The front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 face forward.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front and rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is between the front component 1000 and the front 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1126 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above-described game panel 1100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, as viewed from the front together with the front component, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from the rear. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

  The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is substantially the same as that of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left and right direction in front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front and rear direction in the front view left side of the lower end and is opened downward and is vertically opened at the upper side of the cutout 1152 and the cutout 1152 of the same shape as the cutout 1011 of the front component 1000. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and back in which the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting backward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000 A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating at the front and back, at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel between itself and the front component 1000 1150 can be positioned.

  Furthermore, although the illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings which are penetrated back and forth for attaching the front unit 2000 like the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the above-mentioned game panel 1100. ing.

  When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5 a are guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1151 on the rear side, and are discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in the assembled state to the game board 5. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201.

5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520 and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as members having transparency so as to allow visual confirmation from the outside. There is. That is, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a surface inferior in fraud suppression performance particularly in the payout control substrate 951 in the payout control substrate box 950 and the main control substrate 1310 in the main control substrate box 1320 Since the mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to the below-mentioned fraud countermeasure.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the gaming status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by passing the gaming ball against the gate unit 2003. , A normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and drawing by the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery results, and the first special reservation consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 A number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004. A second special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, the first special lottery result or the second The special lottery result mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 when the result is "big hit" or the like.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling an effect to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially at the center. The gaming board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the gaming board 5. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side in a front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side in the front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view left side in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b of the back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen directed to the front. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the back box 3010 into the 3010 c, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and lock It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached from the front to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the front end protrudes forward more than the front face of the panel board 1110 and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving the game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept game balls at different positions, the gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game balls, and the game balls as gates Lottery by receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that can receive the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the part 2003 A large winning opening 2005 is provided, which allows the game ball to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed substantially immediately below the stop unit 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 as viewed from the front. The special winning opening 2005 is disposed between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005, and a start port unit. Lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the left side of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view A top 2300 and a frame-shaped center product 2500 attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 are provided.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 has a plurality of game balls at one time ( For example, four to six) can be extended to the left and right in an acceptable size, and can be opened and closed in accordance with the game state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in a circular arc along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which can always receive a game ball.

  The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the lower side unit 2200 in the gaming area 5a. With the side unit upper 2300 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf approaches the inner rail 1002, and the gaming ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is Can be guided to the center of the

  The center role 2500 is located slightly above the center of the front view slightly above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5 a, and is located on the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is attached. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes from the front the effect units and the like provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to. The center product 2500 has a gate unit 2003 and a second start port 2004.

  In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is in the frame It can not be invaded.

  The center character 2500 is capable of releasing the warp ball 2520 having the game ball in the game area 5a open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view and the game ball having entered the warp ball 2520 within the frame. It has a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left and right direction and then discharges it into the gaming area 5a. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately below the stage 2530. When the gaming ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, on the rear side of the back unit 3000, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and has a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010 a at the back surface of the back box 3010 And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 rotatably mounted around an axis extending leftward and rightward along the axis and housing the effect drive board.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decoration unit 3050 mounted at the front end in the back box 3010 from the vertical center on the left side in the front view and the back side below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A back lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in a front view in 3010, and a back top mounted from the center in the lateral direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 Movable effect unit 3400 and a back and forth movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inside of the frame in the rear view left side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b in the rear view.

  The opening 3010 a is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back unit 3000 appropriately uses the back down movable presentation unit 3100, the back up left movable presentation unit 3200, the back left movable presentation unit 3300, the back up inside movable presentation unit 3400, and the back down movable presentation unit 3500, etc. A light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like can be performed, and the player can be entertained also by various effects, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, so that the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 , The space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls in one minute continuously, that is, , The game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position, and the game balls are obstacle nails. By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  The gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when entering the left side in a front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, The area to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth and are discharged forward. When the gaming ball is released into the gaming area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since it is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from outside the center into the gaming area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005, etc.

  By the way, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 or the first There is a possibility that it can be accepted by the starting opening 2002 and the like. Then, when the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right strike), Downstream from that, the region where the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided will flow down.

  Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result is “normal hit”, the second starting opening 2004 is for a predetermined time ( For example, during 0.3 to 10 seconds, the game machine is opened and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004. Then, when a game ball is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result can not be started, so the normal lottery The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous regular lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", " A drawing of a special drawing result is generated which generates a middle hit, a small hit, a probability change, a time reduction, and the like. Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, “lost”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “5 There are 15R big hit, "per probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction) per hit", "probability change time per shot", "probability change time for short loss", etc.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball is received in the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of gaming balls are taken from the payout device 830 by the main control substrate 1310 and the payout substrate. Is dispensed onto the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball, many game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 becomes open state which can receive the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) The opening and closing pattern to be closed is repeated several times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of accepting gaming balls, or to the big winning opening 2005. If any of the predetermined number of (for example, 10) game ball acceptance conditions is satisfied, the open / close pattern (one open / close pattern is referred to as one round) for closing the game ball in an unacceptable closed state is predetermined Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, "5R big hit" for 5 rounds, and "15R big hit" for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps") or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Ru. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being put on hold. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that each symbol row is fluctuated and fluctuated in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbol rows in the symbol row are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols of the three symbol rows displayed in a stopped state become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "loss", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the drawing result of the special drawing is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)), and the time which suggests the special lottery result in game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates, The time until the finalized image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by gaming board side effect display device 1600, effect operation unit 400 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decoration bodies of center character 2500, various decoration bodies of back unit 3000, back bottom back movable effect unit 3100, back top left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400, the back-down front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment covers the window portion of the present embodiment, and the bulging part of the present invention corresponds to the operation button 400 in the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

  In addition, the decoration member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decoration in the present invention. The second button inner decoration 432g of the operation button inner decoration 432, the peripheral decoration 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decoration 478 respectively correspond to the second decoration of the present invention .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, each LED mounted on the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 and the sub screen decoration substrate In the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment corresponds to the rear side decoration means of the present invention, and the frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and A unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the rendering operation unit 400 (or the second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the front of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3 When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g of the operation button inner decoration 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A Such as the decoration in which the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc. overlapped, the decoration in which the first button decorative part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Because the player can be shown the decoration full of no sense of perspective with a sense of decoration, it is possible to attract the player's attention strongly It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  In addition, the decoration member 432 in the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). The player is operating (pressing) the button lens 411 to move because the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that the button lens 411 can be moved by the player's operation. Then, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) move closer to or further from each other. The first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub The first button decorative part 411a and the second in-button decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478) according to a change in the distance to the clean decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.). , Etc.) can be changed, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration) can be changed. The player can change the decoration (intersecting mode) with the member 478, etc.) by himself / herself, and can entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side of the operation member in the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), Since a space is to be formed between the second decorative body, the distance from the player to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the operating member in the operating button 432 when viewed from the player The distance to the inner decoration 432 g (or the peripheral decoration 472 a of the screen unit 470, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration 478, etc.) is largely different, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even when the player's eyes are moved, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The decorative member 432 in the operation button on the back side (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be favorably viewed through and the radial shape of the first button decoration portion 411a. The decoration of the player can direct the line of sight of the player to the center of the button lens 411, and passes through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The in-operation decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) The player's interest can be strongly directed to the side effect display device 460.

  In addition, since the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is provided in the operation button inner decoration member 432, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 Of the first button decoration 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration 432g of the operation button inner decoration 432 cross each other, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g And the second button inner decoration portion 432g can be used to make the pachinko machine 1 have high appeal for the player. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g The decoration can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the decorative member 432 in the line of sight or interest of the player by decoration, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed it can.

  Further, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are mounted on each LED (or sub screen decoration substrate 477). When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the light can be decorated by the light in the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the sub screen decoration member 476), and furthermore, the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light decoration. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the sub screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration. At this time, the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub screen decoration member 476) causes the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower portion. Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button inner decoration portion 432g, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button In the first button decoration 411a, the second button inner decoration is performed, while the light is decorated by direct light from the respective LEDs (or LEDs 477a) of the inner decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The light is adorned by indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub screen decoration member 476). Since the first button decoration 411a is weakly decorated while the second button inner decoration 432g (the sub screen decoration member 476) is strongly lighted and decorated, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, With each LED (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 lit, the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a Looking at the two-button inner decoration 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), it is possible to show the player a decoration with a more emphasized sense of appearance, and it is an appealing ability that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, since the decoration member 432 in the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is disposed in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the decoration member 432 in the button lens 411 or the operation button (or the door There is no need to secure a space for the movement of the button lens 411 in the region outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the in-operation decorative member 432 (or door frame) It is possible to expand the side second effect display device 460A) to the outside and make it as large as possible, and by increasing the size, the button lens 411 and the operation member in the operation button 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) 460A) can be highlighted. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 The decorativeness can be enhanced, the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, the player makes the button lens 411 flat when the player strikes the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed to the whole of the button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, damage to the button lens 411 during the game may interrupt the game, and it may be possible for some players to avoid frustration and decrease in interest and damage the button lens 411. By becoming difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the present pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 which allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 disposed in the main body frame 4 to be visible through the through hole 111 from the front, The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward at the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. The operating button 410 that can be viewed from the front through the operation button 410 that moves (advances and retracts) by the player operating in a circular shape of about 15 cm that is within the range of -30 cm and that is visible from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the operation button 410 are disposed in the frame Since the frame unit 415 to be framed is attached, in the conventional pachinko machine, the staging operation unit 400 (second Since the rendering operation unit 400A is visible, the player can recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal. Then, the frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the second button decoration having the translucent property to the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417 The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 provided with the portion 411b and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417. Inside the frame main body 416 that divides between the decorative portion 411b Since the cylinder portion 416d, and the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 that divides the second button decorative portion 411b from the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion Light from the first LED 422a, 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 or the button lens 411 due to the 413a and the inner extension portion 413f, and light from the second LED 422b, 423b makes the second button decorative portion 411b. It can be prevented from being illuminated, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be made to emit light and be decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be light-emittingly decorated, respectively, and a light-emitting effect with a good appearance can be performed. In addition, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed by appropriately combining light off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like with the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, the first LED 422a and 423a emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b and 423b emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are one operation button left outer decoration Since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided on the substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (the operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far as possible from the second button decoration part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is sufficiently It can be irradiated to the second button decoration part 411b in a diffused state . Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly emitted and decorated, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the interest of the player is strongly drawn. The player can be entertained, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 is moved along with the movement of the operation button 410. The wiring connected to the outer decoration substrate 423 on the operation button right side is not bent or extended, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, movement (operation) of the operation button 410, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b The light emission decoration can be enjoyed by the player without any problem, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided at the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 in the operation button in the rear and the door frame side effect display device 460 through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is the second button decoration portion 411b Can be decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. And by making 1st LED422a, 423a and 2nd LED422b, 423b emit light suitably, the transparent member in which the in-operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind As described above, since the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns as described above, the player's interest in the operation button 410 or The door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect or the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second The effect image etc. by the effect display device 460A) can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) having the second button decoration portion 411b at the outer edge, the player can operate the operation button 410 while the player participation type effect is being executed. By causing the player to operate, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Then, at the time of execution of the player participation type effect, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 may be lighted and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Thus, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player participation type effect and enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-light transmitting main portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that allow the first LED 422a, 423a to emit light and decorate, the second in the operation button 410 The portion on the central side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LED 422a, 423a, and the central portion of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened and disposed at the rear It can prevent that the decorative member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) are hard to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be lighted and decorated in a good state, and the in-operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect through the transparent button lens 411) The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect and the like sufficiently to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416 d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second side of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is decorated on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can completely separate the portion 411b from the portion 411b. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 in the inner cylindrical portion 416d, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a or the second LED 422b, 423b Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LED 422 a, 423 a illuminates the frame side lens 417, or the light from the second LED 422 b 423 illuminates the second button decoration 411 b There is nothing to do. Accordingly, the inner cylinder portion 416d can reliably block the light, and the pachinko machine 1 can be embodied which reliably exerts the above-described effects.

  Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), on the rear side of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely divided by the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not go behind the rear end of the main body portion 413a, it completely blocks the entry of light to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be lighted and decorated in a good state by the first LED 422a, 423a, and the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the rear through the transparent button lens 411 The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be viewed in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like sufficiently to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration in front of the region outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411) Since the part 411b is positioned, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is arranged from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 in the operation button (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The second button decoration part 411b can make the member on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (the back side) less visible and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is lighted and decorated by the first LED 422a, 423a, the in-operation button decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect for the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A are relatively darkened, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made less visible. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation member in the operation button 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, a frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b and the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) The side lenses 417 extend in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, light emission effects such as light rounds the outer edge of the operation button 410, and light emission such that light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 Since it is possible to show the player an effect or light emission effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored by various light emission effects. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 are driven into the game area 5a and the upper plate 321 used for the game is In addition to mounting, the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) is removably attached to the front and lower side of the upper tray 321, and a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) A remaining space of 326j is formed, and a portion corresponding to lower dish first region A1 in lower dish main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of mounting space 326j from that portion A portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower tray 322 capable of storing gaming balls. Therefore, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front, which makes the lower plate 322 inconspicuous and makes the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) relatively easy to be noticeable. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper tray and the lower tray were viewed side by side vertically in the conventional pachinko machine The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can attract the player's attention strongly it can.

  Further, at the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. The lower bowl cover 340, 340A for restricting the movement of the gaming ball prevents the gaming ball in the lower tray 322 from coming in contact with the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the gaming ball does not abut on the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the gaming ball does not damage the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  In addition, lower dish cover 340, 340A which restricts the movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of main body standing wall portion 325b and mounting space 326j in the lower dish second region A2 portion of lower dish main body 325 of lower dish 322. And the game ball can be prevented from invading (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or feeling unpleasant by intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j by the game ball being inserted into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game Can be suppressed.

  Also, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 region of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the gaming balls are supplied in the lower plate 322 and bounced in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player is required to lower the lower plate first area A1 side (lower plate opening portion The lower plate cover 340, 340A can restrict entry of a fingertip or the like into the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j when the hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), so that the finger tip And the like can be prevented from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), etc. Can.

  Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. by the contact of the game ball to the lower plate cover 340, 340A Is not transmitted from the lower cover 340, 340A to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is assured. It can be prevented.

  Further, since the lower disc ball opening hole 322a is provided in front of the lower ball ball supply port 323c at the lower dish second region A2 in the lower dish main body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is opened. In this state, the gaming ball discharged from the lower ball feeding hole 323c can be made to enter the lower ball dropping hole 322a as it is and discharged downward (dollar box), and the gaming ball can be discharged to the main body of the lower plate main body 325 It can be made difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower ball ball release hole 322a, as described above, the lower ball cover 340, 340A is provided, so that the game ball is of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, damage to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be prevented, and interruption of the game is reduced to reduce the interest of the player in the game Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the gaming ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 is inclined The bottom surface is to be climbed, and the movement speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the gaming ball in contact with the lower plate cover 340, 340A can be reduced, movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j is surely restricted by the lower plate cover 340, 340A. In addition to the above, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls abut on the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b and to suppress them from being broken.

  Also, since at least the lower cover 340, 340A is a separate member, when the lower cover 340, 340A is damaged, it can be easily repaired simply by replacing the lower cover 340, 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the gaming hall side where 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front side in the left-right direction bulges most forwardly below the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the game ball is received by the general winning opening 2001 etc. While being provided on the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 which has been taken out, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with a storage bowl capable of storing game balls, and is viewed outward of the rendering operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view A space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) in the lower tray first region A1 located and the front view Because the lower tray second region A2 is positioned at the front panel, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more visible when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper tray 321) And the lower plate 322) can be made small and inconspicuous. Accordingly, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) is visible in a portion where the upper plate and the lower plate are visible, a gaming machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal that can make it possible to recognize at a glance that it is, and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower tray main body 325 having the lower tray second region A2 located in the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in front view Since the expansion unit 325B, the second expansion unit 325C, and the lower plate cover 340, 340A are provided, the gaming ball can be stored in the range (lower plate second region A2) which can not be seen from the front of the lower plate 322. it can. Therefore, the storage amount of the game balls can be secured sufficiently against the appearance from the front, so the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to make the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

  Furthermore, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first region A1 have the lower tray cover 340 and 340A having the lower tray second region A2 and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension Since the lower tray 322 is configured by attaching (in combination) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower tray covers 340, 340A, a first extension portion 325B, a second extension portion 325C, etc. of different sizes are prepared in advance. The lower plate cover 340, 340A or the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C have a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the tray unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (changing) the lower cover 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to cope with the size of the rear portion of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the space at the rear depends on the amount of backward projection of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second one) having different amounts of backward projection The lower plate 322 can be made compatible with the rendering operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward, Can be stored reliably. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A has the cover upright wall 340a rising from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, 340A of various shapes is prepared in advance. In addition, it is made to correspond to various forms by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above.

  Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Thus, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the gaming balls are placed is the lower plate main body 325, the portion of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A A boundary (seam, parting line PL) is never located. Therefore, since the weight of the stored gaming balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, the force is such that the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are pulled away from the lower tray main body 325 even if many gaming balls are stored. It does not act and can prevent the lower cover 340, 340A from being removed from the lower main body 325.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed to receive a game ball at the general winning opening 2001 etc. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball opening hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) provided with the lower plate 322 and the lower plate 322 and arranged at the center in the left-right direction. And the lower plate 322 is difficult to see from the front (player) (it is difficult to see), so the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, and the player's interest The pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal that can be strongly attracted. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball going from the lower ball supply opening 323c to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), It is possible to make it difficult to notice the flow of balls and prevent distraction, and it is possible to suppress a drop in interest for the game.

  Further, the bottom plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate in the bottom plate 322 for guiding the gaming ball from the bottom plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) It is assumed that the lower countersink hole 322a is kept open since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball being guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d and the part between the ball opening 322a and the like. The gaming ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the player can receive the game ball. An illusion can be made that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the inconvenience of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since half or more of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, and the like are difficult to visually recognize from the front by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) The lower counter ball supply port 323c, the lower counter ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower tray 322 is made to turn to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), the actual lower tray is smaller than the size of the lower tray 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 as compared to the appearance.

  Further, in the state where the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball released from the lower disc ball supply port 323c into the lower board 322 can be Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower countersink hole 322a by the guide means such as the portion between the hole 322a and the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d and discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322. The game balls can be prevented from circulating around the lower plate 322, and the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 can be reliably made difficult to visually identify from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, when the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, the ball guide portion 322c etc. immediately sends the game ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 without causing the player to notice it. Since it is possible to discharge the lower balls from the lower ball ball removal holes 322a downward, it is possible for the player to illusion that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plates 322. Can. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the inconvenience of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front half or more of the storage area (storage area) of the gaming ball in plan view of the lower tray 322. The actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size of the visible one with respect to the size of 322. Therefore, as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward in the front view below the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the game ball is received by the general winning opening 2001 etc. Stage operation unit attachment for mounting a large stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) having the same height as the entire height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 While having a portion 326a, it is concaved so as to turn to the rear lower the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the approximate center in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 Because it has a shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large scale rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) appears to be emphasized at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine, the player can see At first glance, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the lower front decoration portion 326c recessed rearward on the left and right outside of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game is moved to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), and a sufficient storage amount (volume of the lower plate 322) of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 can be secured. It is not necessary to play while paying attention to the lower plate 322 being full with the game balls, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game, to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 is wound to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall 322 (the front of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. In this way, it is possible to make it possible for the player to recognize that the storage amount of gaming balls is sufficiently secured even by touch, and in the state where gaming balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the inside of the lower tray 322 Since it is possible to recognize that many game balls are stored, it is possible to give a player a sense of satisfaction, and to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, since the finger of the hand put in the lower plate 322 is hard to touch the back wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., it gives the player the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine can be prevented from giving a sense of incongruity, and the player can be relieved and a decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed to be wider toward the back side (backward), the storage amount of the game balls can be sufficiently secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is less noticeable on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate front lower decoration portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is opened. Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the gaming balls in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to enhance the appeal of the player and It can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, the player covers the lower plate 322 because the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper part of the part of the lower plate 322 which is located behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). When putting a hand, it is possible to prevent a finger tip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) etc. It can be played in a safe state. In addition, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from intruding (spinning) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is disposed at the center of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) The pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal that can be made more noticeable and can strongly attract the player's attention, and the decoration by the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be easily viewed. Then, it is possible to enjoy the decoration and the effect of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball supply port 323c capable of communicating with the upper plate 321, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating up and down in an openable and closable manner, the conventional pachinko machine The player is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine because it has the same function as the lower tray at the time of playing with this pachinko machine 1 and is not confused about the function of the lower plate 322, as in the conventional It is possible to play the game with a feeling like this, and allow the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a are respectively disposed behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball supply port 323c are viewed from the front. The lower disc ball removal hole 322a can be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be clarified to improve the appearance, and a pachinko with high appeal that can strongly attract the player's interest It can be machine 1.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the tray unit 320 bulging forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 that the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting an effect to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of Is attached to the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) which is decorating the outside of the window, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is enclosed. The diameter is about 15 cm and the center is in the direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) A control button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 attached is attached, and a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, and the button lens Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration in the operation button are made by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. Reduces the visibility of the outer edge and back side (rear side) of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) etc. from the gap between the member 432 (screen unit 470) And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 in the operation button provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the in-operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Since the outer edge and back side of the in-operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, the button lens 411 and the in-operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit can be enlarged by enlarging the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between them and 470) is relatively large, it can be well concealed by the first button decoration part 411a etc., so it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the appearance and at the same time, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest is strong. A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be drawn.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (body part 413a) cylindrically protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation member inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 A plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged), that is, the advancing and retreating direction of the operation button 410 The light is likely to be refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the in-operation decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). Can make it difficult to see the outer edge and back side of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between them, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape which bulges outward, the volume in the operation button 410 is increased. It becomes possible to make the side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger and easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device in which the player can be enjoyed by the operation button 410 It is possible to facilitate the provision of the 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player.

  Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, designability (decorability) is given to the operation button 410. Therefore, the operation button 410 in the present pachinko machine 1 is made conspicuous to interest the player. This makes it easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play a game.

  Further, in the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide that the back side of the operation button 410 or the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470) can be seen from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). Deterioration in appearance of the button 410 or the like can be reduced to improve the appearance.

  In addition, the button lens 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 and having a predetermined width, and in cooperation with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 less visible from the side, the main portion 413a and the in-operation button decorative member 432 ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 has a cylindrical shape, directionality is lost in the outer periphery as compared with the case where it has a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 can be surely enjoyed for the player, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, the player participation type effect for causing the player to operate the operation button 410 can be easily performed without confirming the position of the operation button 410 without performing the operation. Since it is easy to touch the operation button 410 and press the button, it is easy for the player to participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, thereby making the player entertain and lowering interest. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, an effect image of the player is operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) The effect can be enjoyed and the player can be urged to operate the operation button 410 by the effect image or the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) A drop in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player participation type effect and have fun. In addition, by the effect being executed in the operation button 410, it can be made to think that there is something good depending on the player, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest Can.

  In addition, it is possible to visually recognize the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) through the transparent button lens 411 (a part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be made to immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the player has a high appeal for the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 can be enhanced in the expectation for the effect It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine It may be applied, and even in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a is formed at a portion on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The button lens 411 may not have the first button decoration portion 411a.

  In the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the button frame 412 is not attached. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed over the entire circumference of a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (ie, the entire periphery of the outer periphery of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is surrounded from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411) Although the thing provided with the button base 413 (main-body part 413a) which protruded cylindrically to the 2 base unit 450 side was shown, it is not limited to this, but the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side second production It may be protruded toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire circumference of the outer circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or may be a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a seal, a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief, etc.) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as embossing, slit, or prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the embodiment described above, the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outside portion of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the tray unit cover 326. The lower plate is such that it is recessed rearward from the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) and is mutually connected behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A). It is good also as 322, dents back only from the part of the right outside of production operation unit 400 (the 2nd production operation unit 400A), and one part turns to the back of production operation unit 400 (the 2nd production operation unit 400A) It may be

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed backward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. Although the example in which it dented in the shape was shown, it does not limit to this, It is good also as a polygon cylinder surface shape or the front surface dented in polyhedron shape.

  Moreover, although said example showed the example which attached the presentation operation unit 400 (2nd presentation operation unit 400A) in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, it does not limit to this, "an operation dial, a touch panel etc. "Having the operation device of", "having the rotating body having the decoration on the surface", "having the decoration having the decoration and the movable device for moving the decoration", "the game "Equipped with a decorative body that three-dimensionally imitates characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama) etc. according to the machine concept", "characters, items, logos and predetermined patterns according to the game machine concept , Etc. may be attached by sealing, printing, etc. ", or a member such as a unit or panel provided with such may be attached. Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a) need not be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

  In the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the presentation operation unit attachment portion 326a opened forward for attaching the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A). And a plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover) that does not have an opening (rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a) for attaching the rendering operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed in the rear of the pan unit cover. In addition, on the front of such a plate unit cover, it is desirable to decorate characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in line with the concept of the gaming machine, by sealing, printing, attaching a decorative member, etc. .

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an area slightly larger than a half of the storage area (storage area) of the gaming ball in plan view of the lower plate 322 is set by the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although the example which covers visually hard from the front was shown, it is not limited to this, and it may be made to make visual hard to see from the front an area of half or less of the storage area of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 The whole of the plate 322 may be difficult to view from the front.

  In the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arc-shaped parts partially provided in the circumferential direction. The second button decorative portion 411 b and the frame side lens 417 may be in the form of an annular ring extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the rendering operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown, The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an oval) centered on the center.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410 and the second effect on the door frame side Although a rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member disposed in front and rear (or upper and lower) under predetermined conditions It is good also as composition provided with the variable light transmission means which a back side can recognize visually by fulfillment of. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a device such as a magic mirror that allows the rear side to be visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side", and "such as a liquid crystal film, transparent when the power is turned on / off. Become opaque or become opaque so that the rear side becomes visible. The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By providing the variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in the normal state, only the front member or the front and rear members can be viewed. It is possible to show the player the decoration of the visible member. And, in the special state, by satisfying the predetermined condition, the rear side member (rear member or the member disposed on the rear side of the rear member) not visible in the normal state can be seen. The members and the back member, or the front and back members and the members on the back side of the back member can show the overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, which can make it difficult for the player to get bored, and can entertain the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of

  Specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member is displayed by darkening the back side of the front member. It can be made visible to the player. Then, when the light between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is made bright by the light of the light emitting part such as LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied. The members become visible, and it is possible to show the player the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

  Alternatively, when the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state, so the decoration of the front member and the rear member It is possible to show the player the decoration by the surface of the player. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting unit such as an LED, the fulfillment condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be viewed through the rear member. Through the members, it is possible to show the player a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character).

  Furthermore, when both the front and rear members are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be viewed through the front member. It is possible to show the player the decoration by the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or the space between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as LED And the requirements for the respective variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the members on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) are satisfied through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Thus, by appropriately selecting the site to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the range that can be viewed can be changed in multiple steps, and a player can enjoy various decorations.

  In the above example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror in the state where the rear side is darkened. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, although the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror in the above-mentioned specific example, the same operation and effect can be obtained even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film or the like. In addition, when a liquid crystal film or the like is used as the variable light transmitting means, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency). If the rear side of the member can be made bright (or decorated to emit light) by the light of the light emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player more various effects such as light emission effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. 73 is a schematic view of various detection signals input to and output from the game apparatus connection terminal board for gaming balls etc. relaying the electrical connection with the display board, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control unit.

  The pachinko machine 1 has, as its control configuration, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that performs control relating to a game including a payout of a winning ball in addition to a process of generating a control power source (for example, +5 V etc. And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect on a game advanced by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. A control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, as shown in FIG. 69, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the process at the time of power on at the time of power on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the time of power on. The main control MPU 1310a is a microprocessor that incorporates various control programs such as a main control program that controls the game operation and is executed after execution, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from a detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids , And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors a predetermined voltage blackout or an indication of a momentary power failure; Te are provided.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”), the main control MPU 1310 a In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in” that updates the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to gaming. Hard random number circuit 1310 an ′ ′) is incorporated. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a value 32767 as a minimum value is preset). The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value as an initial value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an first uses a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a, with one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator described later, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without overlapping, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted Then, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310 a performs a big hit on the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an It is set as a judgment random number.

  The main control input circuit 1310 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcing reset of the stored information, and the reset function main control output circuit 1310 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb has the information for outputting the various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  The first start opening sensor 4002 for detecting gaming balls entering the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 60, the second starting opening sensor 4004 for detecting gaming balls entering the second start opening 2004, and so on The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball entering the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b. Has been entered. Further, in the gate sensor 4003 for detecting gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 60, the count sensor 4005 for detecting gaming balls having entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, which is attached and detects a fraudulent action using a magnet, is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the port's input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310 a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca is output from the output terminal of the main control output circuit to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca, and the first special symbol display 1403 via the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. The drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special hold number indicator 1404, the second special hold number indicator 1406, the normal symbol indicator 1402, the state indicator 1401, and the round indicator 1407. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the substrate 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310 ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used as the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005, A contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 4020 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 4005 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with a long life is used as the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches whose lifetime is shorter than that of the proximity switch are used as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. The payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 is completed as serial data. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. Main control MPU 1310a, upon completion of normal reception of various commands from payout control board 951 as serial data, main control output with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) notifying that. The signal is output to the circuit 1310 ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. There is no reset function, and various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310 cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured of the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310ae etc., which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 79). The main rotation serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310 aea, a transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, and a serial management unit 1310 aec (see FIG. See 79). When the main control CPU core 1310 aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec, the serial management unit 1310 a ec sets the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310 aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In the present embodiment, 32 bytes are provided as the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. After setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, the main control CPU core 1310 aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. And BCO (see FIG. 75). The main control MPU 1310 can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the main control MPU 1310a causes the main control MPU 1310a to completely erase from the main control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

7-2. Disbursement control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout and an operation switch 954 having various functions. And an error LED indicator 860 b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310 a based on a detection signal outputted by being operated. Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in ..).

7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed at the time of power on and the payout of gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation and a ROM storing various commands and a ROM temporarily storing various commands, and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 CR unit input for exchanging various signals between 952 d and CR unit 6 It includes a power circuit 952E, a. In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”), the payout control MPU 952 a In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control program serializes a variety of game information from the main control board 1310 and various commands for payout from the main control board 1310 as a main payout serial data reception signal through the payout control input circuit 952b under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the payout operation of the gaming ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and these error generation command and error cancellation navigation command are transmitted to the serial serial data of the payer. The signal is output as serial data of the serial system to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, the payout control program outputs (first door opening command) of a door frame opening command when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 in response to the opening operation. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program also receives the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the detection signal (the door frame closing detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 according to the closing operation. While outputting, when the detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. For this reason, the payout control input circuit 952 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset information based on detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 952 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 952 cb not having a reset function and not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 952 ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a dispensing control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the later-described payout control system reset, the payout function-free payout control output circuit 952cb does not reset the information. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  Out-of-balls detection sensor 827 for detecting out-of-balls of gaming balls in the supply passage of ball induction unit 820 of payout unit 800, and payout detection sensor 842 for detecting gaming balls discharged from payout outlets 831b and 832b of payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 for detecting the rotation of the delivery blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the delivery control MPU 952a via the delivery control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data mode, or operates the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (detection Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. Upon completion of normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect, and a payout control output with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952 ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952 ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminal of the serial output port, whereby the payout function-free payout control is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.
When normal reception of various commands from the payout control substrate 951 as serial data is completed, the main control substrate 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d from the above, and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 834 from the payout motor drive circuit 952d, or the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed as an error LED display By outputting a drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents that the error LED display 860b displays and notifies include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 951), and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “ball out” (specifically, the ball is out) Informing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically The payout rotary body and the game ball are engaged in the vicinity of the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotary body becomes difficult to rotate. To notify that When “3” is displayed, it notifies that “disbursement detection sensor error” (specifically, it indicates that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that "retry error" (specifically, it indicates that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and the number "6" When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it indicates that the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 is full using the stored storage space based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) And when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR not connected” (the electric connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6 Is notified, and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, the number of balls of gaming balls not yet paid out is predetermined Informing that it has reached the number of balls).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc. to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The ball number etc. of the game ball actually paid out are outputted to the external terminal board 784 through the resistance which is not shown.

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls of the game ball, etc. and various information (game information, details of errors or errors relating to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall The main control board 1310 which advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are firstly the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board It is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal in a serial manner to the payout control board 951 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is a CR unit The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent game balls, and at the same time, the game ball displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the ball rental return display unit 330. The signal is output to the ball lending return display unit 330 by outputting the signal to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 951 includes the capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control internal RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal thereof is given via the payout control input circuit 952b to a predetermined value of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased (cleared). The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb, and is also output from the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.

7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game device connection terminal board for game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described based on FIG. In addition to relaying the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. 71, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays the electrical connection between the boards (precisely, the game ball connection device board 869 is electrically connected with the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay board 880 , CR unit 6 and the game ball connection device board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball connection device board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal plate 880 and frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the substrate of CR unit 6 and the game device connection terminal board 869, between the game device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control substrate 951, the game device connection terminal board 869 and main door relay Wirings (harnesses) are used to electrically connect between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the game ball and the like, and the board of the lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365, respectively. Further, an AC 24 V described later from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 is generated from the supplied AC 24 V to a predetermined voltage VL (in the embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown). The game balls are supplied to the payout control board 951 through the loan device connection terminal plate 869, while the game balls are supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  On the part surface of the frequency display plate 365, the ball lending button 328 which is a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 A return button 329, which is a segment display unit, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display portion 363 of the rental ball unit 360.

  The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected via the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game The input is made to the CR unit 6 through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device It is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal plate 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 is a so-called dynamic lighting system in which three segment displays are arranged in a row, and one of the three-digit segment displays is sequentially driven one by one. The segment display of the digit is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the sphere rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. Ball loan return display unit 330 has digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one-digit segment display among three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of 7 signals) for designating the content to be displayed by lighting up the game unit connection terminal board 869 from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment indicators are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays It is possible to visually recognize the content due to the light emission of the device through the loan remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a gaming apparatus such as a gaming ball and the like via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 by the built-in voltage generation circuit, and is in a ball lendable state where the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this luminescence can be viewed through the lending residual display unit 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistances mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. When it is input, it is configured to output BRDY, which is a rental ball request signal, to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. And CR unit 6 is a single payout operation start request signal to pay out a predetermined number of balls to be rented (in this embodiment, it is 25 balls and corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. , A signal indicating that it is possible or impossible to output to the CR unit 6 or that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible, such as a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6 or the like. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like in the hall sets in advance in the CR unit 6 that the gaming ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, one payout operation Will be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, then 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device board 869. And, the prepaid card is discharged from the insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply substrate 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply substrate 931 is supplied with power from the pachinko island facility and can be electrically connected or disconnected from the AC 24 V (AC 24 V), and a power control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the striking launch device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and sphere feeding control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a and the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko facility by operating the power switch 934 A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing power whose power factor is improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates And a power supply generation circuit 935 d for generating a power supply.

7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a operates the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302 And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not a finger is touched, and a one-shot button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop launch of the gaming ball according to the intention of the player. And the detection signal from the signal is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game apparatus connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the release control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and performs control to output to the firing solenoid 682 While the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320 by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315; Control is performed to send the game balls received by the ball transport member to the ball striking device 650 side.

7-4. Peripheral control board]
In the peripheral control substrate 1510 of the second control unit SCG, effect control is performed based on various commands from the main control substrate 1310 with respect to the first control unit MCG, as shown in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door While performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control of music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information for specifying the date, time A real time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying a second and a lower speaker 92 And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 which performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at the time of power on, and also after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub control programs that are executed and controls rendering operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from sound source built-in VDP 1512a of liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes such as various LEDs, etc. continued across peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a blank signal is input) Manage schedule data that prescribes Information, etc., and various information (eg, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state), information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511 e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511 e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the backup power is supplied by the large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By this, it is possible to hold the stored content for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply substrate 931, when the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is out of control. When the timer is up, the hardware is reset. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Since the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e when outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a fixed period, reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) Game board motor drive data for transmitting drive signals to drive boards 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 serial for motor drive boards It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric -Side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to specific drive sources from frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 The door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 or transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 via It transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the frame I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 This detection signal is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, and this serialized rendering operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The frame I / O port for detecting a rendering operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is input through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and the system runs away using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1511e in combination. It is diagnosed whether it is

7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, peripheral control MPU 1511a has peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It comprises an / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511 ak.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa reads and writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac via the internal bus 1511 ah while the peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae and the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, Various data are read from and written to peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak via internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b via the internal bus 1511 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the external bus 1511 h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. It reads and writes various data via the internal bus 1511 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the external bus 1511 h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 1511ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels of ~ DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, and WDT 1511 af To perform data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 1511 ah while peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. Between devices with input / output devices such as O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak, without using peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad and external bus 1511 h are provided to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. And read / write, peripherals for input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511 ad and the peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae: serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It has a serial I / O port for a frame, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor, a serial I / O port for a main control substrate, and a serial I / O port for obtaining presentation operation unit information.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and this timer is reset by hardware when it runs up. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a predetermined period (until the timer is up). It will take When the peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

  Peripheral control Various parallel I / O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal, door side motor drive light emission latch signal etc. In addition, it outputs clear signal to peripheral control external WDT 1511 e, The detection signals from the various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by the game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the integrated movable body detection data from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit by the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is determined. In this embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly. The noise measures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED which has the meaning of weight on the game. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, and the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a is rotated to change the resistance value, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob is The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is set, and music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the store clerks in the hall of occurrences of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and cheating against the pachinko machine 1 and contents concerning a game effect and the like are notified. (Eg, to render the screen developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as more powerful, to notify that the player is likely to shift to an advantageous gaming state, etc.) The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, from the mute to the maximum volume The volume of the image can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above.
Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like in a hall operates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Although the sound is small, when the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is in the wrongdoing, the notification sound set to the large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. There is a possibility to increase the volume to play the music and to add to music and sound effects to render the screen developed in the game board side effect display device 1600 as more powerful or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

7-4-1 b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511 b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, RTC control unit 4165 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. It is done. The light emission aspect generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission aspect of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects are defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and copied when the power is turned on in various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 1511b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511 b is used to correct the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program is for correcting the decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b. The luminance setting information is, as described later, luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range over which the luminance of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 being set is included, for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time Therefore, when June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b and the brightness is obtained. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. To adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance is set to 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lighted.

7-4-1 c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy areas 1511 cd, which exclusively store the copied various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc., stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b A variety of control data copy area 1511ce, which exclusively stores the copied data, and a backup non-management target, which exclusively stores, among the various types of information updated by execution of various control programs, ones that are not subject to backup A work area 1511 cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged object work area 1511 cf and cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. With regard to the management target work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc, the power on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. And the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and peripheral information (1 ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs It is comprised from Bank0 (1 ms) which memorize | stores exclusively as object. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from backup first area 1511 cb described later to backup second area 1511 cc are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when “(1fr)” outputs drawing data of one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 as described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a The V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a to indicate that it can receive screen data from the frame, so every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are additionally described (effect information (1 fr) and effects to be described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). “(1 ms)” is, as will be described later, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, etc., since peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4” respectively (The same applies to effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, a reception command storage area 1511 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the received various commands are received. It is a storage area to be set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC information storage A storage area in which various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). It is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b to various control data copy areas 1511 ce may be read and set, and various schedule data may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable object information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is a storage area in which the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired from the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 In ai, various information (for example, effect operation) in which the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are acquired based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 Storage area where rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 etc. created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. If the effect display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on the LOCKN signal to be output later to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of Bank 0 (1 fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf of Bank 0 (1 ms) The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive substrate transmission data storage area 1511caa When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state is set. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When the DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Ru. When peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf opens to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door decoration is applied to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 1511 cag When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second region of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is supposed to be.

  Next, a backup first area 1511 cb and a backup second area 1511 cc will be described which exclusively stores the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 ca. In the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) Each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed to execute the peripheral control DMA controller 15 in the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511 cb, two pairs are managed as one page, with Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 1511 cc, a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The contents are copied at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 cb has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms). It is an area for managing as a page, and backup 2nd area 1511 cc makes Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair in total. It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511 cb and the second backup area 1511 cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame) Contents that are copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, every time steady-state processing is executed The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and whenever the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

7-4-1 d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a includes a backup management target work area 1511 da for storing exclusively information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs; A first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da are provided. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d is a power on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is an instruction to start the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Even when it is not zero cleared. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511 ca, the backup first area 1511 cb, and the backup second area 1511 cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c described above are cleared to zero. In addition, after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 It is supposed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d (for example, history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) Etc.) While the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c can be cleared, the contents (items) are not displayed at all and can not be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag It is comprised from Bank0 (SRAM) which memorize | stores information etc. for backup object exclusively. Here, to briefly describe the name of Bank 0 (SRAM), “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, as described above, and “Bank” The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, which are provided in an area ranging from backup first area 1511 db to backup second area 15 11 dc described later, have the same storage area as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. The “(SRAM)” is backed up by various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a, so “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3” , And “Bank 4” (also used for the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later have the same meaning).

  Next, a first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da will be described. The backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc are managed as one page, in which two banks form one pair. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The data is copied at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511 db, one pair of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) is managed, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, one pair is made up of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 1511 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and the backup second area An area 1511 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) form one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc.

7-4-2. Liquid Crystal Display Controller]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control of music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. Thus, a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source") and drawn by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 In addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) 1512a which controls and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, various kinds such as music and sound effects Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data The door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the audio data transmission IC 1512 c transmitted toward the decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 A transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect that is disposed near the lower side of the device 460 and transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 A signal from the differential circuit 1512e, in addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal, and the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side rendering Signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted And a forced switching circuit 1512 f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b displays, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display (ring display) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or image described later, and display of an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data to be used to display at least one selection display object to be described later, tonal adjustment background image data to be used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later In addition to the sound volume setting icon image data and the like used for display, the display of the main body frame rear surface image data and the service mode screen used for displaying the main body frame rear surface image where the position of each part on the rear surface of the main body frame 4 is visible Mode screen image data used for the break, break used to display the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying a suggestion display for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the rendering operation unit 400 should be operated.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The screen data at the top of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 After extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae Output to VDP1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 1511a receives from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c the sound command data at the top of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310. The sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and extracted in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is recorded in response to the V blank signal being input. The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511 cae is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511 ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c Output to the built-in VDP1512a. Thus, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a receives the V blank signal as sound instruction data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. 74, based on the input screen data, from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b Extract side character data and upper dish character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 The VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). Of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from channel CH2 through peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in plate unit 320 of door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) the door frame side effect display device 460, synchronization between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is achieved.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay A terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a display on the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 mounted on the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the dish unit 320 It is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the periphery as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Whereas the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The wiring length from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to the channel CH1 and thus is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, in the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, “V-by-One (Sine Electronics Co., Ltd.) By adopting the differential type communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to the influence of noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
The channel CH2 uses an interface according to the parallel method, while the serial interface according to the Signaling method is used. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (not shown). It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. Then, the serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive substrate 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and Image data for effect display 460 from channel CH2 Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” is a built-in VRAM for drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to generate above.

  In addition, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 is shown Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. After (transmission), a V-blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the V blank signal being input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a adopts a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, when the sound command data described above is input from peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from main control board 1310, sound source built-in VDP 1512a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. And sound data such as sound effects are extracted and the built-in sound source is controlled to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set, the music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value to adjust the volume, adjust the sound data of the notification sound and its volume to notify the store clerk etc. of the occurrence of the trouble of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is In practice, the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sound data of the effect incorporated into the used track among a plurality of tracks The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the adjusted substrate volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified effect sound is amplified and serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and for the notification sound, sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, Volume control set as a sub volume value to adjust the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track used It does not depend on the volume adjustment at all based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a, and synthesizes the maximum sound volume, and the sound volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 The amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when an effect sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, control for sending an alarm sound so as to notify a store clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 First, the sub-volume value of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track into which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually lower. The master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and this amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, in actuality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period elapses, sound generation forcibly set to mute is performed. The volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the schedule data for the board is again set as the sub-volume value by adjusting the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of When the mode is shifted to the setting mode and is adjusted by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 It is supposed to flow.

  Thus, when the notification sound flows to notify the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 when the effect sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, Although the volume of the effect sound is muffled and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muffled effect sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound has a predetermined period When no sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it went.

7-4-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b draws game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. While upper character character data is stored in advance, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-4-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512 c is a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay as a serial data of a difference system in which the right audio data is made a plus signal and a minus signal when serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data that transmits left audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal while transmitting to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , Frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194. Thus, music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference system between the left and right, respectively, between the substrates ranging from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, for example, When combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 into one left audio data, even if the negative signal is affected by noise, Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-4-2 d. Transmitter IC for door frame side effect]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal, and the red video signal The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are It is input to the transmitter IC 1512 d for side effect. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information which is difficult to distinguish for human eyes, the lower 2 bits including weak color information are invalidated although they are outputted from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

  Three synchronization signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization. Three synchronization signals, signals and clock signals, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only one differential pair cable These various signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 The drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is from peripheral control board 1510 to frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and door although the length of wiring required for (first path) is short. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, a path from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 2) because the length of the wiring required for 2) is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the 1 The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the closing side which is the side, the effect display drive board 4450 etc. housed in the pan unit 320 provided on the door frame 3 It is necessary to pass through various wirings which electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and the upper tray 321 is a gaming ball. A full tank branching unit 770 is disposed which can branch and guide the game balls dispensed to the lower plate 322 when the tank is full.
Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized power source board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility, is disposed. As described above, the various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the noise due to electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the pachinko machine 1 are installed It is in the environment which receives the noise etc. which invaded.

  Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in peripheral control board 1510 By adopting the differential communication of V-by-One (registered trademark), the system is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; As described above, the differential 1 pair cable is used as a wire for electrically connecting between the connection of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1 pair cable has two wires Is not a parallel line merely provided in parallel but a twisted pair cable. The twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one pair cable electrically connecting between the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source in which the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source Even if a differential-type communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted to make it hard to be affected by noise, the configuration by such hardware alone is due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball When serial data in a parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering a power supply line supplied from a pachinko machine with pachinko machine 1 installed, effect display stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 For the door frame side effect provided in the drive substrate 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by Shiba ICSDIC0, it will be received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 with the serial data affected, and output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source Image data is received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, an image like a so-called sandstorm is displayed to indicate what image There is a problem that it can not be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 with VDP 1512a with built-in sound source In addition to the configuration using such hardware, while adopting a differential system communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. in the transmitter IC 1512 d for effect, the system is less susceptible to noise. The transmitter and receiver are electrically connected to each other through a twisted pair cable capable of canceling (eliminating) the noise on the receiving side even if differential serial data is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame The noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3 and thus the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal display control unit 151 in door frame side effect display device 460. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that can not be recognized at all what the image is like sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 intervene between the connection of, and between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but the separately assembled frame is mounted on the main body frame 4 so that the door frame 3 is attached. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to 4, electrically connect various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and the various wiring is removed, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 If it is impossible to solve the problem that occurs in the door frame 3, the door frame 3 may be replaced with the other door frame 3 and the door frame 3 may be attached to the door frame 3. By electrically connecting various wiring from various substrates provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3 'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the differential communication of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the structure that is not easily affected by noise, in addition to the configuration using such hardware, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has invaded the wiring, that noise is canceled (removed ) Can be employed as a differential one pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the boards of peripheral control board 1510 and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral frame of relay terminal board 868 and the board of peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and with peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and effect display driving The substrate and the substrate 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other various signals are electrically connected to each other by a harness. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the video transmission wiring patterns described above are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 apart from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. A plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are straddled along the route from the transmitter to the receiver. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting the serial data according to the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected to become noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the space between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the space between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral door relay While electrical connection is made between the terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive substrate 4450 by means of a twisted pair cable, wiring for transmitting power supply lines and other various signals is electrically conducted by means of a harness. In the twisted pair cable, one of the wires is red and the other is gray, and the wire for supplying power is red and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

7-4-2 e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are output to the forced switching circuit 1512 f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 Are differentially input into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). The LOCKN signal output request data is a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or becomes a customer wait state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 to be described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 , And is transmitted as a request for confirming the operation of the door-frame-side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiation circuit 1512 e, the forcible switching circuit 1512 f performs circuit connection so as to transmit these two signals, while the difference is generated. When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the inverter circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is made such that the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. It is done. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512 e, the two signals are connected in order to transmit the two signals, and thus the two signals are While transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, in the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d A signal output from the IC 1512 d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a demonstration with the game board side effect display device 1600 in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or in waiting for customers. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (in fact, the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and various serialized A liquid crystal module circuit 4450 V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs the signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the frame is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the LOCKN signal input, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600 The information is displayed and notified on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the above.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not have a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. It can be determined that no problem has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the 320, but a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image for notifying that effect (for example, “a malfunction occurs in the upper-dish liquid crystal display device Please call the store clerk. "), The sound source built-in VDP1512a is controlled by the game board side While outputting to the display device 1600, an alarm sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper liquid crystal display device") to that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. An announcement sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3 by this. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. In this RTC 4165a, a RAM 4165aa in which calendar information and time information are held is built in (hereinafter, described as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is configured to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in the present embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply of the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without any supply of power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets it in the above-mentioned RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and acquires this acquired calendar information and time information Based effects can be developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, the screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 for December 25th, and if it is New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown A screen to be executed may be expanded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of LED type, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is the backlight of the game board side, from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the currently set game The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a turns ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only. It is supposed to

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input in the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. It is set to the date of manufacture, which is the date of the month and the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, the brightness information in the case where the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type is attached to the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, the input date and time information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability and high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Sometimes it is too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of the The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information and date. Acquire the time information to specify minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range over which the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511 b.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on from the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5% which is correction information acquired for the image. If it is already 12 months since the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 has been turned on. When acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) from 1b and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 85% is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510 a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by turning the knob. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is a portion of the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (with built-in sound source VDP 1512 a) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or cheating against the pachinko machine 1, (For example, the screen developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed as more powerful, or it is notified that there is a high possibility of transition to an advantageous gaming state for the player. Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, muffling The volume from the maximum volume to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when a store clerk or the like in a hall operates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 Although the sound is small, when the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is in the wrongdoing, the notification sound set to the large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the rendering operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400. There is. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or the pressing operation unit 405. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control substrate 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the store clerk in the hall that can turn the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or a wait by customer becomes a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the effect operation unit 400. The volume operation unit can be increased to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405, or when the volume clerk adjusted by the hall feels loud and feels loud with music or sound effects, the rendering operation unit A desired sound volume can be reduced by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and was playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player who was playing the game, and to hear the music and sound effects, this time, he sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and play the game by sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time If the player who is playing feels loud and the music and sound effects are felt loudly, the player who is sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game plays the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply substrate 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control substrate etc. will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko facility. When the power supply switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko facility is supplied to the power supply substrate 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply substrate 931 includes a power control unit 935 and a emission control unit 953. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The part 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24 V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply substrate 931 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 volts AC (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter, described as "+37 V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935 c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source, and the gaming area 5a is shown in FIG. Control the driving current for launching (projecting) to the shooting solenoid and output it to the shooting solenoid 682 while outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and performs control to send the gaming ball received by the ball sending member to the hit ball firing device 650 side.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to +37 V to +5 V DC (+5 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5 V"), +12 V DC (+12 V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+12 V"), and DC. +24 V (DC + 24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) is respectively created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system supplied with +5 V is a +5 V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with +12 V is a +12 V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with +24 V is a +24 V power supply line.

  The +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The +5 V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is supplied to the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 through the payout control substrate 951. The +5 V production circuit 1310 g produces +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a from +12 V from the payout control board 951. The +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control filter circuit 1310 h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM of the payout control substrate 951 and The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control substrate 951 is also electrically connected. That is, +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952 a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 The current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected by the electrical connection method in which the +5 V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 returns from the payout control substrate 951 to the power supply substrate 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. Thus, when +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is not supplied to the payout control substrate 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control substrate 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored contents are held by supplying the payout VBB to the power terminal of the payout control internal RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power control terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951. And the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control substrate 1310. That is, +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a and causes the diode MD0 to forward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, Current flows toward the As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with +5 V by the electrical connection method in which +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. It can be done. As a result, +12 V created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g can create +5 V When the main control substrate 1310 is depleted, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 as the main VBB, so the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying the backup power to the main control built-in RAM is configured by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltages supplied to the control boards and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltages supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 are supplied to the payout control substrate 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and of these three types of voltages, +12 V and Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Also, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935 d of the power source substrate 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and peripherals via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 It is respectively supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 are, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the drive source drive circuit of the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive substrate 4170 and the motor drive substrate 4180. It is supplied to 4180a respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the board 5.

  Peripheral control board 1510 is provided with +3.3 V creation circuit 1510 b for creating +5 V to 3.3 V DC (DC +3.3 V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3 V”) supplied from frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3 V produced by the +3.3 V production circuit 1510 b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600 a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600 b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 includes a +9 V creation circuit 194 a that creates +12 V to +9 V DC (DC +9 V, hereinafter referred to as “+9 V”) supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. A total of four voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decoration substrates of the door frame 3 together with +9 V generated by the +9 V forming circuit 194 a.

  Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper-disc-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates +12 V to +3.3 V. In addition to being supplied to the various electronic components making up the liquid crystal module circuit 4450 V shown in FIG. 74, +3.3 V produced by the upper dish side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450 x is also supplied with And the door frame side effect display device 460 is supplied. The voltage generated by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame-side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951 a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952 a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5 V from the power supply substrate 931, and removes noise from the +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. For example, +12 V from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 952 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784 a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control substrate 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the game hall. It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping, from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Note that +24 from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 without being used in the payout control substrate 951.

8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310 a and the like, a +5 V creation circuit 1310 g, a main control filter circuit 1310 h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e and the like. The +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied with +12 V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951 and creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a from this +12 V. In the main control board 1310, a power supply system to which +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g is applied and supplied is a +5 V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 and the +5 V power supply line created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. The +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control substrate 1310, and the +5 V of the main control substrate 1310 is configured. The +5 V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310 g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310 h is supplied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g and removes noise from this +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 1310a. For example, +12 V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310 b and the like, and +24 V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control solenoid driving circuit 1310 d and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is supplied with +12 V and +24 V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951, and monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V power failure or short interruption. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e detects a +12 V and +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure indication, it outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notification. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952 a via the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control substrate 951. In addition, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Also, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the blackout notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are respectively input to the decoration substrate of the door frame and the like through the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e applies the voltage to one of the +12 V power line or the +24 V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines of the +12 V power line and the +24 V power line. As compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the symptom of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 to FIG. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply created by the main control board 1310, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to and from, and an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIGS. Besides the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz ) Is mainly composed.

9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310 h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal applied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310g, its second terminal grounded to ground (GND), and its noise component removed from its third terminal +5 V is output. The +5 V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected at one end to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0 so that the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) is first removed. Are smoothed out.

  The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 470 microfarads (μF)) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The ripple is further removed and smoothed by being connected to. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It should be noted that when the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off due to a power failure or momentary interruption at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the electric charge in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 becomes a power failure or an instantaneous stop After generation, it is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC3 grounded, and the +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and a capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded with the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and via the resistor MR0, the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the As a result, as described above, +12 V created by the power creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 and created +5 V When the circuit 1310 g can not generate +5 V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC 0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 as the main VBB, and therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310 h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC 1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC5 connected to ground, and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5 It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (eg, 4.25 V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic corresponds to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310 ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310 h is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal respectively.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside It is in the state.

9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is detected from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. It is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control substrate 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input in addition to the signal. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control substrate 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and main control of the main control substrate 1310 It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error, A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on and an error release after power on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, ie after a predetermined period from the time of power on) And the ability to Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control The main control built-in RAM is cleared by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic from the payout control board 951 is input. The operation signal whose H has become HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control substrate 951 within a predetermined period after power on is a pull-up whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR4 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and is a non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10 A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 The line is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When this is the case, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a Be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned on to switch the switch The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic becomes LOW. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 inputted to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I will judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951. That is, between the substrates of the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage of +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the substrates. The voltage of +12 V is used to increase the signal reliability. Therefore, in the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are on the +5 V side by pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 which are input through the panel relay substrate 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of + 12V and + 24V, and detects a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, when it detects a blackout or a blackout indication. It outputs to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then monitoring of a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, monitoring of a +12 V power failure or a momentary power failure, and output of a power failure notice signal will be described.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line +5 V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set), which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC20 grounded at one end, and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 AC component is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used. , And used to compare the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC21, which is grounded. The +5 V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24 V blackout or momentary interruption]
As described above, the monitoring of the +24 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +24 V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied, is the other end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24 V power supply line and one end Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +24 V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21 is divided by +24 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 21 and MR 22, and the capacitor MC 23 removes the ripple and smoothes it. . The values of the resistances MR21 and MR22 become a power failure detection voltage V1 pf (in this embodiment, set to 21.40 V) which is set in advance when the +24 V fails or momentarily stops, and the voltage starts dropping from +24 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, One end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24, and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the voltage of +24 V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1 pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12 V blackout or instantaneous blackout]
As described above, the monitoring of the +12 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitor voltage V 2 of +12 V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR 24 electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is +12 V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 24 and MR 25 and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC 25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47 V) which is set in advance when the +12 V causes a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts dropping from the +12 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21, is an open-collector output, and is electrically connected to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A described above. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 connected at one end and electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24 connected to ground. It is electrically connected to the terminal PR. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the +12 V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2 pf, the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21, is +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of blackout notice signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D terminal by the change of the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal, and this stored value While outputting (logic) from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from a negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the same as the logic of the signal inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. When the signal whose logic has become HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. Also, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to input a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal to set the latch state, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal that is input is input, the state in which the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic 1) Maintain the output state from the Q terminal).

  In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is grounded at the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal is stored and not output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, as described above Alternatively, a signal from the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC22, which is grounded, and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Ripple is removed by capacitor MC22 and +5 V is smoothed, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is the external It is in an unconnected state.

  In the D type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on process to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310 a is input to the CLR terminal as its logic becomes LOW via the main control output circuit 1310 ca with a reset function. The D type flip flop MIC22 is configured to release the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal as the preset terminal is inverted to output the output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal to latch the input state.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a through main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22 A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure advance notification signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and the signal outputted from the 1 Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is reset The non-function main control output circuit 1310 c b outputs it as a payout blackout notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral black out notice signal.

  The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connecting the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR28 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line at one end and also non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 because the logic thereof is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a It is input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notification signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a It is input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the payout control board 951 as the payout blackout notification signal is open. The output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR31 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR34 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC26 grounded. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via the (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control substrate 951 through a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control substrate 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit formed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is a switch circuit of the former stage, and the circuit formed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the latter stage is a switch circuit of the latter stage. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor of the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage because its logic becomes LOW because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 951 via the wiring (harness), and the payout blackout notification signal whose logic is LOW is dispensed It is input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic thereof becomes HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned ON by being input. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is lowered to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control substrate 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Also, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function for outputting a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35 And are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR36 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of peripheral control unit 1511 in peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. And one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 because its logic is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notification signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control substrate. It is input to 1510.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 1310 b which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1 Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, and there is one transistor in each, and the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and peripheral While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is dispensed to the payout control board 951 Reset function to output as a power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage, and the logic of the payout blackout notice signal is the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral blackout notice signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 And the logic of the blackout notice signal and the logic of the peripheral blackout notice signal.

  The collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR29 having one end electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the second embodiment via the wiring (harness). In discharge control input circuit 952b of discharge control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and there is no reset function main control output circuit 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is connected Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a Since it is mounted on 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to give notice of a blackout by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the blackout notice signal using +5 V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. Between the board with 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of payout control MPU 952a and peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The serial data input terminal of the serial control port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payment serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a do not have the reset function as the main payment serial data transmission signal and transmit the serial data transmitted to the payout control board 951 from the TXA terminal. The circuit 1310cb transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main circuit serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function as a peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that indicates the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input through the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are transmitted through the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is input etc.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951, and for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, the drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310 ca with reset function. To output various driving signals from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) regarding the game to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and the main function with reset function The control output circuit 1310 ca outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 951 or the like.

9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12 V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 through the payout control board 951, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12 V. ing. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. It is done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 47 μF), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) are incorporated. Is mainly configured.).

The +12 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (.mu.F)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and electrically connected to the anode terminal (No. 1 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when the power from power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to main control substrate 1310 via discharge control substrate 951 due to a power failure or a momentary stop, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC50 is generated. The voltage can be continuously applied from the main control substrate 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as +12 V.

  As described above, when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs in the power supply terminal VDD of the main control MPU 1310a, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, the electrostatic capacity: 470 μF) shown in FIG. 77 is charged. The main charge serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a is at least at least a command for which the main control CPU core 1310 aa has been set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41 aea by the unit 1310 aec and transmission complete as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310 aea.

  As described above, the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is to the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control substrate 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Because the main control MPU 1310 a is built in, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits the command set by the main control CPU core 1310 aa in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb by the serial management unit 1310 aec to the transmission shift register 41 aea for transmission When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310 aea as main cycle serial data, a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 50 at +12 V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310 a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control substrate 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal outputting the main cycle serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and the resistor MR51 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the same. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR52 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit formed of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no current flows in the forward direction to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. . As a result, a forward current flows in the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

  The +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (the sixth terminal) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial control I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main cycle serial data transmission signal, and the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is input to the input terminal of.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 by a power failure or a momentary power failure, The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as the +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 by applying +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to the main control MPU 1310a when power or momentary interruption occurs The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the built-in main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae can be completely transmitted, and the main cycle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main cycle serial data is cut off. It is ensured that the peripheral control board 1510 is received without being damaged or being lost.

  When the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of main control MPU 1310a to peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR 50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. Logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned ON to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main voltage serial data transmission signal whose voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It is the logic of

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the +5 V power supply line to which +5 V as the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a is applied, and the +12 V power supply line to which +12 V as the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to the occurrence of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. That is, for the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a, a +5 V power supply line, and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310 h as the first auxiliary power, Are electrically connected in parallel, and even if a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5 V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is configured from resistance MR50, resistance MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. Reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, +12 V applied to the +12 V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply Even if a voltage for communication applied from the +12 V power supply line via the diode MD 50 drops due to a power failure or a momentary interruption due to the parallel connection of the terminal and the circuit, the second auxiliary power supply By applying the communication voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the disconnection of the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and to prevent the dropout, so the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the dropout of the command immediately after the occurrence of the power failure or at the momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 1310 a contained in the main control MPU 1310 a are all constituted of the resistance MR50, the resistances MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 as main transmission serial data. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the reset function-free main control output circuit 1310cb that functions as a communication interface circuit. And 220 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb are reset to function as interface circuits as main cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the function-free main control output circuit 1310 cb, the peripheral control board 1510 may drop without dropping or disconnecting a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. Can be received reliably.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control substrate 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit etc. of the payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The first terminal of payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of capacitor PC0 grounded. The capacitor (PC0) first removes +5 V from the power supply substrate 931 from the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) and smoothes it. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which the noise component is removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to ground (GND), the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc. . When a power failure or an instantaneous interruption occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power from the pachinko facility is shut off, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 causes a power interruption or an instantaneous interruption. After generation, it is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded, and the +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (a discharge control built-in RAM) built in the discharge control MPU 952a, and a capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and via the resistor PR0, the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the Thus, as described above, when +5 V generated by power supply generation circuit 935 d of power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to payout control substrate 951, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is paid off VBB. Because the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is supplied to the payout control substrate 951 as The stored contents are kept by applying a payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is configured by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 is reset as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. 80 in addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 MHz in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 is for resetting the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC5, and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (for example, 4.25 V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function are activated when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold. Reset is applied to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC7, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC8 at one end, and +5 V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by removing ripples further. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded with the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input through the power supply substrate 931, and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, and subsequently, the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, and the circuit to which the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Note that various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279 and the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, so here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is other than the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded. Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC20 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 20 A)) payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR25 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24, and is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of main control substrate 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, The contact constituting the door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of resistors PR21 and PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24 and PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26 and PR27 and transistor PTR22 It is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from 618.

In the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame open switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame open signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Ru. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Thus, a door frame open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, since the door frame open switch 618 is off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is an input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952 a by turning on the door frame open switch 618. An outer end frame door open information output signal input to PA0 and having a logic HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal having a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, In the state where the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, when the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which detection signal from main frame open switch is input]
The main frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is the other of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR30 which is grounded. The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC21 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and connected with the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. As the transistor PTR23 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  The No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR32 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of transistor PTR 24 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310 b of main control substrate 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, or when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, The contact constituting the main body frame open switch 619 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the main body frame open switch 619 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR 29 and PR 30 and the transistor PTR 23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR 31 and PR 32 and the transistor PTR 24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619.

  When the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in a state where main body frame 4 is opened from outer frame 2, since main body frame open switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is the main control board It is input to 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 The main frame door open signal whose logic has become HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF to The outer end frame door open information output signal with the LOW being input is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with the logic set to LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Even in this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it can not be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state where the player does not occur during normal game that the main frame 4 is open has occurred, and an external terminal frame 784 has an outer end frame door open information output signal. This outer end is designed to be input The door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, Or although it can not be determined whether the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, there is a state where the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open does not occur during normal gaming. It can be determined that it is occurring.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even in the state of conducting), the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and the body frame open switch 619 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 as a normally closed switch, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are replaced with a normally closed switch (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 'and body frame opening switch 619') The door frame opening switch 618 'is turned on (conductive) in a state where the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4 and turned off (disconnected) in a state where the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . When the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conductive) and when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is broken for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body for some reason Even when the frame opening switch 619 'is disconnected and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Thus, even when the door frame opening switch 618 'and the body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of disconnection. The outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). Circuit to which the delivery blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the delivery blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 through the PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR42 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 40 A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. As the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input as the payout failure notification signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  A circuit configured of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of two voltages of +12 V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 931, and detects no signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts, no reset function A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310 cb. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the + 24V voltage is larger than the blackout detection voltage V1pf, and the + 12V voltage is higher than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When both conditions of large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 951 through the wiring (harness), and the logic is LOW. While the paid out blackout notification signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When the condition is met, the transistor MTR22 of the rear stage Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the detection failure voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage + 12V is larger than the detection failure voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a blackout or a momentary loss of voltage of + 12V and + 24V. At the same time, since the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the payout control substrate 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when one of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, that is, +12 V and / or +24 V When there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no indication of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notification signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a according to the blackout notice and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is a payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is a full detection sensor 3 through the resistor PR44b. The terminal filter PIC50 is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 through the resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC 50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND) in addition to the electrical connection to the resistor PR45, and one end is connected to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and also a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40 B).) Payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as the full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 270 is full with the stored gaming balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931, When a signal that is pulled up to +12 V by pull-up resistor 44a and becomes HI in logic on payout control board 951 is input to payout control board 951, while the storage space is full with stored gaming balls , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. The transistor PTR41 is turned on by inputting the signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, the full signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full with the gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is the payout control board via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. The signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and having a logic LOW at 951 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 described above, whereby the transistor PTR 41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR47, and a full signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit configured of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 through the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration is employed, detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as a three-terminal filter PIC50 for full detection sensor. It has a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the fal cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the delivery detection sensor 842 and the like provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 270 is full with the gaming balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the storage space is full by storing the gaming space, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout rotating body is stopped. It is supposed to control. That is, when noise intrudes into the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not full of the gaming balls with the storage space stored, but In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming balls by the payout rotating body is stopped, and it is possible to drive the payout motor 834 despite the fact that the storage space is full with the reserved gaming balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body and continuing the payout of the gaming ball, the payout rotary body itself can not rotate and the payout motor 834 Load is applied abnormally, and the discharge motor 834 is overloaded to generate abnormal heat and malfunction, or the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational movement of the discharge rotor. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first selected so that noise components are removed from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the three terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR50 whose ground is grounded. Further, the fourth terminal, which is an output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC41 which is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR53 whose ground is grounded. The emitter terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40 C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is changed by turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages, and the signal becomes an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR56 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR 44 is electrically connected to main control substrate 1310 through a wiring (harness), one end of main control input circuit 1310 b of main control substrate 1310 shown in FIG. 77 has +12 V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR 44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA 0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact constituting the operation switch 954 repeats ON / OFF for a short time. The circuit is also configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit at the former stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit at the latter stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44 Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payment control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power on and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time to time, and an error release after the power is turned on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period has passed from the time of power on) It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) In the function to perform the error cancellation in the above, it becomes an error cancellation signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned ON while the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the previous stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR54 and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after power on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge not to indicate.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal of which the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR 44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is pulled down to the main control board 1310 when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness). It is input. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic “LOW” shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW becomes the transistor of the previous stage. The transistor PTR42 at the front stage is turned off and the switch circuit at the front stage is also turned off when input to the base terminal of the PTR42, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 at the rear stage. Is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, so that the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the RWMCLR signal whose voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is applied to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the command is to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge that it is something to indicate.

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation becomes logic LOW by the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic HI shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it instructs to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952 da are electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and the +5 V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and +5 V are applied respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952 da is connected to ground (GND) It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be The power supply output terminal of voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals which are the cathode terminals of drive IC PIC 60 via Zener diode PZD 60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of payout motor 834. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952 da. While supplying to the terminal and the 10th terminal respectively, it supplies to the payout motor 834.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. A payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second, fourth, ninth, and eleventh terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, which are collector terminals, are the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 respectively via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is used. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca through the resistors PR60 to PR63 of the drive ICPIC60 It is outputted to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 834 to rotate the dispensing motor 834. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is interrupted | blocked by this switching, counter electromotive force generate | occur | produces. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the game ball request signal BRDY from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout operation start request signal BRQ. , And supplied with a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 71, while the payout control substrate 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball Through terminal plate 869, an EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a dispensing operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 Sometimes, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and also via the resistor PR72 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR74 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and a non-inverting buffer FIG. 80 through ICPIC80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. As the transistor PTR70 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and that signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR76 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line at one end, not shown. Electrically connected to the other end of the As the transistor PTR71 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and switching circuit It will turn on. Thus, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PTR75 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Ru.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and switching circuit It will turn on. Thus, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. Ru.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931 Be done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80 B) without inverting). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same logic as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photo coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned on, while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is connected to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or completed is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the resetting function. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is input from 952 cb via a resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal via the reset function-free output control circuit 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes as the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON / OFF, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic is HI The EXS is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb It is the same logic.

  The PRDY signal which indicates that the dispensing operation for dispensing the lent ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the signal output via the reset function-free output control circuit 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic is HI PRDY is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb It is the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Be done. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as a payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 cb without reset function from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a. There is no reset function. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 c b to the main control board 1310.

  The RWMCLR signal, the payout blackout notification signal, the door open signal, the full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) are connected to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition to the signal 1 etc.) being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 which indicates the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output via the payout control input circuit 952b. The detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are respectively input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are respectively output to the payout control output no payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a, and the EXS signal from the reset function no payout control output circuit 952cb The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 through the payout motor drive circuit 952 d In addition to The main control of the payout ACK signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with the reset function is outputted to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, the payment ACK signal notifying the completion of the normal reception completion of the main payment serial data reception signal described above. The drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca as shown in FIG. Output to etc.

10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input and output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the payout control board 951 includes the above-described payee serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. Are output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310 b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 951 is a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output signal, game such as starting opening winning information output signal The game information signal and the payout blackout notice signal, etc., are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control substrate 951.

10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as a winning ball by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Big prize information of the prize ball number information output signal outputted each time, the main prize sphere number information output signal, the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 Outputs game information signals such as output signals, probability fluctuation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time information output signals, start opening winning information output signals, etc. to external terminal board 784 Do. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. In other words, two signals are outputted to the external terminal board 784, the outer end frame door open information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output information signal, and starting opening winning combination information Eight signals called output signals are outputted (passed) through the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15 round big hit information output signal or the 2 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer as one big hit information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of times the round has become 2 rounds (2 round big hit) The number of times of occurrence of the jackpot), the number of times of big hit when the round has become 15 times (number of times of occurrence of big hit of 15 rounds), and the sum is the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, since the hole computer can not grasp the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit and the number of occurrences of the 15 land big hit from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large It can not be grasped whether it is a two round big hit or a 15 round big hit. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and among the players, it is selected whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, since the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit, even if the player starts the game, only the 2 round big hit occurs. There are times when the 15 round big hit does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, the player's irritability may be more than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hall computer generates two rounds of big hit occurrences by separately outputting 15 round big hit information output signals and two round big hit information output signals to the hole computer as big hit information output signals. It has become possible to accurately grasp the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the 2 round big hit or the 15 round big hit, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big hit and the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit as the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period until the 2 round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is also 15 round big hits. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer in the period from the generation to the end. As in the present embodiment, in addition to the method of outputting the 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information output signal to the hall computer, for example, when 2 round big hit occurs, the 2 round big hit information output signal is only for a predetermined period. Such a two round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information such that the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period when it is output to the hole computer and 15 round big hit occurs There is also a method of outputting an output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals of External Terminal Board]
Next, an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the award ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side is covered by the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 shows an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes an outer end frame door open information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal and a 2 round big hit information output signal. When the big hit information output signal, the probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time in-short information output signal, and the starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  The outer end frame door open information output signal does not occur during the normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A prize ball number information output signal is a signal indicating that a state has occurred, and the payout ball number information output signal shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal shown in FIG. 8 is a variety of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening It is a signal that tells you that the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls based on the gaming ball entered to 10 reaches 10, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is a 15 round big hit In the state 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal to tell that it is in the state where 2 round big hit is occurring, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is in the state where probability fluctuation occurs The special symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped state, and the variation display of the normal symbol is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. There is a signal that indicates that there is a time, the medium-time information output signal is a signal that indicates that a short-time condition is occurring, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first starting opening 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  As shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in line in the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white to output a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that indicates that the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the prize ball number information output signal as the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball. While being able to grasp that the game ball of the ball is paid out as a prize ball, it is possible to count the number of balls of the game ball paid out and grasp the total number of balls of the game ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green to output an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not occur during the normal game that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. And, in the present embodiment, the signal is outputted from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door open information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that indicates that it is in the state, and in this embodiment, the end (the stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and counting the number of times, the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405.

  The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow to output a starting opening winning combination information output signal. As described above, the starting opening winning combination information output signal is a signal that indicates the fact that the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 and, in this embodiment, Each time the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 from the output terminal PT4, the output is made for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning combination information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning combination information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting opening 2004 and counting the number of times the starting opening winning information output signal is input to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of balls of the game ball which has entered the ball.

  The output terminal PT5 is applied in black to output a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15 round big hit information output signal is a signal indicating that 15 round big hit is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the 15 round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15 round big hit information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates 15 round big hits in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round big hit information output signal is being input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times that the 15 round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the 15 rounds of big hit have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is pinked to output a two-round big hit information output signal. The two-round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round big hit has occurred, as described above, and in the present embodiment, while a two round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times the two-round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the pachinko machine 1 has generated two round big hits.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol, In this embodiment, output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped) in 1402 and count the number of times, and the total displayed the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 by fluctuation. You can know the number of times.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red to output an information output signal during time saving. The time-shortening information output signal is a signal that indicates that the time-shortening state is occurring, as described above, and in the present embodiment, is outputted from the output terminal PT8 while the time-shortening state is occurring. ing. When an information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is generating a time-spacing state when the information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input. As well as counting the number of times that the information output signal is input during the short time, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has a short time.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided in orange to output an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal indicating that probability fluctuation is occurring, and in the present embodiment, is outputted while the probability fluctuation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates a probability fluctuation in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. While being able to grasp a certain thing, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has a probability fluctuation.

  The output terminal PT10 is given in light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that indicates that the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls based on the balls that have reached the ball reaches 10, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives 10 balls of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is scheduled to pay out the game ball as a prize ball, count the number of balls of the game ball which is due to be paid out, grasp the total number of balls of the game ball which pachinko machine 1 is due to pay out can do. In addition, for example, the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls entered into various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001, 2201, and the large winning hole 2005 etc. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds. As in the case of one continuous signal, the signals are output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals outputted on the side of the payout control board 951, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are main control board Various signals outputted on the side of 1310 are arranged to be outputted (passed) through the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting a wiring having a connector in the same color as the color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously made electric Connection can be prevented. The various signals output on the payout control substrate 951 are transmitted to the hall computer so that the various signals output on the payout control substrate 951 and the various signals output on the main control substrate 1310 are not mixed. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 of the external terminal plate 784 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 to the hall computer are By arranging them in a line from the center left side to the right side, also at this point, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hole computer, and various types output on the main control board 1310 side Incorrect wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 are respectively halls from the external terminal board 784 It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the gaming ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the gaming ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the jackpot happens to hit 15 rounds on the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the number of gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the gaming balls as prize balls runs out, so payout is made (If, for example, a ball clogged or a ball clogged in the payout device 830, the game ball can not be paid out if it can not be eliminated). Then, as described above, the winning ball number information output signal outputted on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 balls the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. Since it is a signal that indicates that each time, the payout control board 951 can output the prize ball number information output signal and can transmit it to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784 by not being able to pay out the gaming balls. become unable. When the gaming ball is not paid out, the player calls a store clerk or the like in the hall. A clerk in the hall, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle or the like for supplying gaming balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720, and specifies the position of the ball jam (also, for example, occurs in the dispensing device 830). The game ball is returned to the state of being paid out by solving the above by specifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball blind.

  However, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall is working, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, the game ball is paid out by the work of the store clerk or the like after 15 rounds of big hit When the state returns to the normal state, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid gaming balls one after another, and even though it is a time when 15 rounds of big hits have ended and 15 rounds of big hits have not occurred, the payout control boards 951 Outputs an award ball number information output signal to notify that effect each time the number of game balls actually paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls by the payout motor 834 and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 It will be. Then, although it is a time when 15 rounds of jackpots are not generated, a very large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of pachinko machine 1 and the number of balls of game balls paid out There is a problem that the hole computer can not accurately grasp the relationship between

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control substrate 951 to actually pay out as a winning ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control substrate 951. The main control board 1310 enters the various game winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal indicating that the number of gaming balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 Adopted a mechanism to communicate to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-described trouble (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls scheduled to be released and the number of balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hole computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320, A liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450 V is a serial signal (serial data) based on the differential system of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect of the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. Are transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively. The noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise is separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. Restore to three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) (that is, parallel signals before being serialized). The red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are, as described above, those in which the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the built-in VDP 1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, they are upper 6 bits in each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450 V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Two signals in which certain LOCKN signal output request data are differentiated into plus signal and minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, forced switching circuit 1512 f of peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentiated into plus signal and minus signal in differentiation circuit 1512 e, when these two signals are input. When the two circuits differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect as shown in FIG. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512 e, the two signals are connected in order to transmit the two signals, and thus the two signals are The difference is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, When two signals differentiated into plus signal and minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from transmitter IC 1512 d for frame side effect is transmitted from peripheral control board 1510 to a frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forced switching circuit 1512 f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e are not input, that is, the door frame A serial signal (serial data) based on a differential method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of “S-Electronics Inc.'s“ V-by-One (registered trademark) ”from the transmitter IC 1512 d for side effect as a plus signal and minus signal And 868, and are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and to the RXIN + and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When the two signals differentiated into the source signal and the negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and then input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is an output request for the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512e, A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, produces the start screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on During a period displayed on the display device 1600 or a period in which a demonstration is performed by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and effect display The door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Shine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of a company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that it is data, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output, LOCKN signal output request data having a data format different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are respectively supplied with +3.3 V created by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDS GND request paper, PLL GND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE 0, and MODE 1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to ground.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal to the GND terminal which is a ground for the digital circuit, and a +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and the capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal serving as the ground for the LVDS input, and supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and the capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PDWN terminal indicates that the logic is HI and normal operation is given by +3.3 V being supplied (applied), while the +3.3 supply is stopped and the logic is low and power is reduced. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and over voltage of the +3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal is a rising edge of transmission of various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal described later. This terminal is used to designate either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and in the present embodiment, the terminal As such, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, the rising edge can be specified.

  The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit the output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC 0 to SYNC 2 terminals, D 0 to D 17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminals) described later, and in the present embodiment, the above-described embodiment As described above, the output is always enabled by connecting the OE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, it will be in a state where it can not output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal): horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In this mode, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to be switched automatically.

  For example, three video signals (video signals of 18 bits) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, For the reason that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) such as horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal, it is abnormal for some reason If it is difficult to draw on the door-frame-side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistance SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via The peripheral control MPU 1511a confirms a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to convey that effect to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver For the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the Send to receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored by receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door It may be electrically connected directly via the relay terminal plate 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between them. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive substrate 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the periphery The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is input via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal restored are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal which indicates that data output from the D0 to D17 terminals which are data output terminals are valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  Terminals D0 to D17 are three video signals (18 red, green and blue video signals restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN + and RXIN− terminals, respectively (18 It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals such as D0 to D5 terminals, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each of the door frame side effect display devices 460 is inputted through the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and the signal lines of the red video signals R0 to R5 are damping resistors. The information is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other. It has become.

[Mounting aspect of each electronic component possessed by first control unit MCG and second control unit SCG]
By the way, it is generally known that surface mounting of electronic components is advantageous in that the miniaturization can be suitably achieved by integration. However, in the case of integrated circuit parts (parts enclosed in a relatively large package by integration of multiple types of single-function elements (such as resistance elements, diode elements, or capacitor elements) among electronic parts, Due to the nature of the package itself becomes larger than discrete components (components in which one single functional element is enclosed in a relatively small package), a relatively large space is created on the back side of the package. And the space on the back side of such a package will become a part (position where electronic parts (illegal parts) are likely to be illegally mounted) which are difficult to check by visual observation in the surface mounting state. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (so-called base substrate etc.) instead of surface mounting for many years.

  That is, the electronic components to be insert-mounted tend to create a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting the electronic component, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a spot that can be easily confirmed visually even in the mounted state, whereby the illegal component can be mounted. It is made to be suitably suppressed.

  However, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the size of the space provided for presentation has been further increased, and the hardware circuit has been miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It is becoming required to plan.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second control unit, which is only for performing effect control regarding a game, among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69. In view of the fact that the SCG is not directly related to the benefit obtained by the player and is not easily targeted for fraud, first, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

  That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment is configured to include the peripheral control substrate 1510 as shown in FIG. The second control unit SCG uses the various integrated circuit parts mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 and the various discrete parts to perform the progression of effects according to the result of the above-mentioned game progression process. Is made feasible.

  Here, examples of various integrated circuit components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510 include a peripheral control MPU 1511a and a peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. Also, as various kinds of discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510, there are, for example, resistors AR10 and AR11, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10, etc. shown in FIG.

  In this respect, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, the lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510) on the surface of the base plate. Only the surface mounting area to be mounted in a form is formed. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) are also used as the various electronic components described above that the peripheral control substrate 1510 has. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and are not subject to fraud, the security performance against the unauthorized loading of the electronic components is not degraded. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be miniaturized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment is configured to include the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The first control unit MCG uses the various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the substrates 1310, 951, and 931 to generate the control power supply (for example, +5 V). It is possible to execute processing related to a game including generation processing and payout of prize balls. However, since such processing on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly linked to the awarding of a player's benefit, the first control unit MCG is likely to be an object of fraud. Therefore, although the miniaturization of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of the electronic component is significantly reduced, and the game is entertaining. The fact is that the decline in

  However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on its base plate (base substrate of main control substrate 1310, base substrate of payout control substrate 951, base substrate of power supply substrate 931) Among the various electronic components, discrete components have smaller packages than integrated circuit components, and even if the electronic components are improperly mounted on the back side, they can be easily confirmed visually. It can be said that the parts have relatively high performance as security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic parts.

  That is, the inventor found that among the electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG, components having high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components having low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components) are mixed. If attention is paid to the fact that further integration as a hardware circuit is achieved only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud, the above-mentioned first control unit MCG side that is easily subject to fraud also It has been found that it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically showing a state in which integration is achieved only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud in the first control unit MCG. Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 117, the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of the electronic component on the side of the first control unit MCG which is likely to be a target of the illegality. Explain that it is.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment is configured to include a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. . Note that FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technology according to the present application, and, for example, the base plate BB is actually a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate Although the three base substrates of the base substrate of 951 and the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931 are provided, an example in which the characteristic technology according to the present invention is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. As a matter of fact, here, for convenience of explanation, first, it will be described on the assumption that they are configured by one base substrate.

Here, the base plate BB is
An insertion mounting area TH which is mounted in a form in which a lead portion provided in an electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB and which is inferior in integrated performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance;
The surface mounting region SM is excellent in integration performance due to the multi-layering of wiring patterns, etc., with the lead portion provided in the electronic component being mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the surface mounting area SM Both are provided separately.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to mount an electronic component that is not easily targeted for fraud in the surface mounting area SM, but the electronic component that should be pursued for suppressing fraud rather than being integrated is mounted on the insertion mounting area TH side While making it possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit, it is possible to preferably maintain the suppression performance for the mounting of the illegal part.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
· An integrated circuit component D1 having a low security performance against improper mounting, in which multiple types of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package.
The single function element is only enclosed in a relatively small package, and is provided with a discrete component D2 with high security performance against improper mounting.

  In this respect, as the first characteristic technology according to the present invention, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance is covered with the insertion mounting area TH and the surface. The mounting is performed only in the insertion mounting area TH which is excellent in the fraud suppression performance among the mounting areas SM, and in the surface mounting area SM which is inferior in the fraud suppression performance, only the discrete component having the high security performance is mounted. As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of the electronic component even on the side of the first control unit MCG which is likely to be a target of the illegal operation.

  Further, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, surface mount type discrete components D2a and the discrete components D2 mounted on the surface mount area SM as the discrete components D2 with high security performance. , And an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH.

  That is, as described above, with regard to the electronic components, generally, the use of the surface mounting type, rather than the insertion mounting type, can achieve integration. However, when both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately as the base plate BB, for example, the position at which the integrated circuit component D1 electrically connected is provided in circuit design. In view of the balance with the space where the wiring pattern related to this and the wiring pattern is provided, etc., it is possible to reverse the integration if the electronic component is arranged not in the surface mounting area SM but in the insertion mounting area TH. Cases can also occur.

  In this respect, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment does not use all of the discrete components D2 as the surface mount type discrete components D2a, but in such a manner as to be the most suitable mode for achieving integration. The insertion mounting type discrete component D2b is used in part. As a result, it is expected that miniaturization of the hardware circuit can be more suitably achieved while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic component.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting area TH excellent in fraud suppression performance is not formed on the surface on one side (back side) of the substrate, and is formed on the surface on the other side (front side) And both integrated circuit components are mounted respectively. On the other hand, the surface mounting area SM, which is inferior to the fraud suppression performance, is not formed on the surface on one side (back side) of the substrate, and is formed on the surface on the other side (front side). It is desirable that one of the integrated circuit components is not mounted and only discrete components are mounted. That is, in this case, mounting of the mounting electronic component on the back side which is likely to be a blind spot is first excluded when confirming whether or not the illegal component is mounted. Then, on this, in the insertion mounting area TH which is excellent in the fraud suppression performance, both the integrated circuit component which is easy to be a fraud target and the discrete component which is hard to be a fraud target are mounted. By mounting only discrete components that are unlikely to be targets for fraud in the inferior surface mounting area SM, it is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining suppression performance for loading of the fraudulent components. It will be.

  Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even with the discrete component D2 with high security performance, the capacitor element with the largest capacitance value among the capacitor elements (backup In the case of power supplies, etc., the surface mounting area in view of its relatively larger shape than other elements (such as resistor elements, diode elements, and capacitor elements with a small capacitance value (such as filter circuits)). The surface mounting type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM is not used, and only the insertion mounting type discrete component D2b-C mounted on the insertion mounting area TH is prepared. As a result, when miniaturizing the hardware circuit, it is possible to more suitably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic component.

  However, although the capacitor element having a large capacitance value is larger than other elements (discrete components), there is no case where a very large gap is generated between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit component D1. . Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM, and even in this case, the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components is maintained. Is possible.

  Moreover, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, the second characteristic unique to the first technology inherent to the present invention described above is inherently included. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, one hardware circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). Are included as discrete circuits (hardware circuits not using the integrated circuit component D1) DHC electrically configured by the discrete components D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure constituted by a plurality of discrete components D2 which are respectively mounted in an insertion mounting area TH and a surface mounting area SM.

  That is, in this case, although it is one discrete circuit DHC aiming to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), mounting on the insertion mounting area TH is performed on the base plate BB. An electronic component D2b having a shape that can be made possible and an electronic component D2a that has a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area SM are mixed. Therefore, when a third party views the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it hard to recall that there is a problem, and even if the difficulty of understanding such a circuit is enhanced, the suppression of fraud can be expected. In addition, by mounting a part of the electronic components in the surface mounting area SM, miniaturization of the hardware circuit can be expected.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suppressing fraud on the electronic component.

  However, as described above, since the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principle of the two distinctive techniques according to the present invention, next, with respect to the example in which the respective techniques are applied to the embodiment of the present application explain.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, and the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931. And three base substrates. Then, on these base substrates, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided in a divided manner.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, only the insertion mounting area TH is formed on the power supply substrate 931 of the three base substrates, and the base of the main control substrate 1310 In the substrate and the base substrate of the above-mentioned delivery control substrate 951, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately.

  Then, among the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 of the aforementioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM” (FIG. 75 Is mounted on the surface mounting area SM of the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 as a surface mounting type discrete component D2a. Similarly to this, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) of the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the delivery control internal RAM” is mounted on the surface of the base substrate of the delivery control substrate 951. In the region SM, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is to be mounted.

  According to such a configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2 with high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is a surface mount type discrete component D2a. It comes to be mounted on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, delivery control board 951). As a result, the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of the electronic component on the side of the first control unit MCG which is likely to be a target of the illegal operation (see FIG. 6). Characteristic first technology according to the present invention).

  Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, in the surface mounting area SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, discrete components of a specific type (here, the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are both Schottky) Only a plurality of diode elements will be mounted. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM inferior in the fraud suppression performance will have the same shape, it is expected that the labor required for the fraud confirmation is saved.

  Further, in the above configuration, discrete components (electronic components having a part of the power supply function) that the power supply substrate 931 should originally have are intentionally mounted on the side of the substrate (main control substrate 1310) different from the power supply substrate 931. I have to. That is, even if there is no space for forming the surface mounting area SM on the power supply substrate 931, the surface mounting area SM is formed on another substrate and mounted as a discrete component D2 of the surface mounting type there. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, a capacitor element and a Schottky diode element) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. Despite the provision of the plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC, the plurality of discrete components D2 are separately mounted in the insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and the surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). It is supposed to be.

  According to such a configuration, although it is one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) aiming to exhibit a backup power supply function, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply substrate) on the base plate BB Electronic component D2b having a shape enabling mounting on 931) and electronic component D2a having a shape enabling mounting on surface mounting area SM (main control substrate 1310, payout control substrate 951) are mixed become. Therefore, when a third party views the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it hard to recall that there is a problem, and it becomes possible to suppress fraud even if the difficulty of understanding such a circuit is enhanced (the second characteristic technique of the present application).

  Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function, the insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) Not only separately mounting on the surface mounting region SM (Schottky diode element), but also two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (Schottky diode element), power board In this case, electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting are to be mounted on different base substrates. And the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be further enhanced. So incorrect suppression can be further expected.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as apparent from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting area SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the insertion mounting area TH in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided to be smaller in area than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mounting area SM inferior to the fraud suppression performance is provided, and it becomes possible to expect fraud suppression.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as that of the base plate of the first control unit MCG. It is provided to be smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in BB. Therefore, the number of types of electronic components to be subjected to the visual check as to whether or not the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM relatively inferior in security performance are tampered with is relatively reduced Thus, visual check can be facilitated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the number in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided to be smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components to be subjected to a visual check as to whether or not the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area relatively inferior in security performance have been tampered with is relatively reduced. , It will be possible to reduce the load on the visual check.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mounting area SM is provided on the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, respectively. You may form.

  Also, the surface mounting area SM is formed only on a specific base substrate, and discrete components D2 of the surface mounting type to be originally mounted on other base substrates are also collectively disposed on the specific base substrate. It is also good. According to such a configuration, it is only necessary to mainly check the surface mounting area SM formed on a specific base substrate when checking whether illegal mounting is performed or not. It is expected that the time and effort required can be saved.

  However, in view of the fact that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the above three base substrates, at least the insertion mounting region TH must be formed on any of the three base substrates in order to preferably prevent fraud You must.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, and the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931. Although the three base substrates are provided, they may be collectively configured on one base substrate as schematically shown in FIG.

  Further, the “base plate BB of the first control unit MCG” according to the present application only needs to divide the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH, and this is provided by a plurality of base substrates. It may be provided by one base substrate.

  For example, as a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, the first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed, and the second base substrate in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed, the second base By inserting and mounting the substrate in the insertion mounting area TH of the first base substrate, it is possible to maintain the security performance against illegal mounting of the electronic component while the electronic is inserted and mounted in the first base substrate. Although it may be assumed that a structure is adopted in which the component and the electronic component surface-mounted on the second base substrate are electrically connected to each other, in this case, the “base of the first control unit MCG “Plate BB” is a concept including at least a first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and a second base substrate in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. . That is, such an aspect is also one of the aspects such as “in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately.” It is included as an aspect.

  When the first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and the second base substrate in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed, the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided. It is desirable that the first base substrate and the second base substrate be disposed such that the first base substrate and the second base substrate are oriented in different directions (preferably, orthogonal directions).

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is an electronic component sealed in a relatively small package as a component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting area SM inferior in fraud suppression performance. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting the illegal components (reducing the space on the back side).

  However, even if it is a discrete component (surface mounting component) excellent in such security performance, there is a small space on the back side, but it is difficult to confirm by visual observation in the state mounted in the surface mounting area SM. It is still left. Therefore, as the hole side that operates and manages the pachinko machine 1, it can be understood that "the space for mounting the illegal part is not left behind on the back side of the discrete part (surface mounted part)" Even in the situation where it is difficult to completely discard the sense of insecurity such as "very small fraudulent parts are produced and this may be loaded improperly" There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 will be complicated, such as being forced to confirm.

  Therefore, it is more preferable to provide the main control substrate 1310 and the base substrates of the payout control substrate 951 in the following manner, instead of the above-described manner.

[Modified Example of Each Base Substrate of Main Control Substrate 1310 and Dispensing Control Substrate 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a partial region of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to the modification. Hereinafter, a modification of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. Although a modification of the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951 will be omitted, it can be modified with the same contents as the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 described below.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least the insertion mounting substrate THB which is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance.

  Then, also in the insertion mounting substrate THB according to the modification, as in the insertion mounting substrate TH of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted in a form of being inserted. Also, similarly, among the electronic components (insertion mounting components), both the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2b with high security performance are included.

  However, as apparent from FIG. 118, in the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to this modification, the insertion mounting lead is inserted into the insertion mounting substrate THB and the insertion mounting substrate THB. The electronic components to be mounted in the form are kept provided. That is, although the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to this modification has both the surface mounting area and the surface mounting components mounted in the area, any of them may be It is decided to adopt a special mounting structure that appears to be missing.

  More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes the special mounting parts D3 (in the figure, special mounting parts in addition to the integrated circuit parts D1 and the discrete parts D2b as the insertion mounting parts). D3a, special mounting component D3b). Although this special mounting component D3 incorporates an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting area which is inferior in fraud suppression performance to the above-mentioned insertion mounting substrate THB in a state where it is concealed It is inserted and mounted through a special insertion mounting lead TL described later.

  According to such a special mounting component D3, despite the fact that the surface mounting area described later and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted on the surface mounting area are respectively provided therein, fraud suppression It is expected to be removed from the target parts for fraudulent purposes by malicious persons because it has an appearance shape that looks like it is one insertion mounting part mounted on the high performance insertion mounting board THB. It can be done. In the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the surface mounting parts are mounted on the part of the insertion mounting board THB where the special mounting parts D3 are inserted and mounted. It will function as an area.

  Moreover, in the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not provided collectively (adjacently) at one place, but at a plurality of places on the base substrate MB. While distributing, at least one of the special mounting components D3 (in the figure, the special mounting component D3a) is arranged to be surrounded by a relatively large area (insertion mounting area) in which the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. It is supposed to set up.

  That is, in this case, the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance and the electronic components (surface mounting components) mounted on the surface mounting area are divided into portions and become inconspicuous, and in addition to the appearance shape described above, The surface mounting area exists when a malicious person looks at the base board MB of the main control board 1310 because it becomes better integrated into the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area. In particular, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice, and as a result, it is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of the illegal part more suitably.

  Although described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as the surface mount type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is enclosed in the special mounted component D3a according to this modification. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, also in this modification, the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and the surface mounting area (Schottky diode element) for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) (Diode MD0)) and mounted separately. Moreover, for the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area, a position (such as the power supply substrate 931) not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a incorporating the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area To be implemented in

  As described above, it is made difficult to recall that the electronic component incorporated in the special mounting component D3a exerts a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), thereby enhancing the difficulty of circuit understanding. Thus, even if it is noticed that there is a surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance, fraud suppression can be expected.

  Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. In FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, the part on which the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and a part of the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is omitted to reveal the internal structure thereof. The figure (part surrounded by dotted line) is included.

  As is shown together with the explanatory view, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification is a special surface mounting substrate SMB as a surface mounting substrate on which a surface mounting type electronic component (surface mounting component) is mounted, Surface mount type discrete components D2a mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB, and special insert mounting lead portions as insertion mount lead portions inserted into through holes (specific insertion holes) of the insertion mount substrate THB It comprises TL and an outer package OP which molds each of these portions with a mold resin.

  Here, the special surface mounting substrate SMB electrically connects the surface mounting lead portion SL provided on the electronic component (surface mounting type discrete component D2a) mounted on the substrate and the special insertion mounting lead portion TL. As well as having a wiring pattern HP formed so as to be connected, it is provided so that the mounting surface thereof is in a substantially orthogonal relationship with the mounting surface of the insertion mounting substrate THB.

  The surface area of the mounting surface of the special surface mounting board SMB remains at a size sufficient to mount the surface mounting type discrete component D2a, and is required, for example, when the integrated circuit component constituting the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. It has been made to have only a mounting surface of an area smaller than the assumed area. That is, in the insertion mounting substrate THB, even in the state where all the electronic components required to operate the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there remains a spare space for mounting other electronic components, whereas the special mounting In the surface mounting substrate SMB, in order to miniaturize the surface mounting substrate SMB, when the electronic component to be mounted (surface discrete type discrete component D2a) is mounted, there is enough space for further mounting other electronic components. Not left.

  According to such a configuration, it will be difficult to apply some sort of fraud to the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and therefore the hardware circuit can be further miniaturized while suppressing the installation of the fraudulent parts. It will be expected.

  The surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) molded by a molding resin. Then, inside thereof, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mount lead portion SL formed to be drawn to the outside of the inner package (mold resin), and the surface mount lead portion SL is By electrically connecting to the special insertion mounting lead portion TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting substrate THB The Schottky diode element (the diode MD0) is electrically connected to perform processing in cooperation with each other.

  Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided in a flat outer shape (package shape), and is soldered in a form in which the flat surface faces the special surface mount substrate SMB. They are surface mounted. However, as described above, the mounting surface of the special surface mounting board SMB on which the discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type is mounted has a relation substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, the discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type provided in the special mounting component D3 is not a flat surface but a surface (thin surface) on the thin side facing the insertion mounting substrate THB. It will be implemented to be a form.

  In such a configuration, not a flat surface having a relatively large area, but a thin surface having only a relatively small area comes to face the insertion mounting substrate THB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, in insertion mounting substrate THB, only a small area (for two through holes) such that only one discrete component (insert mounting type) can be mounted is left. Even under such a situation, the special mounting component D3 can be disposed for the small area (for two through holes).

  The size (the length in the horizontal direction in the figure) of the discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type according to this modification is the size when the special mounting component D3a is mounted on the insertion mounting substrate THB. The pitch between through holes into which the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is inserted (the installation interval of a specific insertion hole) is smaller.

  Further, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mounting substrate SMB from the both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP is formed among the special surface mounting substrate SMB. By being soldered at the same place, it is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead SL through the wiring pattern HP. . On the other hand, the other end side is soldered in a state of being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting substrate THB so that it is fixed to the insertion mounting substrate THB and the insertion mounting substrate THB side They are electrically connected to various electronic components through the wiring pattern of

  Further, although the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded by a mold resin, a mold resin different from the mold resin is used. Thus, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double molded) on each of the special surface mount substrate SMB to be mounted.

  In such a configuration, it is considered extremely difficult to apply some type of fraud to a surface mounted substrate which is inferior in fraud suppression performance.

  In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the appearance shape produced by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the appearance shape of the specific type of surface mounting component itself internally surface-mounted. . That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a can be mounted in a state of concealing the external appearance of itself, it is possible that the surface mounting component of the specific type embedded in the special mounting component D3a is not mounted. It becomes more difficult to understand the circuit, and can be expected to suppress fraud.

  In addition, the outer package OP includes only the lead for special insertion mounting TL among the lead for special insertion mounting TL provided inside and the lead for surface mounting SL, and the outer package OP (mold resin) The surface mount type discrete component D2a is integrally molded with the special surface mount substrate SMB so that the special mount component D3a is inserted into a lead for insertion (special insert mounting). It mounts on the insertion mounting board | substrate THB as one electronic component which has the lead part TL).

  According to such a configuration, the special mounting component D3a can be provided despite the fact that the surface mounting substrate and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted on the substrate, which are inferior in fraud suppression performance, are provided therein. It is expected to be excluded from the target of fraudulent's fraudulent purpose because it can be functioned as if it is one insertion packaging part implemented in an insertion packaging area excellent in fraud suppression performance. It can be done. In addition, since it is possible to treat it equally as a single insertion mounting type discrete component also in the physical distribution and mounting, it can be said that such ease of handling is excellent.

  Furthermore, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mount type discrete component D2a whose lateral width is smaller than the pitch between through holes, by the molding resin different from the molding resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By integrally molding together with the target special surface mounting substrate SMB, the external shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between through holes is obtained.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is kept in the external shape smaller than the pitch between through holes in the insertion mounting area (the installation distance of the insertion holes), the main control board It becomes easy for a third party to notice that a surface mounting area inferior in anti-corruption performance is provided in the base substrate MB of 1310, which may further promote fraud.

  In this respect, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a, which has a width smaller than the pitch between through holes, is an electronic component having a size not within the pitch between through holes It is made to be implemented after giving an appearance shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, on the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310, there is no electronic component having an external shape whose lateral width is smaller than the pitch between through holes. Since it can appear as if only a type of electronic component (insertion mounting component) is mounted, it is possible to improve the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal component.

  Furthermore, the external shape produced by such an outer package OP is not only different from the external shape of the internally mounted surface-mounted electronic component, but all the insert-mounted components mounted on the insertion mounting substrate THB (special It is considered as a unique appearance shape different from any of the electronic components except the mounting component D3. That is, in the specially mounted component D3a according to this modification, excessive security performance such as protection by a double mold resin with respect to a mere discrete component D2a having only a limited function as compared with the arithmetic processing device etc. After being applied, it is made unique and has a relatively large appearance shape as an appearance shape for attracting the malicious person's attention.

  According to such a configuration, the excess security performance applied on the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 can be shown to a third party, thereby reducing the will to commit fraud. Can be expected.

  Furthermore, an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a is attached to the outer package OP, but in this modification, the contents (○ 3213) of the identification number are It is made to differ from the content (SD) of the identification number given to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB.

  According to such a configuration, since the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the specific type of surface mounted component does not appear, the external package OP is externally surface-mounted with the appearance shape generated by the external package OP. This difference from the external shape of the specific type of surface mounted component (in combination with the structure of the double mold) makes it possible to make it appear that the specific type of surface mounted component is not mounted. In addition, it can appear as if only the insertion mounting type electronic component (insert mounting component) is mounted, and the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal component can be improved.

  Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the length in the thickness direction of the special surface mounting board SMB is made smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the surface mounting type discrete component D2a. Then, on this, the mounting surface on which the electronic component and the wiring pattern are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and the mold resin is directly applied on the back surface side It has become.

  That is, by adopting such a configuration, an insertion mounting type in which the length in the thickness direction of the special mounting component D3a is mounted in the insertion mounting area TH as well as forming a unique and asymmetric appearance shape Is smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2b. Thus, in combination with the above-described structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other, there is no need to secure a special mounting space or the like when mounting the special mounting component D3a to the insertion mounting substrate THB. The special mounting component D3a can be incorporated while the insertion mounting component is mounted.

  Although the special mounting component D3a according to this modification appears as an insertion mounting type discrete component in appearance as described above, in actuality, the special surface mounting substrate SMB and the surface mounting type discrete component And D2a is included in the inside. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the lead portion TL for special insertion mounting is fixed internally to the special surface mounting substrate SMB and electrically connected to the lead portion SL for surface mounting via the wiring pattern HP. In contrast to the structure described above, in the insertion mounting component, the insertion mounting lead portion is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by the bonding wire inside thereof.

  Further, in base substrate MB of main control substrate 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 118, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the special mounting component D3a to be surface mounted, a special mounting component D3b to internally surface mount a capacitor element having a small capacitance value is provided.

  That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modification is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete mounting component type discrete components D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH and the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element. It forms a circuit. Even in such a filter circuit configuration, it is recalled that the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrical close role in order to exert a specific electrical function (filter function). It is possible to make it difficult to do so, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding these circuits, it will be possible to suppress fraud.

  In the special mounting component D3b, both of the resistor element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be surface-mounted on the special surface mounting board SMB. However, in this case, at least the electronic components having the highest height among the electronic components (insertion mounting components) to be inserted into and mounted on the insertion mounting substrate THB, such as arranging each electronic component in a row side by side For example, it is desirable from the viewpoint of miniaturizing the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 that the outer appearance shape lower than that of the capacitor element (not shown) or the like is left as it is.

  In addition, the special mounting component D3 may be one in which a plurality of types of electronic components are built in this way, or a plurality of one type of electronic components may be built in. In any case, in the case where a plurality of electronic components are incorporated, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted on one special surface mounting substrate SMB side by side and in a line, and the electronic components are mounted. It is desirable that the parts and the special surface mounting substrate SMB be collectively molded by a molding resin and packaged.

  However, when a plurality of electronic components are built in the special mounting component D3, the external shape naturally becomes large, and “it is an electronic component of a type that can be inserted and mounted with this size and shape. There is a concern that it may not be possible to expect a dazzling effect using a preconception, such as a discrete component of the insertion mounting type. Therefore, in order to preferably obtain the illusion effect using such a preconception, the appearance shape of the surface mount type discrete component alone is different depending on the structure of the above-mentioned double mold, and the thickness is thin. It is desirable that the surface be mounted so as to face the insertion mounting substrate TH.

  In addition to forming the above-mentioned double mold outer package OP with a non-transparent material such as mold resin, the outer package is an identification number different from the identification number given to the surface mount type discrete component itself. It is also important to make it difficult to understand the circuit by attaching it to the OP.

  The special mounting component D3 according to this modification has a structure having “one discrete surface mounting type discrete component” smaller than the “one discrete mounting component type” in the inside thereof. The size when double-molded is as large as “one discrete mounting type discrete part”, which makes it possible to expect to exert the above-mentioned excellent effects . Therefore, in the configuration in which the "one insertion mounting type of discrete component" is double molded by having it inside, the size becomes larger than the "one insertion mounting type of discrete component" Since it is clear, it can not be expected that the above-mentioned excellent effects can be achieved.

  Hereinafter, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized. Each content to be described below can be adopted by any of the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and another example thereof, and the technique described with reference to FIG. 118 and another example unless otherwise described. This is a configuration that is considered to be an effect that can be exhibited.

As described above, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 are:
・ Progress processing of the game including payout of prize balls in addition to processing of generation of control power supply (for example, + 5V etc.) by using a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and using these electronic components And a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, effects relating to the game advanced by the first control unit MCG are performed. Second control unit SCG
Game machine, which aims to solve the problems such as "to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component". .

  More specifically, in the technology described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, first, “play control relating to a game among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. In view of the fact that the above-mentioned second control unit SCG, which is only to be performed, is not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and is not easily regarded as an object of fraud, the second control unit SCG One of the technical features is that this is configured by surface mounting only. That is, in this case, surface-mounted type components (SMD) are also used as the various mounting electronic components described above that the peripheral control substrate 1510 has, but these mounting electronic components can be obtained by the player. The hardware circuit to be mounted on the pachinko machine 1 without degrading the security performance against the illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component since it is not directly related to the benefits and is difficult to be regarded as an illegal target. Can be miniaturized.

  On the other hand, since the processing on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly linked to the awarding of the player's benefit, the first control unit MCG is likely to be an object of fraud. Therefore, although the miniaturization of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component is significantly reduced. The fact is that the decline in gaming interest can not be avoided.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the first control unit MCG has a substrate on which
· An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate BB and the integration performance is inferior but the fraud suppression performance is excellent;
· A surface mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate BB and is excellent in integration performance due to multi-layer lamination of wiring patterns etc. but inferior in fraud suppression performance And both should be provided first. Then, on this, it is a technical feature that the following two types of mounting electronic components having different properties are selectively mounted on the insertion mounting area or the surface mounting area having the above-mentioned properties in a form capable of solving the above-mentioned problems. It is one of the

· Multiple types of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package, and integrated circuit components with low security performance against improper mounting are enclosed in relatively small packages. Discrete parts with high security performance against unauthorized installation only

  More specifically, in the first control unit MCG, the integrated circuit component with low security performance is mounted only in the insertion mounting area which is excellent in fraud suppression performance among the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area. At the same time, in the surface mounting area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, only discrete components with high security performance are to be mounted. As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component on the side of the first control unit MCG which tends to be a target of the illegal operation.

  However, even when configured to maintain the security performance against illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component as described above, the substrate possessed by the first control unit MCG is likely to be a target of illegality. There is no change. Therefore, as for the substrate possessed by the first control unit MCG, basically, as shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7, FIG. 62, etc., a transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320 etc. ), It is desirable that the mounting surface (flat surface) be directed to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this case, the first control portion MCG can be performed only by opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 as well as the fact that the transparent cover member can make fraud on the mounting surface (flat surface) difficult. It becomes possible to perform monitoring (visual observation) on whether or not the illegal parts are mounted on the board, and therefore the illegal parts as a substrate (first board) on which the integrated circuit parts that are likely to be illegal are mounted It is possible to preferably ensure the suppression performance and the ease of monitoring for the loading of the

  In order to obtain such an effect, as illustrated in FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, the mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface (back surface) of one side of the substrate included in the first control unit MCG. In addition, the mounting electronic component is mounted only on the other side surface (front side surface), and is covered with the transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.). It goes without saying that the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 should be disposed in such a manner that the other side (front side) faces the rear side.

  Further, in view of the fact that, among the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 is a portion that performs processing directly linked to the awarding of a player's benefit, the first control unit MCG has each component described above. It may be desirable to apply each of the substrates to the substrate of the main control substrate 1310, in particular.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably maintain the security performance against improper mounting of the mounting electronic component, first, as a substrate included in the main control substrate 1310, an insertion mounting area excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed to form an integrated circuit component. Prepare at least a first substrate on which both discrete components are inserted and mounted, and a second substrate on which a surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance is formed and integrated circuit components are not mounted but discrete components are surface mounted Make it And about the said 1st board | substrate among these board | substrates, the surface (an electronic component is not mounted) of the said one side in the state covered with the said transparent cover member (various board | substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320 etc.) The second side of the other side (the front side on which the electronic component is mounted) and the other side (the front side on which the electronic component is mounted) is disposed to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Is perpendicular to the one side (the back side on which the electronic component is not mounted) and the other side (the front side on which the electronic component is mounted) not facing the back side of the pachinko machine 1 It is desirable to arrange so as to face in the direction of That is, in this case, since the presence of the surface mounting area (the second substrate) inferior to the fraud suppression performance can be made less visible from the rear side, the security performance against the illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component is more preferable. It will be expected to be maintained.

  However, even with such a configuration, if a malicious person adheres to “whether a surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is not formed somewhere”, the surface inferior to the fraud suppression performance There is a concern that the second substrate in which the mounting area is formed may be noticed. In this case, although only the discrete component with high security performance among the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is mounted on the surface mounting area of the second substrate, there is a fraud that the hole side has not recalled yet If there is a chance (for example, a tiny fraudulent chip is being developed), it could lead to losses.

  Therefore, with regard to the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate on which both the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted to the insertion mounting area excellent in the fraud suppression performance, not only the insertion mounting area but the fraud suppression The inferior surface mounting area is intentionally formed on the same surface (front side). Then, with no mounting electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area exposed, the other side (front side) of the first substrate is the pachinko machine It is desirable to arrange in the form which faces the back side of 1. That is, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the surface mounting area of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate arranged to face the rear side. It plays a role as an advertising tower that appeals that "no mounting electronic components are mounted in the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance, and the pachinko machine 1 has high fraud suppression performance". As a result, it is possible for the malicious person to lose the vigor to find out the second substrate on which the surface mounting area having inferior anti-tamper performance is formed. The surface mounting area formed on the first substrate is desirably provided at a position (such as an end portion of the first substrate) that is easily noticed when the first substrate is viewed.

  Also, is the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate in an independent shape not electrically connected to the insertion mounting area formed on the same surface as the surface mounting area? The electric connection with the insertion mounting area is formed so that the insertion mounting area is not affected even if an illegal component is mounted on the surface mounting area (the game is advanced It is important to build on output signals that do not need to be used above). On the other hand, in the second substrate according to this example, unlike the first substrate, only the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed among the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area, Mounting electronic components (herein, discrete components) are to be surface mounted to the surface mounting area.

  Even when each configuration described above is adopted, it is possible for a malicious person to find out "the second board on which discrete components are surface-mounted to the surface mounting area which is inferior to the fraud suppression performance". Sex can not be completely excluded. Therefore, among the surface mounting areas of the main control substrate 1310, “the surface mounting area formed only on the other surface of the first substrate and on which no mounting electronic component is mounted” is the surface mounting area. While the pattern wiring as a pattern is exposed in the form of facing toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, “the surface mounting area formed only on the other side surface of the second substrate” The second substrate is molded with a mold member (non-transparent member) in a state where only discrete components that are difficult to be illegitimate of the discrete components and the integrated circuit components are surface-mounted and molded by the mold member (impermeable member) Both the back side on which no electronic component is mounted and the other side (front side) do not face the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and face the direction orthogonal to this It is desirable to be disposed. That is, in this case, it is possible to conceal that the surface mounting area is formed on the second substrate and which type of discrete component mounted on the surface mounting area is. In addition to making it difficult to tamper with the mounting surface by means of the mold member (a surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance is made to function as a special area where mounting of the Since it can be removed from the target that requires monitoring for mounting), the hardware circuit is miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic components. It is expected that a problem such as “T” will be suitably solved.

  However, more preferably, with regard to mounting components (in this case, discrete components) surface-mounted in the above-mentioned surface mounting area, as shown in FIG. In the state of being molded by the non-transparent member, it should be inserted and mounted to the insertion mounting area TH of the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the first substrate arranged to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (a surface mounting area which impresses that “the pachinko machine 1 does not mount the surface mounting component”, and the electronic component In the insertion mounting area among the substrates on which the insertion mounting area on which the chip is mounted is formed, the “discrete component”, the “integrated circuit component”, and the “second substrate together with the mold member (impermeable member) The surface mounting regions in a molded state are inserted and mounted, and electrically connected to each other's electronic components. That is, in this case, when the first substrate is viewed from the rear side, both the discrete components and the integrated circuit components are mounted, and the surface mounting area (the first one is inferior to the fraud suppression performance) 2) “The security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting is maintained because it becomes possible for the substrate to be incorporated as if it were an insertion mounting part and to be electrically functioned as it is difficult to visually recognize by the mold member. However, it is expected that the problem of “miniaturizing the hardware circuit” should be solved more suitably.

  In addition, with regard to the second substrate on which the surface mounting component is mounted, the insertion mounting (the substrate surfaces of the first substrate are orthogonal to the first substrate) such that the thin surface of the substrate faces the back As a result, it becomes possible to mount the second substrate in the molded state without creating a large dead angle with the first substrate.

  Here, even in the case where each of the above-described configurations is adopted, “the second substrate itself in a state of being molded by the mold member (non-permeable member) itself is a molded member (non-transmissive member) The hole side is required to periodically check whether any fraudulent acts such as “replacement with another substrate in a molded state” have been made. In this respect, if the above-described mold structure is simply adopted, when the above-mentioned fraudulent act of replacing the color, material, etc. of the mold member with another substrate configured as described above is performed, the fraudulent behavior is performed. It may be difficult to detect being in a broken state, and the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components may be adversely affected.

  Therefore, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate to be molded, only discrete components (mounting electronic components) of a specific type among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control substrate 1310 It is desirable to be surface mounted, and for other types not to be surface mounted on the second substrate but to be mounted only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, since only discrete components having a specific shape are molded in the surface mounting region of the second substrate in a surface mounted state, the shape of the relief portion in the mold member ( The degree of expansion of the mold member at the mounting position of the discrete component (for example, see FIG. 118 and the like) is unified. That is, when another substrate on which an unauthorized part as well as a discrete type is mounted is further molded by the mold member, the expansion degree of the mold member at the mounting position of the unauthorized part is the mounting position of the discrete part of the specific type Becomes different from the degree of expansion of the mold member in the case, the difference in shape (the degree of expansion is not single) appearing in the mold member facilitates monitoring of the above-mentioned fraudulent action, and against the improper mounting of the mounting electronic component. It will be expected to maintain security performance favorably.

  In this case, discrete components of a specific type are collectively mounted only on the surface mounting area of the second substrate on at least the substrate of the first control unit MCG which the main control substrate 1310 has, It can be said that it is more desirable to reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit by not mounting it on a board different from the two boards.

  However, “discrete components of a specific type” in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects are required to be electronic components for mounting that are geometrically the same, so for example, “discrete components of a specific type” If the "Schottky barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second substrate, the "PN diode" is a "discrete component different from the specific type" and is not mounted on the second substrate and is different from this Will be required to Also, strictly speaking, when “Schottky barrier diode” is surface-mounted on the second substrate as “discrete component of a specific type”, “Schottky barrier diode” of the same product is used for the second substrate in all cases. Surface mounting is required, and it is desirable that different products “Schottky Barrier Diodes” be mounted not on the second substrate but on a different substrate.

  However, in the substrate of the main control substrate 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific type of discrete components. Therefore, in order to reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit more appropriately, only the types of the discrete components to be surface mounted are different, and the other structure (the insertion mounting area is not formed or Prepare a third substrate that is mounted on only one side, the mold structure, etc., the same as the second substrate described above, and surface-mount only one type of discrete component different from the specific type. Preferably, the third substrate is inserted into and mounted on the insertion mounting area of the first substrate so as to be electrically connected to another mounting electronic component. According to such a configuration, the substrate (second substrate, third substrate) having the above-described mold structure for each type of discrete component is a special mounting component D3a, special in the example of FIG. It is prepared as mounting component D3b), and the shape to be monitored (the degree of swelling in the mold member) is unified for each substrate having a mold structure, and monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent action (on the corresponding substrate) “It is possible to facilitate confirmation of whether electronic components of a type that should not be mounted are not mounted. It is possible to preferably solve the problem of “miniaturizing the circuit”. In addition to the second and third substrates, a substrate on which only discrete components of a type different from the discrete components mounted on the substrates may be similarly prepared.

  When only one discrete component is mounted on the surface of the second or third substrate as shown in FIG. 118, the monitoring can be further facilitated and the structure of the above-mentioned double mold In addition, it is possible to more preferably solve the problem of "sizing the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of the mounting electronic component".

  When a plurality of substrates thus molded (in this case, the second and third substrates (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) are provided, It is desirable that each surface mounting surface (surface on the other side described above) be disposed so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to collectively check the degree of swelling in the mold member of each substrate from the same direction, monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (a type of type that should not be mounted on the relevant substrate) It becomes possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not the electronic component is mounted.

  Furthermore, component-side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component mounted on the surface of each of the substrates is applied to each member (mold member) for molding the second substrate and the third substrate. In addition, it is desirable that each of the faces to which the component side identification mark is attached be disposed so as to face the same direction. That is, in this case, it is possible to make one-to-one correspondence between the "type of component side identification display" attached to the second substrate and the third substrate and "the shape to appear in the mold member". It will be possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether replacement of parts has occurred. At this time, the component side identification display is to be attached to the mold surface (the surface on which the mold member does not generate swelling) which is opposite to the side on which the surface mounting area is formed. It is desirable to eliminate distortion as the identification display so as not to cause a confirmation error.

  Further, according to the above configuration, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, one discrete electronic component surface-mounted with respect to the substrate is molded on one substrate Each of the components is provided as a component, and insertion and mounting are performed with the substrate surfaces orthogonal to each other with respect to the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. That is, in this case, the second and third substrates on which discrete components originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted are as if they are insertion mounted components without creating a large space between the first substrate and the second substrate. Since it becomes possible to insert and mount on the first substrate, it is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal part.

  However, in order to suitably maintain the suppression performance against mounting of the illegal component, the appearance as the “electronic component to be inserted and mounted to the first substrate as if it is an insertion mounted component” It is required that each of the third substrates be provided so as to be invisible to the substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed. Therefore, for the second substrate and the third substrate, it is possible not to surface-mount a plurality of types of discrete components, to prevent the integrated circuit components from being surface-mounted, or as shown in FIG. In the case where only one discrete component is surface-mounted, the size as the substrate is reduced and this is used as one insertion mounting component (the structure in which the electric element is connected to the insertion mounting lead portion by the bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important to make it appear as if it is a common electronic component (discrete component)). That is, the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate and the third substrate is at least an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate, or an empty state formed on the first substrate but not mounted at all. The area is required to be smaller than the surface mounting area.

  Furthermore, in this way, the second substrate and the third substrate can be made compact, and the first substrate can be one electron each of the second substrate and the third substrate with respect to the first substrate. Insertion mounting parts (discrete parts (discrete parts (general electronics having a structure in which electrical elements are connected to insertion mounting leads by bonding wires) mounted at a mounting height lower than those electronic parts when the components are inserted and mounted as parts Components) and insertion mounting components mounted at a mounting height higher than those electronic components (discrete components (general electronic components having a structure in which electric elements are connected to insertion mounting lead portions by bonding wires)) It is more desirable that each of and is disposed. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area excellent in the fraud suppression performance formed on the first substrate. It becomes possible to look more suitable as if it were one electronic component. In this sense, the second and third substrates may be provided as electronic components (mold components) smaller than any of the integrated circuit components inserted and mounted on the first substrate, or may be inserted into the first substrate It can also be important to be provided as an electronic component (mold component) smaller than the largest one of the discrete components to be mounted.

  Moreover, in general, a substrate corresponding to the type of the electronic component to be mounted also on the substrate on which the electronic component is mounted, including the substrate (first substrate) on which the insertion mounting area according to this embodiment is formed In many cases, the side identification display is given, and for example, an electrical symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is given in the vicinity of the place where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, with regard to the second substrate and the third substrate according to this embodiment, it is possible to conceal the type of the electronic component to enhance the difficulty of circuit understanding. It can be said that it is desirable to maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of the illegal parts suitably.

  Therefore, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, different substrate side identification displays are respectively attached. However, any of the board-side identification displays includes any board-side identification in the insertion mounting area of the first control unit MCG, including the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. It is desirable to make it a unique aspect different from the indication (for example, a special indication aspect such as “?” Or “*”). That is, in this case, even if the substrate side identification display (mounting surface of the first substrate) attached near the position where the second substrate and the third substrate are inserted and mounted is confirmed, the aspect is the same as that of the mounting electronic Since it is a unique aspect different from the board side identification display attached corresponding to the parts, which type is respectively mounted as a discrete part surface-mounted on the second board or the third board It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize

  However, if a structure is adopted in which the difficulty of circuit understanding is enhanced by concealing which type of electronic component the second and third substrates function as described above, the type There is a concern that a malicious person may scrape the mold member and attempt to confirm the internal element in order to grasp the

  Therefore, for the second substrate and the third substrate, first, no substrate side identification display should be attached on the surface mounting surface (surface mounting surface in a molded state) formed on the substrates. However, even if a malicious person scrapes the mold member and attempts to confirm the inside, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component. Desirable.

  Furthermore, with respect to each discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate and the third substrate, most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate Is molded by a first mold member of a different color, and the second substrate or the third substrate to be mounted by the second mold member of the same or similar color as the specific color. Furthermore, it is desirable to insert and mount an insertion mounting area formed in the first substrate as one molded electronic component. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as the other insertion mounting parts, Even in the case of insertion mounting, the manager on the hole side can easily find out where the second and third substrates are located, and the second and third substrates are tampered with. It becomes possible to facilitate confirmation of the presence or absence of

  In this case, even in the case of a malicious person, it helps to grasp information as to which surface mounting area (the second substrate or the third substrate) inferior to the fraud suppression performance is provided. It may be. In this respect, in the above configuration, the type as the electronic component is concealed by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting region on the second substrate or the third substrate with the second mold member. The second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color disposed on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface, as well as the difficulty in understanding the circuit. ing. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete components mounted on the surface mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and attempts are made to check the inside thereof. Even so, it is difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded on the second substrate or the third substrate is scraped or whether the first mold member in the second substrate or the third substrate is scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type as the electronic component is concealed to preferably maintain the difficulty of circuit understanding.

  Further, as described above, in this example of the present embodiment, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, on the same mounting surface The board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as “?” Or “*”) different from any board-side identification display is added. However, if only the substrate side identification display having such a unique aspect is attached, it is not possible to grasp which type of electronic component also functions as the hole side, and maintenance, There is a concern that the management will be adversely affected. Therefore, among the insertion mounting surfaces of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component, a substrate having a unique aspect at a relatively easy-to-see position In addition to the side identification mark being attached, the same kind of mounting electronic parts (or different parts) which are on the same mounting surface at a relatively invisible position (such as directly under the molded second or third substrate) It is desirable that a substrate-side identification display having the same mode as the substrate-side identification display attached corresponding to the same kind of mounting electronic component on the substrate is also attached secretly.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate, a specific type (for example, a Schottky barrier diode) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control substrate 1310 Only discrete components (mounting electronic components) are surface mounted. In the surface mounting area of the third substrate, there is one type (for example, a relatively small specific capacitance) different from the specific type among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control substrate 1310. Only discrete components (mounting electronic components) of the capacitor are surface mounted. According to these configurations, it is apparent that the second substrate or the third substrate alone can not function as a discrete circuit (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit) having a specific function. That is, the mounting electronic component mounted on the surface mounting region formed on the molded substrate (the second substrate or the third substrate) and a substrate (here, different from the substrate (the second substrate or the third substrate) In this case, by configuring a specific discrete circuit by mounting electronic components mounted on the surface of the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate), it is possible to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit or to form a molded substrate. (Second board or third board) It is difficult to replace itself (because not only the structure in the mold is concealed but also because it is necessary to make a mold part having no specific circuit function). It will be expected to be provided for countermeasures.

  As described above, in summarizing the techniques described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, the configurations having some technical features have been described in the order that can be expected to exert a synergetic effect. About each composition, it is only what was described as the best embodiment, and, in addition, not only that it is not necessary to necessarily use all those compositions, and combining suitably regardless of the order which described those compositions. It is possible to carry out.

  Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above-described embodiment and modifications will be described below.

[Technical thought 1-1]
It has a base board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, it has a specific control unit that can execute the generation processing of the control power source and the progression processing of the game.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form to be inserted into the base plate;
And a surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the base plate in such a manner that leads provided on the electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate.
Among the plurality of electronic components, at least one of the surface mounting components mounted in the surface mounting region is the surface mounting component itself although it is molded by a molding resin, A game machine characterized in that the surface mounting area to be mounted is also molded with another mold resin.

[Technical thought 1-2]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, generation processing of a control power source and progress processing of a game can be respectively executed;
And a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, progression processing of an effect according to a result of the progression processing of the game can be executed;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing,
The base plate of the second control unit includes an insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner inserted into the base plate, and a lead portion provided on the electronic component Of the surface mounting area to be mounted in the form of being placed on the surface of the above, only the surface mounting area is provided,
Both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area are provided on the base plate of the first control unit,
Of the plurality of electronic components, the first side surface mounting component mounted on the surface mounting area provided on the base plate of the first control unit, and the surface mounting area provided on the base plate of the second control unit Although all of the second side surface mounting components to be mounted are themselves molded by a molding resin, it is possible to use one of the first side surface mounting components and the second side surface mounting components. The gaming machine according to the present invention, wherein the first side surface mounting component is further molded on the surface mounting region together with a molding resin different from the molding resin of the first side surface mounting component itself.

  According to such technical ideas 1-1 and 1-2, although the surface mounting component mounted in the surface mounting area which is inferior in the fraud suppression performance is itself molded by the molding resin, Since the mold resin separately from the mold resin is molded integrally with the surface mounting area to be mounted, the surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance may be subjected to some injustice. It will be extremely difficult.

[Technical thought 2]
It has a base board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, it has a specific control unit that can execute the generation processing of the control power source and the progression processing of the game.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an insertion mounting component of the electronic components is inserted and mounted;
And a surface mounting board mounted on the surface in a form in which the surface mounting lead portion provided on the surface mounting part of the electronic components is placed on the surface,
The surface mounting board is
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be insertable into the insertion mounting board,
On the special surface mounting board:
A wiring portion formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the surface mounting component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead portion;
The surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount board are:
Of the surface mounting lead portion and the special insertion mounting lead portion, only the special insertion mounting lead portion is integrally molded with the special surface mounting plate so as to be drawn out of the mold resin, It is mounted on the said insertion mounting board as one electronic component which has the lead part for special insertion mounting, The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  In this technical idea 2, the surface mounting component mounted in the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is caused to function as if it is one insertion mounting component mounted in the insertion mounting area superior in the fraud suppression performance. It will be possible to be excluded from the target of the fraudulent purpose of the malicious party.

[Technical thought 3]
It has a base board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, it has a specific control unit that can execute the generation processing of the control power source and the progression processing of the game.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an insertion mounting component of the electronic components is inserted and mounted;
And a surface mounting board mounted on the surface in a form in which the surface mounting lead portion provided on the surface mounting part of the electronic components is placed on the surface,
For the surface mounted components,
At least a discrete surface mounting component in which a single function element is molded with a molding resin,
The discrete surface mount components are
The discrete surface mounting component is molded integrally with the surface mounting plate to be mounted by a molding resin different from the molding resin of the discrete surface mounting component itself, which has a relatively large external shape, and the base of the specific control unit A game machine characterized by having an appearance shape different from any of all electronic components mounted on a board.

  In this technical idea 3 above, excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin is given to a mere discrete surface mounting component that can have only a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit etc. It is unique as an appearance shape that attracts the attention of a malicious person and has a relatively large appearance shape. That is, in this case, since it is possible to show the third party the excessive security performance provided in the specific control unit, it is possible to expect a decline in the will to commit fraud.

[Technical thought 4]
It has a base board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, it has a specific control unit that can execute the generation processing of the control power source and the progression processing of the game.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form to be inserted into the base plate;
And a surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the base plate in such a manner that leads provided on the electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate.
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting areas are dispersedly provided at a plurality of places so that the respective areas become relatively small areas, whereas the insertion mounting areas are dispersed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

  According to the technical idea 4 described above, the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is not concentrated at one place, but is divided into portions by dispersing it and made inconspicuous, and is relatively excellent in the fraud suppression performance and relatively large. It is arranged in such a way as to be embedded in an insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, when a malicious person looks at the base plate of the specific control unit, it can be made difficult to notice the existence of the surface mounting area, and while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of the illegal part, It is expected that the hardware circuit be miniaturized.

[Technical thought 5]
It has a base board on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using those electronic circuits, it is provided with a specific control unit which can respectively execute generation processing of control power source and progress processing of the game.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
In the plurality of electronic circuits,
A backup power supply circuit for supplying a backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is shut off is included as a discrete circuit including at least a capacitor and a diode, which are electronic components of single function elements ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form to be inserted into the base plate;
And a surface mounting area to be mounted in such a manner that leads provided on electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate.
The insertion mounting area is
The electronic component mounted in the surface mounting area is provided as a relatively large area surrounding the surface mounting area so as to be adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area,
The backup power circuit is
Although provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function of supplying a backup power supply to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is shut off, the capacitor and the diode included in the discrete circuit One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mounting area surrounded by the insertion mounting area, and the other electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting area of the insertion mounting area. A game machine characterized in that it is mounted at a position not adjacent to a part.

  Although this technical idea 5 is one discrete circuit aiming to exhibit a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), mounting on the insertion mounting area is possible on the base plate. An electronic component having a shape that can be equalized and an electronic component having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area are mixed. Therefore, when a third party views the base plate of the specific control unit, it is recalled that they have an electrical close role in order to exert a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). It will be possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding these circuits, it will be possible to suppress fraud.

  Moreover, a specific electrical function (backup power supply) is disposed after arranging the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance into the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area excellent in the fraud suppression performance. The capacitor and the diode included in one discrete circuit intended to exert the supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it hard to notice the presence of the surface mounting area which is inferior to the fraud suppression performance, and the electronic component mounted on the surface mounting area cooperates with other electronic components even when the presence is noticed. It is then possible to make it difficult to recall what kind of electrical function is implemented to exhibit, and by further increasing the difficulty of understanding such circuits, it is preferable to suppress fraud. It can be expected.

[Technical thought 6]
It has a base board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, it has a specific control unit that can execute the generation processing of the control power source and the progression processing of the game.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form of being inserted;
A surface mounting board mounted on the surface in a form in which the surface mounting lead portion provided on the electronic component is placed on the surface;
The surface mounting board is
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be insertable into the insertion mounting board,
The special surface mounting board is
While having a wiring portion formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the lead portion for special insertion mounting to the insertion mounting board The special insertion mounting lead portions are inserted into the insertion mounting plate and disposed such that the mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.
A game machine characterized by

  Generally, components mounted on a surface mounting board often have a flat shape. In this respect, in the above technical idea 6, the special surface mounting board is disposed such that the mounting surfaces thereof are substantially orthogonal to the insertion mounting board. That is, in this case, not the flat surface having a relatively large area, but a thin surface having only a relatively small area comes to face the above-mentioned insertion mounting board, so an electronic component is mounted as an insertion mounting board The special surface mounting board can be arranged even in a situation where only a few possible areas (surface areas) are left.

[Technical thought 7]
It has a base board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, it has a specific control unit that can execute the generation processing of the control power source and the progression processing of the game.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form of being inserted;
And a surface mounting board mounted on the surface of the base board in the form of being mounted on the surface of the base board.
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mounting component mounted on the surface mounting board includes a specific surface mounting component having a size that fits within the installation interval of a specific insertion hole provided on the insertion mounting board. Are
The specific surface mount components are:
Although the size is within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the specific surface mounting component itself is integrally formed with the surface mounting board to be mounted by the molding resin different from the molding resin of itself. A gaming machine characterized by having an external shape as one electronic component having a size which does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole by being molded.

  That is, when a specific surface mounting component is kept in an external shape smaller than the installation distance of the insertion holes in the insertion mounting board, the specific control unit is provided with a surface mounting area which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. It can be easily noticed by a third party, which may in turn encourage fraud.

  In this point, in the above technical idea 7, a specific surface mounting component is integrally molded with a surface mounting board to be mounted by a mold resin different from a mold resin of the specific surface mounting component itself. Since the external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of a specific insertion hole appears, a surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. Will be able to make it harder for third parties to notice things.

[Technical thought 8]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, game progression processing can be executed;
And a second control unit that has a base board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and can use the electronic components to execute a progression process of an effect according to the result of the game progression process.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
A discrete component in which the single-function device is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package;
The base plate of the first control unit is
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is mounted in a form to be inserted into the base plate;
And a surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the base plate in such a manner that the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is placed on the surface of the base plate.
The base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as a substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed,
The first substrate is
Either the discrete component or the integrated circuit component is not mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed to the rear side of the gaming machine while being exposed. Are arranged in
The second substrate is
The integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the surface mounting area, and only the discrete component is mounted, and the integrated circuit component is mounted in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine A game machine characterized by being disposed.

  According to the technical idea 8 as described above, a first substrate on which no mounting electronic component is mounted and a surface mounting region in a vacant state is formed is prepared, and the first substrate is referred to as the surface mounting region. The pattern wiring is arranged in such a manner as to face the rear side of the gaming machine while the pattern wiring is exposed. That is, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the gaming machine, "any mounting electronic component is not mounted in the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance, and the gaming machine is highly fraudulent. It will play a role as an advertising tower that appeals that it has a suppression performance, and it will be expected that this will suppress the mounting of illegal parts.

  On the other hand, the second substrate is disposed in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine so that its presence is less likely to be noticed, and the integrated circuit for the surface mounting area is provided. Among the components and discrete components, integrated circuit components which are likely to be fraudulent are not mounted and only discrete components which are less likely to be fraudulent are mounted. That is, in this case, the presence of the first substrate makes it difficult to notice the presence of the second substrate itself, and of course, even if the presence is noticed, the second substrate is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted in the surface mounting area, it is expected that the hardware circuit be miniaturized while maintaining the suppression performance for the mounting of the fraudulent components suitably. Become.

[Technical thought 9]
A first control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, game progression processing can be executed;
A second control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, progression processing of an effect according to a result of the progression processing of the game can be executed;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
A discrete component in which the single-function device is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package;
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate in a form to be inserted, and the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is the surface of the substrate There is a second substrate on which a surface mounting area to be mounted in a form to be placed on top and a special insertion mounting lead portion which is extended outward and can be inserted into the insertion mounting area of the first substrate are formed. Yes,
The first substrate is
An insertion mounting area in which the insertion mounting lead portion provided on the insertion mounting component can be mounted by insertion, and a surface mounting lead portion provided on the surface mounting component are placed on the surface Although both the surface mountable area and the mountable surface are formed, no mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface mountable area formed on the first substrate, and the pattern wiring as the surface mountable area is formed. It is considered to be in the de-
The second substrate is
Only the surface mounting area is formed among the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area, and the second substrate for which only the discrete part is to be mounted among the discrete parts and the integrated circuit parts Of the various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate by inserting the lead portion for special insertion mounting into the insertion mounting region of the first substrate as one electronic component molded in the A game machine characterized by being electrically connected between each other.

  In such a technical idea 9, a surface mounting area in which no mounting electronic component is mounted and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed as a surface mounting area having poor fraud suppression performance ( A first substrate), and a surface mounting area (second substrate) in which only discrete components which are difficult to be targets of fraud among discrete components and integrated circuit components are in a state of being molded on both substrates in a surface mounted state; Is equipped. That is, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the gaming machine, it is difficult to visually recognize the surface mounting area on which the mounting electronic component is mounted. Since only the surface mounting area on which no electronic component is mounted can be viewed, the surface mounting area is “not mounted on any surface mounting area which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. As a gaming machine, it plays a role as an advertising tower to appeal that it has a high fraud suppression performance, and it is expected that this will suppress the mounting of illegal parts.

  Moreover, in addition to the surface mounting area, an insertion mounting area excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed on the first substrate on which the surface mounting area that plays a role as the advertising tower is formed. For the insertion mounting area, Thus, the surface mounting region (second substrate) which is in a state of being molded on each of the substrates is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, the surface mounting area (the first mounting board) having the impression that "the surface mounting component is not mounted" is inferior to the fraud suppression performance in the insertion mounting area which is excellent in the fraud suppression performance (the first mounting board). (2) Since it was made to incorporate 2 substrates in a form that would be difficult to visually recognize by molding, it would be expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of the illegal parts. Become.

[Technical thought 10]
A first control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, game progression processing can be executed;
A second control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, progression processing of an effect according to a result of the progression processing of the game can be executed;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
A discrete component in which the single-function device is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package;
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate in a form to be inserted, and the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is the surface of the substrate Has a second substrate on which is formed a surface mounting area to be mounted in the form of
In the first substrate,
In a state in which the mounting electronic component is not mounted on one surface and both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted on the other surface, the other surface is the rear of the gaming machine It is arranged in the form facing the side,
In the second substrate,
A mounting electronic component is not mounted on one surface, and the integrated circuit component out of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the other surface, and only the discrete component is mounted and a mold member In the molded state, the first side surface and the second side surface are mounted on the first substrate in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine to be.

  According to such technical idea 10, with regard to the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on the surface on one side, and integrated with the discrete component on the other surface. Since the other side is disposed with the other side facing the rear side of the gaming machine with both of the circuit parts mounted, integrated circuit parts that are likely to be fraudulent are mounted. Thus, it is possible to suitably secure the suppression performance and the ease of monitoring for mounting of the illegal part as the target substrate (first substrate).

  In addition, for the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on the surface on one side, and the integrated circuit component on which the other surface is likely to be fraudulent is mounted Because only discrete components that are not easily tampered with are mounted, it is expected that the hardware circuit should be miniaturized while suitably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal components. Become.

  Moreover, in the second substrate, in the state where the surface mounting area on which the discrete component is mounted is molded by the mold member on each of the substrates, both the surface on the one side and the surface on the other side are the gaming machine It is made to be arranged in the form which turns to a different direction from the back side of. That is, in this case, the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is made to function as a special area where mounting of the illegal parts is substantially impossible, and monitoring of mounting of the illegal parts is required (game machine It becomes possible to remove it from the object of confirmation from the rear side).

  In addition, with regard to the surface mounting area (second board) removed from the monitoring target for mounting of the illegal part in this way, the thin-walled portion of the board faces the back side (both the one side and the other side are relevant) (In a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine), the circuit board is mounted on the first substrate, so that the molded state can be obtained without creating a large space with the first substrate. It becomes possible to mount the second substrate.

[Technical thought 11]
A first control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, game progression processing can be executed;
A second control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, progression processing of an effect according to a result of the progression processing of the game can be executed;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
A discrete component in which the single-function device is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package;
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed, into which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are respectively inserted and mounted;
A second substrate on which a surface mounting area on which a specific type of mounting electronic component of the discrete component is mounted is not formed, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component; A third substrate on which a surface mounting area on which a mounting electronic component of a type different from a specific type is not mounted is formed without the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component being mounted. And have
The second substrate and the third substrate are
By being provided as separate electronic components molded into discrete components respectively surface-mounted to those substrates, and by being insert-mounted to the insertion mounting areas formed in the first substrate, respectively. It is electrically connectable with various insertion mounting parts mounted on the first substrate,
A component side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component mounted on the surface of each of the second substrate and the third substrate is attached to each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate. A game machine characterized in that each of the faces to which the identification display is attached is directed to a specific direction.

  According to such a technical idea 11, on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed, both the integrated circuit component which is easily subject to fraud and the discrete component which is not easily fraudulent are mounted In the second and third substrates on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted in different types of different substrates.

  Therefore, for mounting electronic components mounted on the side of the insertion mounting area that is superior in fraud suppression performance, mounting is performed on the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance as well as maintaining the conventional fraud suppression function. Also for electronic parts, it is confirmed whether each mounting electronic part having a type according to each of the second and third boards is mounted (an electronic part of a type not to be mounted on the corresponding board) Is likely to be easy to find out that the hardware circuit should be miniaturized while making it possible to easily find it even if it has been tampered with. become.

  Moreover, the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed are provided as discrete electronic components molded respectively on the discrete components mounted on the respective substrates. And can be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate by being inserted and mounted to the insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, respectively. There is. That is, in this case, a discrete component of a specific type originally provided as a surface mount component and a discrete component of a type different from the specific type are respectively inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they are insertion mounted components. Since it becomes possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while preferably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal part.

  Furthermore, on each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate, a component-side identification display corresponding to the type of the discrete component mounted on the surface of each of the substrates is attached, respectively. It is arranged that each of the faces to which the side identification display is attached is directed to a specific direction. That is, in this case, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the "type of identification display on the component side" attached to the second substrate and the third substrate inserted and mounted on the first substrate and the "shape to appear in the mold member". Since it becomes possible to correspond, it becomes possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether replacement of parts has occurred.

[Technical thought 12]
A first control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, game progression processing can be executed;
A second control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, progression processing of an effect according to a result of the progression processing of the game can be executed;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
A discrete component in which the single-function device is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package;
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, and the integrated circuit component among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. It has a second substrate on which a surface mounting area is formed, on which discrete components are surface mounted.
The second substrate is
Insertion mounting is provided as a single electronic component molded to discrete components mounted on the surface of the substrate, and the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other with respect to the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. Can be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate by
The first substrate is
An insertion mounting component mounted at a mounting height lower than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, and a mounting height higher than the electronic component A game machine characterized in that insertion mounting parts are respectively disposed.

  According to such a technical idea 12, on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area excellent in the fraud suppression performance is formed, both the integrated circuit component which is easily subject to fraud and the discrete component which is not easily fraudulent are mounted In the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. Therefore, while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of the fraudulent components suitably, hardware It is expected that the circuit will be miniaturized.

  In addition, the second substrate in which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as a single electronic component molded on each of the discrete components surface-mounted to the substrate and formed on the first substrate It is made to be inserted and mounted in the form which each other's board | substrate surface orthogonally crosses with respect to the inserted mounting area. That is, in this case, without creating a large space between the second substrate on which the discrete components originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted, the first substrate is as if it were an insertion mounted component. On the other hand, it is expected that the hardware circuit be miniaturized while maintaining the suppression performance with respect to the mounting of the illegal part suitably.

  Furthermore, an insertion mounting component mounted on the first substrate at a mounting height lower than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, and the electronic component Since the insertion mounting parts to be mounted at a higher mounting height are disposed respectively, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is formed on the first substrate. It can be made difficult to recognize that it is mounted in the insertion mounting area which is excellent in suppression performance.

[Technical thought 13]
A first control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, game progression processing can be executed;
A second control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, progression processing of an effect according to a result of the progression processing of the game can be executed;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
A discrete component in which the single-function device is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package;
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, and the integrated circuit component among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. It has a second substrate on which a surface mounting area is formed, on which discrete components are surface mounted.
The discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate is molded by a first mold member of a specific color different from most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the first substrate. And
The second substrate is
An insertion mounting area provided as a single electronic component molded by a second mold member of the same or a similar color as the specific color to each discrete component surface-mounted to the substrate, and formed on the first substrate A game machine characterized in that it can be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate by being mounted on the first substrate.

  According to such a technical idea 13, on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area excellent in fraud suppression performance is formed, both the integrated circuit component which is easily subject to fraud and the discrete component which is not easily fraudulent are mounted In the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. Therefore, while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of the fraudulent components suitably, hardware It is expected that the circuit will be miniaturized.

  In addition, the second substrate in which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as a single electronic component molded on each of the discrete components surface-mounted to the substrate and formed on the first substrate It is made to be inserted into the inserted mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted can be inserted and mounted to the first substrate as if it is an insertion mounting component. It is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal part.

  In addition, with respect to discrete components surface-mounted on the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate, a first mold member of a color different from many of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate And the second substrate to be mounted is configured as one electronic component further molded by the second mold member having the same or similar color as the specific color. I have to.

  Therefore, even when the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same manner as other insertion mounting parts and inserted and mounted to the first substrate, holes The side manager can easily find out where the second substrate is, and can easily confirm whether the second substrate is tampered with. However, in this case, even a malicious person may help grasp information as to which surface mounting area (second substrate) inferior to the fraud suppression performance is provided.

  In this respect, in the configuration described above, it is difficult to understand the circuit by concealing the type as the electronic component by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting region on the second substrate together with the second mold member. In addition to enhancing the property, the second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color disposed on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete components mounted on the surface mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and attempts are made to check the inside thereof. Even if it is, it can be made difficult to grasp whether it is in the state of shaving the second mold member molded on the second substrate together or in the state of shaving the first mold member inside thereof. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component is concealed to preferably maintain the difficulty of circuit understanding.

[Technical thought 14]
A first control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, game progression processing can be executed;
A second control unit having a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, progression processing of an effect according to a result of the progression processing of the game can be executed;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include:
A discrete component in which the single-function device is enclosed in a relatively small package, and an integrated circuit component in which a plurality of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package;
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting area is formed in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, and the integrated circuit component among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. It has a second substrate on which a surface mounting area is formed, on which discrete components are surface mounted.
The second substrate is
The first substrate is provided as a single electronic component molded into discrete components to be surface-mounted on the substrate and inserted and mounted to an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. Can be electrically connected with various insertion mounting parts mounted on the
On the mounting surface of the second substrate, no substrate side identification indication corresponding to the discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate is attached, and on the mounting surface of the first substrate, the one electronic component A specific substrate identification is provided corresponding to the position where the second substrate is inserted and mounted, but the specific substrate identification is provided corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component A game machine characterized by being a unique aspect different from any of the substrate side identification display attached within the insertion mounting area of the gaming machine including the substrate side identification display.

  According to such a technical idea 14, on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area excellent in the fraud suppression performance is formed, both the integrated circuit component which is easily subject to fraud and the discrete component which is not easily fraudulent are mounted In the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. Therefore, while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of the fraudulent components suitably, hardware It is expected that the circuit will be miniaturized.

  In addition, the second substrate in which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as a single electronic component molded on each of the discrete components surface-mounted to the substrate and formed on the first substrate It is made to be inserted into the inserted mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted can be inserted and mounted to the first substrate as if it is an insertion mounting component. It is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal part.

  Furthermore, no board-side identification display corresponding to the discrete component mounted on the surface of the second substrate is provided on the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second substrate, and on the mounting surface of the first substrate. Although a specific substrate side identification indication is attached corresponding to the position where the second substrate as the one electronic component is inserted and mounted, the specific substrate side identification indication is the same kind of mounting electronic component In the first aspect of the present invention, a unique aspect different from any of the substrate side identification display provided in the first control unit and the second control unit is adopted, including the substrate side identification display provided correspondingly. That is, in this case, even if the specific substrate side identification display attached to the mounting surface of the first substrate is confirmed, the aspect is different from the substrate side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. Because of the unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as a discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate. Also, even if the malicious member scrapes the mold member and attempts to confirm the inside of the mold member in order to grasp the type of the discrete component mounted on the surface mounting area, It is possible to make it hard to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technical thought 15]
A first control unit having a base on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using the electronic circuits, generation processing of a control power source and progress processing of a game can be respectively executed;
And a second control unit that has a base board on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and can use the electronic circuits to execute a progression process of an effect according to the result of the game progression process.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit include:
It consists of mounting electronic components for single-function devices and includes specific discrete circuits that aim to perform specific electrical functions,
The base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting area and a surface mounting area formed on different substrates.
In the specific substrate of the base plate on which the surface mounting area is formed, only a specific type of mounting electronic component of the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface mounted and the specific type Various electronic components for mounting are provided as one electronic component molded on each and mounted on the different substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. Electrically connectable with the insertion mounting parts of the
Among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components that constitute the specific discrete circuit, another mounting electronic component different from the specific type is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. A gaming machine characterized by being

  According to such a technical idea 15, only discrete components (mounting electronic components that constitute a specific discrete circuit) that are difficult to be illegitimate are mounted on the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed. From this, it is expected to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal part.

  In addition, in the specific substrate in which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only the mounting electronic component of a specific type among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit is surface mounted and the specific type Various electronic components for mounting are provided as one electronic component molded in each and mounted on the different substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the substrate different from the specific substrate. It can be electrically connected to the insertion mounting component of

  That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to insert and mount the specific substrate on which the surface mounting component is mounted on the first substrate as if it is an insertion mounting component, the suppression performance against the mounting of the illegal component It is expected that the hardware circuit be miniaturized while maintaining the above. Also, with the above specific substrate, since only a specific type of mounting electronic component of the mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit is surface mounted, it is necessary to confirm whether the surface mounting area is tampered with It will be possible to facilitate. In addition, since the above-mentioned specific substrate is molded in a specific type of mounting electronic components together, it is inserted and mounted on another substrate on which other mounting electronic components are inserted and mounted. To increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit with respect to a specific discrete circuit formed over the surface mounting area formed in the substrate and the insertion mounting area formed in the substrate different from the specific substrate to be provided for fraud measures Will be expected.

[13. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing one example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described. The various commands from the payout control board will be described.

13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for delivering a gaming ball of a predetermined number of balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage trays, are driven by driving the dispensing motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing device 830) by communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (pachinko machine 1). When an apparatus for paying out game balls as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the payout control board 951 from 1310, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H Then, two prize balls are designated,..., And fifteen prize balls are designated in command 1 EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that pays out game balls directly as a storage ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, which is a storage plate) are installed adjacent to a game arcade (hole). When the ball lending machine is electrically connected to 1 (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the payout control board 951 is released from the main control board 1310. The commands 20H to 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, and one prize ball is designated in the command 20H, two prize balls are designated in the command 21H,... Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and a self check is designated in this command 30H.
The transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input, when the ACK signal to be output as acknowledgment of reception of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. And a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, various commands are special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit relation, power on, spread figure tuning effect related, general electric circuit board production related, notification display, status It is classified into the display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 tune production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and fluctuation state specification. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and the like The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and short time states, a low probability time short state indicating a low probability state and a short time state, a high probability time short state indicating a high probability state and a short time state, and a low probability It consists of a low probability non-short state which indicates that it is a state and not a short state, and a high probability non-short state which indicates that it is a high probability state and not a short state (as normal gaming state, Low probability short time state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. The time for fluctuating display of symbols is shortened compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state), and stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the normal lottery result by the regular lottery described later in a predetermined time The number of stop display times is increased compared to the non-short time state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is further extended compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state). State that it is possible to obtain the lottery opportunity of the special symbol without reducing balls by raising the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2004 which is shown (in other words, non-short time state The second start is achieved by increasing the determination of whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces and extending the period of the open and close operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening and closing the pair of movable pieces. It is a state which raises the acceptance rate (ball entering rate) of the game ball to the mouth 2004).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, the special symbol 1 specification command is sent immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect start, special figure 1 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

13-2-2. Special figure 2 tune production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of a command named special figure 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 tuning effect end. In these various commands, the status is “B * H”, and the mode is “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number).
Is assigned ("*" indicates that it is a specific hexadecimal number, and is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The special figure 2 tuning effect end indicates the special figure 2 tuning effect end.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 89, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening to start, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is starting while the 1st to 16th round big winning opening 1 is open (shown in FIG. 8, the starting opening unit 2100 During the opening or opening of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the large winning opening 1 closing between rounds (large opening of starting opening unit 2100 It indicates that the closing of the winning opening 2005 between the rounds or the closing start), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of balls from 0 to 10 game balls has been counted (shown in FIG. 69). The big hit ending command detects the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005, and the big hit ending command Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  Also, the small hit opening command instructs the small hit opening start, and the small hit open display command is started during the small hit open (while the small winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is open at the small hit or The small hit count display command is a small hit medium large winning opening winning combination effect (in the small hit, when the gaming ball entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005) The small hit ending command is an instruction to start small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is 1 to 16 round of big winning opening 1 open (starting opening unit 2100 Sent at the opening of the N round of the winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the closing time of the winning opening 1 (start closing of the winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), Large winning opening 1 count display command, when the large winning opening 1 opening and count change to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the game ball entered the large winning opening 2005 Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the big hit ending command is sent at the beginning of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  Also, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the small hit opening (at the opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered the large winning hole 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005), the small hit ending command is , Sent at the beginning of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on division is composed of commands at the time of power-on and the names of the main control return destination at the time of power-on. These various commands are assigned status "D * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number.) ("*" Is a specific hexadecimal number. , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command includes the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 at power-on (including power-on and power-on recovery as well as power on and power failure). Information that indicates that the RAM is cleared when the operation switch 954 is operated, and also includes power recovery (in addition to power recovery, power recovery may occur due to power failure or momentary power outage) Information indicating which one of the low probability and short status, the high probability and short status, the low probability non-short status, and the high probability non-short status above (state and short status) to return. , And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. For example, when creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the condition is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is specified whether it is (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like. In other words, the information of the model code of the pachinko machine is a series code for identifying which type among max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. In addition to the game code of the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the probability fluctuation with the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited. And the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.)) to occur.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. ing.

  As the transmission timing between the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board is turned on (in addition to power-on, power failure occurs due to power failure or momentary power outage Is also sent). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and returns from a power failure or momentary interruption, the main control side power on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing tuning production related]
The figure related to common rendering effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and in that category, as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is comprised from the command of the name of common drawing tuning production start, common design designation, common drawing tuning production completion, and fluctuation state specification regarding vessel 1402. These various commands are assigned status "E * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The popular drawing tuning effect start command instructs the starting of the common pattern tuning effect in the rendering pattern specified in the mode, and the common symbol designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving states, as described above, a low probability time reducing state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time shortening indicating a high probability state and a time shortening state It consists of a state, a low probability non-short state indicating a low probability state and not a short state, and a high probability non-short state indicating a high probability state and not a short state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-shorting state is set).

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a common figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, a common pattern designation command is transmitted immediately after the common figure synchronization effect start, and a common pattern synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The regular electric rendition related to the pair relates to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. It consists of the commands named "Continuous Opening", "Pu-Peng Release Display", and "Pu-Mu per End". These various commands are assigned status "F * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the release of the power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left and right direction by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 The state (or the time of expansion) is indicated, and the ending command per common drawing is the instruction to start ending per common drawing.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (a pair of movable pieces is driven by the start port solenoid 2107 Is sent when expanding in the direction), and the ending command per drawing is sent at the beginning of the ending per drawing. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display divisions are composed of commands such as a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door closed. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  In the prize failure display command, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the player wins a big winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device) (even if it is not even a big hit) When the count sensor 4005 detects that the count error is detected), the connection error display command is, for example, an electrical signal in a route between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection error, the start of connection error notification is instructed, and for example, the disconnection / short circuit error display command includes a main control board 1310, a first start port sensor 4002, a second start port sensor 4004, a count sensor This command instructs the start of the break / short circuit display when there is a break or short circuit in the electrical connection with the 4005 etc. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  Also, based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 which is input via the payout control substrate 951 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is open, the door frame closing command instructs the door frame 3 to be closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When the door is in the closed state, the door open notification end is instructed. On the other hand, based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. When the main frame opening notification is issued, the main frame closing command instructs the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the main body frame open notification end is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning in the special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device), and a connection abnormality display command is paid out from the main control board 1310 as a payout control board 951. Is sent when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 4002, second start port sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when the door open is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), the door The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), the main body The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section comprises a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to an error cancellation command), and a command named frame status 2 command There is. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error cancellation navi command and the frame status 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and the detailed description of these will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7 * H” While setting as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1310 adds “7 * H” which is additional information to these received commands. According to the above, it is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The frame status 1 command, which has been shaped, is sent at power recovery, when the frame status changes, and at error release navigation, the error release navigation command is sent at error release navigation, and the frame status 2 command is at power recovery , And when the frame status changes. The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command, and the frame state 2 command, which are shaped, are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test related category is composed of various commands named test. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive substrate 4170, the motor drive substrate 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194 etc.).

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or momentary power interruption, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power on process described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-10. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, starting opening winning, variation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is comprised from the command of the name of special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned status "9 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening start winning effect start, and based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first start opening 2002 The instruction to start the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004, respectively, and the variation shortening operation end designation command changes The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is issued. The game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to convey the number of balls not yet used for display, and the special symbol 2 memory command has 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (the game ball is in the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and transmits the number of balls (number of pending) not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol memory command is the ordinary symbol 1 Hold 0 to 4 (The game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shows the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of normal symbols (number of held)) The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400. It is intended to instruct the start of pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the special symbol 1 suspension, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command of the special symbol 2 suspension is the function display unit 1400 Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 1405, pre-read and instruct pre-reading effect start to notify the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 suspension It is

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, when the starting ball winning command is when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor (when the starting ball is winning, or the second When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting opening sensor 4004), mainly from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. Transmitted to notify the effect, and the fluctuation shortening operation termination designation command is transmitted at the termination of the stop period (after the lapse of the suspension termination period) after the fluctuation is determined after settling the fluctuation shortening of the specified number of times, and the high probability termination designation command is , It is sent at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stop stop period) after the fluctuation is determined that has digested the high probability frequency in the case of "high probability N times" (special symbol 1 memory command is special symbol 1 operation retention) When the ball number changes (In the state where the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and there is a reserved number not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, When the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases using the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 1403 from the number of reservations) The special symbol 2 memory command is sent to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 When the number of game balls enters the second starting hole 2004 and the number of reservations increases further while there is a number of reservations not yet used in the variable display, the second special symbol indicator 1405 makes it special from the number of reservations Pattern The normal symbol memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is reduced (used when the variable number display is reduced), and when the number of the symbol 1 operation ball is changed (the game ball passes through the gate 2003 and the function display unit 1400 is normal) In the state where there is a number of reservations not yet used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the symbol display 1402, when the number of holdings further passes the game ball through the gate part 2003, and from the number of reservations the normal symbol indicator Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls increase (game ball at the first starting opening 2002) Is sent when the number of ball entry increases and the number of reservations increases), the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is when the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls increase (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the number of holdings) But Sent) when it increases. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that effect, but The manner in which the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the starting opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notification by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the pachinko machine 1 is also used to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 may simply receive the starting opening winning command but may not be notified by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 includes commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2; frame status 1, error release navigation, and so on. The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  In the frame status 1 command (corresponds to the error generation command), out of sphere, full, in 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR non-connection are prepared, and in out of sphere bit 0 (B0, "B" Represents a bit)), the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) if full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 in more than 50 stocks, and A value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In the bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 1 command, the value 1 is set to B5, the value 0 is set to B6, and the value 0 is set to B7.

  In the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), the ball is detected, and the payout detection sensor error and the retry error are prepared, and the bit 2 (B2) is set to the value 1 in the ball, and the payout detection sensor In the case of an error, the value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, "disbursement detection sensor error" indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The "retry error" indicates that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. In the error cancellation navi command bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7), B0 is the value 0, B1 is the value, B5 is the value, B5 is the value, B6 is the value 1, And the value 0 is set to B7.

  In the frame state 2 command, the ball removal is prepared, and during the ball removal, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). The bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command has the value 0 for B1, 0 for B2, 0 for B3, 0 for B4, 0 for B4, 1 for B5 and 1 for B6. The value 0 is set to B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery, change of the frame state, and error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at error release navigation, frame state 2 command Is sent when power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process Is a flowchart showing First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in deciding whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not reach is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated The random number for reach determination for use in the determination, and the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. 69 A random number for display pattern, a random number for a big hit symbol for use in determining a big hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a big hit gaming state, and this big hit The jackpot symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the first special symbol indicator 1 when generating a small hit gaming state 03 and second special symbol display 1405 for a small hit symbol random number for use in the determination of the small hit symbol displayed in derived display, an initial value for the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the small hit symbol random number A random number for decision etc. is prepared. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine the initial value of an ordinary symbol determination random number per pattern for use in determining whether to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol for the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random number for determining the jackpot is updated by hardware, and the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an first uses a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to be a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a Based on (the clock signal output from main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After the extraction, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310 a performs a big hit on the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an It is set as a judgment random number.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number per pattern normally is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one to count up. The counter counts up from the random value for determining the initial value per symbol normally to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value per symbol for normal. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at power on, or in the main control side power on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The value (sum value) of the checksum obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (during power-off) When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the value of the checksum (sum value), the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Takes out an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this taken out ID code, it is always from the fixed numerical range of the counter which usually updates the random number for judgment per symbol. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is designed to always overwrite and update the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set for the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310 a The first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if the external device is stored if the ID code is stored in the ID code, and the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM The second security measure that derives the same fixed value on the basis of and the two-step security measure by the second security measure is prevented from being analyzed by being taken.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this taken out ID code is used as a random number for determining the initial value per ordinary symbol. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball somehow acquires the game board 5 and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a Even if it is acquired illegally and the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number per symbol normal determination and the judgment value per regular symbol coincide can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a ′ provided in the other game board 5 ′. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number per normal symbol judgment and the normal symbol per-coincidence value match is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 was completely disassembled and analyzed because it is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. A momentary stop is generated at every predetermined interval obtained, and even if the game ball is allowed to pass through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at every predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the starting opening 2004 can not be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310 a is configured to set a stack pointer at a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the above-mentioned main control program performs processing at the time of main control power on as shown in FIGS. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the watchdog timer control register” built in the main control MPU 1310 a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310 af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register) to start the main control built-in WDT 1310 af and start timing until the main control MPU 1310 a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310 af starts, clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is started, and the watch dog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, when the timer clear set value is not set in “WDT clear register”, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e shown in FIG. 78 starts outputting a power failure clear signal. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage of +24 V with the reference voltage or compares the voltage of +12 V with the reference voltage to output the comparison result. The comparison result is that when no power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22.

  In the power clearing process, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e starts to output the power failure clear signal, thereby starting the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22. This blackout clear signal is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310 a. Be done. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is set until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure advance signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). It is done. The determination as to whether or not the power failure notification signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the above-described D type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure notification signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notification signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure notification voltage and stabilized after power on, the main control program outputs a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic to HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Is input to As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip flop MIC22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when a state in which the logic becomes LOW to be input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on) Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs, to the main control MPU 1310a, an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. It does depending on whether it is done or not. The main control program determines that the RAM clear is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI based on the logical value of the operation signal, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The state is set (game control side power on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to delete game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag indicating that it is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information, and a value of 0 when not deleting gaming information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, a system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Wait until In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot.

  Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S24 is performed based on the power failure advance signal. If it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notification signal is input, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310 af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notification signal is not input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program causes the calculated checksum value (sum value) to be the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection. Detailed explanation about, is mentioned below.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM (that is, main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where the power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary interruption, illegal means (for example A high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device is irradiated to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310 a itself, and also includes a state where it is restored thereafter.

  Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value (sum value) of the checksum, etc. are changed by performing various processes after this, so the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 (is the value 1) in step S26, that is, when deleting the game information, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally, the main control program executes the entire main control internal RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal according to the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is performed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs the RAM clear and clears the game information, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the sum values do not match or when the main control power is turned off. When not terminated normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on the taken out ID code, the fixed number range of the counter which updates the random number per normal symbol judgment The initial value derivation process which always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set to the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol determination to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the normal symbol determination described above. Do.

  Following step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading out the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the payout control board 951) and serial input / output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel) incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. In the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to (1), setting of the communication speed and setting of presence / absence of parity etc. are performed, and in the transmission serial port control register, setting of initialization of the transmission circuit and setting of transmission permission are made.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310 a for updating by hardware the jackpot determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to the game The random number is latched and acquired, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is determined at high speed in advance based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting other values in the numerical range one after another without overlapping and extracting all the values in the predetermined numerical range, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values in a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310 a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Following step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to indicate that power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command which are classified into the power-on described in the above are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Also in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored. is there. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power on state command and the power on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description of the point at which reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, when the main control program passes a predetermined time from the time of power on, that is, when the main control side main process is started, the error cancel navi command of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) is It will regulate execution of game control side RAM clear processing which is triggered by receipt (normal time operation control expedient). As described above, according to the concept of time sharing, the main control program detects the detection signal input following the operation of the operation switch 954, as described above, for the error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined time from the time of power on. The RAM clear process is executed triggered by the input (game control side power on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error cancellation navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means), is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error cancellation unit), which was originally used to cancel an error generated for the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization of the RAM, or after the lapse of the predetermined time It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in relation to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs non-attrition random number update processing (step S56). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). In addition, the random number for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol, the random number for determining a normal symbol variation pattern, and the like described above are also updated by the non-falling random number updating process.

  Following step S56, the main control program returns to step S54 again, determines whether or not there is an input of a power failure advance notification signal, and if there is no input of this power failure notification signal, non-falling random number update processing is performed in step S56. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt disable setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the game information is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program displays the start opening solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the second special hold number indicator 1406, the normal symbol indicator 1402, the normal symbol memory indicator 1188, the state indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Following step S66, the main control program performs setting of RAM access prohibition (step S68). By the setting of the RAM access prohibition, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can not be accessed, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be prevented from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The process of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when it is momentarily stopped, and the main control side power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

  Here, the point which performs determination of the presence or absence of the power failure alerting signal of step S24 following the wait time waiting process of step S22 is demonstrated. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 Explain the problems in

  As described above, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is charged to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary interruption. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is applied by applying the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as + 5V. The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after it is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs and a pachinko island facility When the power is shut off, the main control side power-off process can be reliably completed.

  However, as a very rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power return, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The system waits for the system that performs drawing control of the device 460 to start (boot) (boot timer: 2.5 seconds in this embodiment is set). Then, if an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs, although the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, step S42 is performed within about 7 ms. Interrupt initialization is performed, and then, in step S52, interrupt permission setting is performed. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated after the main control side timer interrupt process described above is performed, the main control side power off process in the main control side power on process may not be able to be completed. . For this reason, based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM, the value at which the checksum is calculated is not stored, and the main control side power-on process is started again at power recovery.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S28. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by a store clerk or the like at the time of power recovery and there is no intention indication by the store clerk or the like in the hall of RAM clear, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (clear There is a problem that will be

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure advance signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure advance signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the input of the power failure notification signal continues. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310 a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310 af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared and the time measurement is started again As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is, as described above, mainly As stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all even if the setting of RAM access permission is made in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, Since it is possible to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and restart the main control board 1310 by repeatedly performing the determination of step S24, it is possible to proceed with the game It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and there is no change in the calculation result of the checksum. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure notice signal is not input (that is, step S22 When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game, if it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process Even if the power to 1 is shut off, backup processing for storing game information according to the progress of the game by supplying power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 A master consisting of the processing of step S58 to step S68, which is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the side power-off process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a restarts the calculation result of the checksum in step S28. Since it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) in the backup processing matches, the instantaneous interruption stored and held in the main control internal RAM There is no need to initialize game information immediately before a power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM It is possible to start the main control side power-off process again without updating the key at all, but immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed within the "temporary power failure securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko facility is shut off, and the main control MPU 1310 a The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. In the case where the main control side power-off process can not be completed within the "instant power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal is input. If a power failure notification signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the determination again, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, and the timer clears to the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310 a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af by setting the set value, clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af and not being able to start the time counting again. . Since the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af by such software, a step after step S 24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S 42, and thereafter, in step S 52 It is possible to prevent the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt processing described later. Adopted the mechanism. In this way, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a power failure or momentary stoppage, the portion covered by software so that the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all The contents of the main control internal RAM by dividing it into two parts to ensure complete completion of interrupt processing and that the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM are not changed at all The game information can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, the point will be described where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery) In order to convey the information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command is mainly configured of information instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. There is. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2107 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. The problem in step S50, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is on and the main control return destination command is not performed in the power on in step S50, will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit gaming state screen (for example, the big hit gaming effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When an emergency stop or a power failure occurs while the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 and the main control board 1310 is then In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, it is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Starting driving of the solenoid 2108 to shift from the state where the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state where it is opened That.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a big hit gaming state as the gaming state, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main power control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display the screen in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and return according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from. It can not be displayed at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. That is, for example, a game winning ball 1 enters a big winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the ball number of the gaming ball which is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives, the peripheral control board 1510 is the ball of the gaming ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it can not be displayed at all which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is).

  In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 ends, for example, the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (the fourth round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 Control from the main control board 1310 a large winning a prize opening 1 closed display command instructing to shift from a closed state to a closed state (that is, start of closing between big winning opening 2005 rounds of starting opening unit 2100) When transmitted to the substrate 1510 and the main control substrate 1310 starts 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state (5th round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2108 is started and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 Transition from the state to the open state (that is, 5 of the big winning opening 2005 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

  In addition, for example, the game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 becomes a game state that indicates that the game state is advantageous to the player in the game state (for example, the movable piece has been expanded When the peripheral control board 1510 controls display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to display a screen to communicate to the player, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 operates in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the gaming state and the gaming ball is in the gaming state in which the game ball can be received to the second start port 2004 and the gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. When power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the game state becomes possible to receive the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the game state becomes advantageous to the player The peripheral control board 1510 can not display the screen indicating that it is present on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and the gaming ball receives the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or a power failure occurs at the time of power recovery. In some cases, it may be forgotten that it is a possible gaming state, and in such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. In spite of that, the screen to instruct the game in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen to instruct the game of entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed. As a result, there is also a problem that the player can not understand what kind of game the player plays.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there has been a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can not be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs There was a problem that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on), the power on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the fourth round of the big hit gaming state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main solenoid valve 2108 starts driving the main control board 1310 as a return destination, and the big winning opening 2005 is released from being closed by the opening / closing member 2107 The peripheral control board 1510 can notify the peripheral control board 1510 that it will shift to the off state, and the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many round it is. ) Can not be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but it is a big hit game state and A screen (for example, “big hit. Big winning opening is open. Big winning opening is open. A game has been opened on the big winning opening. The screen shows that the large winning opening 2005 is open by the opening and closing member 2107. Play a game to make the ball enter the game. ”The message is displayed to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600) and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored the power. After that, it is possible to instruct a game to make the game ball enter the big winning opening 2005, and for example, in the above-mentioned example, the game becomes a game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs in the game state advantageous to the player, and then the power is restored, the starting port solenoid 2107 is used as the return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen to start driving to indicate that the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction (for example, "the movable piece is expanded. To enter the game ball into the lower starting opening The peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 a message telling the player the message “Please play the game.” To the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine after power recovery The game of entering the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 can be instructed. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, it is possible to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of a manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28. The calculation and the determination of step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, a main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68 which is the backup processing described above and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off process at one time, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison determination, there is no possibility that the checksum values should match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. By storing in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information, only the two commands of the power on status command and the power on main control return destination command as transmission information transmit information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information Will be stored in the In these commands, a power on state command is first transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, and then a power on main control return destination command is transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power on state command from the main control board 1310 is taken as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is as shown in FIG. 70 at the time of power-on (in addition to the case of power-on, it also includes power-on recovery due to power failure or momentary power outage). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (other than when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs and the power is In the recovery from power recovery, this includes the low probability time short state, the high probability short time state, the low probability short time state, and the high probability short time state, as described above. It is composed of information indicating whether or not to do, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, the problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is for the copyright of any work In addition to the game specification that the game specification is continued until the next big hit game state occurs next when the game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs for example), the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like) in which probability fluctuations occur in a state of being performed 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). The main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of a work of movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works can not be known whether the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310 Although the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for the work of cartoon F). There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control substrate 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexists, the main control substrate for the copyrights of multiple types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while 1310 is mixed. Therefore, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5 in some cases. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the power recovery due to a power failure or a momentary power outage). To transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 the power-on state command shown in FIG. 89 and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line, and the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine that is included in the power-on state command received from the device, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is configured. And the sweet digital type, the serial code for specifying which type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state is In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation is in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited The main control board 1310 is for the copyright of any work by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) It is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which type) the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine in which, when probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs. As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of multiple types of works coexists, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually distinguish the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work by being able to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by visually observing the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not compatible with the game board 5 for the copyright of the work It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 turn on in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process Payout control board 951 various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) in addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal motor combination control process. When it is determined whether or not the customer ACK signal that indicates the normal reception is received is determined, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, a detection signal from general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 which detects gaming balls entered into general winning openings 2001 and 2201 shown in FIG. Detecting the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 detects the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball which has passed through the gate section 2003 shown in FIG. 8 The magnetic detection sensor which detects the fraudulent action using the magnet shown in FIG. 69 The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 is transmitted which indicates that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the detection signal from 024 and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. , And stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 which detects the game ball which entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection from the second starting opening sensor 4004 which detects the game ball which entered the second starting opening 2004 When each of the signals is read, the start opening winning command classified into the other parts shown in FIG. 90 corresponding to this is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004. The start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and count sensors 4005 for detecting gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2005. Detection signal from the first starting opening 2002, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 for detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2002, second starting opening sensor 4004 for detecting the gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 for detecting gaming balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, for a predetermined time (for example After the lapse, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. We treat the same result and the one that there is no game ball entering.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program detects the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 The effect of chattering, noise, etc. is achieved by performing two readings in total: two readings comparing the first to third times and two readings comparing the second to fourth times. Since false detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a false random number update process (step S106). In this success random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for big hit symbols and the random number for small hit symbols are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-incident random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers involved in the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only when the hit random number update processing is performed. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the random number per normal symbol determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this success random number update processing.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number per pattern determination is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value Is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for big hit determination is updated by this success random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery processing which randomly selects one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining normal per symbol normally. .

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol And, it may be a mechanism to update the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols only in the non-falling random number update process of step S56

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and a prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out gaming balls based on the input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. If the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection between the control substrate 1310 and the delivery control substrate 951 is created. Then, the prize ball command and the self-check command that have been created are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, the ball number of the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is created as well as creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so set the output of the main prize ball number information output signal to convey that effect, store it as output information in the output information storage area, and send the prize ball command to the payout control board 951. Or when the payout ACK signal notifying that the payout control substrate 951 has received the award ball command normally is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to be sent to the payout control board 951 or the like. In addition, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, when the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 balls, the number of balls exceeded is the next time this is exceeded In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and the number of balls of the game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on the input information. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program is various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) divided into the status display shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navi command, and frame status 2 command) Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navi command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as the payee serial data, the information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as the output information of the output information of the main control internal RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reshapes the command normally received as the sender serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Here, the frame status 1 command corresponds to a first error generation command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to a first error release command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraudulent operation detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005) A prize failure display command divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric combination product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, whether or not the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit decision value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether the jackpot gaming state is to be generated or not (referred to as "special lottery") or the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it agrees with the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability variation) or the like. Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range (big hit determination range) of the above-described big hit determination values with low probability and are read out from the normal determination table, while the value is 31768 with high probability. A value of 32767 is set and read out from the probability variation judgment table. Thus, in the special symbol and special motorized product control process in step S114, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control When it is determined whether or not the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot judgment random number (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) It is performed depending on whether or not it is included in the big hit judgment range.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting opening sensor 4002, various commands related to the special view 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second starting opening sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol display according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 so that the second special symbol display 1405 is turned on and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information Do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 shown in Figure 89 divided into big hit related A close display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. Set the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times the big winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is two, 2 to turn on the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10 The output of the lighting signal to the sound display lamp 1407a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round display 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set to light up, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence or absence of occurrence of probability fluctuation is lighted in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal motorized product control processing (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary motor combination control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per symbol for determination is extracted and gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM as gate information Remember to

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal Do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is gated to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is gated to the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become vacant areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random symbol determination per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether to open and close the movable piece or not is determined based on the determination result (lottery result from the normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is expanded in the left and right direction, and the game ball can be received by the second start opening 2004, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes gaming state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the common figure synchronization effect related shown in FIG. 89 are created and transmitted information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output information is described above as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the common electric circuit production shown in FIG. Is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the above-described output information storage area as output information If the value of the random number for determining the selected standard symbol is not identical to the standard symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is made based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above The display pattern is determined, and various commands classified into the general drawing tuning effect related shown in FIG. 89 are created, and the transmission information described above as the transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is set so that the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 is illuminated according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the memory area, and the output information storage area mentioned above as output information Remember.

  Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program is, for example, based on the output information, and when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951. When it is a big hit game state, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a drive signal to the start aperture solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information about the game such as time information output information, starting opening winning information output signal And it outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect related shown in FIG. 89 created in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronous effect related When the gaming ball entered the various commands (for example, large winning a prize opening 2005 (see Figure 8) which is classified to command, big hit relation is detected, the large winning based on the detection signal from count sensor 4005 (see Figure 69) Large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power on, various commands classified as general drawing tuning effect related, various commands classified as ordinary electric circuit related director related, FIG. 90 The various commands (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.) classified into the notification display, and the state display Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configures various commands as main cycle serial data. As described above, when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae included in the main control MPU 1310 a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310 aa in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb by using the serial management unit 1310 aec The data can be transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main cycle serial data. At the time of power recovery when power failure is recovered by occurrence of power failure or momentary power outage, in order to indicate that power recovery has been made in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on at step S50 in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. Since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. The power-on state command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value as main cycle serial data, and then the power-on main control return destination command is formed, status, It transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the mode and then the sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power on state command and the power on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit And the frame state 1 command (second error generation command) is transmitted (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navi command (second error release command) is transmitted to the (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navi command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error release navi command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame open command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame open command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 via the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) Section) sends a door open command (second door frame open command) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) Section) sends a door closing command (second door closing command) (a door frame command sending means, a second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. In step S22, the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared by setting a timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af starts again, so that the main control MPU 1310 a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af.

  Note that, as described above, when the main control board 1310 is in the process of proceeding with the game, the above-described backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 When the power is turned on in FIG. 89, the main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to output to. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on process in FIG. 93, main control board 1310 mainly sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process. Based on power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, a power on status command classified as power on in FIG. 89 and a power on status are transmitted to notify that power has been switched on (power recovery). A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power on state command as the main cycle serial data. To the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and so on. Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 returns the game progress by the main control board 1310 at the time of power return to the game board side effect display device 1600. The effect can be displayed in the display area of By this, when the player is playing a game, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power loss or power failure is restored promptly after power recovery. In addition, since it is possible to display and notify of the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the state of the system of the pachinko machine 1 is so-called freeze It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for being in a broken state as he sees. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the power of the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on, the power on state command shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, two commands of a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power on state command is configured as the main cycle serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and sum value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process constructs information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 The above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs when the probability change occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited Machine) and display detailed model information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying It has become.

[16-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time taken for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and initializes the peripheral control MPU 1511a in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters the state in which the interrupt permission is set, for example, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, which is output from the main control board 1310 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command about control of game production production, a command about a state of pachinko machine 1, etc.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, with regard to the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1 fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) in the backup first area 1511 cb. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and compare Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the effect backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) ms) are compared, and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank 1 (1 fr) with respect to Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73. Copy back the effect backup information (1fr) that is the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), and compare them as hot start, and compare When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of peripheral control RAM 1511 c. And a cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 73. The (SRAM) is compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 1511 cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73 and cleared to zero. Then, after the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs this initialization setting process, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try to prevent it.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and in the time information storage unit as current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is adjusted to the LED brightness included in the obtained brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and lighting it is performed. The luminance setting information is, as described above, luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, and the present The luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 being set is included.

  Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 When lighting up, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is lit. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is based on the brightness adjustment information contained in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above It is supposed not to be done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. It is to prevent being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once at power-on. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a as a peripheral control described later. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 so that peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. Also, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511 e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is to be performed, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for a lamp drive substrate is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 are created by a lamp data creation process described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the top address is sent to the serial I / O port for a lamp drive board via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of Thus, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Start sending data one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for a lamp drive substrate serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port). It is triggered by the fact that the written 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty due to the lack of 1 byte data.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board-side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte, via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring to the buffer register for writing, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, in synchronization with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the lamp drive substrate serial I / O port.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED is started, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. A door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 is created in a lamp data creation process to be described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is serialized to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , And frame decoration through the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED uses the data of the written transmission buffer register as the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting data of 1 byte of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, bit by bit, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port There is.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this rendering operation unit monitoring process, in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410, etc. based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the rendering operation unit 400 Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73 where various information obtained is set, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the state of operation of the operation button 410 Determine whether to reflect on

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described later is generated from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are outputted. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is generated on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this can prevent the processing time from being delayed, so-called dropping of frames will occur, but various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output process of step S1012. Various effects are produced from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effects of the LEDs and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 by the LEDs and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the music and sound effects according to the.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a in sound data creation processing described later. In addition to music and sound effects, the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound as serialized audio data. This audio data transmission IC 1512c, when serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input, is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system in which the right audio data is made a plus signal and a minus signal. While transmitting, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. Thus, in addition to stereo reproduction of music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, the screen data of the first screen data from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae Update the pointer to indicate what to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that make up the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae, what number light emission data from the top light emission data of the various light emission data The pointer is updated to indicate whether it is an aspect.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound are arranged in time series that configures the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae Among the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the sound command data at the top is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the top of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the scheduler updating process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the driving data to be essentially designated.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed (command analysis means) for various commands received in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later. The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in schedule data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae Do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, start opening winning command for instructing the start of the start opening winning effect, the number of pending normal symbols A normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4 pieces), a symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, a symbol memory command which is output when the number of start pending changes, and the special winning opening 2005 A special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) which is output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, which indicates the contents of full shown in FIG. 90) It is analyzed (command analysis means) whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently. Also, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command or the door frame closed Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511 cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 73. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the reception command storage area 1511 cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 89 are classified into various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect, various commands classified into big hit relation, and power on. Various commands to be displayed, various commands to be classified to general drawing tuning effect related, various commands to be classified to regular electric terminal production related, various commands to be classified into notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , For displaying status such as door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various commands which are classified, various commands which are classified as test related, and various commands which are classified as others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the effect control program further includes various commands divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 in the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above, various kinds of commands are performed. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, of the peripheral control unit 1511 It extracts from various control data copy area 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets 1511cae in a schedule data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above by the effect control program is divided into the state display shown in FIG. Various commands, for example, an error release navi command (second error release command), the game board side is controlled, for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal production mode accompanying the rendering operation. The visual display device 1600 (render device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (render device), and the lamp (render device) are used to warn the outside visually, or a speaker is used to warn the outside aurally ( Error notification means). By doing so, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent an unfair act on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

  Next, following the above-described step S1024, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S 1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, and day which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer of the effect control program is indicated among the light emission data arranged in time series, the pointer being updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data On the basis of the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and it is set in lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations provided on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of the board, various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c , And set in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data Are extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the game board side effect display device Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the display 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511 b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511 ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source While incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track numbers specified in the data, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data generation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated each time the sound data generation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is generated. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510 a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, muffled at substrate volume 0, and set to maximum volume at substrate volume 6, and substrate volume 0 to substrate The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume set in the substrate volumes 0 to 6 is transmitted, and audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and the sound source built-in of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is programmed by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. For example, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume small, effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is making a fraudulent act, an alarm sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents of the effect control program stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 are stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are respectively copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached are copied and backed up respectively to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and As the effect backup information (1fr), the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), copy the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr), specify the end address of Bank0 (1fr) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified as request factors for A controller 1511ac, and copying of backup first area 1511cb to Bank 2 (1fr) is specified, and Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 The contents stored in the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 3 (1 fr). From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 4 (1 fr) The Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  Further, in the backup processing, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, whenever the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed operation on Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db as presentation information (SRAM) which is contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as presentation backup information (SRAM) And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511 dc.

  The high speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), copy the backup first area 1511db to Bank1 (SRAM), and from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) All of the stored contents are successively copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) successively, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is specified as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the copy to Bank 2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db is specified, and the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are sequentially copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511 db successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates the copy of the backup second area 1511 dc to Bank 3 (SRAM). From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa stores the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to Bank 4 (SRAM) of backup second area 1511 dc. To the contents stored at the start address of Bank 0 (SRAM) and the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (eg, 1 byte) in the second backup area 1511 dc. Copy all from the start address of Bank 4 (SRAM) in order.

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511 e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is not reset.

  Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady process (step S1038), and returns to step S1006 again to return the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value of 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value of 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  The peripheral control unit steady processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed at first in step S1009, and the effect control program sets 1 ms in step S1010. Interrupt timer activation processing is performed, and each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed and the value in the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 Setting will complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is triggered by the fact that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later, the value 1 is set. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from sound source built-in VDP 1512a of liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the following will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether steady-state processing-in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady process processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being performed, this routine is ended. On the other hand, when the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), End this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. In order to prevent this by forcibly canceling on the way and starting execution of peripheral control unit steady processing from the beginning, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 95 is powered on. The peripheral control unit V blank signal which is this routine indicates that peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value SP to 1 in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in logic (peripheral control unit steady processing) In addition to notifying interrupt processing, peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine, the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 at the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the main routine. It is determined whether there is any, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, when the processing can not be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1008 in the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit in FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Usually, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 97, peripheral control MPU 1511 a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times or not. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  If it is determined in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33, that is, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid driving processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, according to drive data indicated by a pointer, an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. While updating the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and updating the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 is performed. Here, serial I / O port serial transmission of frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a In order to output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series to configure The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and frame decoration drive of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511 caf is sent via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The transmission of one byte of data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request for the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor (in the present embodiment, the frame I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate-side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf for 1 byte, external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller Via 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai By transmitting and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial drive I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register Transfer to 1-byte data of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and start transmission one bit at a time, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor Is going.

  Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive substrate 4180 is performed. Also here, serial drive I / O port serial transmission for motor drive boards is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, electrical drive source schedule data set in schedule data storage area 1511 cae of peripheral control MPU 1511 a and peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached is configured. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the motor or solenoid is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown at 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stores it at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag The first 1 byte of the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT thus processed is transmitted via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai, as a transmission buffer for the motor drive board serial I / O port. Transfer to register and write. Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). It is triggered by the fact that the written 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty due to the lack of 1 byte data.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and In synchronization, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information Movable position history information etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, original positions, movable positions and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, rendering operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this rendering operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the rendering operation unit 400 are input, and history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) Operation history information of the button 410 etc.) is created and set in the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the periphery shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the control MPU 1511 a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Judging, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on peripheral control board 1510, and receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect provided on effect display drive board 4450 , And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is acquired from the history of LOCKN signals set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak, from the frequency of the trouble between the connection of the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 and the occurrence state of the trouble. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached are copied and backed up to the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is this routine is executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in backup target work area 1511 ca shown in FIG. 73 for peripheral control RAM 1511 c. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up each time , And effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, as Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of the backup first area 1511 cb as effect backup information (1 ms) Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac. Specify the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), copy the backup first area 1511 cb to Bank 1 (1 ms), and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms), specify the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) All of the stored contents are copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa performs peripheral control D The contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) are specified as request factors for A controller 1511 ac, and copying of backup first area 1511 cb to Bank 2 (1 ms) is specified, and Bank 0 (1 ms) from the contents stored at the top address of Bank 0 The contents stored in the end address of (1 ms) are all copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 3 (1 ms), Bank 0 (1 ms) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of backup second area 1511 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 4 (1 ms) The Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously from the content stored in the start address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control substrate 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is triggered to transmit various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, and is triggered thereby to incorporate the main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this taking, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within a period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I / O port incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is taken (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value which is the byte number is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should be consistent with the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from a pachinko facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other to be charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is under the file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 It is judged whether or not. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 1511 a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  If the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 in step S1214, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the 1st byte and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main cycle serial data are shown in FIG. 73. The peripheral control MPU 1511a and the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The receive command storage area 1511 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer 1511 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end of the buffer and the beginning are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it is returned to the beginning Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which are stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored mode is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received of the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit blackout notification signal which is executed when the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification signal) from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310 The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 starts the 2 microsecond timer first (step S1320), and the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification) It is determined whether a signal is input (step S1302). If the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing which is the main routine is started in step S1304, and the blackout notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is turned off, excitation to a motor or a solenoid provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off.

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is started, and reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected with peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73). The received command is stored in.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are stored in Bank1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb and the contents stored in backup first area 1511cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 2 (1 fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in received command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. Peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. Specify the content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy the backup first area 1511cb to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) Content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr), and the end address of the reception command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied sequentially from the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core The content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb From the content stored in the start address of receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac in Bank 3 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc. The copy to the received command storage area is specified, and the contents stored in the start address of received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are stored in the end address of received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The specified contents (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac by the PU core 1511aa is included in the receive command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Designating copying to the contents from the content stored in the start address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If it is determined in this determination that a power failure advance signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure notification signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notification signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Can not be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, while when a power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314 The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and peripheral control external WDT 1511 e Output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by resetting automatically.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
The LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described next. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is judged that it is abnormal data, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 It is a signal to output a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When LOCKN signal history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is, as shown in FIG. 100, peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 having a capacity and provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST It is memorized.

  Following step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal data (normal Data)) and It does not request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is determined that

  When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is processed by the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 B B4, B4 B B3, B3 B B2, B2 B B1, B1 ビ ッ ト least significant bit B0, and so on, one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 at step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500. Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, etc. Shift one bit at a time toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value 0 (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, the connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether a failure has occurred in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is, as shown in FIG. 101, of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. As described above, in the LOCKN signal, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that the signal is output to convey that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Subsequently to step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. The connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value.

  If it is determined in step S1522 that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver does not occur. And exit this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value in step S1522, peripheral control board 1510 Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d for preparing the frame and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 for the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the state where a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver each time this routine is executed. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication check counter CC-CNT is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and the power recovery is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure occurs.

  Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is the cumulative number If it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the cumulative number determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1526 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, it is determined that a problem occurs in connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the accumulated number has reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be in a state of failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver Is a flag indicating whether or not there is a malfunction in the value, and value 1 when there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a malfunction occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, it is set to the value 0, respectively. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the power recovery is restored. It is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure occurs at time.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, connection recovery processing executed as one of the warning processing in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. While outputting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal Report that fact.

  When connection recovery processing is started, as shown in FIG. 102, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs peripheral control steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95. Of the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated (step S1540). In this determination, in order to instruct, in the scheduler update process, what screen data from the top screen data among the screen data arranged in time series forming the screen generation schedule data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is active, while the screen generation schedule When the effect is completed according to the data and all the updating of the pointer is completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and waiting for customers. It is possible to judge based on the screen generation schedule data whether or not it is a period, and display the start screen at the time of powering on of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600 If it is in a waiting period or a waiting period for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 is on the game board side During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or waiting for customers, the game board side effect display device 1600 That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all the pointer updating is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is provided for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the same process as the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. During the connection between transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver (Count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times of determining that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is even one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the number is not changed. While the routine is ended, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state even if the number of times is one. If the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is present, it is determined whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be in a failure state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed. Value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed: 1 between the transmitter and the receiver Is set to 0 when the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a failure occurs in the connection does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d included in the peripheral control substrate 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effects included in the peripheral control substrate 1510. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Then (step S1548), this routine ends. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 in order to reliably convey that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Do the drawing process. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message “A problem has occurred with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.” Is displayed. Also, in the communication error display process, the demonstration screen by the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 or in waiting for customers. Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period being performed, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In order to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display request of the door frame side effect display device 460, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is LOCKN As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, When the LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the LOCKN signal is not input, the door frame side effect display device 460 has a failure as a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is judged that the notification is being made, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition to the processing described above, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device") is repeatedly flowed from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to turn on all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various kinds of LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, to briefly describe the decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the process at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady process etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main processing or the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94 or the second shown in FIG. 8 When the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening 2004 becomes "big hit", the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) Then, the round is to be digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second special drawing result drawn by receiving the game ball to the second starting port 2004 can be obtained from the main control board 1310 The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the command, so that the left side display symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the center decorative pattern is on the center. The variable display of the right side decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result Can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed From the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative pattern rotates from the upper center to the lower center side of the display area, and the right decorative pattern rotates the reel from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area When the left decoration pattern, the center decoration pattern, and the right decoration pattern are stopped and displayed in a fluctuating manner, the left decoration pattern, the center decoration pattern, and the right decoration pattern corresponding to the stop are displayed. The left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in an opaque aspect so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. Thus, the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be variably displayed and stopped in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are variably displayed and stop-displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized with each other.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 selects the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second drawn by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 for conveying the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady processing at power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, schedule data storage area 151 of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in time series that make up the screen generation schedule data set in cae, a pointer is used to indicate which screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Since updating is performed, that is, when the pointer is being updated in the scheduler update process, the effects are progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the variation display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is started and stopped and displayed, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  Thus, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped before being displayed in the communication check counter CC-CNT. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (that is, Even if it is determined that the connection with the receiver is in a state where a failure has occurred even once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver Process to recover the connection between the client and the For example, the message “The liquid crystal display device on the upper tray has a problem. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 without performing the communication error display process of step S1548. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to notify that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data, and the door frame side effect display device In 460, an image is displayed based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the rendering is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule generation data for screen generation is not activated and the schedule data for screen generation is not activated in the scheduler update processing, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is powered on. The warning of step S1024 in peripheral control unit steady processing of clock processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is the value 0, that is, When the number of times it is determined that there is no failure in connection with the receiver is one, the routine is ended as it is, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times it is determined that there is a problem with the connection between the device and the receiver is also one, the process proceeds to the process of step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG has the value 0 When there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number determined to have not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the processing proceeds to step S1546 in the same processing, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output processing is performed, and the routine is ended. When the value of FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the above-mentioned communication error is displayed. Process and exit the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver In the case where connection between ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken at one time, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken. When the cumulative number determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, by always performing the SYNC pattern output processing, between the connection of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, In other words, while processing to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, "A problem has occurred with the upper side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to notify that the message “is displayed and to notify that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. Is activated.

  The variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern again In the interval period until the start of the game, since the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to convey that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect A fault occurs in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of occurrences is at least one, and the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be defective has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, SYNC While the pattern output processing is always performed, processing for recovering the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is performed, while the transmitter and receiver When the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a fault occurs in the connection between has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, there is a fault in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) ) By always performing communication error display processing, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, the screen generation schedule data is active, so the left side decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol , And until the right-hand decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 Even if the number of times is the same, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is performed , The process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is an abnormal data. The door frame side effect display device 460 invalidates the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that tells that there is a drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Display an image based on.

  In this way, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right side decoration are displayed again. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to convey that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. Between the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display on the door frame side effect display between the start of variation display of the left side decoration symbol, the center decoration pattern, and the right side decoration symbol. Receiver ICSD for door frame side effect that conveys that the drawing data received from IC 1512 d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. This is a combination result of the stop display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 being information most of interest to the player, and a profit to the player Since the player can determine whether or not a big hit gaming state to be awarded is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol change display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed by the influence of noise and the like until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, it is not left to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect midway and performing processing to recover to the state where it can be drawn correctly. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this point, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays a start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a customer waiting state This is largely different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration period by the game board side effect display device 1600. The LOCKN signal output request data is a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or becomes a customer wait state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period being performed, the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a, and the receiver ICSDIC 0 for door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a failure in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e provided in the periphery control board 1510, as described above, the differential is generated. The two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512 e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512 f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512 f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512 e, so that One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V included in the effect display drive substrate 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally: As described above, since the data format is different from that of the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is determined that the data is abnormal data, and the LOCKN signal is detected around the periphery control unit 1511 of the periphery control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. Accordingly, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a causes the effect display drive board 4450 not to have a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While it can be determined that no fault has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a fault has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 as a fault has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the notification image to notify that (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk."), The sound source built-in VDP1512a to control the game board side effect display device An alarm sound to be output to 1600 and to that effect (for example, Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512 f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC 0 The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which can be connected in a circuit and receives LOCKN signal output request data, outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 does not have a failure, while Signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as the notification process when it is determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a failure. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a defect in the door-frame-side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify the store clerk or the like in the hall by executing notification processing to that effect. The store clerk or the like in the hall can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time and effort. ing. Therefore, it is possible to discover a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460 without taking much time.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is judged that there is, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 Since it is a signal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the ICSDIC 0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, for door frame side effect Receiver ICSDIC0 is a transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect When the image sent from the device can not be received normally, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input is a door that transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting the data to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is possible to eliminate the communication failure between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and can act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the defect. It is supposed to be. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which receives an image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460, transmits the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d When it can not be received normally, the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that a communication failure occurs because it can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511. To convey that To generate a message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper plate. Please call a clerk.” And display the generated image on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification. It can be done. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can directly notify the store clerks in the hall or notify the store clerk in the hall that took the front of the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the store clerk in the hall suffers from the problem. It is possible to start work to solve the problem at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by detecting and solving the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. If the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken even once, the connection between the transmitter and receiver fails When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate communication failure between image communication From the transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect A connection confirmation signal that indicates that transmission starts to the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be repeatedly output to the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. It has become. Thus, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during a period in which the game is not progressed by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move in the direction in which the communication failure is resolved.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 in a period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. If the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken even once, the connection between the transmitter and receiver fails When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate the communication failure during image communication is provided. Door from the transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect The connection confirmation signal that indicates that transmission is to be started to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and confirms that the game progress is started again When the output of the signal is stopped, and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d opens the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) into a door frame. Control of liquid crystal display by stopping transmission to receiver ICSDIC0 for side effect The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Thus, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a repeat failure resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not executed by displaying start and stop, it is possible to move in the direction of solving the communication failure. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and displays stop. Only when the progress of the game is not being executed, while the output of the connection confirmation signal is being repeatedly output, the main control board 1 Even if the 10 main control MPUs 1310a start fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and start the progress of the game again, the door frame The distortion (disturbance of the image) of the effect that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460 is every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to execute the progress of the game again and ends (a period from timing K1 to timing K2 (Every time it becomes an interval period), it can be made to go in the direction to eliminate.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 is a start area in which the game balls emitted by the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 toward the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on entering the mouth 2004, is implemented. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor for controlling the payout of the gaming balls by the payout device 830 based on the winning ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The 70 dispensing control MPU 952a is implemented.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information on the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on the payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated during the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from the time of power on, the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased 77 is output from the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period in which the payout control unit performs processing at power on from when the power is turned on, to the payout control internal RAM. The RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information regarding the payout being stored, and the main control side power supply of FIG. The period (or the power 82. The RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is used as an error cancellation signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830 when it is operated after the period when the payout control unit power on processing has been performed since the time of entry has elapsed. And an error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from the time of power on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period when the payout control unit power on processing is performed from the time of power on, Since the RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the information regarding the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. Period in which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process of (Or, when it is operated after a lapse of time from when the power is turned on, a period in which the process when the turn-on of the dispensing control unit is performed) elapses, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. The RAM clear function is also operated by one operation switch 954 as it is combined with an error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a that is the payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is the game control microprocessor. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, i.e., and an error release function. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors disposed on the game board, such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detecting sensor , And a circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, so here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input is described Do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area, etc. to manipulate the flow state of the game ball as desired and obtain an unfair profit There is no end to unfair gaming practices.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such illegal gaming activities and to control the illegal activity by the light emitting means or the alarm by sound or the like. There is.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a game machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is formed of, for example, a magnetoresistance effect element, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when not detecting magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and outputs a voltage when detecting magnetism of a predetermined value or more It does not (0 V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161 via a connector CON1, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Thus, when the transistor STR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is not detecting magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. In addition, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the flow of current from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thus, when the transistor ITR0 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected not only to the pull-up resistor IR2 but also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  Main control input circuit 1310 b includes pull-up resistor NR 1, resistor NR 2, and transistor NTR 1, and one end of pull-up resistor NR 1 is connected to the collector terminal of transistor ITR 1 in the front stage of panel relay board 4161 via connector CON 2. The +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. Thus, when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which +12 V is applied. The detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and includes a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied, and a transistor ITR1 whose base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is the case.

  Further, in the front stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit including the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. Thus, the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are provided on the panel relay substrate 4161.

[Detection action]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 to turn on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled up to +12 V (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1 and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in the form of a table in FIG. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay substrate 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, as in the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, if the connector member is corroded or dust gets into the connector connection portion, contact resistance is generated. There are pin contact types and bellows contacts in the connector member depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member, but in the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, the pin contacts The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is open, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

  Also, when a vibration is applied to the connector member, a contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when the player is playing a right-handed game, when slight sliding wear occurs due to the vibration from a specific part of the gaming area where many gaming balls are continuously concentrated and flowing down being applied to the connector member. Also, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member (connector CON1) electrically connecting the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay substrate 4161 The operation of will be described. For example, in FIG. 104, when the contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a dashed line. The magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 times to 1000 times that in the case where the contact of the connector is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Will lift. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point at which the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, although the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161, if the contact resistance RR occurs, there is a possibility that the sensor signal may be erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310 b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  Note that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 should be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the big winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126, etc. become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment differs from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that it is between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism in the non-detection state. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side is applied, the action by the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is performed. The voltage raising unit 4166 is provided to avoid the problem, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising unit 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example configured of a Zener diode ZD0 whose Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. Further, +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 having +12 V applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164. Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. A sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conductive state because the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state in which the magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V. Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 through the Zener diode ZD0, whereby a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal determines that the logic is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a performs a peripheral operation. An error command is sent to the control unit 1511, and processing such as outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 reports an abnormality with the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the alarm lamp, the sound, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lift up. In FIG. 105, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a point where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

  That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 by the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 remains nonconductive because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 prevents the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the latter stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits a magnet according to the transmitted error command. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, a warning indicator, a sound, etc. notify that an illegal game action using a character is performed or that a break occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 Do. Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of a magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310 b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has one end connected to the first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and the other end of the first resistor IR1 and the other end grounded. And a second resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 104, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is disposed at the subsequent stage to the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example configured by the resistor IR3 which causes a current to flow to the ground to drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 ing.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 having +12 V applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164 and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. A sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 to turn on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V.

  In addition, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising unit 4166 A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows in the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lift up. In FIG. 106, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows in the first resistor IR1, and the current also flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current due to the predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage substantially falls to the ground, and the second resistor Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 subsequent to IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage maintains the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 prevents the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the latter stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example (third example) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control input of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The circuit 1310 b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the third embodiment, the voltage boosting unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which constitute a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the predetermined voltage higher than the first voltage. And resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared to the second embodiment described above, in the third embodiment, in place of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 which are connected in series are respectively connected in parallel to two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which constitute a Darlington circuit. Connected That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example configured of the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 which cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the previous stage, and is connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the previous stage. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the latter stage transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 as well as being one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 whose +12 V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR turns on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V.

  In addition, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistor circuit composed of a resistor IR1 of the pull-up resistor IR0, a voltage raising unit 4166, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5, and a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistance IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, A current flows to the ground via the resistors IR4 and IR5. When a current flows in the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. Thereby, the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage is turned on.

  When the rear stage transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, as the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Lift up. In FIG. 107, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a point at which the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1 . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and the current also flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows in the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit in the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. It does not flow in. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Further, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is also not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the latter stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input portions 4162 respectively connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminals of the transistors ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off.

  When any one of the magnetic wire connection between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on in the same manner as the detection circuit unit 4164. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. In addition, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, each provided with a voltage output unit 4163, for example “TD62083AP” Product) can be used.

  As mentioned above, although the sensor signal input part 4162 arrange | positioned at the panel relay board 4161 of this embodiment was demonstrated, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input part 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, A connector member Any sensor may be used to transmit the sensor signal from the detection sensor, and various sensors, for example, general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration detection sensor, contact It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

[Application to which sensor signal input unit 4162 of panel relay substrate 4161 is applicable]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 in each of the first to third embodiments described above is described as one that prevents erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance that occurs when contact of the connector is abnormal. The applicable part of the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

  As described above, in the gaming machine, there are circumstances in which the detection sensor sets a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, each is arranged near the starting opening, winning opening, big winning opening, out opening, etc.) . Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor on the panel relay board) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor depends on various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. The length of is suitably selected. About this point, various forms will be taken by the difference in the model of a game machine.

  By the way, the electric current which flows in the detection sensor is changed by changing the resistance value depending on the aging of the used electric parts (for example, connector and detection sensor) and the wiring pattern and the length of the wiring (harness). If the value is different from the value, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value also changes when, for example, the type of the detection sensor, the placement location, and the length of the wiring (harness) are design-changed due to the specification change during development. Therefore, the current flowing to the detection sensor changes. In addition, depending on the change of the arrangement location of the detection sensor, the extension of the length of the harness, and the change of the place to draw the harness, there are cases where noise is likely to be picked up, and the degree of noise influence also changes.

  If a current flows to a resistance value that changes due to such a cause, the current flowing to the detection sensor may be different from the original design value. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected. In addition, the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, and the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided with the voltage raising unit 4166 according to the first to third embodiments is an electric component (for example, a connector or a detection sensor) used, aging of the wiring pattern, wiring (harness) Depending on the length, even when the resistance value changes, false detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise can be prevented, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In the prior art of FIG. 104 and the embodiment of FIG. 105, changing resistance values are indicated by an alternate long and two short dashes line.

  In the following, the case where noise appears on the harness will be described as an example. Further, FIG. 110 (A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110 (B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 110 (A) is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when noise is applied.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), in the conventional example, when there is no noise, it is low level (0.4 V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 104 is turned on. Can maintain a level lower than the voltage (0.8 V). When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at high level (12 V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on, and the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise appears, the peak of the noise waveform is the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 turns on (0.8 V) as indicated by the hatched portion even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Since the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the off state can not be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  In addition to noise, for example, as shown in FIG. 110A, when overshoot occurs, false detection is not made in the state where magnetism is detected, but when undershoot occurs, transistor ITR0 is turned on. And can not maintain the off state. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  As shown in FIG. 110B, in the embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 raises the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 105 to 2 V as an example of a voltage higher than 0.8 V. It is done. The detection operation is low level (0.4 V) in the state where the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism in the absence of noise, and is lower than the boosted voltage 2 V, the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 turns on. A level lower than (0.8 V) can be maintained. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at high level (12 V) and higher than the boosted voltage 2 V, so the voltage boosting unit 4166 is turned on and the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on (0. The level is higher than 8 V), and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise appears, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Since the voltage is also lower than the boosted voltage 2 V, the voltage raising unit 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Thus, false detection can be prevented.

  Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to a rise in resistance due to aging will be described as an example. FIG. 111 (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111 (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 111 (A) is a signal waveform input in the normal case, and the right side is a signal waveform input when a voltage rise occurs due to a rise in resistance due to aging.

  In the conventional example, when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage input as indicated by the hatched portion is a transistor. Since the voltage (0.8 V) at which ITR0 turns on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on and can not maintain the off state. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when a voltage rise occurs due to the increase in resistance value due to aging, in the state where the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the input voltage is turned on by the transistor ITR0. Voltage (0.8 V) is lower than the boosted voltage 2 V, the voltage boosting unit 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Thus, false detection can be prevented.

  As described above, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 according to the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to secular change or noise. In addition, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 is provided with the voltage raising unit 4166, noise may be caused by changing the arrangement location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the place to draw the harness. The sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise even if there is a part that is easy to pick up. Therefore, the circuit units (the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164) provided on the panel relay substrate 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it is possible to have a margin in design change during development.

[Sensor signal input unit 4162 'of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 described in the first to third embodiments includes the built-in transistor STR, and the built-in transistor STR is turned on when the magnetism is not detected, and the built-in sensor is detected when the magnetism is detected. Although the transistor STR is turned off, in other words, the sensor signal input unit 4162 uses an input that is low when magnetism is not detected and a sensor that is high when the magnetism is detected. Alternatively, a magnetic sensor in which the input is high when the magnetism is not detected and the input is low when the magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetic sensor which is turned off when the magnetism is not detected and turned on when the magnetism is detected. It is also possible to use

  FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit according to another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when not detecting magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and turned on when magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected.

  The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161 via the connector CON1, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

  As the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to use those of the first to third embodiments described above. In this alternative embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example formed of a Zener diode ZD0 whose Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 at the front stage of the connection portion.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit unit 4164 'is constituted by the transistor ITR0. Further, +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and +12 V is connected to the pull-up resistor NR applied at one end. There is. Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310 b of the main control board 1310 is the same as that of the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage signal output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal winning unit 4162 ′, and the transistor ITR0 constitutes a detection circuit unit 4164 ′.

[Detection operation when normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the non-detection state where the magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit 4164 ', and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

  Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state in which the magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  Thus, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the OFF state because the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation of abnormal case due to change of resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the non-detection state where the magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

  At this time, even if noise is applied to the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is a higher voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 There is no influence on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 via the anode terminal thereof, and the transistor ITR0 remains unchanged. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 prevents the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 '.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which the magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  Thus, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the OFF state because the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  At this time, even if noise is applied to the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage The predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 prevents the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[Example in which multiple sensor signal input units 4162 are arranged on panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. In FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which three of the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161), the voltage output unit 4163, the voltage raising unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voltage raising unit 4166, and at least one of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4166 may be disposed on the same substrate. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which the voltage raising unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are disposed on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161), and the voltage output unit 4163 is disposed on another substrate (for example, sensor substrate). It is a figure which shows an example.

  Further, in FIG. 115, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 are disposed on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161), and the detection circuit unit 4164 is disposed on another substrate (for example, the main control substrate 1310). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which carried out. As described above, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be changed variously.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention related to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with age or wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is configured by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the first to third embodiments in FIG.

  The voltage output unit 4163 outputs a first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, and a second voltage which is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V) while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism. At the same time, a high level voltage (for example, 12 V) is output.

  The detection circuit unit 4164 switches on / off of the output of the detection signal according to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. In the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 113, since the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments is used, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V is connected to the front stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

  Then, for the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (12 V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (eg 0.4 V in each embodiment). Even if a predetermined voltage (for example, a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is illustrated in FIG. 111) lower than V) is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage to the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided A voltage raising unit 4166 is provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163 and a plurality of voltage raising units 4166 are disposed on the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161). . In this example, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the voltage output unit 4163 and a voltage boosting unit 4166 disposed downstream of the voltage output unit 4163. Also, a plurality of voltage raising units 4166,... Are electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS is the base of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  In FIG. 113, when any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off, whereby the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on. It is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to take into consideration the changing resistance value as illustrated. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one substrate (on panel relay substrate 4161), and panel relay substrate 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) in various types of game machines. Is possible. Therefore, it contributes to reduction of man-hours involved in design change and manufacturing in the middle of development.

  FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS of another embodiment described in FIG. 112 are provided, and a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected in parallel to the voltage output unit 4163. Further, in FIG. 116, the magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is configured. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low level voltage (eg, 0.4 V) while the magnetic sensor When the MGS does not detect magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high level voltage (for example, 12 V).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit unit 4164 'described in the other embodiment is used, the difference is that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V, and +12 V is applied to one end of the main control input circuit 1310a. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12 V by the applied pull-up resistor NR1.

  In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 'is turned off, whereby the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on. It is.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control concerning the game progress and the effect will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process result. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a display mode (a symbol, various background images, characters, display images of characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, The display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the rendering operation unit 400 and the movable member) contributing to the rendering are controlled.

  In particular, in the main control board 1310, special symbol process processing is performed each time interrupt processing is performed. In this special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning is made, the number of pending special symbol sides is increased by one. To be done.

  When the first and second starting opening winning processes are finished, if the processing flag is 0, the variation starting process is executed. In this variation start process, on condition that the number of reservations is 1 or more, the big hit judgment in pending state is digested and executed, and after storing the result of this big hit judgment (such as a hit or its type) , Update the processing flag to "1".

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is completed, the variation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator based on the stored result of the big hit judgment and the current gaming state etc. The processing flag is updated to "2" after determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol etc).

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, processing during variation is executed. In this fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the time out. Stop. After that, when the result of the big hit judgment stored in the fluctuation start process is a big hit, the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and the big hit judgment result stored in the fluctuation start process is not a big hit Then, the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, it is necessary to start over from the fluctuation start process again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the big hit game processing is executed. In this big hit game processing, the condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game is operated, and the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the big hit game determined based on the type of the winning big hit, Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game is over, it is controlled that it is controlled to the advantageous state such as the time saving state or the probability variation state when the processing to stop the operation of the condition device is done or the type of the winning jack is a special type After updating the gaming state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, it is necessary to start over from the fluctuation start process again.

  A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored as the fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of symbol variation of the special symbol, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, an effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 It is possible to determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for outlying reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation. The big hit change is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and in the effect display device 1600, the reach display is performed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed. The effect to be played is executed. The out-of-reach reach fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when it is judged that the result of the big hit judgment is a loss and the reach judgment is based on reach random numbers, and in the effect display device 1600, after the reach effect, decoration An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally displayed so as to display the off symbol for a definite stop. Out of change fluctuation is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit judgment is a loss and it is not judged that the reach judgment will be performed by the reach judgment based on reach random numbers, and the effect display device 1600 does not go through reach effect An effect is carried out in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally released so as to display the off symbol for a final decision. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is defined so as to be able to identify which fluctuation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to this, it is possible to make such a variation pattern of the decorative symbol appear. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the variation display pattern of the decoration symbol is made to appear in the effect display device 1600, and the effect display (background and hold image) related to the degree of expectation is changed. Control is performed to change the mode (display or movement) in the operation unit 400, or to operate a movable member such as the back and back movable effect unit 3100.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, operation information on the operation button 410 and operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window can be acquired, and control concerning an effect according to the information can also be executed.

  Here, the acquisition principle of the operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the acquisition principle of operation information in the vicinity of the opening window, in which members unrelated to the explanation of the acquisition principle of operation information are omitted, and the members having a relationship are also included. These are shown schematically. FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the gaming area 5 is housed in the main frame 4, and the gaming area 5a is formed so that the gaming area 5a where the gaming balls flow down is visible. It has an opening window and a door frame 3 provided to be able to open and close with respect to the main body frame 4. And, as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflection upright wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the opening window and at least the inner side surface of which can be reflected. It is done. The opening window is a portion of the through hole 111 that is on the front side (front side) of the glass plate 192.

  Here, the reflective standing wall portion 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflecting upright wall 33 is formed by the lower reflecting upright wall 338 formed by the lower tray unit base 323, the left reflecting upright wall 538 formed by the left unit base 531, and the right unit base 551. And the right reflection upright wall portion 568 to be arranged, and these members are arranged in a substantially U shape (a mode in which the reflection upright wall portion is not installed above the opening window) along the outer periphery of the opening window. It is configured by doing. In the lower reflection upright wall 338, the left reflection upright wall 538, and the right reflection upright wall 568, the inner side surfaces thereof are in a substantially perpendicular relationship with respect to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). It is provided to be a light reflection surface.

  According to such a configuration, none of the lower reflection upright wall portion 338, the left reflection upright wall portion 538, and the right reflection upright wall portion 568 among the reflection upright wall portions 33 formed in a substantially U-shape are provided. The part (upper side of the opening window), “the light from a predetermined light source located outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the 33 functions as a first portion that allows the light to be reflected by 33, and the light reflected by the reflection upright wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is outside the outer periphery of the opening window It also functions as a second part that allows it to be detected.

  Furthermore, in the reflection upright wall portion 33 according to this embodiment, one reflection member is provided across the inner side surfaces of three separate members (the lower reflection upright wall portion 338, the left reflection upright wall portion 538, the right reflection upright wall portion 568). A structure to which a member 36 (for example, a reflective seal) is attached is adopted, thereby suitably securing the reflection performance as the reflection upright wall portion 33 including joints of three separate members.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the left side base 572a provided on the upper left side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window (see FIG. 23) In the inner space 3435a, the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a are provided. The left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having a very low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the one specific virtual plane P which intersects the lower reflecting upright wall 338, the left reflecting upright wall 538, and the right reflecting upright wall 568, and is provided with an opening window. The space is opened only to the side so that light can travel toward the opening window and is provided as a space into which light from the opening window can be taken. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an inner space 3435a is provided behind the left upper speaker 573 while the cheating from the back of the speaker 573 is suppressed, the space between it and the opening window A transmitting member 3436a designed to have extremely high transparency and extremely low influence on the light traveling direction is provided.

  Further, the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is united with the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a, and light is directed toward a wide range on at least the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Are made to be able to proceed.

  Further, the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a is united with the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be

  According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34a travels to the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflective upright wall portion 33 and becomes the reflected light from the reflective upright wall portion 33 and the internal space 3435a. Incorporated into In this point, in the internal space 3435a, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the left side base 572a, so that the disturbance is suitably suppressed, the left outer periphery outer light emitting portion 34a It becomes possible to detect the light emitted and reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33 by the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the right side base 572b provided on the upper right side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window (see FIG. 23) In the inner space 3435b, the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b and the right outer peripheral light detecting portion 35b are provided. The right side base 572b itself is also provided by a member with extremely low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, the internal space 3435b is a space including the one specific virtual plane P at a position where it intersects with the lower reflecting upright wall 338, the left reflecting upright wall 538, and the right reflecting upright wall 568 similarly to the internal space 3435a. And is open only toward the side on which the opening window is provided, and is provided as a space where light can travel toward the opening window and light from the opening window is taken. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an inner space 3435b is provided behind the right upper speaker 573, while the fraudulent act from the back of the speaker 573 is suppressed, the space between it and the opening window A transmitting member 3436b designed to have extremely high transmittance and extremely low influence on the light traveling direction is disposed.

  The right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is united with the right outer peripheral light detecting portion 35b, and light is directed toward at least a wide range on the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Are made to be able to proceed.

  The right outer peripheral light detector 35b is united with the right outer peripheral light emitter 34b, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be

  According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer periphery external light emitting portion 34b travels to the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflective upright wall portion 33, and becomes the reflected light from the reflective upright wall portion 33 and the internal space 3435b. Incorporated into In this point, in the internal space 3435b, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the right side base 572b. Therefore, while the disturbance is suitably suppressed, from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b It becomes possible to detect the light emitted and reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 by the right outer peripheral light detecting portion 35b.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a region surrounded from three directions by the height width of the lower reflection upright wall 338, the left reflection upright wall 538, and the right reflection upright wall 568 An area marked with a dotted pattern in FIG. 120 functions as a special operation receiving portion 3333 capable of detecting an operation by the player, and the operation mode of the player with respect to the special operation receiving portion 3333 is determined. The effect control corresponding to the determination is executable.

  For example, when the special operation receiver 3333 is not operated by the player, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitter 34a in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and the reflecting wall 33 It becomes reflected light from various angles (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P) in the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a. That is, in the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a, a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) reflected light from such various angles using an optical lens or the like The special operation receiver 3333 outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 that no physical object exists in the special operation receiver 3333 based on the separate detection signal.

  At this time, the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is also not blocked by any physical object, and various angles in the reflective standing wall portion 33 (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P As a reflected light from the angle), the light travels to the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b. That is, also in the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b, a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) reflected light from such various angles using an optical lens or the like The special operation receiver 3333 outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 that no physical object exists in the special operation receiver 3333 based on the separate detection signal.

  On the other hand, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 is operated by the player in the mode shown in FIG. 119, part of the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a in a wide angle range is the player's finger ( Therefore, only light other than light traveling in the direction (angle range) is blocked by the reflection standing wall portion 33 and travels toward the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a. That is, in this case, in the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a, the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements aligned on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the blocked direction (angle) of the light emitted from the light source and the size (angle range) thereof, the physical size of which is the size in any direction when viewed from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a. Information on whether an object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  At this time, part of the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and light directed in the blocked direction (angle range) Only the light other than the light is reflected by the reflection wall 33 and travels toward the right outer peripheral light detector 35b. That is, in this case, in the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b, the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements aligned on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the blocked direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, the physical size of which is large in any direction when viewed from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b. Information on whether an object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the information from the left outer peripheral light detector 35a and the information from the right outer peripheral light detector 35b are obtained respectively and analyzed to obtain the physical operation in the special operation receiver 3333. The coordinate position (x, y) and the size of the physical object in the special operation receiver 3333 as well as the information (whether or not the operation to the special operation receiver 3333 is performed) exists in the special operation receiver 3333 Will be able to obtain information related to As will be described later, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, such information is periodically acquired, whereby the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 or the size of the physical object can be obtained. An operation gesture such as a change can be determined, and effect control corresponding to the determination is executed.

  Note that these analysis processes may not necessarily be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and may be performed by an external unit that acquires information from the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a and the right outer peripheral light detecting unit 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may obtain the analysis result from the external means, or the external means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share analysis.

  Further, the light emission from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b are respectively blinked, the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state, and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b is extinguished. A period of time and a period of time in which the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is in the light emitting state may be alternately generated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a is in the light emitting state is the right outer peripheral If the outside light detection unit 35b detects and analyzes the information based on the information, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a does not interfere with the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. As a result, it is expected to obtain more accurate detection information.

  Furthermore, the light emission from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b are respectively blinked, the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state, and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is extinguished And the period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is in the light emitting state, and the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is also A cycle in which a period of time in which the light is off is sequentially generated may be repeated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a is in the light emitting state is the right outer peripheral If the detection is performed on the outside light detection unit 35b side and the offset when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a are in the extinguished state is also detected and analyzed based on these information, Interference between the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is eliminated, and it is possible to determine after excluding the detected offset, and the more accurate by that amount It becomes expected to obtain high detection information.

  Further, visible light may be used as light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b. However, in the pachinko machine 1, in view of performing effects by light at various places, using invisible light such as infrared rays is a disturbance from these effect lights and the effect light It is more desirable to preferably suppress the adverse effect on

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “the light from the predetermined light source located outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. The first portion which makes it possible to be reflected by the reflection upright wall portion 33, and the light reflected by the reflection upright wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is outside the outer periphery of the opening window A second portion which makes it possible to “detect” is provided as the same portion of the substantially U-shaped reflection standing wall portion 33. However, a plurality of regions where light can be allowed to travel between the inside and the outside of the outer periphery of the opening window are provided for the reflection upright wall portion 33, and the outer peripheral light emitting portion and the outer peripheral light detecting portion And may be arranged respectively.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflecting upright wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U shape whose upper side is opened, but of the inner space 3435a and the inner space 3435b of the opening window upper portion The reflective standing wall portion 33 may be formed also on the peripheral edge between them. However, it is desirable that the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b be provided so that the direction in which the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b are opened is a downward direction, in order to suppress direct light from illumination and the like and disturbance. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the use of the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a, and the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b and the right outer peripheral light detecting portion 35b is particularly advantageous. Although the operation in the operation receiving unit 3333 can be detected, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, any structure capable of detecting the operation in the special operation receiving portion 3333 may be used. For example, the reflected light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the reflected light from the right outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35b The detection may be performed by the light detection unit, and the coordinates (x, y) or the size of the physical object may be determined from the detection result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 a and the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window Outer peripheral light detecting portion 35 provided on the outer periphery of the opening window as reflected light from the reflecting upright wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the window and is formed so as to reflect light at least on its inner side The detection is performed by the outside light detection unit 35a and the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b), thereby causing the vicinity of the opening window to function as the special operation reception unit 3333 and effect according to the operation mode of the player in the special operation reception unit 3333. It is made feasible.

  Then, the outer periphery external light detection unit 35 is not provided in an open state, and is provided in the inner space 3435 of the side base 572 opened toward the side where the opening window is provided, thereby detecting the outer periphery outer light As described above, when detecting light by the unit 35, it is possible to preferably exclude the effect light that may be a disturbance.

  However, even with such a configuration, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 is reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 from the portion of the internal space 3435 opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. Since the effect light is also taken in in addition to the light, there is a concern that such effect light may be disturbed to adversely affect the detection accuracy of the outer peripheral light detection unit 35.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the frame-side light emitting portion L1 provided on the right unit base 551 of the main body frame 4 is firstly arranged on the one specific virtual plane P. It is arranged in the position which can not be irradiated with the light which advances. More specifically, the frame-side light emitting portion L1 is provided at a position on the front side of the special operation receiving portion 3333 and has a very low light transmittance (or 0) with respect to the base portion BL1. It is attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 is wider than the frame side light emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the rear side (the side on which the opening window is provided). Thus, the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 is difficult to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decoration base portion 551a provided by a material that allows light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side And a second right decoration base portion 551b provided by a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) which hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L1. And while the 1st right decoration base part 551a is formed so that the above-mentioned frame side light emission part L1 may be surrounded so that the light from frame side light emission part L1 may contribute as production light, the 2nd right side decoration is made The base portion 551b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. Also by this, it is difficult for light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, while the second right decoration base 551b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 to travel toward the player through the first right decoration base 551a, The right decoration base portion 551a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, thereby suitably preventing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 from traveling to the opening window .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 is provided with both the base portion BL1 and the second right decoration base portion 551b, but only one of them is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting unit L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  On the other hand, the frame side light emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the front side with respect to the base portion BL2 whose light transmittance is extremely low (or 0). Is located at a position where light traveling on a specific virtual plane P of can be emitted. However, as is apparent from FIG. 120, since the reflection member 36 is provided between the frame side light emitting unit L2 and the opening window, light from the frame side light emitting unit L2 is provided. It is considered difficult to move to the side, so that the light from the frame side light emitting unit L2 is difficult to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  However, since the height width of the reflection member 36 is low, there is a concern that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 is reflected by another member or the like and travels toward the opening window. Therefore, even with the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment, the first left decoration base portion 531a provided by a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side And a second left decoration base portion 531b provided by a material (for example, metal) of low transmittance (or transmittance of 0) which hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left decoration base portion 531a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 can contribute as effect light, while the first left side decoration base portion 531a The base portion 531b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window so that light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for light from the frame side light emitting unit L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, while the second left decoration base 531 b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L 2 to travel toward the player through the first left decoration base 531 a, The left decoration base portion 531a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, thereby suitably preventing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 from traveling to the opening window .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decoration base portion 531b, and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decoration base portion 551b. These members may not necessarily be provided, and even in this case, as described above, it is difficult for the effect light to be taken into the internal space 3435. When the second left decoration base portion 531 b and the second right decoration base portion 551 b are not provided, the reflection member 36 includes the first left decoration base portion 531 a and the first right decoration base portion 551 a. If it is attached to the inner surface (a surface that can not be contacted from the outside) of the first left decoration base portion 531a or the first right decoration base portion 551a instead of being attached to the outer surface (a surface that can be contacted from the outside) It would be expected to avoid the degradation of the reflection performance due to the direct physical contact of In this case, light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b) passes through the first left decoration base portion 531a and the first right decoration base portion 551a, The light is reflected by the reflection member 36, transmitted through the first left decoration base portion 531 a and the first right decoration base portion 551 a again, and then taken into the internal space 3435.

  When the second left decoration base 531 b is provided in the left unit base 531 and the second right decoration base 551 b is provided in the right unit base 551, the reflection member 36 is omitted, and The left decoration base portion 531b and the second right decoration base portion 551b may also function as a reflecting member using a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, the effect light from the frame side light emitting units L1 and L2 may be disturbed only by providing the reflection members (the second left decoration base portion 531b and the second right decoration base portion 551b). In order to be able to ensure suitably the detection accuracy by perimeter outer light detection part 35 by the catoptric light from the member for reflection (the 2nd left decoration base part 531b, the 2nd right decoration base part 551b), controlling suitably. Become.

  In the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain information such as the coordinates and size of the physical object located in the vicinity of the opening window by using such an acquisition principle of operation information in the vicinity of the opening window. The more dynamic and flexible operability, and the use of the substantially entire area of the opening window (approximately the whole area visible in the front view of the glass plate 192) as the special operation receiving portion 3333. It is possible to realize the rendering effect suitable for this.

  Hereinafter, operability and effects which can be realized by using such a special operation receiving portion 3333 will be described. FIGS. 121 to 127 are schematic diagrams for describing the operability and the effect that can be realized by using the special operation receiving unit 3333, and are related to each other in describing the operability and the effect. In addition to omitting members that are not present, they also schematically show related members.

  FIG. 121 shows a special operation receiving portion 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed in a front view, and various effect members A to E arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion 3333 in a front view. Is schematically shown. In addition, the arrow in the same figure shows the movable range of various movable bodies of the effect members A to E simply.

  As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this explanatory example is viewed from the front, the back side sandwiching the glass plate 192 can contribute to the effect according to the result of the big hit determination. As members, movable bodies A1, A2, B and C, a display D, and a panel surface light emitting portion E provided so as to be capable of emitting light at a portion where the game ball can flow down and at other portions . Arrows in FIG. 121 schematically indicate the movable ranges of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C.

  In addition, these members are shown as an example for demonstrating the technique of this application, and it does not necessarily correspond with the Example previously demonstrated using FIG. 60 etc. However, basically, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are “back-bottom back movable presentation unit 3100, back-top left movable presentation unit 3200, back-left movable presentation unit 3300, back-top middle movable presentation unit 3400, back The display D is equivalent to a "effect display device 1600", and the board light emitting part E is "a variety of decorations included in the game board 5". It corresponds to "various LEDs mounted on a substrate". The board surface light emitting unit E may not necessarily be provided on the game board 5 and may be, for example, a member (such as a light guide plate) provided on the front side of the game board 5.

  Here, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, first, the display unit D on which the effect display according to the result of the big hit judgment is performed is positioned as the target of the operation effect, and the special operation receiving unit 3333 is viewed from the front with the display unit D. When the player performs an operation on the overlapping coordinate area and this is detected as a physical object, control can be performed so that the effect change corresponding to the operation appears on the display unit D.

  Hereinafter, an example of effect control in the case where the effect is changed on the display unit D by an operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described.

[First Operation Control Mode for Display D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 (a), when the first effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, the first coordinate area Z1 facing the first display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects, and displayed A specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of section D. Then, in a predetermined period during which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly performed on the glass plate 192 is performed on any place in the first coordinate area Z1 of the special operation receiving portion 3333). In the special operation reception unit 3333, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed when a finger or the like is sufficient and the touch may not necessarily be performed) and this is detected as a physical object. It is possible to execute control that can cause an expectation change with respect to the result of the big hit determination by causing the effect change in the display D to occur while ending the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1.

  At this time, in order to cause the effect change on the basis of the fact that the operation has been performed somewhere in the first coordinate area Z1 of the special operation receiving portion 3333, the effect change is at least It is desirable to generate in the first display area opposite to the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player makes it difficult to visually recognize the first display area with his / her finger or the like in a front view, the effect is changed at least in the first display area. In the first display area until the first display area is viewed from the oblique direction (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display portion D) instead of shifting one's own finger or from front view It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the appearing effect change. Alternatively, the player keeps his / her finger on the first coordinate area Z1 and proceeds with the game without confirming the change in the effect in the first display area, or is positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to select a way of enjoyment, such as having a third party who is not present check the effect change in the first display area, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game.

  It should be noted that the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed when the operation by the player is not detected from the appearance of the specific operation instruction image S1 until the predetermined period elapses (the specific timing comes). And the reception of effects for the first coordinate area Z1 is ended. At this time, the effect change that appears when there is an effect reception for the first coordinate region Z1 may be generated, or the effect change that appears when there is an effect reception for the first coordinate region Z1 is not generated. You may make it complete reception of the effect with respect to the 1st coordinate area Z1.

[Second Operation Control Mode for Display D]
Also, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 (b), when the second rendering condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Among all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, “the second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display D” and “the third display of the display D” The second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display unit D while setting (controlling) both of the area and the third coordinate area Z3 facing the area to be able to receive effects, and the third display area The third operation instruction image S3 is displayed. Then, within a second coordinate area Z2 or a third coordinate area Z3 of the special operation receiving portion 3333 during a predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed. An operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a finger or the like in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is sufficient and it is not necessary to touch necessarily)) is performed on somewhere and this is a physical object When it is detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden and the effect reception of the second coordinate region Z2 and the third coordinate region Z3 is ended, and the display unit D is also displayed. Generate a specific effect (effect according to the selected side (coordinate area side where the physical object is detected)), and the expected effect for the result of the big hit judgment in the specific effect that has occurred is Thereby enabling executing the instigation that may be controlled.

  It should be noted that no operation by the player was detected from the appearance of both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 until the predetermined period has elapsed (the specific timing has come) In this case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are not displayed, and reception of effects for the second coordinate region Z2 and the third coordinate region Z3 is ended. ing. Under the present circumstances, you may make it produce the specific presentation which appears when there is reception of presentation with respect to 2nd coordinate area Z2 or 3rd coordinate area Z3, and you may make it not produce a specific presentation. However, in the case of producing a specific effect that appears when the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 receives an effect reception, an operation on the second operation instruction image S2 is received prior to the execution of the specific effect. It is desirable to make a display (effect, etc.) generated when being pressed or a display (effect, etc.) generated when an operation on the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the effect on the side where the effect is generated is forcibly executed while not operating on any of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment without knowing what effect is being executed.

  In addition, in the first operation control mode and the second operation control mode for the display unit D, not only the acceptance of effects for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 is permitted, but the same is also possible. Within the period, the same effect reception may be permitted to other operation means such as the operation button 410.

  For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the effect can be accepted for both the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410, and a specific operation instruction image S1 Even if a pressing operation on the operation button 410 (detection of a button switch) is performed instead of an operation on the first coordinate area Z1 (detection of a physical object) during the predetermined period in which The operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, the effect acceptance of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, the effect is changed in the display D, and the type of the effect change causes an expectation for the result of the big hit determination. It is possible to carry out control whose degree can be suggested.

  Even when there is an operation (detection of a physical object) on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, and the reception of the effects of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended. A change in effect is produced in the display unit D, and control can be performed which can suggest an expectation for the result of the jackpot determination by the type of the effect change that is produced.

  Further, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 can all be accepted as an effect Do. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, not the operation (detection of a physical object) on any of the second coordinate region Z2 or the third coordinate region Z3 When a pressing operation on the button 410 (detection of a button switch) is performed, a second selection image indicating that a specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and a specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. Switching display with the third selected image showing that the camera is in the off state is performed. Then, in a state in which either the second selected image or the third selected image is displayed, the selected image is displayed when a predetermined period has passed since the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed. While generating a display (effect etc.) which can grasp that the operation to the operation instruction image S2, S3 on the side where the is appearing is accepted, the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 and selection are made All the images (the second selection image and the third selection image) are not displayed and the effect reception for the second coordinate region Z2 and the third coordinate region Z3 and the operation button 410 is ended. After that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated in the display section D, and control can be performed which may suggest an expectation for the result of the big hit determination in the generated specific effect.

  In the predetermined period, an operation (operation for accepting any determination) on another operation means can be accepted, and the selected image appears when the operation on the other operation means is performed. The second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected image (second selection) are generated while generating a display (effect) capable of grasping that the operation on the side operation instruction images S2 and S3 has been accepted. It is also possible to hide the image and the third selected image) and to end the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and another operation means. After that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated in the display section D, and control can be performed which may suggest an expectation for the result of the big hit determination in the generated specific effect.

  In addition, within the predetermined period until the specific effect appears, the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinates even if either the second selected image or the third selected image appears. Region Z3 is available for presentation. And when operation with respect to either the 2nd coordinate field Z2 or the 3rd coordinate field Z3 is detected, it does not matter which of the 2nd selection picture and the 3rd selection picture was in the state which has appeared, The display (effect, etc.) on the accepted side is made to appear, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected image (the second selected image, the third selected image) are all hidden. Then, the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and other operation means is ended. At this time, the operation is detected prior to hiding the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3 and the selected image (the second selected image and the third selected image). Switching display may be performed so that the selected image on the other side (second selected image, third selected image) appears. After that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated in the display section D, and control can be performed which may suggest an expectation for the result of the big hit determination in the generated specific effect.

  According to such a configuration, not only acceptance of effects to the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is permitted, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410, The same effect can be accepted. In this respect, in the second operation control mode, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate is operated when the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is operated while the same effect reception is enabled. It is possible to generate an effect on the side according to the preference of the player only by accepting one operation (detection of a physical object) for the area Z3. That is, when another operation means is used, “the side according to the preference by the player until the predetermined period from when the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed elapses While it is required to be able to generate the effect of “or perform at least two or more operations using a plurality of operation means”, when a specific operation receiving unit 3333 is used, Since it is possible to make the display mode according to the player's preference appear with only a small number of operations (one in this example of rendering), it is possible to realize more complicated rendering with a simple operability. It will be expected.

  In addition, while providing such efficient operability, at the same time providing operability capable of achieving a desired operation by performing at least two or more operations using a plurality of operation means, The player can perform an operation in a process step up to the desired operation while being troubled as to which one of the desired operations should be selected. That is, in this case, while performing the operation in the process step up to the desired operation, it becomes easy to imagine the presentation situation after the selection, and it is troubled which operation should be performed with a margin in a predetermined period. Will be able to Thus, according to whether the player is in a state in which the player can make a prompt decision or is in a state of being annoyed, it is possible to selectively use the operation means having different numbers of required operations, so that the game interest can be maintained. It will be.

  As described above, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, by setting the display unit D as the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, it is possible to realize an effect with unprecedented interest. However, as described above, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to this embodiment, the special operation receiving unit 3333 is larger than the display unit D in the operation reception range (the coordinate range to be detected is the glass plate 192 It is provided to have almost the entire area), and by realizing the effect using such a special relationship, it is possible to realize more dynamic operability with high degree of freedom and an effect suitable for this. .

[Third Operation Control Mode for Display D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 123 (a), when the third effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, the fourth coordinate area Z4 facing the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects, and displayed A specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of part D, and a specific image prompting the user to operate to move the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B in another display area of the display part D indicate.

  Then, in a predetermined period after the particular operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation (for Strictly speaking, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the special operation receiving unit 3333 needs a finger or the like, and does not necessarily have to touch)) and this is detected as a physical object. A large fifth coordinate area including a coordinate area facing at least the movable body B provided outside the display section D, not the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display section D. Change the setting to Z5. Note that the fifth coordinate area Z5 in this example is opposed to the movable body B provided outside the display section D from the coordinate area facing the fourth display area (which does not necessarily have to coincide with the fourth coordinate area Z). It is set to include the movable coordinate system B, the display unit D, and the board surface light emitting unit E.

  At this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the fact that the operation has been performed somewhere in the fourth coordinate area Z4 of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Alternatively, it may be possible to recognize that the specific operation target image S4 is in a movable state by an operation by the player by displaying (in a vibration mode).

  That is, in this third operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger fixed within the special operation receiving portion 3333, the coordinate position at which the physical object faces the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5. It is as if the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display section D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display section D and movement on the movable body B is started when moved up to the position It has been realized.

  Therefore, when the physical object such as a finger is moved in the fifth coordinate area Z5 with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the peripheral control board 1510 detects the movement of the physical object and detects the movement of the physical object. It is possible to execute control to move the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D so as to follow the movement of the detected physical object. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 is in the middle of the movement during which the physical object has not moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B, and such physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 The inside of the display section D is moved so as to follow the movement in the front view.

  More specifically, with the physical object such as a finger fixed within the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is placed from the position shown in FIG. 123 (b) in the fifth coordinate area Z5 as shown in FIG. 124 (a) When the peripheral control board 1510 is moved to the position shown in, the specific operation target image S4 is moved in the display section D so as to follow the movement of such a physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is at a position shown in FIG. 124 (a), when trying to display a specific operation target image S4 in a display area facing the position, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed. A part of the display part D protrudes from the display part D, and the whole can not be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to the present embodiment, only the portion that can be displayed is displayed on the display unit D, and the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, and the portion that protrudes from the display unit D is present It is assumed that control is performed to cause the corresponding part of the panel light emitting unit E to emit light so that it can be recognized. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display unit D, the portion in which the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the display unit D is reduced, and the panel surface light emitting unit E Control is performed so as to increase the number of portions corresponding to the light emission region.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to express that the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D is about to jump out of the display unit D by the operation by the player, and the display unit D More dynamic and flexible operability that can not fit into a single unit, and a rendering suitable for this will be realized.

  In particular, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124A, a physical object such as a player's finger is at a coordinate position facing the display portion D in the fifth coordinate area Z5. Although in the placed state, effect control is performed not only on the display unit D but also on a member (panel surface light emitting unit E) different from the display unit D. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate area facing the plurality of members in the special operation receiving unit 3333, it is easy to recognize that the effect corresponding to the movement appears. It becomes possible to preferably realize the rendering suitable for dynamic operability.

  When the physical object such as the finger of the player is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. 124 (a) in the fifth coordinate area Z5, the physical object is not the display section D but the game board 5 (Here, it is placed at a coordinate position facing the board surface light emitting unit E). However, also in this case, not all the specific operation target image S4 is suddenly hidden to cause only the panel light emission unit E to emit light, but as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D, the specific operation is performed. Control is performed so as to reduce the number of portions displayed on the display D by the target image S4 and to increase the number of portions corresponding to the light emission area of the panel surface light emission portion E. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated by a specific distance from the coordinate position facing the display unit D, an effect (light emission in this case) is given only to the panel light emission unit E of the display unit D and the panel light emission unit E. As a result, it becomes possible to express an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 has moved out of the display section D.

  Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches a position shown in FIG. 124 (b), the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned to face the physical object. Control is performed to cause both the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B to emit light. That is, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to this embodiment, the same control as the above-described effect control performed between the display unit D and the panel light emitting unit E is performed between the panel light emitting unit E and the movable body B. I want to do it. More specifically, when a physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board light emitting unit E) approaches the coordinate area facing the movable body B by a predetermined distance, the physical object Even though the unit itself is in the coordinate area facing the panel surface light emitting unit E, the effect control is performed not only on the panel surface light emitting unit E but on a member (movable body B) different from the panel surface light emitting unit E I have to. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate area facing the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the effect corresponding to the movement (here, the display It becomes easy to recognize that the specific operation target image S4) which has moved to the outside of the part D appears (moves), and thereby it is possible to suitably realize the rendering suitable for the dynamic operability. .

  Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 125, the peripheral control board 1510 moves the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B. It is determined that the operation as if moved to a proper position is properly performed, and the condition acceptance in the fifth coordinate area Z5 is ended on the assumption that the condition in the third operation control mode is satisfied. In addition, a display capable of recognizing that the condition in the third operation control mode (moving the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B) is satisfied is displayed on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. Execute control to start the effect. The effect using the movable body B can be realized, for example, as an effect that causes the movable body B to emit light in a predetermined mode, an effect that causes the movable body B to operate in a predetermined mode, or the like. To be able to suggest an expectation for the result of

  When the physical object is moved out of the fifth coordinate area Z5 while the physical object is moving in the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the third operation control mode (a finger is removed from the special operation receiving unit 3333). It is desirable to redo from the state shown in FIG. That is, although it will be described later, basically, the peripheral control board 1510 periodically acquires the positional information of the physical object, etc. regardless of the execution status of the rendering, whereby the physical object is in the fifth coordinate area Z5. Information to the effect of moving, information to the effect of moving out of the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like are obtained.

  Further, although the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the above specific one may follow only the movement of the specific direction component of the physical object. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

  In addition, the fifth coordinate area Z5 may be the entire coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Also, if there is no part that can be rendered to indicate that the specific operation target image S4 exists on the side opposite to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, it is close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed. An effect representation may be performed that suggests that a specific operation target image S4 is present at a part.

  Moreover, in this explanatory example, although the panel surface light emission unit E capable of effect representation (light emission) is placed between the display unit D and the movable body B, the panel surface light emission unit E is not necessarily required. Good. That is, in this case, after the specific operation target image S4 is not displayed on the display unit D, the player is moved from the physical object to the coordinate position facing the movable body B (or the coordinate position in the vicinity). Is to continue the operation while holding in the head the image on which the specific operation target image S4 is moving.

  Further, the display unit D displays a map capable of grasping the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B, and in which position the specific operation target image S4 is present according to the movement of the physical object. The effect display suggested by may be performed.

  Although coordinate areas Z1 to Z5 are shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, in actuality, the player can not visually recognize.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various effect members shown in FIG. 121, the movable bodies A1, A2 and C for which the rendering operation according to the result of the big hit judgment is performed are also positioned as the target of operation rendering. When the player performs an operation on a coordinate area overlapping the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in a front view in the operation receiving unit 3333 and this is detected as a physical object, a rendering operation corresponding to the operation appears. It is controllable. Therefore, the player can operate in an appropriate mode (speed, movement amount) while selecting any one of the plurality of movable bodies.

[Fourth Operation Control Mode for Movable Body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 126 (a), when the fourth rendering condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the sixth coordinate area Z6 facing a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) to be able to receive effects. At this time, in order to make it possible for the player to recognize that the sixth coordinate area Z6 can be accepted to make the movable body C move, a specific display image is made to appear on the display section D, or the movable body It is desirable to cause C to emit light (for example, to emit light in a blinking mode) or to vibrate in the first mode.

  Then, in a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate area Z6 is set to be effect-acceptable, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, special As shown in FIG. 126 (b), when the operation receiving unit 3333 only needs a finger or the like and does not have to touch it) and this is detected as a physical object, it is possible to receive an effect Instead of the sixth coordinate area Z6, the coordinate area to be set is changed to a large seventh coordinate area Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C. Here, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the sixth coordinate area Z6.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger fixed in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved to the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate area Z7. When moved to a coordinate position facing the part, an effect is realized that the movable body C can be moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object.

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (b), a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate area Z7, and the movable body C is moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to perform control that makes it possible to recognize In the example shown in FIG. 126 (b), the movable body C emits light in the second mode (for example, always emits light in the mode).

  However, from the player's side, it is not understood what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, and after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 Even if the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, there is a concern that this can not be properly performed. As a result, when the physical object such as the player's finger deviates from the seventh coordinate area Z7 despite having the intention of performing the operation along the movable range CT of the movable body C (special operation receiving unit If the user takes his finger off the screen 3333), the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) may be redone against the player's intention, which may reduce the fun of the game.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the seventh coordinate region Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is to be controlled. The sixth coordinate area Z6 is set in a range in which at least the first distance is expanded in all directions in a front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends It is supposed to be.

  According to such a configuration, even if the player does not know what movable range CT is provided on the movable body C, the direction deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C When a finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move although the effect reception is made (despite the fact that the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is not retried) Since the phenomenon occurs, the movable range CT of the movable body C can be estimated and operated by confirming the phenomenon.

  Further, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the movable body C is set at a plurality of predetermined positions (the first position (shown in FIG. 126 (b)) in the movable range CT set for the movable body C. Original position), the second position shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third position shown in FIG. Control to be executable. Then, above this, the seventh coordinate region Z7 is a first drive coordinate region Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position), and the second drive coordinate region including the portion facing the second position. Z7-2, a third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including a portion facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 including a portion facing the fourth position, and driving them The movable body C is moved to the drive coordinate area according to the determination by determining to which of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 has moved. Control is enabled.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position) in the movable range CT is the control target The movable range C of the movable body C is set as a range extending from the sixth coordinate region Z6 by at least a first distance with respect to left, right, and lower directions excluding the upper side where the movable range CT extends.

  According to such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the physical object is detected. Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (movement less than the first distance), the physical object is in the single first drive coordinate region Z7-1. So that the movable body C continues to stay at the first position (original position) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 in which the physical object is detected, without moving. Become. That is, in this case, a phenomenon occurs in which the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted for presentation (despite not being re-started from the state shown in FIG. 126A). As a result, the operation can be performed by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends through the confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  On the other hand, after the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the physical object is movable. When the movable range CT of the body C is moved in the extending direction (moving less than the first distance), the physical object moves only the second distance shorter than the first distance, as shown in FIG. 126 (b). The second drive coordinate area Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126 (c) is reached from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 shown in FIG. That is, in this case, based on the fact that the physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 (FIG. From b)), it will move to the 2nd position (Drawing 126 (c)) corresponding to the 2nd drive coordinate field Z7-2.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 including the portion facing the second position in the movable range CT also extends in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to the above, there is a range extending by the same distance as the first drive coordinate region Z7-1. On the other hand, the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the left-right direction.

  According to such a configuration, when moving the physical object detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 in a direction different from any of the vertical directions in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is , And the movable body C corresponds to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 in which the physical object is detected without moving. Continue to stay in the second position. That is, in this case, a phenomenon occurs in which the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted for presentation (despite not being re-started from the state shown in FIG. 126A). As a result, the operation can be performed by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends through the confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  Moreover, the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 is expanded and set to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C in this manner, so that the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)). After the physical object such as a finger is detected in the above, the criteria that are determined to be appropriate as operations when moving the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C are relaxed. As a result, it becomes possible to alleviate the difficulty when moving a physical object while deducing the movable object C while estimating what movable range CT is provided in the movable object C. It will be possible to maintain the interest.

  When the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is located at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Light may be emitted in an aspect (for example, green) different from the light emission aspect (for example, blue). At this time, when a physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C finishes moving to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 If the light emission mode is changed (for example, from blue to green) when the body C starts moving toward the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, it is determined that the player's operation has been properly received. It becomes possible to recognize from an early stage, and it becomes possible to suppress the frustrating feeling due to the behavior delay of the movable body which is inevitably generated for the quick operation by the player's finger or the like.

  In addition, when the physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body can not be moved to follow the physical object, but in this case, at a predetermined moving speed, Control to move to the latest detection position is performed.

  Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126 (c)) is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like, and the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. If the movable body C is detected in a)), the movable body C is moved from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 It will move to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position in the movable range CT is the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to the above, there is a range extending over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

  That is, as described above, when using a movable body that does not have the technique to instruct the operation direction unlike the display means etc. as the operation target, it is necessary to know which movable range is provided. You have to move the physical object while guessing. Therefore, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to the present embodiment, in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, effects are received to the left and right of the movable range C of the movable body C. It has also been described above that, by widening the range, the reference judged to be appropriate as an operation when moving along the movable range CT of the movable body C is relaxed.

  However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and then the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 The deviation from the movable range CT tends to increase as the distance from Accordingly, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. By having a range extending over a distance longer than the drive coordinate area Z7-2, it is assumed that the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 is increased and the deviation from the movable range CT is also gradually increased. Also, this can be accepted as a proper rendering operation. As a result, it is possible to ease the difficulty in moving the physical object over a long distance while deducing the movable object C while estimating what movable range CT is provided. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the game interest. For example, even when the physical object moves upward in a coordinate range that does not face the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

  In addition, when the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, the light emission mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is positioned at the first position It may be made to emit light in a light emission aspect (for example, red color) different from any of the light emission aspect (for example, green color) at the time of being located in. Also, when a physical object is detected in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 before the movable body C finishes moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (a movable body C May change the light emission mode (for example, from blue to green) when it starts to move toward the third drive coordinate region Z7-3.

  And also for the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, for the same reason, in the left and right directions orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-3 is further It has a range that extends over a long distance. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward by the player's operation of the finger or the like, and the fourth drive coordinate area Z7- If the movable body C is detected in the fourth drive coordinate system from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4. It is not necessarily moved to the position (FIG. 127 (b)). Furthermore, when the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward by the player's finger operation or the like and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the movable object is movable. The body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. It is something that can be moved.

  That is, in the peripheral control substrate 1510 according to this embodiment, whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is determined based on the result of the big hit determination. Among the determinations, it has been provided to the player such an effect using the movable body C. Then, when the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by the operation of the finger or the like by the player, the movable body C is in the fourth position (FIG. b) The degree of expectation (specific result is obtained depending on whether effects that move up to the point appear) or effects that return to the first position (Figure 127 (c)) appear without moving to the fourth position May be shown in a definite manner).

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by the player's operation of a finger or the like. In this case, it is determined that the condition in the fourth operation control mode is satisfied, and the effect reception for the seventh coordinate area Z7 is ended. Then, when it is determined that the movable body C is movable to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the movable body C is not set because no area is available for effect reception. Is controlled to move to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), the movable body can not be set because no area is available for effect reception Control to move C to the first position is performed.

  However, at this time, even if it is determined that the movable body C is movable to the fourth position, the movement in which the movable body C moves downward in the downward direction (the movable body C is at the fourth position (FIG. 127) Even if it is determined that the effect of moving to (b)) or not or that it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, the movable body C is once moved upward. It is desirable from the point of view of improving the fun of the game to show the movement to move (the effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b))).

  Then, when the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the light emission mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is positioned at the first position To emit light in a light emission mode (for example, rainbow color) different from any of the light emission mode (for example, green color) when it was positioned and the light emission mode (for example, red) when it was positioned Although the timing may be different from the first to third positions, it is not the timing when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but the timing later than that (the movable body C It is desirable to make it appear after the timing at which movement to the fourth position can definitely be grasped. Also, similarly to this, even when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, it is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but It is desirable that the light emission be ended after a later timing (a timing when the movement of the movable body C can not definitely move to the fourth position).

  After moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the peripheral control board 1510 moves the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing this, the fourth operation control mode is ended.

  By the way, in this fourth operation control mode, the movable body is movable between the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) and the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the expectation of the big hit. It is possible to move C freely. For example, when moving the movable body C to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) and operating the physical object back to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the first drive Based on the fact that the physical object is detected again in the coordinate area Z7-1, control is performed to move the movable body C from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) to the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) . When the movable object C is moved to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) and then the physical object is operated to return to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the second drive. Based on the fact that the physical object is detected again in the coordinate area Z7-2, control is performed to move the movable body C from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) It will be.

  According to such a configuration, the player prefers a driving mode for moving the movable body C little by little up and down as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)) The game can be made to appear according to the time of day, or can be performed only for the time that suits the player's preference, so it becomes possible to manipulate the "interval" until the final result appears in the production, thus improving the fun of the game Will be expected to In addition, after the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the effect reception for the fourth operation control mode is ended, and the movable body C can not be manipulated freely.

  It is to be noted that the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is performed after the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) is set (controlled) to receive an effect and until a predetermined period elapses (a specific timing arrives). If the physical object is not properly detected in step S6, the effect reception for the sixth coordinate area Z6 or the seventh coordinate area Z7 is ended. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C may be caused to appear when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, or the movable body C may not be produced. It may be controlled to be positioned at a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126 (b)).

  Further, in the fourth operation control mode according to this explanation example, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT. While it is possible to move the movable body C freely between the intervals, instead, it is possible to move within the range of the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)) of the movable range CT. The higher the probability of being a big hit suggested, the higher the position may be. That is, in this case, the peripheral control substrate 1510 selects one of a plurality of effect patterns having different degrees of jackpot expectation based on the result of the jackpot determination, and positions determined by the selected effect pattern (first to fourth positions The movable body C is controlled so as to be operable. At this time, the physical object moves from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, or moves from the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. At any time, an effect (a behavior of going back and forth) may be made to appear as to whether or not the movable body C moves to the next position.

  Further, in the first to third operation control modes for the display unit D, when making the images S1 to S4 capable of effect reception, coordinate areas Z1 to Z4 larger than the images S1 to S4 are generated in front view. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 smaller than the movable body C in the front view is generated when making the movable body C capable of receiving effects. That is, since a movable body often includes a portion having a relatively large amount of movement and a portion having a relatively small amount of movement, for example, a portion having a relatively small amount of movement is produced It is desirable from the point of acceptance that it is desirable to control the decline in amusement. On the other hand, in the display unit, when trying to set the coordinate area in accordance with the size of the image that can be rendered acceptable, it is required to make the image large in order to suitably maintain operability. Since there is a concern that the balance with the display image may be deteriorated, it is desirable to separate the setting range of the coordinate area and set the size independently for the image that can be rendered acceptable.

  However, in the case where control is performed to detect the movement of the physical object in a specific coordinate area (here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) and to make an effect corresponding to the movement For example, the physical object being detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 moves, and the fourth drive coordinate area does not pass through the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 or the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. It is also assumed that a sudden detection may occur at Z7-4. Such a situation may occur, for example, when the right hand is detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and then the left hand is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving the right hand. It is determined that the physical object is not moving, and effects (such as movement of the movable body C) should not be performed according to the movement.

In this respect, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment generates an interrupt timer process every 4 ms while executing the peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms) described above, and this interrupt is generated. The information from the left outer peripheral light detector 35a and the information from the right outer peripheral light detector 35b are acquired in the timer process, and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position at which the physical object is detected. Then, in the peripheral control unit steady processing described above, a specific coordinate area is analyzed by analyzing a plurality (8, 9) of coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. (For example, it is determined whether or not the physical object is properly moved within the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4), and control data for the actuator according to the result of the determination Set Then, in the interrupt process every 1 ms, the movable object C is controlled based on the control data set in this way, so that the movable object C has a physical object in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. From the stage of the movement which is not finished moving, the movement is made to follow the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate area Z6 in a front view. The coordinate information is stored in chronological order when the coordinate position is acquired.

  For example, even if the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is also detected. The coordinate information indicating that the physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 at a timing before the physical object is detected in the second operation, and the physical object is detected in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. If coordinate information indicating that the object is detected does not exist, it is determined that the physical object has not moved properly, and control is performed so that the movable body C is not operated.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. When the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, and in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. In the case where they are respectively detected in time-series order in 4, if there is no detection in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, for example, only up to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C is configured not to move. As a result, only when there is an appropriate operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333, an appropriate effect can be made to appear.

  In the fourth operation control mode, control is performed to move the movable body C depending on whether a physical object is detected in each of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. To move the movable body C depending on whether the movement of the physical object having the vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is detected within the movable range CT of the movable body C You may That is, in this case, vector components of the physical object are analyzed based on the acquired coordinate positions stored in chronological order.

  The setting control of the coordinate area used in the fourth operation control mode, the movement detection of the physical object, and the effect control of the movable body C are, for example, in the display unit in the third operation control mode described above. The present invention may be applied to the image S4 of FIG.

  Further, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (effect reception) regarding the movement after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is not finished yet. During this time, control is performed to move the presentation object (display image or movable body) in a mode according to at least the movement direction and movement amount of the physical object already detected. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to create such an effect as if he / she produces an effect, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest.

  By the way, in the first operation control mode, the second operation control mode, the third operation control mode, and the fourth operation control mode, the effect reception for the special operation receiving unit 3333 is set at that time Limited to the area. However, the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 itself is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the peripheral control unit steady processing (every 33.3 ms), the position, the movement, etc. of the physical object are analyzed based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. In this respect, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, any of a plurality of analysis processes having different analysis contents can be executed, and the special operation reception is performed. Even if the same motion is detected as the motion of the physical object in the unit 3333, different controls can be performed according to the analysis result.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a control example of detection information analysis processing of a physical object executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, it is judged whether or not it is in the operation effect reception period occurring based on the satisfaction of the specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit judgment (step S3301). As a result, when it is in the operation effect reception period, as described above, the physical object is detected in the coordinate area in which the effect reception is possible based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. If a physical object is detected in the coordinate area in which the effect can be received, the movement mode, size, etc. of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the analysis result for such effects, control (re-setting or end) regarding the coordinate area in which the effects can be accepted, control to cause the effect change in the effects such as the display image and the movable body, and the current state Control is performed to maintain the effect state of (step S3303). As a result of the processing in step S3302, even if no physical object is detected in the coordinate area in which the effect can be accepted, the control (re-setting, etc.) regarding the coordinate area in which the effect can be accepted. There may be a case where control is performed to return the rendering object such as the display image or the movable body to the original position (for example, control to move the movable body C to the first position shown in FIG. 126A).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S3301 that the special operation receiving unit 3333 is not within the operation effect reception period in which the coordinate area in which the effect can be accepted is set, the analysis content for the above effect The analysis is performed with a content different from that of (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this embodiment is provided in a form facing the entire game board 5. Therefore, the action of placing a magnet at the coordinate position facing the various winning openings in the special operation receiving portion 3333 in order to facilitate the winning of the game ball illegally, the wire from the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192 It can be assumed that an action is taken such as destroying a speaker that intrudes and emits an alarm sound at the time of fraud.

  Therefore, in the process of step S3312 described above, analysis is performed as to whether there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being performed in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on coordinate information stored in association with time series. It is like that. For example, it is determined whether a physical object is detected in special operation reception unit 3333, and if a physical object is detected in special operation reception unit 3333, the movement mode or size of the physical object, etc. Analyze whether it matches with the movement mode or size that can appear when fraudulent activity is being performed. Then, when it is determined that there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being performed as a result of the analysis for the fraud countermeasure, an external output indicating that the fraudulent activity is being performed is executed, an alarm sound or an alarm light is output. It controls so that the fraud measures, such as emitting, are performed (step S3313), and when it is not determined that there is a possibility that fraud is being performed, it controls so that such fraud measures are not performed (step S3313) ).

  As such an analysis procedure for countermeasure against fraud (step S3312), for example, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as a reference position for analysis (for example, Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range that includes the analysis reference position and extends from the analysis reference position by a predetermined distance is set, and the detected physical object falls within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Keep track of) and keep track of (physical objects hardly move). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some fraudulent activity is being performed within the analysis coordinate range. It is possible to adopt a method for determining that there is a At this time, if the size of the physical object is a size that can not be tampered with (such as having an extremely thin shape), the fraud is performed even if such a movement mode is detected. It may not be determined that there is a possibility. As a result, it is possible to suppress false notification of incorrect notification when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192.

  According to such a configuration, when it is in the operation effect reception period, even if any action is performed, it is not determined as an injustice, and an analysis is performed only as a effect and the result of the analysis While the production control according to is performed, if it is not in the operation production reception period, all acts are determined as an analysis target of fraudulent activity, and control for fraud countermeasures according to the result of the analysis may be performed. become. Therefore, even if one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate area for 30 seconds) occurs and is detected in special operation reception unit 3333, depending on the rendering situation, It may be considered as a rendering act to cause a specific rendering change, or it may be considered as a fraudulent act and may be illegally notified. In this way, by using one detection information for different purposes (in this case, purpose of rendering and purpose of fraud prevention) according to the situation of the game and the effect, more purposes with less detection information Can be achieved, and an efficient control structure can be realized.

  In this explanatory example, when it is not in the operation presentation acceptance period which occurs based on that the specific presentation condition according to the result of the big hit judgment is satisfied, the operation to the special operation reception unit 3333 does not cause the presentation change Although it has been described as a thing, even when it is not in the operation effect reception period (always), the display image changes or the movable body emits light and moves due to the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 It is also good. However, in this case, when it is not in the operation production reception period, in addition to determining all acts as an analysis target of fraudulent acts, it is also determined as an analysis target of rendering actions and performs control according to the results of these determinations. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333, both of the effect change and the injustice notification can appear.

  In addition, during the process of monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied. If an operation effect reception period occurs based on the above, monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) without ending the analysis processing for the fraud countermeasure It is desirable to continue the process even after the operation effect reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, during the operation effect reception period, in addition to performing analysis processing for effects and control according to the result, does the physical object stay in the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)? Monitoring will be continued, and depending on the result of the monitoring, fraudulent notification will be performed.

  By the way, when it is in the first effect period in which the special operation receiving portion 3333 is allowed to receive the effect regarding the first effect event (for example, the effect of moving the movable body), the operating means different from the special operation receiving portion 3333 ( For example, control may be performed to further generate a second effect period in which acceptance of an effect regarding a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing a display image) is permitted in the operation button 410).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), at timing t1, the special operation reception unit 3333 allows the reception of an effect (reception of a panel operation) regarding the first effect event (for example, an effect of moving the movable body). It is assumed that a first effect period has occurred. In this first effect period, the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 during the period from the generation of the period to the time t2 when the first reception time has elapsed. Control for operating the movable body in a mode according to at least the moving direction and moving amount of the physical object already detected (analyzed) while detection (analysis) regarding movement has not ended and is still continued (For example, control to move a specific movable body so as to follow movement of a physical object) is executable.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control board 1510, when it is determined that the specific rendering condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the first rendering period is generated, and while this is still continued without being ended. A second effect that allows acceptance of an effect (acceptance of a button operation) relating to a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing a display image) in an operation means (for example, operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 It is possible to execute control to set an effect pattern, an advance effect effect, etc. which are determined to generate a period.

  That is, in this case, when timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, the effect reception (button operation reception) regarding the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image) is permitted in the operation button 410 Control to generate a second effect period. Then, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted between the occurrence of the second effect period and the arrival of the timing t12 at which the second acceptance time has elapsed, the second effect period is ended at that point Let Alternatively, when the operation on the operation button 410 is not received before the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period is ended when the timing t12 arrives.

  According to such a configuration, the first performance period in which the performance reception regarding the first performance event is permitted in the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333), and the performance reception regarding the second performance event Both of the second effect period permitted by the second operation part (here, the operation button 410) occur simultaneously (timing t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129 (a)). Moreover, in the above configuration, the end timings of the first effect period and the second effect period are different, and the second effect period that is generated later than the first effect period is ended earlier. That is, in this case, if the second effect period is generated with a delay in the first effect period, is the operation interrupted to operate the second operation portion even if the first operation portion is being operated? It is required to operate the first operation part and the second operation part at the same time in different modes, and to provide an unprecedented operability of operability and to suppress the decrease in the game entertaining It will be expected.

  In addition, in order to suitably realize such effect operability, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the effect reception regarding the second effect event (the effect of the end being completed in a relatively short time period) With regard to reception), when it is detected that a predetermined number of times (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operation (a finite amount of operation) has been performed by the second operation part (here, operation button 410) After the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control to generate a second rendering event (for example, a rendering operation that changes a display image) without requiring an operation. For example, when one pressing operation is detected with respect to the operation button 410, the second effect period is ended before timing t12 comes, and after that, the operation is not necessary, and the effect is changed to the display image The control that causes the problem corresponds to this.

  On the other hand, with regard to the effect reception regarding the first effect event (the effect reception on the side terminated with the relatively long time lapse), at least until the end of the second effect period, and further thereafter Regardless of the number of times of operation or the amount of operation for one operation site, the reception of the first rendering event is continued without ending, and whenever the operation for the first operation site is performed during the continuation It is desirable to perform control to reflect the effect change according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation reception unit 3333 is analyzed, and this is continued without ending the effect reception according to the movement mode (the movement amount or the like) of the physical object. The control corresponds to control of repeatedly executing the process of moving the movable body to the latest coordinate position analyzed each time movement is periodically analyzed (every 33.3 ms).

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation on the first operation site is interrupted when the second presentation period occurs behind the first presentation period, the operation opportunity for the first operation site is lost. Since it is possible to preferably guarantee that it does not happen, it is possible to suppress the decline in the fun of the game due to the interruption. Moreover, after interrupting the operation to the first operation site, the second effect period can be ended at a relatively early stage by operating the second operation site, and thereafter, the operation to the second operation site It becomes possible to resume the operation on the first operation part at a relatively early stage, since the effect change (the second effect event) corresponding to the operation is generated without the need for This is also suitably secured for the operation opportunity for one operation site.

  In this case, in a situation where the operation on the first operation site is resumed, the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation on the second operation site is just started, and the first operation A special rendering situation can be generated, such as being able to enjoy the second rendering event while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this respect, “when the operation on the second operation site is performed, an effect event in which the size of the specific display image changes is generated, and when the operation on the first operation site is performed, the specific display image reaches the specific position If setting the influence (changing) of the target object aspect of the above-mentioned second rendering event such as “to cause moving rendering event to occur” is set as the above-mentioned first rendering event, In a special rendering situation, it is possible to enjoy the second rendering event while changing the aspect of the rendering target of the second rendering event by the operation on the first operation part, and it is more dynamic and flexible High operability and stage performance suitable for this will be realized.

  Here, as an example of affecting (changing) the aspect of the rendering target of the second rendering event when performing the operation on the first operation site, for example, the rendering of the second rendering event Changing at least one of the movement amount, movement direction, movement speed, light emission mode (light color, traveling direction, light amount, etc.), size, or shape of an object (display image, movable object, etc.) However, the invention is not limited to these, as long as it can have some effect on the object of the second effect event (display image, sound effect, movable body, etc.). That is, while the target of the operation effect for the first operation site and the target of the operation effect for the second operation site are the same effect targets, an aspect of the effect to be generated in the effect target (for example, the first operation site The size may be changed in the case of the operation effect with respect to, and the display position may be changed in the operation effect with respect to the second operation site. In addition, the first effect period may not necessarily be set as a finite time, and an operation on the first operation site may be received even after the second effect period ends, and the second effect Any operation may be performed on the first operation site when an event occurs.

  In addition, in a period in which both the first effect period and the second effect period occur simultaneously, the second effect event is selected among the effect reception regarding the first effect event and the effect reception regarding the second effect event. Only for the effect reception, a display for prompting an operation instruction or a display for suggesting the maximum remaining time as the second effect period suitably urges the interruption of the operation on the first operation site. Desirable above.

  In the periphery control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, in order to preferably realize the relationship of such effects, control may be performed to generate the second effect period after the first effect period, The control is performed so as not to generate the first effect period later than the second effect period.

  In the above example, both the first effect period and the second effect period occur at the same time, but if the second effect period occurs later than the first effect period, the first effect period The process may be temporarily ended, and the first effect period may be generated again when the second effect period ends. Even in this case, it is possible to realize the above-described operability and rendition in which the aspect of the rendition object of the second rendition event is affected when the operation on the first operation site is performed. It is possible.

  Furthermore, in the above-described example, whenever an operation is performed on the first operation site, control is performed to reflect a change in effect according to the operation, but a plurality of operations on the first operation site are performed. When there is, control may be performed to reflect the effect change according to the operation.

  The peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment can realize various operation reception effects as described below by appropriately using the control method according to each of the above-described illustrative examples.

[Example 1 of presentation using special operation reception unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the effect pattern (the variation pattern of effect example 1) of effect example 1 is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of effect example 1 is displayed in display D It is assumed that the decorative symbol SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears, the coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 is set to be able to receive effects Generate an operation effect period to (control).

  Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, at least the effect pattern A1 of effect example 1 determined to operate the movable body A1, and the effect example 1 defined to operate the movable body A2 And an effect pattern A2 of. However, while the movable body A1 is provided so as to be visible from the player side on the front side of the gaming board 5, the movable body A2 is made difficult to be viewed from the player side on the back side of the gaming board 5 It is provided at a position overlapping the movable body A1 in a front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, even if any of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed as the effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect example 1, in the display section D, a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. In the image, the suggestion image HG1 indicating that the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is to be performed is displayed. Similarly, even if any effect pattern A1 or A2 is being performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to indicate that the coordinate area (not shown) facing this should be operated. ing.

  Then, when such a slide operation is properly received while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is made to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 130 (b). Control is performed to start moving the movable body A1 in the left direction. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, a suggested image HG1 indicating that the sliding operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific place while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a form that allows the player to follow the slide operation. After moving the body A1 to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end an operation effect period in which acceptance of effects on the movable body A1 is permitted. In this situation, in the display unit D, a display appears which suggests that the movable body A1 has been successfully moved to a specific effect position and the expectation for the big hit determination is high, and the movable body A1 emits light. It is desirable that effects such as changes in the aspect or shape of the object be performed.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player has reached a specific location while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), to stop the follow-up movement of the movable body A1 in response to the slide operation of the player, the operation presentation period in which the reception of effects on the movable body A1 is permitted is ended, and the movable body A1 is returned to the original position. Control to move back. In this case, the display unit D fails to move the movable body A1 to a specific effect position, and a display appears suggesting that the expectation for the big hit determination is low, and the light emission ends in the movable body A1. To be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the player's slide operation is properly received while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, as shown in FIG. 130 (c), in the peripheral control board 1510, the player performs the slide operation by the player. Control is performed so as to start moving the movable body A2 in the left direction in the form of following. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, a suggested image HG1 indicating that the sliding operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled to be in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific place while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, as shown in FIG. After moving the body A2 to a specific effect position, control is performed to end the operation effect period in which the reception of the effect on the movable body A2 is permitted. In this situation, in the display unit D, a display appears which suggests that the movable body A2 is successfully moved to a specific rendering position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is extremely high, and in the movable body A2, It is desirable that effects such as changes in the light emission mode and shape be performed.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player has reached a specific location while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), in order to interrupt the follow-up movement of the movable body A2 in response to the player's slide operation, the operation presentation period in which the reception of effects on the movable body A2 is permitted is ended, and the movable body A2 is returned to the original position. Control to move back. In this case, the display unit D fails to move the movable body A2 to a specific effect position, and a display appears suggesting that the degree of expectation for the big hit determination is low, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. Control to be terminated.

  According to such an effect example 1, when the player performs a slide operation while the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a) appears as if the movable body A1 operates, the movable body A1 Instead of the movable object A2 that has been hard to see visually comes to move in a form that suddenly appeared, suppressing the decline of the game entertaining by the movable effect with such surprises as if the effect target was replaced It can be done.

  Although illustration is omitted, according to such an effect example 1, the slide operation by the player is performed within the period from the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130 (a) to the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130 (c). Although the movable body A2 has started moving, it is still at a position where it is still difficult to visually recognize (behind the game board 5), and from the player's side, it looks as if no effect change has occurred. It will be able to appear. That is, in this case, the movable body A2 moves to the front side of the display section D after discouragement that no change in presentation has occurred although the slide operation by the player is properly performed. As a result of such appearance of mobility, it is possible to more suitably suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  Further, in the above-described effect example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to a position overlapping the decorative symbol SZ in the fluctuating state. It becomes possible to prompt the player to shift the gaze from the decorative symbol SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, thereby making it difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, since the aspect overlapping with the decorative symbol SZ is different between when the movable member A1 appears and when the movable member A2 appears, from the decorative symbol SZ to the movable members A1 and A2 Even if the player fails to shift his gaze, it is possible to predict which of the movable members A1 and A2 has appeared by confirming the size, position, etc. of the portion where the decorative symbol SZ is difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the player sees which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  In the above example 1, the movable body A1 is disposed on the front side of the game board 5 and the movable body A2 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 5, but the front side of the game board 5 Alternatively, the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be disposed, or the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be disposed behind the gaming board 5.

  Here, in the case where both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are disposed on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is disposed on the front side so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the movable body A2. It is desirable to maintain the visibility difficulty of the movable body A2 by keeping the movable base portion (the portion which does not move) and the like continuing to be positioned on the front side of the movable body A2 even when A1 moves.

  On the other hand, when the movable bodies A1 and A2 are both arranged behind the gaming board 5, it is possible to give fun about which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 appears by the operation by the player It will be. In this case, a portion of the game board 5 located on the front side of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is made to emit light, and an operation to a coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) opposed to the portion is urged. Is desirable.

  In addition, in the above-described effect example 1, although the movable directions (left direction) of the movable bodies A1 and A2 are set to be the same, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left direction and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upper direction, the operation instruction (suggested image HG1) suggesting the left direction is prompted to play the game in the left direction Even though the slide operation is performed by the player, the movable body A2 moves upward, and the drop in the game entertainment can be more suitably suppressed by such a movable effect having such surprise property. Alternatively, even though the operation on the movable body A1 whose movable direction is set to the left is urged, the operation instruction suggesting the upward direction is made to appear, and the slide operation by the player is upward. When it is performed, the movable body A <b> 2 which has been difficult to visually recognize may move upward and appear.

  Further, in the example of effect 1, when the movable body A2 appears by the operation by the player, the movable body A1 is not operated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when moving the movable body A2 by the operation by the player, the movable body A1 is also moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if only the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position after the movable bodies A1 and A2 move by a predetermined distance, the decrease in the game entertainment is more suitably suppressed by the movable effect having a surprise property. It will be possible. Alternatively, when moving the movable body A2 by the operation by the player, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, after the movable body A1 is moved by a predetermined distance, the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position, and the moveable body A2 is moved following the slide operation by the player, which is surprising. With some movable effects, it is possible to more suitably suppress the decrease in the game interest. However, when switching the operation target by the player between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the operation by the player is kept at the predetermined location for a predetermined time (the time required for the movable body A2 to move to the predetermined location) It is desirable to execute the presentation.

  Moreover, in the above-described effect example 1, although the movable body A1 and the movable body A2 are caused to emit light in the situation where the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c)), In the situation, the movable body A1 may not necessarily emit light. That is, in this case, the timing at which the physical object is detected in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the movable body A1, and the movable body A2 starts advancing to the front side of the display portion D and returns to the original position. The control to end the light emission of the movable body A1 is performed at a timing (a timing at which it moves to a predetermined position) or the like which is easier to visually recognize than a certain time.

  Further, although in the above-described effect example 1 or another example thereof, the movable body A2 is disposed on the rear side overlapping the movable body A1 in a front view, a panel surface light emitting unit E is disposed instead of the movable body A1. You may do so. That is, in this case, when moving the movable body A2 (in the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a)), the movable body which is difficult to visually recognize by emitting light from the panel surface light emitting unit E positioned on the front side of the movable body A2. The operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) opposed to A2 is urged.

  In addition, in the display section D according to the above-described presentation example 1, in each situation shown in FIGS. 130 (a) to (c), regardless of the location where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located, one presentation in the suggestion image HG1 It was made to show a situation (an initial situation in which no movable body is operating). However, instead of this, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed according to the position where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located, and it is possible to recognize the movement situation of the movable bodies A1 and A2 only by looking at the suggestion image HG1. You may

[Example 2 of production using special operation receiving unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the effect pattern (the variation pattern of effect example 2) of effect example 2 is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of effect example 2 is displayed in display D It is assumed that the decorative symbol SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears, the coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the movable body A1 is set to be able to receive effects (control) ) To generate an operation effect period.

  Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, at least at least the effect pattern A1 of effect example 2 determined to operate the movable body A1, and the movable body A1 and the movable body B are determined to operate respectively. And the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 being included. And, in the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2, as in the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 described above, FIG. 130 (a), (b) and FIG. 131 (a) (or FIG. 131 (b)) The reception opportunity of the operation presentation with respect to movable body A1 is provided in the mode shown to, and movable body A1 moves. On the other hand, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the reception opportunity of the operation effect on the movable body A1 is provided, the reception opportunity of the operation effect on the movable body B is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, even when any of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 2 above, in the display section D, a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. In the image, the suggestion image HG1 indicating that the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is to be performed is displayed. Similarly, even if any effect pattern A1 or AB is being performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to indicate that the coordinate area (not shown) facing this should be operated. ing.

  However, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, when an operation to a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is accepted (when a physical object is detected), an effect event specific to the movable body A1 First, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), control is performed to hide the suggestion image HG1 on the display unit D and to interrupt reception of effects in the coordinate area facing the movable body A1. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative symbol SZ in the display section D is displayed (in a semitransparent manner, etc.) in a visible but hardly visible mode, and the light emission state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to make it

  Then, next, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), in the display section D in which the suggestion image HG1 is not displayed in this way, the operation for the operation means (the operation button 410 etc.) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 is performed. While displaying the prompting operation instruction image SG, an operation reception period of a specific effect using the other operation means (the operation button 410, etc.) is generated. Then, when an operation on another operation means (such as the operation button 410) is received in the operation reception period of the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG on the display unit D is not displayed as shown in FIG. 133 (a). At the same time, control is performed to operate a movable body B different from the movable body A1 initially shown as the rendering target. In addition, in this example of effect 2, the movable body B is advanced to a front side of the display portion D for a predetermined time.

  Then, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the movable body B operates in this manner, the movable in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the display section D as shown in FIG. A coordinate image (not shown) facing the movable body A1 of the special operation receiving portion 3333 is displayed while displaying the suggestion image HG2 indicating that the operation to slide the body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed. An operation effect period for setting (controlling) to be able to receive effects is generated again. At this time, the opportunity for rendering operation of the movable body A1 is given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132 (a) appears, the movable body B does not operate and the movable body A1 operates. It is desirable to set so that the degree of expectation is higher in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 in which the movable body A1 operates after the movable body B operates than in the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 above. And in this case, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), it is suggested that the display pattern of the suggested image HG2 is a rendering pattern with high expectation by making the display mode of the suggested image HG2 different from the suggested image HG1 shown in FIG. 132 (a) It is desirable that the light emission mode of the movable body A1 be different from the light emission mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. 132 (a) to indicate that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation. .

  In the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the effect pattern A1 of effect example 1 described above, FIG. 130 (b) and FIG. a) In the mode shown in FIG. 131 (b), the reception opportunity of the operation effect to the movable body A1 is provided, and the movable body A1 moves. Further, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A2 of the above-mentioned effect example 1, FIG. 130 (c) and FIG. 131 (c) (or FIG. 131 (b) The reception opportunity of the operation effect with respect to the movable body A1 may be provided in the mode shown in), and the effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves may appear.

  In particular, in the effect pattern AB of this effect example 2, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the suggestion image HG2 suggesting that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation is made to appear, or the light emission mode of the movable body A1 is Because it is made to differ, in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1, the movable effect that appears when the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is performed is also included. It is desirable to perform in a special execution mode different from the case of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2.

  According to the effect pattern AB of such effect example 2, the first effect opportunity using the first operation portion (here, the special operation receiving portion 3333) is first provided (in this situation, the second operation) Although the second effect opportunity for the part (for example, the operation button 410) is not given), when the first operation part is operated and the effect is accepted, it is different from the first operation part The second rendering opportunity for the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is given, and the first rendering opportunity is once lost. Then, when the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is operated in a situation where the first presentation opportunity is once lost and this presentation is accepted, a second presentation event (corresponding to the presentation reception ( Here, the operation of the movable body B is generated. That is, in this case, it is possible to generate a presentation effect as to whether or not the second presentation opportunity for the second operation part is given when the presentation reception for the first operation part is made. Novel operability using the operation site of is provided.

  In order to preferably realize such novel operability using a plurality of operation sites, it is desirable to provide the second operation site in a mode in which it is difficult to operate physically at all times. When it is determined that the second rendering opportunity is to be given to the second manipulation site, it is difficult to physically operate the second manipulation site based on the reception of the rendering for the first manipulation site. It is desirable to control from the aspect to the aspect which is easy to operate, and to allow the reception of the effect on the second operation part when in the aspect which is easy to operate. Here, the “physically hard to operate” refers to, for example, a mode in which the second operation site (for example, the operation button 410) is covered by another member and the operation becomes difficult, or The term “control from a physically difficult operation mode to an easy operation mode” means, for example, the second operation site itself. Control to operate to a position not covered by another member, control to operate another member covering the second operation site to a position not covering the second operation site, and operation to a second operation site It is realizable as control etc. which are operated to the position different from the state at the time of being carried out. Further, in this case, as a trigger for controlling the second operation part from the aspect in which it is difficult to physically operate to the aspect in which it is easy to operate, it is not necessary to receive the effect for the first operation part. It may be when a specific time has elapsed since the rendering pattern of. In any case, the second operation site itself or a member provided in the vicinity of the second operation site is operated to give the second presentation opportunity for the second operation site when the presentation for the first operation site is received. It is desirable to do so in order to suggest that the object of the operation has been changed from the first operation site to the second operation site and that the degree of expectation is increased by the change.

  Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 described above, after the first effect opportunity using the first operation site (here, the special operation receiving portion 3333) is given, the first operation site is manipulated to operate the first operation site. We decided to give a second presentation opportunity based on the fact that the presentation was accepted. However, after the first rendering opportunity using the first operation site (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is given (or after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the first operation is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The second rendering opportunity for the second operating portion (for example, the operation button 410) different from the operating portion may be given to temporarily lose the first rendering opportunity. In this case, the first effect event is generated by the operation on the first operation site until the predetermined time elapses, but the first effect event is ended based on the elapse of the predetermined time (When the effect target is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to be returned to the original position). Alternatively, a first operation opportunity using the first operation site is not given, and a second operation site (for example, different from the first operation site after the elapse of a predetermined time after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed) A second rendering opportunity may be given to the operation button 410). That is, in this case, it is possible to improve the fun of the game when the reception of the effect is not made by the operation on the first operation part although the suggestion image HG1 is displayed.

  Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 above, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the suggestion image HG1 is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, FIG. The operation instruction image SG shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to describe how the suggestion image HG1 changes to a suggestion image HG2 having a higher degree of expectation, and therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest. However, at this time, when the suggestion image HG1 is displayed in a state where the effect reception for the first operation site is not performed, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed (for example, changing from color display to black and white display, semitransparent, etc. It is desirable to make the display mode relatively invisible. Furthermore, a clocked image indicating the display remaining time of the suggestion image HG1 (remaining time for effect reception for the first operation site to be performed) is displayed together, and effect reception for the first operation site is not performed. In the state, if the timekeeping image indicates that the remaining time does not decrease, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining period in which the effect reception for the first operation site is performed is not reduced. As a result, it is possible to safely play a game using another operation means (for example, the operation button 410). In this case, although the remaining time for which the effect reception is performed is reduced by a predetermined amount although the effect reception for the first operation site is not performed, the remaining time is not reduced. As shown by the above-described time-counting image, it is possible to provide more entertaining rendition.

  Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 described above, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the effect acceptance for the first operation portion is not performed based on the effect acceptance being performed for the first operation portion. While generating a period, changing the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 in the predetermined period (for example, changing from color display to black and white display, or setting it as a display mode that is relatively invisible such as semi-transparent, etc.) The image may indicate that the remaining time does not decrease (for example, the display meter does not decrease but does not decrease). At this time, it is desirable that the display mode of the image different from the suggested image HG1 in the display unit D is also changed. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second rendering opportunity is provided, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation, and the rendering acceptance for the first operation site is performed again. You may do so.

  Further, in the effect pattern of the above-described effect example 2, after displaying the suggestion image HG1 prompting an operation for setting the movable object A1 as the indication target (or in a state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the movable body B is operated. However, the movable body B does not have to be operated by the operation of the player. For example, based on the determination of whether the predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the special result is obtained. It may be a non-operating movable body that operates. When adopting such a non-operation movable body, even if it is determined to operate (a special result is obtained), an operation instruction for the non-operation movable body is not performed, but an operation acceptance is performed. Nor. In this respect, if it is possible to appropriately determine whether the predetermined operation condition for the non-operation movable body is satisfied regardless of the execution state of the effect pattern, another effect object (a movable object or a display image And so on, since the decision to operate the non-operation movable body can be made secretly in the state that the suggestion image HG1 of Among the possibilities, it is possible to have the possibility that the non-operation movable body unrelated to this suddenly operates, and the possibility that the special movable body and the other rendering object operate simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to expect that the game entertaining effect can be improved by such unexpected operation effects.

  In addition, when the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display unit D, the operation site (the specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333, the operation button 410, and the like) is the target ) Can be accepted not only for the effect but also for the coordinate area (special operation receiving unit 3333) that faces the suggested images HG1 and HG2 and the portion where the operation instruction image SG appears. It is also good. According to such a configuration, even when the operation site can not be recognized, only by operating the specific image (the suggestion image HG1, HG2, the operation instruction image S) appearing in the display section D A similar effect can be generated, and a decrease in game entertainment can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333, detection of the movement has not been completed and has not been completed yet. Although it has become possible to execute control to move the rendering object (display image or movable body) in a mode according to the moving direction and the moving amount, the movement speed of the physical object is detected when performing control related to the movement of the rendering object And the movement speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in realizing an operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, an effect is produced in a coordinate area facing a portion to be operated among the special operation receiving unit 3333. Although the reception is made, the coordinate area does not necessarily have to be opposite to the part to be operated, and even if the effect reception is made in the specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving portion 3333 Good.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the outer peripheral light detecting unit 35 detects a change in light generated by an operation (a physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving unit 3333, Although analysis is performed to determine the operation mode (for example, movement information of a physical object such as a finger) for the special operation receiving unit 3333, for example, the special operation reception using the touch panel installed for the glass plate 192 An operation mode for the unit 3333 (in this case, a mode of touch operation on the glass plate 192) may be determined. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area or the display area through the glass plate 192 may be adversely affected.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special motorized prize control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, in the main control program, when it is shifted to the special symbol and special motorized item control processing (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is firstly, as shown in FIG. A random number for the first jackpot determination is acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter on condition that the detection signal by the one starting opening sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (YES in step S5231) The first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol (YES in step S5233) on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 4004 is in the on state (there is entering the second starting opening 2004) (YES in step S5233) A second start opening passing process such as acquiring the second jackpot determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the big hit running flag is set, control of the big hit gaming state A big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the big hit control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・ When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol becomes the mode that suggests either “8R probability variation big hit A” or “8R normal big hit”, the big winning opening 2005 After opening the game for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or repeating the open / close pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine gaming balls have won in the big winning opening 2005 Control to 8R big hit gaming state,
・ When the result of the judgment processing about the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the second special symbol becomes the mode which suggests "16R probability variation big hit", big winning a prize port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds) Control to 16R big hit gaming state which repeats opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected by the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 that nine game balls are won in the big winning opening 2005 or after,
・ When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol becomes the mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds ) Or control the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, to an 8R big hit gaming state which repeats 8 times,
・ When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol becomes the mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) The opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed after being closed is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state which is repeated twice.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time reduction control is executed, the right hitting is more advantageous for the player than the left hitting, and in the situation where the time saving control is not executed As described above, the left strike is advantageous to the player. In this respect, in the left-handed state, even if the big hit is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol according to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002, a big hit game of up to 8 rounds of long time opening Only the state (about 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004, the probability of approximately 50% (allocation ratio of winning types The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained when winning a big hit, such as that a big hit game state (generally 2,000 game balls can be obtained) of 16 rounds of long time opening is executed. In the case of being controlled to shift to the right, it is possible to expect to obtain a greater amount of prize balls than in the left.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the open control of such big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

  Also, in the big hit control process, after performing such open control of the big winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 140, high probability depending on the winning type of the big hit that was the opportunity to be played the big hit game concerned Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

  The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit judgment processing shown in FIG. 139 described later, and a big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 16R to perform probability change control after the end of the big hit gaming state Certain variation big hit, 8R certain variation big hit B) is set when you end the big hit game state based on B), when the next big hit first special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 144 described later or second special symbol stop processing not shown It is reset by.

  The time saving flag is a flag indicating that time saving control is being performed (low probability time short status, high probability time short status), and as shown in FIG. 140, time saving control after the big hit gaming state ends (high probability time short status) Set when ending the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B), and the next special hit shown in Figure 144 will be the first special symbol stop processing Or it is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated. Alternatively, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 described later when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning in the big hit after occurrence of the low probability time short state occurs Or it is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated.

  The fluctuation number counter is a counter that indicates the fluctuation number of the special symbol after the fluctuation number counter is reset, and is used in a first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142 described later It is updated when variation of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed (for example, counting up) and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit B) It is reset when starting the jackpot gaming state based on.

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set as the processing of step S5236. Determine if As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control processing, processing is performed to open the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such open control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a short time flag, a short time Each set process such as the number counter is never performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), there is no chance of winning a small hit in the big hit determination.

  In addition, if the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second jackpot determination random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is The first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed (step S5238) on condition that it is "0" (step S5237).

  On the other hand, if the value of the second special reserve number counter indicating the number of the second jackpot determination random number stored in the second special symbol reserve storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol of The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop is executed (step S5239). Thus, as long as the player does not lose the lottery for the second special symbol held on hold (unless the value of the second special hold number counter is “0”), about the first special symbol Regardless of the holding status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be continuously performed without interruption (preferential execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time saving state (high probability time short state), the player can maintain the hitting (right hitting) of the game ball to the right of the center character 2500, It becomes possible to continuously perform only the lottery (judgment process) on the random numbers for the two big hit judgments without interruption.

  In addition, it is limited to the special figure game (pattern change) using the second special figure (second special symbol) to be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). For example, execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and from the stored data, execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started. It is good if you can decide

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S5232).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first starting opening sensor 4002 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 135. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the random numbers on the first special symbol side (big hit determination random number, reach determination random number, big hit symbol random number, variation display pattern random number) as the process of step S5241. ) Is obtained from the above random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is judged whether it is "4" which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve the state of (5), the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Then, as the process of step S5244, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S5241 Store in

  Then, next, the first special drawing pre-reading process for executing the first special drawing side pre-reading effect is executed, and the process is ended (step S5245). As described later, the first special view side pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result of the first special symbol (or the expectation thereof) before starting variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special view prefetching process, information necessary for determining whether or not the prefetching rendering is performed, rendering contents, etc. on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information related to the drop for prefetching determination, and the symbol type for prefetching determination) Information, information on variation pattern numbers for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information relating to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5242 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S5243 to S5245.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S5234).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 136. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs, as the process of step S5251, each random number on the second special symbol side (second big hit determination random number, second reach determination random number, second big hit symbol The random number and the second variable display pattern random number) are acquired from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value It is determined whether or not it is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations for the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control for the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly reserved. In order to achieve the state of (5), the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

  That is, first, in the process of step S5253, the second special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 corresponds to the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Store in

  Then, next, a second special drawing pre-reading process for executing pre-reading effect on the second special drawing side is executed, and the process is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the second special view side prefetching effect is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol before starting variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special view prefetching process, information (such as crash information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required to determine the presence or absence of preview rendering effects and the contents of effects on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) may be performed to realize one variation effect described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5252 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by ending the process without executing the process of step S5253 to step S5255.

  When the number of reservations for the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) instructs the number of reservations for the first special symbol (First pending number specification command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) instructs the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Command (second pending number specification command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and the special motor symbol control process and the second special symbol process processing executed in the step S5239 of the special symbol and special motor symbol control processing are the same. The program module is different from the above in that only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, so only the special symbol and the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special motorized symbol control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process processings will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read out big hit determination random number, the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol etc. First special symbol normal processing to be performed (step S5280)

  2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination processing of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the determination process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S5281 )

  3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for variation display pattern, or the special effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 is executed corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like for the variation mode of the effect display to be displayed is performed (step S5282)

  4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283)

  5. The first special symbol display mode 1403 is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 as the first special symbol display mode is determined based on the result of the determination process on the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5301. As processing of, it is judged whether there is a fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the main control built-in RAM as processing of step S5302. The earliest storage of random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot judgment random number, the first reach judgment random number, the first jackpot random number, the first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special holding number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM First-in first-out (First-In) random numbers (for example, random number for the first jackpot judgment, first reach judgment random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first fluctuation display pattern random number) related to display mode at the time of fluctuation display stop of symbol Shift operation is performed in the manner of First-Out).

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol hold storage area a to first special symbol hold storage area d), and the start winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). . Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 The random numbers extracted are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  After that, as the process of step S5305, a big hit determination process which is a process for determining the big hit is performed based on the read first big hit determination random number. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S5281) (step S5306), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 140 (A) if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state) (step S5311). The big hit determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the big hit determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) is selected (step S5313). The determined jackpot determination table is compared with the jackpot determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (A), the big hit determination table is stored in the above-mentioned main control built-in ROM, and the gaming state is low probability for each kind of special random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) The jackpot determination table for low probability used in the (low probability short time state, low probability time short state), and the high used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability short time state, high probability time short state) And a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. Then, in the big-hit determination table at low probability, which is referred to compare with the first big-hit determination random number, it matches with the big-hit determination value indicating that the 204 types of first big-hit determination random numbers have won the big hit. The first jackpot judging random numbers (65,536 types) are respectively associated with each other so that the first jackpot judging random number of the type matches the deviation judgment value indicating that the above is a loss (big hit probability at low probability; roughly) "1/321"). On the other hand, to compare with the special symbol and the second special symbol process random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and the special motorized symbol control process. In the low probability big hit judgment table to be referred to, it corresponds to the big hit judgment value indicating that the 204 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are won in the big hit, and the 65332 second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss The second jackpot judging random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-pocket judgment value (in the case of a low probability jackpot probability; roughly "1/321").

  Also, in the high probability big hit determination table to be compared to the first big hit determination random number, 2040 types of first big hit determination random numbers coincide with the big hit determination value, and 63,496 types of first big hit determination The first jackpot judging random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers coincide with the outlier judgment value (big hit probability at high probability; approximately "one-half"). On the other hand, in the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability, which is referred to compare with the second jackpot judging random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and the special motorized prize control process. To match the big hit judgment value indicating that 2040 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers have won the big hit, and to coincide with the out-of-order judgment value which indicates that 63496 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other (a jackpot probability at high probability; approximately "one-half"). It should be noted that the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table to be compared with the first jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot judgment table referred to be compared with the second jackpot judgment random number (big hit judgment value The number may be the same and the big hit determination value may be different (the big hit probability is the same), or the number of big hit determination values may be different (the big hit probability may be different)) In this case, at least one of the jackpot judgment values of the jackpot judgment table for low probability and the jackpot judgment table for high probability may be made different (both may be made different). .

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the big hit determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S5315) ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation has been won in big hit is set (step S5316), it ends big hit decision processing.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that a big hit has been lost, the read big hit determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won based on the selected big hit determination table. It is judged whether or not it is (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, the jackpot determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability 0.65536 (0), in this step S5317, it is judged that the small hit has not been won (judged as a loss).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is high probability non-short state, the reach determination table in high probability non-short state, and when the gaming state is high probability short state And a reach determination table in the low probability state used in the case where the gaming state is the low probability state (low probability non-short state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number indicates reach is reached, and the reach determination value indicates that the 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The reach determination random numbers are associated with one another so as to coincide with the above. However, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, in order to maximize the progression speed of the game in the time reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that all 72 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach is matched In this case, it may not coincide with the reach determination value indicating reach.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state are reached The above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased as compared to that in the high probability time short state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state and the low probability state The random numbers for reach determination are associated with one another such that the random number for reach matches the reach determination value indicating that the 67 random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating that the reach will not be reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is the same as the low probability non-short state.

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319), it determines that reach loss has occurred (YES in step S5120) Then, the reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set, and the process is ended (step S5121).

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first of all, as shown in FIG. 141. The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140 (B) and selects the first big hit symbol random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is determined by comparing with the selected symbol determination table (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, random numbers for the first big hit symbol (here, a total of 200 for the judgment result (8R positive variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) The first jackpot symbol random number is stored in a form associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), the second special symbol random number for the second big hit symbol against the determination result (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side. Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in association with one another.

  The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained big hit symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the first jackpot symbol random number and the type of the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number are set to be different . More specifically, the distribution ratio (allocation) between the high probability probability transition probability odd hit and the normal probability hit that does not become the high probability status transition is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number is greater than the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the random number ing.

It is as follows when the concrete game contents for every kind of big hit are summarized briefly.
1. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Next, the game is controlled to the high probability time reduction state until the big hit gaming state occurs, and a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state is performed. Is controlled to the rendering mode shown in the rendering display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the low probability time short state until the variation display of special symbol is digested 100 times (or won in the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state A battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in a low probability time reduction state, the effect display device is relatively in a disadvantageous state 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 16 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) and control it to 16R big hit gaming state, and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the high probability time and short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state effect (succeeding production) about whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (will become 16 rounds) ) Is performed, and it is relatively advantageous after a predetermined period of time has passed since being controlled to a high probability time-short state. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the large winning opening 2103, the above-mentioned count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected by 8 times, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easily) to control the 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the high probability time and short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, during the execution period of 8R big hit gaming state the effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (will 16 rounds) ) Is performed, and it is a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time after being controlled to a high probability time-short state. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. After the big hit symbol combination has appeared in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or that nine gaming balls are winning in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 By controlling the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected in 2 times, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit gaming state which is hard to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 2R big hit gaming state, it is special Control the low probability time short state until the variable display of the symbol is digested 100 times (or win a big hit within the period until it is digested 100 times), and a specific character during the execution period of the 2R big hit gaming state Perform the battle production (battle defeat production) which is defeated, and in the low probability time reduction state, the production display device 1600 that it is a relatively disadvantageous state 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the gaming ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and driving of a movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not performed. Therefore, in the left-handed state, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 will occur, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a big hit (8R positive variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) associated with the first special symbol will be generated. Similarly, the gaming ball does not win in the first starting opening 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 will occur, and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and a big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) associated with the second special symbol will be generated.

  Also, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum is repeated eight times and only about 1000 gaming balls are paid out, In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 gaming balls by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) up to 16 hours.

  In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing, when it is decided to 8R probability variation big hit A, it is decided to be 8R probability variation big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol, and when it is decided to 8R regular big hit it is a big hit symbol 8R usual big hit symbol decide. In addition, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is decided to be 16R probability variation big hit, it is decided to be 16R probability variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol and when it is decided to 8R probability variation big hit B, it is 8R probability variation big hit as big hit symbol When it is decided to B design and decided to 2R normal big hit, it decides to 2R normal big hit design as big hit design.

  Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. And as a result, if the small hitting flag is set in the processing corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process processing (step S5239), the small hitting symbol (the mode at the time of the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol) After determining to the specific pattern stop mode) (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the special symbol is in the lost pattern as the variation stop state (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337 Do.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 performs the above-mentioned lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach is out of place, out of place as processing in step S5337) The determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set such that an instruction (which may indicate the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) as the process of step S5338, this process is ended.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and change pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration symbols are displayed in a variable manner and left decoration symbol → right decoration symbol → The stop display is made in the order of the middle decoration pattern (in addition, the left, middle and right decoration symbols may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and may be displayed simultaneously and stopped). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when winning as a big hit is a type other than 2R normal big hit. On the other hand, when 2R normal big hit is obtained, it is decided to a specific symbol combination (combination in which at least one of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols). In addition, when the reach out is specified, the out pattern with reach (the left and right decorative symbols are a combination of the same symbols from “0” to “9” and a combination of symbols different in the inside decorative symbol; reach loss) When the design is determined and the design is specified, the design with no reach is determined (combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns having at least the left and right decorative patterns different). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect is ended).

  In any case, when the hit is obtained as a result of progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) to appear at the time before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game After the is started, the effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S5341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided at step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), small hit flag Is set (step S5343), a small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a reach variation pattern table ( (Not shown) (step S5346), and the big hit flag and the small hit flag If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this processing is ended. Thereby, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed in the first special symbol display 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern table of this example is the random number for big hit judgment (the first big hit judgment random number, the second big hit judgment random number) and the big hit random number (the first big hit random number, the second big hit random number) A plurality of types are provided for each of the determination results based on the above. In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is The first change display pattern random numbers are stored in a form associated with each other. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a reads out in step S5302 of the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number The above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing with the random number for variable display pattern and acquiring from the table the variable time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern. Determine the change pattern of Thereby, the determination process about the change pattern of the said special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) comes to be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, since the small hit is not won in this example, the variation pattern table at the small hit is not used. In this example, a small hit is not won, but a small hit may be selected.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for fluctuation display pattern. It is done. For example, in the non-temporal state, 164 random display pattern random numbers out of 241 random display pattern random numbers are set as a judgment value (0 to 163) indicating execution of any of normal reach effects, 59 The variable display pattern random number is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with a large hit expectation is to be performed, and the 18 variable display pattern random numbers have a high hit probability. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects is to be performed.

  In addition, with super reach production (SP production), the big hit expectation degree is higher than normal reach production, vis-a-vis the player who desires the occurrence of big hit game state when super reach production is executed the player for the big hit game state Expectations are rising. That is, such a super reach effect is the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit, and the expectation of the player for the big hit gaming state even if the loss is finally displayed by this Will be able to raise However, actually, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state, a high expectation advance notice effect of being drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears while the super reach effect is being executed. It is required to do (composite).

  In addition, it is provided corresponding to the random number for the first jackpot determination and the random number for the first jackpot symbol, and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds is commonly set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to The fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time-short state. Thus, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short time state and in the non short time state, and in the short time state, during the variation of the first special symbol, the game ball wins the second starting hole 2004. At the same time, the player has secured a time for the player to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2004.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected among fluctuation time at the time of losing of the second special symbol, each game ball which is struck at 0.6 seconds interval in game territory 5a in time saving state (high probability time short state etc) It will be suppressed that it is discharged | emitted without being provided to a lottery process.

  That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the area immediately above the gate unit 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area to the gate unit 2003 while in a time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state), a hit as an ordinary symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in the opening and closing of the second start port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (in this example, 5.5 seconds). Thereby, in a situation where it can be successively received in the second start opening 2004 (a short time in which substantially all of the game balls hit to the right of the center character 2500 can be received in the second start opening 2004). Even if there is an acceptance of those gaming balls, there is a high jackpot probability (probability in the high probability state) around "about 1/22" control that the lottery of the second special symbol side can be digested one after another is executed It will be possible.

  And in this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (high probability time reduction state etc.), the second The game ball can be received more frequently at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the starting opening 2004. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol disconnection based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely as fluctuation time of time saving state (high probability time short state etc.) It can be set to a short 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when losing is obtained, the symbol variation is ended only in a time (0.1 second) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the gaming ball, so that it is 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls shot at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, it is suppressed that those game balls are discharged without being subjected to lottery processing .

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5371. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, as a result, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned drawn fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284) in the process of step S5373, this process is ended.

  In addition, even if the fluctuation timer has been decremented by 1 (step S5371), when the fluctuation time timer has not become 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped), Every time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5381. The display control for causing the first special symbol display 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing as the processing of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol in the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as the command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is to be started (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (the time for displaying the jackpot gaming state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the above-mentioned time saving flag is set. The time short flag is reset (step S5389), and further, the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process can be shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined in the process of step S5235 that the big hit execution flag is set, and the big hit game in the above big hit control process (step S5240a) The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8 R positive variation big hit A command, 8 R normal big hit command, 16 R positive variation depending on the type of big hit (8 R positive variation big hit A, 8 R normal big hit, 16 R positive variation big hit, 8 R positive variation big hit B, 2 R normal big hit) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the effect (battle effect or added challenge effect) of the big hit gaming state according to the type of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker or the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the low probability time-short state is present (step S5390). Then, when in the low probability time short state, it is determined whether or not the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time short state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time short state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition to end the low probability time short state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-short playing state) (step S5392).

  Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), the small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is performed. The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying a small hit game state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process of the first special symbol process flag is transferred to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. (Step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit executing flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240 b) is performed. The small hit gaming state will be executed. By the way, unlike when a big hit is won, there is no case where the gaming state is changed when executing such a small hitting gaming state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without processing for the big hit or the small hit, assuming that it is a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process can be shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S5394), this processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is executed according to the status of suspension. A process according to the progress of (lottery, symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric product control process (step S116).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the on state in the process of step S5401, and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 145, the main The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes gate part passing processing such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol storage area of the RAM as the processing of step S5402. Do.

  Then, in the normal symbol process processing, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal symbol normal processing in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out and the lottery processing for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing or the like for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the common pattern fluctuation random number (step S5404)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. The pattern at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1402 as the mode at the time of the variation control stop Normal symbol stop processing to stop the key (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests "per common figure", the aforementioned movable piece becomes open state acceptance of the game ball to 2nd starting opening 2004 Motor combination release process (step S5407) that executes the process to control

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated such that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate part passing process (step S5402).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the on state in the process of step S5401, and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. 146, The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310 a as the processing of step S 5411. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  If it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to newly put the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols on hold status. It will process. That is, first, as the process of the step S 5412, the normal number-of-holds counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S5413, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common-use variation random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S5414, each random number acquired in this way is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of step S5412 to step S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing in step S5421. Based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state. As a result, if it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, then, as the processing of step S5422, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol storage area of the main control MPU 1310a is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of the steps S5423 and S5424, the ordinary holding number counter is counted down, and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol stored in each storage area of the ordinary storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the random number extracted to the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the determination table (not shown) for the popular drawing at the time reduction (step S5426) if the current gaming state is the time reduction state (high probability time reduction state) (step S5426) Step S5426), if the current gaming state is the non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S5425), select a non-time-shorted popular drawing determination table (not shown) In step S5427), the selected common drawing determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

  It should be noted that the per-common-figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the per-common-pattern determination table used when the game state is short (high probability time short state) and the game state is non-short It has a non-time-shorted spread diagram determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-short state, high probability non-short state). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table, which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it corresponds to the common-mode-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the 255 types of normal random numbers have been selected per common diagram. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the deviation judgment value which is a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003 in time saving time, the player always wins per flat map, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is It is possible to control the acceptance. It may be made to coincide with the determination value per common drawing indicating that not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-short time state are elected per common drawing.

  In addition, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all the 255 types of the normal random numbers coincide with the common drawing determination value indicating that the common drawing is won. Instead, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value. As described above, in the short time, even if the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003, the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting opening, since the player can not win the winning game. There is no possibility to control the reception of gaming balls to 2004. However, as described above, the hit of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-short time condition, and in this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than the short time condition, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the hit. The movable piece of the second start opening 2004 is opened for a time shorter than the short time, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start opening 2004, and then advanced again. The reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 may be disabled.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the selected common drawing is the common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429) ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S5430), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal symbol) at the time of change control stop of normal symbol The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol when it is determined that A common figure as a mode (a stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of control stop determines a shift symbol (step S5432). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S5404), this processing is ended (step S5433).

  Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to obtain the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation in each case is grasped, and effects corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a start winning combination has occurred, and performs control relating to a pending display or a pre-reading effect according to the starting winning combination when in this state. And after this, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, following fluctuation pattern specified command reception waiting processing, production design fluctuation start processing, production design fluctuation inside processing, production design fluctuation stop processing, big hit indication processing Performs either a jackpot in-game process or a jackpot end effect process.

  Fluctuation pattern specification command reception waiting process: While the fluctuation pattern command regarding fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, it takes on effects (such as demonstration effects) when the symbol is not in the fluctuation state and control regarding the big hit is not performed While performing control, when the fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect pattern fluctuation start processing.

  Effect pattern variation start processing: While determining various effect contents (effect pattern, advance notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period based on the change pattern command etc., the change of the decorative pattern is started based on the determined effect contents To control. Then, after that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process of rendering symbol variation.

During production symbol fluctuation processing: While performing control to start the various effect contents decided in the production symbol fluctuation start processing at each timing during the symbol fluctuation period etc, when the fluctuation time is over the value of the process flag is produced Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop process.
Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design symbol determination command) instructing the stop of all symbols, stop the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and perform control to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, when stopping the decorative symbol with the big hit symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display processing, and when stopping the decorative symbol with the lost symbol, the value of the process flag is waited for variation pattern designation command reception Update to the value corresponding to

  Big hit display processing: It controls the effect in the period from the stop of the decorative symbol with the big hit symbol to the start of the big hit game (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit). After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

  During the big hit game processing: Control concerning various effects during the occurrence period of the big hit game state is performed. When the jackpot gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

  Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, control effects (such as a display effect for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended) in a period from the end of the big hit gaming state to the change permission state. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the effect symbol fluctuation start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 148, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (the fluctuation effect) associated with the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the effect pattern determined It will control so that the fluctuation of a decorative symbol is started based on (the fluctuation production).

  The effect pattern (the change effect) may not necessarily correspond one-to-one with the change number indicated by the change pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variation effects) is determined based on the effect lottery, the game situation, etc. You may do it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is also configured to associate a plurality of effect patterns for some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  In addition, although this will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a notice lottery (determination process of advance effect) based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the change pattern after determining the effect pattern (change effect). By performing control (process during production symbol fluctuation) to cause the preliminary announcement effect won in the preliminary lottery to appear at a predetermined timing during the execution of the above determined effect pattern (variation effect). It is made to suggest the degree of expectation which a jackpot pattern appears by the appearance aspect etc. of those as possible combination.

  In the past, among such combined effects, there may be a plurality of occurrences while the same specified notice effect (for example, timer effect) is being performed while one effect pattern (variation effect) is being executed. By this, it is expected that maintenance of the game interest will be aimed at. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation of the big hit design is high, the frequency at which a plurality of timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variation effect) is being executed will naturally be low. It has been considered difficult to sufficiently improve the amusement of the game.

  Although described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect appearing during the execution of the effect pattern (variation effect), and the count display toward the timing when the predetermined effect is performed is a first predetermined value. What is executed as a count effect display performed from (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") or as a standby display (during preparation) before starting the count display It is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, the countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, a presentation (for example, a conversation announcement or a cut-in A) that causes the player to appear either in a relatively disadvantageous presentation mode (a presentation mode with a low degree of expectation) or in an advantageous presentation mode (a presentation mode with a high degree of expectation). , B, and so on) are targeted for the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (in particular, the advance side timer effect performed as a result of the advance lottery), at least when the count display is started, it is concealed as to which effect is the effect target It is desirable to do so. In addition, “effect object of timer effect” is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, the countdown) from the first predetermined value as the timer effect becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) In the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

  In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time since the start of counting is displayed up to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds and the like. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed from when the counting is started ( It does not have to indicate the number of seconds) correctly.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as effect contents appearing only when winning in the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect). That is, in this case, if only the notice-side timer effect is executed, the count effect display is executed as "advantage effect of the advance effect which functions to increase the jackpot expectation degree with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, it is also executed as “the content of the effect of the effect pattern itself determined based on the change pattern command”, and the expectation from the big hit expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the change pattern command It is possible to cause the count effect display (the timer effect) to appear without wasting the item in vain (the increase in the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the advance notice lottery"). For example, when the big hit expectation when the specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", when the advance side timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation is increased by the function of the combined effect. For example, it becomes “40%” and the frequency of appearance must be lowered by that amount, but when the fluctuation side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, the big hit is expected It is possible to execute the timer effect while keeping the degree at “20%” (it is possible to appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and it is possible to preferably maintain the appearance frequency.

  In the determination table T1, the jackpot expectation when the rendering pattern (variation rendering) appears differs depending on the variation number (further, the rendering pattern), and basically, as the variation number increases, the jackpot expectation There is a tendency for the degree to be high. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10) and 17 (18), the fluctuation-side timer effect is executed in which "conversation announcement" is the effect target as the effect contents. While the appearance ratio is fluctuation number 5 (6)> fluctuation number 9 (10)> fluctuation number 17 (18), the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is fluctuation number 5 (6) <fluctuation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18) is set. Here, for convenience of description, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state is described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time short state or the high probability time short state, the contents of the effect pattern itself As an effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the fluctuation-side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, all of the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but in the variation numbers 5 and 6, the variation timer effect can be executed for the presentation of conversation announcement. It differs from the change numbers 3 and 4 in the point. In addition, although variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that all the same character reach effects are performed, variation numbers 9 and 10 are subjected to variation-side timer effects for presentation of conversation announcements, and variation numbers 11 and 10, In 12, the fluctuation-side timer effect for the cut-in A is performed, and for the fluctuation numbers 13 and 14, the conversation announcement and the cut-in A are executed, and the fluctuation-side timer effect for the effects is performed. It differs in that it can be done. In addition, although the variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, the variation numbers 17 and 18 perform the variation-side timer effect for the presentation of the conversation announcement, and the variation numbers 19 and 18 In 20, the variable-side timer effect for the cut-in B is executed, and for the fluctuation numbers 21 and 22, the conversation announcement and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable-side timer effect for the effects is performed It differs in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation rate is higher in the case where the fluctuation-side timer effect directed to the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the fluctuation-side timer effect directed to the conversation announcement is executed. Is set so that the jackpot expectation degree tends to be higher in the case where the variable-side timer effect directed to the effects of both the conversation announcement and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

  In addition, with "conversation notice", it is possible to appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (the change effect of the decorative symbol) is executed, and the effect that the relatively low expectation degree is often made On the other hand, cut-ins A and B are allowed to appear at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (the change effect of the decorative symbol) is executed, and a relatively high expectation is added. Performance (or a performance that requires a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than that of other effects (cut-in A, B, feature A action described later, B, etc.) having a higher degree of expectation than this. It is supposed to be In addition, "Cut in" that appears as the content of the fluctuation effect is executed to correspond to the cut in A that appears as the effect content of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the "cut in" appears. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B, not the cut-in A appearing as the effect contents of the effect.

  Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the effect contents (reproduction pattern) for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) Is assigned as the variable-side timer effect. Then, on this, if the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (for example, variation number 1 to 6 etc.) such as shortening variation or low normal reach effect with low degree of expectation”, the count effect display as the advance notice timer effect is displayed. The fluctuation pattern is “the fluctuation pattern for executing the fluctuation-side timer effect while the expectation UP when the advance notice-time timer effect appears is suitably secured by preventing the effect winning (by increasing the premium degree). In the case of “count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22)”, the variation pattern is determined in the above-mentioned predetermined type (for example, variation The ratio corresponding to numbers 1 to 6 etc.) is reduced.

  In addition, although 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns on which the variation-side timer effect is executed, two of them (0 Since only variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) which may be set individually may correspond to the above predetermined type (variation numbers 1 to 6 etc.), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns for which the fluctuation-side timer effect is not executed, and four fluctuation patterns (variations (of Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined type (such as the change numbers 1 to 6), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

  In such a configuration, when the effect content of the fluctuation pattern is one capable of performing count effect display (fluctuation timer effect) (count fluctuation pattern), a notice is given rather than the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation timer effect is not performed. The rate at which it is determined that the count effect display (notice timer effect) can not be executed as the effect content of the effect decreases. Therefore, it is possible to urge the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one rendering pattern (variation rendering) without unnecessarily accumulating the expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is a count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) Even in the case where the count variation pattern is the count variation pattern, the appearance ratio of the notification timer effect differs according to which count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the effect pattern corresponding to the change numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect is not displayed at all, and the effect pattern corresponding to the change numbers 9 to 14 is executed. When it happens, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the above notice timer effect can appear with a high draw probability. ing.

  Even when the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect may appear with low probability. In addition, even when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, it is actually a big hit than in the case of a loss The above-mentioned notice effect timer effect can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability in the effect pattern which has been won, and the fluctuation number 22 can be made to appear with a higher lottery probability than the fluctuation number 16 ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is also notified that the variation pattern is either the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The rate of execution as the effect content (preliminary timer effect) is different. Therefore, among the count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays is high in one effect pattern (variation effect), the type thereof In some cases, it is possible to further increase the rate of appearance of a plurality of count displays, so that it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In particular, although it will be described later, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if it is a rendering pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the rendering content of the same reach type appears, the fluctuation side timer rendering is included as the rendering content In the effect pattern to be displayed (for example, the variation numbers 17 to 22), the advance notice timer within the execution period of the effect pattern is compared with the effect pattern (for example, the variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation timer effect is not included as the effect content The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which it is determined in the advance notice lottery that the advance notice timer effect is to be executed) is increased. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuating timer effect and advance timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation for winning only one forward timer effect in the advance lottery. As a result, it is possible to realize a double timer presentation opportunity without a wasteful increase of the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (the change effect) determined in the effect pattern change start process is the count change pattern (the change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). Even in this case, the fluctuation-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) in which “conversation announcement” is the target of rendering and the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) in which the “cut-in” is the rendering target In the above, the aspect of the count display (the form and color of the count number, etc.) is made different. That is, in this case, even when the effect pattern (for example, the change numbers 9, 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the change side timer effect (change side count effect display) is confirmed In combination with "the rate at which the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect appears is made to differ depending on which count fluctuation pattern is made", it is recognized that the notice-side timer effect is likely to appear. You will be able to expect.

  In addition, about the aspect of the count display which appears by advance notice side timer production (notice side count production indication), fluctuation side timer production (fluctuation side regardless of whether the production object is the same (conversation notice, cut in) or not It may be different from (or at least different from) the aspect of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same aspect (or at least the same as at least one). .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display to be executed as the notice-side timer effect (notice-side count effect display) is executed in a common mode regardless of the type of the effect to be the effect This is useful for making it possible for the player to recognize that the notice-side timer effect set to a high degree is appearing and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more preferable that the advance notice side timer effect is different from any of the modes of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the change side timer effect (change side count effect display). About the above-mentioned common mode as a notice side timer production (notice side count production display), a plurality of modes (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) from which an expectation is different are prepared, and either of them is performed You may do so.

  In order to make it possible to more appropriately recognize that the advance notice timer effect is being executed, the count display when the advance notice timer effect is executed and the count display when the fluctuation timer effect is executed It is desirable to make the counting speed different (for example, the speed at which the number changes in counting up or down). In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is focused on even during a period in which the count display is in progress, and the fluctuation-side timer effect and the relative degree are relatively low. Thus, it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the highly anticipated advance notice timer effects is being executed, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest during the timer digestion period.

  Also, in this case, in the variable-side timer effect, according to the object (conversation notice, cut-in), the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the advance-timer function. If the count display is made with a cut-in) and an aspect (conversation announcement) in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the count speed of the advance notice side timer effect, whether or not the advance notice timer effect is executed It is possible to make the judgment difficult and to impart an interest. Also, while the count display is performed by repeating the appearance and deletion of the count number in the fluctuation-side timer effect (or the notice-side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed in the notice-side timer effect (or the fluctuation-side timer effect). You may make it count display by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the advance timer function are simultaneously executed, it is easily grasped whether or not the advance timer function is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is performed for the fluctuation pattern (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time taken for total count digestion) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation-side timer effect is acquired, the count display of the fluctuation-side timer effect and the notification-side timer are performed so that any one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on random numbers for effect. If the ease of performing the same with the count display of the effect (for example, the larger the total number is easier to overlap, etc.) is made different, it may be different in the ease of judging whether or not the advance side timer effect is being executed. I am trying to give it an interest

  In this embodiment, for one variation pattern, a plurality of effect patterns (a target of effect of timer effect and reach) different in count display start timing or end timing (count total number or time required for total count digestion) are different. Although it was decided to prepare the same content of the effect, a plurality of effect patterns (but with the effect of the timer effect being different) where the start timing or end timing of the count display (count total number or time required for total count digestion) are different It is also possible to prepare a plurality of different fluctuation patterns separately for each of the effect patterns) and the type of reach effect to be executed as the effect contents of the fluctuation pattern and to make them correspond one-on-one.

  In addition, even if the count display number (count total number) when appearing in the fluctuation side timer effect and the notice side timer effect is made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the fluctuation side timer effect and the advance notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different depending on the side timer effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the advance side timer effect is being performed and to make the difficulty different to impart an interest. .

  In addition, while the advance side timer effect is executed by the countdown display, if the variable side timer effect is executed by the count up display, it is determined whether or not the advance side timer effect is executed. It is expected that they will be able to play a major Also, while the advance side timer effect is executed by the countdown display, the variable side timer effect for the specific effect (for example, conversation advance announcement) is executed by the count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the change-side timer effect for the cut-in) is executed by the countdown display, it is determined whether or not the advance timer-side effect is executed, and the difficulty is made different according to the effect object It becomes possible to grant.

  In addition, although it will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is targeted for the variation-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect, and cases where different effects are intended for the effect. Control. When the same effect (for example, conversation announcement) is targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect, compared to the case where different effects are targeted for the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect. It is set such that the rate at which the jackpot expectation level decreases is high, and the same effect (for example, conversational announcement) is set as the target for the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect. The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation announcement) is set as the target of the variable timer effect and the advance timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the advance timer effect is set to a predetermined value first. Because the other count display will be continued while it is terminated and reached, at this point in time, it is as if different effects are targeted (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation mode) It looks like it is). Then, after this, the other count display being continued also comes to a predetermined numerical value and ends in a mode in which it is clarified that the same effect (for example, conversational announcement) is targeted for the effect, so Even when it is revealed that a conversation announcement with a relatively low degree of expectation is targeted for the effect by the timer effect on the side that has ended, it is targeted for a different outcome that is allowed to appear later ( It is expected to improve the interest of the game by maintaining the sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation.

  In addition, when the same effect (for example, conversation announcement) is set as the target of the fluctuation-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect, the timing at which the change-side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the advance-side timer effect It is desirable to make each count end corresponding display (for example, "count success!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear at timing when the numerical value is reached.

  More specifically, the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect, which are targeted for the “conversation announcement” executed as the effect on the fluctuation side or the announcement side, are made to appear in one of the effect patterns. In this case, the count display of the fluctuation timer effect and the count display of the advance timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but in the fluctuation timer effect, as the effect of fluctuation on the basis of "conversation announcement". While advancing the count display in accordance with the fluctuating side specific effects that occur (“count success!”, Effects according to the appearance of the speech notice, etc.), in the notice side timer effect, in relation to the “conversation notice” The count display is displayed in accordance with the notice-side specific effect (such as “chance UP!” And the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect) which appears as the effect on the notice side. By progressing, separate count end corresponding displays are made to appear at different timings.

  By the way, for each presentation of the conversation announcement and the cut-in, it is required to be executed whenever the presentation of the variation-side timer presentation is made (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation announcement and the cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, when the effect of the variable-side timer effect is targeted, the relative indication occurs when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is required to make it appear in a mode that is highly expected. Therefore, about the production made into the production object of the fluctuation side timer production, it incorporates beforehand as the production contents of the above-mentioned production pattern (the fluctuation production), only with the execution of the production pattern and the fluctuation side timer production and its production object It is desirable that each of the effects (a relatively high expectation mode) can be made to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that the effect (the aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the effect target in the advance notice lottery is always selected when the variable side timer effect is executed. .

  In addition, when each presentation of the conversation announcement and the cut-in is not set as the presentation object of the fluctuation side timer presentation, from the fact that it is judged whether it is made to appear as the presentation contents of the announcement side in the announcement lottery described later Judgment is made as to what kind of aspect (relatively high expectation or low aspect) appears as the side effect content, and control according to the appearance is performed based on the result of the judgment .

The process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 148 will be summarized below.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when acquiring the fluctuation pattern command, the symbol type command, etc. from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, etc. Refers to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, bias (expected degree) can be given to the probability variation expectation degree when the specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, etc. become.

  Then, next, a plurality of effect patterns (a plurality of effect patterns having different start timing or end timing of the count display appearing in the fluctuation side timer effect, etc.) are prepared as an effect pattern associated with the fluctuation number. In the case where one of the plurality of effect patterns having different start timing or end timing of the count display is selected based on the hit of the big hit determination. At this time, when the jackpot determination is won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is late becomes high, whereby the start timing or the end timing of the count display It is made to have a tendency that the possibility of the jackpot pattern appearing becomes higher as

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in the case, among the plurality of effect patterns, the effect pattern set so as not to appear the fluctuation-side timer effect is selected.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the rendering pattern (rendering from the variation start to the variation stopping of the decorative symbol) appearing during the symbol variation is selected in this way, what notice rendering is performed in the execution period of the rendering pattern It will be determined whether to execute additionally (in combination) in the following manner (notice lottery).

  FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing procedure of the lottery relating to the notice effect appearing in the execution period of the effect pattern (the fluctuation time of the symbol) (the notice lottery carried out in the effect pattern fluctuation start process). Note that the processing procedure for the advance notice lottery described below is merely an example, and the processing procedure for the advance notice lottery is not limited to this as long as the intended purpose as the advance notice effect can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 149, in the advance lottery, first, it is determined whether or not the change (pending to be digested) which is awaiting start is a target of timer prefetching effect described later (step S5501). ). As a result, while the first timer advance lottery is performed when the timer pre-reading effect is targeted (step S5502), the second timer advance lottery is performed when the timer pre-reading effect is not targeted (step S5502) S5521).

  That is, when it is the target of the timer prefetch effect (first timer preview lottery), the notification timer effect is executed compared to the case of the timer prefetch effect (the second timer lottery). The rate at which decisions are made is set to be high. The ratio may also include a ratio determined at 100%. Further, in both of the first timer advance notice lottery and the second timer advance notice lottery, different determination tables are prepared separately for the gaming state, and it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is to be executed according to the game state. The ratio to be made (for example, in the high probability time short game state, the decision to perform the advance announcement timer effect is made different at a lower rate (including the rate determined at 0%) than the normal game state) It has become.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a timer advance notice determination table T2 which is referred to in the normal gaming state, when the change (settled hold) is not the target of the timer prefetch effect (second timer advance notice lottery). .

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the second timer advance notice lottery according to the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command of a predetermined type (here, variation numbers 1 to 6) is acquired, the advance notice timer effect is displayed. There is no decision to carry out. The same applies to the first timer advance lottery and other gaming states in this regard.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 148, in the second timer preview lottery, even on the effect pattern (for example, the SP reach corresponding to the change numbers 15 to 22) where the effect content of the same reach type appears, the change side In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22) in which the timer effect is included as effect content, the variation-side timer effect is not included as effect content in the effect pattern (for example, SP reach corresponding to fluctuation numbers 15 and 16) It is set so that the rate at which the decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is made is high. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to cause two timer effects (fluctuation timer effect, advance timer effect) to appear in one effect pattern without winning the double timer effect described later in the advance notice lottery, As a result, it is possible to realize an opportunity to produce a double timer without performing a wasteful increase of the jackpot expectation (winning in the double timer effect). The same applies to the first timer advance lottery and other gaming states in this regard.

  However, in the first timer advance notice lottery, the rate at which the decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is made is generally higher than that of the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer advance notice lottery. More specifically, in the first timer notice lottery, even if any of the variation numbers 7 to 22 is selected, the notice side is compared with the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer notice lottery. The rate at which the decision to execute the timer effect is made is high.

  As will be described later, in the timer prefetching effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (a low expectation mode, a high expectation mode, and a decision mode) in which the ratio at which the advance notice timer effect is executed in the fluctuation targeted for the prefetching is different It is designed to be carried out in any of the modes). Then, in the first timer advance notice lottery, first, it is determined in which mode the timer pre-reading effect is being executed, and even if the pre-reading is being executed in the low expectation mode, the second timer advance notice lottery It is set so that the rate at which the decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is made is generally higher than the timer advance decision table T2 referred to in the above. When timer pre-reading effect is executed in the high expectation mode, the rate at which it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is performed is generally higher than in the low expectation mode, and the timer pre-reading effect is When executed in the finalized mode, it is set that the decision to execute the advance notice timer effect is always made regardless of the variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 22).

  When it is determined as a result of such timer announcement lottery (first timer announcement lottery, second timer announcement lottery) that execution of the advance announcement timer effect is determined (YES in step S5503), the process of step S5504 is performed. When it is not determined to execute the advance notification side timer effect while the one mission effect lottery is performed (NO in step S5503), the second mission effect lottery is performed as the process of step S5551.

  That is, as described above, in the timer effect, as the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is larger (the time required for time consumption of the timer is longer), the big hit expectation tends to be higher Is set to have However, in this case, when the count display number (count total number) displayed when the count display is started is small, the jackpot expectation degree tends to be low, so the timer effect is executed although the game is executed Concern about decline in interest was a concern.

  Therefore, although described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment causes the effect display device 1600 to display a "specific display related to the first effect" such as "Let the first effect appear" and the specific display When the first effect occurs (appears) while the is displayed, a special effect such as “mission success” appears, thereby enabling execution of the mission effect that suggests that the jackpot has been won.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, among the effect types targeted for the effect of the timer effect, an effect type (here, conversation announcement) appearing in an earlier stage is set as the first effect. It will be adopted. That is, in this case, when the timer effect is executed (while the mission effect is appearing), the count indication is displayed while the specific indication such as "Let's make the conversation announcement (the first effect) appear" appears. Even if the displayed count number (total number of counts) displayed when S is started is that the target object of the timer notice is "a conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage" even if the count display number is small ( It can be expected that the player has won the prize, and the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is large, and the count display is continued even after the end of the conversation announcement. It is expected that the game excitement when the timer effect is executed can be stably increased, since it can be expected that the big hit expectation will be high even in the case of Kill as to become.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a specific display related to the first effect (display a conversation notice so that the synergetic effect produced by the timer effect and the mission effect can be more suitably exhibited. When the) is displayed, the notice lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) so that the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation notice is not displayed). To do. As a result, it is possible to have an expectation for the timer effect to be executed only by displaying the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation announcement appear), so it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the game entertainment. You will be able to The first effect to be the target of the mission display may not be the "conversation notice", and may be executed instead of any of the effects shown in FIG. 160, for example.

In addition, when the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation advance notice) is displayed, the appearance ratio of the timer effect compared to when the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation advance notice) is not displayed. Although any method may be adopted as a method of raising E, it can be realized, for example, by adopting any of the following methods.
a. First, it is decided whether to perform the mission effect, and when it is determined to perform the mission effect, the timer effect is selected so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when it is not determined to perform the mission effect. Method to determine whether to appear b. First, it is decided whether to perform the timer effect, and when it is determined to perform the timer effect, the mission effect is selected so that the appearance rate of the mission effect is higher than when it is not determined to perform the timer effect. Method to decide whether to make it appear

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment adopts the above method b. Therefore, in the first mission effect drawing (step S5504) when it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is won in the process of step S5503, it is not determined that the advance notice timer effect is won in the process of step S5503. In order to increase the ratio at which it is determined (mission display) to display the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation advance notice) as compared to the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case where It is determined whether or not the mission display is to be performed within the variation (effect pattern).

  It should be noted that the specific display related to the first effect (please let the conversation announcement appear) and the timer pre-read effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, the third preceding mode) which suggests that the fore-end timer effect will be executed. Aspect) can be displayed at the same time. In addition, under predetermined conditions, a predetermined display (mission suggestion display) may be displayed in which the ratio in which the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation announcement appears) increases.

  In addition, for the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation announcement appear), for example, when the hold information (hold information for generating the mission effect) to be the target of the mission effect is obtained, the hold information is It may be made to be able to be displayed across a plurality of variable display until it is digested. Also, at this time, when the pending information targeted for the mission effect (pending information for generating the mission effect) is the pending information for the big hit, the variation executed before the pending information for the big hit is digested A notice of conversation may be made to appear in the display to display a special display (mission success). However, when the special display (mission success) is displayed in advance (when mission success is displayed when the pending information for generating the mission effect is not yet digested), the lost fluctuation display is performed. It is desirable to be limited when That is, in this case, although the special display (mission success) is displayed, the lost symbol (disappearance effect) appears in the variable display where the special display appears, but the special display (mission success) is displayed in this way. It is possible to improve the game interest by displaying the big hit symbol (big hit effect) in the variable display by digesting the held information that is the target of the mission effect in the state where it is being played.

  According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the count display of the timer effect is started while the mission effect and the timer pre-reading effect are executed over a plurality of changes, the lost pattern is displayed in the variable display even if the mission is successful. It is possible to realize such an effect as if the fluctuation display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried over until the fluctuation display in which the timer effect count display starts is displayed.

  FIG. 151 (a) is a view showing an example of a first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) referred to when the advance notice timer effect is performed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 151 (b) Is a diagram showing an example of a second mission effect determination table T3b (second mission effect lottery) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed in the normal gaming state.

  As is clear from FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), first, in the first mission effect determination table T3a to be referred to when the advance side timer effect is performed, the advance timer side effect is not performed. It is set so that the rate at which the decision to display (mission display) the specific display (let's make the conversation announcement appear) related to the first effect is higher than the second mission effect determination table T3b to be referred to There is. In this respect, the same applies to each of the tables referred to when being in the other gaming state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 148, although the variation numbers 5 and 6 correspond to the variation pattern that causes “conversation announcement” to appear as a variation effect, the variation numbers 5 and 6 are obtained. When it is set, it is set so as not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation advance notice) is displayed in any of the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b It is done. That is, since fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are so-called normal reach effects (reach types with low expectations), both timer effects and mission effects occur in such reach effects with low expectations, and the mission is successful. Then, there is a concern that the interest of playing "I wanted to see such an effect with a reach effect of a type with a higher degree of expectation" would be reduced by the game interest. For this reason, in the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6, although it is a reach effect in which the fluctuation-side timer effect with the effect of "conversation notice" is performed, in any of the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b It is desirable to set so as not to execute the effect that the specific display related to the first effect (please let the conversation announcement appear) is displayed. In this respect, the same applies to each of the tables referred to when being in the other gaming state.

  Further, as also shown in FIG. 148, although the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 correspond to the variation patterns that cause “conversation announcement” to appear as a variation effect, these variation numbers are acquired. Even when there is, in the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b, it is set so as not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation advance notice) is displayed It is done. This is because the change numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 are change patterns at the time of the loss, and it is impossible to display the effect of the mission success (suggestive suggestion that the jackpot has been won) in the effect. Also in this respect, the same applies to each of the tables referred to when being in the other gaming state.

  Further, as also shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, 22 correspond to the hit variation patterns for causing "conversation notice" to appear as a variation effect, and these variation numbers 10, 14, If a specific display related to the first effect (display conversation announcement appears) is displayed when 18, 22 are acquired, the message of mission success (suggestive indication of winning a big hit) is displayed The Rukoto. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) to be referred to when the advance side timer effect is performed, the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 10, 14, 18, When 22) is acquired, the execution probability is set (3 times) to be significantly higher than that in the second mission effect drawing (step S5551) which is referred to when the advance notice timer effect is not performed. There is. Through such control, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear when the timer effect appears. Also in this respect, the same applies to each of the tables referred to when being in the other gaming state.

  On the other hand, the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation notice) during execution of the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 16, 20) which does not cause "conversation notice" to appear as the effect content of the change presentation. When is displayed, there may be an unpleasant presentation situation such as “The conversation announcement can not be made to appear despite the mission display, and the jackpot symbol is displayed after the mission failure”. Absent. Therefore, even if it is the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) to be referred to when the advance side timer effect is performed, a hit fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause "conversation notice" to appear as a fluctuation effect. When is acquired, it is set (doubled) so that the execution probability is not so high as compared to the second mission effect drawing (step S5551) which is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed. There is. Also in this respect, the same applies to each of the tables referred to when being in the other gaming state.

  However, although it will be described later, when it is determined that the percussion variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) is not made to appear as a fluctuation presentation, it is determined that the mission effect is to be executed. Thus, it is controlled such that the probability that "conversation notice" is executed as the effect content of the notice effect is high (step S5509 and step S5534 described later). In view of the fact that such control is carried out, the "conversation notice" is also changed to the "conversation notice" for the hit fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) which does not cause the "conversation notice" to appear as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect. The mission effect may be performed with an execution probability similar to that of a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) appearing as contents.

  On the other hand, the change numbers 7, 11, 15, 19 are reach effects at the time of losing which does not cause "conversation notice" to appear as the effect contents of the change effect. Since such reach effects can be performed at the time of the loss in the form that the mission effect is a failure without making "conversation notice" appear, it is referred to when the advance side timer effect is performed In the first mission effect lottery to be performed, the execution probability is set (3 times) to be significantly higher than that in the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) which is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed. There is. Through such control, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear when the timer effect appears. Also in this respect, the same applies to each of the tables referred to when being in the other gaming state.

  Although it will be described later, it has been decided that a reach effect (a change number 7, 11, 15, 19 etc.) at the time of losing is not made to appear as a “previous conversation announcement” as the effect content of the change effect Sometimes, it is controlled such that the probability that "conversation notice" is executed becomes 0 as the content of the notice effect. This is because in the reach production at the time of the loss, it is not possible to display the effect of the mission success (indicated that the jackpot has been won) in the production.

  According to the configuration that takes such a mission effect, always (when no mission effect appears), the effect target of the timer effect (count effect display) is the second effect (conversation notice) than the first effect (conversation notice) It is more desirable for achieving a sense of expectation that the effect (for example, a cut-in or a feature item operation described later) having a higher degree of expectation than that is desired, and the effect target of the timer effect (count effect display) is first In the case of (conversation announcement), it is not possible to suitably obtain a sense of expectation. However, when the timer effect (count effect display) is executed when the specific display (for making the conversation advance notice appear) relating to the first effect (conversation notice), the effect target of the timer effect is the first effect Even if it is (conversation notice) or the second effect (cut-in), the timer effect can be obtained because at least the sense of expectation obtained in the second effect (cut-in) can be obtained. Will be able to enjoy at ease.

  In addition, when the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed (display the conversation notice), the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) in the symbol effect (display the conversation notice) Since the appearance ratio of the timer effect (count effect display) is higher than when the is not displayed, the game is performed only by displaying the specific display (please make the conversation advance notice appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice) It is possible to preferably suppress the decline in interest. In order to realize such effect control, the variable timer effect need not necessarily be prepared to be executable, but may be realized only by the advance timer effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, both of the conversation notice and the cut-in (or the feature operation described later) can be performed within one effect pattern, and the conversation notice is cut-in (or the role described later). It comes to appear at the timing before object operation). Therefore, when mission display (display conversation announcement) is executed, there is a possibility of mission success even if the count display number (count total number) displayed when count display of timer effect is started is small. The decrease in feeling of expectation comes to be suppressed from being conscious. In addition, since the sense of expectation can be suitably maintained by itself when the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started, it is possible to enjoy the game when the timer effect appears. It will be expected to maintain stable.

  Moreover, although this is also mentioned later, as a timing (a mission display) to display the specific display (allowing the conversation announcement to appear) related to the first effect, the period during which the symbol variation targeted for the specific display is performed Not only inside, but the symbol variation targeted for the specific display can appear even during a period of being put on hold. In addition, the first effect is displayed in the situation where the specific display related to the first effect (display the conversation advance notice) is displayed while the symbol variation targeted for the mission effect is still in the pending state. It will be described later that a special display such as "mission success" may be made to appear (appear).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the first mission effect drawing (step S5504) is performed in this way, next, the processing of step S5505 is performed to perform the notification timer type lottery to determine the execution mode of the notification timer effect. .

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the noticing timer type determination table T4 referred to in the noticing timer type lottery (step S5505).
As shown in FIG. 152, in the notice timer type determination table T4, it is acquired whether to execute the notice timer effect in the form of a single timer or to execute the notice timer effect in the form of a double timer. The effect random numbers are allocated by different allocations of the change numbers. In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment refers to the noticing timer type determination table T4 based on the change number indicated by the change pattern command, and the value of the obtained effect random number is the single timer and the double timer. By determining to which of the modes of (1) and (2), the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) is executed.

  In addition, the "single timer" to be determined in the notice-side timer type lottery is "a mode in which one notice-side timer effect is executed in one effect pattern", and the "double timer" Is equivalent to “a mode in which two advance notice timer effects different from one to another in the effect pattern are executed”. In the advance notice side timer type determination table T4, the effect random numbers are allocated for each variation number so that the big hit expectation when the "double timer" appears is higher than the "single timer".

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment can execute the above-mentioned fluctuation-side timer effect depending on the type (variation number) of the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, when it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is to be executed in the form of a single timer when such a count fluctuation pattern is selected, the change side timer effect and the notice timer effect appear in one effect pattern. As a result, the timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer (or triple timer). Also, similarly to this, when it is determined that the advance notice timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer when the count fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation timer effect and the notice timer effect are displayed in one effect pattern. By appearing, the timer effect is executed in the form of a triple timer (or quadruple timer).

  That is, in this case, when the number (single, double) of appearance of the advance notice timer effect is determined regardless of whether or not the count variation pattern is selected, “the appearance of the timer effect appearing in one effect pattern is As the number increases, the probability of big hit gets higher. ”In this case, it becomes impossible to understand the meaning of presentation (when any aspect has high expectation) when the timer effect is executed. There is a concern about the decline in gaming entertainment.

  Therefore, in the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, among the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice-side timer effect can appear. When the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 7, 8, 15, 16) which does not execute fluctuation side timer production is selected, reach type (character reach relatively low expectation degree, SP reach relatively high expectation degree) In accordance with the above, the mode of the double timer is more easily selected by the relatively high expected SP reach.

  On the other hand, of the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice timer effect is allowed to appear, variation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22) for executing two variation side timer effects different from one to another The mode of the double timer only in the case of SP reach with a relatively high degree of expectation according to reach type (relatively low expected degree character reach, relatively high expected degree SP reach) when is selected Is to be selected. That is, in this case, when the aspect of the quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable-side timer effects different from one to be displayed and the two advance-side timer effects in one effect pattern, the type of SP reach having a relatively high degree of expectation In this case, it is definitely suggested that the rendering pattern is to be executed, and the game interest can be improved. However, instead of this, when the aspect of the quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable-side timer effects different from the effect target and the two advance-side timer effects in one effect pattern, it is determined that the big hit symbol appears It may be suggested.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation number 13, 14, 21, 22) which performs two different fluctuation side timer effects for presentation object is selected, the mode of the single timer in the said notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) Even when is selected, the appearance of the triple timer appears by the appearance of two different variable-side timer effects and one advance-side timer effect different in the effect object in one effect pattern. In order to maintain the degree of expectation when such a triple timer aspect appears, the above-mentioned timer notice lottery (first timer notice lottery, second timer notice lottery) corresponds to a fluctuation pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation. When the variation number 13, 14 to be selected is selected, it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is executed only with a relatively low probability compared with the variation numbers 7 to 12 of the same character reach (decision to make a triple timer) (See the distribution mode of variation No. 13 in FIG. 150).

  On the other hand, a variation pattern (variation numbers 9 to 12 and 17 to 20) for executing one variation timer effect is selected from the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice timer effect can be generated. When it is set, the selection probability of the double timer mode in the case of relatively low character reach (variation numbers 9 to 12) is set significantly lower, and SP reach (variation number relatively high expectation) is set. 17 to 20) are set so that the selection probability of the double timer mode is significantly higher. That is, in this case, in combination with the distribution mode of change number 13 in FIG. 150 described above, an aspect of a triple timer (one change side timer effect and two notice side timer effects, or two change side timers) in one effect pattern When the effect and one fore-end timer effect are displayed, the ratio of appearance of relatively high expected SP reach rather than relatively low expected character reach is increased, so that the game interest can be improved. Will be able to

  In the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, only the process of selecting one of the single timer and the double timer is performed as the notice timer effect type. However, with regard to the notice timer type lottery (step S5505), the lottery process may be performed so that the notice timer effect of triple timer or more can be executed, and the mode of the count display of the notice timer effect is expected A lottery process may be performed on which of a plurality of different modes (for example, different colors, etc.) to execute.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, after the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) is performed in this way, the mode of the single timer and the mode of the double timer as a result of the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) Whether the decision to perform the advance notice timer effect has been made (Step S5506), or the decision to perform the mission effect as a result of the first mission effect drawing (Step S5504) (Steps S5507, S532) In the contents (table) according to each result of the timer, the effect lottery for the timer target candidate effect (the advance effect which can be the effect target of the advance side timer effect) is made (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543) , S5544).

More specifically, one of the following processes will be performed.
In the first processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5507) is made, First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the first processing situation, the timer target candidate effects of the number are displayed as effect contents of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. A determination process is performed (step S5508). Next, a determination process as to which type of preview effect is made to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and further, which of the preview effects is to be the target of the timer effect. (Step S5509).

In the second processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and it is determined that the mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) is not performed. First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the second processing state, the timer target candidate effects of the number are displayed as the effect contents of the advance effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process is performed on the parameter (step S5523). Next, a determination process as to which type of preview effect is made to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and further, which of the preview effects is to be the target of the timer effect. (Step S5524).

In the third processing state in which the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5532) is made, First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the third processing state, the timer target candidate effects of the number are displayed as the effect contents of the advance effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process is performed on the parameter (step S5533). Next, a determination process as to which type of preview effect is made to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and further, which of the preview effects is to be the target of the timer effect. (Step S5534).

In the fourth processing state in which the mode is the double timer (NO in step S5506) and it is determined that the mission effect (to make the conversation announcement appear) not to be executed (NO in step S5532), First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the fourth processing situation, the timer target candidate effects of the number are displayed as the effect contents of the advance effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process is performed on the parameter (step S5543). Next, a determination process as to which type of preview effect is made to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process, and further, which of the preview effects is to be the target of the timer effect. (Step S5544).

  FIG. 153 shows the reach type when the decision to execute the mission effect (display the conversation announcement) and the decision to execute the mission effect (display the conversation announcement) are not made. In the figure which compares and shows the appearance upper limit number of the timer object candidate production which is decided according to the processing condition (the 5th processing condition and the 6th processing condition which it mentions later besides the 1st-4th processing condition) and the like is there.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when it is determined to execute the mission effect (display the conversation notice), the mission effect (display the conversation notice). The upper limit number (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is controlled to be larger than when the determination to execute (1) is not made.

  That is, whether or not to execute the advance side timer effect, whether or not the advance side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, and whether or not the reach type is a reach effect having a relatively high degree of expectation, Even if the determination result such as etc. is determined in any case, when it is determined to execute the mission effect (display the conversation notice), the determination to execute the mission effect (display the conversation notice) The upper limit number of occurrences (average number of occurrences) of the timer target candidate effect is increased as compared with the case where the timer is not performed.

  Such processing setting is performed when the above-mentioned announcement side timer effect execution is executed (Steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5534, S5534, S5543, S5544) or when an announcement side timer effect is not executed described later. This is realized through the setting of each table referred to in the effect drawing (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564).

  According to such a configuration, it is expected that when the mission effect (make the conversation announcement appear) is executed, the appearance rate of the advance effect is increased and the average number of appearances is increased to improve the game interest. In addition to that, it should be possible to have a sense of expectation that "if there are frequent announcement effects so often, conversation announcements with a relatively low expectation among the announcement effects may also appear and become mission success" become able to. As described above, the presentation targeted for the mission display is required to be a presentation with a relatively low degree of expectation such as a conversational announcement, but it does not necessarily have to be the one with the lowest degree of expectation. When the types of effects that can be regarded as effects of the timer effect are classified into two groups according to the degree of expectation, they may be classified into groups relatively having low degrees of expectation. Or, it is a notice effect which appears at a timing before the reach effect is started and the expectation degree is lower than this, as compared with the specific effect with a high degree of expectation which appears after the reach effect is started and It is also good.

  FIG. 154 shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and is in the first processing state in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is made) (YES in step S5507) It is a figure which shows an example of table T5a referred in the process of step S5508 in the case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 154, since the table T5a is referred to when the advance announcement timer effect or the mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a variation pattern in which the advance timer effect can not be executed. When the fluctuation numbers 1, 13, 17 and 21 corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 1 to 6 or the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) causing the conversation notice to appear as the production contents of the fluctuation effect are acquired There is no reference to T5a.

  Further, since the table T5a is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, at least one timer target candidate effect is selected so that the effect random number is separately for each variation number. It is allocated. However, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the advance effect, for the variable number in which the timer object candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect.

  Further, in the table T5a, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12 and 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, up to four timer target candidate effects are allocated to the hit effect of the variation numbers 7 and 8 On the other hand, up to three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only up to two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variation number 14 Not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the variation effect, while in the variation numbers 10 to 12, the effect content of the variation effect is One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) appears, and at the change number 14, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) appear as effect contents of the fluctuation effect. It is supposed to be. Therefore, in the variation numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with that substantially one more advance notice effect is respectively assigned, and in the variation number 14, substantially two or more notice effects are It is synonymous with being assigned to each.

  Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the effect random number of "400" is substantially allocated to the notice number 3 and the effect random number of "600" is allocated to the notice number 4 Since it becomes synonymous with this, it can be said that it is allocated so that a lot of advance notice effects may appear most easily among the change numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect.

  By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) appearing at the change number 10 is set to have a lower hit probability than the effect pattern (character reach + cut in A) appearing at the change numbers 11 and 12 It is as having mentioned above. However, in the table T5a to be referred to when referred to the first processing situation, with the change number 10, “mission success (special display) is displayed, and then it is stopped as a jackpot symbol as a presentation pattern In view of the fact that it is the one to be executed, the number and probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher than in the case of the variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed), Improves the enjoyment of the game when the mission success (special display) is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) with a relatively high degree of expectation, almost the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such character reach is set . However, among the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10, and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 The number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher in the case of the fluctuation number 20 per hit than in the case of the fluctuation number 18 (the number of predictions tends to be larger as the fluctuation number is higher for the jackpot expectation). Moreover, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than character reach.

  In addition, although it mentions later, with character arrival when it is in the 1st processing circumstance, until the design fluctuation is stopped up to 5 timer object candidate candidacy effect (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action) , And a special timer) can appear. However, since one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalization effect (special timer), it also functions as a big hit effect by mission success even when conversational announcement is selected, so the timer is targeted When four or more candidate effects appear, the notice effect of the big hit decision will appear. Therefore, in table T5a, at variable number 7, which is character reach at the time of losing, only up to three timer target candidate effects are allowed to appear, and the variable number is character reach (cut-in A) at the time of losing. At 11, it is possible that only up to two timer target candidate renditions (substantially up to three) can appear.

  On the other hand, in SP reach when in the first processing situation, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, etc.) until symbol variation is stopped. The timing at which the cut-in B and the character B motion) can appear has come. However, when a conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect by mission success, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmed advance notice effect appears. Therefore, in table T5a, at variable number 15, which is the SP reach at the time of losing, only up to five timer target candidate effects are allowed to appear, and the variable number is character reach (cut-in B) at the time of losing At 19, it is possible that only up to four timer target candidate renditions (substantially up to five) can appear.

An example of each effect prepared as the timer target candidate effect is described below.
· Conversation notice: Although the speech of the predetermined character is displayed in the effect display device 1600 and the big hit expectation may change according to the content of the words, the big hit expectation when the speech notice appears is the other It is set to be lower than the effects (hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B movement).
-Hold change: A display corresponding to the hold display that has become the digest target even during a symbol change performed in response to the hold consumption (display corresponding to the hold display when not in the hold state but in the hold state) While the display mode (such as color) of the reserve display which has become the digestion target is changed while the is displayed, the jackpot expectation degree suggested according to the display mode after the change may change, The jackpot expectation at the time when the holding change appears is set lower than the cut-in A, the character A operation, the cut-in B, and the character B operation.
-Cut-in A: A specific image A is displayed in a form to be preferentially displayed with respect to the effect performed during the symbol variation, and the jackpot expectation when the cut-in A appears is the feature A It is set lower than the motion, cut-in B, and character B motion.
-Feature A operation: One of the above-described effect movable bodies is operated, and the jackpot expectation when the feature A operation appears is set lower than that of the feature B operation.
-Cut-in B: The specific image B is displayed in a form to be preferentially displayed with respect to the effect performed during the symbol variation, and the jackpot expectation when the cut-in B appears is the feature A It is set lower than the motion and character B motion.
-Feature B operation: One of the above-mentioned effect movable bodies is operated, and the jackpot expectation when the feature B operation appears is the other effect (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A It is set higher than the character A operation and the cut-in B). The effect movable body operated by the character B operation may be different from or the same as the effect movable body used in the character A movement, but the operation is performed when the same effect movable body is used The aspect will be different.

  It should be noted that each of these effects can be executed as effects for the timer, as well as a period before, during or after the count display is executed, or a fluctuation period during which the timer effect is not executed The timer can be executed as an effect that is not subject to the timer. In addition, each of these effects may be executable in any of a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, such as blue cut-in A and red cut-in A, for example. In addition, with respect to the pending change, a premier mode (special mode) in which a big hit is decided when appearing may be included. However, in this case, when the premier mode (special mode) appears during execution of the count display, the hold change is not executed as the target of the timer effect when the count display becomes a predetermined value.

  FIG. 155 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and is in a second processing state in which determination to not execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T5b referred in the process of step S5523 in the case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 155, since the table T5b is referred to when the advance announcement timer effect is executed, the fluctuation number 1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the advance timer appearance can not be executed. When 〜6 is acquired, the table T5b is not referred to. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17 correspond to the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) for causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect. , 21 are also referred to in the table T5b. Therefore, in the table T5b, effect random numbers are allocated to the change numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 separately for each notice number.

  Also, since the table T5b is similarly referred to when the advance notice timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, at least one timer target candidate effect is selected so that at least one of the variation numbers is separately selected. Is allocated. However, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the advance effect, for the variable number in which the timer object candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect.

  In addition, similarly, in the table T5b, among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, up to two timer target candidate effects are allocated to the variation numbers 7 to 12, Only one timer target candidate effect at the maximum is allocated to the fluctuation numbers 13 and 14 having a relatively high degree of expectation. However, while variation targets 7 and 8 do not have timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) as the effect content of variation effects, variation numbers 9 to 12 have 1 as the effect content of variation effects. Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as effect contents of the fluctuation effect when the one timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) comes to appear. It has become. Therefore, in the variation numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with substantially one or more preview effects being respectively assigned, and in the variation numbers 13 and 14, substantially two or more previews It has the same meaning as the effect is assigned to each.

  Then, for example, in the variation number 14, it becomes substantially the same as the effect random number of "1000" being assigned to the notice number 3; therefore, the variation numbers 7 to 7 corresponding to the character reach effect Among the fourteen, it can be said that it is allocated so that a large number of preliminary announcement effects are likely to appear.

  In the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, a relationship substantially the same as the relationship between the respective variation numbers in the character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  Besides, in the table T5b, distribution of effect random numbers is performed in substantially the same manner as the table T5a, but since this table is referred to when mission effect is not executed, table referred to when mission effect is not executed The upper limit number of occurrences of timer target candidate effects (average number of occurrences) is smaller than T5a.

  FIG. 156 shows a mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506), and is in a third processing state in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is made) (YES in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5c referred in the process of step S5533 in the case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 156, since the table T5c is also referred to when the advance announcement timer effect or mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a variation pattern in which the advance timer effect can not be executed. When the fluctuation numbers 1, 13, 17 and 21 corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 1 to 6 or the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) causing the conversation notice to appear as the production contents of the fluctuation effect are acquired There is no reference to T5c.

  However, since the table T5c is referred to when the advance notice timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, at least two timer target candidate effects are selected so that effect random numbers are separately provided for each variation number. It is allocated. However, it is not necessary to necessarily allocate two timer target candidate effects as the effect contents of advance notice effect for the fluctuation number where the timer object candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect contents of change effect, One timer target candidate effect (variation number 9, 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the advance effect according to the effect content, or the timer object candidate effect may not be assigned (variation numbers 13, 21).

  Further, in the table T5c, among the fluctuation numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12 and 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of five timer target candidate effects are allocated to the hit effect among the fluctuation numbers 7 and 8 In contrast to the above, up to four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects among the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only up to three timer target candidate effects are assigned for the variation number 14 Not. However, while variation targets 7 and 8 do not have timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) as the effect content of the variation effects, in the variation numbers 10 to 12, 1 as the effect content of the variation effects Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as effect contents of the fluctuation effect when the one timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) comes to appear. ing. Therefore, in the variation numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with that substantially one more advance notice effect is respectively assigned, and in the variation number 14, substantially two or more notice effects are It is synonymous with being assigned to each.

  Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the effect random number of "400" is substantially allocated to the notice number 4 and the effect random number of "600" is allocated to the notice number 5 Since it becomes synonymous with this, it can be said that it is allocated so that a lot of advance notice effects may appear most easily among the change numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect.

  In addition, in character reach when in the third processing situation, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action, special timer) until symbol variation is stopped ) Is supposed to come. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalization effect (special timer), and when conversational announcement is selected, it functions as a big hit effect by mission success, so timer object candidate effects When four or more appear, the notice effect (mission success or special timer) of the big hit decision will appear. Therefore, in the table T5c, the variation number at the time of losing is at most three (the total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the variation side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the advance notification side is three). Is not allowed to appear.

  Moreover, since one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalization effect (special timer), when the number of notices 5 is selected at the change number 8 or when it is the change numbers 10 and 12 When the number 4 is selected, when the number of notices 3 is selected at the change number 14, it is determined that the big hit determination effect (special timer) is to be executed. As described above, when the advance notice timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, the appearance ratio of the special timer described later is higher than that in the case where the advance notice timer effect is executed in the single timer mode. Not only winning a big hit, but also shifting to a high probability time-short state and having a sense of anticipation that a 16 round big hit game will be executed. In particular, when it is a double timer mode and mission presentation is executed, such a sense of expectation can be further enhanced. Therefore, it is effective to utilize the mission presentation with low expectation in the first place. Will be able to create a variety of staging situations.

  By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) appearing at the change number 10 is set to have a lower hit probability than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in) appearing at the change numbers 11 and 12 That is as described above. However, in the said table T5c referred to when being in the above-mentioned 3rd processing situation, with change number 10, "mission success (special display) is displayed, and it is as a production pattern stopped by a big hit symbol after that" In view of the fact that it is the one to be executed, the number and probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher than in the case of the variation numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed), Improves the enjoyment of the game when the mission success (special display) is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) with a relatively high degree of expectation, almost the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such character reach is set . However, among the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10, and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 The number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher in the case of the fluctuation number 20 per hit than in the case of the fluctuation number 18 (the number of predictions tends to be larger as the fluctuation number is higher for the jackpot expectation). Moreover, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than character reach.

  As will be described later, in SP reach when in the third processing status, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, role A action) until symbol variation is stopped , The cut-in B, and the feature B motion) can come. However, when a conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect by mission success, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmed advance notice effect appears. Therefore, in table T5c, up to five variable numbers corresponding to SP reach at the time of losing (the total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the fluctuation side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the notification side is five) Only timer target candidate effects are allowed to appear.

  FIG. 157 shows a fourth processing state in which a mode of double timer (NO in step S5506) and determination to not execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5532) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T5d referred in the process of step S5543 in the case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 157, since the table T5d is referred to when the advance announcement timer effect is executed, the fluctuation number 1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the advance timer appearance can not be executed. When 〜6 is acquired, the table T5d is not referred to. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17 correspond to the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) for causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect. , 21 are also referred to in the table T5b. Therefore, in the table T5d, effect random numbers are allocated to the change numbers 9, 13, 17 and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Further, since the table T5d is also referred to when the advance notice timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, at least two timer target candidate effects are selected so that the effect random numbers are separately selected for each variation number. Is allocated. However, it is not necessary to necessarily allocate two timer target candidate effects as the effect contents of advance notice effect for the fluctuation number where the timer object candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect contents of change effect, One timer target candidate effect (variation number 9, 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the advance effect according to the effect content, or the timer object candidate effect may not be assigned (variation numbers 13, 21).

  Also, similarly, in the table T5d, among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, up to four timer target candidate effects are allocated to the hit effect of the change numbers 7 and 8 However, up to three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variation numbers 10 to 12, and a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are achieved for the hit effects of the variation numbers 13 and 14. Is only allocated. However, while variation targets 7 and 8 do not have timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) as the effect content of variation effects, variation numbers 9 to 12 have 1 as the effect content of variation effects. Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as effect contents of the fluctuation effect when the one timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) comes to appear. It has become. Therefore, in the variation numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with substantially one or more preview effects being respectively assigned, and in the variation numbers 13 and 14, substantially two or more previews It has the same meaning as the effect is assigned to each.

  Then, for example, in the variation number 14, it becomes substantially the same as the effect random number of "1000" being assigned to the notice number 4; therefore, the variation numbers 7 to 7 corresponding to the character reach effect Among the fourteen, it can be said that it is allocated so that a large number of preliminary announcement effects are likely to appear.

  In the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, a relationship substantially the same as the relationship between the respective variation numbers in the character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  Besides, in the table T5d, distribution of effect random numbers is performed in substantially the same manner as the table T5c, but since this table is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the table referred to when the mission effect is not executed The upper limit number of occurrences (average number of occurrences) of the timer target candidate effect is smaller than T5c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of the notice timer type lottery (step S5505), it is decided whether to perform the notice timer effect in the mode of the single timer or the mode of the double timer in this way (step S5506) Furthermore, it is determined whether to perform the mission effect as a result of the first mission effect drawing (step S5504) (steps S5507, S5532). After determining the number of appearances of the effect (notice effect that can be the effect target of the noticing timer effect) (steps S5508, S5523, S5533, S5543), only the determined number is used as the timer target candidate effect, and any type of notice Do you want to make the stage appear, or you A determination process as to whether to effect target Ma effect (step S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  FIG. 158 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a first processing situation where it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is made) (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6a-1 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5508 (step S5509).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 158, in this table T6a-1 (step S5509: notice number 1), it is referred to when it is decided to execute the notice timer effect in the form of a single timer. Therefore, one notice effect determined to be executed as the timer object candidate effect is automatically set as an effect object of the notice timer effect (in FIG. It shows that it is executed as a production target). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5509: N number of notices), N as timer object candidate effects The advance notice effect is determined, and one of them is determined as an effect target of the advance notice timer effect.

  In addition, it is a case where it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects, and N-1 of them (one in the single mode, two in the double mode) ) When the following numbers of effects are to be the effects of the advance notice timer effect (steps S 5509, S 524, S 534, S 544), even if the same effect combination of N for the timer object candidate effect is selected It is desirable to make the jackpot expectation different depending on which one of the effects is determined as the advance notice timer effect. For example, a second rendering (for example, conversation announcement) that appears at a relatively early timing in one of the rendering patterns, and a second rendering (at, for example, the feature A) that appears at a relatively later timing in the one rendering pattern. If the operation is selected as the timer target candidate effect, the after effect (for example, the feature A operation) is more advanced than when the earlier effect (for example, conversation announcement) is selected as the effect target of the foreword effect timer. It is set such that the appearance ratio of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is higher when the timer effect is selected (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even when a change number for executing “conversation notice” or “cut-in A, B” is acquired as the effect content of the change effect, It is possible to decide "conversation notice" and "cut-in A, B" as the contents of presentation. However, as a result, when it is determined to cause the same effect to appear in both the effect content of the change effect and the effect content of the advance effect, the control for causing the same to separately appear as the effect content of the advance effect is not performed. A process of setting the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A, B) appearing as the effect content of the effect as the effect target of the advance notice timer effect is performed (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544).

  For example, in the example of the table T6a-1 (the advance notice number 1), when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect at the change numbers 10, 14, 18, 22, or "cut at the change numbers 11-14. When “In A” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect or when “Cut in B” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect at the change numbers 19 to 22, the effect contents of the change effect and the effect of the notice effect It will be decided to make the same rendition appear both in content and in content. However, in this case, control to separately appear as the effect content of the notice effect is not performed, and the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) appearing as the effect content of the fluctuation effect is set as the effect target of the notice timer effect. Processing is to be performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the specific effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) is determined to appear in both the effect contents of the change effect and the effect contents of the advance effect, it is separately provided as the effect contents of the advance effect. It is also possible to set the specific effect on the separately appearing side (the content of the effect of the advance effect) to be set as the effect target of the advance notice timer effect.

  In addition, since this table T6a-1 (the number of notices 1) is referred to when it is determined to execute the mission effect (display conversation notices), it is also shown in FIG. 148. As described above, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing "conversation notice" are acquired as the contents of the fluctuation effect, or "conversation notice" is selected as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect) In case (PTN1), a special indication (mission success) is displayed, and it is definitely suggested that the jackpot symbol appears.

  In this respect, in the fluctuation numbers 10, 14, 18, 22 at the time of executing "conversation announcement" as the contents of the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation numbers 8, 12, It is set so that the ratio which decides "conversation notice" as the contents of the notice effect is set lower than 16, 20. That is, as described above, when "conversation notice" is determined as the contents of the notice effect at the change numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, both the fluctuation side timer effect and the notice side timer effect target "conversation notice" In this way, when two timer effects target the same effect as described above, basically, a big hit is expected compared to the case where two timer effects have different effects as effect targets. It is because it sets so that degree may become low. As a result, it is possible to relatively reduce the appearance ratio of the special display (mission success) when both the fluctuation-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect target "conversation notice".

  The same is also true for the contents of effects of change effects other than such "conversation notice", for example, among the change numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach, the change numbers for which "cut-in B" is not executed as the effect contents of change effects Among the 15 and 16, the 150 variation numbers are assigned to the variation number 15 at the time of losing, whereas the 250 variation numbers are assigned to the variation number 16 at the time of hitting. On the other hand, out of the fluctuation numbers 19 and 20 for executing "cut-in B" as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect among the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach, 250 effect random numbers are in the fluctuation number 19 at the time of losing In contrast to the allocation, only 200 effect random numbers are allocated to the fluctuation number 20 at the time of hitting.

  That is, in this case, when “Cut in B” is to be the production target only by the fluctuation timer effect with fluctuation numbers 15 and 16, both the fluctuation timer effect and the announcement timer effect appear with fluctuation numbers 19 and 20. As compared with the case where both of these target "Cut in B", the appearance ratio of the big hit symbol comes to be high. As a result, in a situation where two timer effects are simultaneously displayed in a count, it works as an important effect element whether or not those timer effects reach the predetermined value with the same effect target, and during the count display It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, among fluctuation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach, at fluctuation numbers 8, 10, 12, and 14 during a hit, the period until the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern (during symbol fluctuation) In the special timer mode that targets the effects that appear after the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern, not the effects that appear in the game It is possible to decide to execute the advance notice timer effect. Although this special timer will be described later, in this embodiment, the special timer may not appear even if it is determined to generate the special timer in the process of step S5509, and the special timer is not executed. The mode of execution of the special timer including the presence or absence of the special timer will be determined in the process of step S5514 described later.

  Here, there is a case (for example, when it is started from the middle of the fluctuation display) that the big hit expectation is relatively high even if the total number of counts from the start of count display to the end is small. On the other hand, in the variable-side timer effect, if the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small, the expectation suggested in the timer effect is always lower than in the case where the count is small May be

  Although it will be described later, such a special timer is a thing that definitely suggests that a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, as well as a high probability time short game state or 16 round big hit when it appears It can be said that the game is more beneficial to the player than the timer effect for making other effects effective in that the rate at which the game is executed is relatively high. The percentage may include 100%.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the special display (mission success) appears in the mission effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer is higher than when the special display (mission success) does not appear. By performing the control, the sense of expectation when the special display (at the mission success time) appears is more suitably exhibited (steps S5509 and S5534). For example, in the table T6a-1 (the advance notice number 1), among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach that the special timer may appear, the variation side timer effect (mission success) for which the conversation announcement is targeted is appeared While 100 effect random numbers are assigned to the special timer for the fluctuation numbers 10 and 14 at the time of hitting, when the fluctuation side timer effect (mission success) for conversation announcement is targeted, the hit time does not appear Only 50 effect random numbers are assigned to the special timer in the change numbers 8 and 12 of.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the mission effect (displaying the conversation announcement) is performed even if the special display (mission success) does not appear (steps S5509 and S5534), the mission effect (conversation (conversation) By controlling the appearance ratio of the special timer to be higher than when the advance notice is not made) (steps S5524, S5544), a sense of expectation when a mission effect (display a talk advance notice) appears Is played more preferably.

  In addition, when the timer effect is performed in the double mode by the fluctuation-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer is greater than when the timer effect is performed in the double mode only by the notice-side timer effect. It is set to be low. In addition, even when the timer effect is performed in the form of a triple by one fluctuation side timer effect and two notice side timer effects, one of the advance side timer effects is targeted for the same effect as the fluctuation side timer effect In this case, the appearance ratio of the special timer is set to be lower than in the case where the same effect is not set as the effect of the advance timer and the variable timer.

  FIG. 159 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation where it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 b-1 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5523 (step S5524).

  As shown in FIG. 159, in this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach where the special timer may appear, variation numbers 10 and 14 are used. 50 effect random numbers are allocated, and 20 effect random numbers are allocated to the change numbers 8 and 12. As described above, when the mission effect (display the conversation notice) is not performed (table T6b-1), the special timer is performed compared to the time (mission of the conversation notice is generated) (table T6b-1). It is clear that the appearance rate of is set to be low.

  Further, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1) is referred to when the mission effect (display the conversation notice is not made), the conversation notice is made to appear as the effect contents of the fluctuation effect. The table T6b-1 (notice number 1) is also referred to when the change numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 corresponding to the loss change pattern (change pattern in which the mission can not be successful) is acquired. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), effect random numbers are allocated to the change numbers 9, 13, 17 and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Moreover, in the fluctuation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22, the fluctuation-side timer effect with "conversation notice" as the target of the fluctuation effect is displayed, so the notice effect When "conversation announcement" is selected as the presentation contents of the above, both the variable-side timer presentation and the announcement-side timer presentation are to be executed with "conversation announcement" as the presentation target. Therefore, in table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), when "conversation notice" is selected in change numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22 in other change numbers, " The effect random numbers are distributed so that the jackpot expectation degree is lower than when the "conversation notice" is selected.

  The same is also true for the contents of effects of change effects other than such "conversation notice", for example, also for "cut-in B" in which both the change timer effect and the advance timer effect can be the target in SP reach. Allocation is made in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned table T6a-1 (notice number 1).

  Also, similarly, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1) is also referred to when it is determined to execute the notice timer effect in the single timer mode, One advance notice effect determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effect is naturally set as an effect target of the advance notice timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5524: notice number N), N as timer object candidate effects The same is also true in that the advance notice effect is determined and one of them is determined as an effect target of the advance notice timer effect.

  In contrast to the timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5509 and S5524) when the advance notice side effect timer is performed in such a single mode, the timer target advance notice lottery when the advance side effect timer is performed in the double mode (step S5534, Also in S5544, when both the variation-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect target the same effect, a big hit compared to when the effect of the change-side timer effect and the notification-side timer effect are different Basically, the effect random numbers are distributed in the same manner, such as a point set to lower the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 160 shows a mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506), and in the fourth processing state where it is determined that the mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5532) is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of table T6d-2 referred when it is decided to set the number of notices to 2 as a result of performing the process of step S5543 (step S5544).

  As shown in FIG. 160, in this table T6d to 2f (step S5544: notice number 2), it is referred to when it is decided to execute the notice timer effect in the form of the double timer. Therefore, both of the two advance notice effects determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effects are naturally set as the effect targets of the advance notice timer effect, respectively. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (three or more) notice effects as the timer object candidate effects (step S5544: notice number N), N timer object candidate effects In addition to determining the advance notice effect, two of them will be determined as an effect target of the advance notice timer effect. Such processing is also executed in the timer target advance notice lottery in the other rendering situations.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 160, also in this table T6d to 2f, when both the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect target the same effect, the change-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect It is set so that the big hit expectation degree becomes low compared with the case where it makes the production which is different from the production target.

  In addition, when one of the two preliminary effects selected as the preliminary effect timer is the same target as the variable effect timer, one of the two preliminary effects selected as the special advance timer is the variable side. The selection ratio of the special timer is lower than in the case where it is not the same effect target as the effect timer.

  In particular, in the case of variation numbers 13, 14, 21 and 22, when both of the two preliminary effects selected as the preliminary effect timer are the same effect as the two variable effect timers appearing in one effect pattern The jackpot expectation is significantly lower.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of performing such timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544), which effect of the timer target candidate effect is to appear and the effect of the advance side timer effect When it is determined which object to use, a count display lottery is performed next as processing of step 510.

  In this count display lottery (step 510), at which timing in one rendering pattern (variation pattern) each rendering for which a determination to appear as a timer target candidate rendering has been made is respectively made to appear in the rendering target A determination is made as to from which timing within one rendering pattern (variation pattern) the notification-side timer effect to be directed to the count display is to be executed. In addition, in this determination, when the appearance timing of the effect to be the effect target of the notice-side timer effect is late, the big hit symbol (special display mode compared to when the appearance timing of the effect to be the effect target of the advance-side timer effect is early It is desirable to be performed so that the appearance rate of) is high.

  FIG. 161 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation where it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of count display lottery (step 510) performed when the change number equivalent to character reach is chosen.

For example, when variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG. 161, first, as an effect on the variation representation (rendering pattern) side,
・ Normal production period in which normal production is performed,
・ Normal reach production period, after the decoration pattern becomes reach mode under the background at the time of normal production,
-Each period such as a character reach production period in which the production is promoted by switching to a background different from that in the normal production, and a symbol stop period in which the decorative symbol is determined and stopped (big hit symbol, lost symbol) Is in a processing situation where it has been decided that it will appear sequentially within the 50 second fluctuation time (period in which symbol fluctuation is performed) (the lines of "fluctuation time" and "fluctuation PTN effect" in the same figure) reference).

  Also, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 14 is acquired, the variation-side timer effect is started according to the start of the symbol variation as the effect pattern, and this is displayed for 10 seconds and then "conversation notice" It is also determined that “Cut-in A” is made to appear after the predetermined time has elapsed and the variable timer effect is started again and displayed for 10 seconds.

  As described above, even if it is one variation pattern (variation number), the presentation pattern is not limited to this, and the variation side timer presentation is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, and this is displayed over 5 seconds It is also possible to select another effect pattern that causes the "conversation notice" to appear after the play. Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, selection of such a production | presentation pattern is already performed before the lottery (each process shown by FIG. 149) regarding the said advance presentation production.

  Then, in the count display lottery (step 510), it is determined in the timer target advance lottery (here, step S5524) that such effect periods sequentially appear and the effect contents on the fluctuation side have already been determined. A determination is made as to at what timing each of the rendering target of the previewing-side rendering timer and the preview-side rendering timer for counting display to the rendering target appear. In addition to the timer target candidate effects to be rendered by the preview side effect timer in the timer target advance lottery, the timer target candidate effects not to be rendered when the timer target candidates effect not to be rendered is further determined. The appearance timing is also determined by the count display lottery (step 510).

  For example, in the case where "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether to perform the conversation announcement and the announcement-side timer effect in the manner described above. In this embodiment, among conversation notices 1 to 4 in the figure, the mode of conversation notice 1 is the mode with the lowest big hit expectation degree, and is selected so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher as the number becomes larger. The probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of conversation notices 1 to 4 is selected based on the hit or fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14) of the big hit, etc. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, at this time, when the change numbers 9, 10, 13, 14 where conversation announcement appears as the effect contents of the change effect are acquired, also in the timer object advance notice lottery (here, step S5524) If "conversation notice" is determined as the presentation content, the form of the conversation notice 1 is selected. And in this case, separately from the conversation announcement performed as the production content of the fluctuation production, the conversation announcement is not made to appear as the production content of the fluctuation production, and the count display of the timer effect is directed to the conversation announcement performed as the production content of the fluctuation production. The control to be performed will be executed (a form of the conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to character reach are acquired, the timer advance notice lottery (here, step S5524) indicates that “pending” as the effect content of the above-described advance effect If "change" is determined, it is determined in which of the hold changes 1 to 5 the hold change and the advance notice timer effect are respectively executed, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect contents of the advance effect. If it is, it is determined in which of the cut-ins A1 to 3 whether the cut-in A and the advance notice timer effect are to be executed, and "A character action A" is determined as the effect contents of the advance effect. If yes, it is determined in which mode of the feature A actions 1 to 4 to execute the feature A action and the advance notice side timer effect, respectively, If Ma "is determined so that the determining whether to perform the announcement side timer effect in any aspect of special timers 1 and 2.

  In this embodiment, the smallest number of modes is the largest hit expectation in any of the effect selection of the hold changes 1 to 5, the cut-in A effects 1 to 3, and the feature A operations 1 to 4 in the figure. The selection probability is set such that the jackpot expectation increases as the number increases. On the other hand, each of the special timers 1 and 2 is an effect indicating that the big hit symbol (special display mode) always appears.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 161, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, three possible timings of the appearance of the timer effect on the notice side can be obtained while one effect pattern (here, character reach) is performed. Although prepared (at the start of fluctuation, a little before the appearance timing of the notice E2, a little before the appearance timing of the notice F), their appearance timing is a plurality of timer target notices (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in It is in the form of being used in common with A, character A operation, and special timer). Then, at such a plurality of appearance timings (at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of notice E2, and a little before the appearance timing of notice F), a plurality of display displays are prepared as the total number of count display when the advance notice timer effect appears 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, etc.), and even if any of those count display total numbers are displayed, it is predicted which effect the target of the effect is. It is designed to be difficult.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, 10 seconds at a timing that arrives a little before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings. The notice-side timer effect with a total display count of either 20 seconds or 30 seconds can appear. However, it is difficult to predict which mode of conversation notice 3 and hold change 3 is being executed only by the effect pattern of character reach when the notice side timer effect having a count display total number of 10 seconds appears Even when the notice-side timer effect with a total display count of 20 seconds has appeared, any aspect of hold change 4 and cut-in A2 is executed only in the effect pattern of Character Reach. It is difficult to predict the

  In this point, when the notice timer effect with a total display count of 30 seconds appears at a timing that comes a little before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings, only the production pattern of the character reach is displayed. When viewed, only the aspect of the feature A action 2 can be performed. However, looking at the effect pattern of SP reach described later (see FIG. 162), the aspect of the bonus item A operation 2 can be executed at the same timing from the start of fluctuation, so a little bit of the appearance timing of the notice E2. Even if the notice timer effect with a total display count of 30 seconds appears at the timing before it arrives, the notice timer effect in any mode, including whether it is character reach or SP reach It is considered difficult to predict what will be done.

  According to such a configuration, it remains unclear whether which rendering is the target of rendering when the preview-side timer rendering appears (the jackpot expectation varies depending on the type of the rendering to be rendered). Since it is possible, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment until the count display of the timer effect becomes a specific numerical value (here, 0). In this embodiment, basically, (if there is no contradiction with the mission effect etc.), the presentation object is the conversation notice when the advance notice timer effect with the same count display total number appears at the same timing. When the jackpot expectation is lower at the moment, the jackpot expectation is set to be gradually higher in the order of the holding change, the cut-in A, the character A operation, the cut-in B, and the character B operation.

  Further, according to the above configuration, when the advance notice timer effect appears, a plurality of count display total numbers (big hit expectation differs depending on the length of seconds) is prepared at any appearance timing. When the advance notice timer effect appears, it becomes possible to have an interest as to which count display total number is, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest when the advance timer effect appears. .

  In this embodiment, even if it is the notice-side timer effect appearing at any timing, the effect target is considered to be difficult to predict at the time of appearance, but one effect target for the total number of displayed counts An aspect may also be included in which an effect target is set to be predictable without being associated (for example, a special timer). Further, an appearance timing in which only one count display total number may appear may be included as an appearance timing in which the advance notice side timer effect may appear.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: notice number 1), in the case where the same effect as the variable-side timer effect and the advance-side timer effect is the target for the sake of explanation, the change is in the figure. In the side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the count display is performed for the same number of seconds, or it is described as if the count display is ended at the same timing. However, as described above, in fact, even when the same effect (for example, conversation announcement) is set as the target of the variable timer effect and the advance timer effect, the end timing of each count display is made different. The other count display is made to continue while one of the fluctuation-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect comes to an end by reaching a specific numerical value (0 in this case) first.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (Charareach: notice number 1), it is described as if the count display of the timer effect is made in second units, but “second Not limited to Therefore, for example, the time required for the number change of the count display may be different between the fluctuation side timer effect and the advance side timer effect, or the time required for the change of each number in the count display appearing in the fluctuation side timer effect is constant It does not have to be.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (Charareach: the number of notices 1), when “special timer” is determined as the contents of the above notice effect, the notice timer side effect in any of the special timers 1 and 2 It is decided to decide what to do. That is, in this case, after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (character reach), when 20 seconds pass (during the big hit game execution period), the count display is a specific numerical value (here 0). It will reach. After this, a presentation that suggests that it is a type that is advantageous to the player as a type of big hit (for example, a hit type to make transition to a high probability time short state, a hit type to be played 16 rounds of big hit games, etc. However, such an aspect of the special timer is set in step S5514, which will be described later.

  In this embodiment, which one of the modes of special timers 1 and 2 is to be selected is determined in the count display lottery (step S5511). However, the process according to this determination will be described later. It may be set in step S5514.

  In addition, when it is not the timing when the fluctuation display according to the suspension information is started, but when the count display is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation display was started, the timer prefetching effect described later is not executed. Also, an aspect (for example, in preparation for timer) may be made to appear (for example, to appear with a predetermined probability) in a timer prefetching effect described later over a predetermined time until the count display is started.

  FIG. 162 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation where it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of count display lottery (step 510) performed when the change number equivalent to SP reach is chosen.

For example, when the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG. 162, first, as an effect on the variation effect (rendering pattern) side,
・ Normal production period in which normal production is performed,
・ Normal reach production period, after the decoration pattern becomes reach mode under the background at the time of normal production,
・ A character reach production period, in which the background is switched to a background different from that for normal production
・ The decoration pattern is not fixed and stopped within the character reach production period, and the SP reach production period that appears in the form of further progress and ・ ・ ・ ・ The decoration design is stopped so that the hit of the big hit is shown. It is determined that each period, such as the stopped symbol stop period, appears sequentially within the fluctuation time of 90 seconds (period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed) (the “variation time” in the figure, See the line "Variation PTN production").

  Also, in this processing situation, for example, when the fluctuation number 22 is acquired, the fluctuation-side timer effect is started according to the start of the symbol fluctuation as the effect pattern, and this is displayed for 10 seconds and then "conversation notice" It is also determined that “Cut-in B” appears after the predetermined time has elapsed and the variable-side timer effect is started again and displayed for 10 seconds.

  Also in this example (SP reach: notice number 1), as in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: notice number 1), even if it is one variation pattern (variation number), about the effect pattern The present invention is not limited to this, and another effect pattern may be selected such that "conversation notice" appears after a variable side timer effect is started for a predetermined time after a predetermined time from the start of symbol change and this is displayed for 5 seconds ing.

  Then, in this example (SP reach: the number of notices 1), for example, in the case where "conversation notice" is determined as the contents of the above-mentioned notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), As shown in FIG. 162, it is determined in which of the conversation notices 1 to 6 the conversation notice and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed. In this embodiment, of the notices 1 to 6 in the figure, the form of notice 1 of the conversation is the lowest hit expecting mode, and is selected so that the hit probability increases as the number increases. The probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of conversation notices 1 to 6 will be selected based on the hit of the big hit or the variation pattern (variation numbers 15 to 22), etc. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, in the same manner, when the variation numbers 17, 18, 21 and 22 where the conversation announcement appears as the effect contents of the variation presentation are acquired, the above-mentioned announcement also in the timer target announcement lottery (here, step S5524). If "conversation notice" is determined as the contents of the effect, the mode of the talk notice 1 is selected. And in this case, separately from the conversation announcement performed as the production content of the fluctuation production, the conversation announcement is not made to appear as the production content of the fluctuation production, and the count display of the timer effect is directed to the conversation announcement performed as the production content of the fluctuation production. The control to be performed will be executed (a form of the conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 162, when the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to character reach are acquired, the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524) is performed as “pending contents of the above notice effect. If "change" is determined, it is determined in which of the hold changes 1 to 7 in which manner the hold change and the advance notice timer effect are to be executed, respectively, and the "cut-in A" is determined as the effect contents of the advance effect. If it is, it is determined which of cut-ins A1 to 5 is to be used to execute the cut-in A and the advance notice timer effect respectively, and "character item A action" is determined as the effect contents of the advance effect. If it is determined that the feature A action and the advance notice timer effect are to be executed in any of the action A actions 1 to 4, it is determined that If "in B" is determined, it is determined which of cut-ins B1 to 5 in which the cut-in B and the advance notice timer effect are to be executed, respectively, and the "notice B operation" as the effect contents of the advance effect. If "" is determined, it is determined in which mode of the accessory B operations 1 to 4 whether the accessory B operation and the advance notice timer effect are to be executed.

  In addition, also in the example of this SP reach, any effect selection of retention changes 1 to 7 in the figure, cut in A1 to 5, character A operation 1 to 4, cut in B1 to 5, character B operation 1 to 4 Also in the above, the smallest number of modes is the mode with the lowest big hit expectation degree, and the selection probability is set such that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher as the number becomes larger.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 162, six timings at which the advance notice timer effect can appear are prepared while one effect pattern (here, SP reach) is performed (at the start of fluctuation, the notice E2) Slightly before the appearance timing of S, slightly before the appearance timing of notice F, a little before the end of the normal reach production period, within the character reach production period, the timing when the SP reach production period is started) The point where it is difficult to predict which effect is the effect target when the effect appears is the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, an aspect (for example, a timer of 40 seconds for cut-in B) set to be able to predict a rendering target without associating only one rendering target with the total number of count display The appearance timing at which the side timer effect can appear includes an appearance timing in which only one count display total number appears (for example, 10 seconds at the timing when the SP reach effect period is started).

  As described above, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the advance notice effect determined by the timer target advance notice lottery, the appearance time of the notice timer effect, and the like are determined. In this respect, when the number of notice effects determined in the timer target notice lottery is two or more, in addition to the effect to be the effect target of the advance side timer effect, the appearance time of the effect not to be the effect target of the advance timer function. Etc. are also decided together. In addition, when the advance notice timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, at what timing each of the two advance notice timer effects and the effects to be produced by those advance effects are displayed (two advance timer effects (Including whether or not to execute the count display of when overlapping) may be further determined.

  However, in this count display lottery (step S5510), the number of notice effects determined by the timer target notice lottery, whether or not it is a double timer mode, and mission effect (display conversation notice) are executed. It is desirable that the advance notice effect determined by the timer target advance notice lottery, the appearance time of the advance notice timer effect, and the like are determined in different modes according to the processing situation such as whether or not. For example, in a processing situation in which a mission effect (to make a speech advance notice appear) is executed, a conversational advance appears at a relatively early stage after the fluctuation is started, and a dramatic rise is lacking. It is desirable to make it easy to select the speech announcements that appear at the late stage. Further, in the double timer mode, two timer effects are executed when a situation in which each count display is simultaneously progressed appears, as compared with the case where each count display does not overlap within one effect pattern. The selection rate is higher in the case where the situation where each count display simultaneously progresses appears than when the situation where each count display progresses simultaneously does not appear because It is desirable to do. In addition, when the number of the notice effects determined by the timer target notice lottery is two or more, the appearance times of the notice effects are determined so that the notice effects do not appear at the same time.

  In addition, the timing which advance side timer production may appear (for example, at the time of fluctuation start, a little before the appearance timing of the notice E2, a little before the appearance timing of the notice F, a little before the end of the normal reach production period, a character reach production period Among them, for the timing when the SP reach effect period starts), each advance notice effect (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action, cut-in B, feature B action) can be performed during the period It is desirable to set. That is, in this case, even if the advance notice effect does not appear at a specific timing, the advance notice timer effect is started, or even if the advance notice timer effect is not started at a specific timing, the advance notice effect is performed. It can be expected that the decline in gaming interest will be suppressed. In addition, since the advance notice effect appears at a specific timing, and further an effect situation in which the advance notice timer effect is started may occur, it is also expected to improve the game interest. In this case, when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change (at a specific timing), the preliminary effect is not performed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the advance notification side timer effect is started is higher than that at the time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the count display lottery (step S5510) is performed in this way, as the process of step S5511, the mode of the advance notice side timer effect determined by the count display lottery becomes the special timer. Determine if it is possible.

  That is, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, separately from timer target candidate effects (notice effects that can be effects of the notice-side timer effect), non-target Non-target notices E1, E2, E3 and a non-target notice F can be executed as the notice effect (the notice effect that can not be the target of the notice on the notice side timer effect). Among them, the non-target notice E2 is set so that the jackpot expectation degree is lower than the non-target notice F in the situation where the count display of the notice-side timer effect is not carried out, whereas In the situation where the count display of is performed, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than the non-target notice F.

  In such a configuration, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is performed while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice F (second effect) is performed while the count display is not performed. Counting when non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being performed, in a relationship where the expectation that the big hit symbol (specific symbol aspect) appears is lower than when the big hit symbol (specific symbol aspect) appears Timer effect on the notice side (count effect so that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol (specific symbol form) appears is higher than when non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the display is being performed Will be enabled. Therefore, as described above, the notice-side timer effect (counting non-target notice E2 (in which the count display is executed) is performed in which count display is performed in a manner of significantly increasing the degree of expectation when non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears. The timer effect) in which the first effect is started and ended is referred to as a "special timer".

  That is, in this case, while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect having a lower degree of expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect), while the count display While being performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) comes to function as an effect having a higher degree of expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect). Therefore, although it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) which is not a target of a presentation on the notice-side timer effect (count effect display) and is not originally related, the non-target notice E2 (No. It becomes possible to have an interest in whether or not one effect appears, thereby maintaining the game interest during the period until the count display is digested and a predetermined effect (timer object candidate effect) is performed. Will be expected to

  In addition, when the count display is started with the total count with a small total number of the advance side timer effects, the big hit expectation is set to be lower than when the count display is started with the total number with a large number of forward side timer effects. By realizing the control related to such a special timer, even when the count display is started with the total number with a small count on the advance notice side timer effect, non-target notice E2 while the count display is being executed. Can be made to be aware of the possibility of appearance of the game, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In this sense, when the non-target notice E2 appears while the count display is being executed, the premiere mode of the big hit determination in the effect (the conversation notice, the cut-in, the feature operation, etc.) to be the target of the subsequent timer effect. It is desirable to control so that the rate of appearance of. The percentage may include 100%.

  In this embodiment, non-target notices E1 to E3 are executed as so-called step effects, and non-target notices E2 (first effect) are conditions that non-target notices E1 have appeared. It will be possible to appear in In addition, the non-target notice E3 is allowed to appear on the condition that the non-target notices E1 and E2 appear respectively, and in this embodiment, the jackpot symbol appears whenever the non-target notice E3 appears. It is like that. According to such a configuration, if the non-target notice E1 (specific effect) appears while the count display of the advance notice timer effect is performed, the user is interested in whether the non-target notice E2 appears. , And it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment during the count digestion period.

  However, the non-target notices E1 to E3 may not necessarily be executed as a so-called step effect, and the non-target notices E1 to E3 may not be executed to realize the above-described relation between the non-target notice E2 and the non-target notice F. The target notices E1 and E3 may not necessarily be prepared. Moreover, although it becomes in order to make non-target notice F appear after non-target notice E2 (1st production) appears, it is not restricted to this, for example, after non-target notice F (second production) appears The target notice E2 (first effect) may appear. The point is that the non-target notice E2 may appear first among all the notice effects, or may appear last among all the notice effects. May be set appropriately. In addition, the non-target notice E2 may be an image related (suggested) to the type of reach effect to be executed in the variable display.

  Moreover, when not realizing non-target notice E2 as a so-called step effect, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 be performed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of jackpot expectation. At this time, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the mode with the highest hit probability, the big hit expectation may be higher than the non-target notice F even if the count display is not performed. . However, the big hit expectation degree (expected degree including all aspects) which can be expected at the appearance of the non-target notice E2 in the situation where the count display is not performed is compared with the big hit expectation degree which can be expected at the appearance of the non-target notice F. , It is required that the jackpot expectation degree is higher at the appearance of the non-target notice F.

  In this respect, when the non-target notice E2 is made to appear in the situation where the count display is performed (in the case of a special timer), the non-target notice E2 appears in any of a plurality of modes including a mode having a low hit probability. It is desirable to make the jackpot expectation higher than the non-target notice F even if any of the modes appears. That is, in this case, although a non-target notice E2 is executed in a mode with a low level of jackpot expectation, a presentation situation in which the level of jackpot expectation becomes dramatically higher comes to be created. Even if there is a momentary disapproval due to the appearance, it is expected that the game interest will be improved in a surprise manner by confirming that the count display is being executed. In this sense, the non-target notice E2 can be executed in such a manner that the non-target notice E2 can be executed in the low-hit expectation mode even in the situation of such special timer, and the non-target notice E2 in any mode including the low aspect. It is desirable to make the jackpot symbols appear with the same degree of expectation even if (1) is executed (whether or not other preview effects have occurred). The expectation may include 100%. However, even in this case, in the case where the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is performed, it is desirable to set so that the high expectation aspect among the plurality of aspects is likely to appear.

  Also, when performing count display across non-target notice E2, for example, the same number (for example, for example, regardless of whether the count display starts with different count total numbers (for example, "10", "5") It is desirable to control so that non-target notice E2 appears when it becomes "1". At this time, of the candidates (eg, “20”, “10”, “5”) as the total count appearing at the start of the count display, less than half of the candidates (eg, “5”) having the smallest total count. It is desirable to control the non-target notice E2 to appear when it is a number (a number less than 2.5). As described above, by making the non-target notice E2 not appear until the last moment the count display finishes being digested, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment in the period until the count display finishes being digested.

  Note that non-target notices F may also be made executable in any of a plurality of modes having different levels of big hit expectation, but in the special timer situation, the non-target notices F have the highest degree of big hit expectation. Even if it appears in the embodiment, it is required to set the non-targeted preview F so as not to have a higher jackpot expectation than the non-targeted preview E2 (for example, the embodiment with the lowest degree of big hit expectation).

  Further, the non-target notice E2 may be allowed to appear at any of a plurality of timings from the time when the variable display is started. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears at the same count total number at the same timing, the non-target notice E2 comes to cross and the non-target show comes to occur, and the game display when the count display is executed It will be expected to be maintained.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, regarding the variable-side timer effect, the non-target notice E2 appears in the execution period of the count display among the candidates selectable as the execution mode (rendering pattern) It does not include such an aspect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, if it is determined in the process of step S5511 that the mode of the advance announcement side timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) can be a special timer, step S5512 If it is determined that the first timer non-targeted advance notice lottery as the process of and that the mode of the advance notice timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) is not the one that can be a special timer, the process of step S5525 As a second timer non-targeted notice lottery will be performed.

  In the case where it is determined that the timer can be a special timer, for example, in the examples shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, an effect mode (for example, FIG. It is a case where the conversation notices 2 and 3 shown in 161, hold changes 2 to 4, cut-ins A1 and 2, cut-offs A1 and 2, etc. are selected, and it is an effect mode that can be a special timer Or is classified in advance.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the table T7a referred to in the first timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512), and FIG. 164 is referred to in the second timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525) It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b.

  As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the timer non-target notice lottery (steps S5512, S5525) can not be the target of the notice timer effect based on the result of the big hit, the variation pattern (variation number), etc. A determination process is performed as to which of the non-target effects E1 to E3 and F provided as the effects is to be performed.

  Among them, in the table T7a (first timer non-targeted notice lottery) referred to at the special timer, the notice E2 is compared with the table T7b (second timer non-targeted notice lottery) referred to when not the special timer. The big hit expectation when the mode to execute (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected is significantly high. More specifically, when the mode (PTNs 3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the mode (PTNs 5, 6) for executing the notice F is selected. ing.

  On the other hand, in the table T7b (second timer non-targeted notice lottery) referred to when not special timer, the notice F is executed when the mode (PTN 3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. The big hit expectation is lower than when the aspect (PTN5, 6) is selected.

  In this embodiment, comparing the table T7a referred to in the special timer with the table T7b referred to in the non-special timer, the mode (PTNs 3, 4 and 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. There is a change in the distribution of the production random numbers, and there is a change in the big hit expectation, but when the mode (PTN5, 6) to execute the notice F is selected, there is no change in the big hit expectation but also the distribution of the production random changes It is not the same.

  When it is determined in this way that the timer non-target notice lottery (the first timer non-target notice lottery, the second timer non-target notice lottery) is performed and which of the non-target notices is to be executed, step S5513 It is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the above-mentioned special timer as the process of (1).

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in a situation where reach effect (character reach) of a specific type is selected, the timer on the notification side is determined based on the result (big hit, fluctuation pattern, etc.) of big hit determination. It is possible to execute control to start the effect (count effect display) and continue the count display even after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (effect display). That is, in this case, since the count display is continued even after the effect pattern (effect display) according to the result of the big hit determination is finished and not displayed, the special symbol from the remaining time of the count display, etc. It becomes difficult to predict the fluctuation time (type of reach) of the symbol, and for example, the effect that the count display started during the symbol change is involved in the effect in the big hit gaming state after the symbol stop is realized It will be possible to make it more interesting for the subsequent stage of the development, such as being possible.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, first, after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the big hit game start interval period and the big hit game after the symbol is decided and stopped) In period 1), the first special effect in which the ratio of winning to the type to shift to high probability time short game state is high when appearing, or the number of rounds (16 rounds) where the expected value of the amount obtainable as a prize is large It is possible to execute a second special effect in which the ratio to be executed is high. Note that these percentages may include 100%. And, the notice side timer effect which targets the effect started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears is started from before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears and its count The control is continuously performed even after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears.

  That is, in this case, the count display of the notice timer effect which is started before the big hit symbol (special display mode) is not ended when the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, and the big hit symbol (special display mode) Even after the appearance of the character, the first special effect or the second special effect appears when the specific value (here, 0) is reached after being continuously executed. Therefore, when such a special timer appears, it is a thing which definitely suggests that a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, as well as a high probability time short game state or 16 round big hit game when it appears Since the rate at which is executed is relatively high, it is possible to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game.

  However, in order to realize such a special timer, first of all, not only that the big hit has been won by the big hit determination, but also the type that causes the big hit to generate a short game state at high probability, 16 round big hit games Control to cause the special timer to appear with a higher execution probability than when it is determined that the specific type is not the specific type. Desired.

  Therefore, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when execution of the above-mentioned special timer is determined in the process of step S5513, next execution of whether or not the special timer is made to appear as the process of step S5514 It is decided to determine the execution mode of the special timer, including the presence or absence.

  For example, in the process of step S5514, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a specific type (a type for generating a high probability time short game state or a type for generating a 16 round big hit game). And as a result, when the big hit is not a specific type, it is decided that the special timer is not made to appear with a predetermined probability, and when the special timer appears by this amount of thinning, the expectation that the big hit is the specific type is increased. Will be able to The expectation may be 100%. In addition, when it is determined that the special timer is not made to appear, other notice effects (timer object candidate effect effects, non-target notices) or the notice side timer effect may be made to appear instead of the special timer.

  In this embodiment, the type of the big hit is determined in the processing of step S5514 after the decision to execute the special timer in the timer target advance notice lottery has been made once, and the special timer is executed based on the result. In the process of step S5514, a special timer is executed by performing a timer target advance notice lottery based on the type of the big hit as well as the hit of the big hit It may not be determined again whether or not.

  In addition, for the first special effect or the second special effect of the big hit symbol (special display mode) appeared (for example, the start interval period and the big hit game period of the big hit game after the symbol is decided and stopped), the big hit is It may be performed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, which are special types. That is, in this case, when the special timer appears, when the count display reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0), the first special effect or the second special effect is executed in a high expectation mode among a plurality of modes. It will be.

  Also, in this embodiment, for the effects (first special effect or second special effect) after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, a predetermined time has elapsed since the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears In the example shown in FIG. 161, 20 seconds have elapsed, but a plurality of timings (for example, 15 seconds have elapsed) from the appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) It may be made to appear at a timing and a second timing when 30 seconds have elapsed. That is, in this case, as the special timer, the first aspect and the big hit symbol that reach a specific numerical value (here 0) when 15 seconds have passed (or a little before that) since the big hit symbol (special display feature) appears When 30 seconds have passed since (the special display mode) appears (or a little before that), one of the second mode which reaches the specific numerical value (here, 0) is selected to appear.

  In this case, it is set so that the ratio at which the big hit of the special type is obtained is higher when the effect appears at the second timing than when the effect appears at the first timing, and the big hit is a specific type. Sometimes, if the special timer is executed so as to be higher in the second mode than in the first mode, the count display after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears is continued until It will be possible to add an additional interest. Note that these percentages may include 100%. By the way, when the rendition does not appear at any of the first timing and the second timing, the ratio at which the big hit of the special type is obtained is set lower than when the rendition appears at the first timing. .

  In addition, for the special timer, in the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, it is displayed as "timer in preparation" and displayed as "timer in preparation" The count display may be started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears as it is. That is, during the big hit game, since the time required for the digestion of each round game varies according to the game progress, the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears When the count display is started, it is difficult to set the count display of the special timer to reach a predetermined value during a specific round game, and to set to start the effect to be the effect target. In this respect, if the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, the state of "timer preparing" is maintained until a specific round game in the jackpot game is started. Then, by starting the count display in accordance with the start of the specific round game, it is possible that the count display reaches a predetermined value during the specific round game and the effect to be rendered is executed It will be possible to set to. At this time, after the appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) until the count display is started, display such as "during timer preparation" may not be performed at all.

  In addition, when counting display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in this way, it is different even during the execution period of the variable display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears The count display of the advance notice side timer effect may be started. As for the other advance notice side timer effect, the counter display may finish being digested before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, and the effect to be the effect target may appear, or the big hit symbol ( After the appearance of the special display mode), the count display may finish being digested and an effect to be an effect may appear (double special timer).

  It should be noted that different effect contents appear between the effect in the variable display and the effect in the big hit game, and usually the effect (for example, the opening effect etc.) at the time of effect switching different from any effect is executed between them It is often done. In this point, within the switching period in which the effect at the time of such effect switching is executed, the timer display is set such that the count display does not reach a predetermined value, and the count display is not displayed within the switching period. It is desirable for the player to recognize that the two effects (here, the effect in the variable display and the effect in the big hit game) are not connected to each other. However, in this case, even when the count display of the timer effect is not displayed, the count display is digested only for the elapsed time, and when the count display is displayed again, it is not displayed. It is desirable to control so as to be a value smaller than the numerical value of (it is not a countdown, but a large value when counting up).

  If the execution mode of the special timer is determined in this way (step S5514), or if the execution of the special timer is not determined (NO in step S5513), the above-mentioned timer target advance lottery or count is processed as the process of step S5515 next. After the advance notice effect determined by the display lottery or the like is set in a predetermined storage area, the process for the advance notice lottery is ended. As a result, drawing data and the like corresponding to the effects determined in the preliminary lottery are created, and control is performed to start at the timing when each effect should be made to appear in the process of changing the effect symbols.

  On the other hand, after the second mission effect drawing (step S5551) in the case where it is determined that the advance side timer effect has not been won (NO in step S5503), various types of lottery relating to the advance timer side effect (informing side Timer target candidate effects (notices) according to the contents (table) according to whether it is decided to perform a mission effect as a result of the second mission effect drawing without performing the timer type lottery or single lottery etc.) (step S5552) An effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564) is performed for the advance notice effect that can be the effect target of the side timer effect.

More specifically, one of the following processes will be performed.
In the fifth processing state where it is determined that the advance effect timer effect is not performed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display the conversation advance notification) is determined (YES in step S5552) First, based on the notice number determination table referred to in the fifth processing situation, the timer target candidate effect of the number of the above during the execution of one effect pattern as the effect contents of the advance effect A determination process is performed as to whether or not to appear (step S5553). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of preview effect to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5554).

In the sixth processing state in which it is determined that the advance presentation timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (display the conversation advance announcement) is not executed (NO in step S5552) First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the sixth processing situation, during the execution of one effect pattern, the number of the timer target candidate effects described above is used as the effect contents of the advance effect. A determination process is performed as to whether or not to appear (step S5563). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of preview effect to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5564).

  Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 153, even in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), the mission effect (display conversation announcement) is executed. The upper limit number of occurrences (average number of occurrences) of timer target candidate effects is increased when the effect is determined, as compared with the case where it is not determined to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement). I am trying to control it.

  FIG. 165 shows the fifth processing state in which determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5552). Is a diagram showing an example of a table T5e which is referred to in the process of step S5553 in the case of FIG. Further, FIG. 166 shows that the sixth effect is that determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5f referred in the process of step S5563 when it exists in a processing condition.

  First, as shown in FIG. 165, since the table T5e is referred to when the mission effect is executed, there is a lost change pattern (a mission success can not be made to cause a conversation notice to appear as an effect content of the change effect When the change numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 corresponding to the change pattern) are acquired, the table T5e is not referred to. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, since the table T5f is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, there is a lost change pattern (a mission success can be made to cause a conversation notice to appear as an effect content of the change effect The table T5f is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 corresponding to (non-variation patterns) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T5f, effect random numbers are allocated to the change numbers 9, 13, 17 and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Table T5e and Table T5f are both referred to when the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice timer effect is not executed are referred to, and in these processing situations, the effect of the advance notice timer effect is provided. It is not essential to select one of the timer target candidate effects that can be a target. Therefore, in each of the tables T5e and T5f, effect random numbers are allocated separately for each change number so that the timer target candidate effects need not be selected (notice number 0).

  In addition, among the contents (character reach and SP reach) of the same reach effect in the table T5e and the table T5f, the fluctuation number where the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the fluctuation effect The point at which a larger number of timer target candidate effects are selected as compared to the variation numbers in which timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) do not appear as the effect content of the effect is higher, and With the change number 7 that is reach, it is possible that only up to three timer target candidate effects can be made appear, and with the change number 15 that is SP reach at the time of the loss, only up to five timer target candidate effects can appear The points that are not included are the same as the above-described table T5a and the like.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice timer effect is not executed are thus generated, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the advance effect After the determination process (steps S5553 and S5563) is performed, the determination process (steps S5554 and S5564) is performed as to which type of preview effect to appear as the timer target candidate effect by the determined number. . However, if it is determined that none of the timer target candidate effects are made to appear as a result of the notice number determination process (steps S5553 and S5563) (number of notices 0), the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564) Regardless of the change number, one processing result in which none of the timer target candidate effects are selected is selected.

  FIG. 167 shows the fifth processing state in which determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 e-1 referred when the notice number is determined to be 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5553 (step S5554). In FIG. 168, the fifth effect is that determination to execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (YES in step S5552) is made without executing the advance notice timer effect (NO in step S5503). FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a table T6e-2 that is referred to when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 in the process status (step S5554).

  Further, FIG. 169 shows that the sixth effect is that determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6f-1 referred when it is determined that a notice number shall be 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5563 in a processing condition (step S5564). Further, FIG. 170 shows that the sixth effect is that determination is made not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6 f-2 referred to when it is determined that a notice number shall be 2 as a result of performing the process of step S5563 in a processing condition (step S5564).

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f, which are referred to when in the fifth and sixth processing states, are determined not to execute the notice-side timer effect. Since it is referred to, none of the N advance notice effects determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effects are set as the show objects of the advance notice timer effect, and all of them are normal. It will be carried out as an aspect of advance production (in the figure, it has shown that x mark is performed as an aspect of usual advance production).

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, in the tables T6e and T6f, which are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states, the same effects are produced by the variable timer effect and the advance timer effect. Since it does not target, when the fluctuation number 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern which makes the conversation announcement appear as the production contents of fluctuation production, execution is executed A presentation random number is assigned to each of the variable numbers so that the conversation announcement is not selected as the advance announcement to be made. Similarly, in the tables T6e and T6f, variation numbers 11 to 14 and 19 to corresponding to the lost variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission can not be successful) for causing the cut-ins A and B to appear as the rendering content of the variation effects. When 22 is acquired, effect random numbers are allocated separately for each change number so that cut-ins A and B are not selected as the advance effect to be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states are referred to when the advance notice timer effect is not executed. From this, among the notice effects to be selected, the effect (here, the special timer) on the premise of performing the notice timer effect on the notice side is not included.

  In addition, in the table T6e referred to when in the fifth processing state, since it is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (display conversation announcement), FIG. As shown in addition, when the change numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing "conversation notice" are acquired as the contents of the change effect, or as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect), "conversation notice" When “is selected (PTN1), the special display (mission success) is displayed, and the point that it is definitely suggested that the jackpot symbol appears is the same as the case of the above-mentioned table 6a.

  In addition, since the table T6f referred to when in the sixth processing situation is referred to when the mission effect (display the conversation advance notice) is not executed, the conversation advance notice appears as the effect content of the change effect The above-mentioned table 6a is that the presentation random numbers are allocated separately for each notice number for the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, 21 corresponding to the lost fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission can not be successful). Is the same as in

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, even when it is decided not to execute the advance announcement side timer effect in the process of step S5503, after the timer target announcement lottery (steps S5554, S5564) is performed in this way, Regarding which of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F provided as the effects that can not be the effects of the advance notice timer effect based on the hit result of the big hit, the change pattern (change number), etc. A determination process (third timer non-targeted notice lottery: step S5555) is performed.

  Although the table referred to in step S5555 is omitted, basically it is in the same mode as table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when not a special timer, for example, a notice When the mode (PTNs 3, 4 and 8) for executing E2 is selected, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the mode (PTNs 5 and 6) for executing the notice F is selected.

  Then, after the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5555) is performed in this way, the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) or the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5554) is performed next as the processing of step S5515. After the advance notice effect determined in step S5555 or the like is set in a predetermined storage area, the process for the advance notice lottery is ended. As a result, drawing data and the like corresponding to the effects determined in the preliminary lottery are created, and control is performed to start at the timing when each effect should be made to appear in the process of changing the effect symbols.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of step S5503 that no advance notice timer effect is to be executed, the timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-targeted advance notice lottery are processed separately. I decided to do it. However, if it is determined in the process of step S5503 that no advance notice timer effect is to be executed, there is no need to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F in relation to the advance timer action. The timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery may be executed within one lottery process.

  In addition, the special timer mode described above (non-target notice E2 is set so that the jackpot expectation is lower than the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice-side timer effect is not performed). In the situation where the count display of the notice-side timer effect is performed, the relationship between the notice-side timer effect and the case where the big hit expectation is set to be higher than the non-target notice F is set. Because it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3 and F, the timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery may be executed within one lottery process.

  Further, in this embodiment, after determining the presence or absence of the advance notice side timer effect, it is decided to perform a determination process as to which effect is to be executed as the advance effect, but as any advance effect After determining in what manner to execute the rendition of the rendition, the presence or absence and execution mode of the advance notice timer rendition may be determined.

  By the way, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, when a winning (opening of the game ball) to the starting opening 2002, 2004 occurs, whether pre-reading effect is to be performed for the suspension information according to the winning A determination process as to whether or not it is performed (steps S5245 and S5255). In this point, in this determination processing, the display mode (color, form, etc.) of the suspension display to be the target of the pre-reading effect is changed based on the information on the hit or fluctuation pattern of the big hit determination included in the suspension information. Lottery about the change effect (execution of existence, lottery about the display mode), lottery about the look-ahead zone effect across multiple changes (execution of execution, lottery about the execution mode (color, number of continuous execution, etc.) etc. In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable display according to the hold information is to be the target of the "timer prefetch effect".

  Here, the timer prefetching effect is an effect that when the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display for the effect object) that was in the hold state when it appears is in execution, the rate at which the advance notification timer effect appears in the fluctuation time is high For example, in the effect display device 1600 or the like, a predetermined image (for example, “during timer preparation in progress” at the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol which is started after the winning timing (the timing of winning the timer prefetch effect). And so on). It should be noted that the player does not cause the predetermined image (for example, "Timer ready" etc.) to appear at the winning timing (the timing when the timer prefetch effect is won), which is the timer prefetch effect corresponding to any hold information To make it difficult to recognize.

  According to such a timer pre-reading effect, it is suggested that the occurrence ratio of the notice-side timer effect is high over a plurality of variable displays while it is unspecified which one of the hold displays corresponds to. Since it becomes possible, it will be expected to maintain the game interest over multiple variable displays. However, it is a type of continuous presentation (or continuation) over a plurality of variable displays, without specifying which hold display is included, including such timer pre-read effects among advance effects (prefetch effects). When performing the production (preceding period rendering), if the same type of rendering (preceding period rendering) and its execution period may overlap, the rendering becomes too complicated and what was targeted and purpose There is a concern that it is not possible to understand whether it is the effect or the amusement of the game is reduced.

  Therefore, in determining whether or not to execute such an advance period effect (preliminary determination at the time of winning), the advance period effect according to the other suspension information that has been awarded earlier is not executed and is waiting for execution Make a decision about whether it is not Then, the preceding period effect such as the timer prefetching effect is newly added on condition that at least the preceding period effect according to the other suspension information previously won is not executed and is not in the waiting state. It is possible to judge that it is to be generated. As a result, it is avoided that the two preceding period effects are overlapped and executed, and the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  In addition to the above-described timer pre-reading effect, for example, the same period continuous pre-reading effect that causes at least a part of the stop symbol to appear as the same aspect (such as the color of a number) over the above-mentioned timer pre-reading effect. It is possible to adopt a pre-reading zone effect or the like that changes the time zone to a special mode. Then, in the above process (preliminary judgment at the time of winning), among these preceding period effects, not only that the same type of preceding period effects do not overlap and appear, but also the execution period of these different type of preceding period effects Will be controlled so that they do not overlap. Regarding the type of effect (for example, pending change effect etc.) which is performed over a plurality of variable displays by specifying which pending display among the pre-reading effects, the execution status of these preceding period effects It is desirable that it be possible to appear regardless of the situation, but if a new prize occurs while the preceding period effect is in execution or waiting for execution, a new prize will occur when it is not in that situation It is desirable to perform the above-mentioned pre-reading determination at the time of winning so that the appearance ratio of the effect of the type (for example, on-hold change effect and the like) is lower as pre-reading effect corresponding to the winning.

  In this way, while a preceding period effect such as timer pre-reading effect (a type of effect that makes it continuous (or continues) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is specified) is being performed The game is caused by the interference between the two preceding period effects by performing the prohibition control to prevent this from occurring for the preceding period effects corresponding to the newly generated game ball winning. Deterioration of interest can be suppressed. However, if such prohibition control is performed, the frequency with which the preceding period effect is performed as the preceding effect is reduced by the amount that the preceding period effect is subjected to the prohibition control, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Ru.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when performing the leading period effect corresponding to the hold information while the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information is not yet started, first, a specific effect Set information that indicates that you are in a restricted situation. And, when the hold information is newly stored when the information is set by the hold information stored in advance, at least the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information stored in the previously is ended. While the preceding period effect corresponding to the newly stored hold information is not executed until then, the newly stored is performed after the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information is ended. Control is performed so as to be able to execute the preceding period presentation corresponding to the hold information.

  That is, in this case, even if it is once determined that the execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is not permitted when the hold information is newly stored, then the game proceeds and is stored first. If there is no concern about the possibility of interference between rendering and the preceding period corresponding to the holding information, there is no risk that execution will be permitted and execution of the preceding period may be permitted. As a result, it is possible to preferably maintain the frequency at which the preceding period effect is performed while performing prohibition control on the advance period effect, and thereby it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun.

  More specifically, in the first special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255) when a new winning is generated, first, the first special hold described above Based on the count value by the number counter or the second special hold number counter, it is determined what number is the hold order (digestion order) of the new winning combination. For example, in the case of the first special view prefetching process, first, the hold information corresponding to the new winning is stored in any of the first special symbol hold storage area a to the first special symbol hold storage area d. Determine if it is in state. Then, after the new winning combination is stored and the variable display is in the execution state, and the hold information in which the variable display is in the non-execution state. Determine if there is something that is As a result, even if there is specific hold information for which the preceding period effect is to be executed, the execution of the preceding period effect according to the new winning is not completely prohibited, but the above identification In the period after the end of the variable display according to the hold information, it is controlled such that the execution of the leading period effect according to the new winning is permitted.

Hereinafter, a method for realizing such control will be described by taking a more detailed gaming situation as an example.
In FIG. 171 (a), the suspension information (first special symbol) in the state in which the variation display is being executed and the three suspension information (in the first special symbol) in the state in which the variation display is not being executed is stored. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7a referred within the 1st special figure pre-reading processing, when a new winning a prize (1st special symbol) occurs in the state which is. Also, FIG. 171 (b) shows the pending information (first special symbol) in the state where the variable display is being executed and the two pending information (both are the first special symbols) in the state where the variable display is not being executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7b referred within the 1st special figure pre-reading processing, when a new winning combination (1st special symbol) occurs in the state where it is memorized.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (a), in this table T7a, the pending information (first special symbol) in the state where the variable display is in execution and the three pending information in the state where the variable display is not executed (any one Depending on which of the first special symbol) is the target of the preceding period effect, or none of them is the target of the previous period effect, a new winning (first special symbol) It is possible to determine from which timing the corresponding hold information can be subjected to the preceding period presentation (the number of prefetchable fluctuations).

  For example, in the table T7a, both of the suspension information (first special symbol) in the state in which the variable display is in execution and the three suspension information (all the first special symbols) in the state in which the variable display is not executed If it is not the subject of the advance period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1 (the first hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area a) and the hold 2 (the first special symbol hold storage) Variable display according to the second hold information stored in the area b, and variable display according to the hold 3 (third hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area b) The new winning combination was targeted for the four variable display periods with the variable display according to the holding 4 (the fourth holding information stored in the first special symbol holding storage area d) corresponding to the new winning combination It is possible to carry out the production for the preceding period There is determined (determination that prefetching variability number is 4). That is, in this case, the fluctuation display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is performed at the timing after the fluctuation display corresponding to the state being executed is ended and the fluctuation display according to the first hold information is started. It is acceptable to execute the leading period effect for the target.

  In addition, in the table T7a, when the pending information in the state in which the variable display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 2 and the variable display according to the hold 3 It is determined that the leading period effect for the new winning can be performed over the three variable display periods with the variable display according to the pending 4 according to the final winning (indicating that the look-ahead variable possible number is 3 Judgment). That is, in this case, the timing after the variable display in the running state is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is further ended, and the variable display according to the second hold information is started Thus, the execution of the leading period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is permitted.

  Here, even when the suspension information in which the variable display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1, the variable display according to the hold 2, and the hold 3 Over the four variable display periods of the variable display according to the new prize and the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize, it is determined that the leading period effect for the new prize can be executed ( It may be determined that the pre-read variable number is 4). However, in this case, the preceding period effect appearing in the variable display in the state of execution and the new leading period effect started in the variable display according to the hold 1 are continuously executed, Whether the leading period effect is the same effect (is the previous leading period effect continued) or is another preceding period effect newly started (is the previous preceding period effect terminated)? A method to set it as a prohibited period so that the preceding period presentation will not newly occur in the first variable display after the preceding period presentation ends because it becomes difficult to distinguish between the two (the method adopted in Table T7a) It is more desirable to adopt Such a method is adopted not only for the table T7a but also for other tables T7 (tables not shown in addition to the table T7b).

  Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 1 is the target of the presentation period effect, the two variable display of the variable display according to the hold 3 and the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning. Over the period, it is determined that the leading period effect for the new winning combination can be performed (determination that the number of prefetchable variable is 2). That is, in this case, the variable display in the state of execution is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is ended, and the variable display according to the second hold information is further ended, and the third At the timing after the variable display according to the hold information is started, the execution of the leading period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is permitted.

  Further, in the table T7a, when the pending 2 is the target of the presentation period effect, the leading period for the new winning is only in the period of the variable display according to the pending 4 according to the new winning. It is determined that the effect can be performed (determination that the look-ahead variable number is 1). That is, in this case, the variable display in the running state is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is ended, the variable display according to the second hold information is ended, and the third hold information The leading display period for variable display according to hold 4 according to the new winning at a timing after the variable display according to 4 is finished further and variable display according to the fourth hold information is started Execution of the presentation will be permitted.

  Further, in the table T7a, when the pending 3 is the target of the presentation period presentation, it is determined that the presentation period presentation for the new winning is not executable (the number of prefetch changeable numbers is 0) Judged). That is, in this case, the execution of the leading period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is not permitted.

  On the other hand, in the table T7b, the hold 3 is not included as an object of determination as to whether or not the object is to be rendered for the preceding period, and compared with the table T7a, the number of prefetchable fluctuations obtained as a determination result is small accordingly. Although basically the same as the table T7a, the explanation will be omitted. In addition, tables similar to these are also prepared at the time of Hold 2 prize and Hold 1 prize, but the explanation will be omitted.

  By the way, it is assumed that there are two pieces of pending information that is the target of the preceding period effect at the time of winning on pending 4 etc., but in this case based on the pending information on the later side of the pending order Decide whether to make the number of pre-readable fluctuation of. For example, at the time of winning 4 on hold, if table 2a is subject to different preceding period effects in table T7a, pending 2 on the later side of the holding order becomes an object for preceding period effects. The “prefetchable fluctuation number = 1” is determined.

  In addition, as described above, such control of the preceding period effect prohibition period is a type of effect in which continuous (or continuous) operation is performed over a plurality of variable display without specifying which hold display. It is made for the purpose of setting the prohibition period of the type of effect based on the execution situation. Therefore, the prohibited period of the leading period effect does not occur depending on the execution status of the type of effect (hold change effect) or the like that specifies which the pending display corresponds to, and the execution status of the preceding period effect (pre-reading Even if the number of possible changes is 0), the type of effect (hold change effect) for specifying which hold display corresponds to is not prohibited.

  In addition, even when it is in the prohibition period of the leading period effect, in the timer pre-reading effect, for the timer pre-reading effect performed in the later-described first leading mode and the second leading mode, to make the advance notice timer effect appear It may be made to appear because certainty is not required.

  In addition, when the suspension information of the 2nd special symbol side is included in the suspension information in the state where the fluctuation display is not executed as suspension control of the advance period effect, the suspension information of the 2nd special symbol side is preceded by Even if it has not been the subject of period production, it is controlled so as not to start a new leading period effect until the variable display according to the second special symbol side hold information is ended. Good. At this time, it is not necessary to set the next variable display period for which the variable display according to the second special symbol side hold information is not a prohibited period, and a new leading period from when the next variable display is performed It is desirable to allow the presentation to start.

  In addition, in the process of confirming the status of the pre-reading effect set for the hold in this way and determining the pre-read variable number according to the result, a new winning occurs or whenever a hold is taken. It is desirable to do each time.

  Then, in the first special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255), when the prefetchable fluctuation number is determined in this way, the determined period (prefetching is possible A determination process is performed as to what type of preceding period effect is to be performed (including the presence or absence of the execution) in accordance with the number of changes.

  For example, first, it is determined which type of leading period effect is to be performed, with the pending information corresponding to the new winning combination as a target. As described above, as the type of advance period effect, there are a plurality of pre-read zone effects for displaying related background images across a plurality of changes, and a plurality of specific advance indications that indicate that the advance notice timer effect is likely to be executed. It is possible to prepare, as a selection candidate, a timer pre-reading effect or the like which is displayed across fluctuations. As a result, when the type of the leading period effect is determined, a determination process is performed as to what type of leading period effect of the determined type is to be performed.

  FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 which are referred to when deciding the execution mode of the timer prefetching effect in the situation where the prefetchable variable number is four. It is. FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 which are referred to when deciding the execution mode of the timer prefetching effect in the situation where the number of prefetching variable is 3 It is.

  As described above, the timer prefetching effect is an effect in which the rate at which the advance timer side timer effect appears is high when the pending information that is the prefetching target is digested when it appears, and the periphery according to this embodiment In the control MPU 1511a, the timer prefetching effect is executed in a first leading mode, a second leading mode, a third leading mode, or the like in which the appearance ratio of the advance notice side timer effect is different.

  Here, the first preceding mode is, for example, the first mode such as "prediction of timer occurrence" being displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the first preceding mode. The probability that the advance notice timer effect is executed is set to approximately 20% (step S5502).

  Further, the second leading mode is, for example, the second mode such as "timer generation chance" being displayed in the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the second leading mode, the notice side The probability that the timer effect is executed is set to about 80% (step S5502).

  Further, the third preceding aspect is, for example, the third aspect such as “during timer preparation” displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the third preceding aspect, the anticipator timer The presentation is always performed (it may have a higher probability than the second preceding aspect even if it is not 100%) (step S5502).

  Then, based on the information on the big hit judgment for the pre-reading judgment, the information on the fluctuation pattern number for the pre-reading judgment, etc., it is decided which execution mode to execute as the timer pre-reading effect. For example, in a situation where the number of prefetchable variable is 4, referring to the tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), it is for prefetching corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 22. In the situation where one of the modes is selected based on the information and the effect random number allocated to the information, and in the situation where the number of prefetchable variable is 3, the tables T8b-1 and T8b- shown in FIG. Referring to 2, one of the modes is selected based on the information for prefetching corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 and the effect random number allocated to the information.

As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the table T8a-1, the variable display of the hold information which is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started in the state where the first leading aspect finally appears. The following three aspects are prepared as an aspect.
-When the fluctuation display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the state of hold 3 and hold 2, the timer prefetch effect is not made to appear in any mode, and it is the target of the timer prefetch effect A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first leading mode (presence of timer occurrence) when the fluctuation indication of the holding information is in the state of holding 1 · The fluctuation indication of the holding information being the target of the timer pre-reading effect is held When it is in the state of 3, the timer pre-reading effect is not preceded by any aspect, and the timer pre-reading effect is preceded by the first when the fluctuation display of the holding information being the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of holding 2. A mode in which it is displayed in a mode (foreseeing the occurrence of a timer) and continues this even in the state of the hold 1-of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect Hold this timer prefetch effect when dynamic display is in the state of the hold 3 and displayed in the first prior embodiment (feeling of timer generator) 2, aspects to be continued in a state of hold 1

Further, in the table T8a-1, the following six modes are used as a mode in which the variable display of the hold information which is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started in the state where the second preceding mode finally appears. It is prepared.
-When the fluctuation display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the state of hold 3 and hold 2, the timer prefetch effect is not made to appear in any mode, and it is the target of the timer prefetch effect A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the second leading aspect (the timer occurrence opportunity) when the fluctuation display of the holding information is in the state of holding 1-The fluctuation display of the holding information being the target of the timer pre-reading production is held 3 If the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed in any mode when it is in the state, the timer pre-reading effect is the second leading aspect when the fluctuation display of the holding information being the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of holding 2 A mode in which it is displayed as (Timer occurrence chance) and this is continued even in the state of Hold 1-Hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch presentation effect The timer prefetching effect is displayed in the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) when the variable display of is in the state of hold 3 and this is continued in the state of hold 2 and hold 1 target of the timer prefetching effect When the fluctuation display of the hold information in is in the hold 3 state, the timer pre-reading effect is not made to appear in any mode, and the fluctuation display of the hold information being the target of the timer pre-reading effect is the state in the hold 2 The timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first leading mode (presence of timer occurrence) when it is in, and the timer pre-reading effect is performed when the fluctuation display of the hold information which is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of holding 1 Changing the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) to the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) and displaying it as the target of the timer prefetching effect The timer prefetching effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence) when the fluctuation display of the pending information is in the pending 3 state, and this is continued even in the pending 2 state. When the variable display of the hold information which is the target of the effect is in the state of the hold 1, the timer prefetching effect is changed from the first advance mode (presence of timer occurrence) to the second advance mode (timer occurrence chance) and displayed A mode to cause the timer pre-reading effect to be displayed in the first leading aspect (presence of timer occurrence) when the fluctuation display of the holding information which is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of the holding 3 The timer prefetching effect is displayed from the first leading mode (prediction of timer occurrence) to the second preceding mode (timer generation C Change and display it and continue it in the state of Hold 1

  The timer pre-reading effect of the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect is displayed in the state of hold 1 and then continuously displayed even after the hold information is digested and the variable display is started. It is desirable to do so. In addition, the aspect may be further changed in the variable display started by digesting the holding information. Also, the timer prefetching effect of the first leading mode and the second leading mode may be made non-display when the advance notice side timer effect is started in the variable display, but in the case where the notice side timer effect is started Even if the first and second preceding modes are not displayed before the preceding timer effect is started, the display is continued even after the previous timer effect is started. If it is made non-display at a predetermined timing after that, it becomes possible to impart an interest. It should be noted that if no advance notice side timer effect is executed despite execution of the timer prefetch effect in any of the first advance mode and the second advance mode, it is not performed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol fluctuation. It will be displayed. Further, it is more preferable that the non-display timing be the same as the non-display timing (such as the above-described predetermined timing) when the advance notice timer effect is executed.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading aspect is in spite of the timer prefetching effect in which the execution ratio of the notice-side timer effect increases when both appear. The timer prefetching effect of (the timer occurrence chance) and the timer prefetching effect of the third leading aspect (during timer preparation) appear as different effects different from each other. Therefore, as apparent from the contents of the table T8a-1, in the state where the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect are displayed, the timer prefetching effect is changed from these preceding aspects to the third preceding aspect This is not adopted for the mode to be displayed. Also, in a situation where the timer prefetching effect of the third leading aspect (during timer preparation) appears, the timer prefetching effect of the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) appears The timer prefetching effect of the third leading mode (during timer preparation) appears in a situation where the timer prefetching effect of the first leading mode (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading mode (timer occurring chance) appears Is supposed to occur.

  Therefore, in the situation where the number of prefetchable variable is 4, the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) with reference to the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a) In addition to determining the execution mode relating to the timer pre-reading effect of, the execution mode relating to the timer pre-reading effect of the third preceding aspect (during timer preparation) is further determined with reference to the table T8a-2 shown in FIG. It will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in the table T8a according to this embodiment, of the hold information which is the target of the timer pre-reading effect in the state where the third preceding aspect finally appears. As an aspect in which the variable display is started, only the following one aspect is prepared.
・ When the fluctuation display of the hold information which is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of the hold 3, the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the third leading aspect (during timer preparation) and this is held 2 and 1 Aspect to continue even in the state

  However, also in the case of the third preceding aspect, it is not limited to the above one aspect, and similarly to the case of the first preceding aspect described above, when in the state of hold 3 or hold 2, neither timer prefetching effect appears The third preceding aspect may be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the timer prefetching effect of the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) is executed, and the timer of the third leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) Both when the pre-reading effect is executed and the timer pre-reading effect of the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) timer pre-reading effect and the third leading aspect (during timer preparation) The case where each is performed comes to appear. Then, when both of the timer prefetching effect of the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) or the second leading aspect (timer occurrence chance) and the timer prefetching effect of the third leading aspect (during timer preparation) are respectively executed, Being in a situation where it is definitely suggested that the advance timer side timer effect is executed, enjoy the effect such as whether it changes from the first preceding mode to the second preceding mode, with a margin or a sense of security. Will be able to

  Also, control may be performed so that the timer prefetching effect of the first leading mode, the timer prefetching effect of the second leading mode, and the timer prefetching effect of the third leading mode can simultaneously appear.

  In addition, it is desirable that continuous display is performed also after the suspension information to be processed is digested and the variable display is started also in the timer pre-reading effect in the third preceding aspect (during timer preparation). Then, in this case, the third preceding aspect (during timer preparation) is not displayed when the advance notice timer effect is started after the target holding information to be processed is digested and the variable display is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, the third leading aspect of the timer pre-reading effect is adopted as the aspect for displaying “during timer preparation” in the effect display device 1600, but in the state of hold 1, for example You may make it employ | adopt as a mode which starts the count display toward the production | presentation (the production | presentation which appears in the unexecuted fluctuation display) made into the production | presentation object of timer production. That is, in this case, for example, the remaining time in which the state of Hold 1 is continued (the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in the state of fluctuation display when in the state of Hold 1) and Hold 1 are digested and the fluctuation display The count display is performed over the time obtained by adding up the time from the start to the start of the effect set as the presentation object of the advance notice timer effect, and the timer look-ahead effect (third leading mode) and the advance notice timer The effect is executed as one count display linked with two variable displays.

  In this respect, when the third leading aspect is realized as one count display linked to such an advance notice timer effect, the count display is not performed in the hold 3 and the hold 2 and the count display is performed when in the hold 1 state. It is desirable to do That is, when the count display is started when in the hold 3 or the hold 2, according to the number of hold when the state of the hold 1 is reached, "the effect that is the target of the effect of the advance notice timer effect ( It is possible to appropriately execute count display (count display until reaching a predetermined number) for the same effect by changing “the remaining time until start of the unexecuted variation display) is started”. It is because there is a concern that will disappear.

  The table T8b-1 shown in FIG. 173 (a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 173 (b) are the same as the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 172 (b). Detailed description will be omitted because it has basically the same relationship with the table T8a-2.

  Further, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the determination regarding the pending change effect in the first special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special drawing prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255) It also processes. With this hold change effect, the hold display in any manner is possible by changing the mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information obtained according to the prize to any of a plurality of modes different from the mode of the normal hold. It is intended to indicate the jackpot expectation when the hold display is digested depending on whether it is displayed.

  More specifically, as the hold display according to this embodiment, in addition to the normal hold mode when the hold change effect is not performed, the white blink mode, the blue display mode, and the green display Can be displayed in any of the display mode, the display mode in red, and the display mode in rainbow color, and basically, the degree of expectation of the big hit when the hold display is performed in the mode of displaying by white blinking Is low, and the probability of big hit is gradually increased in the order of blue, green and red, and the probability of appearing a big hit symbol when it is reserved and digested is 100 if it is displayed on hold in the form of displaying in rainbow color It is set to be in a% relationship. Although the jackpot expectation is naturally set for the mode of normal retention, the probability of big hit when the normal suspension is displayed is set to be lower than the mode for displaying in white blinking. Alternatively, it may be the same as or higher than the mode in which the white blink is displayed.

  Therefore, normally, for example, when an aspect in which white blinks or blue is displayed appears, the first effect situation having a lower jackpot expectation degree than when displaying in green or red is provided. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, control that can provide a second effect situation in which the jackpot expectation level is increased when an aspect of displaying in white blinking or blue instead of green and red under predetermined conditions appears. Is made executable.

  FIG. 174 shows that there is nothing to make the jackpot symbol appear among the suspension information in the state in which the variable display is in execution and the suspension information in the state in which the variable display is in the non-execution state (for example, suspension 1 to suspension 3) It is a figure which shows the normal time retention change table T9a referred. Moreover, FIG. 175 has a thing which makes a big hit symbol appear among the pending | holding information in the state in which the variable display is in execution, and the pending | holding information in the state in which the variable display is not performed (for example, pending 1-pending 3). It is a figure which shows the special time pending change table T9b referred to when.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the first special view prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) or the second special view when a new winning (the acceptance of the game ball) to the starting opening 2002, 2004 occurs. In the pre-reading process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the suspension information stored prior to the new winning and in the state in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in the state in which the variable display is not executed (for example, It is determined whether there is an item that causes the jackpot symbol to appear (one for which the jackpot is determined to be won as a result of the jackpot determination or the prefetch determination) among 1 to 3). As a result, when it is determined that there is nothing to make the jackpot symbol appear, the normal time table T9a (white blink, blue, green, red, rainbow color) is set to have a relation of gradually increasing the jackpot expectation in the order of By executing the on-hold change effect with reference to FIG. 174), normally, for example, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, the first effect situation in which the big hit expectation is lower than when displaying in red is displayed. It is intended to be provided.

  However, it is determined that there is a thing that makes a big hit symbol appear among the suspension information that is stored before the new winning and is under the condition that the fluctuation display is in execution and the suspension information that is not in the fluctuation display. In the case (when a rare event occurs), the second effect situation is provided by executing the pending change effect with reference to the special time pending change table T9b (FIG. 175).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 175, in the special hold change table T9b, first, the red and rainbow colors relating to the state of the hold display are acquired as hold information corresponding to the new winning, “ The presentation random number is distributed such that the pre-reading information or the pre-reading information on the variation pattern does not select any of the contents even if they are shown.

  In addition, with regard to the green color regarding the mode of the hold display, even if it is a variation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14) to which the effect random number is distributed so as to be selectable in the normal hold change table T9a, the special time hold change In the table T9b, distribution of effect random numbers is performed so as not to be selected. In this respect, in the case where the preread information on the variation pattern corresponds to the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), green can be selected also in the special case pending change table T9b, but the normal time pending The distribution of effect random numbers is performed so that the probability of appearance of green is lower when winning a big hit as compared to the change table T9a and when it is lost.

  On the other hand, with regard to white flashing and blue regarding the aspect of the pending display, in the special time pending change table T9b, the appearance probability thereof is higher when winning as well as when winning as a big hit compared to the normal pending change table T9a The distribution of presentation random numbers is done. In addition, with regard to white blinking and blue regarding the mode of the suspension display, even the variation numbers 1 and 2 which are not selected in the normal suspension change table T9a, can be selected in the special period suspension change table T9b. As such, distribution of presentation random numbers is done.

  According to such a configuration, for example, an effect with a high degree of expectation in which the jackpot symbol appears (for example, an effect that a notice side timer effect for the character B action is displayed with a variation pattern of SP reach) is executed If a new winning combination occurs (while under certain conditions), and a green or red form appears as a hold display according to the new winning combination, a big hit symbol appears in the high expectation effect under execution While it becomes difficult to have the expectation of the second stage, it is relatively easy to have the expectation of the big hit symbol appearing in the high expectation production under execution when the white flickering or the blue aspect appears. Will be able to provide.

  In particular, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, as the third leading aspect of the timer prefetching effect, the remaining time for which the state of hold 1 is continued (the state of variable display when in the state of hold 1) Over the combined time of the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in) and the time from when the hold 1 is digested and its fluctuation display is started to when the production set as the target object of the notice effect on the announcement side is started The count display of can be performed. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears on the effect display device 1600, the fluctuation display may end before the count display reaches a predetermined value, and the next fluctuation display may be started. Thus, it is expected to improve the fun of the game in combination with the control using the above-mentioned special time holding change table T9b.

For example, it is assumed that the count display (or timer preparation in progress) of the notice timer effect appears during the execution of the variable display (for example, SP reach) in the situation where the white blink or blue hold display appears as hold 1 The second game progress can be expected to have a big hit symbol appearance than the first game progress described below.
・ The target for presentation on the hold 1 where the anticipator timer effect only shows low expectation (flashing white or blue) is targeted for presentation, and the pending variable display (for example, SP reach) is put on hold after ending in the lost mode The first game progress / notice timer effect at which the variable display according to the hold information of 1 is started is not the effect in the hold 1 indicating only the low expectation (flashing white or blue), but the fluctuation during execution Second game progress in which the effect in the display (for example, SP reach) is the target of the effect

  That is, although the big notice expectation timer effect (for example, when it appears, a big hit symbol appears with a probability of 10% or more) is executed, the big notice probability timer effect is low (for example, it appears) However, if there is such a case that the production within the hold 1 of white blinking or blue) where the big hit symbol appears only with a probability of several percent is the target of the presentation, the possibility of the big hit symbol will be greatly reduced It becomes such a production situation, but according to the above-mentioned second game progress, it is special because the chance increase by having avoided the occurrence of such production situation and the fluctuation display under execution is a big hit Chance improvement by being able to expect that it is in the production situation where the hold display of hold 1 blinks (high in appearance probability) or is blue with reference to the time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) The fact that the high-predictive-prediction-prediction-timer timer effect "is the effect of the" in-process variation display "as the production target also functions as" supporting that the in-execution variation display is a big hit " Because the chance is raised in the double, it will be possible to improve the game interest.

  Note that the third leading aspect of the timer pre-reading effect may be executed as "during timer preparation" instead of the count display. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that the advance notice timer effect with the effect in the variation display as the target of the effect is executed when switching to the count display from the situation where "timer in preparation" is displayed. As a result, when there is a pending display that is blinking in white or blue at the time when the count display appears, it is possible to expect that the jackpot symbol will appear in the variable display.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the green and red (especially red) suspension display is being displayed and "counting in progress" is not displayed and count display is started, the notification timer effect is performed although it is In addition to making it difficult to have an expectation for the appearance of the big hit symbol in the variable display, it is also possible to generate a further increase in the expectation for the green and red (especially red) hold display The production can not function. Therefore, when "Timer preparation" is displayed in the situation where the green and red (especially red) suspension display is displayed, it is until the green and red (especially red) suspension display is digested. It is hoped that the count display will not be started, and it will be expected to maintain the game interest within the period until the count display (notice timer effect) is started.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, when an effect with a high probability of big hit appears in the variable display under execution, a new winning is generated to cause a hold display of any mode such as white blinking, blue, green, red, etc. Since it becomes possible to predict with a certain probability whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the variable display under execution, it becomes possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun by checking whether the symbol appears.

  In addition, although such pending change presentation using the special presentation hold change table T9b is executed for the pending display according to the new winning, the presentation target is actually "new It is not "does the jackpot symbol appear in the fluctuation display of the hold information (hold information with hold change) according to the winning combination", but "the hold information stored before the new winning combination (hold not to be subject to hold change) It is designed to act as a presentation about "Does the jackpot symbol appear in the variable display of information)?" Therefore, even if no hold change is executed when a new winning is generated or the above-mentioned preceding period effect is prohibited, the special hold change table T9b is held by the hold information that has been won thereafter When the pending change effect using the is executed, it becomes possible to function as an effect as if the prefetching effect occurred after the pending information for which no prefetching effect was executed, so the prefetching effect is It will be expected to reduce the game interest due to not being played.

  In the special hold change table T9b, the green mode can be selected for some reach types, but as in the red mode, any variation pattern may not be selected. . The point is that if the appearance rate of the high expectation mode that can appear as the hold display is a low rate (including 0) compared to the normal hold change table T9a, white is displayed when the count display appears. It is possible to improve the fun of the game when there is a blinking or blue holding display.

  Further, the pending change can be generated at the time of winning, at the start of change, or at a predetermined timing during the change, and the number of times may also be generated multiple times. That is, in this case, even if the count display of the advance notice timer effect is started in the variable display according to the hold display which is white blink or blue, the white blink or blue may change to green or red. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest. In this embodiment, the display corresponding to the hold display which has become the digestion target even during the symbol variation performed in response to the hold digestion (in the hold display when not in the hold state but in the hold state) As described above, the display of the corresponding display) and the mode of the display corresponding to the hold display are further changed (hold change).

  However, when the on-hold change effect using such special-time on-hold change table T9b is realized, a new winning is generated while the specific effect of high expectation is being executed during the execution of the variable display, and the on-off effect is realized. If the occurrence of the pending display corresponding to the event is red, the jackpot symbol is a variable display in which a specific effect with a high expectation (for example, a timer effect that targets the action of the character B) is being executed. It may be a situation that definitely suggests that it will not appear, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

  Therefore, a new winning is generated during a period in which at least a specific timer effect for which the effect of the character B is a target of the timer effect is being performed (a period when the specific effect of high expectation is being performed). Even if it does, it is desirable to control so that the mode of suspension change may be made non-display, without a suspension display according to the winning a prize appearing in the effect display device 1600. In addition, it is desirable to maintain the non-display state for the hold display even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and has been digested.

  However, in this case, instead of continuing to hide the non-display pending display until the variable display is ended, for example, within the period of the variable display, a hit effect or a loss that suggests a jackpot win ( It is desirable to display the mode of the hold change by causing the hold display that has been hidden to appear after the timing when the loss effect that suggests a big hit) appears. According to such a configuration, even if the pending display corresponding to the new winning is red, it is already suggested that it is a loss, so not to mention that the fun of the game is not reduced. By being red, it is possible to improve the game interest due to the fact that the hold information with high expectation for big hit is included in the hold.

  In addition, the control concerning the non-display of such a pending | holding display does not target all of timer production (notice production | presentation production), but comparatively big hit, such as what targets B goods operation | movement among the timer productions It is desirable to execute only a specific expected timer effect (prediction effect with a high degree of expectation) with a high degree of expectation.

  Also, as described above, when the on-hold change effect using the special-time on-hold change table T9b is realized, for example, the timer prefetching effect is executed in the third leading mode (during timer preparation, etc.) while the blue on-hold display appears. In the case where it has been done, it is desirable that the game progress in which the big hit symbol appears when the count display (timer effect) is started in the variable display prior to the blue hold display being digested. In this respect, even in the gaming situation where such a game progression is performed, whether the count display (timer effect) is started during the fluctuation or the fluctuation according to the blue hold display without being started. In the variation display where the count display (timer effect) is started and the big hit symbol appears before the blue hold display is digested so that a pounding feeling about whether the count display is started by the display is given. The count display (timer effect) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display (including 0%) at which the count display (timer effect) is started according to the start timing of the variable display (timer effect) It is desirable to control so that the rate at which is started is higher. The percentage may include 100%. Alternatively, it is desirable to control so that the rate at which the count display (timer effect) is started when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display is higher than when the red hold display appears. . The percentage may include 100%.

  Furthermore, in peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, new winnings are made while timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first leading aspect or the second leading aspect is being executed. When the hold information corresponding to the occurrence is newly acquired, the variable display to be the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started, and when this is under execution, the rate at which the advance side timer effect is executed is the above-mentioned In order to be different according to the newly obtained hold information (new winning), control (control concerning the one change effect) which can execute timer pre-reading effect is performed.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a processing procedure for processing performed to realize such a one-off effect. In addition, this processing is a winning of a game ball to a specific starting opening during a period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first leading aspect or the second leading aspect is being executed. ) May be performed when it occurs, or within a period before it is digested that the hold information (hold information for which information related to effects is deleted / reset) is held before the prize. It may be performed at a predetermined timing.

  As shown in FIG. 176, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, in the processing of step S5601, it is determined whether the hold information corresponding to the new winning is indicative of specific game information. Note that the specific game information may be, for example, “game information for causing a high expectation specific fluctuation pattern such as SP reach to appear when the new hold information is digested”, or “the new It may be game information to be won by a big hit when the hold information is digested. Here, for convenience of explanation, “game information to be won by a big hit when the new hold information is digested” will be described as the specific game information.

  As a result, when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new winning is indicative of the specific game information, the next step S5602 stores the information prior to the hold information corresponding to the new win. With regard to the hold information targeted for the timer pre-reading effect (the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect) among the pending information being carried out, at least a part of the information regarding the effect is deleted and the one change effect is performed Reset to content.

  For example, when the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) is set as the timer pre-reading effect, if the hold information targeted for the timer pre-reading effect is digested, the pre-notice timer effect is approximately 20% of the time When the second leading aspect (the timer occurrence chance) is set as the timer pre-reading effect, it is executed and the probability of approximately 80% when the pending information targeted for the timer pre-reading effect is digested As described above, the advance notice side timer effect is executed. However, in the process of step S5602, a table to be referred to when all (or at least a part of) information related to the timer pre-reading effect is deleted or when determining an effect pattern (SP reach etc.) or a notice lottery A setting (such as setting of a single change flag) for changing to a different one from the normal time is made. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, by performing control (FIG. 149) for effect based on the effect information modified (deleted / set) in this way, the first leading aspect (prediction of timer occurrence) and Even if any of the two preceding modes (timer generation chances) is set, the notification timer effect is executed with a probability of approximately 50% in the process of step S5502 (FIG. 149). In addition, also when determining the contents of the effect pattern and the notice effect, for example, a table (not shown) at the time of effect effect is referred to based on the fact that the one change flag is set, and various effects are performed in a different mode from normal. Will be executed.

  Then, after the modification process (step S5602) for the hold presentation information set as the target of the timer pre-reading effect is performed in this way, the background image when the one-off effect is performed as the process of step S5603 Perform processing to change to. At this time, it is preferable to hide the display (first and second preceding modes) appearing as the timer prefetching effect. That is, in this case, when a new winning is generated (or from when the winning is generated until the pending information targeted for the timer pre-reading effect is digested), the background image at the time of the unusual effect When the image is suddenly changed, the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect appearing until then is hidden, but the background image at the time of the one change effect itself functions as one aspect of the timer prefetching effect It will be possible. Then, during the period when the background image at the time of the unusual effect appeared, whether or not the advance notice side timer effect appears when the hold information which is the target of the timer prefetch effect is digested (whether it is a garbled) It becomes possible to have a great interest, and this makes it possible to maintain the game interest while the timer pre-reading effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5601 that the suspension information corresponding to the new winning is not indicative of the specific game information, it is determined whether or not to execute the one-off change effect as the process of step S5611 next. Perform a decision process on In this processing of step S5603, even though the alteration processing (step S5602) for the above-mentioned suspension information is not performed, this one-change gasse effect is an effect that causes the background image to be changed to the background image when the one-off effect is performed. It is

  In the process of step S5611, when it is determined that the one-to-one effect is not performed, the current timer pre-reading effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode) and the determination mode of various effects are continued. The process (FIG. 176) is ended without performing any process relating to the one-off effect.

  In such a configuration, when a new winning occurs while the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first leading aspect or the second leading aspect is being executed (in the specific starting area) When the game ball is accepted and the corresponding game information is newly acquired, the above-mentioned notice timer effect is displayed when the variable display which is the target of the timer prefetch effect is started and this is under execution. The above-described advance notice timer effect can be executed so that the ratio to be executed differs depending on the newly acquired game information (hold information). That is, in this case, when the hold information is newly acquired in a period in which the timer prefetch effect of the first leading aspect or the second lead aspect is being executed, the hold information which is the target of the timer prefetch effect is not newly held. Specific hold information acquired is information indicating a specific variation pattern such as SP reach, or information indicating a big hit, or information indicating that a type of big hit is to be transferred to a high probability time short game state, etc. Because the rate at which the advance notice timer effect is executed changes during execution of the variable display which is the target of the timer advance effect depending on whether it is), it is the object of the timer advance effect It is possible to have an expectation for other effects before the variable display is executed, and a decrease in the game entertainment in the period can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired in a period in which the timer prefetch effect of the first leading aspect or the second lead aspect is being executed, the hold information which is the target of the timer prefetch effect is not selected. Depending on whether or not the newly acquired hold information is a specific game information, the modification process (step S5602) is performed, and then the hold information for which the timer pre-reading effect is targeted is digested. In addition, the background image is changed to the background image at the time of the transition effect, and the display concerning the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed. That is, in this case, the main subject of the effect is the timer pre-read effect until the unusual effect is started, and the effect of giving an expectation to the hold information which is the target of the timer pre-read effect is provided. On the other hand, the main subject of the presentation is changed to the one after the one-off effect is started, and in order to give expectation to the newly obtained hold information including the above-mentioned timer pre-reading effect It will be transferred to the production situation where various productions are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to flexibly change the subject of the effect when the hold of high expectation is acquired more than the hold information which is the target of the timer pre-read effect, and it has already been set. It can be avoided that the presentation time for the high-retention information with a high degree of expectation is taken away by the presentation.

  Note that such an unusual effect may be executed even if the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect indicates that the jackpot will be won. That is, in this case, the jackpot effect appears in the hold that is digested before that despite the fact that the main actor of the effect has shifted to the newly held hold information, so a surprise effect is realized. And the decline in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the process (FIG. 176) according to the above-mentioned one change effect is executed when the hold information is newly acquired in a period in which the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed. However, the process (FIG. 176) according to the above variation may be executed even when the hold information is newly acquired in a period in which the timer pre-reading effect of the third leading aspect is being executed. .

  In addition, the background image at the time of the one-off effect may be continued even after the fluctuation display according to the on-hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is ended. That is, in this case, with respect to the suspension information to be digested after the fluctuation display according to the suspension information which is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is finished, it functions as a one-change gasse effect.

  In addition, with regard to such a one-off effect, even when the timer pre-reading effect is not executed, it may be executed on the condition that the new winning is generated and a specific condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, the table referred to when determining the effect pattern (SP reach etc.) and the advance notice lottery for all the pending information stored before the new winning is changed to one different from that at the normal time. The setting for setting (such as setting of a one-change flag) is made, whereby the appearance probability of various effects will change unless it is a one-change gasse effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the ratio at which the advance notice timer effect is executed is changed at the time of the one change effect, but at the time of setting the one change flag, the change side timer is determined by determining the effect pattern different from the normal time. You may make it change the ratio by which presentation is performed. Thereby, even if it is a fluctuation number that does not cause the fluctuation-side timer effect to appear at the time of non-execution of the one-change effect, the fluctuation-side timer effect appears at the time of execution of the one-change effect or Even if it is a number, it becomes possible to control so as not to make the fluctuation-side timer effect appear at the time of execution of the one-change effect.

  In addition, when it is made to perform such one change production, even if it is made to appear timer production at the time of non-execution of one change production, possibility that the fluctuation side timer production will not appear at the time of execution of one change production. Because there is also a concern about the decline in gaming interest, at the time of execution of the special effect, if it is won by selecting a lottery for a special advance effect that can not appear at normal times (during non-execution of the special effect), the special advance notice You may control so that an effect may appear.

  In addition, the rate at which the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the variable display which has been the target of the timer prefetch effect at the time of the unusual effect does not necessarily have to be constant (here, 50%). It may be controlled differently depending on whether or not the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display that has become.

  The contents of the effects of the above-described timer effect example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. Here, the processing example according to each effect described above is merely an example, and for example, effects other than the types described above may be executed as the contents of the advance effect, or the appearance timing of each advance effect or The appearance conditions and the like may be appropriately changed as long as they are within the same technical concept. Therefore, in the example of effects described below, although the processing contents according to the above-mentioned each effect may not be included in the processing content, it is within the scope of the same technical concept and within the feasible range by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the process contents are simply changed appropriately. Also, the following "timer effect" basically means that count display is executed by the notice-side timer effect or the fluctuation-side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning that includes timer pre-reading effect. Moreover, although it is supposed that "the number of seconds" is counted below also as an aspect of "count display", it is not restricted to this.

  FIG. 177 (A) shows an effect situation in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being zero. In FIG. 177 (B), two winnings occur during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (A), and the suspension information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the suspension for which the first winning is achieved The on-hold display corresponding to 1 indicates the normal-on-hold mode, and the on-hold display corresponding to the on-hold 2 on which the second prize is won is displayed in red mode. FIG. 177 (C) shows that the suspension information is first-in-first-out after the decorative symbol SZ that was in the state of the variable display in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (B) is stopped and displayed with the lost symbol. In the mode of (2), there is shown an effect situation in which the hold information stored as hold 1 has been digested and changed into a change state. In this example of effect, as is clear from the figure, even when the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of the variable display (state of hold 0) is shown, it is shown at hold 1 The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the hold display (hold 0 display of hold 0). In addition, it is described above that the hold display of the hold 0 can be further changed in the state of the hold change (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in the state of such variable display It is street.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (C), the hold information in the state of hold 1 in FIGS. 177 (A) and (B) is digested and the variable display is started. The hold pre-reading effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Although the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect may be performed by any of the first preceding aspect, the second preceding aspect, and the third preceding aspect described above, the pending look-ahead is performed in the situation shown in FIG. The fact that a rendition has appeared means that the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variable display) or the hold information of hold 1 is targeted for the hold pre-reading effect (an example here) Then, the hold information of hold 1 is targeted for the hold pre-reading effect).

  In FIG. 177 (D), one winning combination occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (C), and the holding information corresponding to the winning is normally held as a holding display corresponding to holding 2 Shows the rendering situation displayed in the form of. However, assuming that the hold display corresponding to the hold 2 indicates specific game information (here, the big hit information) and satisfies the execution condition of the above-mentioned one change effect, it is shown in FIG. 177 (E). As described above, control relating to the one-off effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2.

  As described above, with the unique effect, the content of the pending information (here, pending 1) stored in the pending state before the pending information (here, pending 2) causing the one-off effect is pending and pending It is to be digested. On the other hand, the above-mentioned one change gasse effect occurs, for example, when the hold display corresponding to the hold 2 does not indicate a specific game information (here, the big hit information), a hold that generates the one change gasse effect The information is stored before the information (here, hold 2), and the contents of the hold information (here, hold 1) that is in the hold state are subjected to hold digestion without being changed. That is, in this case, since the easiness of occurrence of various effects will be different when the hold 1 is digested depending on which of the one change and the one change Gase is performed, the generation status of these effects is specified in particular. It is possible for the player to guess whether or not the hold indicating the game information is included (which is one of the one-off effect and the one-off effect), so that the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed. It is desirable to control so that a pending change does not occur regardless of the result of the big hit judgment about the pending display (here, the pending 2) corresponding to those effects in any of the one-change production and the one-change production.

  Therefore, with regard to the timing at which control relating to such an effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to such a hold 2, it is after the end of the fluctuation display of the hold 0 that is not a target of modification of the hold information. It is preferable that the change indication of the hold 1 to be modified of the hold information be started before it is started. In this point, in this embodiment, after the lost symbol is stopped by the fluctuation display of the suspension 0, when the suspension display of the suspension 1 is not yet shifted and displayed, the control according to the variation effect is executed. In addition to changing the hold information of hold 1 (especially, information related to the effect), as shown in FIG. 177 (E), the timer prefetching effect or the mode (red) of the hold change that has been displayed so far While making it non-displayed (it displays normally in the mode of suspension), it is supposed that the background image is changed to the background image when a change effect is performed. At this time, a predetermined display image (here, “one change”) is displayed for a predetermined time.

  Also, in such an effect situation (FIG. 177 (E)), the timer prefetching effect which has appeared until then until the end of the fluctuation display of hold 0 continues the display without starting the count display. Since it is stored, it is possible to recognize that the target of the timer pre-reading effect is hold 1.

  In (F) of FIG. 177, after the appearance of the unusual effect background shown in (E) of FIG. 177, the suspension information stored as suspension 1 is digested by the shift operation of the suspension information and is changed. It shows the production situation.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), the hold information in the state of hold 1 at the time of FIG. 177 (E) is digested and the variable display is started or the same The count display of the timer effect is started after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation display. Also, similarly to this, in the situation of presentation shown in FIG. 177 (F), a specific display (here, “Please let the conversation announcement appear”) related to the first presentation (here, “dialogue notice”) is displayed It is done. The timing at which the specific display (to make the conversation announcement appear) may be before the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears, or after the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears. It is also possible to appear at an appropriate timing.

  It should be noted that the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects and decoration symbols, including the case of the timer prefetch effect (FIG. 177 (D)), and here, A part of the display range (left part) of the preview effects for displaying "Please make the conversation preview appear" in the so-called ticker mode (slide image) is hidden by the timer effect displayed prior to this ing.

  In addition, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), since the timer effect starts counting display with a relatively small number of counts such as "10 seconds", the effect of low expectation is concerned if only this is seen There is a high possibility that it is targeted for the timer effect, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. However, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), a specific display (conversation notice to the effect that the effect type (conversation notice) appearing at a relatively early stage is displayed among the effect types targeted for the effect of the timer effect It is expected that it is suggested that the target of the timer effect is “a conversation announcement that appears in a relatively early stage” and the jackpot is won by the mission success. As a result, the decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

  In addition, when the one-off effect is being executed, as described above, the timer effect appears at a probability different from that at the normal time. For example, when the timer pre-reading effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the first leading mode (prediction of timer occurrence), the timer effect appears only with a probability of about 20% under normal conditions. On the other hand, when the one-off effect is being executed, the timer effect comes to appear with a probability of approximately 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect appears in such an unusual effect background appearing, it is not the one variation Gasse effect (approximately 20%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change, but the one in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. The sense of expectation that approximately 50% is being executed, and consequently the sense of expectation for winning a big hit (because it is determined that the big hit is included when the special effect is executed) will be enhanced. However, in this case, when the timer effect does not appear while such an unusual effect background appears, it is not the unusual effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, and the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change This will result in an increase in the level of concern over which a one-off shift (about 20%) has been implemented.

  When the timer pre-reading effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the third leading mode (during timer preparation), the timer effect appears with a probability of 100% under normal conditions. When the one-off effect is being executed, the timer effect only appears with a probability of about 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect does not appear while such a strange effect background appears, it is not the one-change-gasse effect (approximately 100%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change, but the one in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. It will be definitively suggested that rendition (approximately 50%) is being carried out and, in turn, that there will be hold information for winning a big hit. However, in this case, when the timer effect appears in such an unusual effect background, it is not an irregular effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, but an irregular change in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. It is a result that the degree of concern for which the presentation (approximately 100%) is being executed is increased.

  In FIG. 178 (G), the timer related signal indicating that the count display of the timer effect executed in FIG. 177 (F) has reached a predetermined numerical value (here 0) and has reached the predetermined numerical value (here 0) The display (here, "Yuku") shows the rendering situation that has appeared. Note that the timer related display (here, “go”) indicating that the predetermined numerical value (0 in this case) has been reached may appear after the count display of the timer effect is not displayed.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (G), since the count display has reached a predetermined value while the mission display (display conversation announcement) is still displayed, some effect is provided as an effect target of the timer effect. It is a situation that is definitely suggested to be in a situation that is about to appear right now, and it can be said that a great deal of attention is drawn to whether or not a speech advance notice appears as the effect.

  In FIG. 178 (H), after the timer effect which has reached the predetermined value in FIG. 178 (G) and the timer related display thereof are hidden, respectively, the conversation announcement is made as the effect to be the effect of the timer effect (here, "I think it might be a chance," shows the rendering situation that appeared. Immediately after this, a special display indicating that the mission is successful appears in the mission effect (display the conversation notice).

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (H), since it is shown that the mission is successful in the mission effect (display conversation announcement), it is definitely suggested that the jackpot will be won.

  In Fig. 178 (I), after the mission is successful in Fig. 178 (H), the variable display is stopped at the lost design despite the fact that the special display (here, "mission successful!") Appears. Shows the stage of the production.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, with regard to the specific display related to the first effect (here, “conversation notice”) (here, “display the talk notice”), the hold information to be the target of the effect (In the situation shown in FIG. 178 (I), it is possible to appear within the period of the variable display according to the hold 1), and of course, under predetermined conditions, the pending information prior to the variable display (FIG. 178 (I In the situation shown in), it is possible to appear earlier also within the period of the variable display according to the hold 0). Moreover, the timing at which the first effect (here, "conversation notice") is displayed and the special display (here, "mission success!") Itself is also the hold information to be the object of the effect (big hit Of being allowed to appear within the period of the variable display according to the pending information), and under a predetermined condition, within the period of the variable display according to the pending information (the pending information that does not make a big hit) before the variable display It is also possible to appear in advance in.

  According to such a configuration, although the special display (here, “mission success!”) Appears in the mission effect and it is definitely suggested to be a big hit, the variable display ends with the lost symbol Since it becomes (stopped), an unexpected situation will occur as a player. However, after this, when the next variable display is started, the variable display will be terminated (stopped) with a big hit symbol, so that a sense of well-being after being dropped to a desperate state will be given . As a result, it becomes possible to add dramatic intonation even after it is definitely suggested to become a big hit, so that it is possible to maintain the game interest until the big hit symbol is stopped. become.

  However, when the special display is made to appear in advance in this way, there is a concern that the player's side complaints to the hole side will occur when the variable display is ended (stopped) with the lost symbol. Therefore, in the case of the lost change in which the special display appears first, the rate at which the pre-reading effect over the next change display (the change display that becomes the big hit) is executed does not appear in the execution period of the change display. It is desirable to set it higher than when. In this demonstration example, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), after the mission is achieved in FIG. 178 (H), the timer within the period until the fluctuation display is ended (stopped) with the lost symbol The pre-reading effect is to be newly generated. According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the count display of the timer effect is started, the lost symbol is displayed in the variable display, and the variable display in which the count display of the timer effect is started appears It is possible to realize an effect as if the variation display showing the big hit symbol is carried over. As a result, when the variable display is ended (stopped) with the lost symbol, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the player's complaint on the hole side.

  However, the look-ahead effect across multiple variable display (up to the variable display that becomes a big hit) may not necessarily be executed, and in this sense, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the hold information that the jackpot symbol appears It is desirable to continue to display the special display (here, “Mission success!”) That appears within the execution period of the variable display in which the lost symbol appears, even after the variable display is started and the variable display is started. In this respect, if such a special display (here, “mission success!”) Is continuously displayed until the big hit symbol appears in the variation display where the big hit symbol appears, the production until the big hit symbol is stopped Since there is a concern that the game interest will be lowered without being given a physical tonic, as shown in FIG. 178 (K), a stage image that is definitely suggested to be won as a stage effect in the stage pattern It is desirable to hide the special display (here, “mission success!”) Before the timing of As a result, after the special display (here, “mission success!”) Is hidden, the effect image shown in FIG. 178 (K) (determine that the jackpot will be won as the effect content in the effect pattern) Until the appearance of the suggested effect image), the anxieties about the appearance of the jackpot symbol increase to some extent, and the effect situation (the jackpot symbol is stopped) shown in FIG. 178 (L) It will be expected to maintain the game entertainment taste properly until it becomes.

  In FIG. 178 (J), the count display of the timer effect of 30 seconds is started, and after the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (J) appears, the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (K) is While the timer effect display of the 30 seconds is finished and the timer related display (here, "Go") is displayed, the effect to be the effect target is generated until the appearance. Needless to say.

  Next, another timer effect example different from the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 179 (A) shows an effect situation in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being zero. In FIG. 179 (B), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (A), three winnings occur and the suspension information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the first winning is the suspension An effect in which the hold display corresponding to 1 is normally held, the hold display corresponding to hold 2 winning the second is red, and the hold display corresponding to hold 3 the third win is displayed in blue. Indicates the situation. In FIG. 179 (C), after the decorative symbol SZ which was in the state of the variable display in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (B) is stopped and displayed with the lost symbol, the hold information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) In the mode of (2), there is shown an effect situation in which the hold information stored as hold 1 has been digested and changed into a change state. Note that, even in the example of this effect, as is clear from the figure, even when the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the variable display state (hold 0 state) is shown, it is shown at hold 1 The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the on-hold display (on-hold display of on-hold 0). In addition, it is described above that the hold display of the hold 0 can be further changed in the state of the hold change (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in the state of such variable display It is street. Further, in FIGS. 179 and 180, in FIGS. 177 and 178, the movable body KT for effect which is omitted for convenience of description is shown in the figure. The movable body KT may be, for example, a back-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-up left movable effect unit 3200, a back-left movable effect unit 3300, a back-up middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-back front movable effect unit 3500, etc. Equivalent to the movable member etc.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold information in the state of hold 1 in FIGS. 179 (A) and (B) is digested and the variable display is started. The hold pre-reading effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Although the aspect of the pending look-ahead effect may be performed in any of the first preceding aspect, the second preceding aspect, and the third preceding aspect described above, the pending look-ahead is performed in the situation shown in FIG. 179 (C). The fact that a rendition has appeared means that either the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variable display), the hold information of hold 1 or the hold information of hold 2 is targeted for the hold pre-reading effect (In this example, the hold information of hold 1 is targeted for the hold pre-reading effect).

  Here, as an aspect of the pre-hold presentation effect, the count display may be performed from when the corresponding on-hold display (here, the on-hold information of the on-hold 1) is still on hold. That is, in this case, it is possible that an event may occur in which the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ is ended after the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”), and the count display is a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) Because the event that the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ ends before the time it reaches to can occur, the target of the timer effect targets any hold information even when the count display is in execution It will be difficult to grasp the

  However, in this rendering example, any one of the first preceding aspect (prediction of timer occurrence), the second leading aspect (timer occurring chance), and the third leading aspect (timer occurring chance) is displayed as the aspect of pending prefetching effect It can be done.

  In this respect, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), of the hold information 0, 1 and 2, the hold information 1 is in the red mode, and is in the mode of the hold display with the highest degree of big hit expectation. In view of the above, it is desirable from the player side that the timer pre-reading effect targets the holding information 1 and generates a combined effect with the red holding display. That is, in this case, since it is indicated that the expectation obtained for the big hit is further high in the suspension information 1 by the combined effect, the timer 0 reading of the suspension 0 of the normal suspension mode and the blue suspension 2 with low expectation. It becomes possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears in any of the hold information 0 to 2 rather than the case where the jackpot expectation is dispersed as the target of the effect. In addition, if the blue reserve 2 with a low degree of expectation is the target of the timer pre-reading effect, there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced, so the blue reserve 2 with a low degree of expectation is a timer for maintaining the game interest. It is also important to make the presentation progress so as not to be the target of pre-reading presentation.

  Moreover, as described above, in this embodiment, when a new winning is generated when the hold information (big hit hold) in which the big hit symbol appears is stored, it is not the normal time table T9a (FIG. 174) but the big hit hold time. With reference to a dedicated table (FIG. 175: special time hold change table T9b), hold change production is performed. In the on-hold change effect using this special-time on-hold change table T9b, red and green are hard to appear as an aspect of the on-hold 2 when a big hit on-hold is already included (when the on-hold 1 in red mode is a big hit) And the aspect of blue and white flickering is relatively easy to appear. Therefore, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), when the timer pre-reading effect targets the hold information 1 and functions to increase the jackpot expectation, the blue hold 2 with low expectation is timerd. Chance up by avoiding the decline of the game interest due to targeting, because the reserve information of reserve 1 of the red form is a big hit is the special case reserve change table T9b (Figure 175) is referred to the blue aspect Chance up by being able to expect that the pending display of pending 2 is blue (with a high probability of appearance) is in the production situation (presence timer effect with high expectation for big hit "production in the running display of variation" Also works as if it supports the fact that "the fluctuation display in action is a big hit" and the chance is raised with the double) From becoming cormorants, it is possible to improve the game playability.

  Therefore, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (B) or (C), when a new winning is generated, a blue or white flickering suspension display newly occurs, or a green or red suspension display is displayed. It is possible to recognize whether a big hit hold is included if it is made to confirm whether it newly occurs, and it can be said that it is in a presentation situation where a new winning is promoted.

  In FIG. 179 (D), the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ that was in the running state is the lost symbol while the aspect of the timer pre-reading effect shown in FIG. After the termination (stop), the suspension information stored in the suspension 1 is digested by the shift operation of each of the suspension information to indicate the effect status in which it is changed.

  When the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (D) is reached, the player is the target of the timer prefetch effect is the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variation display) which is a red aspect, and the blue aspect. It becomes possible to recognize that it is any of the hold information of hold 1 and it is desired to perform count display within the execution period of the variable display according to the hold information of hold 0 which is the red mode.

  Also in this example of the effect, the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case of the timer prefetch effect (FIG. 179 (D)). Here, a partial range (left portion) of the serif portion of the female character in the speech advance notice is hidden by the timer effect displayed prior to this.

  FIG. 179 (E) shows an effect situation in which the timer pre-reading effect ends and the timer effect count display is under execution while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (D) is being executed. .

  However, as described above, whether or not count display is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ according to the digestion of red retention information (whether the timer prefetching is intended for red retention information ) Is a matter of high interest to the player. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, it is difficult to visually recognize from the player side that the count display is in the execution state, the count display in the execution state is performed. The movable body KT for effect is moved forward and controlled so as to be positioned for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, it is confirmed whether or not the timer effect count display is being performed while the timer effect (timer prefetch effect, count display) is being executed and the player is giving a feeling of excitement. By becoming difficult, it becomes possible to further strengthen the attention to the timer effect and to increase the feeling of excitement.

  It should be noted that, in order to preferably realize such an effect, the timer effect is executed, but in a situation where the count display is not executed yet (during timer prefetch effect etc.), the movable body KT for the effect is It is desirable to control so that it does not move (move). That is, in this case, when the player side is not concerned about the presence of the movable body KT for effect, the movable body KT for effect is suddenly moved to make it difficult to see the count display. With such a surprise effect that occurs at the worst timing, it becomes possible to further strengthen the attention to the timer effect and enhance the excitement.

  In addition, as the operation effect by the movable body KT for the effect, it may be made to function only as an effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the timer prefetching effect among the timer effects and make it difficult to visually recognize the count display It may be made to function also as target notice E2 (first effect). That is, in this case, although there is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) which is not a target of the timer effect and is not originally related, a non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed during execution of the count display. By becoming (Fig. 179 (E)), for example, a big hit expectation degree higher than the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (Fig. 179 (F)) comes to be shown, and the game interest is improved. Will be able to

  As described above, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 (here, the action presentation by the movable body KT for presentation) is performed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, for example, counting In the non-execution state, it is desirable to indicate the jackpot expectation depending on which of the light emission modes (blue, green, red) appears when the movable body KT for effect operates. At this time, when the movable body KT for presentation is operated in the red light emission mode, the jackpot may have an expectation higher than the cut-in presentation shown in the next presentation situation (FIG. 179 (F)). The expected value of the jackpot expectation degree when the motion production by the movable body KT for presentation occurs is lower than the expected value of the jackpot expectation degree of the cut-in presentation shown in the next rendering situation (FIG. 179 (F)) Are required to However, as described above, when performing the operation effect by the movable body KT for effect during the execution of the count display, even if any of blue, green, and red appears as the light emission mode, the operation for the effect is It is desirable to control the jackpot expectation indicated by the action effect by the body KT to be the same (for example, 70%). According to such a configuration, while the count display is being executed, it is not the operation rendition by the movable body KT for presentation, but not how the operation rendition by the movable body KT for presentation is generated. Since it comes to gather, it is avoided that a game interest will fall by the aspect when the operation | movement production | presentation by the movable body KT for this production | generation generate | occur | produces.

  By the way, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 179 (E), the above-mentioned double chance up is succeeded because the target of the timer pre-reading rendering is the red mode 1 instead of the blue mode mode 2 In addition, chances are also raised by the execution of the non-target notice E2 (here, the action presentation by the movable body KT for presentation) is executed during the execution of the count display. Therefore, if it is suggested that there is a high possibility of not winning a big hit in the variable display despite being in such a high-representation stage situation, the game interest is originally enhanced It is inevitable that the game interest will be significantly reduced in the supposed variable display. In this point, in the above special time reserve change table T9b (FIG. 175) which is referred to when the big hit reserve (including the reserve 0) is included, the green or red aspect is suspended when a new winning is generated. Since information is less likely to appear, a big hit is included if Hold 2 corresponding to the occurrence of a new prize is held in red mode in the staging situation shown in FIG. 179 (E). It may happen that the player is exposed to the fact that he is not

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, new winnings can be made during a period in which count display of a specific timer effect which is regarded as an aspect having a high degree of expectation among timer effects is performed, or in a subsequent period. Control that makes it difficult to recognize the mode (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even if a warning occurs, and that the mode becomes difficult to recognize even if the hold display that has already been displayed is further changed to hold I will do it. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (E), it is difficult to recognize the mode of the hold display by hiding the holds 1 and 2 and displaying them by the shadow, but the hold display itself in the effect display device 1600 May be hidden. As a result, although the count display with a high degree of expectation is being executed, it is avoided that the game interest is reduced by the green and red hold display appearing when a new winning is generated. become.

  In FIG. 179 (F), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 179 (E) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here, “Go”) is displayed, This shows the effect situation in which the effect to be the effect of the timer effect (cut-in effect by the ally character) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 179 (F), in the situation where the effect (the cut-in effect by the ally character) that is the target of the timer effect is being executed, the holdings 1 and 2 remain hidden, and the shadows The mode of the pending display is made difficult to recognize.

  In FIG. 180 (G), after the effect to be the effect target of the timer effect in FIG. 180 (F) (cut-in effect by the ally character) is executed, the variation display is performed by the ally character winning the enemy character. It shows the production situation shown to be decided and stopped by the jackpot symbol.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), since it is definitely suggested to be a big hit, the game interest is lowered even if any of the modes appears as the modes of holding 1 and 2 There is no such thing. Therefore, with regard to the reservations 1 and 2 which are difficult to recognize, after displaying the effect indicating whether or not to be a big hit in this way, it is displayed in a form that can be recognized which mode is appearing It is desirable to be done. That is, in this case, even if it is shown that the ally character loses the enemy character and the variable display is decidedly stopped due to a loss, as a result that the modes of holding 1 and 2 become recognizable at that time, it is held. Since it may be recognized that one of 1 and 2 is a red or rainbow aspect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment.

  Also, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), a new timer effect is generated and the count display is started. In this count display, the remaining count is left as it is (the count is displayed at the start of the count display even in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) in which the big hit symbol is fixedly stopped and the variable display is ended. Among them, the number of counts which is smaller than the smallest number of counts (10 seconds) remains, and it is continued even after the fluctuation display is finished, without generating the effect to be the target of the timer effect. The above-mentioned special timer effect is executed.

  However, after this, while the opening effect is performed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (I), the count display of the timer effect is not displayed. Thus, the variable display (symbol effect) ended in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) and the effect (big hit game effect) in the big hit game started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J) are It becomes possible to recognize that the effects are not connected to each other, and the player can thus enjoy the newly started effects with a fresh feeling.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is executed in a secret manner as time passes even during the period when the count display of the timer effect is not displayed (execution period of the opening effect). When redisplaying the count display of the timer effect in the effect (big hit game effect) in the big hit game started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J), the numerical value of the count display is advanced by that amount I am trying to As a result, a presentation situation is generated as if the remaining time until the count display of the timer presentation reaches the predetermined value is rapidly reduced, so that the player's side can not be prepared for the feeling. It becomes possible to make the display reach a predetermined numerical value, and it is suitably avoided that the timer effect continued from the state of the variable display becomes a manner.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment controls the timer effect thus continued from the state of the variable display so that the count display reaches a predetermined value within the big hit game execution period. At this time, the point of causing the timer related display (here, "go") to suggest that the predetermined numerical value (0 in this case) is reached is the same as the timer effect performed in the period of the variable display.

  In FIG. 180 (K), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 180 (J) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here, “Go”) is displayed, It shows an effect situation in which a specific effect (corresponding to the above-mentioned first special effect or second special effect, and “CHANCE” displayed in the drawing) to be the effect of the timer effect is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (K), in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a according to this embodiment, the specific effect (“CHANCE” display) can be executed within the execution period of the big hit game, and the specific effect (“ When the "CHANCE" display is executed, the type of jackpot that wins the jackpot advantageous to the player (for example, the type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, or the probability of short time gaming state after the end of the jackpot game) Is to be shown to have a high degree of expectation, which is the type of occurrence of The ratio may be 100%. As described above, when the above-mentioned special timer effect in which the count display is continued until the big hit game is started is executed, not only the big hit determination but also the big hit winning is a big hit type advantageous to the player. Since a certain degree of expectation also increases, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  After this, an effect is produced in which the ally character fights against the enemy character in a specific round game or the like, and as a result, when the ally character wins (Fig. 180 (L)) Will be shown. When the ally character loses the effect, it is indicated that the winning jackpot is not a jackpot type advantageous to the player.

  In this way, when the result of the effect in the big hit game appears, the game will be advanced with the contents according to the result, for example, when the result is obtained that the allied character wins, the big hit game is executed until 16 rounds Or, after the end of the big hit game will be controlled to high probability time short state. On the other hand, if a result is obtained that the allied character loses, a big hit game is ended in eight rounds, or a game state with a lower degree of advantage than the high probability time short state after the end of the big hit game (for example, low probability) Time control, etc.).

  Here, the effect contents of the specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) shown in FIG. 180 (K) may be related to the effect that the teammate character fights against the enemy character in the specific round game. For example, it is possible to set the contents of the effect that the teammate character acquires a weapon by the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K) and execute the effect of fighting the enemy character using the weapon acquired in the specific round game. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K), it can be implied that the possibility that the allied character will win in the subsequent battle is increased.

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself that may appear when such a timer effect is performed, and various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described. In addition, while being able to perform combining each effect suitably demonstrated below between the effects, it is possible to perform combining suitably also between each effect mentioned above. Moreover, although the case where it is performed as a notice side timer effect is described in each example of presentation below, it may be made to be performed not as a notice side timer effect but as a fluctuation side timer effect. That is, in this case, the effect contents according to each of the following effect examples will be determined in advance as effect contents of the fluctuation pattern.

[Timer target exclusion effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, feature A operation, special timer, cut-in B, feature B operation, etc.) as effect candidates to be timer targets The timer effect is prepared by setting any of the effect modes as a timer target (count target) (timer object advance notice lottery) and displaying a timing for the effect mode targeted for the timer to appear. Run. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action (feature A notice), special timer, cut-in B, feature B action It is performed while it is unclear which of the (character item B notice) is the timer target, and the effect mode (the timer target notice) which is not the timer target in such a rendering situation A display may be provided that suggests which effect mode is not determined as the timer target in the lottery (timer object exclusion effect).

  That is, in this case, at the stage where the remaining count in the timer effect is being digested, an estimation material as to which of the effect modes which are the timer object is provided. For example, when a low expectation effect mode (for example, conversation announcement) is suggested as a play mode not targeted for the timer, the possibility that the low expectation effect mode appears as the timer target is excluded at that time. Since it is a stage where the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed, a high expectation performance mode (for example, the character B action etc.) is expected to appear as a timer target, but the game is entertaining It is expected to improve the In addition, when a high expectation effect mode (for example, a character B action etc.) is suggested as an effect mode that is not a timer target, it is determined that the timer effect can not be expected at that time. It will be possible to focus attention on the effects, and it is expected to suppress the decline in the amusement when the count display reaches a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the expectation for the timer effect without changing the mode of the count display itself while digesting the remaining count.

  FIG. 181 (a) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) In a situation, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer object exclusion presentation performed when change numbers 7 and 8 (refer to Drawing 148) equivalent to "there is no timer character reach" are chosen. FIG. 181 (b) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer target exclusion presentation performed when change numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected in the situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), a specific timer type (one of “hold change 5”, “part A operation 3” and “special timer 1”) as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) The timer target exclusion effect is to be executed when is selected (see FIG. 161), and even in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), a specific timer type (as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) The timer target exclusion effect is executed when “hold change 5”, “character item A operation 3”, or “character item B operation 1” is selected (see FIG. 161).

  However, the timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, the timer type is not relevant, and the type of fluctuation pattern is Alternatively, it may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained by a predetermined effect drawing based on the result of the big hit determination or the like. As will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be caused to appear in the fluctuation pattern in which the timer effect is determined not to be executed, or may be caused to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed (for the timer object advance effect) later (though it is unclear whether it is executed), the effect which does not appear as the timer object It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type the aspect is. In addition, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (a state in which even the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed), the timer effect is subsequently performed as compared to the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable that the rate at which is performed is high, and that it is also performed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is to be performed.

  First, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "hold change 5" or "character A action 3" among the examples shown in FIG. 181 (a), 20 seconds have passed since the start of symbol fluctuation. At the hit timing, the count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“hold change 5” or “character item A action”) being a timer target 3 ") is to appear.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b) where the timer effect is executed in the mode of "hold change 5" or "character A action 3", similarly, 20 seconds after the start of symbol fluctuation At the timing when it has passed, the count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“hold change 5” or “feature A action 3 ") is supposed to appear.

  In this case, in the case of these examples, although 10 seconds have passed since the start of symbol variation, the timer effect has not yet been executed (the timer pre-read effect is not even displayed). The first timer target exclusion effect may occur. In the first timer target exclusion effect, for example, it is indicated that "conversation annunciation" is not a candidate for the timer target, and when the timer effect is generated within the variation, the timer target candidate It becomes possible for the player to grasp that the stop change has been restricted to any of the hold change, the cut-in A, the character A operation, the special timer, the cut-in B, and the character B operation. That is, in this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer, cut-in B, character B action), the low expected effect is out of timer candidate candidates Since it becomes possible to recognize that the high expectation effect mode has the expectation of being the candidate for the timer object, the player wishes that the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation. As a result, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state.

  In the period when the count display is not executed (in this example, the period from the start of symbol fluctuation to the lapse of 20 seconds), the above-mentioned timer look-ahead effect (the first leading aspect, the second) The preceding aspect, the third preceding aspect) may be displayed.

  Next, at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation, a second timer target exclusion effect may occur in accordance with the start of count display in the timer effect. In the second timer target excluded effect, effects other than the effect (conversation notice) excluded in the first timer target excluded effect are excluded. For example, in the second timer target exclusion effect, when it is indicated that the "special timer" is not a candidate for timer target, the candidate timer target is pending change, cut-in A, role-of-article A operation, cut-in B , It becomes possible for the player to know that one of the feature B operations has been narrowed. In this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer, cut-in B, character B action), the effect mode that is determined to be a big hit is a timer target candidate As it becomes possible to recognize that it has come off, it is possible to get a sense of apprehension about whether a high expectation effect will appear as a timer target in reverse from when the first timer target exclusion effect is executed. Become.

  Then, a third timer target exclusion effect may be generated at a timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation. In the third timer target exclusion effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice, special timer) excluded in the first and second timer target exclusion effects are further excluded. For example, when it is indicated that "cut-in B" is not a candidate for the timer target, the candidate for the timer target is narrowed to any one of the hold change, the cut-in A, the feature A operation, and the feature B operation. It becomes possible for the player to be able to grasp that.

  Then, at the timing when 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the count display will reach a predetermined value (here, 0), and the effect mode ("hold change 5" has been determined by the timer target advance lottery). In the case of “], a hold change occurs, and in the case of“ character product A operation 3 ”, a character product A operation occurs” is executed as a timer target effect.

  By the way, in the timer effect of “hold change 5” and “character A action 3” shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and (b), when 40 seconds have passed since the start of symbol change, the timer target Although the effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162 together, in the timer effect of such an aspect (a timer effect in which the effect of the timer object is executed when 40 seconds have elapsed) It can be understood that there are only three prepared as the target of the timer effect: conversation notice, hold change, and feature operation. That is, in this case, the experienced player confirms that the timer target of the mode in which the count display reaches the predetermined value has occurred at the timing of 40 seconds after the start of the symbol variation, the timer target is the conversation notice. , Not one of the seven changes of hold change, cut-in A, character A action, special timer, cut-in B, and character B action, but three of conversation notice, hold change, and character A action It is assumed that the At this time, if there are cases where two effects of the conversation announcement, the hold change, and the character A action are excluded due to the timer target exclusion effect respectively, which effect is displayed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it appears or is exposed, it is desirable to execute the timer target exclusion effect such that at least two effects are left as timer effect candidates.

  According to such a timer target exclusion effect, when the timer effect (count display) is in the unexecuted state or when the count display is being performed, it causes anticipation in anticipation or anxiety (any effect is outside the timer object) Can be given according to whether they are played, it is expected to maintain the game interest while the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and (b), the timing at which the timer target exclusion effect is generated is the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case) (or the timer target effect) Is set according to arrival of any of a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc. from the start of fluctuation) prepared as a candidate for the timing of appearance of.

  For example, looking at the time charts shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, when 45 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, “action A feature” is an effect of the timer even if the count display becomes 0 thereafter. It turns out that there is no possibility of appearing. As described above, in the timer effect, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (in this example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation) There is a relationship that the types of effects that can appear as timer objects are narrowed down as the In this respect, by performing the timer target exclusion effect, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case) (even in this example, the variation starts) even for beginners Can recognize that the types of effects that can appear as timer targets will be narrowed as 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.) pass, and timer effects can be enjoyed at a high level .

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of “special timer 1” (count display with a count number of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the symbol variation of character reach) In the example performed), every 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer target exclusion effect, 4 The timer target exclusion effects of the second time are respectively executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "character product B operation 1" (count having a count number of 70 seconds according to the start of symbol variation of SP reach) In the example in which the display is performed, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, and the third timer each time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, and 50 seconds elapse from the start of fluctuation. The target exclusion effect, the fourth timer target exclusion effect, and the fifth timer target exclusion effect are respectively executed.

  In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect according to the present embodiment, every time a plurality of predetermined timings come after the start of symbol variation, it suggests one effect mode that is not the timer target in the count effect. I did it. However, it is not necessary to execute the timer target exclusion effect each time a plurality of predetermined timings come, and each time the timings come based on the type of fluctuation pattern, the result of the big hit judgment, etc., a predetermined probability At this time, the timer target exclusion effect may appear, or the timing for executing the timer target exclusion effect may be selected from these timings. At this time, the execution probability of the timer target exclusion effect may be made different for each of a plurality of predetermined timings. For example, at a relatively early timing (for example, the timing when the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) may occur) after the start of the symbol variation, the symbol variation is relatively started after the symbol variation starts. If the ratio at which the timer target exclusion effect is performed is higher than the late timing (for example, the timing at which the fourth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) may occur), one effect is achieved. It is possible to digest the count display over a relatively long time, with the indication that the aspect is not timer targeted. However, in this case, when the timer target exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the first timer target exclusion effect can occur and when the timer target exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the fourth timer object exclusion effect can occur It is desirable that the proportion (expected degree) in which the jackpot symbol appears be the same (and even if the timer target exclusion effect is executed at any timing). In this case, the expectation may include 100%. According to such a configuration, the timer target exclusion effect appears at an early timing (while the rate at which the timer target exclusion effect is performed is increased) after the count display is started (after the symbol is started to change). As you become aware of what you do, you will be expected to try to improve the fun of the game from the beginning of the production.

  When such an effect is realized, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first targets the timer based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "Hold change 5" of Character Reach). Whether the exclusion effect is to be generated or the determination as to which timing (in the example of FIG. 181 (a), the maximum of three timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds)) to generate the timer object exclusion effect Do the processing. Next, a determination process is performed as to which of the effect modes is suggested as an effect mode that is not a timer object at each timing at which it is determined that the timer object exclusion effect is to be generated. These determination processes are performed after each process shown in FIG. 149, or after step S5510 and before step S5511, for example, before each process. It is possible to do based on the result information of processing.

  Alternatively, a timer target exclusion effect may be performed for exclusive use (speech alert only) indicating that a specific effect mode (for example, conversational alert) is not a timer target. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first removes the dedicated timer target exclusion effect based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "pending change 5" of character reach). It will be determined whether or not to be generated, and further at which timing the dedicated timer target exclusion effect is to be generated.

  In any case, when the effect mode suggested as the effect mode not targeted for the timer is a effect mode with a relatively low expectation, the effect mode suggested is a effect mode with a relatively high expectation It is desirable that the rate of appearance of the high expectation effect mode as the effect of the timer target be higher than when it was. According to such a configuration, when the timer target exclusion effect exclusive for excluding the low-expected effect mode (conversation notice) appears, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  In addition, at least a specific timing of the above plurality of timings, it may be suggested that only a specific effect mode (for example, "conversation notice" which is an expected performance mode with low expectation) is not a timer target It may be set as That is, in this case, when the timer target exclusion effect occurs at a specific timing, it is grasped that the specific effect mode (for example, "conversation notice" which is the effect mode supposedly low expectation) is not the timer object Since it becomes possible, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game by giving a sense of expectation that the timer target effect is in the high expectation effect mode.

  In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect according to the present embodiment, the one effect mode is suggested as the effect not for the timer object, but under predetermined conditions, two or more effects are not for the timer object. It may be made to suggest the presentation aspect of. For example, if two low expectation effects are suggested, it will be possible to greatly enhance the game interest even though the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed.

  In addition, within the period (or, until the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case) after the start of the count display, "the display that suggests which effect mode is not the timer target") It is desirable to make the timer appear in the period until the effect that is the timer target is executed, and to maintain the display during the synchronization period. Furthermore, with regard to "a display that suggests which effect mode is not the timer object", the timer effect can be maintained if the display is maintained after the effect that is the timer object is executed. It becomes possible to use it as a material when remembering which presentation aspect the target of was.

  In addition, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, while the remaining display of the count display is being consumed, for example, “a display that suggests“ a display that indicates which effect mode is not the timer target ”(for example, a specific timer) When a timer effect of a type is executed, the non-display is made non-displayed at a predetermined timing (such as a timing when a specific count value is reached) when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching a predetermined value The count display may reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) while the timer is maintained, and the effect of being subjected to the timer may be executed. That is, in this case, the remaining count of the count display is digested while it is not determined when the "display indicating that the effect mode that is not the timer target" is not displayed. It will be expected to maintain a sense of tension during the same period (a period in which it is easy to become silent). In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, the count display reaches a predetermined value and becomes a timer target for the "display indicating that which effect mode is not the timer target" which is not displayed. It is desirable to maintain the non-display state even after the appearance of the effect mode. However, even if "a display that indicates which effect mode is not the timer object" is not displayed, an effect that is once suggested as an effect mode that is not the timer object is an effect of the timer object It is important to control so as not to appear, and it is possible to enjoy the timer effect with confidence if you do not forget the memory about the effect mode that has been made non-display. Moreover, about "the display which suggests which production mode which is not the timer object which was made non-display", the count display reaches a predetermined value, and also after the production mode which becomes the timer object comes out If the non-display state is maintained (for example, after a predetermined time has passed), the symbol is displayed again at a timing before the symbol is stopped to confirm that the player's memory was correct. It is desirable to be able to do this.

  In addition, even when the "display indicating that the effect mode that is not the timer target is displayed" appears when the timer effect (count display) is not executed, the predetermined effect condition is When satisfied, the timer effect (count display) may be made non-display while being in an unexecuted state. That is, in this case, it is possible to give a sense of tension regarding the timer effect before the count display is started, and it is possible to provide a sharp effect.

  Although it will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 198 (C) to (K) and FIGS. 200 (B) to (J), “a display indicating what kind of effect mode is not the timer target”. In addition, it is sufficient if it can be grasped that the effect mode does not occur when the count display becomes 0. As another method, for example, in addition to a method of displaying the name of the effect mode on the effect display device 1600 and adding an X mark thereto, the conversation notice or cut-in is made before the count display reaches 0. A method to show that a female character or a male character used to perform a death shows that a conversation notice or cut-in can not be executed, or the hold display is monochrome before the count display reaches 0. Show that the products A and B fail and become inoperable at a timing before the count display reaches 0. It is also possible to adopt a feature A operation or a method indicating that B can not be performed. The point is to prepare a special mode that can not appear at a timing before the count display reaches 0 when it is selected as a timer target effect, and at a timing before the count display reaches 0. If an effect that is not subject to timers such as conversational announcements and hold changes is executed in a special mode, it is possible to realize "a display that suggests which effect mode is not subject to timers". .

  Further, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, the high expectation effect mode is easily displayed as the timer target when the count display reaches the predetermined value, as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect is not generated. If such control is performed, it is expected that the game display will be more suitably improved when the count display is remaining and the count is being consumed.

  By the way, when it is suggested that the effect mode (special timer) of the hit determination is not the timer object in the timer target exclusion effect, any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches the predetermined value. Even if it is compared with the effect mode (special timer) of the hit determination, there is a concern that the game interest will fall. Therefore, when it is indicated that the effect mode (special timer) of the hit determination is not the timer target, the symbol is displayed even if any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. The variation may always be stopped at the jackpot symbol.

  Alternatively, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, the jackpot symbol appears even if any effect mode appears as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The ratio (the degree of expectation) may be the same. In this case, the expectation may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to pay attention to which effect mode appears as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value, so that the time at which the timer target exclusion effect appears (the rest of the count The timer effect can be ended early at the stage where the time is being digested). As a result, it becomes possible to shift attention to other effects even though the remaining counts of the count display are being digested, so effect design that increases the types of effects appearing per unit time It will be possible to prompt.

  In addition, if two or more count displays (timer effect) appear in one symbol fluctuation period and the timer target exclusion effect is executed, if an effect that reaches a predetermined value occurs at different timings, the timer It is desirable to control an effect aspect which is suggested not to be a timer target in the target exclusion effect so as not to appear as the timer target in any timer effect (count display).

  In addition, with regard to the effect mode suggested not to be the timer target by the timer target exclusion effect, it does not appear after that even if the timing is different from the timing when the count display reaches the predetermined value. It is desirable to control (control not to appear as an effect that is not a timer target).

  In addition, when executing the timer target exclusion effect, it may be possible to perform an advance effect as to whether or not to suggest that the timer is not targeted. That is, in this case, the timer target exclusion effect is not executed when the predetermined mode does not appear in the leading effect, and the timer target exclusion effect is performed after the predetermined mode appears in the preceding effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the timer target exclusion effect is performed in accordance with any one of a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case). However, the timer target exclusion effect may be performed according to any of a plurality of predetermined timings, and may not necessarily be performed according to these timings. However, it is desirable that the timer target exclusion effect is not performed when it is in a specific effect period such as a period in which the remaining count is low even within the period in which the count display is being performed.

  Further, among the timer types determined in the count display lottery (step S5510), among timer types that are not permitted to execute the timer target exclusion effect over the entire period in which the count display is being executed, and of the periods in which the count display is being executed. In some of the time periods, there may be cases where execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted. By preparing such a special timer type, when the timer type appears, it becomes possible to concentrate on digesting the count display and enjoy the original timer effect. It will be. In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, when it is in a special period during which the timer target exclusion effect can not occur, an effect mode different from that when not in the special period is made to appear and the special period is in this special period. It is important to make it possible for the player to recognize things. On the other hand, even if it is a timer type in which execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted over the entire period in which the count display is executed, concentration on the timer effect is performed in the period before the count display is started. It is desirable to allow execution of the timer exclusion effect, as there is no concern that the will be killed.

  In addition, it is made to control the period which makes non-display the display which suggests "the production mode which is not the timer object" mentioned above as the same period as the period when execution of timer object exclusion production is not permitted. It is also good.

  In addition, when the count display in the timer effect is performed in any of a plurality of modes including at least the first mode and the second mode, and the count display is performed in the second mode, the first process is performed. Control may be performed so that the rate at which the timer target exclusion effect is performed is higher than when count display is performed in an aspect. In this case, the percentage may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the timer target exclusion effect is performed according to the aspect of the count display, and to pay attention to the effect during the count display according to the aspect of the count display.

  The timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, the timer type is not relevant, and the type of fluctuation pattern or the big hit It may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined effect drawing based on the result of the determination or the like. As will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be caused to appear in the fluctuation pattern in which the timer effect is determined not to be executed, or may be caused to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good.

  Also, as described above, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (a state in which even the timer prefetch effect is not displayed), compared to the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. After that, it is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is performed is increased, and the timer effect is preferably performed as an effect that indicates that the timer effect is to be performed. In this sense, the timer target exclusion effect may be executed as a first preceding aspect or a second preceding aspect of the timer prefetching effect. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation for which the timer effect is executed is not started and this is still in the hold state, a specific effect mode that is not targeted by the timer effect can be suggested. A specific effect mode is not targeted for the timer together with speculation such as whether the timer effect appears in the symbol change in the middle, the timer effect appears in the symbol change in the hold state, or the timer effect does not appear, etc. It will be expected to maintain the game interest until the timer effect occurs.

[Timer target advance effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a predetermined effect (character B action) using the specific decoration member (character B) is counted, and the count display toward the timing when the predetermined effect appears is displayed. It runs to a predetermined value within the period when the symbol effect is being performed. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, identification is performed within a period prior to the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the predetermined effect appears. By causing the effect using the decorative member to appear, it can be suggested that a predetermined effect is to be counted (timer object advance effect).

  That is, in this case, by focusing on what effect appears when the remaining count in the count display is being digested, the type of effect appearing when the count display reaches a predetermined value Because it becomes possible to predict, it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment from the start of the count display until the predetermined value is reached.

  FIG. 182 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation where it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). FIG. 148 is a time chart for describing the specific contents of timer target advance effect performed when variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, for convenience of explanation, when any one of the specific timer types (first out timers 1 to 6) not illustrated in FIG. 162 as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) is selected. The timer target advance effect is to be executed. Further, in the first-out timers 4 to 6 of the first-out timers 1 to 6, as the effect of the timer object, the combination of the combination A used in the combination A and the combination B used in the combination B An effect such as "character A & B operation" in which both are operated is performed.

  However, the timer target advance effect is not performed when a specific timer type (first out timer 1 to 6) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), for example, illustrated in FIG. Timer target advance effect may be performed when one of the selected timer types is selected, and the timer type is not relevant, and it is special in a predetermined effect lottery based on the type of fluctuation pattern or the result of the big hit determination. It may be performed based on the result obtained. As will be described later, the timer target advance effect is made to appear in a fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or is caused to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed (for the timer target advance effect) afterward (though it is unclear whether it is executed), the count display of the timer effect It becomes possible to show in advance which type of effect mode appears when the value of R becomes a predetermined value. In this case, when the timer target advance effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (a state in which even the timer prefetch effect display is not displayed), the timer target advance effect will appear later than in the case where the timer target advance effect does not appear. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is performed be high, and that the timer effect be performed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is to be performed.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 182, first, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the first-out timers 1 and 4, the count number of 50 seconds at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation. After the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“feature B operation” or “feature A & B operation”) targeted by the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the first-out timers 2 and 5, the count display having the count number of 70 seconds is started according to the start timing of the symbol variation, and the count display is "0". After it becomes, the effect mode ("action product B operation" or "character A & B operation") which is the timer object appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the first-out timer 3, 6, the display of the timer pre-reading effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode) The timer pre-reading effect is not displayed and the count display having a count number of 20 seconds is started at the timing when 50 seconds have elapsed while the display of the timer pre-reading effect appears and the counting is started. After the display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“action B feature” or “action A & B behavior”) that is the timer object appears.

  In this respect, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, the timer effect is not yet executed (even when the timer advance effect is displayed, at the timing when the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The first timer target advance effect may occur despite the fact that the first timer target is out. In the first timer target advance presentation effect, for example, the combination B used in the "part B operation" or the "part A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer target of the first out timers 1 and 4 is at or near the first position. At this stage, an effect (character B) is made to vibrate.

  In other words, "action B action", which is the effect of the timer object of the advance timer 1, is "effect to displace the object B from the first position to the second position", and is an effect of the timer object of the advance timer 4. The "character A & B operation" is an effect of displacing the character B from the first position to the second position and displacing the character A from the third position to the fourth position, while the first operation The timer target advance effect is common in that it uses the feature B used in the effects, but effects (feature B rattle) different from any of the effects are performed. According to such a configuration, although it is at a stage before the timer effect is performed, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the timer effect will be performed thereafter, and, of course, the target effect in the timer effect is It becomes possible to indicate which of the presentation modes (suggestment of presentation using the character B). In addition, in the first-time timer target first-out effect, by using the character B, the effect (character B), which is different from the effect of the timer B (character B action, character A & B motion), While suggesting that the target effect in the timer effect is the effect using the character B, it conceals how the character B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value Thus, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target is performed.

  Further, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the second timer target is selected while the timer effect count display is being performed. An advance effect may occur. In the second timer target advance presentation effect, for example, from the first position, the combination B used in the "part B operation" or the "part A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer target of the first out timers 1 and 4. An effect (act part B middle action (small)) to be displaced to the “first halfway position between the first position and the second position” is performed.

  That is, the second timer target advance effect is also common in that it uses the character B used in "character B operation" and "character A & B operation", but it is different from any of those effects (character B) It is assumed that the operation (small) is performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is being digested), which effect mode is the target effect It becomes possible to suggest (indicate that it is the effect using the character B). In addition, even in the second timer target advance effect, it is possible to use the character B to perform effects (character B middle operation (small)) different from the timer target effect (character B operation, character A & B operation) By doing this, it is possible to indicate which effect mode the target effect in the timer effect is, but also regarding how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to conceal the game, and it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer object is performed.

  In addition, in the second timer target advance effect, the first timer target advance effect (latter in the vicinity of the “first position”) rather than the range of effects using the feature B (“first position” to “first The range of effects (displacement from the “first position” to the “second position”) that appears when the “displacement to middle position” is large and the “character B operation” or “character A & B motion” is performed It becomes an aspect approaching). Therefore, by comparing the first-time timer target advance effect and the second-time timer target advance effect, the role object B is the effect for the timer target ("the title B action" and "the title A & B action"). It will be possible to provide a guessing material as to how it works.

  Further, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the third timer target is selected while the timer effect count display is being performed. An advance effect may occur. In the third timer target pre-out effect, for example, the first part B from the first position from the first position B for the role B used in the "part B operation" or "character A & B operation" is the effect of the timer target pre-out timer An effect (act part B middle action (large)) of displacing to a second midway position between the midway position of 1 and the second position is performed.

  That is, although the third time timer target advance effect is also common in that it uses the character B used in "character B operation" and "character A & B operation", the effect (character B) A midway operation (large) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is being digested), which effect mode is the target effect It becomes possible to suggest (indicate that it is the effect using the character B). In addition, even in the third timer target advance effect, it is possible to use the character B to perform effects (character B middle operation (large)) different from the effects of the timer object (character B operation, character A & B operation) By doing this, it is possible to indicate which effect mode the target effect in the timer effect is, but also regarding how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to conceal the game, and it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer object is performed.

  Moreover, in the third timer target advance effect, the range of the effect using the character B (the displacement from the “first position” to the “second halfway position”) is greater than in the first and second timer target advance effects. It becomes larger, and it becomes an aspect that comes closer to the range of the effect (displacement from the "first position" to the "second position") that appears when "character B operation" or "character A & B operation" is performed. There is. Therefore, by comparing the first to third timer target advance effects, the bonus item B operates in any mode in the timer target effect (“role item B operation” and “role item A & B operation”) It will be possible to provide more guess material about what to do.

  On the other hand, in the case of the first-out timers 2 and 5, also in the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example 57 seconds) Respective effects such as “character B middle movement (small)” and “character B middle movement (large)” are performed as first to third timer target advance effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the first-out timer 2, 5 in any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the timer target first-out effect is performed in the situation where the count display has consumed the remaining count. It will be done.

  On the other hand, in the case of the first-out timer 3 and 6, also in the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example 57 seconds) The effects such as the object B middle movement (small) and the "character B middle movement (large)" are performed as the first to third timer target advance effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the first-out timers 3 and 6, at each of the timings Ta1 and Ta2, the count display is in an unexecuted state, and the timer pre-reading effect is displayed. Under this condition, the first and second timer target advance effects are performed. According to such a configuration, although the timer target advance effect is executed when the count display is in the unexecuted state, in the case of the mode of the advance output timers 1 and 4 in which even the timer advance effect is not displayed Compared to the above, the percentage of occurrences of events such as “Timer target itself was not executed despite the timer target advance effect being performed” is reduced, so the player also has a higher sense of expectation. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the timer target advance effect.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 182, the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first to third timer target advance effects are executed in this way. After that, after the effect of the timer object is executed, the symbol variation is stopped.

  In addition, in the timer target advance effect according to the present embodiment, each time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive after symbol variation is started, "character B operation" or "character A & B operation" It is decided to perform the rendering using the character B used in. However, it is not necessary to execute the timer target advance effect each time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive, and the timings ta1 to ta3 are based on the type of variation pattern, the result of the big hit determination, etc. The timer target advance effect may appear with a predetermined probability each time it arrives, or the timing at which the timer target advance effect is performed may be selected from these timings. At this time, the execution probability of the timer target advance effect or the selection ratio of the effect contents may be different depending on a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3.

  When such an effect is realized, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first targets the timer based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "First-out timer 1" of SP reach). A determination process (see FIG. 183) is performed as to whether the advance effect is to be generated or at which timing the timer target advance effect is to be generated. Next, determination processing (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is performed as to which effect mode is to be executed as the timer target advance effect at each timing at which it is determined that the timer target advance effect is to be generated. These determination processes are performed after each process shown in FIG. 149, or after step S5510 and before step S5511, for example, before each process. It is possible to do based on the result information of processing.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram showing an example of contents (table T10) of determination processing as to whether to generate timer target advance effect and further at which timing to generate timer target advance effect.

  As described above, with the timer target advance effect, the timer target is within the period before the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target appears, in the period in which the symbol effect is performed, It is an effect that suggests that the effect using the specific decorative member is targeted for the timer by making the effect using the specific decorative member used in the effect of the peripheral control according to this embodiment. The MPU 1511a prepares three timings Ta1 to Ta3 as timings at which such timer target advance effect can appear.

  Therefore, in peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, table T10 shown in FIG. 183 is referred to, and information on the drop information, the information on the type of fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number allocated to those pieces of information The timer target advance effect is to be executed at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (or the timer target advance effect is not performed at any of the timing Ta1 to Ta3) based on

  As shown in FIG. 183, in the table T10, “does not execute timer target advance effect at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“ none ”in the drawing)” as a selection candidate for execution of the timer target advance effect. “Perform timer target advance effect only at timing Ta1 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta1 ”in the figure)”, Execute timer target advance effect only at timing Ta2 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 (FIG. Among them, “Ta2”), “Perform timer target advance effect only at timing Ta3 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta3 ”in the figure), and“ at timing Ta1 and Ta2 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 Execute timer target advance effect (in the figure, "Ta1 2) "," execute timer target advance effect at timings Ta1 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta1 & 3" in the figure), "Timer target at timings Ta2 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 Selection candidates are prepared such as performing advance effect (“Ta2 & 3” in the drawing) and “Performing timer object advance effect at all the timing Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta1 & 2 & 3 ”in the drawing)”.

  In the example of the table T10, when the count display is not being executed and the timer pre-reading effect is not being displayed, the effect random number is distributed so that the timer target advance effect is not performed. Therefore, in the example of the table T10, in the case of the timer types of the special timers 1 and 4, timer target advance effect is not performed at timing T1, timing T1 & T2, timing T1 & T3, timing T1 & T2 & T3. However, as described above, the timer target advance effect may be performed at these timings.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the timer target advance effect is executed is higher than in the case where the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. As well as being set, it is set so that the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed also tends to increase.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer object is "character A & B", compared to when the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer object is "character B" The timer target advance effect is set to be performed at a high rate, and the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed is also increased.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is to be performed at least at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 as a result of performing the determination processing based on the table T10 in this way, The determination process is further performed on the effect type of.

  FIG. 184 shows an example of contents (table T11) of determination processing as to what type of effect mode to be generated at the timing when performing timer target advance effect at any one timing of timing Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T11 shown in FIG. Then, based on the information on the drop information, the information on the type of fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number allocated to the information, any type of rendering mode (“rolling thing B rattle”, It will be judged whether "character B middle movement (small)" and "character B middle movement (large)" are made to appear at one timing that has been determined as described above.

  FIG. 185 shows an example of contents (table T12) of determination processing as to which type of effect mode to be generated at each timing when performing timer target advance effect at any two timings of timing Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is to be performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T12 shown in FIG. Then, based on the information on the drop information, the information on the type of fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number allocated to the information, any type of presentation mode (“ Object B rattle ", character B Batter → character B middle movement (small)", "character B middle movement (small) → character B middle movement (small)", "character B rattle → character B Midway operation (Large), "A character B middle movement (small) → character B middle movement (Large)", "Hole character B middle movement (Large) → character B middle operation (Large)", It will be determined whether or not to appear at each of the two determined timings.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T12 that "character item B rattle → character item B rattle" is made to appear, "character item B rattling" is made at any of the two timings that have been determined. The timer target advance effect is to be executed, and when it is determined that “A character product B rattle → character product B middle movement (small)” is made based on the table T12, the above two determinations have been made. "A character B Battering" is executed as a timer target advance effect at the earlier timing of the timings, and "A character B midway operation (small)" at the timing after the two timings that have been determined as above. Will be executed as a timer target advance effect.

  FIG. 186 shows an example of the content (table T13) of the determination process as to which type the effect mode to be generated at these timings is to be performed when timer target advance effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T13 shown in FIG. Then, based on the information on the drop information, the information on the type of fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number allocated to the information, any type of presentation mode (“ Object B rattle → character object B rattle "" character character B rattle → character object B rattle → character object B middle movement (small), "character object B rattle → character goods B middle movement (small) → character thing B middle Operation (small), "character B middle movement (small) → character B middle movement (small) → character B middle movement (small)", "character B rattle → character B rattle → character B middle Operation (Large), "Character B Battering → Character B Midway Operation (Small) → Character B Midway Operation (Large)", "Character B Midway Operation (Small) → Character B Midway Operation (Small) → Character B middle movement (large), "character B middle movement (small) → character B middle movement (large) → character B middle movement (large), It is determined whether the character B middle movement (large) → character B middle movement (large) → character B middle movement (large) is made to appear at each of the three timings determined above. It will be.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T13 that "character B. rattle → character B. rattle → character B. rattle" is made to appear, "role" is determined at any of the three timings that have been determined. The object B rattle is to be executed as a timer target advance effect, and it is determined based on the table T13 that the character B rattle → the character B middle movement (small) → the character middle B movement (large) is made to appear When one of the three timings is determined to have been made, "feature B rattle" is executed as a timer target advance effect at the first of the three determined timings, and of the three determined timings is executed. At the second timing of, “Act B during the action (small)” is executed as a timer target advance effect, and the above three timings that have been determined to be determined And executes the "character object B middle operation (large)" as the timer object first out effect in the third timing.

  In the example of the tables T11 and T12, the determination process is performed in the same mode (selection ratio) regardless of which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 it is determined to cause the timer target advance effect to appear. The determination process may be performed in another mode (selection ratio) depending on which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 it is determined that the timer target advance effect is to appear. For example, if the timing at which it is determined that the timer target advance appearance effect is determined is late, the determination process is performed in such a manner that the proportion in which the effect mode having a large effect range is selected is higher. It can be estimated based on the size of the range of the effect which appeared by the timer target advance effect that how much time remaining until the target effect is performed is left. And in this case, although it mentions later with reference to FIG. 199 (G), the said timer object is operated by operating a specific decoration member (here, the gift B) in the aspect which overlaps with the count display of timer production by front view. During the execution of the advance effect (character B middle movement (small) and “character B middle movement (large)), it is difficult to visually recognize the count display in order to preferably obtain such effects. By this, when the timer target advance effect is executed without paying much attention to the count display, even if the timer target advance effect is executed at the same timing, the timer object is selected depending on the type of the effect appearing at that time. Be prepared for the effect's rendition to be performed soon (when the range of the rendition is large), or feel that time is left before the rendition for the timer object is performed ( When the range of output is small, it is expected to be entertaining by making it possible to create a gap with the time when the correct remaining count is grasped after that. In this case, while the timer target advance effect is being performed, the count display may be not displayed, and the count display may be redisplayed when the timer target advance effect is finished.

  However, if the specific decoration member (in this case, the character B) is operated in a mode overlapping with the count display of the timer effect in front view, and it is difficult to visually recognize the count display during execution of the timer target advance effect ( Or, when the count display is not displayed), it is misunderstood that the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is being executed although the timer target advance effect is being executed. There is a concern Therefore, it is desirable that while the timer target advance effect is being performed, it is difficult to visually recognize the count display, while the count sound generated according to the execution of the count display is continuously performed. That is, such count sound is output when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and is not output when the effect of the timer target is performed. By continuously outputting the count sound during the execution of the effect, it is expected to suppress false recognition that the effect of the timer object is being performed.

  Further, in the example of the tables T11 to T13, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, compared to the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear, the timer target for out-of-place effect has a large effect range The rate at which the mode is selected is set to be high.

  Further, in the example of the tables T11 to T13, when the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer object is "character A & B", when the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer object is "character B" In comparison, in the timer target advance effect, the ratio in which the effect mode having a large effect range is selected is set to be high.

  Further, in the example of the tables T12 and T13, when the late timing among the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is compared with the early timing among the timings Ta1 to Ta3, an effect mode having a large effect range in the timer target advance appearance effect The rate at which is selected is set to be high. Therefore, it can be estimated based on the size of the range of the effect which appeared by the timer object advance effect, whether or not the remaining time until the effect of the timer object is performed is left little.

  Moreover, in the example of the tables T12 and T13, basically, as time passes, the range of effects in the timer target advance effect (character item B rattle → character item B middle operation (small) → character item B middle movement (large) ) Is set so that the status quo (characters B rattle → character B rattles, etc.) does not occur even if there is a reverse. That is, in this case, as time passes, it becomes a mode approaching the range of the effect that appears when the "subject B action" or "off article A & B action" for the timer is performed. By confirming the effect, it is possible to recognize that the remaining time until the “object B operation” and the “object A & B operation” to be performed by the timer are performed is reduced.

  In the timer target advance effect according to this embodiment, the specific decorative member (character B) used at the time of the effect (for example, character B operation) for the timer is always used. For example, the timer target advance effect may be performed using a different decorative member (for example, the character A) without using the specific decorative member (character B) used at the time of the character B operation). That is, in this case, the timer target advance effect functions as an effect that suggests the type of effect appearing when the count display reaches a predetermined value with a predetermined accuracy. And, when realizing such timer target advance effect, types of effects to be made to appear as the timer target advance effect (a character B Battering, a character B middle operation (small), a character B middle movement (large)) Alternatively, it is desirable to make the proportion (accuracy) of the type of the suggested effect appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value, depending on the number of times of execution. For example, when a type of effect with a large range of effect (character B middle action (large)) appears, compared with when a type of effect with a small range of effect (character B rattle) appears, timer target advance out The ratio (character B action, character A & B movement) using the specific decorative member (character B) used in the effect appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, or the ratio of When the number of executions of the timer target advance effect in the variation is large, the effect using the specific decorative member (character item B) used in the timer target advance effect is compared with the case where the execution number is small The rate at which the action, the character A & B action) appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value may be increased.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a plurality of effect modes including "character B operation" and "character A & B operation" ("character B operation", "character A & B Perform the effect using the specific decorative member (character item B) as the timer target advance effect, on the premise that any of the effect modes not using the character item B can appear other than the “operation”. And However, based on the premise that only one of “character B operation” and “character A & B operation” is prepared as the effect mode using the character B, a specific decorative member (character An effect using B) may be performed.

  For example, as the effect mode using the character B, only the character A & B operation can appear as the effect of the timer target, and the specific decorative member (character B) is selected as the timer target advance effect. When the effect used is performed, only a part of the decorative member (character B) used in the effect (character A & B operation) targeted by the timer is used in the timer target advance effect. That is, in this case, although it is suggested that “representation using character B” appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value by the timer target advance effect, the “representation using character B” It becomes possible to conceal this as it is more difficult to predict the whole story (using the character A as well as the character B). Therefore, the effect of the prize B when the count display reaches a predetermined value by the timer target advance effect (acts B rattle → act B middle action (small) → act B middle action (large)) multiple times Even if the effect approaching the range is executed and it is possible to predict, the effect range of the item A is concealed from the beginning as well as the effect range, so the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value It becomes possible to preferably maintain the content of the target effect (character A & B operation) in a state of secrecy. At this time, the operation mode of the accessory B when the accessory A & B operation is performed may be performed as a timer target advance effect.

  According to such a configuration, the timer target advance presentation effect is performed using only a part (character item B) of the prizes A and B used in the "character article A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer subject. In addition to the above, in the timer target advance presentation, the presentation range of the prize B in the "figure A & B action" using only a part (figure B) of the prizes A and B used in the "figure A & B action" The effect (action in middle of the character B (small), movement in the middle of the character B (large)) appears only in a part of. Then, after such a small effect range is gradually expanded by a plurality of timer target first-out effects, only the feature B in a larger effect range is performed by performing the "feature A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer object. Since the effect using not only the feature A but also comes to appear, by performing the timer target advance effect when the remaining count is being digested, the novelty when the timer object is performed is lost It is expected that such things will be maintained properly.

  In this embodiment, the specific decorative member used in the timer target advance effect and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect (effect when the count display reaches the predetermined value) are completely matched. However, these do not necessarily have to completely match each other, as long as it can be suggested by the timer target advance effect that which effect mode appears as the effect of the timer object. For example, the timer target advance effect is produced in that “relatively small fan-shaped characters” and “relatively large fan-shaped characters” are disposed overlapping in a front view as fan-shaped characters. In the case where the specific decorative member used in the above is "a relatively small fan-shaped character", and the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer is "a relatively large fan-shaped character" Even in the stage before the effect using the fan-shaped character as the effect of the timer object is performed (while the count display is being performed), the fan-shaped character is used as the timer object advance effect It is possible to make a presentation.

  Further, in this embodiment, although the special product is used as the specific decoration member, the display means may be used as the specific decoration member instead. When the display means is used as the specific decorative member, the same effect as the effect using the above-mentioned feature is realized by enlarging the range (range of effect) in which the display appears or making the display content different. It is possible.

  Incidentally, it is desirable that the “effect using a specific decorative member” performed as the timer target advance effect be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed. When the specified decorative member is a prize, control is made to return the specified decorative member to the original position after the elapse of a predetermined time, and when the specified decorative member is the display means, after the predetermined time has elapsed, Control is performed to hide the display as the timer target advance effect. At this time, it is desirable that the predetermined time required for the timer target advance effect be shorter than the time required for the effect (effect for the timer object) appearing when the count display reaches the predetermined value. As described above, by realizing different presentation modes depending on the length of time, in the timer target advance presentation, the specific decorative member used in the production of the timer target can be kept at a level of unsatisfactory satisfaction. As a result, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment by waiting for the count display to reach the predetermined value.

[Show revival timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the count display is not displayed, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, feature A operation, special timer, cut-in B, feature B It is possible to execute a count effect in which at least one of the motion etc. appears. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, after the count display reaches the predetermined value and the display is not displayed, the first effect mode (for example, conversation announcement) appears among the plurality of effect modes. Even then, the count display is redisplayed after this and the timer effect is further continued. Then, after the count display is re-displayed, the count display is not displayed again after a predetermined time elapses, and a second effect mode (for example, a character A action (character product A notice)) appears among the plurality of effect modes. It is like (resurrection timer production).

  That is, in this case, after making it appear as if the first effect mode is the timer target (count object), the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect is further continued, and the second effect different from the first effect mode is generated. Since it is shown that the effect mode of is a timer target, even when the count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed at the timing when the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation appears. After that, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target is changed, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  FIG. 187 (a) shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) In the situation, it is determined that the number of notices is two (step S5523), and that "announcement on conversation" is performed at the earlier timing and "character item A operation 1" is performed at the later timing. FIG. 148 is a time chart for describing the specific contents of a resurrection timer effect performed when change numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer character arrival” are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (a plurality of not only the character A action 1 but a plurality may be selected) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The following processing relating to the resurrection timer effect is performed in (see FIG. 161). However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the revival timer effect is not performed, and even if any timer type is determined, the revival timer effect The following processing regarding may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), assuming that the timer type of “character product A operation 1” is selected as the result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the next processing as the next processing. A plurality of effect modes including the selected "character item A action 1" including the aspect of the resurrection timer effect ("character item A action 1-1", "character item A action 1-2", "character item A action 1 A determination process is performed as to which of “-3” and “character article A operation 1-4”) is to be executed. Preferably, the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Of the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of "character product A action 1-1", 20 seconds after the count display having a count number of 40 seconds is started according to the start of symbol variation The "conversation announcement" which is not the timer target is executed when it passes, and it becomes the timer target under the condition that the predetermined value is reached and the count display is not displayed when 40 seconds pass. "A character operation A (character A warning)" is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of "character product A operation 1-2", after the count display having a count number of 20 seconds is started according to the start of the symbol variation, a predetermined value is set when 20 seconds have elapsed. When the count display is not displayed and the "conversation anticipation" (the first presentation mode) not subject to the timer is executed while the count display is not displayed, the count annunciator The timer effect is to be displayed again, and the timer effect will be continued, and after the predetermined time has elapsed (after 40 seconds have elapsed since the count display having a count number of 20 seconds has been started), the count display is hidden again A "subject A operation (subject A advance notice)" (second presentation mode) which is a timer target is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of "character product A operation 1-3", a predetermined value is reached when 12 seconds have elapsed after the count display having a count number of 12 seconds is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation While the count display is not displayed, the notice E2 (first effect mode) is executed as a non-target notice that can not be the effect of the timer target, but the notice E2 (non-target notice) is ended. When it is done, the count display will be redisplayed and the timer effect will continue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed (after 40 seconds have passed since the count display with the 12-second count started), the count display Is made non-displayed again, and "character item A operation (character item A advance notice)" (second effect mode) which is a timer target is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of "character product A operation 1-4", a predetermined value is reached when 8 seconds have elapsed after the count display having a count number of 8 seconds is started in synchronization with the start of symbol variation While the count display is not displayed, the notice E1 (first effect mode) is executed as a non-target notice that can not be the effect of the timer target, but the notice E1 (non-target notice) is When it is ended, the count display is re-displayed and the timer effect is continued, and after a predetermined time has elapsed (after 40 seconds have elapsed from the start of the count display having a count number of 8 seconds), counting is performed. The display is again hidden, and the "subject A operation (subject A advance notice)" (second presentation mode) which is the timer target is executed.

  That is, among a plurality of effect modes prepared corresponding to "character A motion 1", "character A motion 1-2", "character A motion 1-3", and "character A motion" The aspect of 1-4 "is equivalent to the revival timer effect. And in these revival timer effects, the count display is temporarily made non-display during the time from the start of the count display until the effect of the timer object (action A action) is performed, and the effect that is not the timer object (( Since the conversation announcement, the announcement E2, or the announcement E1) appears, when the presentation appears, it can be thought as if the timer presentation has ended.

  In this respect, in the mode of "character article A action 1-2", a plurality of effect modes that can be adopted as a timer target (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut in A, character article A action, special timer, cut in B Among the role B, etc.), the effect (first notice mode) of the effect (conversation announcement) whose jackpot expectation is lower than the effect (feature A action) that is the timer target I will do it. That is, in this case, after it is shown as if a presentation with a low probability of big hit (conversation announcement) appears as a presentation of the timer object, it is indicated that the presentation (conversation announcement) is not a presentation of the timer object (count display Re-display), an effect (act A action) having a higher degree of big hit expectation than the effect (conversation notice) comes to appear as an effect (second effect mode) of the timer object (count display is not performed again). (Indication), it will be expected to aim at the improvement of the game interest by such a reversibility.

  In addition, in the mode of "character product A operation 1-3" or "character product A operation 1-4", a plurality of effect modes that can not be adopted as a timer target (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F) Etc.) is set as the target (first effect mode) to perform the resurrection timer effect. In such a configuration, when the effect mode (in this case, the notice E2 or the notice E1) that can not be adopted as the timer target appears as if it is the effect of the timer target, the timer effect is not ended at this timing. Will be suggested to be continued. That is, in this case, particularly, the anticipation E1 appearing when the aspect of "character A action 1-4" is executed has a low degree of expectation of itself, but the timer effect is continued without being ended at this timing. It becomes possible to contribute to the improvement of the game interest by functioning as an effect that suggests that. Note that a plurality of effect modes (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F, etc.) that can not be adopted as a timer target may appear even when timer effect is not performed.

  In addition, in each aspect of "character article A action 1-2", "character article A action 1-3", and "character article A action 1-4" according to this embodiment, it appears when starting the count display. Although the numerical value is displayed as a numerical value different from 40 seconds (20 seconds, 12 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.), the peripheral control MPU 1511a has set a 40 second effect timer secretly in control, and it counts Even when the display is temporarily hidden, by internally performing processing for continuously updating the effect timer, when 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display, the effect of the timer object (( The feature A action is made to appear. According to such a configuration, any one of "character item A operation 1-1", "character item A operation 1-2", "character item A operation 1-3", and "character item A operation 1-4" Even when the accessory A operation 1 is executed in the aspect, it is possible to hide the count display again at the same timing from the start of the change and to cause the effect of the timer (event A operation) to appear.

  And, in such a revival timer effect, "count display which appeared before being hidden once" and "count display which is once again displayed after being hidden once" have different count digests It is important to be able to recognize that you are doing the same count digestion instead of doing it, in order to suggest that the timer effect has not ended and is continuing. .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of "character product A action 1-2", when the count display having a count number of 20 seconds becomes "0 second", the count display is not displayed. The “conversation notice” is executed, but after the “conversation notice” is finished, “0 seconds” when it is hidden by re-displaying the count display in negative notation. It is intended to express how the count is not finished and this is continuing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of "character product A action 1-2", the count digest is kept secret while the count display is not displayed, The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the count has been digested for the time that has been hidden. More specifically, in the mode of "character A action 1-2", the count display is hidden at "0 seconds" and the count display is displayed again after the non-display state is maintained for 2 seconds. However, when the count display is redisplayed, count digestion with minus count is performed from “−2 seconds” to 18 seconds.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 187 (a), the symbol variation is stopped after the effect of the timer object is executed in this way.

  When realizing such a revival timer effect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as a result of the big hit determination, the type of fluctuation pattern or the mode of timer effect (for example, "character item A action 1" of Character Reach) Thus, determination processing (see FIG. 187 (b)) is performed as to whether the resurrection timer effect is to be generated and in which manner the resurrection timer effect is to be generated. Note that this determination process may be performed based on the result information of each process before that, for example, at a timing after step S5510 shown in FIG. 149 and before step S5511 is performed. It is possible.

  FIG. 187 (b) shows that “boy A action 1” includes the mode of the revival timer effect when the timer type of “boy A action 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) It is a figure which shows the example about the content (table T14) of the determination processing about which of several production | presentation aspects it performs.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when "character A action 1" of character reach is selected, "character A action 1" is "character A action 1-1". , “A character operation A 1-2”, “character object A operation 1-3”, and “character A operation 1-4”.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first refers to the table T14 shown in FIG. 187 (b), and is allocated to the drop information, the information on the type of fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and those information. Based on the effect random number, any mode of "character item A action 1-1", "character item A action 1-2", "character item A action 1-3", "character item A action 1-4" The timer effect is to be selected.

  Then, as a result, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in one of the "character product A operation 1-3" and the "character product A operation 1-4", in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525. The type of non-target notice is determined based on the determined type. For example, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be performed in the mode of "character product A operation 1-3", it is determined that at least the notice E2 is performed as the non-target notice in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525. Therefore, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of "character product A operation 1-4", at least the notice E1 is executed as the non-target notice in the process of steps S5512 and S5525. A decision will be made.

  In the example of the table T14, when the revival timer effect for the effect mode (conversation announcement) that can be adopted as the timer object is executed, the effect mode (notices E1 and E2) which can not be adopted as the timer object The big hit expectation is set to be higher than when the targeted revival timer effect is executed. In addition, when the resurrection timer effect for the effect mode with a high degree of expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that can not be adopted as the timer object is executed, the effect mode that can not be adopted as the timer object (notice The big hit expectation is set to be higher than when the resurrection timer effect for the effect mode having a low degree of expectation among E1, E2) is executed. Further, in the example of the table T14, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the revival timer effect is executed is higher than in the case where the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. It is set to.

  According to such a revival timer effect, an effect mode (first effect mode) with a low degree of expectation will appear once by the non-display of the count display, temporarily giving a sense of regret to the player, but counting thereafter The display is redisplayed to continue this, and the count display continued after the predetermined time is hidden again, and a presentation aspect (second presentation aspect) having a high degree of expectation is made to appear. As a result, it is possible to give surprises and surprises due to the continuation of the count and the reverse effects while temporarily giving a sense of regret to the player who was paying attention to the count display, and the amusement of the game is reduced compared to the prior art. Can be suppressed.

  In this sense, after the high-expected presentation aspect (the second presentation aspect) is executed as the presentation using two different decorative members, the low presentation level (the first presentation aspect) is obtained. It is desirable from the viewpoint of expressing the reversibility by the resurrection timer rendition that the rendition timer rendition effect is performed by using only one of the two different decoration members (or the decoration member related thereto). In this case, one of the two different decorative members may not necessarily be completely identical between when used in the second effect mode and when used in the first effect mode. For example, as a fan-shaped character, a “relatively small fan-shaped character” and a “relatively large fan-shaped character” are disposed overlapping in a front view, the first effect The decorative member used in the embodiment is a "relatively small fan-shaped character", and the decorative member used in the second rendering mode is a "relatively large fan-shaped character". However, it is possible to clearly indicate that the presentation performed as the first presentation mode has a lower degree of expectation.

  In addition, in such a revival timer effect, "count display which has appeared before being temporarily hidden" and "count display which has been once re-displayed since being temporarily hidden" are different counts. In order to make it possible to recognize that the same count digestion is being performed instead of digesting, the count sound is "hidden", even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continue to execute over the count display that has appeared before being executed and the count display that has been once hidden and then re-displayed.

  Also, in this embodiment, the revival timer effect is performed only once in a period in which one symbol variation is performed, but the revival timer effect is performed a plurality of times in a period in which one symbol variation is performed. It may be performed over time. At this time, the same effect mode may be repeatedly displayed each time the count display is not displayed. Then, as the number of times the resurrection timer effect is executed increases during the period in which one symbol variation is performed, an effect aspect (such as effect type and effect content (a cut-in aspect, etc.)) having a high degree of expectation as an effect of timer object. It is desirable to have a high rate of appearance of

  Further, in the resurrection timer effect, the time until the first effect mode (conversation notice, notice E1, E2, etc.) appears after the count display is hidden and the count display redisplayed again is not displayed. By making the length different from the time until the second effect mode (character A action) appears, it is possible to recognize whether or not the effect of the timer object is appearing. It is desirable to do.

  In addition, in order to improve the game interest as a timer effect, when a revival timer effect intended for a effect mode (conversation announcement) that can be adopted as a timer object is executed, an effect mode that can not be adopted as a timer object. Compared with the case where the resurrection timer effect for the notices E1 and E2 is executed, an effect aspect (such as effect type and effect content (a cut-in aspect or the like)) having a higher degree of expectation appears as an effect for the timer object. It is desirable to control the ratio to be high. In addition, when the resurrection timer effect for the effect mode with a high degree of expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that can not be adopted as the timer object is executed, the effect mode that can not be adopted as the timer object (notice A rendering mode (a type of rendering or a rendering content (a cut-in that has a higher degree of expectation) as a timer target effect than when a resurrection timer effect for a rendering mode with a low degree of expectation is executed among E1 and E2). It is desirable to control so that the rate of appearance of aspect etc.) becomes high.

  Further, in the revival timer effect according to this embodiment, the first effect mode appears after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and is not displayed, and the first effect is displayed. When the mode is ended, the count display is redisplayed and this is counted minus, and it is decided that the second effect mode is made to appear after this reaches a specific negative value and is made non-display, but the count display If the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear under the non-display mode, the count display is not displayed when the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear. Each count value at the time of setting may be set appropriately.

[Timer target suppression control]
That is, the effect to be made the target of the timer effect (count object) can often be performed even when the timer effect is not performed, for example, a specification to be performed at a predetermined timing based on the fluctuation pattern Effects (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, cut-in B, character B action, etc.) and predetermined effects (for example, hold change) executed at the time of winning Prepared. However, among these, there is a situation in which “specific effect executed at predetermined timing based on fluctuation pattern” is targeted for timer effect (count target), and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a new winning is achieved Occurs by chance, and when a predetermined effect (for example, a hold change etc.) is generated by this, a predetermined effect is generated in relation to the count display reaching a predetermined value as the target of the timer effect Or it may be difficult to grasp whether the prescribed effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new winning as an effect unrelated to the timer effect. ) Also to miss specific effects (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action, cut-in B, feature B action, etc.) Rikane no.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the timer effect of the specific type targeting the specific effect is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the timer effect of the specific type reaches a predetermined value When there is a relatively high first period, display of a predetermined effect not subject to the timer is permitted when a new winning is generated, but the first period ends, and the count display in the timer effect of the specific type has a predetermined value When the remaining time until reaching the second period becomes a relatively small second period, display of a predetermined effect which is not the timer target is not permitted even if a new winning is generated (timer target suppression control). Thus, while allowing the generation of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target due to the occurrence of a new winning in a situation where a specific type of count effect targeting a specific effect is executed, the count display as a target of the timer effect is It becomes difficult to know whether the predetermined effect has been generated in relation to reaching the predetermined value or whether the predetermined effect has been generated due to the occurrence of a new winning as an effect unrelated to the timer effect (confusion Can be suitably avoided.

  FIG. 188 (a) shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) In a situation, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer object control control performed when a specific change number is chosen.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, the specific effect which is the target of the timer appears. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a period from when the symbol variation starts until the specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0 seconds") (First period) allows the display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer when a new winning occurs (permissible period), but after the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") In the predetermined period (second period), it is assumed that timer target suppression control is performed that does not allow display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target even if a new winning is generated (suppression period).

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the timer target suppression control according to this embodiment, the “count display indicates a specific count value (a second period) during which the display of the predetermined effect is not permitted. For example, the period from "5 seconds") to the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") and the specific effect as the timer target is executed (ended) It will be continued until "a period after the specific effect is over". That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") and the specific effect which is the timer object is generated, the generation of the effect itself is suppressed, so it is the timer object The specific effect will function as a valuable effect occurrence opportunity, and the interest for the specific effect is improved, and the game interest when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) is suitably maintained. It comes to be expected.

  However, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, “5 seconds”) has elapsed since the specific effect which is the timer target is finished. In this case, the suppression period (the second period) which does not allow the display of the predetermined effect which is not the timer object is ended. In the period until the game is played, the display of the predetermined effect not subject to the timer is again permitted when a new winning is generated.

  By the way, as described above, in the suppression period, even if a new winning is generated, the display of the predetermined effect which is not the timer target is not permitted. However, in this case, there is a concern that the player can play a game that does not generate a new winning in the suppression period in which the display of the predetermined effect is not permitted even if a new winning is generated, and thus the progress speed of the game per unit time May cause disadvantages on the hall side.

  Therefore, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not allow the display of the predetermined effect resulting from this even if a new winning is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect which is not permitted In this case, instead of discarding the display of the predetermined effect itself, control is performed to delay (carry over) the timing of the display until the end of the suppression period. According to such a configuration, although display of a predetermined effect resulting from a new winning being generated is not permitted even when a new winning is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect is suitably performed. Since it becomes possible to play a game that does not generate a new winning when it is in the suppression period, it is suppressed.

  In addition, when a new winning is generated within the allowable period and a predetermined effect is displayed, the sound output is performed in accordance with the display of the predetermined effect, but a new winning is generated within the suppression period and predetermined. In the case where the display of the effect is to be delayed (carried over) until the end of the suppression period, it is desirable not to perform the acoustic output in accordance with the display when the display of the predetermined effect is performed. As a result, the display of the predetermined effect can be secretly performed at a timing different from that of the normal (at the time of winning), and when the predetermined effect displayed while the player does not know is surprised It will be expected that it will be granted to improve the game interest.

  In addition, for the suppression period that occurs from the timing (specific count value) before the execution period of the effect that is the timer object is started to the timing after the execution period is ended, the timer object is It is desirable to control so that it does not necessarily occur when the effect that is is performed.

  For example, when a timer effect is performed, such a suppression period is generated with a predetermined probability, and when a big hit is won in the big hit determination, it is compared with when it is lost (losed) in the big hit If the rate at which such a suppression period occurs is increased, the predetermined effect resulting from the winning will occur when the winning is generated aiming at the timing before and after the effect of the timer target is performed. It will be prompted to confirm whether or not it is in a situation where a suppression period has occurred and there is a high possibility of winning a big hit, and a new prize is generated when it is in the suppression period It will be suppressed that the game which is not made to be played is performed.

  Also, the rate at which the suppression period occurs is made different depending on the type of presentation mode (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, cut in B, role B action, etc.) that appears as effects of the timer object In this way, whether or not the predetermined effect resulting from the winning occurs is generated when the winning is generated within the period before the timer-targeted rendering is performed (the suppression period is generated and the effect of the specific type is generated) Will be prompted to confirm whether there is a high possibility of being executed as a timer target), and it will be suppressed that a game that does not generate a new winning will be performed when in the suppression period Will be

  FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a table (table T15) referred to in the timer target suppression control when making the rate at which the suppression period occurs different according to the type of effect mode appearing as a timer target effect. .

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action, cut-in B, role B action, etc. are prepared as effects of the timer object. .

  In this respect, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), basically, the proportion of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the target for the timer becomes lower as the presentation mode with the lower hitting probability is lower. It is set so that the ratio which generates the suppression period before and behind execution of the production for timer object is so high that it is a presentation mode with high degree.

  More specifically, the suppression period is not necessarily generated when the timer target effect is "conversation notice", and the suppression period is 20% when the timer object effect is "cut-in A". When the effect of the timer object is "cut in B", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 40%, and the effect of the timer object is "character item A operation" In some cases, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 60%, and the suppression period is generated at a rate of 80% when the effect targeted by the timer is "action B". When the effect of is a "special timer", a suppression period is always generated.

  According to such a configuration, since the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target effect is higher as the effect mode with the high hit probability is high, the predetermined effect is generated by the new winning. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility of missing a rendering mode with a high expectation of a big hit. In other words, the more likely the jackpot expected degree is the higher the chance that you will miss it, so when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the jackpot expected degree falls It becomes possible to advance the effect while concealing what has been done, and it is expected to suitably maintain the game interest until the symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, the generation ratio of the suppression period is determined according to the type of the effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target. There is. Therefore, it is possible to generate the suppression period at the same rate if the type of the effect mode appearing as the effect of the timer target is the same both when winning the big hit and when it is lost (losing) .

  By the way, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the effect of the timer object is "hold change", the suppression period is always generated despite the effect aspect that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. It is like that. That is, the "hold change" according to this embodiment can be displayed as a predetermined effect which is not the timer target when a new winning is generated, as well as being able to be displayed as the specific effect which is the timer target. Therefore, if there is a case where the suppression period does not occur when such a "hold change" occurs, the "hold change (pattern during change) as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Of the change in the display of suspension corresponding to) and “change in the suspension of display (change of the display of suspension corresponding to the design on hold)” due to new winnings, and there is a concern that their confusion will occur is there. Therefore, it is desirable that the suppression period is always generated when the timer target effect is "hold change". However, as described above, as for "hold change", as with "conversational notice", the possibility to miss this is increased to make the presentation mode with a low hit probability when the count display reaches a predetermined value. If the aim is to aim for the effect to proceed while concealing what has appeared, it may be controlled so that the suppression period does not occur even when the effect of the timer object is "hold change".

  In the example of table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), although the rate at which the suppression period occurs is made different depending on the type of effect mode that appears as effects of the timer object, in addition to this, the effect of the same type Even if it is an aspect, the ratio at which the suppression period occurs may be further varied depending on the timer type determined in the count display lottery (FIG. 149: step S 5510).

  For example, even if "conversation announcement" is selected as the timer target effect, the "conversation announcement" is shown in "conversation announcement 1 to 4" shown in FIG. 161, and further shown in FIG. It is desirable that the occurrence ratio of the suppression period be made different depending on which of the conversation notices 1 to 6 corresponds to. In this case, the occurrence rate may include 100% or 0%.

  In addition, the effect of the timer target is any of "conversation notice", "hold change", "cut-in A", "special timer", "feature A action", "cut in B", and "feature thing B action" When this is the case, the suppression period may be generated at a predetermined ratio not only for a predetermined period before and after execution of the timer target effect but also for the entire period from the start of symbol variation to the termination. In particular, when the target for the timer target is the "special timer" with the highest probability of big hit expecting, the above-mentioned suppression period is always generated over the entire period from the start of symbol variation to the stop, "special timer" You may try to increase the sense of expectation for being performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even if a new winning occurs while the suppression period is in progress, the display of the predetermined effect resulting from this is not discarded, and the timing of the display is the end of the suppression period. Although the control to delay (carry over) is performed, the display of the predetermined effect itself may not be discarded.

[Timer production targeting the new timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, etc.) prepared as candidates for count while the count display is being performed within a period in which symbol effects are being performed It is possible to execute a timer effect that hides the count display in accordance with the timing at which at least one of cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc. appears. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the “specific effect mode” is prepared as one of the plurality of effect modes appearing when the count display reaches the predetermined value, and then the “specific effect mode” is generated. When the “Aspect” appears, another count display (second count display) different from the previous count display (first count display) is newly started.

  That is, in this case, since the count display as the timer effect is executed in a form divided into the first count display and the second count display, the time required for the timer effect as a whole is the same. The time required to digest one count display (the first count display or the second count display) can be shortened as such, thus eliminating monotony while the count display is being digested and making the game entertaining It will be expected to suppress the decline of

  FIG. 189 (a) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) In the situation, the time to explain the specific content of the timer effect for the new timer which is performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer character reach” are selected. It is a chart. FIG. 189 (b) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which determination to not execute mission effect (display conversation announcement) (NO in step S5507) is made. In the situation, the time to explain the specific content of the timer effect that targets the new timer which is performed when the change numbers 15, 16 (see Fig. 148) corresponding to "no timer SP reach" are selected. It is a chart.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for convenience of explanation, only one pattern is prepared for each variation pattern, "Timer effect with new timer as effect target". , Prepare a plurality of types (new timer 1, new timer 2, etc.) in which the occurrence time of the first count display (for example, the pattern in which the first count display is started from the middle of symbol variation) and the end time are different. Then, they may be selected by lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

  In “Timer effect directed to a new timer” shown in FIG. 189 (a), first, the first count display having a count number of 30 seconds is started in synchronization with the start of symbol fluctuation. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is not displayed, the “specific effect mode” that is the timer target appears. In this way, after the "specific presentation mode" appears, a new count display (the second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) is displayed anew from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far We are going to start this (new timer). In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, count display (second count display) different from the first count display (non-display) which has appeared up to that time, whenever the "specific effect mode" appears. ) Is displayed anew and this is to be started. However, even if the first count display has become a predetermined value in this way, execution of the effect that is targeted for the timer is only started by newly starting another count display (second count display) other than this. May feel as if they were deposited, and there is a concern about the decline in entertainment interest.

  Therefore, in the "timer effect directed to a new timer effect" according to this embodiment, first, as a "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. It is supposed that "fault effect" which does not show any degree of expectation is made to appear. That is, in this case, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect having an expectation as an effect of the timer target (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, cut-in B, role A disappointing rendering situation will be produced as if it failed to generate an object B motion etc.), but in this rendering situation, the second count display will be newly started, so As a player, he / she feels that he / she can challenge the failed timer effect again, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game through the intonation of such feelings.

  However, in “Timer effect with new timer as effect target” shown in FIG. 189 (a), the second count display started after “Fail effect effect” is not ended within the period of symbol variation, and the remaining count is The symbol stop (big hit symbol or lost symbol) is made to be performed in a state where it has not been digested. According to such a configuration, even if the player looks forward to what effect the expectation will appear when the second count display reaches the predetermined value (here, “0”), the count digest is performed. Since it becomes possible to completely lose interest regarding the big hit expectation when the symbol stop (big hit falling) is displayed earlier than before, without causing any decline in the game interest without causing any rendition to appear The timer effect can be ended. In the symbol stop that appears earlier than the second count display is completely digested, in addition to the lost symbol, the big hit symbol can also appear, so especially when the big hit symbol appears, there is no game interest There is nothing to lose.

In other words, in "Timer production with the new timer set as the production target" shown in FIG. 189 (a), almost no symbol fluctuation period (at least half of the pattern fluctuation occurs even though the timer target does not appear at all While the count display (first count, second count) is performed over the above period,
-In addition to performing rendering (rendering that the first count reaches a predetermined value) to be aware of the possibility that a rendering with some degree of expectation may appear in the middle stage,
-By having a configuration in which the newly started second count display is made to be stopped while leaving the count number, the expectation for the timer target's effect to occur soon is almost all of the design variation It can be sustained over a period of time. In addition, it has been described above that this is a mechanism for suitably suppressing a decrease in game interest caused by not producing an effect having an expectation in any of the first count display and the second count display. It is street.

  On the other hand, also in "Timer effect directed to a new timer" shown in FIG. 189 (b), as in the example shown in FIG. 189 (a), the count number of 30 seconds in accordance with the start of symbol fluctuation The first count display having the is started. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and non-displayed, the “specific presentation mode (failure presentation)” that is the timer target appears. Thus, after the "specific presentation mode (failure presentation)" appears, another count display (the second count display having a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far is displayed. The point of newly displaying and starting this is also the same as the example shown in FIG. 189 (a).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), the symbol stop occurs after the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here “0”) within the period of symbol variation It is supposed to In this respect, “the timer effect targeted at the new timer” means, as described above, an expectation that the timer object will soon be produced without any effect having an expected degree as the timer object. Because it has a technical feature to be sustained, to make a rendition with an expectation appear even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the period of symbol variation I do not. On the other hand, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case) within the symbol variation period, the timer target is used only for processing that does not cause the effect having the expectation to be made to appear. I can not sustain the expectation that the rendition will occur soon.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol fluctuation period, the second The count display is not hidden but is kept as it is at a predetermined value (here, “0”), and symbol stop is performed in a state where the display is maintained. In a state where the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is maintained, from the player's side, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect (effect to be counted) appears Since it seems to be in a proper state, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of anticipation that the timer target effect will soon occur until the time the symbol stop is performed. And even with such a configuration, it is possible to completely lose interest regarding the jackpot expectation when the symbol stop (the jackpot hit) is displayed before the second count display is hidden. As a result, it is possible to end the timer effect without causing any decrease in the game interest and without causing any effect.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for the player who has already confirmed "the timer effect for which the new timer is the effect target", when the failure effect or the second count display occurs, nothing happens. There is a concern that it will be overlooked that there is no rendition of Therefore, only when the jackpot symbol is stopped while the second count display has digested the remaining count (including the period in which the display of the state where the second count display has reached the predetermined value is maintained), A special effect may be generated as an effect corresponding to the 2-count display. Alternatively, the rate of occurrence of special effects may be increased. According to such a configuration, the second count display is different from the first count display in counting purpose, and is the big hit symbol stopped within a period in which the second count display is remaining counting the count? It becomes possible to impart an interest of no. In this sense, in the first count display and the second count display, the display modes (form, position, size, etc.) may be made different from each other.

  The special effect may be generated when the second count display leaves a remaining count and this is in a running state. However, in view of generating a special effect as the effect corresponding to the second count display, the second count display is not displayed when the big hit symbol is stopped (the second count display remains the remaining count It is desirable to execute a special rendering after hiding the state even if it is not displayed. And about the special production performed in this way, it is desirable to display this continuously including the execution period of a big hit game and the game period after that. That is, in this case, the special effect is ended when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the process different from the process relating to the “timer effect for which the new timer is the effect target”.

  The special effect may be generated within the period of symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable to execute special effects after making the jackpot symbol appear (for example, displayed in a state of temporary stop) within the symbol variation period and making the second count display non-display. However, the jackpot symbol may be displayed (for example, displayed in a state of temporary stop) within the period of symbol variation, and the second count display may be hidden after a special effect is performed.

  Then, if the generation ratio (including 100%) of special effects is increased when the big hit symbol is stopped while the second count display is remaining and the count is being digested, the symbol stop is a line. When the second count display reaches a predetermined value before it is turned off, it may be hidden and the symbol stop may be performed in the non-displayed state. Even in such a case, while the second count display is being performed, it becomes possible to maintain the game interest. However, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value and this is not displayed, even if a big hit symbol appears in the symbol stop after the symbol is not displayed, the rate at which the special effect is generated remains relatively low. In this case, the percentage may include 0%.

  In the case of realizing such a "timer effect with a new timer as an effect target", in particular, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, a "failure effect" that does not show any degree of expectation is made to appear This is different from the case of the above-mentioned timer effect in which other effect modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, cut in B, character B action, etc.) appear (In a separate lottery), that "the timer effect with the new timer as the target of the effect" will be performed based on the fact that the predetermined effect condition which has nothing to do with the result of the big hit judgment or the variation pattern type is satisfied. It is desirable to make a decision on That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is stopped, both the big hit and the lose can be stopped (a situation where the big hit symbol may appear as the probability of the big hit lottery), It is possible to generate a timer effect "to be an object of the effect, whereby it is possible to cause a failure effect having no degree of expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. This makes it possible to maintain the sense of expectation that the effect of the timer object will soon occur without any appearance of the effect having the degree of expectation as the timer object over the period in which the symbol variation is performed.

  However, if it is not required to exhibit such an operational effect, the “specific effect mode” that is caused when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is not a failure effect that does not have any degree of expectation. , And may be executed as other presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.). In this case, through the same processing as the above-described timer effect for causing other effect modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, character A action, cut in B, character B action, etc.) to appear “Timer effect directed to a new timer” will be executed.

  In FIG. 189 (a), in the example in which the first variation pattern (without timer, character reach) is selected, the second count display started after “failure effect” is a symbol before it reaches a predetermined value. The variation is stopped, and in FIG. 189 (b), in the example where the second variation pattern (no timer SP reach) is selected, the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. I did it. However, in the example in which the first variation pattern (no timer, character reach) is selected, it may be possible for a pattern in which symbol variation is stopped to appear after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. In the example in which the variation pattern (no timer for SP reach) is selected, the symbol variation may be stopped before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. In addition, when a variation pattern different from these variation patterns is selected, “a timer effect directed to a new timer” may be performed.

  Also, for the first count display, it is possible to execute the count display having a count number shorter than the second count display which can be stopped during the execution of the count display. It is desirable to maintain a sense of expectation for doing things.

  In this embodiment, in the count display generated after the “failure effect” is performed, if the symbol display is stopped before the count display is digested, either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol may appear However, in the case of the normal count display that occurs independently of the “failure effect”, it is desirable that the jackpot symbol always appears when the symbol display is stopped before the count display is digested.

  The first count display has a plurality of modes (for example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds) as the count number, and may be performed in any of them, but the second count display may be performed. The first count display and the second count display are different count displays so that the first count display and the second count display can be performed in only one mode (for example, 40 seconds) regardless of the count number performed in the first count display. It is desirable to be able to recognize that it is to be executed.

  Also, in view of the fact that the first count display and the second count display are executed as separate count displays, the period during which the first count display is performed and the period during which the second count display is performed Processing to differentiate the display mode (including different colors and effects) of the background image etc. according to (including the period in which the display has reached the predetermined value). desirable. In such a process, even when reach effect occurs within the period when the first count display is performed and the background image for reach effect is transferred, when the second count display is executed thereafter, until then The second count display is executed even when reach effect is generated within the period in which the second count display is performed and the background image for reach effect is transitioned. The mode of display different from that which has appeared at the time is maintained also in the reach effect period, and is maintained until the second count display is hidden.

  In addition, in the "timer effect directed to a new timer" according to this embodiment, there is no particular "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed. "Failure effect" which does not show the degree of expectation is made to appear, but in place of this, another count start suggestion which suggests that the count display different from the count display which has been executed until now is newly started An effect may be made to appear. In this case, the expectation may be indicated by the separate count start suggestion effect, or the expectation may not be indicated.

[Timer mode effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action) prepared as candidates for counting within a period in which symbol effects are being performed It is possible to execute a timer effect in which count display toward the timing at which at least one of the cut-in B, the character B operation, etc. appears is performed to a predetermined value. In this point, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the count display has a predetermined value before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). Hell timer mode (1st timer mode display) with a relatively low proportion of appearances of presentation modes (representation type and presentation contents (cut-in mode etc.)) with high expectation as effects of timer target when becoming In such a way that one of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) having a relatively high proportion of the appearance of a high expectation degree as a timer target effect can be displayed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Yes (Timer mode effect).

  That is, in this case, when the remaining time of the count display is consumed, any one of the timer mode displays having different degrees of advantage regarding the timer effect is displayed, so this is a predetermined value after the count display is started. It will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until it becomes (here, "0").

  FIG. 190 shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and in a second processing situation where it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). Timer mode effect to be performed when fluctuation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected and it is determined to perform “cut in B1” as the effect of the timer object It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type (in fact, there are a plurality of cut-ins, not just cut-in B1) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161) The following processing relating to the timer mode effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer mode effect is not performed even if any timer type is determined, instead of performing the following processing relating to the timer mode effect. The following processing regarding may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 190, assuming that the timer type of “cut in B1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a selects the selected “cut in” as the next process. B1 of the plural effect modes ("cut in B1-1", "cut in B1-2", "cut in B1-3", "cut in B1-4") including the mode of timer mode effect A determination process as to which to execute is performed. Preferably, the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Of the examples shown in FIG. 190, in the form of "Cut in B1-1", when 50 seconds have elapsed after the count display with the count number of "50" is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation When a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached and the count display is not displayed, “Cut-in B (cut B advance notice)” that is a timer target is executed.

  On the other hand, in the "cut-in B1-2" mode, after the count display with the count number of "50" is started according to the start of the symbol variation, 20 seconds have passed and this is the first specification When the count value ("30" in this case) is reached, the display of the hell timer mode (the first timer mode display) is performed while the count digest is in progress, and 50 seconds after the start of the count display. When it has elapsed and reaches a predetermined value (here "0"), "Cut in B" which is the timer target is executed under the condition that it is not displayed, but the hell timer mode (the first timer mode) The display of "display" is maintained even after "Cut-in B" is hidden without being hidden.

  On the other hand, in the "cut-in B1-3" mode, after the count display having the count number of "50" is started in line with the start of symbol variation, 18 seconds have elapsed and this is the first specific count value. A heaven challenge effect is performed whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digest is in progress when reaching a second specific count value (here, “32”) before that. As display of hell timer mode (1st timer mode display) is performed as a result of failure of heaven challenge production, when 50 seconds pass after count display is started, when it reaches specified value (here “0”) "Cut in B" which is the timer target is executed while the count display is not displayed, but the display of the hell timer mode (the first timer mode display) is not performed. Since without being to indicate the "cut-B" was hidden even the display is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the "cut-in B1-4" mode, 18 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of "50" is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation, and this is the first specific count. A heaven challenge effect is performed whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digest is in progress when the second specific count value (here, “32”) before the value is reached. The heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge effect being successful, and a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached 50 seconds after the count display is started. Then, while the count display is not displayed, "Cut in B" which is the timer target is executed, but the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is performed. After the "cut-B" without being in the non-display is hidden even the display is maintained.

  That is, among the plurality of effect modes prepared for "cut in B1", the modes of "cut in B1-2", "cut in B1-3", and "cut in B1-4" are timers. It corresponds to the mode effect. Then, in these timer mode effects, a heaven timer mode or a hell timer mode is generated while count digesting is in progress, and a timer target effect is executed while any display of these timer modes is appearing. It will be done. Therefore, even when the count display is remaining and the count is taken up, the timer effect can be made to have an effect by the timer mode effect related to the timer effect.

  More specifically, when a heaven timer mode appears as a type of timer mode effect, the rate at which an effect type with a higher expectation degree appears as a timer target effect is higher than when a hell timer mode appears. As the rate of appearance of a high expected degree mode becomes high as a mode (content of effect) of cut-in B which is the effect of the timer object, it is difficult to wait for the timing of the count display to reach a predetermined value. As a result, it becomes possible to make the timer effect be more closely watched. On the other hand, when the hell timer mode appears as the type of timer mode effect, since the effect itself for the timer object can not be expected as compared with the case where the heaven timer mode appears, an effect different from the timer effect The gaze can be directed to the direction of the video game, so that even if the low expectation presentation mode appears when the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

  In addition, in order to make such heaven timer mode and hell timer mode function more effectively, the same effect as the timer target effect between when heaven timer mode is displayed and when hell timer mode is displayed. Even when a mode appears, it is desirable to control so that the appearance ratio of the big hit symbol becomes higher at the time of the symbol stop after that when the effect mode appears when the heaven timer mode is displayed.

  Also, in the timer mode effect according to this embodiment (in the example shown in FIG. 190, the “cut in B 1-2”, “cut in B 1-3”, and “cut in B 1-4” modes), the timer Even after the target effect is executed and the display is hidden, the display regarding the timer mode type (heaven timer mode, hell timer mode) is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect proceed while the timer related effect is displayed even after the timer effect is finished, and the effect situation where the timer effect is executed by either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode The symbol stop is performed in a state in which the player is made aware of the presence of the symbol. In addition, about the display of heaven timer mode and hell timer mode, it is not displayed before the count display reaches a predetermined value (before the effect of the timer object is generated), or it is displayed rather than symbol stop is displayed. It may be made to be non-displayed at the previous timing, or may be made non-display when the symbol stop is finished by maintaining the display even when the symbol stop is displayed.

  In addition, the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect may be generated before the count display is performed (for example, during timer prefetch effect execution). In addition, when the display of heaven timer mode or hell timer mode or heaven challenge effect is performed in the state where count display is not executed, the timer effect necessarily occurs between the time the effect is executed and the symbol is stopped. You may not make it happen. However, when the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect is performed in the state where the count display is not performed, compared to the case where those effects are not performed in the state where the count display is not performed. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is increased before the symbol is stopped, and that the effect is also executed as the effect that suggests that the timer effect is to be executed.

  In the "cut-in B1-3" and "cut-in B1-4" modes, the heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display reaches the second specific count value, and then the count display is the first While the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge effect when the specific count value is reached, in the "cut-in B1-2" mode, the count display becomes the second specific count value. The heaven challenge effect is not performed when it is performed, and then the hell timer mode is displayed when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

  According to such a configuration, after the count display is started, first, it becomes possible to focus on whether or not the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached. As a result, if the heaven challenge effect does not appear when the second specific count value is reached, the possibility of the occurrence of the heaven timer mode is lost. That is, in this case, since the hell timer mode is generated when the count display reaches the first specific count value, or the timer mode effect itself does not occur, the count display corresponds to the first specific count value. When it becomes, it becomes possible to be able to make a further gaze at whether the hell timer mode occurs or not.

  In addition, when the timer mode effect itself does not occur, it is desirable that the ratio in which the effect mode having a high degree of expectation appears as the effect of the timer object is higher than when the hell timer mode is generated. However, if the proportion of appearances with high expectation is different as the effect of the timer object depending on whether the timer mode effect itself does not occur or if the hell timer mode occurs, the opposite is true. Even when the relationship is adopted, it is possible to further pay attention to whether or not the hell timer mode is generated when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

  On the other hand, when the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached, the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode are displayed as the timer mode effect when the count display reaches the first specific count value. Since one of the above is executed, it is possible to make the type of timer mode effect that appears when the count display reaches the first specific count value pay more attention.

  According to such timer mode effect, not only when the count display reaches the predetermined value, but also some specific count values (first specific count value, second specific count value) different from the predetermined value. Since it becomes possible to give an interest to the timer effect (count value) or the effect related thereto even when it reaches the point, it becomes possible to make the game look interesting while the count display is being executed. Can be suitably maintained.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 190, when the count display of the timer effect successively reaches the second specific count value and the first specific count value and reaches the predetermined value in this way, the effect of the timer target is executed, and thereafter The symbol change will be stopped.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type (in fact, there are a plurality of cut-in B1s and not just ones) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161), the specific It is determined which mode (cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4) is executed as the timer type (cut-in B1 in the example shown in FIG. 190) However, instead of cut-in B1, cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, and cut-in B1-4 are prepared as selection candidates for the count display lottery (step S5510). It is also possible to determine which timer type to use from among these candidates. About this processing method, it is employable also in processing concerning execution of other productions (for example, revival timer production etc.).

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, when the effect for the timer object is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, the effect (cut-in B) of the specific type is performed as compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. The ratio of high expectation content (such as cut-in B with high expectation color) was increased. However, instead of this, when the effect of the timer object is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, and the like) are compared with the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. Of the cut-in A, the special timer, the character A operation, the cut-in B, the character B movement, etc., the ratio of appearance of a high expectation degree may be increased. Alternatively, in the heaven timer mode, as the effect of the timer object, the ratio in which the effect type having the high degree of expectation appears may be high, and the ratio of the content having the high degree of expectation may be high.

  In addition, a specific effect type is selected from among a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, special timer, role A action, cut in B, role B action, etc.) as effects for the timer object. If, or if a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode must be generated within the execution period of the count display. It is also good. At this time, it is desirable that a pattern in which the hell timer mode is generated can also appear without performing the heaven challenge effect.

  In addition, an effect may be provided to indicate that either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is necessarily generated within a period before reaching the second specific count value at which the heaven challenge effect is performed.

  In addition, when a prescribed performance condition is satisfied, a heaven high probability mode in which the percentage of success in the heaven challenge performance (proportion displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher when heaven challenge performance occurs than in normal times. It may be made to shift to That is, in this case, in the heaven high probability mode, if the heaven timer mode is not displayed, the generation probability of the heaven challenge effect itself is lowered (the probability that the hell timer mode is generated without generating the heaven challenge effect, the timer The heavenly high probability mode is realized by lowering the expectation of the timer target rendition itself generated when in the heaven timer mode compared to the normal time, if the probability of not generating the mode rendition is increased).

  In Heaven Challenge production, a period in which the player can receive an operation can be set, and based on the player's operation performed during the period, the result of success or failure of the heaven challenge production (Spaly timer mode, You may make it display which of hell timer mode generate | occur | produces.

  In addition, when heaven challenge effect occurs when the count display number in the count display is relatively small, such as when the heaven challenge effect occurs simultaneously with the start of the count effect of the timer effect, the count in the count display It is desirable that the percentage of success in creating the heaven challenge (the percentage displayed in the heaven timer mode) be higher than when the heaven challenge effect occurs when the number of executed pieces is relatively large. . That is, in this case, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game by the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the effect in the near future immediately before the appearance of the effect that is the object of the timer effect, and the effect which is the target of the timer effect appears When it takes a long time (count number) to do, it will be expected to maintain the game interest by feeling of expectation for heaven challenge effect to occur. In this case, the heaven challenge effect may be generated after the timer object effect is executed. In this case, the percentage of success in the heaven challenge effect is minimized and the timer object effect that has already been executed is generated. On the other hand, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode will be generated in the form of follow-up.

  In addition, heaven challenge effect may be generated as one of the target effects of the timer effect. In addition, when heaven challenge production is executed as a target production of timer production, after the heaven timer mode is displayed, the percentage of success in the heaven challenge production (percentage displayed in the heaven timer mode) is 100%. Within the symbol variation period, although it did not become a timer target, the rate at which a high expectation effect (for example, a character B action) appears among the effects prepared as one of the timer target candidates is the effect It is desirable to make it higher than if it did not appear.

[Count output stop control]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, etc.) prepared as candidates for count while the count display is being performed within a period in which symbol effects are being performed It is possible to execute a timer effect that hides the count display in accordance with the timing at which at least one of cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc. appears. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined effect (preferably an effect having a predetermined expected degree) different from the timer effect during the execution of the count display, but not necessarily limited thereto. When it is executed, it is not performed until the output concerning the count display reaches the predetermined value until the output concerning the count display of the timer effect reaches the predetermined value, and this is not performed until the predetermined value is reached. It is made to make one of the effect mode for stopping the output selectively appear (count output stop control).

  According to such a configuration, even if the output relating to the count display is performed in the timer effect, the count display is not necessarily performed until the predetermined value is reached, and the output is interrupted on the way and the output relating to the predetermined effect is performed. Since it becomes possible to perform the output corresponding to the count display of the timer effect, it is expected that the game interest will be maintained until the predetermined value is reached (counted consumption period).

  FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (c) show the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and it is determined that the mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) FIG. 18 is a time chart for describing the specific contents of count output cancellation control that is performed when a specific variation number is selected in the second processing situation.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, an effect of the timer object which is the timer object appears.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the effect at the time of causing the predetermined effect to appear It is determined whether the situation is in a predetermined specific presentation situation. As a result, when it is in a specific effect situation, control is performed to stop the output of the timer effect count display and execute the predetermined effect. The "predetermined specific effect situation" to be used to determine whether or not to stop the output relating to the count display of the timer effect is, for example, the count display of the timer effect being executed. In the case of executing a predetermined effect using a region, it is an effect situation in which competition occurs with respect to an effect output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, the timer effect is also output after the output of the predetermined effect is finished. The count display is not to be output again. On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, even after the output of the count display is stopped, internally, the time since the start of the count display (or the time from the start of fluctuation) is secretly clocked. When this reaches a predetermined value (a value when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the count display), it is assumed that the timing at which the count display whose output has been stopped reaches the predetermined value (here "0") has arrived. I am trying to make the target effect appear.

  According to such a configuration, after the predetermined effect is performed, the output state for counting display is maintained while the output state for counting display is maintained, but if the output of the count display is not stopped, it is set to a predetermined value (here, “0”). When the timing which should have been reached comes, the effect of the timer object comes to appear. That is to say, in this case, it is expected to improve the fun of the game when the timer target effect appears due to the surprise property which has been kept secretly as if the timer effect had been shown hidden as if it had been terminated halfway by execution of the predetermined effect. Will be

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191 (c), even when the predetermined effect is performed while the count display of the timer effect is being performed, the predetermined effect is performed, as described above. When the presentation situation at the time of presentation of the presentation is not in the specific presentation situation defined in advance, the output according to the count display of the timer presentation is continued without stopping it until the predetermined value is reached, and the count display is digested The predetermined effect is to be executed in the current situation.

  More specifically, the predetermined effect is "effect for causing an enemy character to appear in a specific area", "effect for attacking against a specific area", or "display at the time of failure in effect in a specific area In the case where it is assumed that the effect of outputting music or music is performed, and such a predetermined effect is executed while the count display is being performed in a specific area, the player can use a timer effect (count display) as the player. On the other hand, there may be a concern that some adverse effect (for example, the degree of expectation as a timer effect is lowered) may be exerted on the effect. Therefore, when there is an effect situation where such concern may occur, by stopping the output concerning the count display of the timer effect and executing the predetermined effect, some adverse effect on the timer effect is produced It becomes possible to execute a predetermined effect without generating an image as if to exert (the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b)). Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, since the effect of the timer target is made to appear as a surprise while maintaining the state of the output stop concerning the count display, such a predetermined effect is used. It can be expected that the game interest will be improved in reverse (the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b)).

  However, each time such a predetermined effect is executed, if the output for counting the timer effect is to be stopped, the effect image of the predetermined effect itself is deteriorated, and there is a concern that the game interest may be lowered. Will be Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there is a vacancy (a region where no effect is output) different from the specific region where the count display of the timer effect is output when the predetermined effect is executed. In some cases, the predetermined effect is output not in the specific area but in an area where there is space, without stopping the output for counting display of the timer effect without stopping the output (FIG. 191 (c Production mode of)). As a result, it becomes clear that the predetermined effect is not an effect for stopping the execution of the count display of the timer effect on the way, and when the predetermined effect is executed, the game interest is lowered. Will be avoided.

  Then, in each of the examples shown in FIG. 191, the symbol variation is stopped after the effect of the timer object is thus executed.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure when realizing such count output cancellation control.

  As shown in FIG. 192, assuming that it is determined that the predetermined effect is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is First, when the timing to generate a predetermined effect has come within the execution period of the symbol variation, it is determined whether or not a specific effect situation exists prior to the start of the output according to the predetermined effect. (Step S5701).

  Here, the “specific effect status” refers to various other effects (here, count display of timer effects, etc.) necessary for newly outputting the predetermined effect when the predetermined effect is newly output. As described above, it is a situation where all of them are used and there is no room for newly outputting the predetermined effect. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 201 (G) and (H) described later, the “bullet firing effect” by the cannon corresponds to the predetermined effect. Then, in the bullet firing effect, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, the right area, and the lower area in the display area are selectively set as empty (unused) areas of the display area as the bullet destination. In general, the unused area will be used to create a bullet launch effect. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G) described later, the area required to newly output such a bullet emission effect is other various effects (count display (upper left area), symbol variation (upper right Area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), and hold display (lower area)) are all used, and there is no space for outputting the predetermined effect anew This corresponds to the above-mentioned "specific presentation situation". And, if it is assumed that the projectile has been fired temporarily while in such a specific presentation situation, the presentation (for example, the count display) that is already in the output state at the projectile destination is broken or destroyed by the fired projectile. May cause concerns such as a big hit expectation level may drop as a result. Is also mentioned above.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192, when it is determined that there is a specific rendering situation prior to the start of output relating to the predetermined rendering (YES in step S5701), it is already different from the predetermined rendering. The output (in this case, count display) in the output state is stopped (step S5702), and processing relating to the output of a predetermined effect is performed using the free space created thereby (step S5703).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no specific effect situation prior to the start of the output relating to the predetermined effect (NO in step S5701), another effect is required in the area required for effect output Since there is an unused area which is not used, the processing concerning the output of the predetermined effect is performed using the unused area without stopping the output other than the predetermined effect. (Step S5713).

  Here, when the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5703, an effect mode advantageous to the player after the predetermined effect is executed, as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5713. It is desirable to have a high rate of appearance of For example, in the example of FIGS. 191 (b) and 191 (c), when the effect of the timer target is suddenly executed while the output relating to the count display is stopped, the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b) appears. It is desirable to control so that the ratio in which a presentation mode (representation type or presentation content) having a high degree of expectation appears as a timer target effect is higher than when the presentation mode of FIG. 191 (c) appears.

  The processes of step S5702 and step S5703 may be executed as one process. For example, when the output data of the predetermined effect is overwritten in the processing area in which the output data of the count display is stored, the output relating to the count display is naturally canceled, and the output is interrupted in the state of being canceled. It becomes possible to perform an output according to a predetermined effect.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when it is in a specific effect situation, the output concerning count display is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, but the effect to be the target of the output stop is not limited to this, and the other You may make it stop the output concerning production of.

  In the process of step S5702, an effect type is selected from among a plurality of effects using (in an output state) an area necessary for outputting a predetermined effect, and the output of the selected effect is canceled. The predetermined effect may be output. In this case, it is desirable that priorities be set in advance with respect to a plurality of effects which are considered as selection candidates for output cancellation, and effect types for which output cancellation is to be performed are selected based on the priorities. About this priority, it is desirable to make it preset on a program on the basis of whether it is an effect with a higher degree of importance to the player. As a result of determining the priority, if all the other effects in the output state have higher priority than the predetermined effect, the output related to the other effects is maintained and the predetermined effect is not output. .

  Then, the effect type for which the output is to be stopped is executed as a plurality of effects connected with the effect contents having relevance (for example, a timer effect connected by the count display and the timer object effect, etc.) During the effect that appears earlier in the effect (for example, during the execution of the count display), the above-mentioned predetermined effect is made before the output is discontinued and the effect (for example, timer target effect) that appears later is started It is desirable that, for the effects that will appear later, this is executed without stopping the output when the is finished.

  In addition, with regard to effects that are targeted for output discontinuation when performing predetermined effects and predetermined effects, in addition to effects by image display, effects by character operations, effects by music, effects by board lights, etc. Good. In addition, at the time of executing a predetermined effect, the effect to be output cancellation target or the predetermined effect is a composite of at least two or more of each effect element such as image display, character operation, music, and board lamp In the case of being executed as a combined effect, it may only be necessary to discontinue output of at least one of the combined effect elements. For example, in the case where the predetermined effect is “bullet emission effect” shown in FIG. 201 (G) described later, and the effect targeted for output cancellation is “composite effect of image display and board lamp”, the combined effect is Even if the output applied to the image display is canceled and the output applied to the board lamp is maintained, the effect by the board lamp which is not reached by the bullet as the image display in the display area is adversely affected. It can be said that there is no concern that (competition due to presentation) will occur.

[Timer plus production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, at least one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, cut in B, role B action, etc.) is counted The count display can be displayed within a period in which the symbol effect is performed, and the count display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is made non-display to make the target object appear in the non-display state. It is possible to perform the production. In this respect, in the count effect, after the count display which has become a specific count value (for example, "0") is not displayed, not only one of the plurality of effect modes is caused to appear, but also the specific count value (for example "0" It is possible to execute the effect of continuing the count effect by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving a larger count value than “)” (timer plus effect).

  That is, in this case, even if the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, “0”) and this is not displayed, the count display is displayed even if it is in a state of causing any of a plurality of presentation modes to appear. Since there is a possibility that re-display with a count value larger than the specific count value and that the rendition effect is further continued (possibility of a more highly expected rendition mode to occur), the count display It will be expected to maintain the game interest after the non-display.

  FIG. 193 (a) shows a mode of single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer plus production performed when a specific change number (no timer SP reach) is selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type (a plurality of not only cut-in B2 may be present) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 193). The following processing relating to the timer plus effect is performed at step 162). However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer plus effect is not performed even if any timer type is determined instead of performing the following processing relating to the timer plus effect. The following processing regarding may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), assuming that the timer type of "cut in B2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects the timer type as the next processing. A determination process is performed as to which of the plurality of effect modes ("cut-in B2-1" and "cut-in B2-2") including the mode of the timer plus effect, "cut in B2" is performed. Preferably, the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Of the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), in the “cut in B2-1” mode, 40 seconds are displayed after the count display with the count value of “40” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation. When the predetermined time ("0" in this case) is reached and the count display is not displayed, "Cut in B (cut B advance notice)" being a timer target is executed.

  On the other hand, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation, the count display is displayed with the count number significantly smaller than the "cut-in B2-1" mode. There is. Generally, in such a timer effect, since there is often no effect during the period from when the count display is executed until the count display reaches the predetermined value, there is a concern that the game interest in that period will be reduced. Ru. Therefore, in the timer plus effect (a form of “cut in B2-2”) shown in FIG. 193 (a), first, a relatively small first count value (here, “4”) after a predetermined time has elapsed from symbol variation. After the count display is displayed and the display is hidden, the first double compatible effect in the non-display state is longer than the time during which the count display is displayed (here, 4 seconds) For example, it is supposed to execute for 9 seconds.

  Here, in the first double-compatible effect, first, the effect of the cut-in B as an effect (first timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the first count value (here, “4”). Run. However, in the first timer target effect, as a cut-in B mode, a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (a character wearing a blue aura) is made to appear. Then, after that, an effect (second timer target effect) is executed as to whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed in a manner that a count value larger than the first count value is given. In addition, as an effect as to whether or not to display the count display again, for example, whether or not a specific display image (count-up image) appears, or whether a specific movable combination (count-up role) operates It can be realized as an effect such as whether or not.

  In addition, in the effect (count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display, each time the count display in the non-display state is re-displayed, it is executed prior to that, but the specific display The effect mode (color, light emission mode, etc.) when appearing as an effect using an image (count-up image) or a specific movable character (count-up character) is made different according to the number of times it is displayed again It is desirable to do so. When a specific movable character (count-up character) is adopted as a character showing that the count display is redisplayed, the count-up effect is performed for the specific movable character (count-up character). It is desirable not only to be used for other effects such as jackpot confirmation, for example. However, in this case, in addition to making the operation mode of a specific movable character (count-up character) different, in addition to the specific movable character (count-up character), a movable character different from this is further operated. It is desirable from the viewpoint of grasping that the count-up effect is not being performed, by causing them to cooperate and perform the movable effect.

  According to such a configuration, two different effects (the first timer object effect (cut-in B) in which the degree of expectation is indicated (cut-in B) and whether the count display is re-displayed are displayed as the object of the count "4") Since the timer target effect (count-up effect) is performed, when the count display (count "4") for a relatively short time is performed, the timer target effect can be enjoyed for a longer time than this. become able to. Therefore, it is expected that the time required for the count display to be executed is reduced while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, and that the decrease in the game interest during the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value is suppressed. Become so.

  In this respect, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the first double compatible effect, and when the effect result appears, the first effect is generated. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving the second count value (here, “5”) larger than the count value of. However, in the first double compatible presentation, a presentation pattern in which a presentation result that fails to redisplay the count display appears is also prepared, and when the presentation pattern appears, the count display is not displayed again. It is desirable that the timer effect be ended at this time.

  After this, when the count display given the second count value (here, “5”) is hidden after a predetermined time, the second double-compatible effect is displayed in the non-display state. Is to be executed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time for which it is displayed (here, 5 seconds).

  Also in this second double compatible effect, first, the effect of the cut-in B is performed as an effect (third timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the second count value (here, “5”). Run. However, in the third timer target effect, as a cut-in B mode, an aspect (a character covering a green aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect appears. After that, an effect (fourth timer object effect effect) on whether the count display is redisplayed or not is performed in a manner of giving a count value larger than the second count value.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the second count value (here, “5”) that takes longer than the first count value (here, “4”) is performed. However, in exchange for this, the effect of the cut-in B comes to be executed in a mode with a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect. Therefore, while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, it is expected to suppress the decrease in the game interest during the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value while extending the time required for the count digestion. Become.

  In this respect, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, a rendition result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the second double correspondence rendition, and when the rendition result appears, the second The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving a third count value (here, “7”) larger than the count value of. However, even in the second double compatible presentation, a presentation pattern in which a presentation result that fails to redisplay the count display appears is prepared, and when the presentation pattern appears, this count display is not displayed again. It is desirable that the timer effect be ended at a time point.

  After this, when the count display given the third count value (here, “7”) is hidden, in the non-display state, the count display is displayed for the third double-compatible effect. It is supposed to run for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time (7 seconds in this case).

  Here, even in the third double-compatible effect, first, cut-in as an effect (fifth timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the third count value (here, “7”). Perform B production. However, in the third timer target effect, as a cut-in B mode, an aspect (a character covering a red aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer target effects appears. Then, after this, an effect (sixth timer object effect effect) on whether the count display is redisplayed or not is performed in a manner of giving a count value larger than the third count value.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the third count value (here, “7”), which requires a longer time than the first and second count values (here, “4”, “5”) In exchange for this, since the effect of cut-in B is to be executed in a mode with higher expectation than the first and second timer target effects, the count display is performed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the game interest in the period until the predetermined value is reached.

  In this respect, in the "cut-in B2-2" mode, an effect result that fails to re-display the count display appears in the third double compatible effect, and at this time, the timer effect is ended. It will be done. That is, in this case, in the timer effect, the cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura is finally executed as the effect of the timer object, but until the cut-in B according to the aspect appears Since the count display of relatively short time is displayed a plurality of times and the effect corresponding to the count display is performed a plurality of times, it is from the start of the timer effect to the end thereof. It will be expected to maintain the gaming interest favorably.

  Moreover, every time the count display is redisplayed, the total time for displaying the count display itself is increased from the total time for which the count display is not displayed, although the count value is increased to earn a scale as the entire effect. Because the timer target effect is executed in a higher expectation mode each time the count display is hidden, the timer effect is executed while maintaining the game interest for a long time. You will be able to

  Moreover, in the mode of "cut-in B2-2", whenever the count display is made non-display, the expectation is gradually increased by changing the mode (color) for the same effect (cut-in B) Since it was made to express a mode, it became possible to execute the count display of those plural times as one timer effect for "cut-in B", and the effect displayed finally (red It is possible to recognize that the cut-in B) by the character wearing the aura of is a target of the effect of the timer effect.

  In addition, in the third double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears is prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is re-displayed to perform timer effect. It is desirable to keep the However, when the count display has reached the maximum number of times to be redisplayed, it is not the effect of cut-in B which has been executed up to that time, but the effect different from this (the degree of expectation is higher than any of the cut-in B modes It is desirable to execute a special effect (not prepared as a timer target candidate) so that it is possible to recognize that the maximum number of times has been reached. In this case, although the effect on whether or not to re-display the count display is not displayed after the special effect is executed, the double response effect (two The timer target effect is to be executed for a longer period of time than the effect to be executed, suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than the effect (cut-in B by a character wearing a red aura) that has appeared so far It is desirable from the point of view of improving the game interest. In this case, the expectation may be 100%.

  FIG. 193 (b) is a time chart for explaining a modification of timer plus effect.

  The timer plus effect may be performed in the mode shown in FIG. 193 (b). That is, in the aspect shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the count display having the first count value (here, “4”) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the first count value ( Here, the effect corresponding to “4” corresponding to “4” (4-second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count "4" (the effect at the time of 4 seconds timer), an effect period for only the time required for the first count value ("4" in this case) to be digested is set. Within the effect period, timer object effects such as cut-in B are executed in a predetermined mode (such as a character covered with a blue aura).

  According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute the effect of the timer target in the situation where the count display is being performed, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest during the count digestion. .

  In addition, when such a "4" corresponding effect (4 seconds timer effect) is finished, the count display of the "4" count will also reach the predetermined value ("0" in this case), so the timer Even if the count display of the effect is not confirmed, it is easily recognized that the count display has reached the predetermined value (here, “0”) only by confirming the corresponding effect for “4” (4 seconds timer effect) corresponding to the count “4”. You will be able to

  Then, after the timing when the effect corresponding to the count "4" (the effect at the time of 4 seconds timer) is finished comes in this way (after the count display of the count "4" reaches a predetermined value), the first count value ( Here, an effect (first count-up effect) on whether the count display is redisplayed or not is performed in the form of giving a count value larger than "4". This first count-up effect is executed as the same effect as the “effect on whether or not to re-display the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the above-mentioned count display is performed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to redisplay appears, the timer effect is ended at this time without the count display being redisplayed.

  However, as a result of the first count-up effect, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears, a second count value (larger than the first count value (here, “4”) Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving “5”). In this respect, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of giving the second count value (here, “5”), the count corresponding to the second count value (here, “5”) "5" corresponding effect (5 seconds timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count "5" (effect for 5 seconds timer), an effect period for only the time required for the second count value ("5" in this case) to be digested is set. During the production period, timer target effects such as cut-in B appear in an aspect (such as a character covered with a green aura) with a high degree of expectation compared to the case of the above-mentioned count "4" corresponding effects (4 seconds timer effect). It will

  Then, after the timing when the effect corresponding to the count "5" (5 seconds timer effect) is ended comes (after the count display of the count "5" reaches a predetermined value), the second count value (here Then, an effect (second count-up effect) on whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed is performed in the form of giving a count value larger than "5". This second count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as “the effect on whether or not to re-display the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the above-described count display is performed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to redisplay appears, the timer effect is ended at this time without the count display being redisplayed.

  However, as a result of the second count-up effect, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears, a third count value (larger than the second count value (here, “5”) Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of giving “7”). In this respect, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of giving the third count value (here, “7”), the count corresponding to the third count value (here, “7”) "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count "7" (7-second timer effect), an effect period for the time required for the third count value ("7" in this case) to be digested is set. During the production period, timer target effects such as cut-in B appear in a mode (such as a character wearing red aura) with higher expectations than in the case of the above-mentioned effect corresponding to the count "5" (5 seconds timer effect). It will

  Then, after the timing when the effect corresponding to the count “7” (7-second timer effect) is ended comes (after the count display of the count “7” reaches a predetermined value), the third count value (here Then, an effect (third count-up effect) may be executed as to whether or not the count display is redisplayed in the form of giving a count value larger than "7". This third count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the “effect on whether or not the count display is re-displayed” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the above-described count display as a result of the effect When a rendition pattern that fails to re-display appears, the timer rendition is ended at this time without the re-display of the count display.

  In this respect, in this modification, after the timing when the counter 7 corresponding effect (7 second timer effect effect) comes to an end (after the count display of the counter 7 reaches a predetermined value), the count is further increased. The up-counting instruction that suggests the possibility of has shown an example in which this itself did not appear. As described above, even when the count-up effect itself does not appear, the count display is not displayed again, as in the case where the effect pattern that fails to re-display the count display in the count-up effect appears. At this point, the timer effect comes to an end.

  According to the count-up effect according to such a modification, when the count display having a predetermined number of count values is displayed, the count value is displayed and immediately determined in advance corresponding to the count value. Since count corresponding effects (cut-in B and the like) having effect contents for a certain amount of time will be started, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest while the count display is being performed. In addition, when such a countering corresponding effect is finished (when the count display reaches a predetermined value), an effect of giving a large count value to the count display and redisplaying is performed, and these two effects are alternately performed. Since the timer effect is executed and continued as it appears, it is suppressed that the count display is performed only in the timer effect and the occurrence of a situation where no effect is performed, so that the game entertaining is preferable. You will be able to maintain it.

  In this modification, the counter corresponding rendering (for example, count "4") having effect contents for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) corresponding to the displayed count value (for example, "4") While the corresponding effect is being executed, the count display is counted (4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 0). However, as described above, the counter-corresponding effect (for example, the counter "4" corresponding effect) according to this modification is terminated in time when the displayed count value (for example, "4") ends. As it is executed, for the count display, only the count value (for example, “4”) at the time of appearance is displayed for a predetermined time, and the count display during count digestion (4 → 3 → 2 → 1) It is more desirable in order to prompt the user to gaze at the counter-corresponding effect (for example, the counter “4” -corresponding effect) by not performing this for the countdown of → 0.

  Then, in each of the examples shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), after the timer effect is executed in this way, the symbol variation is stopped.

  It should be noted that in the effect regarding whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed among the timer plus effects, an effect reception period of a predetermined time is set, and counting is performed based on the player's operation being performed within the period. An effect (successful effect) that suggests that the display is redisplayed or an effect (failure effect) that suggests that the count display is not redisplayed may be made to appear. That is, in this case, after the success effect appears, the count display is redisplayed in the form of an increase in the count number to continue the timer effect, and when the failure effect appears, the count display is redisplayed thereafter. Absent. When such an effect is adopted, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect reception period, the effect result (success effect or failure effect) predetermined at a predetermined timing after the period is It will be displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the time required for the first to third double-compatible effects is set to the same time, but each count display (“4”, “5”, “7”) is supported. You may make it set to mutually different time as presentation time to perform. For example, every time the count display is redisplayed, as the count value of each count display gradually increases, the time required for this also gradually increases as a double-compatible effect corresponding to each count value. If it is set to, the total time required for the count display itself can be kept relatively short to maintain the interest of the game, and it is possible to suitably stretch the scale as the entire effect.

  In addition, in the effect as to whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed, in displaying the result of the effect, a plurality of effect modes having different proportions (expected degrees) in which the count display is redisplayed in an increasing count number Either one may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, every time the count display is redisplayed, the count display having the count value larger than the count value at the time when the previous count display is displayed is made to appear. It is not necessary to re-display the count display having a count value that is necessarily larger than the count value when the count display is displayed. That is, even if the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is executed, the game interest can be improved simply by redisplaying the count display when a predetermined effect image appears thereafter. It can be expected that it will be. However, despite redisplaying the count display with a count value smaller than the count value at the time when the previous count display was displayed, an effect with a high degree of expectation as timer target effect than the previous count display If the appearance ratio (which may be 100%) is increased, combined with the increase in the sense of speed from the display of the count display to the appearance of the timer target effect, the game interest is further improved. Will be able to And, when re-display in the count display having such a small count value is repeatedly executed, the appearance timing of the timer object effect gradually becomes shorter since the count display is first displayed. As such, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game by such an accelerated timer effect.

[Timer stagnation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action, etc.) The counting display is performed within a period in which the symbol effect is performed, and when the counting display reaches a predetermined value, the effect mode counting among the plurality of effect modes is displayed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the count display can be made to be non-displayed before the count display starts until it reaches a predetermined value, and the count display is There is a case where the display is hidden for the first time and when the display is hidden for the second time longer than the first time (timer stagnation effect).

  That is, in this case, when any one of the plurality of effect modes appears as the count target when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the count display may take a first time or until the predetermined value is reached. Since it may be hidden for a longer second time, it may be difficult to grasp the remaining time until any of the plurality of effect modes occurs, and the sense of tension before the effect of the count target is executed Can be sustained.

  FIG. 194 (a) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) In a situation, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer stagnation production performed when change numbers 7 and 8 (refer to Drawing 148) equivalent to "there is no timer character reach" are chosen.

  In the example shown in FIG. 194 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (a plurality of not only the character A action 2 but a plurality may be selected) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The following processing relating to the timer stagnation effect is performed (see FIG. 161). However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer stagnation effect is not performed even if any timer type is determined instead of performing the following processing regarding the timer stagnation effect The following processing regarding may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), assuming that the timer type of "character product A operation 2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the next processing as the next processing. About which of a plurality of effect modes (“Am act A 2-1” and “Am act 2-2”) including the selected “character A action 2” including the aspect of the resurrection timer effect It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the big hit determination and the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 194 (a), in the mode of “character product A operation 2-1”, after the count display having the count value of “30” is started after a predetermined time from the start of symbol variation, 30 When the second has passed and the count display has been hidden by reaching a predetermined value (“0” in this case), “A part operation A (presence part A notice)” that is the timer target is executed Be done.

  On the other hand, in the mode of "character product A operation 2-2", after the count display having a count value of "10" is started after a predetermined time from the start of symbol variation, 5 seconds have elapsed When the value becomes "5", it is hidden, and when the non-display state is maintained for 6 seconds, the count display is redisplayed with a count value of "4". After this, when 2 seconds have passed and the count value becomes "2", it is again hidden, and when the non-display state is maintained for 16 seconds, the count display is re-displayed with a count value of "1". After “1” is displayed, and “0” is reached after one second, “A part operation A (presence of A part A)” being timer target is executed while the count display is not displayed. It has become.

  According to such an "character product A operation 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the count display having the count value of "10" starts after a predetermined time from the start of symbol fluctuation In the same manner as when the count display having the count value of “30” is started despite the above-mentioned mode, a predetermined value (here, “30” has passed since the start of the count display. It reaches 0 ") and the effect of the timer object is to be executed. That is, in this case, even if a count display having a relatively small count value appears, if an effect (timer stagnation effect) is generated to hide the count display for a predetermined time while the count display is digested, the count The speed of progress of is stopped for that time, and it is expected that it will be executed as a timer effect that takes the same time as when a count display with a relatively large count value appears . And, as described above, in the timer effect, the longer the time required for this, the higher the proportion of the appearance of the timer object with a high degree of expectation, and the tendency for the appearance of the timer object to appear higher. Since the stagnation effect can be generated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when a count display having a relatively small count value appears. In addition, since the time for the entire timer effect is extended by adding the time for which the count display is not displayed, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest while the count display is performed. .

  Further, in the mode of "character product A operation 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the first time (6) is taken until the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, "0"). The count display is not displayed for a period of time during which the count display is not displayed for a period of time (period between count values "5" → "4") and for a second time (16 seconds) longer than the first time. Period (count value “2” → period between “1”) is allowed to appear, but regardless of the length of the time (first time, second time), the count display When returning from the "display state" to the "display state", the count value is made to advance (change) by a specific number (here, "1") which is the minimum unit. That is, in this case, the longer the time in which the count display is maintained in the "non-display state" is, the longer the progressing speed of the count is stagnant as the time lengthens. Can be expected to improve the fun of the game.

  Also, in the mode of "character product A operation 2-2", as the count value in the timer effect advances, the time when the count display is made non-display becomes longer as it is maintained in the "non-display state" It is supposed to be set to That is, in this case, even when the count display is about to be finished while the count display with a relatively small count value is being executed (the situation where the predetermined value is reached a little later), If the timer stagnation effect appears, the time required for the timer effect is greatly increased and the expectation degree is greatly improved. Therefore, the game interest is suitably maintained over the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value. You will be able to

  Further, in the mode of "character product A operation 2-2", after the count display is not displayed, the timer display effect is performed after the count display is displayed again and reaches a predetermined value. However, after the count display is not displayed, the count display is not necessarily redisplayed, so that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is interrupted at this point can also be generated without executing the timer object effect. May be When this effect pattern appears, the percentage at which symbol variation is stopped in the big hit symbol is lower than when a predetermined value is reached and timer target effect is executed, but timer effect is produced by preparing such effect pattern It is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of this itself. In addition, after the count display is made non-display (after the timer effect is terminated), while waiting for the count display to be re-displayed, the symbol variation may be stopped by the big hit symbol. Since it becomes possible to realize such a dramatic effect, it is expected to improve the fun of playing a game.

  Moreover, in the mode of "character product A operation 2-2", the total time (22 seconds) in which the count display is not displayed is longer than the total time (10 seconds) in which the count display is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment while the count display is being executed.

  FIG. 194 (b) shows an example of the relationship between the time until the count display is redisplayed (the time when the non-display state is maintained) and the risk degree that the count display is not redisplayed. It is Table H1 which shows separately the count value when making it display. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as the relationship shown in the table H1 appears, it depends on the type of timer effect including the aspect of the timer stagnation effect and the execution mode thereof based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of fluctuation pattern. It is desirable to perform processing.

  According to the aspect shown in such a table H1, as the count value is developed (as it approaches the predetermined value), the maintaining time when being hidden tends to be long, while the hiding time is not There is a tendency that the risk that the timer effect is ended may be gradually increased without redisplaying the count display as it is. That is, in this case, when the count value is not advanced at a stage when it is not displayed, the total time as a timer effect can be slightly extended although it is small but the end value is small but the count value is large. If it is made non-display at the advanced stage, the end risk is also large, but the total time as timer effect can be extended greatly, so as the count value progresses, the effect as timer stagnation effect is gradually changed Thus, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment while the count display is performed.

  In Table H1, each count value is associated with one non-display time, but each count value is associated with a plurality of non-display times, and the timer stagnation occurs in any of the non-display times. An effect may be generated.

  In addition, as to the timing (count value) at which the count display is performed while the count display is being performed, the number of times the display is not displayed depends on the result of the big hit determination, the type of fluctuation pattern, etc. It is desirable to make a decision based on the start of symbol variation.

  Further, in such a timer stagnation effect, an effect corresponding to this may be performed while the count display is not displayed. For example, when the non-display is performed for 6 seconds with the count value “6”, the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6” is performed for 6 seconds, and non-display for 16 seconds with the count value “2”. If the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “2” (a effect different from the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6”) is performed for 16 seconds, It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the count display is in the non-display state. At this time, an effect may be made to appear whether or not the count display is redisplayed in the non-display effect, and the count display may be redisplayed according to the result of the effect, or the timer effect may be ended. .

  More preferably, during the period from when the count display is started to when it reaches a predetermined value, when the count display is in the display state, any effect (effect different from the timer effect) indicating the big hit expectation is newly added If it is not started, and it is possible to newly start an effect (a different effect from the timer effect) that indicates the jackpot expectation degree when the count display is in the non-display state, the remaining count should be taken care of It is possible to enjoy a different effect from the timer effect. Further, in addition to the expectation increase due to the timer stagnation effect itself, in addition to the expectation increase due to the timer effect, it is possible to enjoy the expectation increase due to the effect different from the timer effect being performed. It will be possible to make it even higher.

  Then, another effect appearing when the count display is in the non-display state may include a new timer effect different from the timer effect. However, in this case, the count is advanced faster than the progress rate of the count being in the non-display state, and the new timer is displayed before the timing when the count display in the non-display state is redisplayed. It is desirable that the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value to cause the target effect to appear. In addition, as the target effect of the new timer effect, an effect of redisplaying the count display in the non-display state may be performed.

[Progressive production leading to timer target production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, count display to a predetermined value is performed within a period in which symbol effect is performed, and at least one of a plurality of effect modes prepared as candidates for effects corresponding to the count display. It is possible to execute a timer effect that causes one to appear as a timer target effect. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present invention, a series of effects including the effects of the timer (for example, conversation announcement, hold change, cut-in A, role A action, special timer, cut in B, role B action, etc.) The timer corresponding effect of is started before the count display reaches a predetermined value, and can be ended after the count display reaches a predetermined value (progress effect leading to timer object effect).

  That is, in this case, since a series of timer corresponding effects corresponding to the timer effect will be executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is preferable to play the game while the count display reaches the predetermined value. You will be able to maintain it.

  FIG. 195 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the progress effect leading to the timer target effect.

  As shown in FIG. 195, the timer effect is currently executed in a specific timer type within the fluctuation period of the symbol, and the count value of the count display is to the first specific value (here, the count "6"). If it has progressed, in peripheral control MPU 1511a, firstly, the progress effect (a series of timers corresponding to the contents of the timer target effect appearing after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0") Start the production).

  Here, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 195, as a timer target effect appearing after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the cut-in by the ally character is A display image SEG3-1 to be performed is displayed. In this point, in the timer effect according to this explanation example, the cut-in by the ally character is performed in the period during the count digestion before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, the count “0”). The process of having reached the situation to be displayed is displayed as a rendering image (progressive rendering leading to the rendering content of the timer target rendering).

  For example, in this example, the count value of the count display is the first specific value (here, the count "6") before the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"). When this is the case, as a corresponding effect, a display image SEG1 depicting a person who requests help from the teammate character is displayed.

  Next, when the count value of the count display reaches a second specific value (here, the count "3") before the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"). As an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG2 is displayed that depicts a situation in which an ally character faces an enemy character by accepting a request from a person for help.

  That is, by causing the display images SEG1 and SEG2 to sequentially appear while the count display is progressed to a predetermined value, when the count display further progresses and reaches a predetermined value, cut-in by the ally character (here, It can now be expected that the display image SEG 3-1 in which the teammate character takes over the aura to defeat the enemy character is expected to be displayed, thereby making the game entertaining while the count display is being executed. Can be controlled.

  However, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, even if the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count “3”) appears, the cut by the ally character occurs when the count display reaches the predetermined value. An effect pattern is also prepared in which a display image SEG 3-2 depicting a situation in which the teammate character escapes in front of the enemy character is displayed instead of the display image SEG 3-1 in which the in is performed. According to such a configuration, the count display has a predetermined value while it is possible to attach a star as an object of the timer effect as a target of the timer effect in a period before the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since it does not reach until it specifies the effect mode which appears when it reaches to, it becomes possible to maintain this suitably also about the game interest after the count display reaches a predetermined value. The display image SEG 3-2 may not necessarily be prepared, and the display image SEG 3-1 may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In this regard, in this example, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count "6") appears, the display corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count "3") After the appearance of the image SEG2, it is supposed to prepare an effect pattern which is terminated prematurely before the count display progresses further and reaches a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, the progress of the count display is carried out with the risk that the timer effect will end prematurely without the appearance of the timer object being displayed while the effect progress appearing before the predetermined value is reached. Will be able to enjoy. In addition, the effect pattern in which the timer effect is ended may not necessarily be prepared, and the count display may surely reach a predetermined value so that the effect of the timer object appears.

  Further, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in is performed by the teammate character, and Although illustration is omitted, it is displayed as an effect image connected to different display images (for example, cut-ins by different characters) prepared as timer target effects. For example, in the examples shown in FIG. 204 (C) to (F) and FIG. 205 (G) to (I) described later, any one of the three ally characters shown in FIG. The request from the person is accepted, and the accepted ally character faces the enemy character to perform a cut-in effect.

  Therefore, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, after display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count “6”) is displayed, the second specific value (here, count “3” is displayed. Not the display image SEG2 but another display image may be displayed as the display image corresponding to “)”, and when the other display image is displayed, the display image when the predetermined value is reached Progress of presentation is made so as to be connected to a display image (for example, a cut-in by a different character) different from SEG 3-1. The display image SEG1 may be executed as an effect that necessarily leads to the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in by the ally character is performed.

  It should be noted that it is desirable to determine which route the effect is to be developed while the count display is being executed, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of the variation pattern, etc. when the symbol changes. When the effect pattern for which the timer target effect is not executed appears, the percentage of symbol fluctuation being stopped at the big hit symbol is lower than when the timer object effect is executed by reaching a predetermined value, but such effect pattern By preparing, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the timer effect itself.

  In addition, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count "6") appears, counting is performed until the count display becomes the second specific value (here, the count "3"). The display may be hidden. For example, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, when the count "6" is displayed, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the count "6" is divided by the time for which the counts "5" to "4" are digested. While the display image SEG1 is displayed, the count display is hidden. Then, after that, the count display is displayed in accordance with the timing when the count number becomes “3”, and the display image SEG2 corresponding to the count “3” is the time for which the count “2” to “1” is digested. , And hide the count display while the display image SEG2 is displayed. After that, when the count display is displayed according to the timing when the count number becomes “0”, and the display image SEG 3-1 (timer object effect) corresponding to the count “0” is executed, it is predetermined. It becomes possible to enjoy the progression of the presentation corresponding to the count number without worrying about the count digest towards the value.

  The display image SEG1, the display image SEG2, the display image SEG3-1, and the like may be displayed as a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image requiring a predetermined time. When displaying as a still image, a plurality of still images may be sequentially displayed within a predetermined time corresponding to a specific count value (a first specific value or a second specific value).

  In addition, the time for which the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value is displayed, the time for which the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value is displayed, and the display image SEG3-1 corresponding to the predetermined value are displayed. About time, it is desirable to set them as mutually different time.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the progress effect leading to the timer target effect, it is decided to prepare a plurality of types of progress effects leading to any of a plurality of timer target effects, but a specific timer object effect appears It may be possible to execute progress presentation linked to the specific timer target presentation even before the count display reaches a predetermined value, only occasionally.

  In the example of illustration shown in Drawing 195, although it was decided to execute the progress effect leading to the timer object effect from when the count number is "6", it is not limited to this. For example, the first specific count number (for example, "3") with relatively small remaining count and the second specific count number (for example, "6") with relatively large remaining count. When progress effect leading to timer object effect is executed and progress effect leading to timer object effect is executed when the second specific count number (for example, "6") having relatively large remaining count is executed. If the jackpot expectation level is made relatively high, it will be more suitable for the game interest since the stage will be more developed with the continued number of counts as if the jackpot expectation level is high. You will be able to maintain it.

[Operation effect in the timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, count display up to a predetermined value can be performed within a period in which the symbol effect is performed, and count object effects targeted for the count display can be performed. In this respect, in the timer effect according to the present invention, it is possible to set a period in which an operation to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be accepted while the count display is being performed. When the operation for 410) is performed, when the count display becomes a predetermined value, any of a plurality of operation effect modes having different proportions of appearance of a high-representation performance aspect (for example, cut-in B) as a count target performance To generate In addition, as the period for which the effect can be received, the first period from when the count display is the first count value to the second count value, and the third count value where the count display is counted later than the second count value. And the second period from the time of the fourth count value to the fourth count value is prepared as a settable period. Then, on this, the second time from the time when the count display is the first count value, during the symbol effect period in which it is determined that the high-expected performance aspect (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count target performance. When the operation to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed during the first period until the count value and the effect is accepted, and when the count display is the third count value When the operation to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed during the second period until the count value and the effect is accepted, the specific operation effect is performed as a result of the effect acceptance The ratio of occurrence of a mode (for example, a mode that suggests that a specific effect with a high degree of expectation appears as a timer target effect is high) is made different ( Timer within the operating performance).

  That is, in this case, even if it is determined that a high expectation effect (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count corresponding effect, the count display is from the first count value to the second count value. Identification when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated when the count display is the third count value to the fourth count value The operation display (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated from the time when the count display is the first count value to the time when the second count value since the easiness of generation of the effect mode at the time of operation is different. The operating means (for example, the operating button 410) should be operated from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value, or both of them Work unit (e.g., operation buttons 410) it is possible to have fun in game strategies such should manipulating.

  For example, when an operation is performed on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) within a period in which a specific operation effect mode is likely to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation effect mode does not appear can be suppressed. Even when this specific operation effect mode is more likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for the appearance (for example, cut-in B) having a high degree of expectation as a count target effect. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) within a period in which the specific operation effect mode is hard to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation effect mode does not appear is high. When the specific operation effect mode is less likely to occur, when this appears, it is easy to have an expectation for the appearance (for example, cut-in B) having a high degree of expectation as a count-corresponding effect.

  Then, until the count display becomes a predetermined value in such two different periods (from the time of the first count value to the time of the second count value and from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value) To have an interest in how to operate the operation means (for example, cut-in B) for these two periods, and to maintain the game interest during count digestion It comes to be expected.

  FIG. 196 (a) shows a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a second process in which it is determined that mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the operation production in a timer performed when a specific change number (no timer SP reach) is selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 162), the following process regarding the operation effect in the timer is performed. It is supposed to run. However, in view of the fact that the operation effect in the timer functions as "effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the specific effect appears as the timer object effect", the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). Instead of performing the following process for the operation effect in the timer when being played, the following process for the operation effect in the timer is also performed when a timer type for which another effect mode appears instead of the cut-in B as the timer object effect is determined. Run. In addition, when the timer type in which the effect having a lower degree of expectation than the cut-in B appears as the timer target effect is determined, the effect is compared to the case where the timer type in which the cut-in B appears as the timer target effect is determined. When reception is made, the rate at which the specific operation effect mode occurs is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), assuming that the timer type of “cut in B2” is selected as the result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects the timer type as the next processing. A determination process is performed as to which of the plurality of effect modes ("cut-in B2-11" and "cut-in B2-12") including the mode of the operation effect in the timer, "cut-in B2". Preferably, the determination process is performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 196 (a), in the form of “Cut in B2-11”, 40 seconds are displayed after the count display having the count value of “40” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation. When the predetermined time ("0" in this case) is reached and the count display is not displayed, "Cut in B (cut B advance notice)" being a timer target is executed.

  On the other hand, in the "cut-in B2-12" mode, a predetermined value (40 seconds after the count display having a count value of "40" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation Here, "cut-in B (cut B advance notice)" which is a target of the timer is executed while "0" is reached and the count display is not displayed. However, in the "cut-in B2-12" mode, the first period from when the count value of the count display is "35 (first count value)" to "25 (second count value)" is the same as in the first embodiment. Regarding the operation effect in the timer when there is an operation on the operation button 410) in the second period from the time of the count value of “15 (third count value)” to the time of “5 (fourth count value)” The effect reception of is to be made, and a display indicating that the effect reception is in an acceptable state appears. In addition to the method of displaying a specific display image, a display indicating that the effect reception is permitted is "25 (second count value)" from "35 (first count value)". By changing the display mode (size, shape, color, etc.) of the count value from “15 (third count value)” to “5 (fourth count value)” until Is also feasible.

  That is, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-12", any one of the first period (count values "35" to "25") and the second period (count values "15" to "5") If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 during the period, the effect reception as the operation effect in the timer will be made, and based on the effect reception, the rate at which the specific effect with high expectation appears as the count target effect is different. One of a plurality of operation time presentation modes is generated. In addition, about a several operation time production mode, it is possible to employ | adopt as a mode which makes a predetermined | prescribed lamp light in blue or red (specific operation time production mode), for example, and the mode lighted in blue The rate at which a specific effect with a high degree of expectation appears as the count target effect is the lowest when appearing, and the rate at which a specific effect with a high degree of expectation emerges as a count target effect when a mode of lighting in red (specific operation effect mode) appears Can be set to be the highest.

  In FIG. 196 (b), it is determined which of the effect modes should be made to appear as the operation effect mode depending on whether the effect is accepted when in the first period or when the effect is accepted in the second period. It is a figure which shows the example about the table (table T16) referred when carrying out.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a mode in which a predetermined lamp is turned on in either blue or red (a specific operation effect mode) is prepared as the operation time effect mode.

  In this regard, in the table T16 shown in FIG. 196 (b), in the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which "cut-in B" appears as the timer target effect, if the effect is accepted during the first period, "Blue" (low expectation mode) is selected at a rate of "30/100", red color (high expectation mode) is selected at a rate of "70/100", and effects are accepted when in the second period Then, the blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a rate of "70/100", and the red color (high expectation mode) is selected at a rate of "30/100". Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, it is possible to suppress the rendering risk that the red color (high expectation mode) does not appear, but the red color (high expectation mode) is easily generated. Even if this appears only for a minute, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for the appearance (for example, cut-in B) having a high degree of expectation as the count target effect. On the other hand, when the operation to the operation button 410 is performed in the second period, the risk of the effect that red (high expectation mode) does not appear increases, but red (high expectation mode) is less likely to occur. Only when this appears, it becomes easy to have a sense of expectation for the appearance (for example, cut-in B) having a high degree of expectation as the count target effect.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in the effect pattern in which the effect aspect having a lower degree of expectation than “Cut in B” appears as the timer object effect, for example, “50/100” when the effect is accepted during the first period. "Blue" (low expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of "50%" and red color (high expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of "50/100". The blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a rate of 90/100 ", and the red (high expectation mode) is selected at a rate of" 10/100 ". Therefore, when a red color (high expectation mode) appears in the second period, it is possible to have an expectation that the effect pattern (cut in B2-12) in which “cut in B” appears as the timer object effect is selected. become.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type is determined, two periods of the first period and the second period are generated within the fluctuation time, but the result or fluctuation of the big hit judgment At least one of the first period and the second period may be generated based on the type of pattern, the type of timer, or the like. For example, when only the first period occurs, the risk that the red (high expectation mode) does not appear when the effect reception is made is suppressed, but the expectation when the red (high expectation mode) appears is too much The operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that it does not go high, and when the second period only occurs, there is a high risk that the red (high expectation mode) does not appear when the effect is accepted. However, the operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that the degree of expectation becomes high when the red color (high expectation mode) appears. That is, in this case, depending on the player's preference, even when it is desired to operate on the first period side, the operation opportunity is provided only on the second period side, or even if it is desired to operate on the second period side. Since the operation opportunity is only given on one period side, the count display is executed by causing a conflict as to whether or not to operate within the period on the non-preferred side while the count is being digested. It is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment while being played.

  In addition, during the first period or the second period, the display indicating that the effect reception is permitted may not necessarily be performed. That is, in this case, it is determined in which of the first period and the second period whether the acceptance of the effect is permitted or whether the acceptance of the effect is permitted in the first period or the second period is unclear As the display progresses, it becomes possible to make the timer effect more interesting, and it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest while the count display is performed.

  Moreover, about a 1st period and a 2nd period, it is desirable to set the time length in which presentation reception is permitted in those periods to the same. According to such a configuration, the effect reception is permitted for the same amount of time in either the first period or the second period, so that the count value is a specific number (here, “10”. It is possible to provide a period of progress only as "sinking time to perform the operation", and to maintain the game interest during the period in which the count display is executed through the addition of such effect elements It will be.

  In addition, during the first period or the second period, it is possible to receive an effect by the player for a plurality of times, and a change in the effect mode (for example, blue → green → red) occurs through the reception of a plurality of effects. The ratio of appearance of a high expectation (for example, cut-in B) may be increased as the count target effect. However, in this case, even if the effects are received a plurality of times, in the first period and the second period, the appearance possibilities of the effect modes that finally appear are set to be different from each other.

[Timer concealment production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, count display up to a predetermined value is performed within a period in which the symbol effect is performed, and timer target effect corresponding to the count display can be performed. In this regard, in the present invention, while the count display is being performed, the count forward rendition by the decorative body can be performed on the front side of the count display.

  That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, counting by the decorative body is performed in such a manner that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the count display until the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since forward rendition comes to be performed, the count value by count display can be grasped only by skipping etc. Only a little time (during count forward rendition by decoration) until count object rendition is performed It is possible to make it difficult to grasp and to increase interest in the count display.

  In addition, since the expectation for the appearance of the big hit symbol is made high through the count forward rendition by the decoration instead of making it difficult to visually recognize the count display, it is about the decrease of the game interest due to the difficulty of visually recognizing the count display. Will be expected to suppress this.

  FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (c) show the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and it is determined that the mission effect (display conversation announcement is not performed) (NO in step S5507). In a 2nd processing condition, it is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of timer concealment production performed when a specific change number is chosen.

  In the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), first, count display having a count number of “30” is started at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. After the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect which is the timer target appears. However, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body can be performed on the front side of the count display at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count display.

  Here, as the count forward effect by such a decorative body, for example, in the examples of FIGS. 206 (B) and (C) described later, the movable body KT for effect is moved to the front of the count display and the predetermined time is set. It can be realized as, for example, a count number erosion rendition to position this over. The decorative body may not necessarily be provided as a movable body, as long as it is relatively difficult to visually recognize the count display at the time of effect than at the time of no effect.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed as the effect state (the state in which the count display is difficult to be recognized visually) until the count value becomes “10”. In the effect state, the operation aspect or the light emission aspect or the like by the decorative body is intended to indicate the ease of appearance of the specific effect with high expectation as the timer target effect.

  Then, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the effect of counting forward by the decorative body is finished, the count value changes from "10" to "0" under a state in which the count display is easily visible. It will progress, and then one of a plurality of presentation modes will appear as a timer target presentation.

  On the other hand, also in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), first, a count having a count number of "30" at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The display is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect which is the timer target appears. In addition, the point is also the same as in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), in that the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display while the count display is being performed.

  However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished in a relatively short time, and when the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished The display advances until the count value changes from “15” to “0” in a state where the count display is easy to visually recognize, and thereafter, one of a plurality of presentation modes appears as a timer target presentation.

  On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), first, the count display having a count number of “25” is made at the timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. After being started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the timer object effect that is the timer object appears. About the point where the count forward rendition by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display during the count display, it is the same as the timer rendition example shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b).

  However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), the count forward effect by the decorative body is generated / ended at a relatively early stage, and when the count forward effect by the decorative body is ended The progress is made until the count value changes from "20" to "0" under the state where the count display is easy to visually recognize, and thereafter, one of a plurality of effect modes appears as a timer target effect.

  As described above, in the timer effect, as the count value at the start of the count display is larger, the rate at which the effect target having a high degree of expectation appears as the timer object effect is higher. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the effect of counting forward by the decorative body is generated, it is not based on the count value at the time of starting the count display, but the effect of counting forward is finished and visually recognized As the count value at the time of facilitating the process becomes larger, the timer object effect is set so that the relationship in which the ratio of appearance of a high expectation is high appears. The percentage may include 100%.

  For example, in the effect examples of FIGS. 197 (a) and (b) described above, the count value when the count display is started in any of the effect patterns is “30”, but FIG. 197 (a) While the count value is "10" when the count forward effect is finished and it is easy to visually recognize in the effect example of, when the count forward effect is finished and it is easy to visually recognize in the effect example of FIG. 197 (b) Since the count value of is “15”, the ratio in which the effect with a high degree of expectation appears as the timer object effect is higher in the effect example of FIG. 197 (b).

  According to such a configuration, when the count forward effect occurs during execution of the count display, the effect value as the size of the count number appearing at the start of the count is damaged, and the count number when the count forward effect is ended Since the size of the character is re-focused, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment while the count display is being performed.

  For example, in the effect example of FIG. 197 (c) described above, “25”, which is a relatively small count value, is displayed at the start of counting, but is relatively large as the end of the effect when the count forward effect is finished “20” which is a count value is displayed, and the ratio of occurrence of a high expectation effect as a timer target effect is increased as compared to the example of the effect of FIGS. 197 (a) and (b). There is.

  That is, in this case, if the count forward effect is generated, there is a possibility that the ratio of the effect having a high degree of expectation as the timer target effect will be higher than when the relatively large count value is displayed at the start of the count. Thus, it is expected to suppress the decrease in the interest in gaming when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting.

  However, when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting, compared to when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting, when a forward effect is generated thereafter, the relatively large count is also generated at the end It is desirable to set so that the rate of occurrence of the value is high.

  Moreover, in the example of the effect of the above-mentioned FIG. 197 (a)-(b), since several time is prepared as time from a count display being started until a count front production | presentation generate | occur | produces, count display is performed. It becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the count forward rendition may occur over a long period of time and to maintain the game interest.

  Further, in the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b) described above, the count forward effect is started because a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start of the count forward effect to the end thereof. At this point, it becomes difficult to predict the count value at the end, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game interest until the count forward effect is ended.

  The count forward effect is displayed during a period before the count display is performed, for example, during a timer pre-read effect where the rate of appearance of the timer effect increases, for example, during the count display. You may However, in view of the configuration according to the present application in which it is difficult to visually identify the count progress by making the count forward effect appear while the count display is being performed, and to aim for interest as the effect, even before the count display is started. It is desirable that the count forward effect be performed at a higher rate after the count display is counted. In addition, when the count forward effect is executed while the timer prefetch effect is being executed in the period of one symbol fluctuation, the count display is not yet started when the count forward effect is finished, and the timer prefetch effect Is in the state of being executed, the rate at which the effect with a high degree of expectation appears as the timer object effect is higher than in the state in which the count display is being performed when the count forward effect is finished. It is desirable to set as follows.

  In addition, if it is assumed that the count forward effect is executed in a state where the timer prefetch effect is being executed, then the timer prefetch effect and the count display are made to display those display locations at different positions, and then the timer prefetch effect is performed. During execution of the count forward effect by the decorative body is performed on the front side of the display position of the timer prefetch effect, and during the count display, the count forward effect by the decorative body is on the forward side of the display position of the timer prefetch effect It is desirable to do That is, in this case, the decorative body is moved to a different position depending on, for example, whether the timer pre-reading effect is being performed or the count display is being performed. When the timer pre-reading effect is finished when the is positioned, the count display is started at a position different from the timer pre-reading effect which has been difficult to be recognized so far. According to such a configuration, when the count forward effect occurs while the timer pre-read effect is being executed, the count display is started at a stage where the count forward effect is still being executed and this is not ended. Even if this is done, it becomes possible to make the count value of the count display easily visible from the time of its start, so there is a possibility that the effect value as the size of the count number at the time of start of the count may be damaged. You will be able to enjoy the count forward rendition while being excluded.

  In addition, with regard to the count forward rendition, it is at a relatively late stage where a certain amount of time has passed since the count display was started, rather than a relatively early stage where the time has not passed so much since the count display was started. It is desirable that the rate at which the count forward effect is performed is higher.

  In addition, when the count forward effect is executed in a situation where the remaining count (remaining time) until the timer object effect is executed is not expected, the size of the count value appearing when this is terminated can not be expected. In addition to this, because there is a concern that may be confused with the timer target effect, the count forward effect is ended before the remaining count is less than the predetermined number, and the remaining count is less than the predetermined number. It is desirable to prevent the count forward rendition from being executed anew.

  In addition, as for the count forward effect, when a plurality of count displays are being performed, the decoration may be positioned on the front side across the count displays.

  Among timer effects, a timer of a type that causes a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) or a predetermined effect movable body (timer object advance effect) to appear when a specific count value is reached. When the rendition is executed, it is possible to substantially expose the current count value by the related rendition even during the count forward rendition by the decoration, so that the count display can be viewed After being made difficult, it will be possible to predict how much count progress is being made. However, instead of performing the count forward effect by the decorative body only on the front side of the count value, a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) when the specific count value is reached. Or, as the decoration is positioned forward to the position where a predetermined effect movable body (timer object advance effect) appears, the count forward effect is performed in a form where the decoration is positioned, and it is difficult to see the count display It may be difficult to predict how much count progress is being made.

  With regard to a decorative body that effects on the front side of the count display, the count front effect may be performed such that not only one decorative body but a plurality of decorative bodies are positioned on the front side of the count display. In this case, any of a plurality of modes, such as a mode in which only one of the plurality of decorative bodies is located on the front side of the count display, in addition to the mode in which the plurality of decorative bodies are all located on the front side of the count display. The forward play for counting may be selectively executed.

  Hereinafter, the contents of the effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 198 to 207 regarding various aspects of the above-described timer effect itself and various effects performed in relation to the timer effect. Here, the processing example according to each effect described above is merely an example, and for example, effects other than the types described above may be executed as the content of the effect, and the appearance timing and appearance condition of each effect And the like may be appropriately changed within the scope of the same technical concept. Therefore, in the example of the effects to be described below, although there may be included items that do not fit in with the effects of the effects according to the above-mentioned effects, the effects are within the same technical concept and within the feasible range by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the process contents are simply changed appropriately. Also, the following "timer effect" basically means that count display is executed by the notice-side timer effect or the fluctuation-side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning that includes timer pre-reading effect. Moreover, although it is supposed that "the number of seconds" is counted below also as an aspect of "count display", it is not restricted to this.

  FIG. 198 (A) shows an effect situation in which the variation display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being 0. ing. In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, for convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY for effect which has been omitted is shown in the drawing. The specific decoration member SDY may be, for example, “back down rear movable effect unit 3100 or back up left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back up middle movable effect unit 3400, back down front movable effect unit 3500, etc. Equivalent to the movable member of

  In FIG. 198 (B), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (A), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “70”, and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. It shows the presentation situation to be started.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 198 (B), when the timer effect (count number) is displayed, when the count display of the timer effect becomes a predetermined value, the target of the timer effect The candidate of the effect type that can appear as is displayed, and while it is unclear which of those candidates appears as the effect of the timer target while the count display is executed, any of those candidates is the timer target It is possible to recognize that it appears as an effect. Note that "conversation" in the figure corresponds to conversation announcement, "pending" in the figure corresponds to pending change, and "cut A" in the figure corresponds to cut-in A, as shown in FIG. The "part A" in the inside corresponds to the action A, the "secret" in the figure corresponds to the special timer, and the "cut B" in the figure corresponds to the cut-in B, The “role B” in the figure corresponds to the feature B operation.

  FIG. 198 (C) shows an effect situation in which the timer target exclusion effect described above is executed when the count number shown in FIG. 198 (B) is “60”.

  As described above, the timer target exclusion effect is an effect mode that is not selected as the timer object (it is not the timer object in the advance notice lottery for timer object, while it is unclear whether the effect of the timer object is the effect mode). It is possible to display an indication suggesting at least one (or two or more may be suggested) of the presentation modes not determined as.

  Here, although this is also described above, in the timer effect, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) and the effect of the timer object can appear (in this example, As 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds and so on) have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the types of effects that can appear as timer objects are also narrowed down. Therefore, in the example of the effect of FIG. 198 (C), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing when the effect for the timer object can appear (10 seconds, 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation) , 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.) are to be set according to arrival.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (B), an effect pattern for displaying the timer effect with a count number of “70” is described. However, at this timing, the timer effect does not have a count of “70”, but has another count such as “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, or “50”. It is also possible to generate an effect pattern to be displayed. Among these, assuming that a timer effect having a count number of “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the count display of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 198 (C). The predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached at the specified timing, and for example, “conversation notice” is made to appear as the effect of the timer. On the other hand, when a timer effect having a count number other than “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), it is assumed that “conversation notice” does not appear as a timer target effect, At the point when the count number is left at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (C) and when this time passes, “conversation notice” is substantially excluded from the types of effects that can appear as a timer target. It can be said that the candidates that could appear as effects were narrowed down. In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (C), since it is in an effect situation in which the count display is being executed with the count number of "60" remaining, at this timing It is desirable to perform an effect (a timer target exclusion effect) that indicates which of the effect types (conversation announcements) that are excluded from. As a result, it is possible to properly represent the presentation situation in which the player is placed.

  However, in the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C), it is suggested that “special timer” is not selected as the timer target effect, not “conversation notice” at this timing. There is. According to such a timer target exclusion effect, it will be apparent during the process of counting the count that "effect showing that it will appear as a big hit when appearing" is not selected as the effect of the timer object, It becomes possible to get anxious feeling about whether a high expectation effect appears as a timer target.

  In the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display image (confidential) corresponding to the “special timer” among the display images displaying the candidate effects for the timer effect is locked. A padlock in a state is displayed in an overlapping manner, and a display such as "Lock !!" is made to indicate that the "special timer" is not selected as a timer target effect.

  FIG. 198 (D) shows an effect situation in which the timer mode effect is executed when the count display becomes a specific count value after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). There is.

  As described above, the timer mode effect is an expectation for the effect of the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value within a period before the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The hell timer mode (the first timer mode display) with a relatively low ratio of appearance of the high effect mode (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode etc.)) and timer target when the count display becomes a predetermined value One of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) having a relatively high ratio of appearance of a high expectation degree is displayed as the effect of.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), first, it is decided to perform a heaven challenge presentation whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress, and the heaven challenge presentation appears At this point, it can be shown that either the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode is generated.

  In addition, in heaven challenge production, there is a possibility that it is likely to shift to hell timer mode, or there is a high possibility to shift to heaven timer mode (for example, demons and angels are pushing each other, which is the prevailing situation Or the like may be performed, and in this case, it will indicate which of the hell timer mode and the heaven timer mode is to occur after such an effect.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), since the heaven challenge effect is executed while the effect type excluded in the timer object exclusion effect is shown, any effect type is in the timer object exclusion effect Depending on whether it is excluded (is the type of production with a low degree of expectation excluded or is the type with a high degree of expectation excluded), is the situation where the hell timer mode is likely to occur, or heaven It can be said that it is possible to predict whether the timer mode is likely to occur under a certain degree of accuracy.

  In FIG. 198 (E), the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is shown as a result (for example, the result that the angel has won the battle with the devil) as a result of succeeding the heaven challenge direction shown in FIG. It shows the status of the production being performed.

  In this rendering situation, it is indicated that the transition to the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) has a relatively high proportion of the appearance of the rendering aspect having high expectation as the rendering of the timer object when the count display becomes a predetermined value. Be Therefore, when the timer target exclusion effect is performed when in the heaven timer mode (the second timer mode display), an advantageous result for the player (here, the effect with low expectation among the plurality of effect types is the timer target effect The rate at which it is suggested that is not selected is increased, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, the timer target exclusion effect is executed while the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) appears as a result of failure of the heaven challenge effect shown in FIG. 198 (D). In this case, since the rate at which it is suggested that a result disadvantageous to the player (in this case, that the high expectation effect among the plurality of effect types is not selected as the timer object effect) is high, timer object exclusion You will be able to get anxious feeling when the rendition occurs.

  In the example of FIG. 198 (E), transition to the heaven timer mode (or hell timer mode) is not expressed as a mode of count display, but is related to the mode of the decorative symbol SZ in fluctuation or to this. In this way, it is possible to recognize that transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is made without losing other effects during the remaining count. Further, in this case, it is possible to easily check the current timer mode even when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

  FIG. 198 (F) shows the second to fourth times that the heaven timer mode generated in FIG. 198 (E) is displayed after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). The timer target exclusion effect of is executed, and when the count display is “20”, the fifth timer target exclusion effect is displayed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), a state in which five types of effects among the seven types of effects prepared as effect candidates for the timer target are locked and displayed by the timer object exclusion effect (five types of effects Is in the state where it is indicated that the timer is not targeted), and when the count display reaches the predetermined value, one of the remaining two types of effects (hold change, feature B operation) occurs It can be said that it is in a recognizable state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), since the heaven timer mode is displayed, the remaining two types of effect candidates (hold change, as compared to the case where the heaven timer mode is not displayed) The ratio in which the effect on the side with high expectation is generated among the bonus item B operation) is high, and the sense of expectation until the count display reaches the predetermined value can be suitably maintained.

  At this time, after the appearance of the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F), the display of the heaven timer mode may be hidden from the time when the effect of the timer object appears. According to such a configuration, if it is not stored that the heaven timer mode is displayed, it becomes unclear which of the remaining production candidates is high, and it is counted as a compensation for not concentrating on the production It becomes possible to give a sense of tension until the display reaches a predetermined value.

  FIG. 199 (G) is before the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target appears, after the appearance of the fifth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F). By causing the effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY as the character B) to appear within the period, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY (character B) is made to be a timer target The timer object pre-empting effect which suggests that there is is shown the rendering condition in which execution is performed.

  That is, in this case, since the timer target advance effect is executed while the display concerning the timer target exclusion effect appears, any of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect may appear as the timer target effect It will be possible to provide more judgmental material on whether

  And, in this example, since "A character B middle movement (small)" is executed as a timer target advance effect, a specific one of the presentation candidates (hold change, role B operation) squeezed by the timer target exclusion effect is specified It is possible to recognize that the "character B action" which is the effect using the decoration member SDY (character B) is in a situation where the possibility of being executed as the effect of the timer target is high (may be 100%). It will be. As described above, "character B middle movement (small)" means that "character B movement" which is the effect of the timer object is "specific decoration member SDY (character B) from the first position to the second position When it is assumed that it is "displaced", it means "effect of displacing the specific decoration member SDY (character B) from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position".

  However, in this explanatory example, as the content of the effect according to the “character B operation”, the first effect having a relatively low degree of expectation merely displacing the specific decoration member SDY (character B) from the first position to the second position In addition to displacing the specific decorative member SDY (character B) from the first position to the second position, in addition to the content, a relatively high expected second of displacing the character A from the third position to the fourth position The contents of the effect are prepared, and the effect according to the "character B motion" is performed in any of the effects.

  In this respect, in the heaven timer mode according to this explanation example, compared with the case where the hell timer mode appears, when “action B feature” is selected as the effect of the timer object, the effect content is relatively expected. The heaven timer mode is set so that the rate at which the high second effect content appears is high, and the effect type appearing as an effect of the timer object is completely squeezed by the timer object advance effect. As a player, a useful function is provided.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (G), when the timer target advance effect using the specific decoration member (here, the specific decoration member SDY (character item B)) is executed, the specific decoration member is counting The timer target advance presentation effect is provided in a form overlapping with the count display, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the count display. That is, in this case, when such timer object advance effect is executed while not paying much attention to the count display, the specific decorative member SDY (character item B) used in the effect of the timer object is in the state of effect execution. It is easy to be misunderstood that it is easy to misunderstand that the timer target effect after the count display reaches a predetermined value and this is not displayed, instead of the timer target advance effect during count digesting combined with some things. It will be produced. Therefore, when it is recognized that the effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is not the timer object effect but the timer object advance effect, the specific decoration member SDY (character item B) is used as the timer object advance effect. It is possible to make a strong impression of the time being, and then, even if no display regarding the timer target advance effect is performed until the count display becomes the predetermined value, the specific decorative member SDY (character It is expected that the timer target effect will be generated upon recognizing that B) is used. When the timer target advance effect is executed, the count display may not be difficult to visually recognize, and may not be displayed until the timer target advance effect is ended.

  In FIG. 199 (H), after the timer target advance effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is executed, a specific count value (here, “in this case,” the count display is earlier than the predetermined value (“0” here)). 3) A new winning is generated after reaching 3), and the timer for suppressing the effect according to the winning, despite being in a situation where it is determined to execute the effect (hold change) according to the winning. The production | presentation condition in which object suppression control is performed is shown.

  That is, as described above, particularly in the example shown in FIG. 199 (H), the possibility that “hold change” is selected as the timer target effect by the timer mode effect or the timer object advance effect is extremely low. However, since "hold change" is still left as a timer target effect candidate, there may be a hold change corresponding to a new winning near the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. And, the hold change may be mistaken as the timer target effect, and as a result, the timer target effect itself may be overlooked. In addition, when "hold change" is executed as the effect of the timer object, it is relatively easy to distinguish whether it is the effect of the timer object since "hold 0" in the figure is performed. However, it is thought that there is a high possibility that these pending changes may be mistaken under the situation where the remaining count number is low.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the first period in which the remaining time until the count display in the timer effect reaches the predetermined value is relatively long (here, the count number is When it is in the remaining "3" period, the hold change according to the new winning being generated is permitted, but the first period is over, and the remaining time until the count display reaches the predetermined value When the second period (where the number of counts remains after “3”) is relatively small, it will not allow the pending change according to this even if a new winning occurs. To eliminate the above-mentioned concern (timer target suppression control).

  In FIG. 199 (I), while the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is being performed, the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and timer related The display (in this example, “Go”) is displayed, and then the effect situation (action of the character B) to be the effect target of the timer effect is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), it is shown that in the heaven timer mode, the feature B operation which is the effect of the timer target is not the first effect content with a relatively low degree of expectation but the comparison. It shows that it is being executed as a second rendering content with a high degree of expectation. However, in this case, the character B corresponds to the specific decoration member SDY, and the character A corresponds to the specific decoration member TGY. The specific decorative member TGY to be selected is a position on the back side in a front view with respect to the specific decorative member SDY to be provided for any of the first effect content and the second effect content, and most of them (at least The effect is to be produced at the position where the area is over half).

  According to such a configuration, which of the first effect contents having a relatively low degree of expectation and the second effect contents having a relatively high degree of expectation are being executed (whether or not the specific decorative member TGY is in an effect state Can be made difficult to determine, thereby promoting concentration on the effects of the timer. In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, as for the second effect contents, it is sufficient that the specific decorative member SDY (characters B) and those behind the above can produce effects, and in this sense, the specific decoration The specific display effect in the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the specific decoration member TGY (character A) instead of the combined effect of the member SDY (character B) and the specific decorative member TGY (character A), the specific display It may be performed as a combined effect of the effect and the specific decoration member SDY (character B).

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is continuously executed, and even if a new winning is generated, a pending change corresponding to this occurs. There is no need to do this, and the hold display that has won the prize in FIG. 199 (H) is also kept unchanged.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), "action B action" is executed as effect of the timer target among "hold change" and "action B action" left as effect candidates for the timer target. The display which can recognize that it is displayed (“役 B” in the figure blinks) appears, and the display that it can be recognized that it is not the effect of the timer target for “hold change” (“ "Displayed with X mark" for "pending" appears.

  FIG. 199 (J) shows an effect situation when the timer object suppression control is not executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect of the timer object is executed in FIG. 199 (I).

  That is, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the timer-targeted effect is executed, there is no concern that this is falsely recognized as the timer-targeted effect even if "hold change" is executed. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 199 (J), although it has been decided to change the hold according to the winning at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (H), the target is the hold display whose execution was carried over. This is changed on hold at the timing shown in (J). As a result, even if a new winning for which a change in reserve is to be made occurs near the timing at which the effect for timer is performed, the change in reserve is properly made clear that it is not an effect for which timer is off Will be able to run.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (J), the hold display different from the hold display (hold 0) during change is changed to blue. However, in view of the above special time change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the big hit hold (including hold 0) is included, such blue hold display has appeared Since it is clearly shown that the percentage of the jackpot symbol appearing in the variation is higher than in the case where the red reserved display appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), although there is a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect of the timer object was executed, which of the effect types is excluded in the timer object exclusion effect And the display which shows which effect of the timer object was, etc. is continuously executed. Also, a display indicating that it is in the heaven timer mode is continuously executed. However, the display indicating that it is in the heaven timer mode is a mode in which the display is made smaller as the decorative symbol SZ is displayed in the form of the reach display in a reduced size.

  And in this explanation example, each display which is continuously executed in this way even in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (J) is continuously executed even in the situation where the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 199 (FIG. 199) K)). According to such a configuration, for example, even in a state where the symbol is stopped (a state in which the big hit symbol appears), the timer effect is executed in the effect process up to that point, and the effect targeted by the timer effect It is possible to recognize that is "character B operation".

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. .

  FIG. 200 (A) shows an effect situation in which the variation display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being 4 ing.

  In FIG. 200 (B), during the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200 (A), the timer target exclusion effect is executed although the timer effect is not being executed. Indicates the situation.

  In this timer target exclusion effect, it is indicated that "act part B operation" is not a candidate for the timer target, and when the timer effect occurs in the fluctuation by this, the candidate for the timer target is a conversation It becomes possible for the player to grasp that one of the notice, the hold change, the cut-in A, the character A operation, the special timer, and the cut-in B has been squeezed. That is, in this case, among the plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, feature A action, special timer, cut-in B, role B action), the effect aspect having a relatively high expectation is the timer target Since it becomes possible to recognize that the player has deviated from the candidate, the player wishes that the timer effect does not occur within the fluctuation, and the timer effect (count display) is not executed yet. You will be able to stimulate the fun of playing games.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, a display that suggests various effects prepared as effect candidates for the timer object when performing the timer object exclusion effect Is not executed, but a display indicating that at least "action B operation" is not selected as a timer target effect appears. Therefore, in the timer target exclusion rendering according to this example, although it is possible to know that "action B's motion" is not a timer target rendering, it is unclear whether there is any other rendering type as a timer target rendering candidate The Rukoto.

  In FIG. 200 (C), after the timer target exclusion effect is executed in FIG. 200 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “15”, and the count display (here, countdown) is started It shows the production situation.

  Here, in the timer target exclusion rendering in this explanatory example, after displaying that at least "character B motion" is not selected as the rendering of the timer target (FIG. 200 (B)), the display is displayed as the timer rendering ( Until the count display is performed, the display is continued without being displayed without being hidden, and the timer effect (count display) is started while the display appears. In such a configuration, how much the degree of expectation this is from the time when the count display is started (in this case, it is a timer effect in which the "part B operation" with a relatively high degree of expectation is not executed) Will be able to recognize.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 200 (B) and 200 (C), a display indicating that at least "action B" is not selected as the effect of the timer object is continuously displayed as it is Although the aspect which depends on those displays is sometimes changed, it may not necessarily be different and may be the same.

  In FIG. 200 (D), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200 (C) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the timer display is performed under the non-display of the count display. It shows an effect situation in which "conversation announcement (first effect mode)" prepared as an effect candidate is being executed.

  That is, in this case, from the player's side, it is recognized that an effect such as "It may be a chance" as the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is recognized as an execution object of the timer effect. Become. However, the "conversation notice" shown in FIG. 200 (D) is not executed as the effect mode of the timer effect, and as is clear from the next effect situation (FIG. 200 (E)), the conversation notice is When it is ended, the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200 (C) is redisplayed and is continued further (resurrection timer effect).

  That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" is displayed as if it was a timer target (count target), the count display is re-displayed to further continue the timer effect, and the first effect Since the second effect aspect different from the aspect is indicated to be the timer target, the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation appears and this is not displayed. Even in this case, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target is changed after that, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In FIG. 200 (E), after the “conversation notice” executed under the condition that the count display is not displayed in FIG. 200 (D) is ended, the displayed count display is redisplayed. It shows the rendering situation to continue this (resurrection timer rendering).

  Here, in such a revival timer effect, while the count display is not displayed (FIG. 200 (D)), the count digest is also continued secretly, and in the example of FIG. 200 (E) The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the number of minutes (in this case, 2 seconds) which has been hidden is digested. That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice" is finished, the count display is re-displayed in minus notation (here, "-2"), but this causes "0" when it is hidden. In this case, it is possible to express how the count has not been finished and this is being executed continuously, which means that the “conversation annunciation” that appeared in FIG. 200 (D) was not a timer target effect. It will be possible to recognize.

  In addition, in such a revival timer effect, "count display which has appeared before being temporarily hidden" and "count display which has been once re-displayed since being temporarily hidden" are different counts. In order to make it possible to more reliably recognize that the same count is being digested rather than being digested, it is possible to count the count sound, even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continuously execute the count display that has appeared before being hidden and the count display that has been once hidden and then re-displayed.

  In addition, when the count display is performed in minus notation (here, “−2”), a display (for example, “−2 (remaining 18), etc.) that can recognize how much the count number remains It is desirable to do it. In this case, when the count display reaches “−20 (remaining 0)” as a predetermined value (when minus count is performed for 18 seconds from “−2”), this is not displayed and the timer target effect is executed. Become so.

  FIG. 200 (F) shows an effect situation where heaven challenge effect (not shown) is generated while the count display shown in FIG. 200 (E) is continued, and as a result, transition to the heaven timer mode is made. .

  The appearance of such timer mode effect (heaven challenge effect, heaven timer mode) makes it clearer that the timer effect has not ended and is still in a continuous state (state in which count display is in progress). Will be able to make In the example shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display indicating that the state is the heaven timer mode is not associated with the decorative symbol SZ, but within the display area. It is displayed on the left side of as an aspect of stamp notation.

  In (G) of FIG. 201, after the display indicating that it is in the state of the heaven timer mode in (F) of FIG. 200 is performed, another rendition that is not related to timer rendition is being performed. It shows the production situation where "Cannon chance production" has occurred as the predetermined production).

  That is, in this “cannon chance production effect”, an effect mode in which the output concerning the count display of the timer effect is continued until it reaches a predetermined value (here −20), and the output concerning the count display are predetermined value (here −20) In the middle stage of the execution of "Cannon chance production", one of the production modes for selectively stopping the output is displayed selectively (count output cancellation control).

  More specifically, in "Cannon chance direction", after the cannon image is displayed near the center in the display area, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, and the right area in the display area from the cannon image. An effect in which an area which is empty (unused) out of the area and the lower area is selectively used as a projectile of the projectile and the projectile is launched (projectile effect (predetermined effect shown in FIG. 201 (H)) Is supposed to be done. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), the area required to newly output such a bullet emission effect (FIG. 201 (H)) is various other effects (count display (upper left area), It is all used by reach variation (upper right area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), pending display (lower area)) H) There is no room for outputting a new output (specific rendering situation), and assuming that the bullet firing has been carried out while in such a specific rendering situation, the bullet's launch destination The effect (for example, the count display) that is already in the output state may not be broken or destroyed by the fired bullets (a conflict occurs with regard to the effect output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect) Shima ), And more big hit expectation degree or not from being dropped, concerns such as may have occurred as a result.

  So, in this explanation example, when there is no space for the output at the time of execution of the bullet shooting effect (predetermined effect), it is in the specific effect situation (the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G)), Out of the areas (upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, lower area) which can be used as the projectile of the bullet, the output concerning the count display using the upper left area is a predetermined value ( Here, the output is not performed until it becomes −20) and the output is stopped at the middle stage (count output stop control).

  FIG. 201 (H) shows an effect situation in which a bullet emission effect is executed under the condition where the output relating to the count display is not performed until the output reaches a predetermined value (here, -20) and the output is interrupted at an intermediate stage.

  As described above, when the output relating to the count display of the timer effect is stopped to execute the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect), the output according to the bullet emission effect is different from the case of the above-mentioned revival timer effect. After the end, the timer effect count display is not re-output. On the other hand, even after the output of the count display is stopped, internally, the time after the count display is started (or the time from the start of fluctuation) is secretly counted, and this is a predetermined value (see FIG. When reaching the value (−20) when 35 seconds have elapsed since the count display was started at 200 (C), it is assumed that the timing when the count display whose output has been stopped reaches the predetermined value has arrived. I am trying to make a rendition appear.

  In FIG. 201 (I), after the timing that should have reached the predetermined value has arrived if the output of the output-stopped count display has not been stopped, cut-in A (cut-in effect by ally character) as the effect of the timer target. Shows the rendering situation being executed. Note that, in the relation to the above-mentioned revival timer effect, the cut-in A is executed as the “second effect mode”.

  According to such an advancement of the production, after the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the predetermined value is reached if the output of the count display is not stopped while the stop state of the output concerning the count display is maintained. The effect of the timer target comes to appear when the timing that should have been reached. That is, in this case, improvement of the game interest when the effect of the timer target appears due to the surprise property in which the timer effect which has been shown as if it were ended halfway by the execution of the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) is continued Will be expected to

  In addition, for example, when the display regarding timer mode effect is not performed and there is a space in the left area in the effect situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), the count display (upper left area) of timer effect is displayed. With the output maintained, a bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) is output using the space (left area). That is, in this case, the timer effect count display and the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) are simultaneously output, and the timer effect count display is also performed after the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) is finished. It will be continuously performed until it becomes a predetermined value (here, -20).

  As described above, although the bullet emission effect (predetermined effect) is performed using any of a plurality of areas, the bullet is emitted to any of the areas. The jackpot expectation indicated by the launch effect (predetermined effect) is the same without change.

  And also in this explanation example, it is related to a display indicating which one of the effect types excluded in the timer target exclusion effect executed in FIG. 200 (B) and a heaven timer mode displayed in FIG. 200 (F). As for the display, the decorative symbols SZ are made to be stopped while they are being continuously executed (FIG. 201 (J)).

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 201 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. .

  FIG. 202 (A) shows the effect status in which the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being zero.

  In FIG. 202 (B), while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 202 (A) is being executed, the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “3”, and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. It shows the presentation situation to be started.

  In FIG. 202 (C), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 202 (B) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here, “go”) is displayed, It shows an effect situation in which an effect (cut-in B) to be an effect target of the timer effect is executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (C), “cut in B” as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation. At this time, since the count display is also in the non-display state, the timer effect is ended by the appearance of “cut-in B” which is a mode (blue aura) having a relatively low degree of expectation as the player. Become aware. However, in this example, after “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation, the count display is redisplayed. The effect (the second timer object effect) regarding whether or not to appear further.

  FIG. 202 (D) shows whether the count display is to be re-displayed while “cut-in B” as the timer-targeted effect (the first timer object effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. The effect situation (second timer object effect effect) for is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), an operation-based effect in which an operation by the player is permitted for a predetermined time as an effect (second timer target effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display. A second effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is to be redisplayed when the player performs an operation within the predetermined time, or a second effect indicating that the count display is not to be redisplayed. A presentation result (not shown) is made to appear. In addition to displaying an operation instruction image SSG prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 as an operation-based effect in which the operation by the player is permitted for a predetermined time, the first in the case where the operation button 410 is operated. The operation expectation image SKG is suggested to indicate the ease (percentage) of the appearance result. The percentage may include 100%.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), a presentation aspect in which the first presentation result is most likely to appear among the plurality of presentation modes prepared as the operation expectation image SKG (anyway your friend's friend Character has appeared. Therefore, although "cut-in B" as the timer target effect (the first timer target effect) has been executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation, the count display is redisplayed. It can be said that it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the timer effect is continued. Moreover, in the timer plus effect according to this embodiment, a count value larger than the count value displayed in the first count display (here, the count value “3” shown in FIG. 202 (B)) is given. Since the count display is re-displayed in the form, it is expected that the presentation mode having a higher degree of expectation will further appear as the timer target presentation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), “Cut in B (blue aura)” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. Although the effect (the second timer target effect) on whether or not to re-display the count display is to be executed (the display is not made non-displayed), the timer target effect shown in FIG. After making “Cut-in B (blue aura)” as timer target effect of 1) undisplayed, effect (second timer object effect) on whether to re-display count display or not is executed It is also good. However, in this case, the timer target effect (first timer object effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is switched to an effect (second timer object effect) on whether to re-display the count display. It is desirable for the player to recognize that the timer effect has not ended and is being continued (or may be continued).

  FIG. 202 (E) shows that the timer effect is “5” after the first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed in the operation system effect shown in FIG. 202 (D) appears. And the second count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. In addition to the case where the operation by the player is accepted within the predetermined time, the same effect result as the case where the operation by the player is accepted (the first As a result of the presentation, the result of the second presentation) appears after the end of the predetermined time

  In FIG. 202 (F), after the second count display shown in FIG. 202 (E) reaches the predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here, “go”) is displayed, It shows an effect situation in which an effect (cut-in B) to be an effect target of the timer effect is executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (F), “cut in B” as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (red aura) with a relatively high degree of expectation. That is, in this example of production, those target effects are executed as effects of the same type in the first count display and the second count display displayed again, and in the second target effect, the first target effect is produced. It is made to execute in the form of changing (promoting) to a rendering mode with a higher degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is recognized that the same type of effect is executed as the timer target effect, so that it is executed as one timer effect in which the first count display and the second count display are connected. As the number of times the count display is re-displayed increases as the number of times the count display is re-displayed increases, the timer object effect is generated by changing (promoting) the effect mode as the timer object effect to a mode having higher expectation It will be possible to improve the amusement of the game from the time when the count display is re-displayed not at the time.

  FIG. 203 (G) shows an effect as to whether or not the count display is to be redisplayed while “cut in B (red aura)” as the timer target effect shown in FIG. 202 (F) is displayed. It shows the rendering situation being executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 203 (G), among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expectation image SKG, the first appearance result is easier to appear than the example shown in FIG. 202 (D). An appearance mode (a mature character ally character) is appearing. Therefore, in a situation where "Cut in B" as the timer target effect has been executed in a relatively high expectation mode (red aura), the count display may not be redisplayed. It can be said that we are in a situation that brings awareness. Thus, after the count display becomes a predetermined value, although the effect (cut-in B) having a mode (red aura) relatively advantageous to the player is executed as a timer target effect, On the other hand, the effect (operation expected image SKG) having a mode (commend friend character) relatively inconvenient to the player is to be executed. Moreover, in such a timer plus effect, the count redisplay is repeated on one side, and as the number of times “cut-in B” changes to an advantageous mode for the player increases, the other side is relative to the player. Since the operation expectation image SKG having a disadvantageously adverse aspect is likely to appear and the rate of redisplaying is reduced, it is possible to enhance the game interest and tension each time the count redisplay is performed. Can be suitably applied.

  And as a result of such an effect, when the count display is not re-displayed, the timer effect is ended at that time, and then the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 203 (H)).

  Next, various effects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 203 and various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. .

  FIG. 204A shows an effect situation in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is being performed by the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being zero.

  In FIG. 204 (B), while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (A) is being executed, the timer effect is displayed with a count number of "10", and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. It shows the presentation situation to be started.

  Here, in the timer effect, in general, as the time required for count digest is longer, the appearance ratio of the effect with high expectation as the timer object effect is higher, and such a small count number (here, When the count display having only "10" is displayed, there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, in this demonstration example, during the execution of the count display, an effect of making the count value non-displayed for a predetermined time is generated, and the progress rate of the count is made to stagnate for that time. It is possible to execute a timer stagnation effect that maintains the sense of expectation by extending the time required.

  In FIGS. 204 (C) and (D), when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 204 (B) becomes the first specific value (here, “5”), this is not displayed. It shows the stage situation of the time.

  That is, in this effect example, when the count display reaches a first specific value (here, “5”), when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any effect type (timer target effect) A presentation (progressive presentation leading to a timer target presentation) is started to indicate whether a conversation notice, a hold change, a cut-in A, a feature A action, a special timer, a cut-in B, a feature B action) appear. While the effect is executed, the count display is not displayed. The progress effect leading to the timer target effect may be started under the non-display state after the count display becomes the first specific value.

  In this rendering example, as a progress rendering leading to a timer target rendering, a display image SEG11 depicting a person seeking help for a friend character and a display image SEG12 accepting a request from a person seeking help are sequentially displayed. It has become so. Here, when the display image SEG11 or the display image SEG12 is displayed, although it is possible to narrow down to which type of effect appears as a timer target effect to some extent, it is specified which type of effect appears It is desirable to make it impossible. For example, while the display image SEG12 shows that three ally characters accept a request from a person for help, it is predicted that any one of the three ally characters will face the enemy character. Although it is possible, it is desirable to make it unclear which of the three ally characters will face the enemy character (for example, which one of the cut-in A or B, etc.).

  In FIG. 204 (E), the count display redisplays with the count value of “4” after the “progress effect (first time) leading to the timer target effect” shown in FIGS. 204 (C) and 204 (D) is finished. Shows the presentation situation.

  According to such a configuration, while the count value is “10” to “5”, the count value is also advanced by “1” each time one second elapses, while the count value is “5” to “5”. When progressing to 4 ", until" progression effect (the first time) leading to timer target effect "appearing when the count value becomes" 5 "ends (here, 6 seconds), The progress of the count value is not made and this can be stagnated. In order to stagnate the progress of the count value, the display of the count display may not necessarily be non-display, and the display may be maintained with the same count value (here, “5”).

  In FIG. 204 (F) and FIG. 205 (G), when the count display redisplayed in FIG. 204 (E) is developed and becomes the second specific value (here, “2”), this is not displayed. It shows the presentation situation when it is turned on.

  That is, in this effect example, the count display is not displayed a plurality of times until the count display reaches the predetermined value, and thus, whenever the count display is not displayed, the timer target effect is displayed. Progress presentation that is connected with is to be executed. The progress effect leading to the timer target effect may be started under non-display after the count display becomes the second specific value.

  In this rendering example, as the progress rendering leading to the timer target rendering, among the three ally characters depicted in FIG. 204 (D), the display image SEG13 showing the intention of the middle-age ally character to face the enemy character, The display image SEG 14 depicting the situation in which the teammate character faces the enemy character is sequentially displayed. Here, at the time when the display image SEG13 or the display image SEG14 is displayed, it is possible to grasp that the effect (cut-in B) of the specific type appears as a timer target effect, but any effect content (blue aura It is not possible to specify if the appearance of the aura or the red aura will appear.

  In (H) of FIG. 205, after the “progress effect (second time) leading to timer target effect” shown in (F) and (G) in FIG. It shows the rendering situation to be redisplayed.

  According to such a configuration, when the count value is advanced from “2” to “1”, “progression effect leading to timer target effect (second time) appears when the count value becomes“ 2 ”. Until the end of “)” (in this case, 14 seconds), the progress of the count value is not made and it can be stagnated.

  In FIG. 205 (I), the count display redisplayed in FIG. 205 (H) is developed to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and a timer related display (“here”) is displayed. After that, it has shown the production circumstance where production (cut in B) which becomes the production object of timer production is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the effect leading to the timer target effect will be executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is preferable to play the game while the count display reaches the predetermined value. You will be able to maintain it. Further, while the effect leading to the timer target effect is executed, the count display is not displayed and the progress of the count value is stagnated, so that the time required for the count digestion can be lengthened by that amount. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the game interest.

  Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 205 (J)).

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 205 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in relation to the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. . In FIGS. 206 and 207, for convenience of explanation, the movable body KT for effect which is omitted in the other drawings is shown in the drawing. The movable body KT may be, for example, a back-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-up left movable effect unit 3200, a back-left movable effect unit 3300, a back-up middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-back front movable effect unit 3500, etc. Equivalent to the movable member etc.

  FIG. 206 (A) shows an effect situation in which the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being zero.

  In FIG. 206 (B), during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 206 (A), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “40”, and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. It shows the presentation situation to be started.

  Here, in the timer effect, in general, as the time required for count digest is longer, the appearance rate of the effect with high expectation as the timer object effect is higher, and such a large count number (here, When the count display having "40" is displayed, there is a concern that the tension may not be suitably maintained while the count number is being digested. Therefore, in this example of effect, while performing count display, count forward effect is generated by the decoration in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display, and the count forward effect is ended and the count display is performed. As the count value is increased when it is easy to visually recognize again, the effect with high expectation as the timer target effect is more easily appeared.

  In FIG. 206 (C), while the count display is being performed by the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (B), the movable body KT as the decorative body is displaced to the front side of the count display and the predetermined time Shows the rendering situation (count forward rendering by the decorative body) that continues to stay over. FIG. 206 (D) shows an effect situation in which the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body) shown in FIG. 206 (C) ends and the count display returns to a state in which the count display is easily visible.

  According to such a configuration, even if a large count value is displayed once, it may be eroded by the movable body KT (decoration body), and it may be repeated as a count display of a smaller count value. Being able to provide stage effects raises the concern that tension during the count count can not be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the count forward effect by such a movable body KT (decorative body), the longer the time required for the effect is, the smaller the count value which is easily recognized when the effect is finished, and consequently the expectation for timer object effect There is a concern that the game's interest in entertainment will decline due to the appearance of high effects of Therefore, in the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), even on the movable body KT (decorative body) side, a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation in a different lottery from the lottery for determining the effect mode of the timer effect For example, it is desirable to make either the operation mode of the movable body KT, the light emission mode, etc. appear. According to such a configuration, even if it is difficult to make a high expectation effect appear as a timer target effect, it is shown that the big hit expectation is high by the effect mode on the movable body KT (decorative body) side which is another lottery. If it is done, it will be possible to maintain the game interest favorably.

  In this respect, in this effect example, since it is possible to return to a state where it is easy to visually recognize while maintaining a relatively large count value such as "35", the sense of expectation for the timer effect is maintained thereafter as well. In this condition, it can be expected that the count display will be continued.

  FIG. 206E shows the operation instruction image SSG when the count display in the timer effect shown in FIG. 206D reaches the first count value (here, “30”), and the player is operated FIG. 206 (F) shows an effect situation in which an operation by the player is accepted for effect at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 206 (E) and the effect result appears. ing.

  That is, in this effect example, if there is an operation by the player in the first period until the count display becomes the second count value (here, "20") from the first count value (here, "30") A plurality of operation effect modes different in the rate at which a high expectation appears as a timer target effect as a result of accepting the acceptance, as a result of the effect acceptance (for example, in the order of high appearance ratio, for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, Sakai etc.) ) To make it appear.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 206 (F), the player performs an operation when the count value becomes “23”, and as a result of the effect, an operation effect mode (most advantageous to the player) Since the appearance of "Daikichi" appears, it is expected that the game interest until the count display reaches a predetermined value will be maintained. In the first period from when the count display reaches the first count value (“30” in this case) to the second count value (“20” in this case), the effect is not accepted by the player. The count display is advanced without any presentation result appearing.

  In FIG. 207G, the operation instruction image SSG is displayed when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) after the effect result shown in FIG. On the other hand, FIG. 207 (H) shows that the operation by the player is accepted for the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 207 (G) and the effect of the effect is shown. It shows the production situation.

  That is, in this effect example, if the player performs an operation even in the second period until the count display reaches the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”) A plurality of operation effect modes different in the rate at which a high expectation appears as a timer target effect as a result of accepting the acceptance, as a result of the effect acceptance (for example, in the order of high appearance ratio, for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, Sakai etc.) ) To make it appear.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 207 (G), the player performs an operation when the count value becomes “8”, and as a result of the effect, a special operation effect that is most advantageous to the player From the appearance of the mode (Daikichi), it is expected that the game interest until the count display reaches the predetermined value is maintained. In the second period from when the count display reaches the third count value (“15” in this case) to the fourth count value (“5” in this case), the effect is not accepted by the player. The count display is advanced without any presentation result appearing.

  However, in this effect example, when the count display is in the first period from the time of the first count value (here, “30”) to the time of the second count value (here, “20”) For example, when the operation to the operation button 410) is performed and the effect is accepted, and when the count display is the third count value (here, "15") to the fourth count value (here, "5") The special operation effect mode (Daikichi) as a result of those effect receptions when the operation to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed and the effects are accepted when it is in the above second period until The rate of occurrence is different.

  More specifically, if the effect is accepted during the first period, the generation ratio of the special operation effect mode (Daikichi) is relatively high, and the effect is accepted when in the second period The rate of occurrence of the special operation mode (Daikichi) is relatively low. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, it is possible to suppress the presentation risk that the special operation presentation mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the special operation presentation mode (Daikichi) Even if this appears as much as it is likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of anticipation that a high expectation effect appears as a timer target effect. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the second period, a special operation effect mode (Daikichi) occurs although the effect risk that a special operation effect mode (Daikichi) does not appear increases. When this appears as it is difficult to do, it becomes easy to have a sense of anticipation that a high expectation effect appears as a timer target effect.

  According to such a configuration, the count display indicates the first count value (here, “30”) according to the player's preference and the presentation situation such as the degree of expectation shown in the other presentation. If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated firmly in the first period in which the rendering risk is low up to the time of 2 count values (here, “20”), the count display indicates the third count value (here “15 Or the fourth operation (for example, the operation button 410) in the second period of high risk of presentation from the time of 4) to the time of the fourth count value (here "5") or both of them It becomes possible to make the gaming strategy interesting, such as whether to operate the operation button 410.

  In FIG. 207 (I), after the presentation result shown in FIG. 207 (H) appears, the count display is further developed to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the timer related display (here, “go”) ) Is displayed, the effect (cut-in B) to be the target of the timer effect is shown. Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 207 (J)).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) already described, the explanation regarding the automatic channel sound control which is a part of the process is described later. Therefore, automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, I will briefly explain the background.

  In general pachinko machines, it is intended to realize an effect that draws the player's interest by outputting various sounds from the speakers in each scene according to the progress of the game. For example, even if the reach is to improve the player's expectation, some reach various sounds depending on the type and others do not. In such a typical pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound corresponds to each corresponding default. Reproduction is performed using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a typical pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, there may be cases where a sound to be reproduced can not be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced There is a problem that it is impossible to realize various sound effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds, for the purpose of realizing various sound effects by effectively utilizing empty channels and enhancing the interest of the player. While each channel is dynamically allocated and managed for each sound to be output from the output means and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), the number of combinations of sounds to be output is If it exceeds the maximum number of channels (in this embodiment, 16 channels are exemplified), each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds to be output in the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via the channels dynamically allocated within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means) . The details will be described below.

12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 208A and 208B respectively show an example of sound control according to the fixed channel system as a comparison object to the present embodiment. FIG. 208A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control based on the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control based on the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 208 (B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control based on the fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used as shown in the figure. Here, referring to the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels in the case of output in stereo, and one channel in the case of output in monaural.

  As for "informing sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the drawing, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has been started should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a reproduction channel and a sound are allocated as a pair, and sound overwrite is prevented. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled. As a channel allocation method, as much as possible, the same channel is allocated so that the reproduction timing does not suffer.

  In the fixed channel sound control, when a new sound is outputted to the same channel being outputted, the sound being outputted is muted and a new sound is outputted. With regard to sounds that would be harmful if overwritten, separate channels are assigned, or sounds with non-overlapping play timings are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 209 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, manage the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description is omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set values of the upper and lower pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 210 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduction sound, and the reproduction channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 211 (A) shows an example of a presentation time chart, FIG. 211 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 211 (C) shows that each sound can not be reproduced when trying to reproduce each sound. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 211A to 211C, the horizontal axes are mutually common time axes.

  In FIG. 211 (A), the game state is sequentially along the time axis which is the horizontal axis as "the first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "medium".

  In the "first half of the change" shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. If there is a "winning", as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the "pending winning sound" is assigned in advance to the reproduction channels 14 and 15 which are the same as the "half notice A". The “previous first-notice A” sound output is stopped because the reproduction sound of “1” is overwritten with the hold winning sound (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In "the latter half of the change" shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. If there is a "winning", as shown in FIG. 208 (B), "pending winning sound" is assigned in advance to the same playback channel 14 and 15 as "full screen preview", so "full screen preview "" Is reproduced by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen advance notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 212 (A) and 212 (B) each show an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment.

  FIG. 212 (A) shows an example of the reproduction channel of sound, and in the above-mentioned sound control by fixed channel, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel becomes an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” shown). The point is different. Here, the channel division being an automatic channel means that control is made so that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is automatically assigned in accordance with the rule described later (described above. Corresponded to “automatic channel sound control”).

  In the automatic channel system sound control according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the above-described fixed channel system sound control. Note that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 212 (B) shows an example of assignment of reproduction channels to each sound. In the automatic channel sound control, as shown in the figure, priorities are individually assigned to the respective sounds. Here, referring to the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one sound requires one channel in outputting in monaural. Become.

  In the “informing sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the drawing, the sound that has started to be reproduced should not be muted halfway along the process until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, there is no problem in the illustrated “normal BGM” to “held award winning sound” that the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during reproduction and muffled.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel system, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter referred to as "AUTO group"). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to play a sound for the AUTO group. When sound is assigned to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for specifying a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced if a vacant channel (unused channel) exists in the designated AUTO group.

  In the above case, if there is no empty channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. The effect control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel if there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound itself being reproduced, and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no vacant channel in the AUTO group whose priority is lower than or equal to the priority of the sound itself being reproduced.

  FIG. 213 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, reproduction channel numbers such as sound control by fixed channels as described above, left and right pan initial values, upper and lower pan initial values, volume initial values, for each sound category and sound name. Identifier and priority for specifying AUTO group instead of sound number, playback type setting and output type setting (also referred to as "playing priority"), initial left / right pan, upper / lower pan initial, initial volume, sound It manages the definition of number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting.

  First, an identifier for specifying each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. The priority indicates that the larger the numerical value is the sound to be reproduced with priority, while the smaller the numerical value is a sound to be reproduced without priority. In the present embodiment, as an order of types of sound to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sound having a priority of “25” (“informing sound 1”, “informing sound 2” and “informing sound 3”) , Sound effects with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmed sound" and "button press sound"), BGMs with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10" Sound effects (such as "full screen preview sound effects"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("half notice sound effects" to "second half notice sound effects"), and hold winning sounds with a priority of "01" And In this way, when there is no vacant channel, for example, when trying to reproduce the notification sound, there is no need to reproduce using the predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the hold winning sound) The notification sound is to be preferentially reproduced using the channel currently being reproduced).

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, setting "0x00" indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) is output, and for example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Also, as described above, upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, upper and lower upper and lower speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). The sound localization initial position of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, and additionally “1” (0x1FF in the third byte) By setting one or more volume control devices provided to the gaming machine, it is not affected by the volume change, and it is always reproduced with the volume set at the initial value. It represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, for example, “0” is set as “seek point” in the “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect” as this seek point, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect” Each sound is set to [1]. Such seek points allow registration of sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered when exceeding the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source.

  The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 214 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the reproduction sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and as the gaming state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (playback) priority, and represents that the (playback) priority is higher from the bottom to the top.

  FIG. 215 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 215 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In these FIGS. 215 (A) and 215 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 215 (A), as the gaming state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, "the first half of fluctuation", "the second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and " It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "big hit".

  In “the first half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), for example, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction” is reproduced from start to end in reproduction channels 00 to 01 Corresponding to range A). Here, when trying to reproduce the on-hold winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting opening winning (corresponding to the “on-hold winning” in the figure), reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since the reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any other sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to "held sound reproduction" in the figure), and so on. Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In “the second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM reproduction” is reproduced from start to end in reproduction channels 00 to 01 Corresponding to range B). Here, for example, when trying to play a hold-up winning sound as a new sound because there is a start-up winning (corresponding to "held on-hold winning" in the figure), playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all the other types of sounds continues without any sound being reproduced being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to “hold sound reproduction” shown).

  In the “second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), a notification (corresponding to “information 2 generation” in the drawing) is generated after that, for example, a notification sound with the highest priority of “25” as the new sound ( When trying to reproduce “information 2” shown in the figure, as a result of the search for the empty channel, it becomes clear that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 215 (B). Therefore, among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing, the sound with the lowest priority is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as channels reproducing the reserved winning sound with the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, although the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to "information sound 2" shown in the figure) to be reproduced next is next. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 216 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control is, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a required sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic allocation group, an automatic allocation priority, an elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a workpiece for work and a workpiece for pan control, and has respective information corresponding thereto.

  The setting reservation flag has a value other than “0” to indicate that setting reservation is made. The required sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if “−1” is not stopped and other than “−1”. The sounding number during reproduction indicates the sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced if "-1" is not stopped and is other than "-1".

  In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly allocated when it is "0", while the channel is automatically allocated when it is "1" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later) Equivalent to Here, for example, “1” indicates that the automatic allocation group is the AUTO group 1, and “2” indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic assignment indicates the priority in the case of performing the sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time, assuming that the registration time of the desired reproduction sound is “0”. Note that the elapsed time since the registration is one of the plurality of sounds being reproduced when trying to reproduce a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic assignment are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is identified, and this sound is overwritten and erased with the new sound.

  The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the upper and lower pans described above.

  FIG. 217 shows an example of empty channel search processing when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. Also in FIG. 217, the channel is abbreviated as "ch".

  The presentation control program confirms the automatic assignment group related to the new sound (step S1102A) when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (step S1100A), and the fixed assignment is fixed when the automatic assignment group is “0”. It is determined that is, and reproduction of a new sound is started on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, the effect control program determines that the automatic assignment group is other than “0” as automatic assignment, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to a monaural channel (step S1106A). .

  The effect control program determines whether a vacant (monaural) channel (one channel) exists if the new sound is monaural (step S1108A), and if there is a vacant sound (monophonic), the vacant space (monaural) While the reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel) (step S1109A), the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority than the priority of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced, if not present It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110A).

  The effect control program ends the processing when there is no reproduced sound channel that is the same as or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (monaural) channel being reproduced, while it exists when it exists. It is determined whether there is a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

  In the effect control program, when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, during the corresponding channel based on the elapsed time from the above-mentioned registration, the reproduction time of the sound with the longest reproduction time from the registration is being reproduced. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are a plurality of corresponding channels but not one (step S1116A).

  On the other hand, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural in step S1106A described above, it is determined whether there is a vacant (stereo) channel (two channels) (step S1120A). If the effect control program determines that a free channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition and starts playing the new sound (step S1122A).

  On the other hand, if the effect control program determines that there is no empty channel, it determines whether or not the (stereo) channel of the sound being played back has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step In step S1124A), since the process is ended if there is not, overwriting of the sound being reproduced by the new sound to be reproduced is not performed. On the other hand, when the effect control program exists, the effect control program determines whether a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1126A).

  The effect control program starts output of the new sound in the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there is not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the above-mentioned is described when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel with the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

  As described above, the effect control program searches for an available channel in order to reproduce a new sound. The process of searching for such free channels will be explained more visually and intelligibly.

  FIG. 218 (A) and FIG. 218 (B) to FIG. 221 (A) and FIG. 221 (B) respectively show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 218 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a playback request for normal BGM having a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 218 (B), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice A, which has a priority of 05, as the reproduction channel 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to a request for reproduction of a button depression sound having a priority of 20, and causes the reproduction channel 04 to 05 to be searched. Since there is a space, reproduction of the button depression sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first half notice B, which has a priority of 05, as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effects of the first half advance advance_B in stereo is started using these reproduction channels 06-07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playing a big hit determined to have a priority of 20, and searches the playback channel 08 to 09. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the big hit fixed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08-09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), the effect control program searches for a free channel upon occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect in the first half notice C having a priority of 05, and the reproduction channel 10 Since there is a vacancy of ̃11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01, and causes the playback channels 12 to 13 to be searched. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the on-hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to reproduce the annunciation sound 3 having a priority of 25 and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the reproduction channel. Since there is a space, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  FIGS. 222 (A) and 222 (B) to 225 (A) and 225 (B) respectively show examples of specific contents of the free channel search process. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 222 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a reach BGM playback request having a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 222 (B), performs a search for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request for playing the annunciation sound 1 with a priority of 25 and there is an available space in the playback channel 02 to 03. As it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program then, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), is an empty channel triggered by the generation request for reproduction of the full-screen notice sound having a priority of 10. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full screen preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the generation of a request to reproduce the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 as shown in FIG. 223 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (vacant)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the drawing), reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using the reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a trailer sound with a priority of 10, as shown in FIG. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the feature preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), the effect control program searches for an available channel in response to the occurrence of a request to play a reserved winning sound having a priority of 01 as shown in FIG. 225 (A). Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacant)” (shown), reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14-15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 but there is no available channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 which are reproducing the "preserved winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

  In this way, each sound scheduled to be output is not fixedly allocated in advance to a specific channel, and a playback channel with a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the above-mentioned output schedule with higher priority is searched Each sound of will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the free channel can be effectively utilized as described above, but each sound including the output schedule is as many as possible using each channel including the free channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and to increase the interest of the player.

  FIGS. 226 (A) and 226 (B) to 227 (A) and 227 (B) respectively show examples of specific contents of the free channel search processing. The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 226 (A), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, and the playback channel 00 to 01 becomes free. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  The effect control program, as shown in FIG. 226 (B), searches for an available channel triggered by the occurrence of a request to play the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15, and searches for an available channel 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (A), the effect control program searches for a free channel triggered by the generation request for the middle symbol stop sound whose priority order is 15, and the reproduction channel 00 to 01. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel triggered by the generation of a big hit BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channel 00 to 01 is free. Therefore, the reproduction of the jackpot BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  In addition, when the replacement control of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that it is good to do so.

12-3. Variations of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control based on the automatic channel method has been described as an example using all reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

  FIGS. 228 (A) to 228 (F) are diagrams each showing a variation example of channel assignment in sound control by the two types of channel schemes described above or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 228 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control according to the maximum channel number (16 channels) fixed channel method described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 228 (B) shows this The present invention corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel assignment in the case where sound control is performed by the automatic channel method by the maximum number of channels. The sound control based on these two channel allocations has already been described, so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 228 (C) shows an embodiment for performing channel control for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups and performing sound control by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN 2” in the figure) . FIG. 228 (D) shows an embodiment for performing channel assignment for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group and performing sound control according to the above-mentioned fixed channel system for some reproduction channels. (Corresponds to "PTN3" shown).

  FIG. 228E shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control according to the above-described fixed channel system is performed for some reproduction channels. (Corresponds to "PTN 4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG. 229.

  In FIG. 228 (F), while using one automatic channel group, channel assignment is performed for reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels and sound control is performed according to the automatic channel method, and sound according to the fixed channel method described for some reproduction channels is given. Although control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is secured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel scheme shown in FIG. 228 (F) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting the automatic channel system in which all the channels are in one group, it is possible to assign free channels or replace the channels in the output based on the previously specified criteria. Sound can be output only by determining the priority of Therefore, unlike the conventional control method in which a channel is designated to output a sound, the management of the channel is not required, so that the control relating to the sound output can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel system, it is possible to minimize the number of channels, for example, it becomes possible to adopt an inexpensive sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Subsequently, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the above-mentioned sound control method, by changing the assignment of sound to each channel dynamically as the automatic channel method, it was possible to effectively utilize the vacant channel and reproduce many sounds, but In recent diversified game machines, since hundreds and thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  Also, by overlapping and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to execute preview effects in duplicate or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and a plurality of sounds and reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that the sounds are output in duplicate. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that the management becomes easy by dividing the sound into types.

  Further, the sound includes a sound such as a notification sound which should be output prior to the effect sound and a sound which is continuously output like a BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to assign the channel dynamically. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes in accordance with the result of the start winning and the fluctuation display is Output by automatic channel method.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively utilize an idle channel by the automatic channel method and to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary channel switching control by the fixed channel method. In addition, since it is possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 228 (C) and 228 (D), and has the advantages of the respective methods. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control that mixes fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 (ch), and a channel for reproducing a sound by a fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing a sound by an automatic channel method are included. . Also, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. This will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. 229.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes "automatic assignment" indicating whether or not automatic assignment is to be performed for channel numbers, "division" indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" for each channel. Note that “Remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 229 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 229, according to the configuration of each channel in this embodiment, channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, 24 to 29 Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0” and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound etc. which is displayed while displaying a maker's logo at the time of game machine activation. Also, channel 1 is a channel that makes a pair with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during game play or waiting for customers. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are simultaneously output to improve the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be simultaneously output. Furthermore, as described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to simultaneously output four BGMs using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than dynamically allocating the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a channel for reproducing BGM is a fixed channel system, and only BGM is output. As a result, control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method, while preventing the generation of a vacant channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output at the time of the execution of the advance presentation effect. In the advance notice effect, a sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel system.

  In this embodiment, unlike the above-described example, channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied are grouped. The group of channels for outputting the sound at the time of the preliminary effect production is the AUTO group 1.

  In the case of outputting a sound at the time of execution of the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for a vacant channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a vacant channel, it is set to output the designated sound from the vacant channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, the channel in use is opened and a new sound is output or the output of the designated sound is canceled based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. The channel 21 is a channel paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or stage sound. It is used to output BGM by overlapping 4 sounds or to output a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notification effect output by the automatic channel method.

  Channels 22 and 23, like channels 20 and 21, are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. The channel 23 is a channel paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which a holding tone is output. The holding tones output in the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, sounds that are output regardless of the lottery result at the start winning, or may be sounds that are output with priority, such as when a big hit is determined. A sound or the like based on the lottery result at the start winning is output from the channels 24 to 29, as described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel scheme is applied. The channels 24 to 29 reproduce the sound output based on the expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning, and the sound output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in the fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of the big hit determination even if there are no empty channels in the channels 24 to 29, and the player's attention is drawn. Can.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel scheme is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound at the time of volume change and a notification sound at the time of payout of game media. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound at the time of occurrence of abnormality are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a channel of the fixed channel system is allocated when the output is continuously continued as in BGM, or when it is necessary to reliably output as in the case of an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel system is applied to the sounds to be outputted adaptively according to the game state etc., thereby preventing the sound from being outputted while the empty channel is generated, and the limited number of channels It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for a free channel of the sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of free channel search processing in the case of executing control of outputting a sound according to the present embodiment. Although FIG. 217 describes the case of one AUTO group, FIG. 230 is different in having a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

  In the idle channel search process shown in FIG. 230, in the processes of steps S1108B and S1120B, when the new sound is of the automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not an idle channel exists in the channel of the same group. That is, even if channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacant space in the same channel, the result of step S1108B and step S1120B becomes "No".

  Further, in the idle channel search process shown in FIG. 230, when there is no idle channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step S1118B, step S1132B). The channel selection conditions for stopping the reproduction of sound will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that the effect of stopping the output of sound is continuously performed without stopping the image display and the operation of the special effects.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching the output of sound (stopping playback of sound, opening it) when there is no channel available at the time of output of a new sound in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being reproduced and the new sound are compared, and the sound of higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume size, the amount of change in sound during playback, etc., and the playback time of the sound at the channel selection time, It also includes the remaining time to play. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the reproduction time (elapsed time) from the start of reproduction. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 217, a channel with a long reproduction time is selected. In this manner, the output of the effect sound sufficiently executed is ended by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time after the start of reproduction, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been performed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, since an effect with a long reproduction time can be an effect with a high degree of expectation, an effect with a short reproduction time is selected. On the other hand, by stopping the effect with a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the total reproduction time set in advance regardless of the reproduction time from the start of reproduction.

  Although the condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time, for example, the sound output of the effect with a short (or long) effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the time of the entire effect, that is, the progress ratio of the effect. By setting the conditions in this manner, it is possible to stop the sound output at the initial stage or the final stage of the presentation.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, since an effect in which a large volume of sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, a channel with a small volume of output sound is selected with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected, and the player may be made to recognize that an effect is newly executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on the change in volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output may be an effect of higher importance, and a channel with a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speakers, it is possible to produce a more important effect by the effect that produces a more three-dimensional sound effect, a channel with less dynamic sound image localization position Prioritize and select. On the other hand, the load of sound control may be reduced by preferentially selecting a channel having a large change in dynamic sound image localization position.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, the large (small) number of the tone number is selected. At this time, priority may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs monaural sound is selected on the assumption that the effect produced by stereo sound with high sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is released, select a channel for outputting stereo sound in order to increase vacant channels. You may

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so as not to perform volume adjustment may be set to have a higher degree of importance, or an effect set so as to perform volume adjustment may be set to have a higher degree of importance.

  In addition to the conditions described above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without replacing the channel. Further, by assigning unique priorities to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  Although the conditions of 1 to 8 are shown as an example in the table shown in FIG. 231, these conditions may be applied singly or in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition to select a channel satisfying more conditions, or a priority may be set for each condition to sequentially apply the conditions.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Subsequently, an example in which control is performed to assign a channel based on the priority assigned to a newly output sound will be described. Here, an example will be described in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. FIG. 232 is a timing chart showing an example of effects for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows a timing at which a sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows a channel where each sound effect is outputted. ing. FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of the priority of sound effects in the example of the effect of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 232, the first half advance notice A occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, a first half advance notice B is generated. Furthermore, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice _A and the first half notice _B are being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 233, the priority of the first-half notice A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice C is 20. Furthermore, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice _B and the first half notice _C, the volume is selected based on the suppression volume value when the low priority preliminary announcement effects in the same group are executed in duplicate. Reduced.

  The first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and a character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output from the channels 08 and 09 in stereo.

  The first half advance notice B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button depression sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice B is started, and the effects from the channels 10 and 11 are in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice C, the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), and the sound with lower priority than the first half notice C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporary. It is muffled to (black out production). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half advance notice C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effects of each preliminary presentation effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the first half change of this embodiment, (A) shows output timing of effect sound, and (B) shows volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents a time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents a volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half advance notice A is started at time t1. At this time, the preset volume V_A of the effect sound of the first half notice A is output.

  Thereafter, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half advance notice B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button depression sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T and the effect sound of the first half advance notice B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority of the first-half notice _B is higher than the priority of the first-half notice _A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice _A is suppressed to 50%.

  It should be noted that the volume may not be lowered if the priority of the preview effect performed later is lower than or equal to the priority of the preview effect being executed, or even if there are few sound effects being output simultaneously You do not have to lower the volume. Also, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

  Furthermore, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half advance notice C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the effect sound of the first half notice A and the first half notice B, which are muffled from time t3, is resumed at time t5. The button pressing sound is originally output until time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

  After that, in the first half advance notice A and the first half notice B, the effect is continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half advance notice C ends at time t8, and the first half of fluctuation ends.

  In addition, during the period when the rendering effect sound is muffled, the output of the rendering effect sound may be continued while the volume is set to 0, or the output of the rendering effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume for controlling the volume of the entire rendering effect sound may be set to 0, and the sound output of the first half notice _C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by control by the main volume. Further, even in the state where the output of another sound effect is suppressed by the first half advance notice C, the sound effect, the warning sound, and the notification sound having higher priority are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being reproduced, the volume of the sound being reproduced on all the channels is selected instead of lowering the volume of the sound designated by the volume suppression flag or the like. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of sound being reproduced on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). In addition, the volume of the sound being reproduced on the channel in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in the present embodiment, sounds with high priority can be output with priority. The sound with high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for reliably transmitting to the player or the game arcade employee, or the expectation for the result of the variable display to be a big hit is high. The sound effects are for enhancing the sense of expectation of the game, and the sound effects can be highly effective and can improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by grouping each channel used in sound source control into a plurality of groups, it becomes possible to facilitate management of effect data relating to effect sound. As a result, it is possible to improve the development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of a bug due to the execution of systematic tests. Also, by making stable gaming possible, the interest of gaming can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel scheme are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs the sound effects of the preview effect and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs the hold-related sound effects. The number of sound effects of the preliminary presentation effect is huge compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output a rendering effect sound exceeding the number of allocated channels, for example, by performing a previewing of the fluctuation pending on the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the fun of the game can be maximized by outputting the rendering effect sound with low priority while replacing the rendering effect sound with high priority in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1 .

  Furthermore, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound along with the change of the suspension display of the variable display and the effect display along with this can greatly enhance the player's sense of expectation, and it is desirable to be executed surely . In this embodiment, by outputting from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2 the effect sound relating to such a hold display (hold sound), it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice play relating to the fluctuation display. it can. Also, unlike in the case of the notice effect in the variable display, compared with the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the number of effect sound effects outputted simultaneously does not greatly exceed, so the output of the effect sound stops There is less chance of being In addition, even in the case of being canceled, the output of the rendering effect sound with low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a high-effect effect that enhances the player's sense of expectation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel scheme is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel scheme is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, while effectively utilizing a limited number of channels by searching for free channels, priority output is given to output high-representation effects and sounds with high importance by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to the case where the sound is continuously output as in the case of BGM, or the sound is preferentially output in order to notify of the breakdown of the gaming machine, the fraud, and the like. As described above, by applying the channel system suitable for the characteristics of the sound and the application, it is possible to effectively use each channel and to perform appropriate control in accordance with the sound output situation. For example, in control to output BGM, a sound may be output to a channel assigned in advance regardless of the gaming state, and in control to output an alarm sound, a designated channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. You can output the sound directly to On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of free channels and to preferentially output sounds with high rendering effects.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each of the rendering effect sounds (channels), it is possible to emphasize and execute the rendering with high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue while lowering the volume without interrupting the effect being executed. At this time, it is also possible to return the volume to the original volume, if the low priority effect previously executed is continuing even after the high priority effect is finished. In addition, as described in the embodiment, by stopping the other effect and executing the specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are the preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel method is A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels set in the fixed channel scheme are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is made variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same kind of sound can be temporarily assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing effects including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of parts (for example, 9 divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of a screen configuration of effects according to a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 235 is an advance notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after reach occurrence.

  In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and effects (multi-screen effects) for displaying different scenes on each screen are executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is performed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene are simultaneously output. The selection of the scene may be made by lottery or may be made by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control as in the embodiment described above. Also, assignment of default channels is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM simultaneously. So, in this modification, the channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and arrangement | positioning of a channel is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of reproduction channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when multi-screen effect execution is performed. The default configuration of FIG. 236 (A) is similar to the configuration shown in FIG. 229 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 236 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if different preview effects are performed while the multi-screen effect is being performed.

  After the multi-screen effect start, while all the scenes are displayed, all the BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced. At this time, if all the BGM is output with a normal volume, the volume is too high, so the volume is output with the volume being lower than normal. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (latter half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. . In addition, when the player selects a scene, for example, he selects the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine, and selects the BGM of the selected scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of a scene, or the volume of BGM of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of volume change of sound effects in the latter half of fluctuation of the modification of this embodiment, (A) is output timing of effect sound, (B) is volume change of each effect sound Indicates

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement is from the default state (FIG. 236A) to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 236 (B) It is changed to)). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the second half fluctuation, multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 236 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1 is output.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which rendering is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the example of effect shown in FIG. 237, the scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and further, the second half notice _ 5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  It should be noted that, after the multi-screen effect is finished, the channels for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from the channels 10 and 11 to the channels 2 and 3, and the arrangement of the channels may be returned to the default. When continuing the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the change of the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the start of the execution of the multi-screen effect, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, the game state (for example, the effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, a background change, etc.) may be changed.

[15-2-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 228 (F)) performing sound control in the fixed channel method and the automatic channel (sound control in The number of “variable AUTOch” (228 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to make more informing sound, BGM, or sound effects reproducible according to the situation, and, for example, to output more types of informing sound in a non-playing situation In addition, it is possible to flexibly respond such as suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds and increasing the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced on presentation.

[16. Control of sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which channels are grouped, and sounds to be output are managed by being associated with each group. Also, when the number of sounds that can be assigned simultaneously in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being generated is stopped based on a predetermined condition, and a new sound is output, or the output of a new sound is stopped. And, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, in the case where sound is newly assigned to a channel and output is performed, control of changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel or the like will be described.

  After the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, in the state before reach occurs (during the first half fluctuation), the output of the sound by BGM during reproduction and other effects is regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time together with the output of a predetermined sound effect. As a typical effect that performs such control, there is a blackout effect that controls the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has passed after restricting the output of the sound effect, the darkening of the screen is released and the sound output newly is resumed by resuming the output of the sound due to BGM or other effects To draw the player's attention and to increase the player's expectation for the change.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is allocated to a vacant channel and output instead of canceling the allocation of a channel to which a sound effect is output and newly allocating a sound. In this case, in order to restore the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassignment of sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sound of different group is being output]
In this embodiment, channels are grouped and priorities are set for each group. The following describes the case where a sound is output from a channel belonging to a group with a higher priority, when the sound is output from a channel belonging to a group with a lower priority.

[16-1-1. Channel group volume control table]
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example of a channel group-specific volume control table indicating the priority order of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, each channel is fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, automatic channel group (AUTO group) It is divided into five groups of three.

  For each group, a group volume priority and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority among groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, one or more numerical values are set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of another sound being reproduced when the sound is reproduced by the channel belonging to the group having the low priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the other sound being reproduced. If "0" is set, control is made to mute the other sound being played. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the other sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when the numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit being%. Note that control may be performed to set a numerical value of 100 or more to make the volume larger than normal.

  Further, each setting value will be described with reference to FIG. 238. In the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel scheme and the automatic channel scheme are mixed. In the fixed channel, a sound that is output with priority, such as a notification sound or BGM, or a sound that is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of effects are assigned.

  In the fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to “0”, when the sound is reproduced on the fixed channel 1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch 1 is a notification sound for notifying the player or an employee of the game arcade to the outside as shown as a reference reproduction sound, and specifically, detection of the magnetic abnormality or It may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound such as a ball jam. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed ch 1, the output of the rendering effect sound or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output in order to make the occurrence of the cheating or the failure be a factor. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of the other sound having a relatively low priority is restricted.

  In the fixed ch2, in FIG. 238, the group volume priority is set to "4" which is the lowest. In addition, since the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, even if the sound reproduction on the fixed ch 2 is started, the other sound being reproduced is not affected. The sound played on the fixed ch 2 is mainly BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the BGM is being output, and the effect sound etc. that draws the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol etc. Is output.

  In the AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to “0”, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds in reproduction other than the notification sound output from the fixed channel 1 are muted. That is, the sound outputted by the AUTO group 1 is outputted with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and outputted alone.

  Specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 1 include a big hit finalization sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound and the like as shown in the reference reproduction sound. The big hit decision sound is a sound notifying that the result of the variable display will be a big hit at a predetermined timing such as the start winning, and is a stage effect sound that maximizes the sense of expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound notifying that the game ball has won the V zone, for example, that it is decided to shift to the high probability state, and the player's sense of expectation is greatly improved similarly to the big hit determined sound. It can be done.

  The blackout effect sound is an effect sound which is output in a silent state by suppressing the output of other effect sound at the time of executing the blackout effect described above. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be performed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. For the jackpot decision sound and the V prize sound, the output of the sound suppressed for a short time after the sound output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the case of the blackout sound effect, the player is focused on the blackout effect by setting no sound effect by another effect for a predetermined time after outputting the blackout effect sound. In addition, after execution of the blackout effect, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed by the change, for example, the blackout effect is executed by the first half fluctuation, and the corresponding effect is executed by the second fluctuation You may

  In the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". In addition, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the sounds being reproduced in the group having the priority “4” or less are halved (50% Suppressed to the output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. Thus, it is possible to execute an effect of drawing the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely turning off the BGM. Specific sounds outputted by the AUTO group 2 are, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice sound effect.

  In the AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, as in the case of the AUTO group 2, “50” is set as the suppression volume value, so when a sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group whose priority is “3” or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is reduced to half. At this time, when the volume of the BGM output from the fixed ch 2 is already halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, and the volume is further halved (one-fourth of the original volume). May be

  The specific sound output in the AUTO group 3 is, for example, a hold winning sound at the start winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button press sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed, etc. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same, the sound is output as it is with a normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when the game ball enters the start winning opening, the hold winning sound is output even during the blackout effect.

[16-1-2. Group volume control process]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart of a procedure of group volume control processing of performing sound control corresponding to a group to which the output sound belongs in this embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a reproduction request of a new sound (step S1401). If there is no reproduction request for a new sound (the result at step S1401 is "No"), the processing at step S1420 and subsequent steps is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (the result of step S 1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a specifies the channel group from the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, From (FIG. 238), the suppression volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the reproduction requested sound. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have already been registered (the result at step S1404 is "Yes"), the processing at step S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result in step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority. The order is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, parameters (sound number, suppression volume value and group volume priority) of the sound with the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result at step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound being reproduced (the result at step S1406 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1410 and subsequent steps.

  The control on the sound being reproduced will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is registered in the work area (step S1410). If the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is "No"), the output of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is set (step S1407).

  The sound control performed in step S1410 and subsequent steps will be described. If the sound to suppress the output of the sound being reproduced has already been registered (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a new reproduction request The group volume priority of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority held in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a requests the new reproduction request. The volume of sound that has been dropped is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is higher than the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S 1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a performs the new reproduction The work area is overwritten with the sound number of the requested sound, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Furthermore, when the group volume priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the work area While maintaining the contents, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). When the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S 1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processes of step S1415 and step S1416 have been executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417) or after the process of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are a work It is determined whether it is registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result at step S 1420 is “No”), this processing ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (the result at step S 1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a plays back the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether the process has ended (step S1421). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1421 is "No"), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result at step S1421 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority to the work area. Are erased (step S1422). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (steps S1423 and S1424), and the process ends.

  The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Subsequently, volume control of sound will be described in time series. FIG. 240 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the rendition, and (b) shows the volume of each rendition. In FIG. 240, an example of executing the advance notice effect and the blackout effect will be described.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed ch 2). In the fixed ch2, as shown in FIG. 238, the group volume priority is "4", and the suppression volume value is "-1". In the normal BGM, since the suppression volume value is “−1”, the sound is reproduced without the sound number of the normal BGM, the group volume priority, and the suppression volume value being recorded in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of holding prize is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2 and the group volume priority is "3" and the suppression volume value is "50" (steps S1402 and S1403 result is "No") . Since the parameter is not recorded in the work area at the start of the first half advance notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half advance notice is recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first half notice A, normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request is made is made in advance. A set volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being reproduced and the group volume priority is lower than the first half variation effect sound (the result of step S 1415 is “Yes”), the sound based on the parameters of the first half announcement A effect sound is Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of normal BGM is reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

  After that, the blackout effect is executed by the establishment of the predetermined condition (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameters of the first half notice A are recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of the step S 1411 is “>”), the contents of the work area are blackout effect The above parameters are updated (step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1413).

  Furthermore, since the normal BGM being reproduced and the effect sound effects of the first half notice A are lower in group priority than the blackout effect, the group priority of the sound effect of the blackout effect is lower than the blackout effect (result of step S1415 is “Yes”). The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, since the suppression volume value is 0, the sound is muted.

  Furthermore, the second half notice B is started during the blackout effect execution (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of the step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in the muted state and the blackout effect Continue until the end of the

  Thereafter, when the gaming ball wins the start winning opening, a hold winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is "2" and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same (the result of step S 1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and output with a predetermined volume. Therefore, even when the blackout effect is being executed, the on-hold winning sound is output as usual.

  Then, when the blackout effect ends (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the restricted volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half advance notice A and the second half advance notice B are returned to predetermined volumes. Thereafter, the output of the sounds of the first half notice A and the second half notice B is ended (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while sound effects with high group priority are being output, it is possible to highlight a specific effect by suppressing the output of sound effects with low group priority. Furthermore, with the volume control based on the suppression volume value, it is possible to make the player recognize that a plurality of effects are progressing at the same time, and a group effect effect sound that greatly enhances the player's sense of expectation like a big hit decision sound By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute without impairing the rendering effect.

  In addition, when a sound with a high priority is newly output and the output of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is suppressed, in the embodiment described above, the volume of the rendering effect sound during reproduction is immediately output based on the suppression volume value The volume of other effect sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppressed volume value) and faded out from the timing when the high priority sound is output. It is also good. In this case, the start value (the volume currently being reproduced), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined, or based on the contents of effects such as the length of reproduction time of the effect sound. The amount of change may be set for the time to reach. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to highlight the effect sound, or if the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target A time reaching the value may be set long to reduce a sense of discomfort that may occur when the effect sound switches.

  For example, if the newly-output sound effect is a short-time output such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during reproduction such as BGM can be faded out in a relatively short time, It is possible to make the newly-outputed effect sound more prominent without breaking the tempo of the game.

  Furthermore, when the output of a new effect sound ends and the output of another effect sound is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value) Instead, the start value (volume during regulation) and the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of normal BGM is suppressed to 50% at the time of sound effect reproduction in the first half notice A, but when the output of normal BGM is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value and the start value (volume currently being reproduced. Then, control is made to fade in based on the amount of change for a specified amount of time) as the volume suppressed to 50%. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of discomfort while enhancing the switching of the effect sound effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the rendering effect sound as an example, the present invention can be applied to the case of an alarm sound or an alarm sound as well. As an example, when outputting a notification sound with high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraudulent activity), not only the presentation effect sound but also a notification sound with relatively low importance (priority) ( For example, the output of an alarm sound of a ball jam may be regulated. On the other hand, when a fraudulent act is performed while a low notification sound of low importance (priority) is output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted, and a high notification sound (alarm (alarm) Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set to the output time of the sound like the effect sound, and the output of the sound is continued until the cause of the alarm and the notification is eliminated. Therefore, when a plurality of types of alarm sounds and alarm sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, another alarm sound is output. . At this time, the next higher priority sound may be output to restrict the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long and short)]
In the above, the control of the sound output overlappingly by the priority between groups was demonstrated. Subsequently, a control example of controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long and short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume Control Table by Sound Effect]
FIG. 241 is a view showing an example of a sound effect-based volume control table showing volume (sound volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sound in the present embodiment. The use reproduction channel (ch), the total reproduction time, and the suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 238, the reproduction channels used are divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, as in the example shown in FIG.

  The total playback time is the time from the start to the end of the output of the sound effect. When -1 is set as the total reproduction time, the effect sound is output with a volume set in advance without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effects to be output. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect can not be suppressed.

  When 0 is set to the total playback time, loop playback is repeatedly output, and output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. If the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is a number other than this (a positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. The unit of the total reproduction time is millisecond (ms).

  Similarly to the example shown in FIG. 238, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of another sound effect that is simultaneously output. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the reproduction of the sound is continued without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being reproduced (in the total reproduction time- Suppress (silence) the output of 1) except for sound effects that are set. In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 241. In the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the allocated sound effects are also the same. It is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 241, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total reproduction time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch 1, when these sound effects are to be reproduced, the other being reproduced All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the player or the employee of the game arcade to the outside, and is an effect sound to be outputted since it is caused by the occurrence of an illegal act or a failure etc. And the output of sound effects during other playback is forcibly suppressed (cancelled, muted).

  Since the total reproduction time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" in the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effects are repeatedly output from the start of the output. These sound effects do not affect the other sounds being played. The sound effects assigned to the fixed ch 2 are mainly BGM in games.

  In the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 1, a value (reproduction time) set for the total reproduction time for each sound effect, and “0” for the suppression volume value, the notification sound output from fixed ch 1 All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound outputted by the AUTO group 1 is outputted with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and outputted alone. As specific sounds outputted by the AUTO group 1, as shown in FIG. 238, there are a big hit confirmed sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound and the like.

  For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, the value for which the total playback time is set for each sound effect (play time) and the suppression volume value of “50” are set. When the sound is reproduced, the outputs of the other sounds being reproduced are all halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as a specific sound to be output in the AUTO group 2 which can make the effect stand out while halving the output of BGM and continue the flow of the game, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect Sounds, etc., and specific sounds to be output in the AUTO group 3 include, for example, the hold winning sound at the start winning, the hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and the pressing of the effect button It is a button depression sound etc. to inform.

[16-2-2. Volume control process]
In the present embodiment, the output of sound effects reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effects. FIG. 242A and FIG. 242B are flowcharts showing procedures of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. The procedure of output control of sound effects in the present embodiment will be described below.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a reproduction request for a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no reproduction request for a new sound (the result at step S1501A is "No"), the processing at step S1530A and subsequent steps is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a reproduction request of a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies a sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 241) (step S1502A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1503A). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), that is, if the control on the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing of step S1506A and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "No"), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the reproduction of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have already been registered in the work area (the result at step S1504A is "Yes"), the processing at step S1506A and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result at step S1504A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result at step S1506A is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result at step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing of step S1510A and subsequent steps.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested for new reproduction is “−1”. (Step S1510A). If the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output at the time of occurrence of abnormality, etc. Forbids suppression of the volume of the playback sound, and forcibly suppresses the output of sound effects during other playback.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Furthermore, the work area is overwritten with the sound number requested for new reproduction, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1512A).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound requested for new reproduction (step S1513A). If the volume of all sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing of step S 1530 A and subsequent steps is executed (step S 1514 A).

  On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is not "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), peripheral control MPU 1511a does not receive the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether a sound number is not set in “−1” or the work area (step S 1520 A). If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S 1520 A is “Yes”), the processing of step S 1530 A and subsequent steps is executed.

  If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S 1520 A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511 a It is determined whether the suppression volume value of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

  When the suppression volume value of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value already held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the total reproduction time of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is shorter than the total reproduction time already stored in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of sounds for which a new playback request has been made is shorter or the same as the total playback time already stored in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is longer than the total reproduction time already stored in the work area (the result at step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced The volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area, for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). Then, when the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing of step S1526A and step S1527A on all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processing of step S1530A and subsequent steps (step S1528A).

  When volume control for the sound requested for new reproduction and sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. It is determined whether or not is registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (the result at step S1530A is "No"), this processing ends.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result at step S1530A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not (step S1531A). When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), the present process is ended.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result at step S1531A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a uses the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. It erases (step S1532A). Finally, with respect to all the sounds being reproduced, the volume value is returned to a predetermined original volume value (steps S1533A, S1534A), and the process is ended.

  The above is the process of controlling the volume of sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effects in the present embodiment. Subsequently, sound volume control will be specifically described in time series. FIG. 243 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, in which (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. In FIG. 243, an example in which the first half notice effect and the blackout effect are performed will be described.

  When the game machine is powered on, the game is started and a normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output at the fixed ch2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. Also, normal BGM is loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until BGM is switched, and 0 is set in the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the parameters of the normal BGM are not registered in the work area. Then, a volume value set in advance is set, and a normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly required to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half advance notice A is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, and the total reproduction time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (result of step S1503A is “No”).

  In addition, since no parameter is registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the sound number of the sound effect of the first half notice A, the total reproduction time and the suppression volume value are held in the work area Step S1505A).

  Furthermore, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), and the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is "No"). The sound effect parameters for the first half notice A for which reproduction has been requested have been registered in the work area (the result at step S1520A is “No”, the result at step S1521A is “No”, the result at step S1523A is “Yes” ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, at this point, the normal BGM is being played back, and the volume is not suppressed yet, so the suppression volume value is "100" and is larger than the suppression volume value "50" of the previous notice A recorded in the work area. (The result at step S1526A is “No”), and the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

  Subsequently, since the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”) , This process ends.

  After that, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1 and the total reproduction time is "8000" and the suppression volume value is "0" (the result at step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the normal BGM and the sound effects of the first half notice A are being output (step S1506A The result is "Yes").

  Furthermore, the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is that the total reproduction time is “8000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”). Is “15000” (result of step S 1520 A is “No”).

  Next, the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is “50”, and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound requested for the new reproduction is “0” (step The result of S1521A overwrites the work area with the sound number of the blackout effect sound for which the new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0" and the total reproduction time "8000" (step S1522A).

  In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (black result of “Yes” in step S1523A) A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the preliminary presentation effect sound (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played back is normally BGM "50", the sound effect of the first half notice A is "100", and the suppression volume value of the blackout notice effect sound recorded in the work area "0" (“NO” at step S 1526 A), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half advance notice A is set to “0” (step S 1527 A).

  After that, when the game ball is won in the start winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request of the hold winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 3, and the total reproduction time is "2000" and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result at step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being outputted. Yes (result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effects of the first half notice A is suppressed.

  Furthermore, the total hold time of the hold winning sound requested for new reproduction is "2000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is "8000". (Result of step S1520A is "No").

  Next, the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is “0”, and the suppression volume value of the hold winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is “50” (the result at step S1521A is "No"), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the on-hold winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523A is "Yes"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the hold winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is "Yes"). Then, even when the output of the hold winning sound ends (time t34), since the parameter of the blackout effect sound is recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound is continued.

  After that, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the blackout stored in the work area The parameters of the effect sound are erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A whose sound reproduction has been suppressed (volume has been reduced) is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the BGM is normally suppressed at the time of reproducing the sound effects of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of another sound effect being reproduced and to make it possible to highlight a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) while the effect sound of the effect sound is generated during the muffling period. Even when the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a presentation opportunity. Specifically, when the output of the sound effect is completed during the muffling period, the sound effect is output even while the specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of the other effects is suppressed. To notify the player while the output of sound effects is continued until after the end of the mute period, by suppressing the output of the sound effects of the corresponding effect during the mute period, the execution of a specific effect is made distinctive be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a new sound is generated when there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated (the number of empty channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game-related interest will be reduced due to the appearance of an unintended sound output in the effect design.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when new sound data allocation conditions are satisfied when there is no space in the channel (the number of empty channels is 0), the setting is made in advance. Based on the priority order, by controlling to discard the sound output of lower importance more selectively, it is avoided that the aspect of the sound output unintended in the effect design appears, and the game interest is reduced. It was suggested to be suppressed. However, it is also important to apply a technical device in terms of how to make it difficult to appear in a situation where there is no space in the channel (a situation where the number of free channels is zero).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to effect sound (effect sound), various types of output are not made as long as proper gaming is performed. With regard to the notification sound of the above, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure capable of appropriately notifying an abnormal content etc. by only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving control structure is adopted for output of various notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 244 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X and the like) of the limited number of channels prepared as sound control according to the fixed channel method, as various types of alarm sound (dispense alarm sound and abnormality alarm sound) excluding the effect sound. 7 shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, manage the priority of playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and definition of output type setting doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the descriptions of other definitions such as the notification sound and the effect sound are omitted. With regard to the effect sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 209, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter to be used for determining which one of the notification sounds is to be assigned to the channel X and output when the plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output condition, and the numerical value of the priority is The high notification sound is allocated to and output from the channel X regardless of the state of the notification sound to which the numerical value of the priority is low for the channel X. Although described later, when the priority order is the same, the notification sound previously assigned to the channel X is prioritized, and after the output of the notification sound ends, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output It will be done.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of sounds by the left and right speakers formed of a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speakers (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) are output, and for example, when set to “0x80”, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The volume difference individually output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

  Upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R) It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set values of the upper and lower pan during playback of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers . For example, setting "0x00" indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when "0x80" is set, the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers individually composed of these combinations is indicated. Becomes 0 and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it is indicated that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing the above-described sounds. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” shown in the drawing) for repeatedly playing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the drawing) for playing the target sound once. It shows whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to play the target sound in monaural or in stereo.

  FIG. 245 is a table showing the notification contents, the notification mode, the notification time, and the conditions (cancellation conditions) under which the notification is ended, for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 244 according to the type of the notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is determined for any notification sound, but in order to effectively use a single channel X, this is used as much as possible for the idle channel. It is a treatment for maintaining in the state and for suppressing the subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 245, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state where the magnetic detection is performed by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (in a state where the possibility of fraudulent action using a magnet is high). It is to notify that there is. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “magnetism has been detected” And lighting by means of various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. In addition, as the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is from 60 seconds (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions) after detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. As for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition “power on again” is satisfied. It has become.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of fraudulent action by the dodging act being high is high) Alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormal) to notify that it is in the state), and the count sensor 4005 (the first large winning opening sensor or the second large despite being not in the big hit gaming state (the state that the big winning opening is opened) Notification sound to notify that detection by the winning opening sensor is being performed (high probability that cheating is forced to open the big winning opening in the closed state and the game ball is made to win) 3 (big winning prize abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when it is highly likely that some fraudulent activity has taken place, and the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “booboo vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected” and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and detection by the vibration sensor 2405 as notification time While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 times of notification sound repetition) from the time when there is a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps As for the lighting by the above, the execution is continued until the release condition “power on again” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “boooo big prize abnormality detected”, and in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A display (for example, "a big winning prize has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, While loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 60 seconds (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions) after detection by the count sensor 4005, within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 The display and the lighting by the various lamps will continue to be performed until the release condition "power on again" is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group, but the door With regard to lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group) It does not have to be an aspect). In addition, with regard to the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing, the notification sound 1 such as “booboo” that plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (a state in which the possibility of fraud is high). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and a message sound (unique sound) which plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the contents of notification is made is adopted. The alarm sound consists of monotonous sounds to give a warning meaning under the stressed injustice situation, and the message sound consists of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other alarm sounds. It is desirable to be done.

  That is, in the case of notifying those belonging to the first notification group (state in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is high), it is possible to respond to the fraudulent activity on the hole side rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial movement of In this respect, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of “booo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, but they belong to the first notification group Since it is possible to recognize that it is highly likely that it has been performed, it is expected to accelerate the initial action of the hall side response to the fraud. Furthermore, a message sound is output to notify which notification type it is to follow the notification sound of "booboo", and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hole side can be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, the alarm sound 4 (door open) is in a state where the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (a possibility of fraudulent action by the door open being performed However, it is reported that it is in a state where the door may be opened by the abnormal handling by the hall side. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “door is open” And the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. In addition, as notification time, about loop processing which outputs notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" repeatedly from the time when there is detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (equivalent to the notification sound repetition for 3 times In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the door closing detection (the door frame opening switch 618 is used to open the main frame 4 by the door frame opening switch 618). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the detection that the door frame 3 is closed) is satisfied.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame open switch 619 ( Although there is a possibility that cheating by opening the main body frame may be performed, the notification sound 5 (open frame) notifying that the main body frame may be opened by the error handling procedure by the hall side) There is an intermediate possibility that some fraudulent activity has taken place, and this is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when it is in a state where it can not be denied. With regard to notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notification The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to be common.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open" and lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, the main body frame open switch The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, while the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is ended in 30 seconds (corresponding to 3 times of notification sound repetition) from the time when the detection by 619 is performed, And for lighting by various lamps, the frame closing detection (the main frame opening switch 619 is used to close the main frame 4 to the outer Until the detection of it) "is satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group, but the door With regard to lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group) It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when it belongs to the first notification group. In addition, with regard to notification sound to be subjected to loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the contents of the notification is (a unique sound), and those belonging to the second notification group To adopt a sequential output combination with an alarm sound used in any of the alarm sounds 4 and 5 such as “ping pong ping pong” which plays a role of informing that the possibility that There is.

  That is, when notifying those belonging to the second informing group (a state in which there is an intermediate possibility that fraudulent acts have been made), it is possible to prevent the person who is playing the appropriate game from feeling disgust. It is important to be able to perform the hole side abnormal treatment promptly to some extent. In this respect, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to a third notification group described later, a message sound notifying which notification type is to be output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing a proper game will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound although it is an alarm sound different from that belonging to the first notification group. So that it makes it difficult for the person who is playing a proper game to feel disgusted, it is an output mode when it belongs to the third notification group although it is a lighting mode different from the case where it belongs to the first notification group By performing notification by lighting of various lamps that are not turned off, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hole side can be speeded up to some extent.

  On the other hand, although the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the non-time-short state, the game ball is provided with the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center role 2500 in the game area 5a. It is in a state where the passing is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (a game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in a proper manner (left strike)) To inform that. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “return to the left” And “) are to be executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, in a non-time-short state, both the loop processing to repeatedly output the notification sound "Please return to the left" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 When the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed, the process is ended in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for two times).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in addition to the notification sound 6 (left hitting guide) (lower plate Informing sound 7 (ball removal guidance) notifying that it is in the state where it is necessary to perform the ball removal of the game ball in 322, perform the game guidance for appropriately advancing the game although the possibility of fraud is low It is regarded as belonging to the 3rd informing group when it is in the proper state, and regarding the informing sound belonging to the 3rd informing group, setting the informing mode, the informing time, and the cancellation condition to those in common. And

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, loop processing to repeatedly output a notification sound such as "Please pull the ball of the lower plate", and in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A loop process that repeatedly outputs an alarm sound such as "Please pull out the ball on the lower plate" as notification time while display (for example, "Please pull the ball on the lower plate") is executed respectively, and the game board All of the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed. .

  However, with regard to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-dropping guidance), when the detection is performed by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279, they are terminated in 20 seconds. When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-dropping guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, 5 seconds of silence after the message sound of 5 seconds has been output. Data is assigned to channel X and a corresponding sound is output (silence output), and loop processing is performed to repeat a notification sound for 10 seconds including the message sound and the silence data as a set It has become. Then, in the notification sounds 6 and 7, since silence data is output for the same time in both cases, it functions as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the hard-to-hear message sound portion in the noisy hall. Regarding silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including a message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

  By the way, although there may be silent parts in the notification sound (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these may be very short for providing an “interval”. It is apparent that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned relatively long-time silent part (third broadcast group) having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, the alarm sound such as "boo-boo" or "ping pong" is not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent period interposed between the player and the player. In this way, it is possible to give a notice on game guidance without making the user feel disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 244 and FIG. 245, regarding the notification sound belonging to the same notification group, the priority order is set to be the same, but the priority order is made different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group You may do so. In addition, although loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced is adopted as the reproduction type setting, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and 1 SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. . In addition, with regard to “booboo” commonly used in the notification sound belonging to the first notification group and “ping pong ping pong” commonly used in the notification sound belonging to the second notification group, one having a connection with the message sound The alarm data may be prepared separately for each notification sound as the sound data, or may be prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined at the time of output is created It may then be assigned to a channel.

  FIG. 246 (a) shows a process when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (a), assuming that there is magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 at which no alarm sound is output now, The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Then, information indicating that there is magnetic detection is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that magnetism has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, and In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is sent to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately thereafter) at which no alarm sound is output, magnetic detection information If it is found that the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the loop of “booboo magnetic detection detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is allocated to the channel X, sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and peripheral control is performed. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the RAM 1511 c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed together. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously performed until the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality is performed.

  Through such processing, an alarm sound such as "booboo magnetic detection detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic detection is detected And the lighting by the various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the first notification group) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (a), step S112 (step S112) is performed at timing tα2 in which the alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is in the state of loop reproduction. In the process of FIG. 94, it is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405. At this point, in the main control MPU 1310a, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection was performed, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that the vibration detection was performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer, and In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is sent to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is determined that vibration detection information is included, alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is allocated to channel X in the warning process of step S 1024 (FIG. 95). I do not do it. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly allocated to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side of the allocated state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the setting of the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the vibration detection is not performed at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data according to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not progressed without being allocated to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) not set yet at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter). ) Is set, and when the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) ends, the sound according to the vibration detection Schedule data for generation is set, alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is allocated to channel X for the remaining time, and alarm sound in the notification mode (here, a loop of “booboo vibration detected”) It is supposed to be played back.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection at timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection The above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display or lamp is extracted by extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. As for lighting, these are performed.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display according to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. In the lamp lighting, although the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the vibration detection is set, the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same, The lighting modes of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection already in the set state are reflected by various lamp lights, and the lighting modes of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection are various. It is not reflected by lamp light respectively. As with the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them is selected. Even when the light is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After that, at timing tα3 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, the notification sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having timed up. The loop processing to be executed is ended. In this case, since the time required to reproduce a single notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has a time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and is well cut off.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest thereof By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for a time (a time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds) to the channel X, the notification mode (here, “booboo vibration Will be performed in the "loop detected".

  That is, while the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set at the timing tα3. Therefore, at timing tα3, the alarm sound of “booboo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) times out, “booboo vibration is detected. It is possible to urge the loop processing to be finished and not to be reproduced at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as “boo-boo”) of the notification sound such as “done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is being reproduced and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another alarm sound belonging to the first alarm group is satisfied (see FIG. 246 (a), the sixth alarm sound (here “booboo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic detected”) have been played, the seventh alarm sound (here Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "booboo" was reproduced. As a result, "a booboo magnet is detected" and "a booboo vibration is detected" is connected at a strange place and it becomes impossible to recognize an unauthorized notification in a tense situation (for example, If notification sound 1 ends with "booboo magnetic" and notification sound 2 starts with "motion detected", meaningless notification such as "booboo magnetic movement detected" Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the situation (which may confuse the site).

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer according to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up and finished at the alarm sound of “boooo”, and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is ended and is not reproduced at a halfway timing. In the case of a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good turn off). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at a halfway timing, it is prompted to confirm the display in the liquid crystal, and “displayed magnetism” and “detected vibration” are displayed on the liquid crystal display respectively. By being displayed, it can be properly recognized that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

  FIG. 246 (b) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. 246 (a). Processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when the above-described processing (one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) with reference to Is almost the same as

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), frame open detection by the main body frame open switch 619 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t.beta.1 at which no alarm sound is output now. If there is an event, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame open detection has been detected. Then, information indicating that there is a frame open detection is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that frame open detection has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is provided to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tβ1 (or immediately thereafter) where no alarm sound is output, If it is determined that the information is included, the alarm sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 245 is allocated (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Start notification sound reproduction in a mode (here, a loop of "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong") and set a timer (30 seconds) for measuring notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open) .

  When the alarm sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the control RAM 1511 c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop) It will be.

  At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, schedule data for screen generation according to the frame open detection and light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame open detection, from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed together. The execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the frame closing detection which is the cancellation condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1 and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the frame is "Open" and lighting by the various lamps arranged in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are respectively executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from timing tβ1, and at timing tβ2 at which a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S110. Alternatively, it is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a updates the state of the notification flag so that it is indicated that the door open detection has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame open detection has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door is open is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that door open detection has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer, In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is provided to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state As a result, even if it is understood that door open detection information is included, alarm sound 4 (door open) shown in FIG. 245 is displayed to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). It does not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame open) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly allocated to the channel X Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (the frame open) on the side of the already allocated state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door open detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) is not progressed without being allocated to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) not set yet at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter). ) Was set, and when the timer (30 seconds) did not time out when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 5 (frame open) ended, the door open was detected. The schedule data for sound generation is set, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, the door is open “Ping-Pong Ping-Pong” loop) The notification sound is to be reproduced.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the screen generation schedule data according to the door open detection, The above-mentioned liquid crystal is extracted by extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display according to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. In the lamp lighting, although the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the door open detection is set, the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the frame open detection is already set and the priority is the same. From the above, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection which has already been in the set state is reflected by various lamp lights, and the lighting of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door opening detection The aspect is not reflected in various lamp lights. As with the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection have the same data contents, There is no change in lamp lighting even when reflecting either.

  After that, at timing tβ3 at which 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, an alarm sound such as “the frame is open ping pong pong” is based on the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 5 (frame open) having timed up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “The frame is open ping pong ping pong” is set to 10 seconds here, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) At time t.beta.3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been reproduced three times, and the timing is good.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection. By allocating the notification sound 4 (the door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door There will be an announcement sound playback in the (loop of ping-pong).

  That is, while the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection is not set but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the alarm sound of “the door is open ping pong pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the alarm sound 4 (door open) times out, “the door is open” It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be reproduced at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "the door is open") of the notification sound such as ping-pong ping-pong.

  According to such a configuration, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 246 (b), the third message sound (here, “the frame is open”) and the third alarm sound (here, “ping pong pong”) have been reproduced, the fourth message sound ( Here, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open"). As a result, "the frame is open and the door is open" and "the door is open and the door is open" will be connected in a strange place, and it will be impossible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation It becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer according to the door open detection becomes short, and even if the alarm sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. To ensure that the door is open can be grasped with certainty.

  FIG. 246 (c) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the timing tγ1 at which no alarm sound is now output, the game is in spite of being in the non-short state in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate part 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center character 2500 in the area 5a (detection of right hit in non-shorting state), the main The control MPU 1310 a sets, as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, information that there is a right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time saving state) is provided for processing regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It will be. Note that regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the above-mentioned timing tγ1 (or immediately thereafter) where no alarm sound is output, When it is determined that right-handed detection information is included, the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) A timer (for setting notification sound) (in this case, "Please return to the left" loop) to start the notification sound reproduction and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) ( Set 20 seconds).

  In this embodiment, with regard to right-handed detection in the short time state, information to that effect is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command in this embodiment, but instead, the main control MPU 1310a plays the gate portion 2003 It is determined whether the detection by the gate sensor 4003 has been performed in a non-time-short state on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side so that only the information that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command. And the processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-short time state.

  In addition, when the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the short time state is copied to various control data copies of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. Then, on this, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to the left" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop) It will be.

  At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the short time state is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c By setting in the storage area 1511 cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid-crystal display is also executed. Execution of the in-liquid crystal display is the end of notification (the timer (20 seconds) for measuring notification time of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) being time-out) which is the cancellation condition of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) Will continue to run. In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group with low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid the hindrance to the progress of the effect, and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the right strike detection in the non-time-short state is set. It will not be done.

  Through such processing, an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and display of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed until the alarm sound is ended. Display in the area (for example, "Please return to the left") will be performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (c), step S110 or step S110 is performed at timing tγ2 at which 20 seconds have not elapsed from timing tγ1 and a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is in loop playback. In the processing of S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the lower tray full tank detection is performed by the full tank detection sensor 279. At this point, the main control MPU 1310a sets information to the effect that lower-side full-tank detection has been made as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of timing tγ1 at which rightward detection in the short time state is detected. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (lower counter full detection) is supplied to the process regarding notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) is performed at the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter) when the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information on the bottom plate full detection is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) shown in FIG. It does not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority order is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) is not newly allocated to the channel X By doing this, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side of the already assigned state is preferentially executed to be continued.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the lower-ink-full detection at the timing tγ2 is not set. Therefore, there is no case where the sound generation schedule data according to the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not processed in a state where it is not allocated to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20 For the second), and when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is finished, the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out and the lower tray is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X only for the remaining time, and set the notification mode (here, "Please remove the lower plate ball. The notification sound reproduction in the “loop” is performed.

  In addition, although the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the bottom fullness detection at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), it is for screen generation according to the bottom fullness detection. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511 b or peripheral control RAM 1511 c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c so that the above-mentioned liquid crystal internal display is executed. There is.

  It should be noted that in the liquid crystal internal display, a display according to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the left hitting guide is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After that, at timing tγ3 at which 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is generated based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having timed up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball out guidance) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the bottom full detection. , And by allocating notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds) to the notification mode (here, Then, the notification sound reproduction in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" will be executed.

  That is, while the timer of notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is set at timing tγ2, it is not set for the sound generation schedule data according to the lower disc full detection, and it is set when the timing tγ3 comes. Since at the timing tγ3 the notification sound of “Please pull the ball of the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head at the timing tγ3, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (guide for removing the ball) times out Such that the loop processing is terminated and not played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "Drop the ball on the lower plate") of the notification sound such as "Please pull the ball on the lower plate" It will be possible to prompt.

  According to such a configuration, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 246 (c), the second message sound (here "Please return to the left") has finished playing, the third message sound (here "Please pull the ball of the lower plate") It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if reproduced. As a result, "Please return to the left" and "Please pull the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange places, and the occurrence of situations where the notification content can not be recognized can be suitably suppressed. Will be able to

  Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, silent data of 5 seconds is interposed. Because the message sound of another notification sound comes to be played back, the occurrence of a situation where two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound, and the notification content can not be recognized. It will be possible to avoid it.

  FIG. 247 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (a), if there is magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t-1 at which no alarm sound is output, this will be said. With regard to the processing (magnetic abnormality processing) corresponding to the magnetic detection, the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 246 (a) is performed. Therefore, at timing t-1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetic detection detected” is started, and the timing (time of 60 seconds) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) timer is up. At t-3, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "booboo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times, and it is cut off. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp will be continuously executed until the time of the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), the timing t-2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as “booboo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state. In the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that there is a door open detection by the door frame open switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door open detection (see FIG. 244). ), Even when door open detection occurs, processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

  Then, normally, as for the processing on the low priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) to (c) is overlapped, Processing is performed to set only the timer and not to set the sound generation schedule data itself.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some fraudulent activity is being carried out. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group” in which the possibility of fraud is moderate. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), at timing t-2, neither the timer for the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection nor the schedule data for sound generation is set. , Set only the flag according to the door open detection. Then, based on the fact that the flag is set at timing t-3, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection and the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection respectively. With setting, alarm sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X and alarm sound reproduction is started in the notification mode (here, the loop of “the door is open: ping pong ping pong”) . The execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting according to the door open detection is started from timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, "booboo magnetism is detected even though there is door open detection by the door frame opening switch 618 in a state where an alarm sound such as" booboo magnetism has been detected "is being played back in a loop. "From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound ends, the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection is played back for 30 seconds," the door is open ping pong ping pong " The loop processing is ended at a good timing of cutting when the alarm sound such as has been reproduced three times. In this way, notification sound 4 (door opening) according to door opening detection is reproduced in a more detailed notification mode different from processing based on normal priority, and notification belonging to the second notification group Although it is the content (here, the "door is open" loop of ping-pong ping-pong), it will be expected to promote the recognition that it is in a situation where the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound that “booboo magnetism has been detected”, the notification content is started from the message sound (the door is open), so the first notification group in the most tense situation is It is possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs is ended. On the other hand, the alarm sound of “ping pong ping pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it can be easily recognized that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 247 (b) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (b), it is assumed that there is door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tδ1 at which no alarm sound is output. With regard to the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process of repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of alarm sound 4 (door open) is up Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing which is the release condition of the door opening is detected.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t.delta.1 and the step is performed at the timing t.delta.2 in which the notification sound such as "the door is open" is in loop playback. In the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed strike in a short time. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left hitting guidance) according to the right hitting detection in the non-short time state Therefore (refer to FIG. 244), even when the right hitting detection in the non-time-shortened state occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, with regard to the process on the side with the lower priority, the notification sound on the side with the lower priority is the same as in the case where the processes with the same priority overlap described with reference to FIGS. The process is performed to set only the timer and not to set the sound generation schedule data itself.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), while setting the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) at the timing tδ2, the sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the short time state Schedule data is not set. Then, at timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is allocated to the channel X by a minute, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, a loop for “return to left”).

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "Please open to the left" has not been included at the good timing of the cut. Since it can be reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has become low while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, silent data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silence output) It is supposed to be. Therefore, even with such silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound of the type which has been reproduced up to that point has ended and the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It will be.

  FIG. 247 (c) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tε1 at which no alarm sound is output. With regard to the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. It will be. Therefore, at timing tε1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tε3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of alarm sound 4 (door open) is up Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing which is the release condition of the door opening is detected.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), 30 seconds has not elapsed from timing tε1 and at timing tε2 in which a notification sound such as “the door is open pinging pong” is in the loop playback state, step S112 It is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed in the process of (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 244) Prioritize the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and for the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), in either the sound or the lamp lighting The output content is not reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, about the display in the liquid crystal, since it is configured to be displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during execution of notification with low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, with regard to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound and lamp lighting, it has been set up at that time at timing tε2. The sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection may be processed to be canceled from the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection at the timing tε2 The sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data are set according to the magnetic detection whose priority is higher than the respective data while maintaining the set state. Put in a state. The sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation from the contents based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations By switching to the content based on the schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output for any of the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed on the process on the side with low priority in the execution state (the process at the time of door opening). It is possible to realize change of notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door open process, magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at timing tδ2, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetism detected” is started, and a timer for alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the alarm sound such as "Booboo Magnetic Detection Detected" has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp will be continuously executed until the time of the power re-on which is the cancellation condition of the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is immediately performed in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic detection having a high possibility of the fraudulent activity being performed. Also, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the alarm sound such as "booboo" is first reproduced as the alarm sound, the alarm belonging to the first alarm group is performed, and it is promptly transmitted to the hall side that it has switched to a tense situation It comes to be expected.

  FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ1 at which no alarm sound is output, rightward detection in the short time state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed within the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is determined that there is a process similar to the case described with reference to FIG. 246 (c), the process (left-turn guide process) according to the right strike detection in the short time state is performed. Therefore, at timing tζ1, loop processing for repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is started, and timing tζ3 at which the timer (20 seconds) of alarm sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” has been reproduced twice. Further, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously executed until the timer-up of the notification sound which is the cancellation condition of the left-handed guidance.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), step S110 or step S110 at timing t タ イ ミ ン グ 2 where the alarm sound such as “Please return to the left” is in progress during loop playback since 20 seconds have not elapsed from timing tζ1. It is assumed that door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right hitting detection in the non-short time state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection Therefore (refer to FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left turn guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. It will not be done. In addition, about the display in the liquid crystal, since it is configured to be displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during execution of notification with low priority. Even when a notification with a high priority occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low priority side is maintained.

  Here, as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator in the process of the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance), right-turn detection in the non-time-short state which has been set up at time tζ2. A process may be performed to cancel the sound generation schedule data according to the set state.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the right hitting detection in the non short time state but also the sound generation schedule data according to the right hitting detection in the non short time state at timing tζ2. The schedule data for sound generation according to the door open detection as well as the schedule data for the sound generation according to the door open detection whose priority is higher than this are kept as they are set in the set state, and the light emission mode The generation schedule data is set to each set. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right strike detection in the non-short time state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection. In the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), at time tζ2, no operation is performed on the process on the side with low priority in the execution state (left-turn guidance process), It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-handed guide process, door open process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process of repeatedly executing an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the alarm sound 4 (door open) The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times in accordance with the time-up of the timer (30 seconds). In addition, the execution of the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting is continuously performed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as door open detection occurs in which the possibility of fraudulent activity is moderate occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound is played first from the message sound (the door is open), it is possible to make the person playing the appropriate game not feel disgusted, but then The notification sound belonging to the 2nd notification group is given by the alarm sound by “Ping Pong Ping Pong”, and it is expected to quickly notify the hall side that it has switched to the situation where the possibility of fraud has occurred .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 244 are to be output, various processes described above are performed according to the priority order. Even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for notification sound, abnormal contents and game guidance can be appropriately notified (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group which has a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of a fraud may be higher than a medium condition depending on other detection conditions. It is difficult to say that control based on the priority order of the above is properly notified of the current state of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection that is highly likely to have been tampered with, but also when there is an abnormality detection that is less likely to be fraudulently performed. is there. In other words, if there is a high probability of an anomaly being detected, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues, but with an anomaly detection that is less likely to be conducted. If there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained for the convenience of the hole side (such as recovery from various errors), the alarm sound output is not necessarily required even if the detection state is continued. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIGS. 248 to 253, in addition to the control based on the priority described above, special conditions are taken into consideration, and the state of the gaming machine is further enhanced. It is decided to realize the notification in such a manner as to make it possible to express appropriately. Hereinafter, special notification processing will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 248 to 253.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 at which no alarm sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection is set, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection are also included. It will be set. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for counting the notification time of the notification sound 4 (the door opening) is set, and the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played over a second.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door open detection is maintained until the timing tα 16 when the door open is not detected by the door frame open switch 618 comes.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 248, at timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection is finished and the channel X is in the idle state, the magnetic detection whose priority regarding the notification is relatively high Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, the lamp emission corresponding to the door open detection started from the timing tα11 is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 comes for the light emission mode generation schedule data, but the allocation for various lamp operations is At timing tα13, it is switched to the lamp emission mode according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection They are put in the set state. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, and for the notification sound according to the magnetic detection, 60 seconds until the timing tα 14 arrives. Will be played over.

  On the other hand, as for the in-liquid crystal display and the lamp emission according to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are respectively maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 248, when the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection is ended and the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, a person who intends to do some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and puts it in an open state, and then waits for notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection to end, It is assumed that the magnet may enter the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 momentarily when trying to secretly place the wrong purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in the cold state, and it is extremely malicious. Since it is an act, it is feared that it is not enough as a countermeasure only to perform alarm sound processing according to magnetism detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already off, magnetic detection can not be used as a trigger even if some measures are taken.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at timing tα14 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the fact that the door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 is still continuing is used, Based on this, "schedule data for sound generation according to door open detection" whose notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is displayed on channel X It is decided to carry out special processing to reassign to. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is reproduced in a form linked to "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", so that a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and everyone's attention will be gathered. In addition, even as a person who does fraud, it is already relieved that "when notification of magnetism is over, all the notification sound reproduction is finished, and it is possible to finally make the situation where it is not obvious to be cheating". Since an alarm sound corresponding to the door open detection that should have ended is reproduced, and an unexpected alarm condition occurs, it is expected that recognition that there is an excess of risk is too large. It will be.

  Although described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is performed and in the period during the notification process belonging to the second notification group, other channels are used. A process (a process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed to suppress the volume of the effect sound during pattern fluctuation and the gaming sound other than that being assigned. The specific value may be volume 0. While the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of effect sound during symbol variation assigned to the other channels and the volume of other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, in a period during which the notification process is being performed (a period in which the volume is to be suppressed), whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality It is a period during which the condition of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the symbol variation is performed based on the fact that the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed in the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16. A process (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the effect sound and the game sound other than that is performed, and the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed in the period of timing tα13 to tα14. Based on the fact that the process is being performed, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the game sound other than that (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the running period, the volume of effect sound during symbol variation and other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. In the period, processing may be performed to reduce the value to a lower value than during the period in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is being performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of informing states only by confirming the effect sound other than the informing, and it is expected to further accelerate the initial movement on the hole side.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 248, at the timing tα16 at which the door open detection is ended, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during symbol fluctuation and the game sound other than that is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the end state is reproduced in a form that leads to "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", there is a possibility that extremely malicious action has been performed In view of the above, even when the timing tα 16 at which the door open detection is ended is reached, the volume of the effect sound in the symbol change or the game sound other than that may be suppressed without being suppressed.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 248, as apparent from the processing according to the door open detection, the display in the liquid crystal according to the door open detection is a period during which the notification sound according to the door open detection is reproduced. The period to be performed and the period to light the lamps in the manner according to the door open detection are made to have the same start time but different end times. As described above, by operating the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission to have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. Even if there is, it will be possible to appropriately notify of abnormal contents and game guidance.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 249, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door open detection ends, rightward detection in the short time state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at timing tα23. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike in the example shown in FIG. 248, since the possibility that a very malicious action is performed is low, the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right hitting detection in the non-time-short state is ended. At timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during symbol fluctuation and the other game sound is not changed. By the way, it is extremely vicious even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right hitting detection in the non-short time state by the gate sensor 4003 after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door opening detection ends. Since there is a low possibility that a false action is being performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection which is already in the end state is not reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is ended.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 250, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is ended at timing tα 34 in the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced There is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250, at timing tα 35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is “report sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. There is nothing to be reproduced in a connected form. That is, also in the example shown in FIG. 250, as in the case shown in FIG. 248, after the person who intends to do some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and makes it open, Wait for the notification sound reproduction according to the end, and when it is attempted to secretly arrange an illegal target magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the temperature is cold, the magnet is instantaneously in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 It is assumed that there is a situation in which However, after timing tα34, the door frame 3 is closed, and in view of the non-incorrect state where the magnetic detection is not generated either, according to the magnetic detection although it is in such a non-incorrect state It is considered that the notification sound is played continuously until the timing t.alpha. 35 arrives, and that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and channel X is idled when more notification sound processing is needed. It can be said that it is more useful to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, even though only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, abnormal contents and game guidance can be appropriately notified.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 251, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα 43 after the notification sound (timing t α 41 to t α 42) according to the door open detection ends. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at timing tα 44 in the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 251, after waiting for the notification sound reproduction according to the door opening detection to end, it was tried to secretly arrange an illegal purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the temperature is cold. Even when the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced according to this, the situation is within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 without such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is going to be re-placed, and there may be more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα 44, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the magnetic detection is maintained in the set state, the notification sound 1 is kept A process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time until the lapse of 60 seconds starting from the timing t α 44 at which the second magnetic detection occurred from when the first magnetic detection occurred Can be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. Finally, the loop processing is not finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism is detected" ends, for example, the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing such as "Booboo magnet detection". As a result, it will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing great discomfort in the hall.

  Furthermore, at timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed based on timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection occurred, notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection is set again, and the special process of re-assigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been ended is reproduced in a form linked to the "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection", and in addition, the "booboo magnetic detection" It is reproduced in a form linked to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetism detection" in which the loop processing is finished at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door open detection which has already been ended becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if it was reproduced in the form of stopping the notification sound of the magnetic detection halfway. It will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 252, magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 252, it is assumed that the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is generated at the timing tα 54 in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 252, when an attempt is made to secretly arrange an illegal purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state in which the warning sound has cooled after the notification sound reproduction according to the door opening detection is finished. In spite of the fact that the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is largely shaken without such a situation. It is assumed that there may be more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, at timing tα 55 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form linked to “the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection” At timing tα 56 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state is reproduced in a form further connected to “the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection”. ing.

  Moreover, at the timing tα 54 at which the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is generated, a timer (60 for not counting the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and counting the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Is set, and the schedule data for sound generation according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X at timing tα 55 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended. .

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “booboo vibration detected” does not end its loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop at half-time timing such as “booboo vibration detection”. Since the processing is to be finished, it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hall and everyone's attention will be gathered.

  Furthermore, at timing tα 56 when the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to door open detection Schedule data is set again, and the special process of reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case as well, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound according to the door open detection over 30 seconds until the timing tα 15 comes Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state is further connected to "the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection" connected to "the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection". As well as being played back at the beginning of the loop, the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing such as “booboo vibration detection”, and it is reproduced in a form linked to “the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door open detection which has already been ended becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if it were reproduced in the form of stopping the notification sound of the vibration detection halfway It will be expected that everyone's attention will be drawn by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) according to the frame open detection ends instead of door open detection It is assumed.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 253, it can be said that the situation where magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame open detection is in a situation where it is highly likely that some fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent action, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet. Since it does not exist, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected when the hole side uses a magnet for the purpose of eliminating the ball clogging in the ball tank, the dispensing passage or the like.

  Therefore, even in the example shown in FIG. 253, at the timing tα 64 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the frame opening detection which has already been in the end state By reproducing in a form linked to “reproduction” (timing t α 64 to t α 65), a great sense of discomfort is generated in the hole, and it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered. However, thereafter, at timing tα 66 when the main frame 4 is closed and frame open detection is ended, not only each notification processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to frame open detection, but also according to magnetic detection A special process is also performed to end each notification process (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp).

  According to such a configuration, the notification processing corresponding to the frame open detection and the magnetic detection can be performed only by closing the main body frame 4 when the false detection on the hole side is performed while suitably performing the function against the fraud As it becomes possible to end all notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), it is expected that the response on the hole side to the false detection can be speeded up and the atmosphere in the hole suitably maintained. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 253, the frame open detection is also performed when the main frame 4 is closed and the frame open detection is ended when the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. At the end timing, not only each notification processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to frame open detection, but also each informing processing (informing sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetic detection It is also possible to perform a special process to end the process.

  By the way, as described above, the player's side volume adjustment function is installed in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 217), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the player's setting value (player's setting value) is reduced with respect to the speaker volume, it is determined by the player with regard to the speaker volume when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated. A process is performed to increase the value (player set value). Also, when the player's set value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is output with the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the volume actually raised is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pipi!") Is output at the volume value after the increase. The volume adjustment is completed, and it is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output in the case of decreasing the volume value and in the case of increasing the volume value. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, "20" which is the same as the button pressing sound) referred to when the empty channel is exhausted (for example, the output sound volume of the effect sound ( It is possible to more reliably transmit that the volume of the audible sound has changed.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is not performed during the time when the symbol variation according to the big hit determination is not yet performed (demonstration display etc. Not only the period that can be played, but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the big hit judgment is being executed, the acceptance by the player is allowed, and the more important effect appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value at any time, etc., it is intended to maintain the amusement of the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation where the channels of various performance sounds are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic abnormality or door opening, processing is performed to assign and output a specific notification sound corresponding to the detection content among a plurality of types of notification sounds to a channel. At this time, channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped, and the process of notifying the progress of the effect of reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound of a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not discontinued. From the above, it is possible to enjoy the effect again by appropriately restoring the output sound volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display, as long as the channel assignment of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is ended.

  However, in the above-mentioned effect development lower notification processing, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of display effects is not to be canceled, the specific notification sound is allocated to the channel at a normal time More channels will be used than in the unannounced state), and there will be no empty channels to which no sound data has been assigned before the end of the channel assignment (informing state) of the specific annunciation sound. Risk tends to be high. Then, if there is no vacant channel to which sound data has not been assigned at a stage prior to the end of channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, either of the sound data at that time Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (informing status) of a specific notification sound is ended thereafter, the sound data that can not be assigned to a channel can be reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest may decline.

  With regard to concerns about free channels related to the presentation sound, there is no direct problem if the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether to adopt the automatic channel system or should be determined from the design viewpoint of the game and the effect, even if any channel system is adopted as the above-mentioned effect development lower notification process It is important to prepare a processing structure that can adopt a common processing program, in order to ensure cost reduction and reliability improvement for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for any of the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect development lower notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the effect sound that is being produced is not variable but is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("Pip!" Or "Pipi!") Even if the player has performed an operation while the effect progressing lower notification processing is being executed. It is hoped that this will give more room to the channel and help reduce the risk of losing free channels.

  However, although the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the setting of the volume value when, for example, more important effects appear, the setting of the output volume is performed while the notification processing under the progress of the effect is performed. If the change is judged to be disallowed, and the notification processing under presentation progress based on the notification by false detection or convenience on the hall side (door opening etc.) is executed, the volume appropriate value according to the contents of the presentation progress is appropriately set. It is inevitable that the game's interest will decline due to the fact that it can not be changed. In addition, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the process of notification of the progress of the presentation, as a result of the occurrence of a large deviation between the sound volume appropriate value and the actual setting value according to the content of the presentation, After the setting change of the sound volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to receive a plurality of operations to change the sound volume to the proper value. As a result, there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the fact that the effect sound can not be properly output due to the lack of available channels despite the fact that the informing progress lower notification process has finally ended.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect development lower notification process is being performed, the value decreases to a specific value. While the output sound volume of the effect sound being played (sound volume of the audible sound) is not made variable but is maintained, the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the sound volume is allowed to be accepted by itself. When the informing progress lower notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended, the output volume (sound volume of the audible sound) is simultaneously changed so that all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  According to such a configuration, a new operation can be performed if the change acceptance of the set value (player's set value) by the player is received in accordance with the progress of presentation while the process of notification of progress of production is being executed. It is possible to collectively change the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected when the informing progress lower notification processing is ended without performing. As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In addition, the volume value (volume of the audible sound) is set and changed over a plurality of steps immediately after the effect development lower notification processing ends, and a situation occurs in which a shortage occurs in the vacant channel due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also suitably avoided.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when a batch change of the output sound volume to the player setting value is executed when the effect development informing process is ended, the game during the period in which the effect informing process is under execution. Although the volume adjustment completion sound is reproduced only once at the volume after the batch change, regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, this volume adjustment completion sound is normally It may be made to output with the sound (for example, "bee!") Of a special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably eliminate the shortage of empty channels when the informing progress lower notification process is ended, the number of times the player setting value has been changed during the period in which the informing progress lower notification process is being executed It is desirable not to play back the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) at the same time the presentation progress under notification processing is ended regardless of the number of operations etc. . According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that the in-progress under-reporting process based on the false detection and the notification by the hall side convenience (such as opening the door) is finally finished, the appropriate rendering is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. Can be suitably suppressed.

  Hereinafter, an example will be described for the processing from the execution of such notification processing under effect development to the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) being collectively changed.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram for describing the contents of the in-progress development informing process separately for the informing state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to describing the processing from the execution of the production progress informing processing to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) being collectively changed, the contents of the production progress informing processing will be described with reference to FIG. 254. A brief explanation of Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 244 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 254, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression aspects (a first volume suppression aspect and a second volume suppression aspect) are prepared as volume suppression aspects of the effect sound, For example, in the first volume suppression mode, in the setting value (player setting value) change by the player regarding the sound volume, the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) change of the effect sound in the range of “20” to “50” is Among the possible effects, the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a greater degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode, and in this particular example, the process according to the output itself is performed without the effect sound being performed. It is illustrated as something to be

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any is performed, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode which is the side of high suppression degree. Moreover, even when abnormality detection is turned off, when notification processing regarding any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, In the second volume suppression mode on the high suppression side until the predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the abnormality detection, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) This process is continued without stopping the process of suppressing.

  In this explanation example, when notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound (audible sound) The period during which the process of suppressing the volume of the sound is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, abnormal vibration, It is set to.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group with medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression In the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower side of the above, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is performed. However, when notification processing regarding any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is performed, when abnormality detection is turned off immediately after abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process for suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is ended in the first sound volume suppression mode on the side where the suppression degree is low.

  On the other hand, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball pulling guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance is performed, The process of suppressing the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is not executed at all.

  In this explanation example, the suppression mode is made to differ depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. Are not necessarily different from each other, and the output sound volume of the rendering sound in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed A process of suppressing (the volume of the audible sound) may be performed. However, with regard to the termination condition of the process to be suppressed, it is different if the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make

  FIG. 255 shows the contents of the processing relating to the volume adjustment associated with the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process regarding the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player setting value is made variable by “1” in the range of “1” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. As the value is smaller, the volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller. In addition, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the player setting in the state where the above-mentioned suppression mode (the first sound volume suppression mode and the second sound volume suppression mode) is not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanation example, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), with regard to the volume of the effect sound, the player set value is “3” among “1” to “5”, and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to “60” that is 20 times that. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the big hit determination is not made and is in the start prize waiting state, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect selection left button 331 is simulated. The displayed image 331a and the displayed image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and a volume adjustment guidance display OAH to the effect that volume adjustment can be performed through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 is also executed, which makes it possible to recognize which one of "1" to "5" the current player set value is Ru. The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be always displayed, or during a specific period such as super reach effect which is a reach effect to be executed in a state where the background image is changed. When the operation is performed by the player, at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may be displayed when the player performs an operation. Further, both of the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, and one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 255 (A), when the operation by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player set value is “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20” at the same time. In addition, whenever the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) changes, the sound volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is reproduced at the sound volume after the change.

  At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge display indicates by the gauge display which one of the current set values is among “1” to “5” which is the range of the player set values. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 255C) is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is reduced. The person setting value is kept at “1” (the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is kept at “20”). Therefore, even when the player setting value is “1”, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is "5".

  On the other hand, when the starting winning combination occurs and the big hit determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the decorative symbol SZ changes in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of change pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this point, in the sound volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 255 (A) (period in which a demonstration display etc. can be performed) but also the variation of symbols according to the big hit determination is started. Even during the execution period, acceptance by the player is permitted. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, it is configured to enable setting change.

  That is, FIG. 255 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice with the reach effect being performed in the state shown in FIG. 255 (B). In the first operation of them, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is “60” which is 20 times of those While the setting is changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at "80" which is the volume after the change, and in the second operation, player setting is made. The value is changed from “4” to “5”, and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed to “80” to “100” which is 20 times of those. Volume adjustment completed at "100" which is the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, among the “1” to “5” which is the range of the player set value. A second volume value display OH2 indicating which one of the current setting values is displayed by the gauge display is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This makes it possible to clarify which setting value is currently set with respect to “1” to “5”, which is a range of player setting values, even in a stressed situation in which more important effects appear. An object of the present invention is to prevent an operation error such as repeated execution of the operation on the effect selection right button 332 although the player set value is “5” which is the maximum value. In the gauge display, numerical value ranges of “1” to “5” are displayed steadily in blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to the change in the player set value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 255 (D), the second volume value display OH2 starts from when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 255 (C). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the screen is hidden, and thereafter, the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if it is an operation in a mode in which no change occurs in the player setting value (an operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is “5” of the maximum value), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which no change occurs in the player setting value (an operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is “5” of the maximum value) When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. As a result, it is more suitably prompted that an operation mistake such as an operation to the right for effect selection right button 332 is repeatedly performed does not occur even though the player set value is “5” of the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 256 shows that the door open detection is generated during the symbol fluctuation execution period and the process related to the notification sound is executed, and the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment accompanying a thing.

  The situation shown in FIG. 256 (A) is the situation before the start of symbol variation, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (A). In such a situation, when the starting winning combination occurs and a big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (B), the result or variation of the big hit determination The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the door open detection belonging to the second notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the process regarding the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to this is executed More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ The door is open ”and the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is executed.

  Further, as described above, during the fluctuation period of the symbol, when the door open detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the process related to the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to this is executed, in the first volume suppression mode Informing processing under notification progressing processing is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), although the player set value is maintained as “3” as in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (A), the effect is displayed The output volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to a first predetermined specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original value (20 times the player set value), The contents of the presentation are developed under the volume value.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first specification is performed when an operation is performed on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while such effect development lower notification processing is performed. The output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound that has been lowered to a value (here "10") is not variable but is maintained, while the player's set value for the volume (player's set value) Accept the change acceptance of itself, when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is finished, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations so far are reflected It is as mentioned above that it is made to make a batch change.

  That is, FIG. 256 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 256 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10") lower than the set value (20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is generated until the above-mentioned effect progressing notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended. Is not changed, and the presentation content is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the first specification Since the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the sound of the volume adjustment completion is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changing from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” among “1” to “5” which is a range of player set values, While being executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, the numerical value is also changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has been changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" which is the player set value range, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is being executed again, and processing regarding notification sound 4 (door opening) and presentation progress down notification processing (output volume up to a specific value When the process of decreasing is completed, as shown in FIG. 256 (D), to the output volume (volume of audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected according to the completion of the process. Make a batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation, and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect development lower notification process. Because it is changing, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is originally "80" according to the first operation from the first specific value (here "10"), the second operation The first specific value (here, “10”) is to be collectively changed to “100” in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  As described above, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player's set value) even during the period during which the effect progressing notification process is being executed, the effect progressing notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game. In addition, the volume value (sound volume of the audible sound) is set and changed over multiple steps immediately after the effect development lower notification processing is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound at that time causes a shortage or a lack of available channels. The occurrence of such an event is also suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this explanation example, when the output sound volume (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed at once (“10” → “100”) along with completion of the notification processing of the progress of effects, a change occurs in the output sound volume. Even though the volume adjustment completion sound channel assignment does not do itself. According to such a configuration, in particular, despite the fact that the in-progress under-reporting process based on the false detection and the notification by the hall side convenience (such as opening the door) is finally finished, the appropriate rendering is performed due to the shortage of empty channels. Can be suitably suppressed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 257, when the state detection occurred in FIG. 256 is not door opening but magnetic abnormality, the processing for the notification sound according to this is executed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment accompanying right button 332 being operated.

  The situation shown in FIG. 257 (A) is the situation before the start of symbol variation, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (A). In such a situation, when the starting winning combination occurs and a big hit determination is made, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (B), the result or variation of the big hit determination The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and at the same time, an effect sound matched with the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), during the execution period of the symbol variation, the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed according to this. Specifically, loop processing (60 seconds) to repeatedly output an alarm sound such as “booboo magnetic detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  In addition, as described above, during the fluctuation period of the symbol, when the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the occurrence of the magnetic detection that occurs in the first notification group is performed, the second volume control mode is performed Informing processing under production progress is performed to suppress the output sound volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound). Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), although the player set value is maintained as “3” as in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (A), the effect is displayed The output volume of the sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is set to a second predetermined specific value (here, “0”) which is lower than the original value (20 times the player set value). The contents of the presentation are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this respect, even when the process for notifying the progress of the effect on the lower side according to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, the second specific value (here, “0” is selected when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed. The output volume of the effect sound reduced to “)” (volume of the audible sound (silence here)) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) itself The change acceptance of is permitted, and when the above-mentioned effect progress lower notification processing (processing to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is ended, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations so far are reflected As described above, the batch change is made.

  That is, FIG. 257 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice with the reach effect being performed in the state shown in FIG. 257 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) lower than the user's set value (20 times the predetermined value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is generated until the above-mentioned effect progressing notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is ended. Is not changed, and the presentation content is developed with the volume of the second specific value.

  At this time, among the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is the second specification Since the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output since the value (here, “0”) is maintained, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the sound of the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changing from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” among “1” to “5” which is a range of player set values, While being executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, the numerical value is also changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has been changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" which is the player set value range, and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this example of the explanation, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in the non-detected state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output sound volume of the presentation sound (sound volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until the predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection Informing process lower notification processing for suppressing the is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection is performed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is being executed again, and the process for notifying the progress of presentation progress (specify the output volume When the process of reducing the value to the end is completed, as shown in FIG. 257 (D), in response to the end of the process, to the output volume (volume of the audible sound) to which all the operations up to that point are reflected. Make a batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation, and "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the effect development lower notification process. Since it is changing, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is originally “80” according to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), the second operation The second specific value (here, "0") is to be collectively changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  In addition, when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (D), the game board side effect display device The display (in this case, “magnetic detection”) in the display area of 1600 and the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification processing according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is ended, the effect sound deviates from the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, according to the player setting value. In the notification process according to the door opening, while the notification sound is ended, the effect sound remains the suppression target while the notification by the in-liquid crystal display and the notification by the lamp are continued while the notification processing according to the door opening is reflected. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, even when the magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player's set value) by the player is permitted even during the period when the effect development lower notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the amusement of the game until the informing processing lower notification processing ends. In addition, the volume value (sound volume of the audible sound) is set and changed over multiple steps immediately after the effect development lower notification processing is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound at that time causes a shortage or a lack of available channels. The occurrence of such an event is also suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this explanatory example, the output volume is also output when the output volume (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed at once ("0" → "100") with the completion of the notification processing under the effect development due to the magnetic abnormality. Even though there is a change in the volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed itself. According to such a configuration, it is not possible to enjoy the appropriate presentation due to the lack of the vacant channel, even though the presentation progressing downward notification process caused by the false detection is finally finished. Can be suitably suppressed.

  As for the notification sound according to the door opening such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and the notification sound according to the magnetic abnormality such as “the booboo magnetism has been detected”, as shown in FIG. Since “1” (0x1FF) is set to the third byte of the value, playback is always performed at the volume set with the initial value regardless of the player set value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is executed, the notification processing is not executed, so during the execution of such notification, the player is set Both the value and the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, as shown in FIG. 244, since “1” (0x1FF) is set to the third byte of the volume initial value for these notification sounds 6 and 7 as well, regardless of the player setting value, It always plays back at the volume set with the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-turn guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set to the third byte of the volume initial value. It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

  Moreover, about each processing demonstrated in FIG. 256 and FIG. 257, the state detection not only during the execution period of symbol variation but in the form before the symbol variation is started and the timing across the start and end of symbol variation is detected Even when the notification process according to is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  Also, in each process described in FIG. 256 and FIG. 257, after the in-progress under-notification process is ended, as in the case in which the in-progress under-informing process is started, effect selection left button 331 or effect selection right button When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output sound volume of the effect sound (sound volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, whenever the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) changes, the sound volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “P!”) Is reproduced at the sound volume after the change.

  Moreover, although the suppression mode of the effect sound in the period in which the in-progress development processing is performed is different between the process described in FIG. 256 and the process described in FIG. 257, the suppression mode is not necessarily limited. It does not need to be different, and the output sound volume of the presentation sound (the audible sound in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed As described above, the process of suppressing the volume of

  In addition, in the announcement progress under notification processing, although it will suppress the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of various game sounds, the game ball is in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 among these game sounds. Some game sounds such as a sound reproduced in response to winning (prize sound) may be reproduced with the volume set as the initial value without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hole side to easily grasp whether or not the game is continued despite the occurrence of the abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, a part of the sound such as a sound (winning sound) to be reproduced in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 when the effect progressing lower notification processing is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound be reproduced as a special sound that can not be output when the in-progress under-notification processing is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 244 to 257, there is no space in the channel by adopting a channel saving type control structure that enables notification of an abnormal content etc. appropriately with only a single channel with respect to various notification sounds. (The situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to apply a technical device in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, a situation (a situation in which the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs in a situation where there is no vacancy in a channel to which a presentation effect sound (a production sound) is assigned. There is still concern over the appearance of the above unintended sound output aspect.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the technical sound channel assignment also has various technical features before the occurrence of a situation where there are no channels available (a situation where the number of available channels is 0). I am trying to devise a device. Hereinafter, various technical devices applied to the output of the effect sound will be sequentially described. In addition, when adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1 concerned, it is not necessarily adopted about the control structure of the above-mentioned channel saving type which enables an alarm content etc. to be appropriately notified only by a single channel regarding various alarm sounds. You do not have to. Further, in each of the examples described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for any of the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel system is adopted, the control based on the above-mentioned priority may not necessarily be adopted, and a process of discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. In addition, the examples described below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Channel reservation process]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as "the act of praying by holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1" or "button operation" has been performed. Detection is made possible by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined sound does not show any degree of expectation such as a sound corresponding to silent data consisting only of silent sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By assigning a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is maintained so as not to be used by other sounds. On the other hand, while channel reservation processing is being performed in this way, even if special rendering conditions such as a big hit finalization rendering effect or a pre-reading rendering effect are established as a result of the game ball being received in the specific winning combination, for example At this time, the special sound corresponding to the effect is not assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation processing to end, it is possible to execute an effect of assigning a special sound to a channel and reproducing the channel (post notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels to which special sound can be assigned is pre-secured (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any degree of expectation due to a specific action by the player. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible to output a special sound due to a lack of channels despite the fact that a special result is obtained in the judgment according to the winning.

  As for the special sound, for example, in addition to the jackpot decision sound that is executed only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination according to the winning, a highly expected presentation mode (for example, a jackpot determination based on the jackpot determination according to the prize) , A high expectation notification sound to be executed when a high expectation notification effect to be performed during reach effect execution, etc. is selected, or when a predetermined determination result is obtained by a predetermination determination according to a winning combination Although it is possible to illustrate the pre-read notification sound etc. which are executed as an effect, the point is that when a special judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the predetermined judgment means according to the winning, it is assigned to the channel and output What is necessary is

  In FIG. 258, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, prior to outputting a special sound (for example, quein) matched with a so-called read-ahead effect as a "special sound" The channel to which the special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound is not output (more accurately, a determination to output the special sound (determination to perform a pre-reading effect) has not been made yet) It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation processing secured beforehand from time to time.

First, prior to describing an example of the channel reservation process, first, general pre-reading effects which are known techniques will be briefly described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 has a winning, the predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. The first and second starting hole winning processes (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 134 are performed. In this first and second starting hole winning process (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004). As described above, when it is determined that the player has won a prize, the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side is increased by one.

  In addition, as described above, in the first and second starting opening winning process (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), a prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the starting opening side that has won the prize is also executed (FIG. 135: step S5245, FIG. 136: step S5255).

  Here, as described above, the first special view side previewing effect is an effect that indicates in advance the determination result of the first special symbol (or the degree of expectation thereof) before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. is there. In this first special view prefetching process, information necessary for determining whether or not the prefetching rendering is performed, rendering contents, etc. on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information related to the drop for prefetching determination, and the symbol type for prefetching determination) Information, information on variation pattern numbers for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information relating to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the second special view side previewing effect, as described above, suggests in advance the determination result (or the expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. It is an effect that In this second special view prefetching process, information (such as crash information, symbol type, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) required to determine the presence or absence of preview rendering effects and the contents of effects on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information on the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, information on the stage before finally determined, such as SP reach group among the variation patterns, normal reach group, latent hit group among symbol types, and small hit group, may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in peripheral control board 1510, determination processing as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, and variation in the design thereof are not digested, and information is obtained from the above-described read-ahead command when they are put on hold ( Based on the information related to the prefetching effect on the first special view side and the information related to the prefetching effect on the second special view side, an expectation as to whether or not the jackpot determination that is put on hold will obtain a special result It is possible to carry out pre-reading effects that suggest the degree in advance.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a start winning combination has occurred, and performs control relating to a pending display or a pre-reading effect according to the starting winning combination when in this state. And after that, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped gaming situation, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, fluctuation processing, big hit game processing, small hit establishment shown in FIG. Perform one of the processing. Among them, in the control relating to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning combination in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a relatively low expectation blue and a relatively high expectation red) It is determined whether to perform a specific pre-reading effect that suggests the pre-reading expectation level depending on whether it is displayed, and an aspect according to the result of the determination (for example, when it is determined that the blue, red, or pre-reading effect is not performed In the normal display mode of (1), the process of performing the suspension display is performed. As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the pending display is digested, a pre-reading effect in which the jackpot expectation is previously suggested by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such pre-reading effect, when making a pending display (including a big hit confirmation pending display) appear in a mode with a high degree of expectation, an output of a special sound (for example, quein) may be performed according to the pre-reading execution. There are many. However, since such special sound (prefetch effect) is reproduced at the winning timing of the gaming ball which occurs irregularly, winning of the gaming ball occurs at timing when there is no space in the channel, and it is determined in the prefetching determination. If there is a win, the player can recognize that the special indication is not reproduced even though the pre-reading judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode (blue or red) with high expectation. It is feared that the game interest will decline without it.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 258, as described above, prior to making the game ball win a prize in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and outputting a special sound (pre-reading effect), the special sound is Since the channel to which it can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound is not output (more accurately, a determination to output the special sound (determination to perform a pre-reading effect) has not been made yet) It is possible to execute the channel reservation process secured in the.

  For example, at timing tY10 shown in FIG. 258, the number of big hit determinations (pending number) that are currently placed on hold status is 0, and a normal background display appears in the display area of game board side effect display device 1600. If the player is in a situation where the change display of the decorative symbol is being performed under the game, the player usually wins the game ball in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. Play the game (handle operation) to be played. As a result, when the game balls are won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, up to four big hit judgments are put on hold according to those winnings, and those big hit judgments are Every time the game is put on hold, a process relating to a hold display or pre-reading effect according to the winning is performed.

  Here, as a pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first winning combination (first hold), the second winning combination (in the order of winning to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. Then, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning the pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the pre-reading determination is made by winning). Will cause a pending display to appear.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is also the first prize (first hold), the second prize (for example, in the winning order to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004). Assuming that a second hold), a third prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, processing relating to pre-reading effect is performed at each timing at which the hold occurs. However, when a pre-reading effect is performed by winning pre-reading determination, the special sound (for example, quein) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing of winning), but this is maintained in the execution waiting state After waiting for the channel targeted for the channel reservation process to become empty, the special sound (for example, quein) is output. The hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing of outputting the special sound (for example, quein), or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold made in the pre-reading determination occurs. Good. However, in the case where the hold display having a specific mode is made to appear at the timing when the hold that has won the pre-reading determination occurs, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being performed and the channel reservation process are not being performed. In any of the pre-reading effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can be made to appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (not shown) (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor). Detects this as an object, and is triggered to start channel reservation processing.

  For example, at timing tY11 shown in FIG. 258, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, a prayer effect mode is generated based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display is performed in which "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and "countdown of A process of assigning "voice" to a predetermined channel and reproducing it is performed. The voice of the countdown is, for example, started from "30" and is ended when it is counted down every second and becomes "0". Further, even during the period when the prayer mode background display is displayed in this manner, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

  However, the player holds his hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for “Shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and “voice of countdown” in a predetermined channel. It can be generated as a trigger (detection by a sensor) as a trigger only by itself, and it is not related to the contents of the rendering (representation that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the symbol variation under execution, It does not depend on the result of the big hit judgment at all. Therefore, the display or sound generated when the player holds the hand may be changed to another content as appropriate, but by performing such processing, the predetermined time (30 seconds) can be obtained. The channel can be maintained in the use state (in this case, the use state by the "countdown sound" not showing any expectation) until the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses. It becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which another sound is assigned to a predetermined channel that does not know when it will end (channel reservation processing).

  Then, in this way, the player plays the game ball so that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation processing is being executed elapses. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 258, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occurred. Then, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the "countdown voice" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the determination result (prefetch winning) indicating that the prefetch effect is performed as a result of the determination according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, the special sound (for example, quein) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and is stored as a waiting state. In this way, the special sound (for example, quein) which has been made to wait for execution is output as a post-notification sound that is output later than at the time of winning at timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated during the period (timing tY11 to tY12) from when the player holds his hand up and starts reproduction (channel reservation processing) of "countdown voice" by his / her intention and is ended. If there is no, or if a special prize has not been obtained but a special judgment result has not been obtained (if it was not won in the pre-reading effect), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "countdown sound" ends is reached The sound is not played back.

  According to such a configuration, during the period from when the player holds up his hand and starts the reproduction (channel reservation process) of "countdown voice" by his / her intention until it is ended (timing tY11 to tY12) If a special winning result (pre-read winning) may be obtained by making a winning combination and the determination according to the winning combination, the special sound (cuein) is not output at that time, and the "countdown voice" It is ended and it will be executed as a notice effect after aiming at timing when a channel becomes vacant. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation where a special sound can not be output due to the absence of an idle channel despite the fact that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained. In addition, even if a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cuein) according to this is a timing at which an empty space occurs in at least one channel. Since it is intended to reproduce by aiming at tY12, if it is confirmed whether or not the special sound (cuein) is generated at timing tY12, a special judgment result (look-ahead in a relatively long time of timing tY11 to tY12) It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the winning) has been obtained.

  In the case of outputting a special sound (cuein) as such a post-notification sound, reproduction may be performed by allocating to any channel among the channels in the idle state at the timing tY12. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown voice” has been assigned, channel reservation processing and an announcement effect according to that are performed for only one channel. It can be said to be beneficial in that it can be realized and the range of effects can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, for prayer mode background display in which “Torii of the shrine” is displayed as a background image, timing tY12 when reproduction of “voice of countdown” is ended, and reproduction of special sound (cuein) are performed. The display is continued even after the end timing has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands to cause the channel reservation process to occur again each time the number of reservations decreases. From the point of view that it seems that there is a benefit when the hand of the “Shrine torii” is displayed as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be reproduced at a later notification timing is higher). The prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition not related to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a release operation by a button). However, in fact, even if "the shrine's torii" is displayed as a background image, the player holds his hand even if "the shrine's torii" is not displayed as a background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the allocated state for the predetermined time is only performed by the predetermined sound (voice of countdown), so the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the "voice of countdown" is ended. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuine) as the post notification sound is ended.

  In addition, when the player holds his hand again and is detected during the period from timing tY11 to tY12, the "countdown voice" playback time from the second detection until the predetermined time (here 30 seconds) elapses. May be extended, and a special sound corresponding to the prefetch win may be output when the timing comes.

  In addition, such a prayer effect mode is executed based on the detection of the specific action by the player even when the symbol variation is not in the changing state, as well as when the symbol variation is in the changing state. You may do it. In addition to the action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation.

  However, when the special sound (cuine) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ((quened) as compared to the case where the special sound (cuing) is output at the time of winning. 2nd hold), 3rd win (3rd hold), 4th win (4th hold) It is difficult to grasp whether a special judgment result (prefetch win) has been obtained by hold, so it is win-ahead There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline due to being put on hold without recognizing that the hold is pending. On the other hand, the content to be reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Quin”), but the first winning (first hold), the second winning (second holding), the third winning (second It is also conceivable to make the setting differ depending on which hold of 3) hold) and 4th prize (fourth hold) has been selected in advance. However, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the prefetched winning itself by changing the content from the sound (here, “Quin”) reproduced by the prefetching effect when the channel reservation process is not executed. There is concern that it will be lost.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the special judgment result is obtained for the winning at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). In accordance with whether (prefetch winning) is obtained, processing is performed to vary the reproduction time of the special sound (here, “cuein”) started from timing tY12.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the first winning (preserving first) winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, however, the special sound (here, “Quin”) is reproduced for 3 seconds from timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 259, there is a case where a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the second winning (second suspension) winning at a relatively early timing in the period from timing tY11 to tY12. Although assumed, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Quin" once is 3 seconds, and if the special sound (here, "Quin") is played for 6 seconds, "Quin" is played twice Sound is output in a manner such as "quenching".

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 260, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the third winning (third suspension) winning at a relatively late timing in the period from timing tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play “Quin” once, if “Quin” is played for 9 seconds, “Quin” is 3 It is played back in batches and sounds in the form of "cu-cu-ins" are output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 261, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetch winning) is obtained at the fourth winning (fourth hold) winning at an extremely late timing between timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play "Quin" once, if you play special sound (in this case, "Quin") for 12 seconds, "Quin" is 4 It is played back in batches and sounds in the form of “cu-cu-in-cuin” are output.

  According to such a configuration, when the special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that the special determination result (prefetching winning) is obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (prefetched winning) is obtained by a winning that has occurred. In this example, it is suggested that the shorter the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special judgment result (prefetch winning) is obtained by the winning that occurred earlier in the timing tY11 to tY12. In addition, it is suggested that the special judgment result (prefetch winning) is obtained by the winning at the later timing of the timing tY11 to tY12 as the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is longer. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first winning is generated between the timings tY11 and tY12 and a special determination result can be obtained according to the winning, but also in this case, according to the timing at which the winning occurred. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, in view of the fact that the number of reservations is limited to four at the maximum, when a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "Quein" 1 regardless of the winning timing. Set the play time of the batch, if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the play time of "Quin" 2 times regardless of the prize timing, and the special judgment in the third prize If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Quin" regardless of the winning timing, and if the special judgment result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is regardless of the winning timing May be set to the playback time of "Quin" for 4 times.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading winning is obtained, “cuine” is reproduced as the special sound, but the first determination result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when winning. The reproduction content as the special sound may be changed according to which of the low read-ahead winning) and the second determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained. For example, when a first determination result (for example, a read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation is obtained) is obtained in a pre-read determination when winning a prize, "Quin" is reproduced as a special sound, but a pre-read when a prize is won When the second determination result (predicted winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the determination, if "dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether or not the pre-reading prize is obtained by winning, the first judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively low degree of expectation) and the second judgment result (pre-reading prize with a relatively high degree of expectation) It will also be possible to make a prediction as to which was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 262, the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is made by the look-ahead determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning in the very early timing among the timing tY11 to tY12. On the assumption that the second judgment result (predicted winning with a relatively high expectation) is obtained by the prefetching judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) winning at a very late timing. However, in this case, after the special sound is reproduced in the form of "cuin" for 3 seconds from timing tY12, the special sound is reproduced in the form of "docan" for further 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Quin” mode is 3 seconds, the first prize winning at a very early timing between timings tY11 to tY12 ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (the read-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained by the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself has been performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it is that the prefetching winning was won in the prefetching judgment in the fourth winning (the fourth hold) winning at extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Furthermore, in response to the first determination result (the prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) being obtained by the prefetching determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing during the timing tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played back in the manner of "docan" after the completion of one "cuin" played back, second look-ahead judgment in the fourth prize (the fourth hold) It becomes possible to predict that the judgment result (the look-ahead winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained.

  Alternatively, when the first determination result (prediction winning on the first special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first start port 2002, "cuein" is reproduced as a special sound and If the second determination result (prediction winning on the second special view side) is obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second start port 2004, "docan" may be reproduced as a special sound . In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning on the second starting opening 2004 Depending on the situation, it is desirable to play "Quin" or "Docan" as a special sound.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 262 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Quin” mode is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 The first winning (winning with the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing is a winning on the first starting port 2002 side, and the first judgment result (first special view It becomes possible to predict that the look-ahead winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself has been performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it is also pre-read winning even in the look-ahead judgment in the fourth prize winning (the fourth hold) winning at extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Furthermore, in response to the first determination result (prefetch win for the first special view side) being obtained in the prefetch determination in the first winning (the first hold) winning at an extremely early timing during the timing tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played back in the form of "dokan" after one "cuin" played back has been played, the 4th prize (the 4th hold) is the second starting port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetch winning on the second special view side) has been obtained by the pre-reading determination according to the winning.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning combination while the channel reservation process is being performed. In the pre-reading effect, it was decided to illustrate the case where the pre-reading winning is obtained. However, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262, the point is that the gaming machine is subjected to the determination process when the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (such as channel reservation processing) that can avoid that a channel shortage occurs and can not be output when a special sound is output when a determination result is obtained, which has technical features in itself Therefore, it is obvious that the application example is not necessarily limited to the prefetching in the prefetching effect.

Channel Usage Limit
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of vacant channels is monitored during the progress of the game, and when this number is less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the various game sounds The rate of limiting the execution of processing related to output is made to be high (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, for at least part of the game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is limited from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of empty channels approaches 0. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it is possible to make the number of free channels hard to be zero.

  More specifically, in the periphery control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation according to the big hit determination in the hold state is digested (every time the starting condition is satisfied), the symbol variation to be digested is Determine the availability of the channel during the execution period. As a result, when there is a vacancy in the channel, the rate at which the channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is lowered until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the vacancy of the channel is reduced. When there is no margin in the situation, the rate at which channel use is restricted (channel restriction level) is increased until at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended, and the channel limitation with such symbol variation as one unit is By performing this operation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and as the level values become higher, the rate of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of game sound becomes higher.

  FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for the processing relating to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

  Now, in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95), it is determined that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 263, in the processing of step S3101, the value of the channel restriction level set previously is reset. In addition, about this reset process (step S3101), you may make it carry out, when symbol fluctuation is complete | finished.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the classification of the first half of the variation pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of variation (for example, the period from the start of symbol variation to the start of reach effect, Specify "X" which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) with reference to the timing when the channel becomes most vacant in the period from when the fluctuation start to reach the symbol stop and so on) Do. In addition, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of the presentation pattern of the second half of the fluctuation corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel in the second half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of reach production to the symbol fluctuation stop) Specify "Y" which is the number of free channels (minimum free channel number) based on the timing when the free space is at its lowest.

  However, when the effect pattern in which the symbol is stopped is selected without the reach effect being started from the start of the symbol variation, the symbol variation corresponding to “the second half of the variation” is not performed. In this case, the process of step S3103 is not performed, and the next step process is performed, or the maximum numerical value that can be set as the number “Y” of empty channels in the process of step S3103 (numerical value not subject to channel restriction) Will be set.

  Then, next, as the process of step S3104, "X" specified by the process of step S3102 is compared with "Y" specified by the process of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y" The channel restriction level is set based on the value of the side where the minimum number of vacant channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of vacant channels), at least the symbol variation to be determined is ended. Thus, between the start and the end of the symbol variation to be determined, the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. It is expected that the number of empty channels will not easily become 0, and it will be expected to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment due to the appearance of an unintended effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum number of free channels” provided for the determination is separately specified in the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This is because the contents of the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of the symbol change to the start of the reach effect) are shared by multiple effect patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.) In many cases, if the minimum number of free channels is specified in units of the first half of fluctuation, it is considered that the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced. .

  However, the minimum number of vacant channels to be used for the determination of setting of the channel restriction level may not necessarily be separately identified in the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation, and effects from the start of symbol fluctuation to the stop The number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel is least occupied in the period in which the effect pattern is executed, with the pattern as one unit.

  In addition, the “minimum number of free channels” here is a sound that is automatically generated when the effect pattern (effect content) to be determined advances (a symbol stop related to BGM related or a big hit determination, a big hit determination It indicates how many channels are left as idle when they are assigned to each channel for the corresponding sound effects, etc.). Therefore, a button press sound (a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation, etc.), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (sound associated with winning at a general winning opening), a hold winning sound (first The effect pattern (representation content) to be judged is developed, such as the sound associated with the winning of the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), the common electric effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol) These sounds are not included in the judgment of various sounds that are not necessarily executed only by

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing a value of a channel restriction level set separately for the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3104, and an example of restriction contents defined for the channel restriction level. .

  As shown in FIG. 264, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a block winning sound (a winning for a general winning opening) among various types of game sounds is first made as a sound to be subjected to channel usage restriction Sound accompanying a), hold winning sound (sound accompanying a prize to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), general power effect sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the determination of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol variation in which there is no spare channel available, at least those game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) of various types of game sounds. Channel usage limitations may occur.

  More specifically, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "0". That is, in this case, it is in a situation where there is a margin in the vacant channel and it is in the situation where the symbol variation is executed, the channel use restriction target sound (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). None of the above is restricted, and if there is a winning on the general winning opening during execution of the symbol change, a block winning sound is allocated to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and the first starting opening 2002 or the execution of the symbol change If there is a winning on the second starting port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the spread according to the effect The effect sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when the volume adjustment is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment completion sound according to this is set to the predetermined vacant channel Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restriction is performed based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set the level to "1". That is, in this case, there are four sounds (block winning sound, on-hold winning sound, general charge effect sound, volume adjustment completion, etc.) that are subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation with a slight margin in the vacant channel is executed. Among the sounds), the channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a winning on the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation, if this is detected, the winning balls are paid out by the number corresponding to the winning, but the block winning sound is It will process so that it does not allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to play the block winning sound itself without setting the sound generation schedule data according to the winning on the general winning opening.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "2". That is, in this case, four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect, volume adjustment, etc.) are considered to be subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation is executed with relatively little spare time in the empty channel. Channel completion (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds of block winning sound and hold winning sound among completion sounds). That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above, when there is a winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation, the quantity according to the winning is detected Although the prize balls are paid out for a minute, and the above-mentioned first and second starting opening winning processes are carried out, the processing for holding on hold sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined vacant channel. At this time, it is preferable not to set the sound generation schedule data according to the winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and not to play the reserved winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is determined based on the correspondence shown in FIG. Set to "3". That is, in this case, there are four sounds (block winning sound, on-hold winning sound, general charge effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel usage restriction, assuming that symbol variation with no margin in the vacant channel is executed. Generate a channel usage limit (100% limit) for all of the sounds). That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on block winning sound described above and the restriction on holding winning sound, even if the effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, this is the case for the general effect sound Will be processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined free channel. In addition, when there is a volume adjustment operation by the player during the execution of the symbol variation, although the volume adjustment according to this is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be allocated to a predetermined vacant channel. It will be. At this time, also for the general effects sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to them, and do not perform the reproduction for the general effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when a symbol change is made such that the number of vacant channels in the state to which sound is not allocated is less than the predetermined number while the game is progressed, the number of vacant channels is predetermined As compared with the case where symbol variation that is not less than a number is executed, the rate of restricting the execution of processing related to the output of at least a part of various types of game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, with respect to some game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general sound effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound), the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0 Since the execution of related processing is limited, and the rate of execution restriction is increased as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It will be expected that the occurrence of such a situation should be suitably suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, the sound that is the target of channel usage restriction among various types of game sounds is not the most important "effect sound related to the big hit determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but the other "sounds associated with winnings". , “A performance sound related to normal determination”, and “a sound related to volume adjustment”. That is, even if a restriction on the use of the channel is generated during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect on whether or not the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation can be suitably executed without being limited. The decrease in the game entertainment when the channel use restriction is applied is suppressed.

  In the above configuration, among the various types of game sounds, a plurality of types of sounds that are considered to be candidates for channel usage restriction are prepared (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general effects sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level increases (as the minimum number of vacant channels decreases as the symbol changes), the number of types of sounds subject to channel usage restriction is increased. However, there is a method to limit the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0 and to increase the rate of execution limitation as the number of free channels decreases. For example, the method described below with reference to FIG. 265 may be employed.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram showing another example of separately defined restriction contents of channel restriction levels.

  As shown in FIG. 265, in this example, the channel use is made according to the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. Make a limited lottery about whether or not to limit. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel usage restriction are not prepared, and a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, volume adjustment completion sound Etc.) is limited to channel use.

  For example, in this example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability that the judgment result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained is 0/100. A restriction process for channel use is not performed on a specific game sound to be restricted (for example, volume adjustment completion sound).

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that the judgment result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained is increased as the value becomes larger, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum vacant channel The probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 50/100 when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel restriction level is 50/100. The same probability in the case where is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0 and 1) is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, the restriction process concerning the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even with such a configuration, when a symbol change is made such that the number of vacant channels in the state to which sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number while the game proceeds, the number of vacant channels is equal to The ratio of limiting the execution of the process related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds of the various game sounds is increased compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed. That is, in this case, with regard to some game sounds (volume adjustment completion sounds) of the game sounds, there is a restriction to the execution of the process related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. As the number of vacant channels is increased and the execution restriction rate is increased as the number of vacant channels decreases, it is preferable to generate a situation where the number of vacant channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It will be expected to suppress.

  Further, according to the above configuration, by checking whether or not the specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the execution period of the symbol variation, the minimum vacant channel in the execution period of the symbol variation It becomes possible to infer the possibility that the number will run out, and it becomes possible to promote game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) commensurate with the inference.

  In the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265, after the determination processing for various advance effects is executed based on the effect pattern, the minimum number of available channels is specified from the occurrence status of those advance effects, and the specified minimum free space Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is possible to assume in advance for each effect pattern what amount of sound will be simultaneously channel-assigned at the same time during the symbol variation period, so the channel shortage occurrence probability is classified in advance separately for the effect pattern Keep it. Then, when the rendering pattern is determined, the channel restriction ratio may be higher as the probability of occurrence of the channel shortage in which the rendering pattern is classified in advance is higher. That is, in this case, when a special type of effect pattern that tends to use many channels simultaneously is executed, there is actually no button operation or various winnings are not generated, and many channels are not used and empty channels. Even if there is a margin in the number of events, there will be situations where the execution of processing related to the output of game sound may be restricted while the symbol variation is being executed, but the empty channel can be achieved by simply performing the processing. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid that the number of objects becomes 0, and even when such processing is performed, "the number of free channels in the pattern change is relatively When the number is low, the rate at which the process related to the output of the game sound is limited is high, and when the number of free channels in the symbol change is relatively large, it is related to the output of the game sound It is only a phenomenon that the rate at which the execution of the processing is limited is reduced, and there is no particular sense of discomfort from the player's side. become. Also, in this case, by checking whether the sound is limited, it becomes possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to be short of channels.

  Also, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and the other examples thereof, although the channel restriction is performed with the symbol variation as one unit, the channel is performed while the effect contents are developed within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied to perform channel restriction in accordance with the channel restriction level in each case. Alternatively, when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, a channel restriction level is made unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations when a predetermined limitation condition is satisfied, and the channel limitation level is set. Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

  By the way, in the configuration exemplified in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and their other examples, the sound that is the target of channel usage restriction is not the most important “promotional sound related to the big hit determination” in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that We decided to adopt only "sound associated with winning", "arrangement sound related to normal judgment" and "sound related to volume adjustment". However, since these sounds include those whose frequency of occurrence is lower than that of the effect sound, it is important to consider the jackpot determination in order to realize the restriction processing that can secure the empty channel more effectively. It is desirable that “rendering sound” be adopted as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is performed on "the effect sound relating to the big hit determination", there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, and the effect may be reduced to a lack of excitement. If the jackpot symbol is stopped in some situations, the interest in playing the game may be reduced.

  In this respect, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, among the "arrangement sounds related to the big hit determination", only the "arrangement related to symbol variation in the hold state and to be digested in the future" If the channel use of sound is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 265 or another example thereof), for the effect relating to the result of the symbol variation being executed Therefore, it is possible to adopt an effect sound with a high frequency of occurrence as a target of restriction without any restriction.

  For example, when a winning on the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 occurs during a period in which symbol variation is being executed and the corresponding big hit determination is put on hold, the hold is normally made A determination process is performed as to whether or not pre-reading effect is to be performed in relation to the state of the big hit determination. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) is suggested to suggest in advance the degree of anticipation as to whether the held jackpot determination is to be a big hit. Become.

  However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxieties (such as a state where the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1 and symbol variation is in progress), the channel usage is restricted. If the effect sound according to the effect on the symbol variation to be digested in the future is targeted, winnings on the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 occur and the big hit judgment according to this is suspended Even if it is put in the state, the judgment processing for the pre-reading effect itself regarding the big hit judgment being put on hold is not executed, so that both the pre-reading effect and the sound according to this are not performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety occurs in the vacancy, the channel portion to be used for rendition relating to the symbol variation in the future which is not the symbol variation in progress is being executed Because it becomes possible to supply to the production sound regarding the fluctuation of the character, the production sound with high frequency of occurrence can be restricted without any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation under execution You will be able to In addition, the effect to be restricted is only the "representation concerning the symbol change in the future in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is subjected to restriction, it will be restricted if it is reserve digested in the future Since the effect during symbol fluctuation not being turned on (content of the effect according to the effect pattern) is always executed, the decrease in the amusement of the game due to the restriction of the effect is suitably suppressed.

  In addition, when "rendering sound related to the big hit judgment" is the target of restriction, if only the sound of the effect (display of the effect, sound of the effect) is the target of restriction (no sound output), it will fall into the effect lacking in excitement In the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxieties about the vacancy, the player wins and the jackpot determination is put on hold Judgment processing for pre-reading effect When this itself is not executed, it is made not to perform both the effect display and the effect sound regarding pre-reading effect, therefore special result (pre-reading winning) is not obtained in pre-reading judgment The situation is the same as when playing (pre-displayed when pre-read effects are not executed), and it is preferable to suitably avoid a decrease in game interest due to the execution of effects lacking in excitement It becomes possible way.

  It should be noted that when the effect sound related to the big hit determination is targeted for restriction, the judgment process for the pre-read effect when the winning and the big hit determination is put on hold does not execute itself, but the effect display and effect regarding the pre-read effect Although I did not do both with the sound, it is not limited to this. For example, when "play sound related to the big hit determination" is a target of restriction, the judgment process about the pre-read effect is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained until the specific timing in the symbol change comes Restricts both the effect display and the effect sound regarding the pre-read effect without executing them, and when the specific timing during symbol variation comes, only the restriction to the effect display among the effect display and the effect sound To do this. That is, in this case, the effect display relating to the pre-read effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing) different from when "the effect sound relating to the big hit determination" is not the restriction target (at the time of normal) Since the pre-reading effect is executed after showing as if the result (pre-reading winning) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is performed while suppressing the decrease in the game interest due to not outputting the effect sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to carry out suitably.

In addition, as processing concerning future rendering in the situation where channel use is restricted,
・ When a prize is won, the judgment processing for the pre-read effect is performed, but even if a special result is obtained, both of the effect display and the effect sound regarding the pre-read effect are not executed until the specific timing in the symbol change arrives. These are limited, and when the specific timing during symbol change arrives, only the restriction on the effect display among the effect display and the effect sound is canceled and the processing is performed under the first limit processing. age,
・ When the prize is won, the judgment processing for the pre-read effect is not executed, and the game is progressed when the second limited process is to execute neither the effect display for the pre-read effect nor the effect sound. Among them, when the symbol variation is performed such that the number of empty channels in a state where sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number, compared to the case where the symbol variation is not performed that the number of empty channels is less than a predetermined number. To increase the rate at which either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing is executed, and the symbol variation in the execution state when the first restricted processing is performed Let the expected value of the number of channels used in “A” be the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in execution when the second limited processing was performed “B” When it As the relationship is relation of "A <B", it is more desirable that the one of those first restriction under treatment and the second restriction under processing is executed. That is, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and a greater anxiety arises due to the vacancy, both the effect display and the effect sound are subject to restriction instead of the first limited processing under which only the effect sound is the object of restriction. Since the ratio under which the channel restriction is applied is increased by the second limited processing described above, it is expected to more suitably suppress anxiety when the number of channels used increases.

[Channel special open processing]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced. A process may be performed to end the assignment of the specific gaming sound to the channel in a state where the volume is reduced (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is finished, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound whose assignment to the channel is continued (channel special open process).

  According to such a configuration, the use state is aimed at timing at which it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the aspect of the channel allocation of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)). To reduce the number of channels (increasing the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, the number of channels in use is reduced even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is not output.

  FIG. 266 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 266, there is a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, and at timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern being developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “normal BGM reproduction” according to is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction) and according to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “reproduction A” is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and is being reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this point, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction and effect A reproduction), the sound of “effect A reproduction” is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect At timing tk13 (during the execution of the symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are disconnected and the playback is ended. As described above, even if the predetermined effect pattern is in the stage of effecting, the effect content of the predetermined effect pattern is obtained by performing the process of terminating the assignment of the effect sound from the channel and changing it to an empty channel promptly. When progressing, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible to assign a new sound and play it out due to a shortage in an empty channel.

  However, as described above, when there is a predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the stage of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) when the assignment of the effect sound is removed from the channel and this is changed to an empty channel The number of effect sounds in the reproduction state is reduced, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears in the corresponding effect pattern may be reduced by the decrease.

  Therefore, in this explanation example, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), first, the sound of "reproduction A" is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09, and the timing tk13 before the reproduction ends comes. From “timing tk12” to “timing tk14” after timing tk13, the sound of “effect B reproduction” according to effect B displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 It is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 to be in a state of playback (here, stereo playback). Then, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), timing tk13 in which “reproduction of A effect” is ended during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “effect B reproduction” is put into the state of reproduction. In accordance with the arrival of the "effect B reproduction", a process of reducing the volume (volume reduction process) is performed while the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" are allocated to the channels.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" in this explanatory example is output as a rendition sound corresponding to a step effect that can be developed up to four times in the content of the rendition After the effect content has been developed over three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the effect as to whether the effect content is further developed according to step 4 is executed. In the state where a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B reproduction” corresponding to the step effect are allocated to the channel, processing (volume suppression processing) to decrease the volume is performed. In addition, when the high expectation performance aspect which develops further to the production contents according to Step 4 appears when this volume reduction processing is ended and returned to the normal volume (a performance with relatively high expectation), While the specific effect sound according to the effect content of the step 4 is outputted as the sound of “reproduction B reproduction”, it does not develop into the effect content according to the step 4 and the step concerned with the effect content according to the step 3 When the low expectation effect mode in which the effect is ended appears (effect with a relatively low degree of expectation), an effect sound different from the specific effect sound is output as the sound of “effect B reproduction”.

  According to such a configuration, the effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume control process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and in the process of the volume control process, “process A” Since the sound of “play” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is ended, the number of channels in use is reduced (the sound of “play A” is not played back. Can be made harder to notice.

  Particularly, in the example shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (c), the content of the rendering with a relatively high degree of expectation (the content of the rendering developing to step 4) and the content of the rendering with a relatively low degree of expectation (step The above-mentioned period (period in which it is unclear whether development will be made or not) in which presentation contents (representation of whether or not development to step 4) appears that leads to any of the presentation contents that do not develop to 4) The volume suppression processing is executed, and the sound of "effect A reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09, and the reproduction is ended. According to such a configuration, not only in the situation where the volume of the effect sound is reduced, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the effect B (sound of “reproduction B reproduction”). Then, since the effect A (sound of “reproduction A reproduction”) comes to an end, the volume of the effect sound that has been targeted for volume suppression including the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” is then returned. Sometimes, even if the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced, the effect content with a relatively high degree of expectation (the effect content developed to step 4) and the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation ( It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is no longer reproduced by drawing interest in which of the presentation contents not developed to step 4 appears.

  Moreover, in the volume suppression processing according to this explanatory example, although the volume is reduced while the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B reproduction” are allocated to the channels, all the effect sounds are The volume is not reduced, and the specific effect sound (here, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction”) is continuously reproduced with the normal volume. That is, in this case, with regard to a part of the rendering sound (the sound of “normal BGM playback”), the volume of the plurality of rendering sounds is lowered in the normal playback without the volume being suppressed, and thus the listening of the sound Since the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" comes to an end while it becomes even more difficult, the sound of "effect A reproduction" can be made harder to notice by not being reproduced. It will be.

  Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is not terminated immediately, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the volume suppression process is started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive, the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is ended. That is, immediately after the volume suppression processing is started, the player may be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of "volume decrease" has occurred, but the volume is lowered to a specific value. Since it is assumed that such interest is diminished when the state which does not change at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, the sound of "play A" is aimed at such a timing. By terminating the reproduction of the above, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced.

  In particular, in this example, the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process is gradually reduced in volume, and the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silenced). As a result, it becomes possible to make it even harder to notice the fact that the sound of "reproduction A" is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, although the sound of “effect B reproduction” is started to be reproduced while the sound of “effect A reproduction” is being reproduced, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, in the state where the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced, the sound of "production A reproduction" is started to be reproduced, and the sound of "production B reproduction" is being reproduced in the suppression state. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be ended.

  The effects A and B are not necessarily effects accompanied by the effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as effects of only sound, for example.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of “effect B reproduction” is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (representation pattern) according to the big hit judgment. It is not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is started to be started, and the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is reproduced. May be ended in the manner described above.

  Further, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume reduction process may not necessarily be reduced stepwise. Also, conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be 0 (silence), and if it is suppressed to a volume lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" has ended. Is possible.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 266, a specific effect sound according to the effect pattern (here, the sound of “normal BGM playback”) is excluded from the target of the volume suppression process, and the volume at the normal time remains Although the reproduction is continuously performed, the volume of all the effect sounds may be reduced when the volume reduction processing is performed. Also, conversely, the sound of "effect A reproduction" may be maintained without reducing the volume when the volume reduction processing is performed, and even in such a case, the volume is reduced. In the situation where the player is interested in the sound of "reproduction B reproduction", the reproduction of the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is ended and then the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is also included. Content with a relatively high degree of expectation even if the sound of “play A” is not played back when the volume of a plurality of effect sounds that were targeted for volume suppression is returned (step 4 We are interested in which one of the rendering content (which develops into 2) and the rendering content with relatively low degree of expectation (the rendering content that does not develop to step 4) appears, and the sound of “reproduction A reproduction” is reproduced Can be made harder to notice Uninaru.

  In addition, at least while the volume reduction processing is performed during a period in which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A reproduction” and “effect B reproduction” is performed (after the volume of “effect B reproduction” is reduced from the normal value Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 has been won, in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” more suitably. It is desirable not to play the corresponding hold winning sound. In addition, even if a special result (preread winning) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 is hit, the effect sound according to the pre-reading effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the sound reproduction of “effect A reproduction” is ended within a period in which the effect sound is reduced in volume, and when the period is ended, the channel is allocated to the channel in the state of reduced in volume. In addition to this, the special effect sound that has not been assigned to the channel until the end of the period is added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and played back (play back at the normal volume). According to such a configuration, an interest is gathered whether or not a special effect sound is reproduced when the sound volume is returned, and it is further noticed that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced. You will be able to make it harder. Moreover, if the number of channels being used after volume return is reduced compared to before the volume drop, there is a concern that it may seem as if the expectation for the big hit symbol to appear due to the symbol variation has decreased, but special effect sound Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (reproduced with the normal volume), so that it is the same as before volume reduction and after volume return, or more (two or more effect sounds for the channel (When newly allocated), it becomes possible to keep the channel in use, and it is also preferable that the player remembers the feeling as if the degree of expectation decreased. It will be avoided. In this case, when the volume is returned, the special effect sound may or may not be reproduced, and it is suggested that the expectation degree is relatively high when the special effect sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

  When a special effect sound that has not been assigned to a channel is newly assigned to a channel and played back when the volume is returned, the channel that has become idle due to the sound assignment of "play A" being removed. It is desirable to assign a special effect sound to. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a wide range of effects with less channel resources.

  In addition, such channel special opening processing may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, the restriction target in the processing described with reference to FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 As “effect A” is adopted, the smaller the number of vacant channels is, the less symbol variation (when the number of vacant channels in the symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when not less than a predetermined number) The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where there is ample free channel number so as not to feel anxious feeling of lack of channels, it is possible to continuously output "production A" without ending on the way become.

[Control sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the symbol variation is started until it is ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs processing for advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel to reproduce Do the process of Then, when the display effect in the game board side effect display device 1600 advances to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is allocated to the predetermined channel and the state is output in the suppression mode or silence ( The volume of "BGM playback" is reduced to a specific value and output. When an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as operation button 410) is detected in this state, the symbol fluctuation causes a big hit symbol A special effect sound that suggests an expectation that a special display mode appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressing mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special rendition may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, at the time of outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the predetermined channel, and is output in the suppression mode or silent state of the thing. In this way, it is possible to provide an atmosphere that seems to be easy to use in the channel. Therefore, providing an operation opportunity to cause the player to output the special effect sound in a state where the feeling of uneasiness such as "there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special effect sound" is removed. This makes it possible to curb the decline in game entertainment.

  By the way, when it is intended to output a sound in a suppression mode or silent while keeping a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (a sound of “BGM playback”) allocated to the channel, it is generally allocated to the channel It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of a certain sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (the process of reducing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of effect reception), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (“ It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate an effective period of effect reception) after setting the sound of “reproduction of BGM” to be output in a suppression mode or silent state.

  However, as well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the effective period of effect reception will be generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. Whether it is random (depending on the player) can not be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to end the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the effective period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so as to start the reproduction of the sound matched with this at an undefined timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "special BGM reproduction at the time of special effect sound reproduction" and is displayed. It is also conceivable to perform processing to reproduce. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the contents of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped and the pattern is ended, the timing of the pattern stop, etc., it is within the effective period. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or it is determined to be indeterminate (up to the player), the sound of “BGM reproduction” is newly reproduced at the timing of the operation (effect reception). There is a concern that so-called sound shifts may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of symbol stop and the game interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as sounds of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of super reach production, the sound data at the second half of super reach production, etc.) are specified according to the time series defined by each sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. Perform processing of sequentially assigning to channels. And among a plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM playback" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, a specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation When a predetermined channel is assigned according to the time series being played, the predetermined channel is assigned and started from timing before the effective period of effect reception occurs in the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. It is made to be reproduced while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the

  In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, processing concerning the sound output with a suppression mode or silence as compared to the other sections The data content that defines that the specific sound data is to be performed is set in advance, and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section It is made to become a time-series relation in which the effective period of the effect receptionist occurs within the period). In addition to this, even if the player performs an operation at any timing within the effective period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial period), the special period from the special period (partial period) The sound of "BGM playback" is a special effect sound according to the reception of presentation across the two sections in the specific sound data in the period (other section) after the (partial section) ends. It is made to reproduce | regenerate in the non-suppression mode in the channel different from the predetermined channel allocated.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of super reach effect, super The volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed only by performing processing of sequentially assigning sound data in the latter half of reach production to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the respective sound generation schedule data corresponding to these. In any case, it becomes possible to create a "suppression mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is accepted in the "suppressed mode or a state (special period) output in silent mode" created in this way, the special process with high immediacy triggered by this is not performed in the special mode. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of "BGM reproduction" in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is output in the "suppression mode or silent state" (special period) regardless of the effect reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. And after this, in the form that special effect sound is being played in, in a form to which it is included, a part section (suppression mode or sound output of silence) of specific sound data (one sound material) is finished. Since the data contents of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly restore the sound of "BGM playback" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide an effect sound without a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when an operation by the player is accepted in a state in which the sound of "BGM playback" is output in a suppression mode or silence, an aspect of non-suppression of special effect sound by a process of high immediacy triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of the sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that while making the reproduction start.

  FIG. 267 is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment condition of each channel when such a process sound output process under suppression is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 267, a specific example when performing such a suppression operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 267 (a), there is a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, and at timing ts11, the specific effect being developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a situation where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one of the sound data over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start of the symbol variation to the end when the specific effect pattern is determined to be executed. The sound material may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each of the different sound data prepared for each of the periods may be divided. It may be reproduced sequentially based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 267, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the whole period (a part of the symbol fluctuation period) in the drawing including the timing ts11. Are assigned to channels 02 and 03, and are in a state of reproduction.

  In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 267 (a) and (b), one sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) assigned to channels 02 and 03 and being in a reproduction state is special The data content of silence is set at timing ts12 before timing ts13 at which the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) occurs is given, which gives an operation opportunity that is a trigger for producing a production sound. It is made to be in the reproduction state in a part section. As a result, even if the volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed with respect to the sound of “BGM reproduction”, it is possible to output the sound in silence while assigning it to the predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of "BGM playback" is in a playback state in a partial section set as silent data content, and there is a possibility that there is a margin in the channel usage status While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output a special effect sound in a state where anxious feeling such as "there is no space in the channel and may not be able to output a special effect sound" is removed. Will be able to control the decline in game entertainment.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is ended even if the player does not perform the operation. Before the timing ts15 comes before the arrival of the key, the period is ended so that the effect by the player is not accepted. Therefore, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the operation effective period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state in the partial section set as the silent data content. While the atmosphere of the use condition of the yoke channel is likely to be provided, it is possible to generate the special effect sound according to the operation by the player. Note that the operation valid period is ended not only when the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when an effect by the player is accepted. When the timing ts 15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation is performed by the player at that timing.

  And, in this explanation example, it is assumed that the player's operation is accepted for presentation at the timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is allocated based on the fact that the presentation is accepted. , 03 are assigned to special effect sounds for channels 08 and 09 to be reproduced.

  In this respect, in this example, the maximum time from the start to the end of the operation effective period (the time from the timing ts13 to the timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period is ended at this maximum time. Within the operation valid period, when “BF” is the time until the end of a partial section where silent data content is set as “BGM playback” sound (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) Even when the operation by the player is accepted at any timing, the special effect sound is allocated to the channels 08 and 09 for reproduction for a fixed time of “SY + α (> BF)”.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to output the sound of "BGM playback" as a non-suppressing mode in the form of being incorporated into the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time from when the reproduction of the special effect sound is started according to the timing when the operation by the player is accepted until the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output as the non-suppression mode is variable. The buffer period for returning the output period of the special effect sound in the non-suppressing mode of the sound of "BGM playback" (The sound of "BGM playback" is restored in the non-suppressing mode by being mixed into the special effect sound By making it difficult for the player to notice that it is not possible to restore the sound of “BGM playback” as a mode of non-suppression when the operation by the player is accepted, and the sense of incongruity by returning after the predetermined time It will be difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound in this way, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the non-suppression mode when timing ts17 comes. In the state, the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended.

  In the above example, the “timing to start reproduction of special effect sound” and the “timing to end reproduction of special effect sound” are controlled by the player as shown in FIG. 267 (b). Depending on the timing to be accepted, they will be variable within the range shown by the dotted arrow, however, even if they correspond to any timing, timing ts16 comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state It is apparent that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the "BGM reproduction" sound is to be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, when the operation by the player is accepted, the user feels even more aware of "uncomfortableness by returning the sound of" BGM playback "as a non-suppressing mode without returning it as that mode". In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section while attention is paid to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, when an operation by the player is accepted, the special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of the big hit determination The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. In addition, even when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation effective period is generated at the timing ts14, and the effect is accepted when the effect by the player is accepted within the operation effective period. The predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced based on the information. And, even if it is operated at any timing within the operation effective period, the sound of BGM reproduction is densely reproduced to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (a failure effect The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). Will be set to arrive after the According to such a configuration, a silent period (according to the operation timing) after a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) ends and the sound of BGM reproduction is restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. Can be generated as a buffer period). In addition, if it is set in such a silent period that a resurrection effect in which the expectation (or 100% may be high) can be generated, it will be expected to maintain the game interest.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is to be reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in the lost mode without the BGM reproduction sound being restored to the reproduction state in the normal section. It is also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the sound for BGM reproduction to the channels 02 and 03 may be ended, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, in the case of generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction by simultaneously performing a movable effect for moving a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to make the sound of reproduction secretly transition to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound of “BGM playback” is silently output in a partial section, but the embodiment is not limited to this, and the aspect is suppressed more than the sound of “BGM playback” in other sections. What is output by is good. Here, the mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered can be exemplified as a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is lowered.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, by setting a time-series period in which the suppression mode or silence is set to the sound data “BGM reproduction” allocated to a predetermined channel itself, Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a suppression mode or a silent output state (special period) only by reproducing the sound. However, the sound data of "BGM playback" allocated to a predetermined channel may not necessarily have to set a time-sequential period set as a suppression mode or silence to itself, for example, at timing ts12 of "sound of BGM playback" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (which may be mute). That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (process of returning to the initial value of volume) is performed. I will not. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts 16 comes, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is raised from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the volume initial value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is being reproduced as in the other example described above. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial value of the volume) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is specified with a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is finished. You may make it perform processing (processing to return to volume initial value) to make it rise from, or even if the said symbol variation is ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, restriction processing is performed to make it more difficult for new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel over a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16 at least. It is desirable to In addition, as such restriction processing, for example, it has nothing to do with the result of whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation under execution such as block winning a prize sound, holding winning a prize sound, general sound effect sound, adjustment sound etc. It is desirable to set a specific game sound as a target of restriction and prevent the reproduction of the specific game sound not to be newly assigned to the channel.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment, a specific effect sound (BGM in a channel different from the channel 02, 03 before the timing ts12 comes To play the background music, not the music, but it is desirable to be an effect sound or an effect sound such as a speech), and while the specific effect sound is being reproduced, the timing ts12 comes and the BGM is reproduced. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppression mode or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it can be made difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state. In addition, for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is to be ended before timing ts14 at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output (at timing ts14 or before timing ts14). Is desirable in order to alleviate the anxiety that the special directing sound is not output.

  In addition, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment, the sound of BGM reproduction is from the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that a plurality of channels be output of the effect sound until a timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of silence is ended. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including special effect sounds are output, the sound of BGM reproduction can be easily incorporated into those effect sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is normally It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the aspect.

  In addition, such suppression operation sound output processing may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed, and, for example, in the processing described with reference to FIG. 264 and FIG. 265. Adopting "sound of BGM playback" as the restriction target, the smaller the number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the number of minimum free channels in symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than a predetermined number) The ratio at which the operation sound output process under suppression is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, the BGM reproduction sound is output without making the suppression mode or silence in a situation where there is ample free channel number so as not to feel the anxiety that the special effect sound is not output due to the channel shortage. Will be able to

[Channel assignment cancellation operation]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is allocated to an empty channel to which sound data is not allocated is triggered by the detection by the detection means. It is possible to execute (channel assignment cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created in response to an operation by the player, the player performs an operation by the player at a timing immediately before the player's favorite effect sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it is possible to reliably output the player's favorite rendering sound and special sound through the vacant channel secured in advance in this way.

  The operation (channel assignment cancellation operation) in this explanation example is not limited to the “button operation”, and an action such as holding the hand over the pachinko machine 1 and praying with reference to FIGS. The point is that the contact or non-contact predetermined sensor can detect any state change that occurs when the specific action to be detected (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed. It is sufficient that the processing in which the sound in the state assigned to the channel is removed from the channel and the reproduction end is performed in response to the detection.

  FIG. 268 is a time chart which shows an example of the assignment condition of each channel when the processing related to such a channel assignment cancellation operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 268, a predetermined effect pattern is being developed in the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing tw11 during a period in which symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM1 playback” according to (for example, the presentation effect sound to be played during execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 and played (here, stereo playback) and The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the effect mode (for example, one music continuously played across a plurality of fluctuations in a short game state etc.) is assigned to the playback channel 02, 03 and played (here, stereo playback ) Is in the situation.

  In this respect, as shown in FIGS. 268 (a) and 268 (b), among the sounds in the reproduction state (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction), the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) It is considered to be subject to forcible termination of channel assignment at the time when a symbol is detected, and during the period when the symbol variation is being executed, at timing tw12, the effect acceptance of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is An acceptable reception period can be generated up to timing tw13. In the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action to be detected such as “Operate a button and secure a vacant channel” in the display area of gaming board side effect display device 1600 (channel allocation cancellation operation) An operation instruction image prompting to perform is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 268 (a) shows the allocation situation of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of the timing tw12 to the timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection unit is not performed. It shows.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed until the timing tw13 comes, the sound of “BGM 2 reproduction” is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. In addition, at timing tw13 when the reception period is ended, the operation instruction image (operate a button and secure a vacant channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, processing is performed to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproduce it. In this example, the vacant channel is previously secured in another channel (reproduction channel 10, 11) even if the reproduction channel 02, 03 is not changed to the vacant channel by the detection by the predetermined detection means. It is possible to assign a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) to a channel and reproduce it. However, when the vacancy is not secured in advance in another channel, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit confirmed sound) can be assigned, and it becomes impossible to reproduce and output this. There will be concerns.

  FIG. 268 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period of timing tw12 to tw13 and detection is performed by a predetermined detection unit. It shows.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channel 02, 03 is detected at the timing tw12a when the detection is performed. "BGM2 playback" sound will be removed from. Thereby, it becomes possible to secure in advance a vacant channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) which can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) until timing tw 13 arrives. The concern that it will not be possible to reproduce and output a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) will be eliminated. In addition, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly ended, and in this case, the music or the speech as the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is completed (or Because it will be considered that the reproduction ends at a halfway point without being reproduced, until a good point), the player remembers the feeling that the vacant channel was secured in advance by the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) This makes it possible to easily make it possible to safely wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmed sound) is reproduced.

  In addition, at timing tw12 a detected by the predetermined detection means, the reproduction state of the sound of “BGM 2 reproduction” is forcibly ended and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (The button is operated to secure the vacant channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the reception of the effect of the specific action (the channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is ended.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), at timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance as vacant channels but another channel (reproduction channel 10, A predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) is assigned to 11) and reproduced. However, when there is no space in another channel at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit determined sound) is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

  Alternatively, when the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the fact that the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, there is a vacancy in another channel Also, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) may be allocated to the specific channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determined sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, a effect sound (here, here) different from the predetermined effect sound for the specific channel , BGM 2), it will cancel the assignment state at that point in response to specific action detection (channel assignment cancellation operation) such as button operation, so that one channel (specific channel) Only by using it, it becomes possible to reproduce the sound of "BGM 2 reproduction" and the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit finalized sound) respectively, and it becomes possible to effectively use the reproduction resource which is a limited resource .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit determined sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing after the timing tw13 The predetermined effect sound (in this case, the jackpot determined sound) may be reproduced.

  Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the big hit finalized sound, a good effect sound indicating the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears, a good effect sound indicating that the big hit is missed, etc. may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds be selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears in the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that a big hit has been missed, even if the timing tw13 comes, no effect sound may be output, and the idle channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, as a sound whose channel assignment is ended when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is detected, it is not a sound output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is missed when the reproduction state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to easily predict the content and there is no hindrance. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the state is forcibly terminated.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), although a predetermined period within the symbol variation has arrived, the reception period in which the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is generated. It is not limited to. For example, at least while the specific sound as a target to be removed from the channel assignment is in the reproduction state, the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is performed based on the acceptance. May be eliminated. In this case, for example, a predetermined timing after the specific sound is put into a reproduction state, such as a predetermined timing after the predetermined time has passed, maintain the state of the vacant channel secured in advance for a predetermined time, and then another sound is transmitted to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played back.

  In addition, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forced to be terminated, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. 0) may be used in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned empty channel at that time. The channel assignment of the specific sound may be canceled by assigning it in the form of overwriting the same channel with a very short assignment cancellation reception tone (such as one second). Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound earlier when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the forced termination is not performed.

  In addition, a new sound is generated at least in a period from the acceptance of the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) to the end of the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the effect reception. Specific game sound (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound, etc.) that is not related to the effect of whether a big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation so that the channel is not used uselessly. It is desirable not to output the pre-read effect sound etc.).

  In addition, the specific sound targeted for forced termination (the sound of "BGM2 playback") is to be reproduced as a non-loop effect sound such as music or speech that is reproduced for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easy to remember the fact that the vacant channel was secured in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player so that the reproduction is ended at a halfway point without being reproduced to the end. .

[Anomaly notification in the middle of the stage corresponding to the stage pattern]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, the specific alarm sound according to this is not necessarily allocated to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on condition that the event occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not necessarily output, so that the channel has a margin and promotes reduction of the risk of empty channels disappearing. Will be expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although it is the timing when the predetermined movable decorative body should be at the specific position (origin position), it is not at the specific position (origin position) Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as notification processing by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "the movable body abnormality has occurred", etc.), and the game Abnormality display (for example, “occurrence of abnormality in back-to-back movable effect unit 3200 or the like”) in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 can be executed. In addition, although it is desirable to perform as abnormality indication in a display area so that it can be specified in which of a plurality of movable decorative bodies an abnormality has occurred, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped, It may be a mode of specifying which of the groups the movable decorative body to which the abnormality has occurred. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 (for example, back front decoration unit 3100 or If the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200, back-to-left movable effect unit 3300, back-to-right movable effect unit 3400, back-to-back movable effect unit 3500, back-to-back movable effect unit 3700 etc.) are provided respectively The display at the time of abnormality in the display area is performed in such a manner that it can be specified on which side of the decorative body and the movable decorative body on the panel side the abnormality has occurred. The plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies having different driving sources and provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by the failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly probable that the player side is likely not to make any mistakes, but it should be dealt with when notified. Because there is no, during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit judgment are being executed and the notification process is sometimes executed and displayed, it is in the effect being executed An adverse effect is exerted on the player, which is a start for the player. In addition, the alarm sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not enough in the number of empty channels, so that the player may be anxious not to be able to output a new sound. , There is a concern about the decline in gaming entertainment.

  On the other hand, however, failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs frequently when the movable decorative body operates, and in some cases it is difficult to assume a situation where it suddenly fails when it is not operating at all. Then, when the movable decorative body is not operating at all, the case where the movable body abnormality occurs is that the movable decorative body is removed from the specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent act such as a dodging act or a wire entry. If there is a possibility of being in a detected situation, and it is possible not to output an alarm sound corresponding to a movable body abnormality even under such a situation, it may encourage cheating, From the point of view of players who are interested in the

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed and detected. Even in such a case, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound, display at abnormal time in display area of game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. However, processing (fluctuating pattern (rendering pattern) to operate the movable decorative body by effect control by at least the peripheral control board 1510 during a period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit judgment are being executed And when the movable body abnormality is detected while the movable body drive processing for operating the movable decorative body based on the effect pattern in the big hit game or the like is performed, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound The display at the abnormal time in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, and the like are not performed. The external output (information on the hall side) of the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is not displayed explicitly and does not adversely affect the presentation, and may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to cause a failure in the movable decorative body (due to the peripheral control board 1510 even within a period during which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed. Movable body abnormality in the process of operating the movable decorative body by effect control (the movable body driving process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (rendering pattern) or the effect pattern in the big hit game, etc.) When it occurs, notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormal notification sound can be performed, but at least in the situation where failure is likely to occur in the movable decoration (during the rendering operation of the movable object) Since notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormal notification sound is not performed when it occurs, it is suppressed for the person who performs the cheating to perform the cheating. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, assignment control of effect sound to a channel, abnormality occurrence The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. It becomes to be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing to operate the corresponding movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated while the movable decorative body is not yet recovered from the abnormal state. The production is not performed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as abnormality notification sound according to the movable body abnormality is to be performed or not Regardless, it is possible to execute restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to restore the corresponding movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, the specific movable effect is started even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state during the period of execution of the symbol variation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body is performed When the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state in the previous stage, it becomes possible to execute the specific movable effect to operate the specific movable decorative body.

  In addition, although the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (operation to move to a specific position (origin position)) to the corresponding movable decoration is executed, the movable decoration is specified within a predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 269 shows the allocation status of each channel when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed And it is a time chart which shows those examples about the condition by the side of a movable ornament.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) provided to the player can occur at the maximum over the period up to the timing ti14. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. The effect control to operate the specific movable decorative body is performed. In addition, when operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is not detected within operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control which operates a specific movable decorative body after timing ti14 is performed You may make it not, and you may make it not perform presentation control itself which operates a specific movable decoration body.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that the effect by the player is accepted at timing ti13. Therefore, at timing ti13, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, and the movable effect for effecting the specific movable decorative body is performed (FIG. 269 (b)). Refer to FIG. 269 (see FIG. 269 (a)).

  Here, as the movable body drive processing, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not an abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the movable body drive processing is ended without performing any driving since the restoration processing has failed and no restoration can be expected. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, when the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a mode determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when driving of the specific movable decorative body is finished, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired, The movable body driving process is terminated when it is determined based on the information that the state has been returned to the specific position (original position). However, when it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not at the specific position (original position) in the movable body drive processing, the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is performed. After that, the movable body drive processing is ended. At this time, if the restoration processing fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  With this movable body drive processing, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. However, in this example, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation at the timing ti15 within the period in which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs and this can not operate. In FIG. 269 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti17 after the drive (drive for rendering operation) to the specific movable decorative body is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the state returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body In addition to the determination of abnormality, the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, with the specific movable decorative body operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination, the situation where abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body is the movable Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of having occurred due to the failure of the decorative body, in this example of the explanation, it is not performed to assign and reproduce the abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality to the channel. That is, in this case, for the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which has occurred abnormally As it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the rendering in progress.

  Note that at timing ti18, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation is ended, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), the memory of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it becomes possible to execute the usual movable effect. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 269 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), and recovery is failed. In this case, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued thereafter, the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing the predetermined restoring operation. That is, in this case, within the same symbol variation, or within the symbol variation next time, even if the timing when the movable effect using the specific movable ornament is performed based on the effect pattern comes, it is The rendering operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is allocated to the channel and reproduced. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the abnormally generated movable decorative body remain to emit light in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, when the movable decorative body itself is not operated, the actuator (lamp) mounted thereon is operated (lighted) in the operation mode, and the movable effect is not performed. It will be expected to suppress the game interest.

  As described above, when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern (representation pattern) according to the big hit determination at least during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed, the movable body By not allocating the abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even when abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) in the same variation pattern (specific effect pattern) as the example shown in FIG. 269, this movable body abnormality is When it occurs at a timing different from when moving a specific movable decorative body by effect control (rendering pattern), an abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

  In FIG. 270, the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (rendering pattern) according to the big hit judgment during the period in which the symbol fluctuation is performed, but the movable body abnormality is It is a time chart which shows those examples about the assignment condition of each channel at the time of being detected, and the condition by the side of a movable ornament.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side rendering The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern being developed by the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  Then, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) at which the operation opportunity is given to the player is maximum at the timing ti14. Can occur over a period of Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. The effect control to operate the specific movable decorative body is performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body is moved by some external force at a timing ti11a before the timing ti12 when such a specific movable decorative body can perform a rendering operation (operation based on the rendering pattern) It is assumed that the movable movable body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11 b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 270 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is performed.

  At timing ti13a, the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is ended, and at this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to a specific position (origin position) (movable body If it is determined that the abnormality has been eliminated, the memory of the abnormality history will be deleted, and thereafter, it will be possible to execute the usual movable effect without any abnormality notification being performed. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from timing ti12 to timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, so the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is Not being performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is allocated to the channel and reproduced, and an abnormality occurs. The various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body will only be emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is received within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14 in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is made by the above-mentioned restoration processing. If canceled, the usual effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) will be executed including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. In this example, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and the restoration processing according to this is performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are in a situation where the restoration process is being performed, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14, the specific Although the rendering operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, it is assumed that recovery is unsuccessful because it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that movable body abnormality has been eliminated) at timing ti13a. doing. Therefore, after timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the predetermined recovery operation is not performed and the game and the effect are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  In addition, as described above, a situation where an abnormality (a movable body abnormality) has occurred in a specific movable decorative body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected due to the specific movable decorative body being removed from the specific position (origin position) due to a cheating action such as a dog-sticking action or a wire entry. Furthermore, timing ti13a means that even a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is in a situation where the movable body abnormality has not been resolved by some external force, and there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has taken place. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

  So, at this timing ti13a, although it is in the midst of execution of design fluctuation (specific rendering pattern), it is decided to execute notification processing according to movable body abnormality. That is, in this case, in addition to the various presentation sounds corresponding to the specific presentation pattern being assigned and reproduced according to the development of the presentation contents, in the channel, the abnormal alarm sound is reproduced over a predetermined time, the reproduction channel 00, 01 Will be assigned to Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern progressing and being executed as it is, an abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ "Abnormal occurrence in the movable effect unit 3200 in the back" and the like will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting parts, as a mode corresponding to movable body abnormality, while making some light emitting parts emit light in the abnormal time aspect, the other light emitting parts are in the normal mode according to the development of the effect contents It will be made to emit light.

  According to the example of FIG. 269 and FIG. 270, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one pattern change, a period during which the control concerning the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on at least the change pattern is executed If the movable body abnormality occurs during that, there is a low possibility that cheating has taken place, and there is also the possibility of a failure at the time of rendering operation, so the rendering will be output with priority over the anomaly notification. . On the other hand, when the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that cheating is being performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the rendering It is a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output a notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 270, notification processing according to movable body abnormality is not performed at timing ti11b, and notification processing according to movable body abnormality is performed at timing ti13a after execution of restoration processing but movable object abnormality is not resolved Decided to However, at timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected despite the fact that the specific movable decorative body can not operate based on the rendering pattern, and even if this is done alone, fraudulent acts such as dodging or entering a wire Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of being out, the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality may be started to be output at this timing ti11 b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may be performed.

  The point is that in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, within the period when the symbol variation is performed, "the specific movable decorative body does not perform the rendering operation based on the rendering pattern, and the specific movable decorative body is Is made to be executed as a necessary condition, and that "the abnormality is generated in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the effect pattern" It is important not to be executed under the condition that the player is sufficiently executed, thereby making it possible for a person who has made a fraudulent activity to be executed for a legitimate player while suppressing the conduct of the fraudulent activity. It will be expected to avoid the adverse effect on the rendition of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification process according to the movable body abnormality within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decorative body does not perform the rendering operation based on the rendering pattern, but the specific movable decorative body After adopting at least the occurrence of an abnormality in the body, for example, “a failure in restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality” or “an occurrence of an abnormality that occurred under a specific situation” Etc. can be adopted as a further condition.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 269 and FIG. 270, in the process which operates a specific movable decorative body according to an effect pattern, it was determined whether abnormality generate | occur | produced in this specific movable decorative body. However, when an abnormality occurs when operating a specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern, the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality is not performed with this as a trigger, and thus the specific movable In the process of operating the decorative body according to the rendering pattern, it may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at predetermined timings or at predetermined time intervals.

  Further, the method of detecting the movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 269, the actuator such as the motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 270, the actuator such as the motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at timing ti11b, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIG. 269 and FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the rendering operation at the timing when the player performs an operation, but the specific movable decorative body is May be operated.

  In addition, in the notification according to the movable body abnormality, the abnormal alarm sound is allocated to the channel for a predetermined time and reproduced, but during this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific value (0) A process of decreasing may be performed.

  In the case where the abnormal notification is not executed on the condition that "a specific movable decorative body is abnormal based on the effect pattern and the abnormality is generated in the specific movable decorative body", the condition is that Also, it is desirable that abnormality notification is not performed as long as power supply is continued without clearing at least the RAM even if the abnormal state is not eliminated and is left. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the effect be developed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoring operation.

[Recovery processing of multiple movable decorations]
As described above, in the gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, there is no space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means corresponding to the winning. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel according to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the inability to output this. Therefore, conventionally, even if the movable body abnormality occurs in any of the plurality of movable decorative bodies (the movable decorative bodies having different relationships with the drive sources being different from each other), the common abnormal sound data (one abnormality By assigning sound data) to channels for reproduction, the number of used channels is prevented from being unnecessarily increased even under conditions in which movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously with respect to a plurality of movable decorative bodies. The Note that the movable body abnormality means that the movable body can not operate properly and can not operate properly, and it is the same as that exemplified in “Abnormal notification in the middle of the effect according to the effect pattern”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on game machines has increased, and it is only necessary to associate common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable decorative bodies. It is becoming difficult to appropriately report the status of the aircraft. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and different abnormal notification sounds are used as channels depending on which of the groups the movable decorative bodies belong to. By allocating and making it possible to reproduce, even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing, it is possible to appropriately notify the state as the pachinko machine 1 concerned.

  Also in this example, when the movable body abnormality occurs, it is as described in the above-described example of “the abnormality notification in the middle of the effect according to the effect pattern being performed” (see FIG. 269 and FIG. 270). Processing is performed. Therefore, also in this example, even if it is generated during the period when various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) are being executed and this is detected, notification processing by pachinko machine 1 (output of notification sound The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, and the like are executable. Also, similarly, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit games, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being performed, processing (fluctuating pattern for operating the movable decorative body by effect control by at least the peripheral control board 1510 In the case where a movable body abnormality is detected while (movable effect drive processing for operating the movable decorative body) based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern in the big hit game, etc., notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 ( It is configured not to output an alarm sound, display an abnormal time in a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, turn on an abnormal time by various lamps, and the like.

  However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, the abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and made to be in the reproduction state is only one of the groups corresponding to the specific group. On the other hand, it is assumed that the processing for performing the restoration operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is performed. According to such a configuration, it is expected that, even in the case where a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected that the channel has a margin and a reduction in the risk of empty channels disappearing. As well as being able to become a part, it becomes possible to make a rapid abnormal recovery for each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel usage time through the efficiency improvement of the processing when an abnormality occurs. . In addition, about the contents of restoration processing, and each processing at the time of success and failure, the example of the above-mentioned "abnormal notification in the stage according to the presentation pattern" is performed (see FIG. 269 and FIG. 270). It is the same as in the case of).

  Here, as a mode in which a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, it is required to be a mode suitable for informing the state as the pachinko machine 1 concerned, for example, provided on the door frame 3 side A plurality of frame-side movable decorations not shown and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back inside movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back In the case of grouping into two groups of the right movable effect unit 3400, the upper back movable effect unit 3500, the lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body which can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal Can be transmitted to the hole side depending on the type of the alarm sound, whether abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative body which is considered to be difficult to contact if the door frame 3 is not opened. So is the ability. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the movable side decoration on the panel side, it is more likely that the injustice is being performed by the portion where the contact is difficult than in the case where an abnormality occurs on the frame side movable decoration. From the above, by making the notification sound output based on such grouping, although it is a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the player side is not noticed by the type (not feeling unpleasant It is possible to secretly transmit to the hole side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the possibility of fraud is high.

  And also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the movable body abnormality occurs, as the notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the game board side effect display As described above, it is possible to execute the display at the abnormal time in the display area of the device 1600. In this respect, in this explanation example, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups even as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, and any of those groups It is desirable to perform different notification display depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to the above. However, while the above “notification by display” is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality than the above “notification by sound”, it is excellent in the information transmission function for notifying the details of the abnormality in more detail. It has the following characteristics. Therefore, in the above "notification by display", the above grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exhibited in a mode different from the case of performing the above "notification by sound" by utilizing the difference in the nature thereof. In this case, it is desirable that different displays be provided depending on in which of the individually divided groups the movable ornaments belonging to the group are abnormal.

  That is, in this case, for example, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped in any of the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and the case where the movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B Depending on whether there is an "Any movable body abnormality occurs, the notification sound displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same as the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 160, even though the abnormality notification sound is assumed to be the same. Is the first notification mode in which different displays are performed, and "the second notification mode in which the error notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are also the same as each other even if any movable body abnormality occurs" And “a third notification mode in which the notification content in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are also different from each other occurs even if any movable body abnormality occurs” It becomes this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 271 shows an example of the assignment situation of each channel and the situation on the movable ornament side when a movable object abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable ornaments at a specific timing in a period in which symbol variation is performed It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific rendering pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is in a state where it is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period for effect reception) provided to the player can occur at the maximum over the period up to the timing tj15. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (period of timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) is ended triggered by this. The effect control to operate the specific movable decorative body is performed. If the player's operation (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception), effect control is performed to operate a specific movable decorative body after timing tj15. You may make it not, and you may make it not perform presentation control itself which operates a specific movable decoration body.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the effect by the player is accepted at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, originally, the movable body drive processing is executed based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, and the movable effect for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the demonstration operation is performed, and the channel An effect sound according to the movable effect is assigned to 08, 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, at timing tj11, a plurality of movable decorative bodies move due to some external force (operate not based on the rendering pattern), and the specific movable decorative body can perform rendering operation more than timing tj13. It is assumed that the movable body abnormality is detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 271 (b) and later-described FIG. 272 (b), the dotted range indicates the period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred is executed. In the relation to the restoration processing, even if the player's operation is accepted at time tj 14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 The movable body abnormality is generated for the frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side Each situation is assumed to occur.

  More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 271, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side The processing modes are different between D, E and F. For example, with respect to the movable ornaments A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable ornaments are disposed in a relatively narrow space, and simultaneous operation may cause interference due to contact with each other. Thus, after the timing tj12, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other's operation, including the relationship with the above, restoration processing is simultaneously performed at timing tj12 so that rapid abnormal restoration of each movable decorative body is enabled.

  In such a configuration, restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed over a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, while the door frame 3 side is In the frame-side movable decorative members D, E, F provided in the above, their restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from the timing tj12 to the timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) for giving the operation opportunity to the player is ended. It is assumed that neither restoration processing of A, B, C, nor restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side is ended. Therefore, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, it corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, and the above operation is effective Even when the effect is received at any timing within the period (the effective period of the effect reception), processing is performed so as not to perform the effect operation triggered by the effect when the effect is received.

  That is, in this case, if the effect reception is generated within the period when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being performed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body can not be made to produce operation with this as a trigger. Even if the effect reception is generated after the restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is finished, the movement between the other movable ornaments on the other side is still in the process of executing the restoration processing. There is a fear of interference. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, in the case where the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any one within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing, the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body that has generated an abnormality perform the movable effect It will only be emitted in the light emission mode when being used. The point is that, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, the restoration processing of all of them is completed (all the restoration processing is successfully completed), The execution of the rendering operation is permitted only when the timing at which the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed has come.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and Depending on at which timing within the operation effective period (effective period of effect acceptance) the effect is accepted, it is processed to change whether or not the effect operation triggered by the effect is performed when the effect is accepted. It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform rendering operation after the restoration process ends (success in the restoration process). However, there is no concern that other movable decorative bodies A to C, D and F may interfere with them even if they are in the process of restoration. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted in any of the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) Even in the case of being displayed, a rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, and a display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed for the channel. In the light emission mode when the various effects are performed, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which is reproduced by being assigned the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the is performed are performed and the abnormality is generated It will be emitted.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, an operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated to straddle the timing at which the restoration processing is ended. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period before the end of the restoration process within the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, and thus the specific movable decoration is The effect operation of the body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body which has generated an abnormality will only be emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period after the end of the restoration process (success in the restoration process) of the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are subjected to the restoration process Because there is no concern that interferes with them even if it is under execution, the usual production control (moveable body, display production, performance sound, light emission) including the rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration processing is ended (success in the restoration processing). . Therefore, therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is received within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is selected, the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display rendering when the movable rendering is performed is performed in the game board side rendering display device 1600, and the movable rendering is performed on the channel. The effect sound of the time (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decoration which has generated an abnormality are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed It will stay in

  Here, the notification process according to the example shown in FIG. 271 will be described. In this example, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side in notification of the notification sound according to the movable body abnormality , C, and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side, and the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there are any.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously in the panel-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation can not normally occur while proper gaming is progressing, and can not occur as a result of cheating, so the hall side is for operation check and repair of the feature It is likely to be in a special situation such as hand-tapping all movable ornaments, etc. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification processing itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is detected that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively. At timing tj12, as described above, the restoration processing on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration processing on the frame side movable decoration side are started simultaneously with those restoration processing, while the notification sound output is the frame side movable Assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decoration D, E, F side to the channel, and assign the abnormal alarm sound common to the panel side corresponding to the panel side movable decorative A, B, C to the channel It is made to keep in mind to output.

  That is, the time during which the abnormal alarm sound according to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative object to be notified is eliminated or the predetermined predetermined after the abnormal alarm sound is output It is set as a time until time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the panel-side movable decorative members A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative members D, E and F, the panel-side movable decorative member A, which has a longer time to complete the restoration process By assigning only the common panel-side abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the “common panel-side abnormal alarm sound corresponding to the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C side” It becomes possible to end restoration processing of the frame side movable decorative objects D, E, F while being reproduced, “common notification on the panel side corresponding to the panel side movable decorative objects A, B, C side After the output of the sound is finished, it is avoided that the request for the output of the “common error notification sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F side” is obtained. The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, while the restoration processing is being performed on the panel-side movable decorative members A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative members D, E and F, the panel-side movable decorative member A, During the period up to the timing tj 18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are finished, “common abnormal alarm sound on the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative objects A, B and C side” is assigned to the channel and reproduced As a result, the "common abnormal alarm sound on the frame side corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F side" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above-mentioned "information notification by sound" is performed utilizing the difference in property from the notification sound described above. In the aspect different from the above, the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exhibited, and different display is performed depending on which of the individually divided groups belongs to the movable decorative body. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, The "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Further, similarly to this, for example, assuming that the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed. The “informing by display” is maintained as it is, and the “informing by display” is ended at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is finished. Therefore, even if the restoration process of a specific movable decoration ends first, depending on the execution situation concerning the restoration process of the movable decoration that is grouped with the specific movable decoration, it may be more effective than the specific movable decoration. It may happen that "notification by display" is ended first according to the movable decorative body for which the restoration processing is ended later.

  According to the example of FIG. 271, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared as the notification sounds corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Then, when a movable body abnormality simultaneously occurs in a plurality of movable decorative objects corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced, but for the restoration process, the reproduction state Not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in, the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Furthermore, as the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when the plurality of movable decorative bodies are in the abnormal state, the movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to the predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body which does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration processing applied to these movable decorative bodies is simultaneously executed. This makes it possible to shorten the total time required for the restoration process for the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state as compared with the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to return all the movable ornaments from the abnormal state to the normal state while one specific notification sound of the notification sound is being reproduced, and the second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a panel-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is simultaneously performed. It is not limited to. The point is that a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated by two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and the like) which can operate without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. For a plurality of movable decorative bodies (D to F) that are classified into the frame side and that restoration processing can be performed independently for each of the groups, and at least one of them (the frame side in the above example) If it is possible to restore all of them simultaneously by selecting them as movable ornaments that can be operated without being influenced by the operation situation among them, refer to FIG. 271 and FIG. 272. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the effects described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be performed periodically at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. Further, the method of detecting the movable body abnormality is not limited to the position detection of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the rendering operation at the timing when the player performs an operation, but the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation at the specific timing determined by the rendering pattern. It may be made to

  In addition, in the notification according to the movable body abnormality, the abnormal alarm sound is allocated to the channel for a predetermined time and reproduced, but during this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific value (0) A process of decreasing may be performed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, movable body abnormalities occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. Although the situation has been described as being assumed, the symbol variation may not necessarily be performed. That is, during the execution period of the big hit game, or when the special symbol game is waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen, etc.), the board side movable decorative body A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative body D, Even when the movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, respectively, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on the predetermined order in which all of the board-side movable decorative objects A, B and C provided on the game board 5 side And However, in the case where a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even when operating simultaneously are included in the panel-side movable decorative body, the panel-side movable decorative body is based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be simultaneously performed only on some movable decorative objects that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the timing at which it is determined whether a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, and the movable-body abnormality in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E and F Although it was assumed that the timing at which the determination of occurrence occurred is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 272, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F Even when the determination is made, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is ended at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative members A, B, C ends. As long as the relationship is satisfied, after the output of "the panel side common alarm sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative members A, B, C side" is finished, "frame side movable decorative members D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request for the corresponding frame side common alarm sound is required.

  Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 271, after it is determined that movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, movable body abnormality occurs in the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, C The processing structure may be determined to determine that the processing has been completed. However, in this case, when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F And wait until it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C, and then corresponds to the panel-side movable decorative members A, B, C side It is desirable to perform restoration processing of the panel-side movable decorative objects A, B, C and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F while the notification processing is performed. In addition, as a result of waiting for determination processing whether movable body abnormality has occurred on the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C, movable body abnormality does not occur on the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B and C In this case, the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative objects D, E, F is performed.

[Automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic double-stroke function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, an operation effect may be performed a plurality of times according to each operation by prompting a plurality of operations (such as continuously hitting the operation button 410) on predetermined operation means. However, in recent years, in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of such a plurality of operations (such as a continuous hit) is given, the predetermined operation unit is not required to operate the predetermined operation unit (operation button 410) a plurality of times. The automatic multiple operation function (Auto) allows the effect mode to appear when the operation is performed multiple times simply by performing the operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) to maintain the operation state for a relatively long time It is becoming more and more equipped with a continuous hitting function.

  And, in such an automatic multiple operation function (automatic continuous hitting function), when an operation is performed in a long mode such as a so-called long press, a single-shot operation (one operation in a short time) within a relatively short time The player who is not good at multiple operations to make the player remember the feeling (such as feeling that a fast double shot is being performed) as if the player is repeatedly playing) It can be said that it is important in suppressing the decline in the game interest of the player etc.) and promoting the use of the function by various players. However, as in the case of the player, if the effect change (for example, the operation sound etc.) is made to occur simply when the effect acceptance is made each time a relatively short time elapses while in the operation state, the same as a player Even if it is intended to perform an operation by a single-shot push, the effect reception is made multiple times because the short operation time (the time when the operation state is slightly maintained by a single-shot push) is slightly lengthened or shortened. It may occur (a plurality of operation sounds are generated), or the effect reception may occur only once (one operation sound may be generated), and the number of effect receptions for one single operation may be stable. There is a concern that the game interest will be reduced by the sense of incongruity caused by not doing so.

  In this respect, in the case of the conventional automatic continuous hitting function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case where an operation by a single press is performed, a change in presentation accompanying reception of an effect (for example, operation sound Etc.) only once. Then, after the first effect change (for example, operation sound etc.) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, the effect change (operation sound) is repeatedly generated when the effect reception is made each time a predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since a temporal margin can be provided between the generation of the first effect reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second effect reception (operation sound), single-shot Whether the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time only by performing the operation by a so-called long press while avoiding the occurrence of discomfort due to the number of effects being received being unstable when the operation by is performed. It will be possible to realize the effect that makes it look like.

  However, from the player's side, there is a time margin between the first production reception (operation sound) and the second production reception (operation sound). The number of generations of effect reception (operation sound) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such useless time, as it is useless for operation effects (a pseudo-continuous hit when a so-called long press operation is performed There is a concern that the game's interest in entertainment may decline due to the slowness of the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in the single-shot operation mode, the operation on the operation means is long. As in the case of being performed in the mode of operation (long press etc.), it is possible to intermittently output the specific sound accompanying the operation to the operation means. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, a feeling as if a single-shot operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed in a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. It is possible to make the player remember (such as feeling as if a fast hit is being performed). In this way, all the operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the reactivity of the effect when the single-shot operation is performed (whether it is one effect change or multiple effect changes). Even if there is, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of presentation change (for example, operation sound etc.) per unit time.

  FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-operation function (automatic consecutive hitting function). Here, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is adopted as the operation means. Further, also in the other drawings including FIG. 273, the white specific sound output in the drawing indicates the specific sound generated based on the effect reception according to the operation on the button 410, The black specified sound output indicates a specific sound generated following the white specific sound output in the drawing while no effect reception is generated when the operation button 410 is not operated. It is. It is desirable that the volume and timbre of these specific sounds be different from each other and be the same.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), an aspect (single-shot operation) in which the operation state is maintained only for a short time at timing tx11 within a predetermined valid period in which an operation opportunity of plural operations Assumes that one operation has been performed. Therefore, at timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the same sound output as the operation to the operation button 410 is performed, Processing for starting output of a display (operation display pattern) accompanying the operation is performed.

  And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, “Picon”) accompanying the operation to the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx 11, the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 Even if a situation where no operation is performed (period of timing tx12 to tx13 in the figure), in this situation, the specific sound (for example, "picone") accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is interrupted Can be output as

  For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if the operation by the player is not detected at all until the grace time TY1 elapses, every time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, “picone By outputting “), it is possible to intermittently output a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), five times (N times) from the start of the grace time TY1 to the lapse thereof. It is set to have a length of time that can output a specific sound (for example, "picone") for a minute. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as a continuous hit) is given, a specific sound (sound according to effect reception) accompanying the operation At least five (N) times (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection, and thereafter four times each time the automation time TY2 elapses even when there is no operation (N- It will be outputted intermittently over the total number of times with a specific sound).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 is ended during the output of the specific sound (for example, "picone") (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the middle of the fifth specific sound is output) A process (output interruption process, etc.) for turning off a specific sound being output (for example, "pico") at timing tx13 even when timing tx13) when time TY1 is ended comes And the specific sound that has been output so far (even in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the first to fourth specific sounds) after the timing tx 13 arrives. The output (sound wave form) in the same manner is made to appear. That is, when the specific sound accompanying the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes vague whether the operation has been accepted or not accepted several times, and eventually the operation feeling as if it were operated several times There is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to remember (in the non-operation state, it may be considered to be only a specific sound generated in a pseudo manner), but according to such a configuration, such concern It will be expected to be resolved suitably.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the predetermined effective period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the elapse of the grace period, the situation where the new operation can not be accepted, Until the grace time TY1 is ended, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output each time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined effective period ends, it is avoided that the number of effect receptions is not stabilized when the operation by the single-shot push is performed. Besides, the player can be made to remember the feeling as if the operation was performed within the period beyond the predetermined effective period, and it is expected to improve the fun of the game. In this sense, a display (for example, display of the remaining time in which the valid period is continued) is made to allow the player to recognize whether the predetermined valid period is in the continued state or in the ended state. It is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (for 1 to 4 times) under the condition that it is possible to recognize that it is in the terminated state.

  As for “specific sound output accompanying operation” in the figure, rather than a signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, the volume waveform of the specific sound that is output each time the automation time TY 2 elapses It is a conceptual view of the waveforms removed. As apparent from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the output of the specific sound of the previous output to end to the end, and the specific sound of the previous output is generated. On the other hand, sound data of a new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if a rapid continuous hitting operation is being performed. It is expected that the player can learn the sense of

  Incidentally, as a specific sound reproduction type, in addition to a mode in which 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” shown in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY 2 elapses, It may be loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) which is repeatedly reproduced each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, a plurality of specific sounds that are continuously and intermittently output may be reproduced as one sound data. In the mode of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, all the specific sounds do not necessarily have to be output as the same single sound, but are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. It may be.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), after displaying the operation display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 at timing tx 11, the operation button 410 is also displayed. Even if the player's hand has left the player and no operation has been performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display content of the operation display pattern is advanced multiple times in that situation It is something that can be done.

  For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state), as described above. It is. In this respect, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order over the time from the timing tx11 to the time-up of the set grace time TY1. Can be made to advance the display contents of the operation display pattern.

  The contents of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, as an aspect shown in FIG. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 274, “display scene 1” is a moving image depicting how an ally character holds a sword and is about to remove it, and “display scene 2” is an ally. "Display scene 3" is a moving image depicting how a ally character is fighting with an enemy character with a sword in the first mode. , “Display scene 4” is a moving image depicting a state in which the ally character is colliding with the enemy character in the second mode with a sword, and “display scene 5” is a ally character that is the third character It is a moving picture depicting a situation in which a sword is used to meet each other.

  After displaying the operation display pattern according to the operation on the operation button 410 at timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is output intermittently, and the friend character is an enemy. It is possible to make the player remember the feeling as if the effect contents to fight the character are being advanced according to a plurality of operations. The display scenes 1 to 5 may not necessarily be moving images, and may be still images. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display pattern at the time of operation, various effect displays (hold display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of those effect displays, an image may be included that changes the effect (such as a color change) each time an effect reception is generated by an operation by the player, but it is recognized whether or not the effect reception is generated. In order to make it difficult to do so, it is important to be displayed as an image smaller than the operation display pattern.

  Here, in the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), between the time when the grace time TY1 is started and the time when this grace time elapses. It is set to have a time length that can sequentially display at least five (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents). As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single-shot operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given, at least 5 (M pieces of display content of the operation display pattern ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and thereafter four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 sequentially displayed (progressed) even in a state without operation The display content will be developed over the total number of

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace time TY1 is ended during output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the timing t14 when the grace time TY1 is ended during output of the display scene 5) When it comes, unlike the case of the specific sound, the operation display pattern is ended by interrupting in the form of being crushed at that point without displaying the display scene 5 to the end. That is, the operation display pattern having progressiveity in the presentation content is different from the case of the specific sound having no progressionality, and the display content is displayed if the operation is continued by interrupting halfway in the display scene. It gives the player the impression that it might have been able to make progress, which is expected to encourage further operations by the player. In this sense, with regard to the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed until the grace time TY1 is started and then ended. It is more desirable to set it to 促 す to encourage further operations by the player. In order to prompt a further operation by the player, only a part of the display scenes of all the display scenes 1 to 5 is displayed from the start of the grace period TY1 to the end thereof. Is more desirable.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effective period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the elapse of the grace period TY1, and the situation where the new operation can not be accepted, the predetermined effective At the end of the period (in the state where the remaining time of the grace time TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted to display the result as the operation display pattern. This will be described later.

  The display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and developed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation after the display scene 1 is displayed, but the schedule to be displayed sequentially May be preset according to the time from the output of the specific sound to the re-output (automation time TY2), or may be set independently of the time (automation time TY2) It may be one. In this sense, display changes such as switching to another display or generation of a new display in the contents of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. There is a display change due to the moving picture depiction to the state where the sword is removed, and in the display scene 3 there is a display change due to “effect generation when the ally character fights against the enemy character”. It is more desirable. If a display scene having such a display change is used, it can be thought as if the display change in each display scene was caused by the effect reception, so the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be eliminated even if the Further, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be displayed repeatedly.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), the operation state of the operation button 410 is relatively long at the timing tx21 within the predetermined effective period in which the operation opportunity of the plural operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. It is assumed that the operation in the long mode to be maintained by is performed. Therefore, at timing tx 21 as well as at timing tx 11, detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), operation on the operation button 410 is performed. The process of starting the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display (the operation display pattern) accompanying the same operation is performed.

  Also, in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from timing tx21 to timing tx22 is maintained, as in the case of the above non-operation period (period of timing tx12 to tx13), it is specified each time the automation time TY2 elapses. A sound (for example, "picone") may be output and may be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) may be sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. The display contents of the hour display pattern can be developed in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 273 (a).

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the operation maintaining period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) or not It periodically determines (whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) is ended (for example, falling edge detection in the detection signal)). Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and while periodical monitoring is being performed, "every time the automation time TY2 elapses A process of outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) and “a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order” are performed. In other words, in the operation maintenance period (period to timing tx21 to tx22), “it is determined whether or not the state of the operation detection is every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and it is determined that the state is the operation detection state. Processing such as outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”), or “determining whether or not the operation detection state is in effect each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and in the state of the operation detection state The processing such as advancing the display contents based on the determination is not performed, and "periodically monitor (determine) whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)" , “A process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) every time the automation time TY 2 elapses”, and “a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order Process "and that the next output is to be carried out respectively. It should be noted that “periodically monitor (determine whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state))” is executed as processing that is executed multiple times while the automation time TY2 elapses. It is

  Then, after that, as a result of “periodically monitoring (determining whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state))”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When timing tx22 at which it is determined that the operation state has been terminated comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment first determines a predetermined time length based on the result of the determination. Set the grace time TY1 you have. However, in this case, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) every time the automation time TY 2 elapses”, and “a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order. The process of sequentially outputting “is performed continuously from the time tx22 when the operation state is ended to the time tx23 until the grace period TY1 is ended. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx 21 to x 22), the player's hand is removed from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx 22 to x 23). It is possible to intermittently output a specific sound in one processing mode that is re-output every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) across the transition timing. In addition, it is possible to continuously output the operation display pattern in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  According to such a configuration, the output mode of the specific sound at the single-shot operation shown in FIG. 273A and the output mode of the specific sound at the long press operation shown in FIG. 273B are respectively generated. The processing aspect (program) concerning the output of a specific sound can be made common among them. Further, similarly to this, the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of single-shot operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of long press operation shown in FIG. In creating them, it becomes possible to share the processing aspect (program) related to the output of the operation display pattern among them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 273 (a), at timing tx12, as a result of “periodically monitoring (determining whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state))”. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has been ended. In addition, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx 11 to x 12), the player's hand is removed from the operation button 410 and no action is performed (tx 12 to x 13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) across the timing, a specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is re-output every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and a plurality of display scenes The operation display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  Thereby, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as in the case where the operation is performed in a so-called long press mode. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently output. That is, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated, the single push (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single push, long press). It is possible to make the player remember a feeling as if it is being performed (a feeling as if a quick double hit is being performed, etc.). In this way, while achieving stabilization of the responsiveness of the effect when the operation by the single-shot push is performed (whether it is one change in the production or the change in multiple effects), any operation mode (single-shot push, Even if the long press is adopted, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (specific sound) accompanying the operation per unit time.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 273, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-push mode (FIG. 273 (a)) and in the so-called long press mode (FIG. 273). Although the same effect change is caused by (b), in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), one time of effect reception is made at timing tx11, and the whiteout specification is made accordingly. While only one sound output is made, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), four times of effects are accepted at every passage of automation time TY2 from timing tx11, and white in the figure according to them. The specific sound output of the omission is made four times. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, the effect drawing is performed each time the effect reception is required more than a specific number of times, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is obtained according to the result. When a type of effect for causing the effect result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), since only one effect reception has been generated, a specific effect result is made to appear Things can not be expected much. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the reception of effects is not generated, the reception of specific effects in black in the figure is performed intentionally, so that the reception of effects is generated so much in practice. Even if it is a situation that can not be expected so much that a specific rendering result does not appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a rendering situation as if many rendering receptions are occurring. Even in the case where the player who is not good at (such as the slow hitting speed is slow) operates a single shot, it is possible to preferably suppress that the interest in playing the game decreases.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much effect reception has occurred by checking only one specific sound output once, but it is from the start of the operation to the end of the operation. By checking how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to attach as much of a star as to how much production reception has occurred.

  In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and thereafter, the grace time TY1 is timed up, or By repeatedly displaying the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined effective period ends or the effect condition is satisfied and the specific effect results appear within the predetermined effective period, the ally character is an enemy character and a sword. It is made for the depiction to do the confrontation with the one by one alone appears. Therefore, as a specific effect result, it is desirable to describe how an ally character wins against an enemy character as a result of performing a battle with such a sword, and the specific effect result within a predetermined effective period. It is desirable to display a rendering result at the time of failure in which a state in which an ally character has lost to an enemy character as a result of performing a battle with such a sword is displayed.

  Thus, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode (FIG. 273 (a)) and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the long-press mode (FIG. In any of the cases with 273 (b), the specific sound accompanying the operation is output intermittently for a plurality of times, and the operation display pattern accompanying the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule to progress By doing this, even a player who is not good at multiple operations can be urged to perform operations at ease. However, in practice, in many cases, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in a single-shot mode during the predetermined effective period, and when such continuous hitting operations are performed, 1 It is important to improve the interest of the game by making the player remember the operation feeling that the effect reception has been respectively generated by one operation. However, if the operation feeling for which the effect reception is generated is made to be completely reflected as the effect by one operation once, the player who is good at the multiple operations is more advantageous than the player who is not good at multiple operations. Since there will be a rendering effect as if it exists, it is required to achieve both of the rendering elements (operation feeling, rendering fairness) in such a trade-off relationship.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at first, in order to secure the operation feeling in which the effect reception has been generated by one operation once, as the effect having immediacy for the operation, “the operation was performed Focusing on the fact that “does the sound occur (or change) when operated” is a more important parameter than “does the display occur (or change)?” Every time the operation on 410 is performed in a single-shot mode, a specific sound corresponding to the effect reception is output according to the operation timing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in the single-push mode in the period of timing tx31 to tx32 of the predetermined effective period. I suppose. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, every time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the detection is used as a trigger to output a specific sound (specific sound in the output state) newly output to the previous output specific sound. A new specific sound is output in a form in which sound data is overwritten on a specific channel. As described above, even if the specific sound is intermittently output for a plurality of times even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode, such an output is performed. When an operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, the player is made to output a new specific sound in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is interrupted (stopped) halfway through the operation. It is possible to explicitly indicate that the specific sound is newly output and the effect has been accepted at the timing when the event was performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-press mode or in the case of the long-press operation, the specific sound of the previous output is completely output until the end The automation time TY2 is digested before the time it takes to pass, and the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound of the previous output. That is as described above. However, in this case, while the specific sound is output with an accurate rhythm every fixed time (automation time TY2), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in the single-push mode. If it is detected, the specific sound in the output state is broken off every time the operation timing by the irregular player arrives, and a new specific sound is output. It is possible to preferably make the player remember the operation feeling in which the effect reception is occurring.

  Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), in a predetermined effective period, each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, it is periodically determined whether the operation is continued (operation state). A process of monitoring (determining whether the operation state (operation detection state) has ended) is performed. In this respect, in the period from time tx 31 to time t 32 when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous hitting operations in the single-shot mode, the operation is continued each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. As a result of periodical monitoring as to whether or not it is in the (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has ended, and according to this, it has a predetermined time length. The grace time TY1 is set (not shown).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when operation on the operation button 410 is newly performed until the grace time TY1 is ended (time up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Then, it is configured to return to a state where processing for periodically monitoring whether the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, in the period from timing tx31 to tx32, whenever operation button 410 is in the operating state or in the non-operating state, processing is periodically performed to monitor whether the operating state is in the operating state or not. A state transition is rapidly performed between the state in which the grace period TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), after six consecutive hitting operations are performed between the timings tx31 and tx32, the user is tired of multiple consecutive hitting operations, and from then on to the repeated operations. It is assumed that the required time has become significantly longer. If the player is not good at such multiple operations, the player will not be able to perform multiple consecutive strike operations from timing tx 32 onwards, so the number of times for effect reception is greater than for players who are good at multiple operations. There is a concern that the game interest will be reduced by being reduced. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 after the operation state is ended. As described above, the output processing is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the delay time TY1 from the end of at least the previous operation state is obtained even when the time required for the repetition operation becomes significantly long after the timing tx32. As long as it is possible to repeat the operation within a shorter period of time, the player can be made to remember the feeling as if a rapid continuous hitting operation is being performed, enabling the specific sound accompanying the operation to be output intermittently and continuously. It will be.

  For example, if it is determined at timing tx33 that the continuation of the operation state has ended as a result of periodical monitoring as to whether or not the operation state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination A grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, although it will be a situation where the time required for the repeat operation will be significantly longer, a specific sound will be output each time the automation time TY2 elapses while the player is not performing the operation. As a result of the processing to be performed, the specific sound accompanying the operation is output intermittently and continuously. However, these specific sounds are output as specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) shown in black in the figure under the situation where the effect reception is not generated.

  In this respect, the specific sound with black outlines (7th to 9th specific sounds) can be generated only until the grace period TY1 from the end of the previous operation state has elapsed. In the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), for the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (do not time up) based on the operation. Along with that, at timing tx34, a white specific sound (10th specific sound) is output in the figure accompanied by the generation reception being made in a form that breaks the specific sound that was in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to the state where processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

  However, such an operation state is also terminated when the timing tx 35 comes, and it is determined as a result of the monitoring as described above, and based on the determination, the grace period TY 1 having a predetermined time length is It will be set again. Then, when the automation time TY2 elapses while the operation by the player is not being performed, the specific sound in the drawing (the 11th to the 14th specific sounds) is again output each time the automation time TY2 elapses, When the player's operation is finally performed at timing tx36 before time TY1 is timed up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is broken (suspended) In the form, a white specific sound (15th specific sound) will be output.

  Thus, even after time tx32, even if the time required for the repeat operation is significantly increased, the repeat operation is performed within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 at least after the end of the previous operation state. As long as it can be performed, the specific sound shown in white in the figure at the timing when the operation is performed by the player and the specific sound shown in black regularly in the situation where the operation by the player is not performed Is output, so that the player can be made to remember the feeling as if a fast continuous hitting operation is being performed as the specific sound accompanying the operation can be outputted intermittently and continuously. Therefore, according to the aspect concerning the output of such a specific sound, it is possible to secure the operation feeling in which the effect reception is generated by one operation once and, of course, by the player who is not good at multiple operations. Even if there is a specific sound output with black in the figure in the non-operation state, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output intermittently and continuously, so there is a trade-off relationship between the presentation elements (operation And fairness in the presentation) is expected to be achieved.

  However, even in the case where the specific sound is output in such a mode, a plurality of times are displayed in the operation display pattern which plays the role of notifying the rendering result based on the operation within the predetermined effective period. If the aspect depending on the progress of the display content is largely different between the player who is good at the operation and the player who is not good at multiple operations, it will eventually become more than the player who is not good at multiple operations. It may be a stage effect as if a player who is good at multiple operations is advantageous, and there is a concern that the amusement interest may decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the operation display pattern, the delay time TY1 is up, instead of gradually advancing the display contents in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, display contents can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repetitive operation is significantly prolonged after the timing tx32 of the predetermined effective period. Although there is one, while the set grace time TY1 is up, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, and the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined validity period does not come.

  When the operation is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 275 (a), the display of the operation display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at timing tx31. From then on, display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 274 as the operation display pattern are determined in advance as the operation display pattern regardless of the operating conditions while the speed of the continuous hitting operation is largely changed as described above. It appears only as it is sequentially displayed and progressed according to the schedule, and this makes it appear that the presentation fairness between a player who is not good at multiple operations and a player who is good at multiple operations is maintained. Will be able to

  However, even if the manner in which the display content as the operation display pattern is advanced is the same, the number of times that the effect reception according to the operation is actually occurring is a multiple operation with the player who is not good at multiple operations It is inevitable that they will differ from the players who are good at. Therefore, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, the effect drawing is performed each time the effect reception is required more than a specific number of times, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is obtained according to the result. When a type of effect for causing the effect result to appear is performed, the player who is good at multiple operations is more likely to cause the specific effect result to appear, which makes it possible to perform the operation multiple times. Meaning will be maintained. That is, while maintaining such meaning of effect, in terms of effects such as sound and display, the fairness of effect between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest of a player who is not good in multiple operations by lowering the appearance of being played.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is accepted when performing the operation by the long press, the aspect depending on the progress of the operation display pattern From the same, it is expected that the occurrence of a situation in which the button deterioration is prematurely accelerated by performing the repeated strike operation too early can be avoided.

  Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is not in time until the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, a timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends and ends is reached within a predetermined effective period, and from the timing tx31 at the timing tx37 (specific end timing) Dynamic display output (processing of sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that time.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, with regard to the output of the specific sound (for example, "picone"), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is ended in the output state comes. However, processing (such as processing for interrupting output or processing to be interrupted by overwriting with another sound) that turns off a specific sound that is in the output state at the timing tx37 (for example, “Pico”) As described above, the output (sound waveform) in the same manner as the specific sound that has been output until then does not occur, even after the timing tx 37 arrives. Therefore, with regard to the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx 37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends is reached, the last specific sound (10th specific sound in the figure) is If the operation to the operation button 410 is performed before the sound is muted, the player can remember the feeling as if the rapid continuous hitting operation is being performed as the specific sound accompanying the operation can be outputted intermittently and continuously. It is possible to make it happen.

  In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), before the black specific sound (tenth specific sound) shown in the figure output across the timing tx 37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the white specific sound is generated twice in the figure in the form of interrupting the tenth specific sound output, the specific sound accompanying the black is intermittently output again in the figure, so that the specific sound associated with the operation is generated. It can be seen that the output is continuously and intermittently. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), while the specific sound is thus output intermittently and continuously, in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily ended at timing tx 37. . After that, it is clear that the progress of the display content is re-started from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx 38 at which the white specific sound in the drawing is output again.

  In FIG. 276, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic multiple-operation function (automatic double-stroke function) described in FIGS. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect which appears when operation is performed within the predetermined effective period (timing tx41-tx48), when a specific effect pattern which generates H is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 276, now, at timing tx41, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given occurs, and at timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period, the player Assuming that the operation is started, also in this example of presentation, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display (operation display pattern) accompanying the same operation It will do processing to make it start.

  However, in this production example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, the specific sound output shown in white in the drawing is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. It is possible to execute the process to output.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound output of the black outline in the figure is generated even under the condition that the operation to the operation button 410 is not performed and the effect reception is not generated. In this embodiment, it is difficult to distinguish between the specific sound output in black in the figure and the specific sound output in white in the figure generated at the timing when the effect reception occurs (in this example, the same mode It is supposed to be output in). Further, as described above, the operation display pattern displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that the display contents are advanced according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation in a long press mode or a plurality of operations is performed within a predetermined effective period, it is recognized how much effect reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that it is in a difficult situation. Therefore, in this effect example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, the specific sound output of white in the figure is generated, and the special sound different from the specific sound has a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing processing of outputting at 50%, etc., it is possible to predict to some extent how much effect reception has occurred through the output situation of such special sounds.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 276, when there is a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) from the start of the predetermined effective period, two consecutive hit operations at timings tx42 and tx43 and timing tx44 As a result of the long press operation being performed, a total of nine production receptions are generated, and the white specified sound output corresponding to these is generated continuously for nine times, etc. (in the drawing, 1 to 9) (Whiteout specific sound), the number of occurrences of effect reception per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx 45 to tx 48) after the start of the predetermined effective period, it takes a long time that the operation in the mode of single-shot operation can not be regarded as a continuous hit. , Twice by tx 47, and the effect sound output for two times corresponding to these is generated twice for the specific sound output of the white space (time in the figure etc. , The eleventh specific sound), the number of occurrences of effect reception per unit time is relatively small.

  However, when the output condition of the specific sound and the output condition of the operation display pattern are checked, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period is started by performing the above-described specific sound output of the blackout. It is continuously output in any of the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined effective period is started. Since the display scene is merely switched in accordance with a predetermined schedule in any of the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), Is it a situation where the number of times that the production receptionist occurs a lot per unit time only by checking the output situation? Whether there is in the stomach situation it can be seen that is hard to determine.

  In this respect, when the output status of the special sound output with a predetermined probability is checked when the white specific sound output occurs in the figure, a relatively early period (timing) after the start of the predetermined valid period Such special sounds are generated in tx41 to tx45) because the number of occurrences per unit time is greater than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started. It becomes possible to predict to some extent how much the production reception has occurred through the output situation of. Also, according to such an output mode of the special sound, it can be concealed to a certain extent which of the white specific sound output in the drawing and the black specific sound output is generated. As a result, it is expected that this will be suitably maintained also for the game interest of a player who is not good at multiple operations. In this sense, although the special sound may occur when the specific sound output occurs, it is output based on that the output condition other than the generation of the specific sound output is satisfied. For example, even if the specific sound output is generated, it is required to output the special sound so as not to be generated.

  Further, the predetermined probability as to whether or not the special sound is generated when the effect reception is generated may be changed according to the number of effect receptions generated within the predetermined effective period, or the like. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the white specific sound output in the drawing and the black specific sound output in the drawing is occurring.

  Also, with regard to special sounds, in view of the fact that the output frequency is lower than that of the specific sound, it has a time from the output of the specific sound until it is muted, and a time value longer than the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as one. In this example, the time value is set to be twice the "automation time TY2". Further, when outputting a new special sound when the previous special sound is being output, it is desirable that the previous special sound be interrupted (interrupted) to output a new special sound.

  However, in such a pachinko machine 1, since the same effects as in the case where the operation is performed multiple times can be enjoyed only by performing the operation by the long press, the number of players who perform the operation multiple times decreases. There is a concern that the significance as an effect requiring multiple operations may be lost. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, the operation by the player is long-pressed in a period after the operation by the player is started at least at timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). In a state which is performed as a mode of single operation between a state which is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and a state which is performed as a mode of single operation (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48) The display of a specific image (specific display) is permitted only when the specific display condition is satisfied.

  That is, in this case, in order to confirm the specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a single-shot operation mode, not at least a long press operation. Therefore, a plurality of automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple operation) functions are not used It becomes possible to give meaning in presentation to performing a round operation (such as a continuous hit), and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, in this presentation example, in order to confirm the specific image, it is not only the condition that the operation is performed as the one-shot operation mode, but the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself is increased, the operation (the continuous hitting etc.) is performed multiple times without using the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple operation) function whenever the predetermined effective period occurs. Even if you try to do), it will seem as if you are challenged to display a specific image with high difficulty of appearance, and you can operate multiple times without using automatic multiple strike (automatic multiple operation) function It will be expected to promote understanding of the surrounding people.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 276, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the time of the “automation time TY2”) elapses without generation of a new effect reception from the timing when the previous effect reception has occurred. The display of a specific image within a predetermined effective period as the above “specific display condition” that the effect hit is obtained in the predetermined effect drawing performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed (Specific indication) is supposed to appear. In this respect, in the predetermined effect lottery, when the jackpot has won the jackpot (or, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period can be a successful display can appear (high hit probability expected When it is in the production situation), the production hit is obtained with a probability of 70%, but when the big hit judgment is a big hit in the big hit (or the operation within a predetermined effective period No matter how much the game is performed, it is possible to obtain a production hit only with a probability of 30% in the case of a production situation where a success display can not be made to appear (a production situation where the big hit expectation is low). Therefore, when the display (specific display) of the specific image appears within the predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation for the jackpot symbol to appear is high, and the game interest can be suitably maintained. In addition, as said "specific display conditions", it is not restricted to this, The specific non-operation time (here, "automation time TY2", without generation | occurrence | production of a new production reception occurring from the timing which the previous production reception produced | generated) Only twice that of “a time that is twice as long as it has been reached” and “a performance hit has been obtained in a predetermined effect drawing” is adopted as the “specific display condition”, and when this is satisfied A display of a specific image (specific display) may be made to appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

  In addition to the type described above as the mode of the predetermined effect lottery, for example, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period is in the effect situation (effect situation where the big hit expectation is low) that can be made to appear a success display Sometimes, a chance of getting a hit per 0% probability (or do not perform the drawing lottery itself), but the situation where the success display can not be made to appear regardless of how much the operation is performed within the predetermined effective period. When it is in (representation situation where the jackpot expectation is low), it may be an aspect in which a performance hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, since it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Is made recognizable within a predetermined effective period. In this case, it is desirable to use, as the specific display, the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined validity period ends without the success display appearing.

  Further, in this example of the effect, as shown in FIG. 276, when a new effect reception occurs while the display (specific display) of a specific image is being performed (timing tx 46), the specification is made at that time The display is made to be non-display, and the output is continued on condition that the state where the operation by the player is not performed (the state where a new effect reception is not generated) is maintained. There is.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 276, in order to make a specific effect result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48), it is at least found that the effect reception more than a specific number of times occurs The display condition 3 is satisfied at timing tx 47 at which the 11th production reception (the 11th specific sound output) is generated, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off (( The process of causing the success display to appear as the operation display pattern in the form of interruption) is performed. The contents of this success display are, for example, the one for destroying the enemy character which has been in a battle with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5 and the effect contents of the parts (display scenes 3 to 5) repeated in the operation display pattern It is desirable to be related. In addition, when the success indication appears, it is desirable that it is suggested that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit in the big hit judgment is high.

  In addition, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx 47 at which the 11th production reception (the 11th specific sound output in white) occurs, the predetermined effective period is ended at that time, and the new production reception is It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at timings later than timing tx 47, no white specific sound or special sound is generated newly in the drawing, or no specific display appears.

  FIG. 277 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 276, but the operation in the mode of the one-shot operation by the player is at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when it takes a long time which can not be said and is repeated.

  As shown in FIG. 277, even if the operation in the single-shot operation mode by the player is repeated over a long time, as long as the operations are repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx 52 when the operation is started within a predetermined effective period (timing tx 51 to tx 56), the specific sound is output intermittently and continuously, and the operation display pattern is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Progress. According to such a presentation mode, even when the operation is performed only four times within the predetermined effective period, it is possible to create a presentation situation as if about 20 continuous hitting operations are being performed. become able to. However, from this point of view, there is a concern that the meaning of performing the continuous hitting operation can not be understood from the person performing the continuous hitting operation seriously, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is “Tx1”, the length of the grace period TY1 is “Tx2”, and a specific effect result (successful display) within the predetermined effective period is displayed. When it is assumed that the number of effect receptions required at least for appearance is “EU”, these numerical values are set so that the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx2] <EU” is established. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeatedly performed at the last moment when the grace time TY 1 elapses and the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, the operation situation is generated by these operations. The number of effect receptions that occur is less than the number (EU) of the effect receptions required at the minimum for the appearance of a specific effect result (success display) within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to prevent the appearance of a specific effect result (success display) when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, the continuous hitting operation is performed seriously It will be expected to maintain the game interest of someone who is suitable. In order to obtain such effects more reliably, the number (EU) of the number of effect receptions required at least for causing a specific effect result (successful display) to appear within a predetermined effective period is: It is strictly required to set the numerical value calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2” as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding it up to an integer.

  In this respect, in this effect example, “Tx1 / Tx2” is calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2”, which is the minimum number of effect acceptance (EU) required to cause a specific effect result (successful display) to appear within a predetermined effective period. Since “11 times” which is twice or more times the integer value when the numerical value is rounded to an integer is set, a failure display is displayed at timing tx 56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, since the failure display appears due to the lack of the number of times of operation, it is determined that the effect can not be recognized whether the jackpot expectation is low or high.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, the display of the specific image is allowed to appear only when it is in the state of being performed as a one-shot operation mode and the specific display condition is satisfied. It is. In this point, in this presentation example, when the above “specific non-operation time” required to display the specific image is “Tx3”, the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx3] <EU” holds In order to set each of these numbers. In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause the specific display to appear each time the user operates within a predetermined effective period, the number of effect receptions that occur within the predetermined effective period is within the predetermined effective period. The number of times (EU) required to receive the minimum effect required to make a specific effect result (successful indication) appear. That is, in this case, an effect selection function of whether to attempt to cause the specific display to appear until the specific display result (success display) ceases to appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. It will be expected to improve the fun of the game, since it will not be possible to make an attempt to make it appear casually over and over again, so that it will be possible to enhance the stage effect when the attempt is made. It will be.

  Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 277, when a timing tx 55a when the predetermined effective period is ended with the success display not appearing, the display scene 4 which was in the display state at that time is cut off ( A process of causing a failure display to appear as an operation display pattern in the form of interruption) is performed. The content of this failure display is, for example, a defeat to an enemy character who has had a battle with a sword in display scenes 3 to 5 and so on, and the effect contents of portions (display scenes 3 to 5) repeated in the operation display pattern It is desirable to be related. In addition, when a failure indication appears, it is desirable that it is suggested that the degree of expectation of winning a big hit is low in the big hit judgment.

  On the other hand, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, the specific sound in the output state when the predetermined effective period ends even if either the success indication or the failure indication appears. Although there is no possibility of being interrupted (interrupted), this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted while the success or failure display is being performed, and then the success or failure display will be displayed. It is set to be a relationship to be hidden.

  In this embodiment, the suspension time TY1 is set after the player's operation state ends, and until the suspension time TY1 elapses, the specific sound output of the black outline in the non-operation state is displayed. Although the process is performed at least four times or more, the number of "specific sound output with blackout" generated in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set to be at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specific sound output of the black outline in the non-operation state is at least twice or more in the non-operation state. As it is generated, it is possible to have a feeling as if the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) is continued even in the non-operation state.

  In this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Thus, a depiction in which the ally character makes a fight with the enemy character with a sword appears. Therefore, a specific display may be performed in which at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2 indicates the jackpot expectation. According to such a configuration, if the user is likely to miss the specific display, the user can not reconfirm the non-operation state until the grace time TY1 elapses. Thus, it is possible to provide the effect of selecting which of the disadvantage of being wasted by that amount and the disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

  Also, in this embodiment, the continuous hitting operation is allowed in such a manner that the effect reception occurs at an interval shorter than the interval (the automation time TY2) at which the effect reception occurs when the operation by the long press is performed. Thus, it is possible to realize a highly flexible operation presentation by the player (see FIG. 275). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous hitting operation is performed, the progressing mode of the display scene in the operation display pattern is made to be the same as when the long pressing operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the attraction not much felt by performing the high speed continuous hitting operation, and it is expected that the excessive operation on the operation button 410 is suppressed and the risk of breakage etc. is reduced. Will be

  In addition, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, when performing effects of a type that requires at least an effect reception required more than a specific number of times, an operation by long press is performed only within the predetermined effective period It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times occurs. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times is generated only when the operation by the long press is performed over a half of the predetermined effective period.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, a time (specific non-operation time) which is twice as long as the "automation time TY2" has elapsed since no new effect reception has occurred from the timing when the previous effect reception occurred. Although the display (specific display) of the specific image is made to appear at the time when it is performed, the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value within a range which is twice or more of "automation time TY2" and which makes grace time TY1 the upper limit value (race time TY1 or less) is used. While in the non-operation state, in the state where the specific sound of the blackout is output in two or more times (as if the continuous hitting operation is being performed in the non-operation state), It is possible to produce an effect as if the display (specific display) of a specific image appeared based on the number of times of simulated operation in the non-operation state (the number of times of output of the specific sound with black outline in the figure) reaches a predetermined value. It is possible.

[A game machine equipped with a plurality of effect operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the game machine has been described in which the dish unit 320 is provided with the effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting the effect image to the player while the player can perform pressing operation. With reference to 278 to 329, a gaming machine which can further enhance the player's operation will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 278 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operating unit 5000. FIG. 279 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operating unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed in the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those described above, and the description will be appropriately omitted.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in a front view. The sword effect operation unit 5000 includes a sword 5010 having a blade 5011, a handle 5012, and a collar 5013 sandwiched between the blade 5011 and the handle 5012, and the blade 5011 of the sword 5010. A sword decorative body 5001 comprising a sheath 5020 that can be

  The sword decorative body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath portion 5020 can be moved in the left-right direction in a front view. In addition, the sword portion 5010 is provided movably in the removal direction and the insertion direction. The sword portion 5010 is normally in the state of an inserted sword in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and in the effect of the removal sword, the sword portion 5011 becomes a removal sword state in which the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player. Then, the sword unit 5010 in the scrapped state can function as an operation unit that receives the setting operation by the player and returns to the sword state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 280, an execution opportunity of the scout effect accompanied by the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (the sword decorative body 5001) will be described. FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of effect patterns in the effect mode in which the scout effect can be executed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the scout preparation transition effect according to the type of fluctuation pattern. It shows and shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of (B) stroke main effects.

  In the effect pattern described here, a pattern in which a scout main effect is performed after execution of a scout preparation transition effect execution, a pattern in which a scout sword main effect is performed without performing a scout preparation transition effect in advance, a scout preparation transition effect is performed in advance Despite this, there is a pattern in which the scribble main effect is not performed, and a pattern in which the scribble preparation transition effect is not performed or the scribble main effect is not performed. Further, the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the scribble main effect is Two patterns, an aura-member-attached form and an aura-member-free form, are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (A), according to the type of fluctuation pattern determined in the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the presence or absence of execution of the scout preparation transition effect is drawn. Here, the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit at the time of big hit, a fluctuation pattern for small hit at the time of small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation at the time of outfall, which results in advantageous results for the player. It is set so that the probability that scout preparation transition production will be performed will become high, so that it is a pattern. Specifically, the scout preparation transition effect is performed with a probability of 50% in the case of the variation pattern for big hit variation, and is performed with a probability of 30% in the case of a variation pattern for small variation, and in the case of a variation pattern for outlying variation It is executed with a probability of 20%. Note that the out-of-out fluctuation time change pattern may change the probability according to the presence or absence of reach production so that the probability that scout preparation transition effect is performed is higher than when the reach production is not performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (B), according to the type of fluctuation pattern and the presence or absence of the scout preparation transition effect, the presence or absence of the scout main effect is drawn. If the scout preparation transition effect is executed even if the type of the variation pattern is the same, the probability that the scout main effect is performed is set higher than the case where the scout preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set such that the probability that the scribble main effect will be executed is higher as the variation pattern is an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the variation pattern has a low degree of preference, it is set that the probability that the scribble main effect will be executed is higher if the scout preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when scout preparation transition effect is executed with the out-of-variation fluctuation pattern, the probability of scribbling main effect being executed is higher than when scout preparation transition effect is not executed with the small hitting fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, the sweepout main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sweepout preparation transition effect.

  In addition, when the scout main effect is executed, the scout preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability that the scout main effect with the aura member is performed is higher as the fluctuation pattern is advantageous for the player. Is set to be Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hitting variation, the sweep main effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member by the sword movement of the sword decoration body)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the extraction operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the extraction effect (extraction preparation transition effect and extraction effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword 5010 (sword 5011) itself capable of accepting the player's operation of the sword, the sword 5010 is deformed by its own component (aura 5030) (FIG. 281) 282) and the aura member 5035 are provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for housing the sword 5010 (the sword 5011), and the sword 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of the integrated decoration (FIGS. 283 and 284).

  FIG. 281 is a state transition diagram for explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself, wherein The state of removal of the sword, (C) shows the state of removal of the second blade. FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 281 (A), the sword decorative body 5001 in the normal state is in the state of an inserted sword in which the blade 5011 is housed in the sheath 5020. As shown in FIG. 281 (B), in the sword decoration body 5001 after the removal operation in the removal preparation preparation effect, only the portion of the Habaraki 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade 5011 is removed from the sheath 5020 and visible to the player It becomes the first best sword state to become. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the scout operation in the scribble main effect is a second scout, in which the sword portion 5011 is further pulled out of the sheath portion 5020 and most of the sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the setting operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided in the blade 5011 is configured to be independently operable independently of the removal operation of the blade 5011. In the case where the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the sword portion 5011 changes from a knapsack state (FIG. 281A) to a first scout state (FIG. 281B). The movable range is operated as much as possible from the closed state (FIG. 282A) to the open state (FIG. 282B) inside the portion 5020 (maximum motion), and the blade 5011 is deformed. For this reason, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 also in the change process in which the blade 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state (FIG. 281C). Although described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided to be positioned below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011 even with the maximum operation, the player can not visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first extraction state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade 5011 as shown in FIG. 282 (A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade 5011, and engages with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, and the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031 and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, the rotational force is converted into rightward linear motion of the rack 5031a and leftward linear motion of the rack 5032a as the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by driving means (not shown), as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions (opened state) where they project outward from the outer shape of the blade 5011 respectively.

  Further, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on a blade shaft 5011b is included below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to make the sword 5001 (the aura member 5030) emit light and decorate.

  Here, with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the state of the knapsack to the state of the first extraction sword, the state changes from the closed state to the open state. In the above example, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first extraction state to the second extraction state, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The aura member 5030 may start its operation (deformation) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set by the time the sword decoration body 5001 in the second scraped state is set to function as the operation means (not limited to the mode of performing the maximum operation, including the mode of stopping the operation halfway It should just be.

  FIG. 283 is a state transition diagram for explaining the extraction operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the case where the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020, (A) a cutting state, (B) a first extraction state, (C) The second state of the sword is shown. FIG. 284 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 284 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 282 and 283 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description will not be repeated.

  As shown in FIGS. 283A to 283C, the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for housing the sword 5010 (blade 5011) is the above-mentioned sword 5010 (blade 5011) While the aura member 5030 provided on itself is movable in the lateral direction, it is movable in the vertical direction. The aura member 5035 is provided to surround the outer periphery of the blade 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the sword portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the knives state Operates in accordance with (1) First sword state (2) Second sword state. This enables the sword 5010 (the sword 5011) to be united with the frame-side member (the aura member 5035) and to be regarded as an integral decorative body.

  As shown in FIG. 284 (A), the aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath 5020. The aura member 5035 is a hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so that the upper end thereof is below the hook 5011 a of the blade 5011 in the completely housed state, and surrounding the aura member 5036; Right and left racks 5036a and 5036b, and right and left pinions 5037a and 5037b meshing with the right and left racks 5036a and 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by driving means (not shown), and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in a front view, and both pinions are also engaged. The rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b are converted into upward linear motion, and as shown in FIG. 284 (B), the surrounding aura member 5036 unites with the blade 5011 and stops at the position where the second scraping state is formed. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although illustration is omitted, the blade 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and it is possible to make the blade 5011 and the aura member 5035 emit light.

  Here, with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the change in state of the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (set state-first cut state-second cut state). Although the example which unites with 5011 was shown, it does not restrict to this. The aura member 5035 may start operation (combination) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state. The final aspect based on the effect pattern set up to the function of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second scraped state until it functions as the operation means It should just be able to become an aura member attachment form of a state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the first sword state from the inserted sword state.

(Example of scribbling effect using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 285 to 290, scribbling effect production using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. In the following, when the scout preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the scribble main effect is not executed (at (X6) and (X7)) The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decorative body 5001 will be described for the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the scribble main effect is executed. FIGS. 285 to 289 are transition diagrams of scribble effect effects. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation effective period according to the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. It starts forming a reach state (FIG. 285 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image that suggests execution of a scout effect (moving of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed. Specifically, after the image of two warriors facing each other and starting to go on the image (Fig. 285 (X2)) is displayed, an image (Fig. 285) in which one samurai holds the handle and holds the sword in the sheath (Fig. 285 (X3) is displayed. Here, the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provides an effect that suggests that the sword decorative body 5001 is movable. During this time, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the state of the inserted sword (FIG. 281 (A)).

  Next, when the scout preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of fluctuation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIGS. 286 (X4) and (X5), the scout preparation transition effect is When it is started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face with the eyes of the warrior holding the sword closed with the above-mentioned image is displayed, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed over time. At this time, by changing the state of the sword decoration 5001 from the state of the sword to the state of the first sword, a preparation preparation transition effect is performed. In addition, if the scout preparation transition effect is performed, the scribbling main effect is easier to be executed thereafter than when it is not performed. Therefore, the scout preparation transition effect can be said to be an expectation degree effect that indicates the expected degree at which the scout main effect is performed by the movement of the sword decorative body 5001. In the scout preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decorative body 5001 in the first scraped state up and down, the player is expected to further change the sword decorative body 5001 to the second scraped state. Good. Note that the vertical movement of the sword decorative body 5001 in the first extraction state is performed to such an extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player in the case of the aura member-attached configuration. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, the sword decorative body 5001 may be kept in the state of the sword and the image shown in FIG. 285 (X3) may be continuously displayed.

  Here, in the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent scout main effect is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of this scout preparation transition effect (FIG. 282 (A ) Is moved as much as possible from the movable range to the open state (FIG. 282 (B)), and the blade 5011 is deformed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5011 in the first scraped state can be viewed by the player from the hand of the blade 5011 to the portion of the Haberaki 5011a, but as described above, the aura member 5030 is the Haberaki 5011a of the blade 5011a. Since it is provided at the lower side, there is no fear that the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even if the aura member 5030 is maximally operated. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state functions as an operation means capable of accepting the player's operation of the sword, and at the same time, the expectation is increased by the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  Then, after the scout preparation transition effect is finished, if the scribbling main effect is not executed by the lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the scout preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Sweat sweats on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 286 (X6)), and the central decorative pattern is left at the center of the screen with the image that the warrior gives up at the timing when the central decorative pattern displayed fluctuating is stopped and displayed And it is stopped and displayed in the stop mode different from the right side decorative design, that is, the release mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 286 (X7)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the first extraction state to the insertion state at the time of FIG. 286 (X6), and maintains the insertion state. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operation means.

  On the other hand, when the scout main effect is executed, after the scout preparation transition effect is finished, an image in which the Ii is cut is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is the second scout. It becomes a state. Here, the form with the aura member with which the aura member 5030 can be visually recognized in the form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 can not be visually recognized. A form without an aura member capable of visually recognizing the non-deformed blade portion 5011 is provided.

  First, with reference to FIG. 287 and FIG. 288, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state has a form without an aura member will be described. When the scout main effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the light is displayed from the eye-magnified image of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 287 (A1)), an image for cutting out the sword held and cutting the other warrior is displayed (FIG. 287 (A2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 287 (A1), and the sword portion 5011 can be viewed from the player.

  Next, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second state of removal and the predetermined period elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by the player to perform the sword operation, that is, the handle 5012 of the sword 5010 where the player jumps out of the sheath 5020 In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting an operation of pushing the blade portion 5011 downward so that the blade portion 5011 fits in the sheath portion 5020, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the scout operation of the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that urges an operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same form as that of the second scout state of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with a message of “Please put the sword!” (FIG. A3). In addition, in order to indicate that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operation effective period, the LED of the internal LED substrate 5011 c is blinked and emitted. In addition, it is preferable that the image in the operation promotion effect is an image related to a series of presences, so that the operation effect image is displayed on the front so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Ii break scene image (FIG. 287 (A2)). (See FIG. 293 (G2) described later).

  Then, when the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation effective period and performs the katana operation to put the sword 5011 in the sheath 5020 and the sword decorative body 5001 is put in the state of the katana, An effect is performed after the operation according to the degree of expectation which results in an advantageous result, and the effect is ended together with a notice of a hit of the symbol type (FIG. 288). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, a cut effect image is displayed in a flashy manner in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 288 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. Stop the other warrior at the same timing and stop with the same stop mode as the left side decoration pattern and the right side decoration pattern at the center of the screen, that is, the big hit mode (here "7") It is displayed (FIG. 288 (C2)). On the other hand, in the case where the symbol type is disjoint, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of the big hit (Fig. 288 (D1)). A stop mode different from the left decoration pattern and the right decoration pattern in the center of the screen with an image that can not be settled on the other party's samurai at the stop display timing, and the stop mode, that is, the disappointing mode (here "6") The display is stopped at (Fig. 288 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 289, a description will be given of the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is in a form with an aura member. When the scout main effect starts, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the eye is displayed from the eye-magnified image of the samurai closed in FIG. 289 (B1)), an image for cutting out the sword held and cutting the other warrior is displayed (FIG. 289 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first extraction state to the second extraction state at the time of FIG. 289 (B1), and the blade 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 (right aura member 5031 and left aura member 5032). Is visible to the player. Here, the blade 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time of the state change from the first state to the second state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, the aura member 5030 changes from the closed state to the open state after only the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player in the second scraping state so that the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It is sufficient that the sword decorative body 5001 be in a configuration with an aura member in the second extraction state before the operation effective period starts. However, since the sword decorative body 5001 is already in the second cutting state in which the player can operate the sword, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that the player may cause an erroneous operation. Therefore, the player can recognize the aura member 5030 while the series of movements from the first extraction state to the second extraction state is performed as in the present example, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes the second extraction state. It is preferable that the operation effective period be started promptly.

  Also, the images in FIGS. 289 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images in FIGS. 287 (A1) and (A2) described above, and the player can see that the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member only by viewing the image. It makes it impossible to judge whether it is not. By actually looking at the sword decoration 5001, the player can grasp whether it is the aura member-attached form or the aura member-free form. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 can be made to pay attention to the sword decorative body 5001 before it functions as the operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means, and enjoy the operation effect without confusion Can. At this time, the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 do not have to be the same as described above, and may be images similar to the extent to which the player can be instructed to look at the sword decoration 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in the warrior image (differences in eye color and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation effective period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form with the aura member as the sword decorative body 5001. It will be displayed (FIG. 289 (B3)). The subsequent effects are the same as in FIG. 288 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. In the case of the aura member-attached mode, the effect image in the above-mentioned FIGS. 288 (C1) and (D1) may be displayed more flashly than in the aura member-free mode.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation effective period in the scout effect in which the scout preparation transition effect and the scout main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 290, when the reach effect is started (time t0), an Ii effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is firstly set from the sword state as a scout preparation transition effect. The state changes to the scraped state (time t1). At this time, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state when the effect pattern in the form with the aura member is set, but the aura member 5030 plays a game in the first extraction state even when the aura member 5030 is in the open state. It is provided so that it can not be seen by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first removal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is further changed to the second removal state, and in the case of changing it, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is a form with an aura member. I can not do it. However, when the scout preparation shift effect is executed, the scribble main effect is executed, and the possibility of becoming a form with an aura member is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced. In addition, even if the scribble main effect is not executed, since the sword movable suggestion effect (FIG. 285 (X3)) is executed by the effect display device 1600 before the start of the scout preparation transition effect, the player can move the sword. As the movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, it is possible to capture a state change (movable) from the sword state of the sword decorative body 5001 to the first extraction state.

  Then, when the scout preparation transition effect is finished, the scout main effect is subsequently started, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first scraped state to the second scraped state (time t2). Thereafter, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the operation effective period is started, and the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means (time t3). When the operation effective period comes, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of the presence effects is performed. Then, when the player's operation is detected during the operation effective period (time tx), an effect is performed after the operation. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 returns from the second state to the sword state by the player's operation of the sword. Then, when the operation valid period set in advance is ended and the reach state is ended (time t4), the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whereby a series of presence effects are ended ((4) Time t5). The operation valid period may end upon detection of an operation by the player, as indicated by a dashed dotted line in the drawing. In addition, when the operation is not detected during the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 is automatically returned from the second extraction state to the knife state at the end of the operation valid period.

  Here, a mode in which the player is in the second scraped state of the sword decorative body 5001 (aura member) during a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second scraped state to when the operation effective period starts A period longer than the operation valid period (time t4 to t3) is secured as a mode confirmation period in which it can be confirmed whether the mode is the additional mode or the light emission mode or the like. That is, even when the operation portion (sword portion 5010) operable by the player becomes the operation position (second cutting state) functioning as the operation means, the operation acceptance is immediately started (the operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. By this, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, and expands the sense of expectation for the subsequent development (for example, the sense of expectation increases in the case of the form with the aura member), or prepares the mind. Since the operation effective period starts as soon as the second cutting state is reached, and it shifts to the operation effect without being able to confirm the mode of the operation means, there is a concern that the interest of the game is lowered. It can be wiped out.

  In addition, the scribbling effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed in a series of presence effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the movable effect (time t0 to t3) as the movable body of the sword decorative body 5001. The effect associated with the operation effect (time t3 to t4) as the operation means is used. This makes it possible to impress the player with a variety of surprises and effects in switching the function of the sword decorative body 5001. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun caused by the uniform effect by the conventional operation means. Can.

  In addition, although the example of the above-mentioned effect demonstrated the case where the aura member 5030 was provided in the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself, and the blade part 5011 deform | transformed by the aura member 5030, the aura member 5035 is a sheath part of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword unit 5010 is provided on the unit 5020 and united with the frame-side member (the aura member 5035) to form an integrated decorative body.

  As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes operation means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the modes of the members (the sword portion 5010 and the aura member 5030) of the same kind as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. doing. And the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 (Kate state, first scraped state, second scraped state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is the game ball to the one starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 280). Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display produces an advantageous result for the player by the change of the aspect of the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the operation means (the sword decorative body 5001). Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In addition, before the sword decorative body 5001 becomes the second scraped state (operation position) operable by the player, the degree of expectation is suggested by changing the state of the sword decorative body 5001 from the inserted sword state to the first scraped state. doing. Further, the appearance of the aura members 5030 and 5035 in the state change from the first extraction state to the second extraction state suggests the degree of expectation. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the appearance of the first extraction state and the aura member) in the process of changing from the insertion state to the second extraction state (operation position). The player has a strong interest in the operating means until the operating means becomes operable. Also, when the state change of the operating means and the indication of the expectation are performed separately, specifically, when the action to the operation position is performed after the suggestion of the expectation is performed in advance, the expectation is high. If it becomes an aspect, there is a concern that the player operates erroneously even though the operating means is not yet at the operable position when the player grasps it, but the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is operated Since the state change to the position and the expectation indication are simultaneously advanced, it is possible to prevent the erroneous operation as described above.

  In the first state of the first sword described above, only the handle 5011a of the blade 5011 is extracted from the sheath 5012 so that the player can not visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A portion of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be visible in a single-stroke state. At this time, the removal amount in the first removal state is set to be less than the maximum removal amount in the second removal state (operation position). Here, when the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the second extraction state, it is in the complete appearance state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first removal state, the player can have a higher sense of expectation at the time of the first removal state. It can raise interest in the changes that follow.

  In addition, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first scraping state, the configuration with the aura member at the stage of the scrapping preparation transition effect (high expectation) Since the player can grasp and have high expectations, discouragement when the sculpting main effect is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the scout preparation transition effect is performed, the emotion of the player is greatly shaken by the presence or absence of the scout main effect, and a highly entertaining effect can be provided.

(Modified example 1-scribbling effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIG. 291 to FIG. 294, scribbling effect is performed in reach production, and the sculpting operation of sword decorative body 5001 in scribbling effect is triggered by the pressing operation of operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. 291 to 293 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the scribbling effect of the first modification. FIG. 294 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 of Modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. In addition, the description similar to the above-mentioned blowout effect (FIG. 285-FIG. 290) is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  Here, the effect pattern (S1 (Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2)) in which the scribble preparation transition effect is not performed or the scribble main effect is not performed, and after the scout preparation transition effect is executed The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the effect patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4)) in which the main effects are performed. The transition of the transition and the sword decorative body 5001 will be described.

  When reach effect is started, presence effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 291 (Y1)), and effect that suggests operation of the operation button 410 by display of the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 291 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, the image display of the operation button to be the operation target and the gauge display of the operation valid period are performed to perform the operation promotion effect for prompting the player to operate (FIG. At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily operate the operation button 410. It should be noted that the light emission of the operation button 410 is ended when the operation by the player is detected.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is finished when the player does not perform the staging transition effect and the sword main effect, and if the player has detected a pressing operation on the operation button 410, in the case where the result is an out result. An image notifying the outlier result (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, there is no change in the sword decorative body 5001 and the operation button 410.

  In addition, when the scout main effect is performed after the scout preparation transition effect execution, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the first scout when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected. A removal preparation preparation effect is performed (Fig. 292 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white letters “tengu” are displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 292 (F1)), and an image is displayed that the warrior of the ally tries to put a hand on the sword. (FIG. 292 (F2)). Next, a blowout effect is started in which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first removal state to the second removal state (form with an aura member) (FIG. 292 (F3), FIG. 293 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first scraped state to the second scraped state (form with an aura member) by the scribble main effect, FIG. Unlike the image of the samurai in Figure 293 (G1), an image in which lightning is running is interruptedly displayed on the blackout screen as shown in Figure 292 (F3), and the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (form with ora member or not And the strength of the lightning show the degree of anticipation to win the battle.

  The subsequent effects are the same as in FIGS. 287 (A2), (A3) and FIG. 288 described above, and when the sword decoration 5001 is in the second extraction state and the predetermined period elapses, the sword decoration 5001 is In order to function as the operation means that can effectively receive the operation of (1), an operation effective period for effectively detecting the setting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is prompted to operate the sword in the operation effective period (FIG. 293 (G2)), and notification of the symbol type (hit or miss) is performed by the player's sword operation (FIG. 293 (G3) or ( G4).

  Subsequently, with reference to a timing chart shown in FIG. 294, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player causes the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 to start. When reach effect is started (time t0), an operation effective period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the operation valid period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 starts state change, and first, the state of the sword is changed to the first state of extraction. Here, in the first state, the player can not determine whether the aura member 5030 appears (whether the blade 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first state to the second state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated to cause the sword decorative body 5001 to function as operation means. An effective period occurs, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is performed (time t3), and the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 (time t3 to t4) ((t3) At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). When the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) of the operation button 410 set in advance, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the final form (first It may be made to be deformed and changed in state at once in the form with the aura member in the second extraction state. Also, the state change timing from the first extraction state to the second extraction state is changed to the second extraction state after a predetermined time elapses in response to the player's operation of the operation button 410, that is, the first extraction state. You may When the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001 set in advance (time t3 to t4), the sword decorative body 5001 It is returned from the state of the sword to the state of the sword.

  In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. The extraction operation start timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the insertion operation start timing of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 (time tx). As described above, according to which operation means of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated, the movement of the sword decoration 5001 is reversed (the extraction operation and the insertion operation). The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation effective period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  Thus, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operation means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the form with the aura member with the sword decorative body 5001 deformed and changed in state) The second state of the sword can be shown. As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the player's desire to operate can be enhanced.

  Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, effect images corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 292 (F1) to (F3) → Since (G1) and (G2) are displayed, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modified example 2-stage aura sweeper effect using operation buttons)
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 295 to 299, based on the first modification, the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 in the aura member-attached form of the sword decorative body 5001, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade 5011 A case where the degree (aura level) is changed in accordance with the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIG. 295 to FIG. 299 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the scribbling effect of the second modification. The description of the same effects as those described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  There are 0 to 3 stages in the aura level provided here. The aura level 0 indicates the completely accommodated state (FIG. 284A) in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. The aura level 3 is a complete appearance in which the aura member 5035 is fully visible from the player by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 in the second extraction state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the insertion state (see FIG. 284 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the player by a third of the full appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the player for two thirds of the full appearance state.

  Here, with the effect patterns (in the figure (Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2)) in which the scribble preparation transition effect is not performed or the scribble main effect is not performed, there is no scribble preparation transition effect Is a case where the scribble main effect is performed, and the effect pattern (form with aura member complete appearance state (aller level 3)) of the sword decorative body 5001 by one operation of the operation button 410 (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) and a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise Screen transition of the effect display device 1600, state transition of the operation button 410, and a sword decorative body for the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) Explain 5001 operation transition That.

  In the first modification described above, the final form (the form at the time of operation) of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 once, but in the second modification, the step form is performed stepwise by the operation of the operation button 410 a plurality of times. It is characterized in that a step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade 5011 is performed.

  First, in the effect pattern in which the scout preparation transition effect is not performed or the scout main effect is not performed, that is, the sword decorative body 5001 does not change state even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. The same effect transition as (Y1) to (Y3) to FIG. 292 (E1) (E2) is followed (FIG. 295 (Z1) to (Z3) to FIG. 296 (H1) and (H2)).

  In addition, there is no sculpting preparation transition effect, but it is a case where scribble main effect is performed, and the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001 in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3)) by one operation of the operation button 410 In the effect pattern to be), after the same effect as in FIG. 291 (Y1) to (Y3) of the above-mentioned modification 1 (FIG. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected Then, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decorative body 5001 is united with the blade 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade 5011 in the inserted sword state, and completely appears when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second state. It becomes a state (aura level 3) (FIG. 296 (I1)). The aura member-attached form of the sword decorative body 5001 of the above-mentioned modification 1 is constituted by the aura member 5030, and the modification 2 is different from that constituted by the aura member 5035. The same effect transition as in FIG. 292 (F1) (F2) → FIG. 293 is followed (FIG. 296 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  In addition, there is no scout preparation transition effect, but in the case where scout main effect is performed, the operation of the operation button 410 is required a plurality of times, and in the effect pattern in which the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise, 1 Until the operation of the second operation button 410, the same effect transition as before is followed (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), but after the first operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second state In this state, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) in which the player does not visually recognize. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 296 (I1) described above (FIG. 297 (J1)).

  Next, the operation effect of the second operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 of the operation target is illuminated and decorated Is performed (FIG. 297 (J2)). Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the following effect is performed according to the aura levels 0 to 3 set in advance.

  First, when the aura level to be set is “0” (ie, in the case of the aura member absent form), the aura member 5035 maintains the fully accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and it is informed that it will return to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state. An image (here, a white letter "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (Fig. 297 (J3)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. 293 of the first modification described above in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 0 in a form without aura member. (FIG. 297 (J4) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the aura level to be set is any of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is in the 1/31 state from the fully accommodated state Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 297 (J5)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is decorated to emit green light indicating the aura level 1.

  Subsequently, the operation effect of the third operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 of the operation target is illuminated and decorated Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 298 (K1)). The luminescent color of the operation button 410 at this time may be green, which indicates the aura level 1. Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the aura level set in advance.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( Thereafter, there is no request for operation of the operation button 410, and an image (in this case, “I'm sorry” in the blackout screen) notifying that it will return to the scraped effect (presented effect) corresponding to the second decorative sword 5001 While white letters are displayed, an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (Fig. 298 (K2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is a form with an aura member in the 1/3 appearance state, and in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 298 (K 3) → FIG. 293 (G 1) to (G 4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 1 is always displayed.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from 1/3 appearance state to 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is decorated to emit light in red indicating the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation presentation of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with the image showing the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 of the operation target A light emission decoration operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 298 (K5)). The luminescent color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red indicating the aura level 2. Then, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the aura level set in advance.

  When the aura level is "2", the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (From this point on, there is no request for operation of the operation button 410) An image to notify returning to the sword removal effect (ideal effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state (here, "Black" screen "Iza" And the image showing the aura level is displayed (Fig. 299 (M1)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is a form with an aura member in the 2/3 appearance state, and in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (M1) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed.

  When the aura level is “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is in the full appearance state from the 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 299 (L1)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is decorated to emit light in rainbow color indicating aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is ended (after this, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and a stroke effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second stroke state. An image notifying of the return (here, a white letter "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level 3 is displayed (Fig. 299 (L2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is similar to FIG. 292 (F2) to FIG. 293 of the first modification in the presentation mode (color, sound etc.) according to aura level 3. The effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (L3) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 3 is always displayed.

  In the above description, the aura member's unit 5035 changes the uniting degree with the blade 5011 at each operation timing when the aura level is raised to widen the range viewed by the player (increases the appearance degree). Not limited to. Even if the aura level goes up, the aura is decided when the aura level is decided without raising the appearance of the aura member 5035. A stock type combination may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade 5011 at once so as to have the appearance degree corresponding to the level. Further, the target for increasing the appearance degree in stages is not limited to the aura member 5035, and may be a sword 5010 (sword 5011). For example, the state of the sword unit 5010 (blade unit 5011) may be changed stepwise from the first extraction state to the second extraction state.

  As described above, in the second modification, the player is requested to operate the other non-moving operation button 410 while the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operating means is in the movable state, so that a surprising novelty Operation effects can be provided, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced than in the first modification. In addition, since the player is given a plurality of operation opportunities to develop the effect in stages, the player can be made to impress a great deal of involvement in the effect and it is possible to prevent the interest in the effect from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is notified so as to be recognizable in subsequent effects, the player can feel an afterglow of the operation effects.

(Other effect pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302, other reach effects using the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 300 to 302 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decorative body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the inserted sword state functions as the operation means, and detects the extraction operation by the player. Second, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in a front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is a part of the effect display device 1600. It is operable to the front center.

  When the changing symbol forms the reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols changes to the reach state (FIG. 300 (A1)) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the princess reach start image is displayed (FIG. 300 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decoration member SDY (a potter's wheel) which can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In the normal state, the specific decoration member SDY is stopped in a state (initial state) in which a part of the bag is visible from the player above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. There is. In addition, at this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of cutting.

  In the princess reach effect, an image directed to the princess is displayed behind the eyebrow (FIG. 300 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggested image indicating an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 300 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is started and the operation effective period to receive the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to operate the sword decorative body 5001. A gauge indicating the operation promoting image and the operation valid period is displayed (FIG. 301 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are made to move up and down little by little from the display of the operation effect suggestion image until the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period. It is also good. Then, when the player's operation of removing the sword is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The player's operation of removing the sword means an operation of pulling out the blade 5011 from the sheath 5020 so that the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 in the state of the sword and lifts the sword 5010 upward. When the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword, the operation of the sword by the player is detected, and a detection and notification operation of notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection and informing operation may be an operation such as movement or vibration as the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) moves up and down, or any other action that can be felt by the player via the handle 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection and informing operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases the handle 5012. Therefore, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, unnecessary contact with the sword decorative body 5001 (gripping again for detection confirmation, etc.) is reduced, and the movable body is prevented from being broken or broken. Can.

  Here, the player does not appear the aura member 5030 (5035) in the removal operation by the player, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visible from the player when the player performs the removal operation according to the degree of expectation. You may do so.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when the player removes the sword operation, the specific decoration member SDY is stopped above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (initial state The state is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 301 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the removal mode "767" (Fig. 301 (C2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the sword state at the timing when the stop result in FIG. 301 (C2) is notified, but not limited to this, it is returned to the sword state at the timing when the detection and notification operation ends. You may do so.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when the player removes the sword operation, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is positioned at the front center (below the display area) overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is dropped and moved to a state in which only the reserved display area is visible (full drop state) (FIG. 301 (D1)) Then, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decorative body A second extraction state 5001 is maintained (FIG. 301 (D2)) In this case, a plurality of patterns of princess shadows displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, for example, The color of the shadow or the size of the shadow, and the comment to be displayed thereafter may be made different to indicate the expectation of the lottery result by the princess reach (the degree of expectation of the winning result, the game profit when being hit, etc.)

  Then, after the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the second scraped state by the player's scraping operation, that is, when a predetermined period elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second scraped state is The sword decorative body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 301 (D3)). Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decoration member SDY returns from the full fall state to the initial state, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility. The image of the amazing princess is displayed with the bag removed (Fig. 302 (D4)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the position where the original sculpting operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600 notifies the hit with the princess of the smile when the result of the current variable display is the hit. An image is displayed (FIG. 302 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the detachment is displayed together with the princess who is sad when it becomes the detachment (FIG. 302 (F1) (F2)).

  It should be noted that although the detection and notification operation is performed as described above when the player removes the sword operation, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the front horizontal direction When the player can not move due to the player holding the key, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is performed. Although the effect itself proceeds even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player at the movable effect timing (FIG. 301 (D3) in the left-right direction of the sword decoration 5001). When held at the position where it is performed, it causes a delay of the movable effect in the left and right direction. However, regardless of whether the left-right direction movable effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed or not, the effect to be performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the falling movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY Because the game is configured to play, there is no stagnation in game progress. The sword decorative body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform movable presentation in the left-right direction when holding of the sword decorative body 5001 is released by the player, or is configured not to perform movable presentation May be

  As described above, in the princess reach effect, the specific decorative member SDY which suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decorative body 5001 is dropped and moved by the player's operation of removing the sword decorative body 5001 (vertical movement) by the player. At the same time, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is moved in the forward direction of the effect display device 1600 (in the operation position (at the operation position) the sword decorative body 5001 itself in which the operation is performed outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can move to the left). That is, it becomes possible to move the sword decorative body 5001 itself to an operation position different from the operation position at which the sword removal operation was performed based on the sword removal operation by the player, enhancing the player's operation value, and the player's operation motivation You can control the decline of In addition, since one operation means is configured to be able to operate in different modes (vertical direction at the time of operation, horizontal direction after operation) stepwise by the operation by the player, a presentation using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be enhanced as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest.

  In addition, the movable display of the sword decorative body 5001 in the left and right direction is a display of effects for the purpose of performing an integrated rendering with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decoration member SDY Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position ahead of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword removal operation is performed with the sword decorative body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved and positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In the left and right direction (the left end of the frame), the movable effect in the left and right direction may be performed. In addition, since the operation by the player of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is an operation in the up and down direction (strap operation to pull the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword decorative body 5001 performed after the operation is performed based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decorative body 5001 operate in a direction (horizontal direction or the like as in this example) different from the operation direction (here, the vertical direction) when the player operates.

  In addition, when a player's operation to remove the sword is detected, a detection and informing operation of notifying the player of the detection is performed via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player accurately determines the operation end timing. It can be judged. Further, since the detection and informing operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm for a certain period, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection and confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, and delaying the movable effect of the sword decorative body 5001 thereafter or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, when the movable effect can not be executed due to the contact to the sword decorative body 5001 even after the detection and notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to release the hand, and the operation is requested during the operation valid period. Since even the touch is prohibited after the end of the detection and informing operation of the operation means, the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another pattern 2 using the sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 303 to 305, other reach effects using the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 303 to 305 are diagrams for explaining screen transition of the effect display device 1600 in reach effect including operation effects of the operation buttons 410 used in multiple directions, state transition of the operation buttons 410 and operation transition of the sword decorative member 5001. is there. Here, a pattern ((A), (B) → N) in which an expectation degree suggestion effect is performed that suggests an expectation that the variation being executed as the operation effect of the operation button 410 is a big hit A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 are performed as the effect will be described.

  Here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols reaches the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 303A), the operation effective period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is first An operation promoting effect is started that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 303 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (the operation button 410) to be operated and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 for the operation object is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the state of the sword. Then, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the effect pattern set in advance.

  First, in the pattern in which the expectation degree suggestion effect is performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected. After that (FIG. 303 (N1)), an image indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed (FIG. 304 (N2)). After that, the result (big hit, off) of the current fluctuation display is notified (Fig. 304 (N3) or (N4)). In addition, pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation degree suggestion production for the fluctuation display under execution, for example, it displays on the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image (FIG. 304 (N2)) showing the expectation degree. You may make it appear the character which changes the pending | holding display currently carried out.

  Further, in the pattern in which the suggestion and expansion of the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 are performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Is an effect image indicating that an operation rendition requiring the setting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed (FIG. 303 (M1)). Next, the start image of the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, a message of the title “Sweet sword chance” and the operation explanation “Please put your sword”) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the inserted sword state to the second extracted sword state. The sword decorative body 5001 at this time has an aura member-attached configuration in which the blade 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 305 (M2)). Subsequently, when the second extraction state is reached and a predetermined period of time elapses, and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the specific decoration member SDY (a pottery object) is moved up and down little by little in the initial state, In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promoting image for prompting the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 305 (M3)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variable display is performed.

  When the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (carriage object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state ( FIG. 305 (M4). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除An image (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "wonderful") is displayed (Fig. 305 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the variation display this time is disapproval, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a prison object) is merely stopped by the small movement in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (a stop mode "767" of a decorative symbol) for notifying removal is displayed (Fig. 305 (M6)).

  As described above, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation or expanding the operation effect of the other operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) become possible, and the player can operate the operation button 410. It is not possible to identify the subsequent deployment at the time of operating the. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and to suppress the decline in the operation desire and the decrease in the amusement of the game, which are concerned because the effect after the operation is monotonous.

  In addition, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (a pressing operation and a setting operation) at the first operation (a pressing operation of the operation button 410) and a second operation (a holding operation of the sword decorative body 5001) The player is requested on the basis of the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, the player's interest in the operation participation can be enhanced, and instead, the decrease in the game interest that is concerned can be suppressed by becoming a monotonous operation without being reflected.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As a first operation opportunity, the setting operation of the sword decorative body 5001 may be an effective operation. The operation means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decorative body 5001 rather than targeting the operation button 410 whose expectation is relatively lower than that of the first sword decorative body 5001. Is desirable.

(Another pattern 3 using the sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310, other reach effects using the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 306 to 310 are diagrams for describing screen transition of the effect display device 1600 in reach effect, state transition of the operation button 410, and operation transition of the sword decorative body 5001. Here, a pattern (in the figure (A), (B1), (B2)-> O) which becomes a big hit when the specific decoration member SDY (簾) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 In the case where the specific decoration member SDY (簾 簾 物 物 ず ず 物 物 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い 基 づ い は はPattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → Q if there is a chance to operate the sword decoration 5001 and R if a chance to operate the operation button 410 is given) Will be explained.

  The reach effect here is the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, if the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 306A)) And the message "Please move the movable body with one button hit" is displayed (FIG. 306 (B)), and then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is A prompting operation promoting effect is performed (FIG. 306 (C)). The display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the image of the operation means (the operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and the operation valid period, and the operation button 410 for the operation object is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the state of the sword. Then, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the effect is performed according to the effect pattern set in advance. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (one), but may be a continuous hit (a plurality of times). In addition, in order to make it easy for the player to grasp the target (the movable body) to be moved by the operation, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is movably moved up and down in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410. You may do so. When the sword decorative body 5001 is to be operated later, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second state of the sword at this point.

  In the pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY (簾 簾 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 可 動 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大 大It is dropped and moved so as to become (Fig. 307 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (a decorative symbol of the type) for reporting a big hit in the display area of the effect display device 1600 from which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (簾) has been cancelled. A stop mode "777" and a message "good" is displayed (FIG. 307 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In the pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY does not move, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decoration member SDY (the middle object) is stopped only by stopping the movement. I will not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol of the shift mode ("767") is displayed in a rocking manner at the center of the screen (Fig. 308 (P1). Thereafter, according to the effect pattern to be set The decorative symbol is developed into a pattern (FIG. 308 (P2)) stopped and displayed in a disengaging manner ("767") or a resurrection pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the resurrection pattern, a resurrection start image ("Yeah" is shown in the display area of the effect display device 1600 showing that the fluctuation display is not finished yet from the rocking display of the decorative pattern in the disappointing mode of FIG. The samurai image is inserted (Fig. 308 (P3)), and the decoration symbol is again in the reach state and reduced and displayed on the upper right of the screen, and at the center of the screen the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 An operation effective suggestion image (a face in which the eyes of the ally warrior have closed) is displayed (FIG. 308 (P4)). Then, as time passes, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is moved slightly up and down in the initial state (FIG. 308 (P5)). As a result, the player has an increased sense of anticipation that the effect using the specific decoration member SDY (a prisoner's berthing) is performed. At this time, the operation button 410 may be lighted and decorated in a high-speed flashing manner, or the sword decorative body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the state of the sword to the state of the first sword. Then, according to the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means, and a specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. A presentation of (Jailor) is performed. The pattern for which the operation button 410 is to be operated is set so that the degree of expectation is lower than the pattern for which the sword decorative body 5001 is to be operated.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button finalized image) in which sweat blurs on the forehead of the warrior of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button The light emitting decoration 410 is decorated (FIG. 309 (R1)). Then, while the small-sized movement of the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 継 続 中 継 続A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 309 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (the operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, the light emitting decoration is not performed.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the all fall state (FIG. 309 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed at the upper right of the screen of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible from the player. As in the above (FIG. 305 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol at this time. Then, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is returned to the initial state from the full fall state, and the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 再 び 再 び 再 び 再 び 再 び 解除 解除 解除 解除 解除 解除). An image notifying the big hit at the center (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "good") is displayed (FIG. 309 (R4)).

  On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is disengaging, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the incremental movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 In the display area, the decorative symbol of the shift mode ("767") is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen (Fig. 309 (R5)).

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens the eye light (the sword decorative body The finalized image is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the knapsack to the second state of the sword with the aura member (FIG. 310 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be lighted and decorated. The player can grasp that the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 is effective by the image of the display area, but at this time, the form such as whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is the aura member attached form Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Next, while the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 可 動 小) is moved in small increments, when the second scraped state is reached and a predetermined period elapses, and the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, In the area, an operation promoting image for prompting the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 310 (Q2)).

  Then, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 309 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 310 (FIG. 310 (FIG. Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out, when the player's operation is detected, the same effect transition as that of FIG. 309 (R5) is followed (FIG. 310 (Q5)).

  As described above, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the suggestion by the image Suggestions can be provided, and a drop in gaming interest can be suppressed. In addition, even when the specific decoration member SDY (cushion character) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given again the operation opportunity of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest that might be of concern by becoming a monotonous operation effect instead of being reflected.

  In addition, although the three production patterns of the reach production which used the sword decorative body 5001 were mentioned in the above-mentioned FIG. 300-FIG. 310, you may combine various production | presentation aspects. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be provided to further enhance the fun of the game.

(Simulated rendition using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 311 to FIG. 325, a pseudo-series effect using the sword decorative body 5001 in which the form is changed in stages according to the number of continuation of the pseudo-series variation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo rendition is a temporary reoccurring rendition that temporarily stops the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and is a bonus that is performed corresponding to the pseudo reciprocation together with the pseudo reciprocation in which the temporary stop and revariation are repeated one or more times Show the effect of etc. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop shows a state where it seems as if the variable display has stopped, but in fact it slightly oscillates to continue the fluctuation. In this example, when a variation pattern for performing pseudo-series variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, the pseudo series of effect patterns that can be selected by lottery of the presentation content by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Explain to.

(Form of sword decoration body)
First, with reference to FIG. 311, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is demonstrated. The above-mentioned form of the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with two types of the aura member attached form and the aura member without form, but here, the form in which the sword part 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle 5012 There are two types of

  FIG. 311 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword decorative body 5001 used for the pseudo consecutive effect. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided so as to allow two-step form change by the deformation of the handle 5012 and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3, and from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020 And an aura member 5040 that appears visibly. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction as the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 311 (A) to 311 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the knato state, and show stage 0 to stage 3 in order. The sword decorative body 5001 takes one of the stages 0 to 3 depending on the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 311 (A), the stage 0 form is a form in the normal state similar to FIGS. 281 (A) and 283 (A) described above, and an initial stage in which no operation is required for any component Indicates the form. As shown in FIG. 311 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 311 (C), in the stage 2 form, the handle 5012 spreads and moves so as to be divided into two from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the form in which the first decorative part 5012 a appears from inside Show. As shown in FIG. 311 (D), in the stage 3 form, the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle 5012 in the stage 2 form to form a decoration integral with the first decorative part 5012a. Indicates the form. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form in this case enable the form change without bringing the sword decorative body 5001 into the second scraped state. Furthermore, the sword portion 5010 capable of receiving an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body, thereby providing a more powerful operation means. Can.

(Example of simulated rendition)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 325, an example of effect transition of an effect pattern for performing pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 320 is a diagram for explaining the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (A), the main control substrate 1310 causes the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation When one of the six variation patterns of the pattern is selected, the pseudo-series effect is performed. Basic effect patterns (Sword LV1 weak effect pattern, Sword LV1 strong effect pattern, Sword LV2 weak effect pattern, Sword LV2 strong effect pattern, Sword LV3 weak effect pattern corresponding to the six variation patterns, respectively, in the effect pattern performing the pseudo-series effect Besides the effect pattern and sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern and a simulated resurrected sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (Sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 weak rendering pattern (the sword LV1 strong rendering pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong rendering pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is the sword LV2 weak variation pattern (Sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak representation pattern (Sword LV2 strong representation pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (Sword LV3 strong variation pattern In the case where either the sword LV3 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, or the simulated resurrected LV1 effect pattern (sword LV3 strong rendered pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 strong rendered pattern or the simulated resurrected LV1 produced pattern) It is selected.

  In the effect pattern, the number of continuations (one to three times) of the pseudo continuous change (re-change), the presence or absence of the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 according to the number of continuations, and the operation opportunity are given. The aspect of the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) is set (see FIG. 320 (B)). The effect pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of continuation times of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) 1 to 3 times. Also, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop position (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances). In addition, “pseudo-sword LV1” gives the selection operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 at the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) and continues the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) by selecting not to operate by the player. Show that it is an effect that can be acquired. In addition, “pseudo revival sword LV1” follows the same rendering transition as the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern of the basic effect pattern that provides the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 at the first pseudo run variation (re-variation), It shows that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed again after the end of the falling effect of the special decorative member SDY (chairman) based on the first change operation opportunity. The details of the effect contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set such that the degree of expectation becomes higher as the number of continuation of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) increases, that is, as the form change of the sword decorative body 5001 progresses, and the specific decoration member SDY The lower the drop position of the object, the higher the degree of expectation. However, when the drop position of the specified decorative member SDY (circumferential object) is half-drop, the number of continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 1 It is set so as to have the same degree of expectation in the case where the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) becomes full with the effect pattern which is less in number of times. Specifically, the expected number of continuations of pseudo run variation (re-change) 1 times and half-drop sword LV1 weak effect pattern is 29%, the number of continuations of pseudo run variation (re-change) 1 and a sword of full fall Expected level of LV1 strong effect pattern is 40%, number of continuations of pseudo continuous change (re-change) 2 times and sword of LV2 weak effect pattern with half-drop is 40%, continuous number of continuous set change (re-change) 2 The expectation of the LV2 strong directing pattern of the times and full fall is 50%, the number of continuations of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) 3 times and the expectation of the LV3 weak directing pattern of the half falling is 50%, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re The expectation degree of the continuation number of three times of fluctuation) and the sword LV3 strong rendering pattern of the full fall is set to be 65%. Further, the specific effect pattern is set so that the expectation is different according to the selected fluctuation pattern even if it is the same effect pattern, and the expectation is set to be higher as the fluctuation pattern is higher in expectation. The expectation of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern for giving the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% for the selected fluctuation pattern being the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, respectively. It becomes. Further, the expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 strong rendering pattern is 47% and 74% respectively for the case where the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and the case where the selected sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected. Further, after tracing the same rendering transition as the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern, the expectation of the simulated resurrected sword LV1 rendering pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern.

  Below, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 320 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition example shown in FIG. 312 to FIG. 319 and the effect execution timing chart shown in FIG. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition of simulated continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIGS. 313 to 315 are diagrams showing transition examples of effects of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given while the pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) is performed. Further, FIG. 316 is a view showing a transition example of the rendering after the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 (the falling rendering of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen)) during the pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) common to all the rendering patterns. is there. FIGS. 317 and 318 are diagrams showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the false sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the false sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 319 is a diagram showing an example of effect transition which is a feature of the simulated resurrected sword LV1 effect pattern. Also, FIGS. 321 to 325 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) in the pseudo-series effect, and FIG. 321 is a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) Figure 322 is a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (Sword LV2 strong effect pattern), Figure 323 is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (Sword LV3 strong effect pattern), Figure 324 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (false sword LV1 strong effect pattern) FIG. 325 shows a simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Below, it demonstrates along the example of a production | presentation transition in case a pseudo | simulation consecutive production is performed in the production before a fluctuation display is started and it will be in a reach state.

(All production patterns common)
As shown in FIG. 312 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, a state in which a part of the bag is visible from the player above the display area (the initial state) without overlapping with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view ) Is stationary. Also, at this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 312 (B) and (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image (the effect content notification “100 chances can be a great chance” message) showing the start of the pseudo continuous effect Is displayed to indicate to the player that the pseudo-series effect is to be started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 312 (D), the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode, and the player performs the re-variation of the decorative symbols. Report that. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, and specifically shows the form and effect level (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) by displaying the pseudo continuous sword symbol of the aspect. At this time, although there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (簾 簾 及 び 及 び 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 刀 目 のThe sword image which shows the form (stage 1 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in advance is displayed. In this manner, since the form and effect level (number of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re fluctuation) is notified at the time of temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-change) starts, Can be grasped and encountered at what stage of pseudo-stationary fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation) is started, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the time of the above-mentioned FIG. The pseudo linear figure pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. At this time, the form change of the sword decorative body 5001 is a timing at which the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decorative body 5001 from the effect display which is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 after the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. , I.e., after the start of the recurrent fluctuation. Note that the shape change timing of the sword decorative body 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo reciprocation (re-variation), for example, it is performed together with the display of the pseudo reciprocation symbol at the time of the above-mentioned FIG. The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 312 (F), the state of the sword image of the pseudo linear figure displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the state of the sword to the second state of the second sword while being enlarged. The state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether the second decorative state sword decoration 5001 which enables the player to operate the sword can be made effective as operation means An operation opportunity suggestion image (a warrior image with eyes closed) indicating whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the player is displayed. The subsequent effects are a pattern in which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective according to the effect pattern set in advance (effect pattern with the name “LV1” appended to the name) and a pattern in which the sword decorative body 5001 is not effective as the operation Branch to a presentation pattern in which “LV2” or “LV3” is attached. Below, an example of effect transition is demonstrated in order about nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak effect pattern / sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 316, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set which makes the sword decorative body 5001 effective as operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). An example of effect transition in the case will be described. When the effect pattern is set and the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given by the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the above-mentioned FIG. 312 (G The operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of the warrior open) indicating that the operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) (FIG. 313 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“a good chance!” Message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 313 (T2)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the second sword state (step 1 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message "set sword!" (FIG. 313 (T3)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, an expectation degree notification effect by the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, when the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern, when the player's operation of the sword is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U1), the specific decoration member SDY (chairman item) ) Is movable from the initial state to the full fall state. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second extraction state to the insertion state and returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) by the player's operation of the insertion sword. After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U2), the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is returned from the full fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is as shown in FIG. An expectation degree notification image ("100 body destruction!") Which notifies the expectation degree of the fluctuation display result in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous effect shown is displayed. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full drop state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half drop state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Here, by displaying the expectation degree notification image, the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  In addition, when the set effect pattern is “weak” effect pattern, when the player's operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U3), the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) Is dropped and moved from the initial state to a half drop state. The half drop state is a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (brasil product) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full drop state, and overlaps with the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view . Then, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second extraction state to the insertion state and returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) by the player's operation of the insertion sword. After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U4), the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is returned from the half fall state to the initial state, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. An expectation degree notification image ("50 body destruction!") For notifying the expectation degree of the variation display result in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo sequential effect shown is displayed. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Then, similarly to the “strong” effect pattern, the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) by displaying the expectation degree notification image at this time.

  In the case where the player's operation is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decorative body 5001, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the "strong" effect pattern or the "weak" effect pattern. An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) has ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends, as shown in FIG. 316 (U5), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and reach effect is started. Ru. As for the reach effect at this time, reach effects of the same effect contents are executed for the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. As described above, by operating when the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is required, the player grasps the degree of expectation by the falling position of the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object), and then achieves reach effect. I can meet you. Therefore, even if the later reach effects are the same, different senses of expectation can be obtained each time, so the decline of the operation desire by the player is suppressed, and further, the decrease of the game interest for the uniform effect is suppressed. can do.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 321, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a pottery) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 of the stage 1 form is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the sword LV1 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls by the operation of the player. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 321, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) ((1) See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state is changed from the state of the sword decoration 5001 to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is heightened, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (the second removal state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2) ) And the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) changes from the initial state to a half-drop state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and anticipation of anticipation degree of expectation corresponding to the full fall The points at which images are displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)) are different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak effect pattern / sword LV2 strong effect pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 314, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set which enables the sword decorative body 5001 as an operation means in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change). An example of effect transition in the case where there is an event is described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern is appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given at the first operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-variation). After following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) described above, no operation opportunity is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggested image shown in FIG. 312 (G) described above. The continuous image (image with samurai eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 in the second state is returned to the state with the form maintained in the stage 1 form (figure 313 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode, and the player is informed that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is to be performed (FIG. 313 (S2) ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, and specifically shows the form and effect level (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) by displaying the pseudo continuous sword symbol of the aspect. Then, on the pseudo linear sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed Be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. Thus, at the time of temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and attend at what stage of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the second simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo rectilinear symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 313 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to a stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is split to the left and right so that the first decorative part 5012a can be visually recognized (FIG. 313 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state The state changes to (Fig. 313 (S4)). The form change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the set state to the second state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes at a stroke at a timing when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decorative body 5001. Impressive motions can be impressed to attract the player's attention.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state (stage 2 form) in which the player can operate the sword can be made effective as operation means, ie, the game An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result as to whether or not to give the user an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 314 (V1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, since the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given by the second simulated continuous change (re-variation), In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of a warrior open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) described above is displayed FIG. 314 (V2). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image ("Appreciable !!!" message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity for asking for a positive operation is displayed (FIG. 314 (V3)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the second sword state (stage 2 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image showing an operation direction and an operation valid period is displayed together with a message of "Please put a sword!" (FIG. 314 (V4)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expectation degree notification effect by the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern. , And allow the player to grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. In addition, when the player's operation is not detected during the operation effective period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an escape image ("Enemy, escape!") Is displayed, which indicates that the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen). 318 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Subsequently, referring to FIGS. 320 (B) and 322, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed. During period T2 in which the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second stage is made effective as operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV2 strong rendition pattern is set, a fall rendition (expected degree notification rendition) in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls is performed by the operation of the player. When the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 322, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) ((1) See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state is changed from the state of the sword decoration 5001 to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player feels throbbing (see FIG. 312 (G)), the sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the navel state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, while maintaining the stage 1 form, the sword decorative body experiences a second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 313 (S4)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (the second removal state) (see FIG. 314 (V1) → (V2) → (V3) And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 314 (V4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) changes from the initial state to a half-drop state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and anticipation of anticipation degree of expectation corresponding to the full fall The points at which images are displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)) are different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the end of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2 (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak effect pattern / sword LV3 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 314 and FIG. 315, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set to enable the sword decorative body 5001 as an operation means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) An example of effect transition in the case where there is an event is described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern is appropriately omitted.

  If the set effect pattern is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body is provided at the timing of the operation opportunity giving timing of the second pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) shown in FIG. 314 (V1) described above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. 313 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1), In the display area, a continuous image (image with samurai's eyes closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 314 (V1) is displayed, and it is in the second cutting state. The sword decoration 5001 is returned to the state of the sword while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 314 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode to inform the player that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is to be performed (FIG. 314 (V6) ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, and specifically shows the form and effect level (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) by displaying the pseudo continuous sword symbol of the aspect. Then, on the pseudo linear sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image showing in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the third pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is displayed Be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) and the sword decoration 5001. Moreover, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. Thus, when the temporary stop display is displayed immediately before the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) starts, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-series fluctuations) of the sword decoration 5001 in the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and attend at what stage of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, when the third simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo rectilinear symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 314 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative part 5012 b protrudes above the first decorative part 5012 a so that both decorative parts can be viewed as an integrated decorative body ( FIG. 314 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state State change to (Fig. 314 (V8)). The form change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the set state to the second state may be set to be simultaneous. In addition, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 may not be changed each time according to the number of times of pseudo-series fluctuation, and when reaching the final stage, the form may be changed collectively for a plurality of steps. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes at a stroke at a timing when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decorative body 5001. Impressive motions can be impressed to attract the player's attention.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 in the second state (step 3 form) in which the player can operate the sword can be made effective as operation means, ie, the game An operation opportunity suggestion image (a samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result as to whether or not to give the user an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 315 (X1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, since the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation), In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image with the eyes of a warrior open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1) described above is displayed Figure 315 (X2). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image ("Appreciable!" Message) indicating that an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 315 (X3)) . Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second scout state (step 3 form) as that of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message "set sword!" (FIG. 315 (X4)). Then, when the player's batting operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expectation degree notification effect by the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is performed according to the set effect pattern. , And allow the player to grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. Further, when the player's operation is not detected during the operation effective period, the effect display device 1600 does not matter whether the set effect pattern is the “strong” effect pattern or the “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of, an escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Is displayed that indicates that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (the prison object) being performed ( See FIG. 318 (W2)). That is, when the player does not detect the operation of the sword within the operation valid period, the player is made not to grasp the expectation of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword when the operation effective period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can know the end of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 323, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo linked fluctuation (re-shift) is performed and the second pseudo linked fluctuation (re-change) are performed. During the period T2 in which the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given in the period T2 to be performed, and in the period T3 in which the third simulated continuous change (re-variation) is performed Give them the opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the sword LV3 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) completely falls by the operation of the player. When the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 323, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the form of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) ((1) See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state is changed from the state of the sword decoration 5001 to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player feels throbbing (see FIG. 312 (G)), the sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the navel state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, while maintaining the stage 1 form, the sword decorative body experiences a second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 313 (S4)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not to increase the player's pounding feeling (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the navel state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, while maintaining the stage 2 form, the sword decorative body experiences the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 314 (V8)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second scraped state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) And an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) changes from the initial state to a half-drop state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) changes from the initial state to the full fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and anticipation of anticipation degree of expectation corresponding to the full fall The points at which images are displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)) are different.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the end of the third pseudo random change (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3 (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern / simulated sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 317 and FIG. 318, although the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective as the operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the pseudo continuous change is made by selecting not to operate the player. An example of effect transition when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern capable of acquiring continuation (level up effect) of (re-variation) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern is appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is given at the operation opportunity giving timing of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation). . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an operation positively as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIG. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. 313 (T1), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity of FIG. An operation selection image ("Are you interested in this question?" Message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity asking for selection of whether or not to operate the player from the operation confirmation image indicating that it is displayed is displayed (FIG. )). Then, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promoting effect for promoting selection of the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (step 1 form) same as that of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and indicates the operation direction and the operation effective period together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword or not". An image is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z2)).

  Here, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) which is set, which of the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern) The subsequent rendering transition greatly differs depending on whether the rendering pattern is set based on the pattern.

  In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the player performs the operation of the sword during the operation effective period. If it is detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 316) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern is traced.

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect the operation of the sword during the operation effective period, the operation selection promoting effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation effective period in which the game is performed is ended, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the second extraction state of the stage 1 form to the initial insertion state of the initial form, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present selection operation opportunity is An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate ("was it a good opportunity ...") is displayed (Fig. 318 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a prison object). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("Enemy, escape!") Indicating that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is ended without the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (ceiling object) being performed. Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the normal mode in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 318 (W3)).

  In the case of the simulated sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the player performs the operation of the sword during the operation effective period. If detected, the operation is detected at the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern as in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 316 (U1) → After following the effect transition of (U2), the remaining effect period (the total of the periods T2 and T3) is subjected to variation display by the decorative symbol of the normal mode (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode at the same timing as the timing previously determined by the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 316 (U5) reference).

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect the operation of the sword during the operation valid period, the operation selection promoting effect shown in FIG. When the operation effective period in which is performed is completed, the operation pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by obtaining the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time indicates that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation applying timing from the above-mentioned FIG. 317 (Z2), that is, it moves to the continuous image (FIG. 313 (S1)) Then, similarly to the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, the above-mentioned FIG. 313 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1) → FIG. 314 (V5) to (V8) → follow FIG. 315 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 316 (U5).

  As described above, in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern), the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the fluctuation pattern selected on the main control board 1310 is largely different. When the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when operating at the selection operation opportunity, the basic effect pattern and Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and to reach reach production. On the other hand, if it chooses not to operate it, it will not only be able to acquire the level up production described later, but it will reach reach production without being able to grasp the expected degree that could be known if the user was originally operating . If the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the selection operation opportunity is not operated, it is possible to enjoy the effect by the continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) as in the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if the user operates the game, he / she misses the effect (continuity change of the sword decorative body 5001 due to the level-up effect) due to the continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) which can be acquired without operating the initial shape of the sword decorative body 5001 It will return to the form. In the operation at the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 which is unknown to the player is reversed, and the operation during the operation valid period during which the operation is effectively accepted is a game Provide a fresh rendition that brings the operation result to the disadvantaged person. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent development of the rendering than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player comes to the operation at the selection operation opportunity with tension and a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of the operation and to suppress the decrease of the game interest caused by the uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) When the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the three stages are reduced from the stage 1 configuration to the stage 0 configuration (initial configuration) from the selection operation opportunity. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decorative body 5001, the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, and the level is raised to the stage 3 form and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, the operation of the number of times set in advance in the effect pattern is required, but in this example, the operation opportunity of 2 times (LV1 and L3) can be provided in advance, but the player performs one operation by operating. It becomes the end of the grant on the occasion, it is possible to provide a new presentation that reflects the player's intention more. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of operation with respect to the operation effect which does not appear instead, and to suppress the decrease of the game interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern that allows the sword decorative body 5001 to change from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, the initial form to the stage 1 form depending on the player's operation. It will reach reach production only to see the change up to. Since the player can be made to perform the operation selection without being caught by the selected fluctuation pattern (the set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his own operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of the operation and the decline of the game entertainment.

  Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY . If the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated, it ends without being able to grasp the expectation, and the form further changes in level (levels up), and it operates in the operation opportunity given after becoming the stage 3 form. There is a case where the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a pottery). Thus, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the non-operation selection produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or an effect higher than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. Although the expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo-sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo-sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern in FIG. 320 (A), it is not limited thereto. For example, the expectation of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the change pattern. Further, in order to provide an appropriate effect that is more suited to the player's own sense of choice, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern in accordance with the fluctuation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's control of the operation and the decline of the game entertainment.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 324, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the false sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the false sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 1 form in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-fluctuation) is performed. As the operation means, and gives the player an operation opportunity. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) completely falls by the operation of the player. In addition, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, originally, three pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is provided so that the specific decoration can be performed. After the fall effect of the member SDY, the symbol variation in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  When the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern. Then, if the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo continuous fluctuations (re-variation) are continued, and the second pseudo continuous fluctuations In the period T2 in which the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is not given in the period T2 in which (re-variation) is performed, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed As a player, and give the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is half dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 high effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed in which the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) completely falls by the operation of the player. When the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of which effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 324, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state is changed from the state of the sword decoration 5001 to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second removal state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → FIG. 317 (See Z1) The operation valid period for accepting the player's operation effectively is started (see FIG. 317 (Z2)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) changes from the initial state to a half-drop state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, although not shown, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (brade product) changes from the initial state to the full drop state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the full drop. The difference is that the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the player does not perform the operation of the sword in the operation effective period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues (set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), The decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the insertion state with the end of the operation effective period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S1)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 313 (S4)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not to increase the player's pounding feeling (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword decorative body 5001 in the operable state (second scraped state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the navel state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, while maintaining the stage 2 form, the sword decorative body experiences the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 314 (V8)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second scraped state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) And an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) changes from the initial state to a half-drop state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (brade product) changes from the initial state to the full drop state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the full drop. The difference is that the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the expectation is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the end of the third pseudo random change (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3 (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, if the player does not perform the operation of the sword during the operation effective period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is not continued (when set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), The decoration 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the insertion state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Simulated revival sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 319, the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above is followed, and it looks as if it is rushed to reach effect as it is, and the pseudo resurrection in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored. An example of effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the above-mentioned effect pattern is appropriately omitted.

  The simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control substrate 1510 when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control substrate 1310.

  If the set effect pattern is the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern, as in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above, the above-mentioned FIGS. 312 (A)-(G) → FIGS. 313 (T1)-(T3) Follow the staging transition. Then, when the operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern, FIG. 319 (the same effect as FIG. 316 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above. After following the effect transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo run variation by the pseudo run symbol design is resumed again. If the operation by the player is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword as the operation effective period ends, as in the other effect patterns. Instead of the above-described FIG. 319 (UA1) → (UA2), the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not have the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Indicating that it has been done is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)).

  The resumption and resumption of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is the center among the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7「 7 ”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 319 (UA3) described above. A pseudo-rifled symbol which is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, a temporary stop symbol with a pseudo-rifle symbol in a form showing the form and effect level (number of times of pseudo reciprocation) of the sword decorative body 5001 The notification is sent to the player (FIG. 319 (UA4)). A sword image and effect level 3 of the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed on the pseudo rafter symbol at this time. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001 and the initial form (sword state) is maintained. As described above, in the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is recovered, the pseudo re-variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the third stage is performed. Then, at the time of temporary stop display (FIG. 319 (UA4)) immediately before the pseudo run change (re-change) starts in the stage 3 form, the form and effect level of the sword decorative body 5001 in the pseudo run change (re-change) is notified As a result, the player can grasp and see what stage of pseudo-stationary fluctuation (re-variation).

  Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-skater pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 319 (UA4) described above is enlarged and the sword display is such that the effect display acts on the sword decoration 5001. It is displayed moving toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form into a stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decorative portion 5012a and the second decorative portion 5012b are operated from the initial form so that both decorative portions can be viewed as an integrated decorative body. (FIG. 319 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-straight symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the knapsack state to the second scout state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is actually the second scout state from the batting state The state changes to (Fig. 319 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form at once, it can impress a powerful operation and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second scraped state (step 3 form) which enables the player to operate the sword is made effective as operation means, and the above-mentioned FIG. 315 (X1) to (X5) When the player's operation is detected after tracing the effect transition, the specific decoration member SDY (not shown) is detected according to the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. The type of drop effect for the prison object is determined. When the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, since the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is once in a half drop state, the level is raised and the above-mentioned FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) An expectation degree notification effect is produced by the full fall effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (chairman) as in (U5), and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends. On the other hand, in the case where the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation by the half-drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (clad object) same as FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends.

  If the operation by the player is not detected at the operation opportunity to activate the sword decorative body 5001 in the second ejection state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the end of the operation effective period as in the other effect patterns. At the same time, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the state of the sword, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not have the falling effect of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances), and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) An escape image (“Enemy, escape!”) Indicating that the F. has ended is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)), and the pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) is ended.

  As described above, in the simulated revival sword LV1 rendering pattern, the rendering transition similar to that of the sword LV1 weak rendering pattern described above is followed, and when the simulated contingent fluctuation (re-variation) is recovered again, the level of stage 2 is skipped and the stage 3 is formed. Since the same development as that of the stage of the stage (the stage of the third pseudo random change (re-variation) in the basic stage pattern) is performed, the player has a sense of expectation stronger than the other stage patterns and is a reach stage stage with surprise. You can come to In addition, the player is given an operation opportunity at the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), and the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) after that is half-drop, without distracting attention It is possible to enjoy the game in expectation of the resurgence of the pseudo random fluctuation (re-variation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 325, the operation execution timing of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) when the simulated resurrected sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 of the stage 1 form is made effective as operation means in the period T1 in which the first simulated continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed, Give the player an operation opportunity. At this time, regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (Sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or Sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), a drop effect (expected degree notification) in which the specified decoration member SDY (circumstances) is half-dropped by the operation of the player Production is performed. When the player does not perform an operation, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, after the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) ends, and once it returns to the variation display of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, a period during which the third pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation) in other effect patterns is performed The pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) is performed using the sword decorative body 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the form change to the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 in the third stage form is made effective as operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, when the falling effect of the specified decorative member SDY (circumstances) is performed in the period T1, the falling effect (expected degree notification) in which the specified decorative member SDY (circumstances) is completely dropped by the operation of the player Production is performed. In addition, in the period T1, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is not performed in the period T1, the falling of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is partially dropped by the operation of the player. An effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed. When the player does not perform an operation, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 325, when the simulated revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in shape from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, whether the state is changed from the state of the sword decoration 5001 to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is heightened, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (the second removal state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2) ) And the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (brade product) changes from the initial state to the half drop state (see FIG. 319 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-series fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 319 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo coupled fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. W2)) The player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is temporarily formed by the decoration pattern of the normal mode (see FIG. 319 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored (FIG. 319 (UA4) )reference).

  Then, at the same time as the resumption of the pseudo link variation (re-variation), the form of the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 319 (UA5)). Thereafter, whether the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (see FIG. 319 (UA6)) and the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after sufficiently recognizing the sword decorative body 5001 that the player is in the operable state (second scraped state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3) And an operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second extraction state to the insertion state, and changes in form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is performed in the first pseudo reciprocation (reciprocal fluctuation), the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) changes from the initial state to the full falling state. A falling effect that changes is performed (see FIG. 316 (U1)). Then, at the end of the reappearance pseudo reciprocation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (cushion object) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although not illustrated, when the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is not performed in the first pseudo reciprocation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (cousin objects) is from the initial state The state changes to the half falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)), and the difference is that the expectation degree notification image of the degree of expectation corresponding to the half falling is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation in the operation valid period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change in form. Then, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the end of the simulated reciprocation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3 (FIG. ), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the simulated rendition using the sword decorative body 5001, the simulated reciprocation number of times is 2 and 3 respectively in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the simulated reciprocation (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times. In the case of less than the above, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword every one pseudo reciprocation (re-variation) to make it possible for the player to operate. It is characterized by being returned to the state of the sword (without giving the player an operation opportunity). For this reason, since the player is expected to have a sense of expectation whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable, the player is interested in the sword decoration 5001 as the operation means. It is possible to suppress the decline in the operating desire and the decline in the game entertainment.

  Further, in the pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the initial form by the player's operation of the sword decorative body 5001 whose form is changed from the initial form. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides the player with useful effects by the operation of the player. Make the player's operation selection carefully. Therefore, it is possible to give an interest to the operation in the sword decorative body 5001, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation desire and a decrease in the game interest.

  In addition, since the sword decorative body 5001 can change its form stepwise until the operation opportunity is given (until the operation valid period is generated), the player's expectation and interest are raised gradually, and the game is played It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that during the operation mode and the second scraped state (operation position) of the sword decorative body 5001 to the generation of the operation valid period, the operation time mode (form, light emission, movement of the player at the operation position) It is desirable to be provided for a period that allows sufficient confirmation. As a result, the player can confirm the operation mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, so the operation valid period is generated as soon as the second sword state is reached, and the mode of the operation means can not be confirmed. It is possible to wipe out the fear that the game interest will be reduced by shifting to the operation effect as it is.

  In addition, although the step change of the above-mentioned sword decorative body 5001 was shown by the form, it is not restricted to this. It may be possible to change in stages each rendering mode corresponding to the number of continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation), such as a change in the light emission mode or the operation mode of the sword decorative body 5001.

(Application to pre-reading effect)
In addition, although the scribbling effect in the pseudo-series reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a pre-reading effect. The case where it applies to pre-reading effect is described below. In the following, a case will be described by way of example in which the third hold is the pre-reading effect target and the sword LV3 high-effect pattern is set as the pre-reading effect pattern.

  When the hold to be the object of pre-reading effect occurs as the third hold 3, the same effect as the above-described FIGS. 312 (B) to (F) is performed in the variable display performed at the time of occurrence. The sword decorative body 5001 is different from the second decorative state in that it is limited when an operation opportunity is given (an operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next change display (that is, the change display of hold 1 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as the above-described FIG. 312 (G) → FIGS. 313 (S1) to (S4) is performed. Furthermore, in the next variable display (that is, the variable display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as that of FIG. 314 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X3) described above It will be. As described above, the change of the sword decorative body 5001 from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword in the pre-reading effect is limited to the generation timing of the operation valid period. Here, the operation effective period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 to be the object of pre-reading effect is started, and the state of the operation promoting effect and the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. From the second to the second). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the pre-reading effect is ended.

  Although the state change from the state of the sword decoration of the sword decorative body 5001 to the state of the second scout is limited to the occurrence timing of the operation effective period, the next change display is made even if the stepwise form change is performed at the end of the change display. It may be performed at the start. Also in the pre-reading effect, the same effect as the pseudo-series reach effect is exhibited.

(Recommendation effect before operation using specified decoration member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329, a pre-operation suggestion effect to be executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective in reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is enabled or the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object). . Specifically, an operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (crimson) is positioned at the initial position as a suggested pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern for generating an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (injury object) is moved from the initial position to the indication position. The sword decoration 5001 (from the operation button 410 The second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern when the operation expectation is high and the hit expectation is set to be effective. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggested pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) which generates the operation valid period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (chairman) is positioned at the initial position also in the operation valid period. In the case where is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)) is generated in which the operation effective period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (common object) is moved to the indication position. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 30%. Hereinafter, an example of effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a prison object) in the first indication pattern and the second indication pattern of the indication effects before operation will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
326 and 327 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during reach effect by lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion rendering of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed, when it is determined that the operation is effective. In this reach effect, when three decoration symbols reach the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 326 (A)), an operation button previously determined to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 Before the operation effective period for any operation means of the 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 326 (B)), and at this time, the specified decoration member SDY (chairman) maintains the initial position. In addition, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crimson object) is maintained at the initial position, an operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) determined to be operation effective is generated. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is validated, the first suggested pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggested pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggested effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (簾 簾 簾 に に 初期 位置 初期 有効 初期 操作 有効 初期 初期 初期It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 is activated, as shown in FIG. 326 (C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated with the specific decoration member SDY (canned object) maintaining the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation effective period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated to emit light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. In addition, even when the sword decorative body 5001 is effective, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first indication pattern although the rate is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 326 (D), an operation effective period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (crissman) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword state (form with an aura member), and the player can perform the operation of the sword.

  When the operation to the operation effective operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 326 (C) or (D), the result of the current variable display is a big hit, The specified decorative member SDY (braille object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to a full drop state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除An image (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "wonderful") is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC 2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variable display is a release, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) reports the release to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (the stop pattern "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (Fig. 327 (CC3)).

(Second Suggested Pattern)
In FIG. 328, when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is effective during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above, the indication suggestion before the operation of the second suggestion pattern is It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production performed. In FIG. 329, although the second decorative pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggested effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is temporarily enabled after the sword decorative body 5001 is not activated, and the sword is subsequently decorated It is a figure shown about the operation pre-operation indication production of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes effective.

  As shown in FIG. 328 (AA1), any of the operation buttons 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 which are determined in advance to be effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 are the pre-operation suggestion effects of the second suggestion pattern. It is performed before the operation effective period with respect to the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of aura) that suggests that the operation means is effective is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect indication image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first indication pattern, but in the second indication pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is together with the display of the operation indication indication image. It operates in a small drop state (indicated position) overlapping with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the initial position in a front view, and the specific decoration member SDY (brade character) moves up and down between the initial position and the indicated position. It is moved in small steps in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (injury object) is moved to the suggested position, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) determined to be operation effective in advance is generate. In this example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective, the second suggested pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggested pattern as the pre-operation suggested effect. That is, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissman) is in the suggested position, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is higher than the operation button 410 at a valid rate. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective in operation, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA3), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (crissman) is operating at the suggested position Generate At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword (the form with the aura), and the player can perform the operation of the sword. In addition, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, although at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA2), an operation effective period with respect to the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (chairman object) is operating at the suggestion position. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed. In the second suggested pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promoting effect, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is moved from the state of operating at the suggested position to the initial state. In addition, movement to the full fall state or the initial state of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen) may be performed from the state of operating at the suggested position without being returned to the initial state.

  Then, when an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) effective in the above-mentioned FIG. 328 (AA2) or (AA3) is detected, the above-mentioned FIG. 326 (C) or (D) and Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (brade product) is dropped and moved from an initial state to a full drop state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Then, when the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 戻 戻) is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (簾 物 物 解除An image (the stop pattern "777" of the decorative symbol, a message of "wonderful") is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC 2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variable display is a release, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) reports the release to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (the stop pattern "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (Fig. 327 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is similar to the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggested pattern.

  In addition, the operation pattern of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) in the second suggested pattern may be provided not only with the pattern operated at the suggested position but also with a plurality of operated patterns. For example, in the case where a plurality of types of operation patterns are provided such that the rate at which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective is different, the player's interest in the operation can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation indication effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
In the case where the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern is generated in which the operation effective period is generated while the specific decoration member SDY (a prison object) is moved to the indication position, and the sword decorative body 5001 becomes operation effective, In addition to the basic pattern following the effect transition of FIG. 328 (AA1) → (AA3) described above until the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective, the operation button 410 is temporarily activated, and then the sword decorative body 5001 is A step-up pattern is provided that enables operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 329 (BB1) to (BB4), the operation-promoting period for the sword decorative body 5001 in which it is determined in advance that the operation-prompt staging effects of the step-up pattern are effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is performed, that is, before the operation promoting effect of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) described above is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the display of the operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to the above-mentioned FIG. 328 (AA1) and the small-step movement of the specific decoration member SDY (brasil product) are performed (FIG. 329 (BB1) ). Next, in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (crimson object) is moved to the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating an operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 329 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 327 described above is not performed, and switching indicating the switching of the operation valid operation means Suggested images (most blackout images) are displayed (FIG. 329 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the end of the operation valid period of the operation button 410. After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the second state of the sword (the form with the aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operating means which becomes operation valid is the sword decorative body 5001 from the operation button 410. A switching notification image (a message of “scratching chance” and “I want to put a sword”) is displayed to notify that the switching is to be performed (FIG. 329 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (crimson object) is in the state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation promoting effect of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) described above is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 327) in the second suggested pattern described above.

  In the case of FIG. 329 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without activating the button operation 410 (without operation promotion effect). Once the player's interest has been directed to the button operation 410, the sword decorative body 5001 may be operated. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of the present embodiment, the specific decoration member SDY (Coffee item before the operation effective period of the operation means by which one of the plurality of operation means is made effective is generated. The position of) can be changed, suggesting operation means to be operated effective by the position. Specifically, in the first suggested pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) in which the operation valid period is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (crissmen) is at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operation valid In the second suggested pattern (Fig. 328 (AA1)), the sword decorative body 5001 has a high degree of expectation and the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a common object) is located at the suggested position. There is a high degree of expectation that the operation is effective, and the player pays attention to the state of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) to grasp which operation means is effective. It can enhance the interest of the production.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, vertical small-step movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a cast object) is performed in the indication effect before operation. And since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decoration member SDY (circumstances) is also used in the result notification (FIG. 327) after the operation of the operation means, a series of fall effects can be made It is possible to show the stage effect and to suppress the decrease in the game interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (crissmen), ie, the degree of expectation that the operation means enabled by the movable body becomes effective is indicated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to become operation effective is decided, not only the lighting of the operation button 410 or the change to the second extraction state of the sword decorative body 5001 but the operation means to become operation effective is moved by vibration etc. You may

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) is located at the suggestion position, after the operation button 410 is once activated (or after it is made appear that the operation is validated) ) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes effective. Thus, the player is interested in both operation means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to have the expectation that the sword decorative body 5001 may become effective after that. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the indication effect before operation, the operation effect indication image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is effective is displayed. (FIG. 326 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (a pottery) from the initial position of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view It is possible to operate in a small drop state (indicated position) overlapping with the upper part, and to make small vertical movement in the vertical direction between the initial position and the indicated position. After that, when the operation effective period is generated, the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is returned to the initial position (rest). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (chairman) in the first suggested pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggested pattern of the same timing, so the player can be instructed to perform the operation rendition by the first suggested pattern Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the sword decorative body 5001 to become effective in operation even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is executed. Then, since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period will occur in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (jail object) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated to the indication position, the suggestion before operation is suggested. I can improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the specific effect in the game board side effect display device 1600 Perform effects in a pattern. In an effect period in which a specific effect pattern is executed, it is possible to generate a specific effect reception period (effective period) for establishing a specific effect execution condition by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period In addition, based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation effect (such as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit). The degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant suggested as a result of the specific operation presentation may be 100% or 0%.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation is performed as an operation means provided for such an operation effect (such as an effect that indicates an expectation degree for giving a benefit when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) other than this. In this respect, in the specific effect pattern, when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when the operation effect is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), this is the case. There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001) from (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001), even if the operation opportunity is not performed at the operation opportunity, only the pre-operation effect to which the operation opportunity is given occurs. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for awarding a privilege is higher than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for the provision of a benefit suggested when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001) may be 100% or 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as sword decorative body 5001), at the time of operation according to the operation on the other operation means (such as sword decorative body 5001) It will be possible to improve the amusement of the game when it is in the pre-stage where the rendition is not yet performed and is in the situation where the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired rendering result (such as a rendering result that suggests that the degree of expectation for giving a privilege is high) does not appear in the rendering at the time of operation according to the operation on another operating means (such as the sword decorative body 5001) Even if it is not possible to operate the operation means within the specific effect reception period (effective period), it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such operation related effects. Become.

  And, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) having such a dramatic property. In the case of providing such an operation opportunity, it is possible to execute common operation-related effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (effect reception enabled).
The operation on the operation button 410 is activated after the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is activated (the effect can be accepted), and the operation for the operation button 410 is activated (effect can be accepted ) The first effect mode for generating the effective period (effect reception period) to be performed, and · The operation on the operation button 410 is activated (the effect reception is possible) without the “specific operation related effect” being started. A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating the effective period (effect reception period) to be played are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is activated by executing any of the effect modes. An effective period (effect reception period) to be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, a period occurs in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) can be accepted. In any case where there is a period during which an effect accepting operation other than the particular operating means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) becomes available, it is common prior to the occurrence of those periods (specific Since it becomes possible to execute the operation-related effect of), it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the specific operation means and the other operation means is acceptable for effect, By performing the operation under the condition where the game is performed, the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Such common (specific) operation-related effects correspond to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect was started. The effect reception period is to be generated, but at least when the effect is started, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period is generated It is desirable to keep it secret.

  Hereinafter, several effect modes that can be adopted when performing such common (specific) operation-related effects will be sequentially described. In the following description examples and their modifications, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively used as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to common (specific) operation related effects. The type of operation means is not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, in the following production examples and their other examples, mainly, the content of the rendering is shown when one of the rendering reception periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related rendering is performed, and the common (specific) In the case where any effect reception period occurs without the operation related effect of) being executed, the effect contents may be omitted. However, as the effect contents in the case where any of the effect receiving periods occur without common (specific) operation-related effects being executed, for example, it is as shown in FIG. 206 (E), (G), etc. . That is, in this case, an operation instruction image for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 appears or an operation instruction image for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 appears without a specific operation-related effect being executed. Furthermore, in each of the following effect examples and their other examples, it is assumed that common (specific) operation related effects are performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach effect is achieved A common (specific) operation related effect may be generated as another image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the game is being executed, or may be common during the big hit game execution period. (Specific) operation related effects may be generated.

  In addition, while being able to perform combining suitably each effect between each effect demonstrated below and the effect of each other example mentioned later, it is possible to combine suitably and execute among each effect mentioned above It is possible. Each effect described below can be combined by replacing a part of the effect in each of the other examples described later, and each effect described below is performed when the first effect pattern is executed. When the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform effects of other examples described later. The same can be said for the effects of the other examples described later.

[First presentation manner]
FIGS. 330 and 331 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive an effect during a period in which the specific operation-related effect is being performed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the presentation example (1st presentation aspect) done.

  In FIG. 330 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 330 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect has been started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 330 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 330 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Display is made to move in the inside. As described above, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of operation related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different kinds of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation for any of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) will be made available for reception soon, as it is unclear which one of the decoration 5001 and the decoration 5001 is available for reception. You will be able to

  In FIG. 330 (c), the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 330 (b) is developed, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, character display such as “operate”) prompting operation of any one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) in a state of being stopped and displayed in the area, and reception of effects It indicates an effect situation where a bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period has appeared.

  According to such an effect mode, although the operation with respect to at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001) It becomes impossible to determine which of the three is available for presentation. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 330 (c)) in any of the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is available for effect and the situation where the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is available for effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means are operated before an operation for at least one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted. Over the period until the operation for at least one of (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) is made available for rendering, common (specific) operation related as shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and 330 (c) I am trying to carry out the production.

  Therefore, the effect contents of the specific operation related effects are limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and 330 (c), not only in this effect example but also in each effect example described below and their alternative examples. Absent. The point is that when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect If it occurs in the middle). With such a configuration, it is not clear which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive effects, and at least one of the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001) It is possible to suggest that an operation on one is acceptable for presentation. For example, the plurality of operation related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different kinds of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration A presentation image different from any one of the images SYG may be made to appear as a specific operation-related presentation, without appearing any of the images SYG.

  However, in order to more securely conceal which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive effects, the effect reception period for the operation buttons 410 occurs and the effect of the sword decorative body 5001. It is more desirable to set the time required from when a specific operation-related effect is performed (start of effect) to when the effect receiving period occurs when the reception period occurs.

  In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting operation for any operation means (“Operation Or the like), and always operate a specific operating means among the plurality of operating means regardless of how the plurality of operating means are allowed to receive effects. May be displayed to prompt the user. The point is that the same effect mode is made to appear in any of the situation where the operation to the operation button 410 can be accepted as an operation instruction and the situation where the operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is also accepted as an operation instruction. By doing this, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is available for effect presentation.

  Further, in the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 330 (c), it is concealed whether the operation with respect to the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. Even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is allowed to receive effects, or the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not allowed to receive effects (in any of the first to third situations described later) Even, the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the light emitting state, and the operation on the operation button 410 is urged. However, instead of this, both of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, and light emitting means may be provided on the sword decorative body 5001 side to make the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 You may make it light both.

  Here, in this rendering example (first rendering mode), the rendering status in which the image shown in FIG. 330 (c) appears is only the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Whether in the first situation in which the effect can be accepted, in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 Both are set to be in any of the third situations where the effects can be accepted. When the second situation (a situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001) occurs among the plurality of situations, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) The degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than when a situation occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001) in the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit judgment is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410) It is desirable to make it lower than the rate of occurrence of

  And in this example of presentation (the 1st presentation mode), when it is in the situation of either the 1st situation (operation button 410) and the 3rd situation (operation button 410, sword ornaments 5001), operation to operation button 410 When the second situation (the sword decoration 5001) or the third situation (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001). When the operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 (when the progress of "GG" is made in the figure), the effect is accepted and the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation (FIG. 331 (d), FIG. Is supposed to be done.

  In the effect at the time of operation, the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f), and a predetermined display effect in the effect display device 1600 ("Chance !!") is supposed to be executed. In addition, as a predetermined display effect, for example, "chance !!" suggested to be a relatively low expectation, and "superheat !!" suggested to be a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of effect modes such as the above, and displaying any of these effect modes according to the effect reception, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit. Similarly to this, with regard to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing a presentation mode in which the operation of moving the display area to the front is not performed, one of those presentation modes is made to appear according to the reception of presentation , You may make it indicate the degree of expectation concerning grant of benefits. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation-time effect according to this effect example (the first effect mode), in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f), the effect is accepted by the operation by the player. Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control to bring the operating means into an operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331 (d), although the operation by the player is performed on the operation button 410, the operation is performed according to the effect reception. It is possible to execute control for reciprocating the sword decoration 5001 on the side not being performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although the effect reception is generated as a result of the player performing the operation on the operation button 410 and the effect at the time of the operation on the operation button 410 side is performed, although the operation is performed, Even when the button 410 is not operated and the sword decorative body 5001 having a higher degree of expectation is operated, it may be that the effect reception is performed and the effect is performed at the time of the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), as a result of the player removing the sword by the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the position according to the reception of the effect. It is possible to execute control to maintain the extraction position (extraction state) instead of returning to the (insertion state). As a result, the sword decorative body 5001 moves from the sword position (the state of the sword) to the position of the sword (the state of the sword) based on the operation by the player, and is maintained in such a state. When the operation will be performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is performed by the effect when the operation button 410 is operated and the effect when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, the sword decoration at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to make it feel that the effect at the time of operation resulting from the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is being performed.

  Then, after the effect at the time of operation (FIGS. 331 (d) and (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 331 (e), a reach state can be formed and reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, either of the effect when the operation button 410 is operated or the effect when the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Even if it is executed, when the predetermined time has passed (at a stage before the reach effect is started) the state of the sword decoration 5001 not operating (sword position (sword state)) It will control to return. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side and returns to the initial position (non-driven position) for the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable for the operating state (reciprocation or maintenance in the cutting state) to be continued for a period of time. In addition, with regard to the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state so that the driving force is not applied is earlier than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position). More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 330 and 331, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) Common (specific) operation related rendering is started and the rendering started (common) (specification), regardless of whether the effect reception is enabled 5001) or the effect reception is not enabled While operation related effects are being executed, a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can be made to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can not be made an effect acceptable. Since the operation button 410 is enabled to receive an effect, the specific operation means (eg, sword decoration 5001) and another operation means (eg, operation button 410) It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, whether or not a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) can be accepted, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001) is Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is rendered acceptable without being accepted, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are provided when an operation opportunity is given while such common (specific) operation related rendering is performed. Combined with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration 5001 is enabled to receive effects, the sword decoration 5001 is allowed to receive effects. You will be able to mislead as if it were not. That is, in this case, it is possible to prompt operation to the operation button 410 on the low side, not the sword decorative body 5001 on the high side of the ratio at which the proportion with high expectation is relatively performed when the effect is received. It is expected to provide an interest as to which operation means should be operated when common (specific) operation-related effects are performed.

  In addition, when the operation means of the side (the side in which the effect reception period is not generated) which is not made available for effect reception is operated while such common (specific) operation-related effects are being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the disadvantage that the effect reception period is digested and the remaining time is reduced by the amount of such an erroneous operation.

  However, at the time of the above operation, when the operation means of the side (the side where the effect reception period is not generated) is not operated while the common (specific) operation related effect is being performed, the operation means is operated Although the acceptance of the effect required for the execution of the effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection itself of the operation is performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost, and it is therefore urged to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is permitted to be rendered and carefully operated. become able to.

  Further, in the example of the effect (the first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side is Although it was made to be performed, you may make the effect content at the time of these operation mutually different. For example, in the effect at the time of operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed by the effect at the time of operation on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) If a unique effect sound is generated or the like) further appears, it is possible to more appropriately improve the fun of the game when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is received for effect.

  In addition, when preparing another effect mode that can be performed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is operated, the generation of the other effect mode is involved. When the effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001), the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set. The effect reception period for the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001 if the first operation means is the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001) is set Even in any of the cases, it may be possible to perform an effect at the time of operation when the first operation means is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 330 (c). That is, in this case, when there is an operation for the first operation means when the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set while common (specific) operation-related effects are being performed, When another effect mode is executed as an effect at the time of operation, while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (No. When there is an operation for the first operation means while the effect reception period for the operation means for 2 is set), another effect mode is not executed as an operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated The same operation effect will be performed. The point is that when the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the operation effect on the second operation means side is the second The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, in addition to the effect mode performed by the effect at the time of operation of the 2nd operation means side, when making another effect mode appear as the effect at the time of operation, the second operation is not performed, but the second operation The effect at the time of operation may be performed as effect contents different from the effect at the time of operation on the means side.

  In the above example of rendering (the first rendering mode), a situation where an instruction display for prompting an operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related rendering is being performed includes the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. The first situation in which only the operation for the operation button 410 is acceptable, the second situation in which only the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is acceptable, the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 Are set to correspond to any of the third situations in which effects can be received. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is produced when the effect reception is made, whereas in the third situation, the operation is different from either the first condition or the second condition. It is desirable that a rendition or the other rendition mode described above (different from the first rendition and the second rendition at the time of operation) is displayed. However, in the above-mentioned effect example, the above-mentioned third situation may not be necessarily required.

  Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-described example of presentation is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. Above, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331 (f) among the effect examples (first effect mode), the operation by the player is not performed as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331 (d). The control for operating the other operation button 410 may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side on which the player has not operated, and in this case, the operation means on the side on which the player has operated is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not it is. However, the control to operate the operation means on the side where the operation has not been performed by the player is earlier than the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state be ended so that the gaze by the player is naturally returned to the gaming board 5 side.

  When the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying a driving force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 332 to 335 are to be executed as effects that indicate the progress of the effect until one of the first effect result and the second effect result appears, and the specific operation-related effect is the effect If the first effect result appears as a result of the effect, it is suggested that the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and if the second effect result appears as the result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of presentation (2nd presentation mode) in which it is suggested that the presentation acceptance period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produces among them.

  In FIG. 332 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 332 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 332 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is simultaneously displayed in the inside, and it is depicted that the lightning image IZ is acting on those images BTG and SYG. As described above, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of operation related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different kinds of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation for any of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) will be made available for reception soon, as it is unclear which one of the decoration 5001 and the decoration 5001 is available for reception. You will be able to

  In FIG. 332 (c), the specific operation related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b) is developed, and a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed In the display area of the device 1600, an effect of pushing the other party out of the display area is performed.

  That is, in the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode), “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pushed to each other, It is executed as an effect such as which one of BTG and SYG is left in the display area, and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is received When a period occurs and a rendering result (second rendering result) in which the sword decorative image SYG is left appears, a rendering reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (the second effect mode), the effects shown in FIGS. 332 (b) and (c) are “any of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001. Even when it occurs, it corresponds to a specific operation related effect that is allowed to appear prior to the occurrence of those periods.

  In the left side of FIG. 332 (c), a state in which the button image BTG is dominant in remaining in the display area is depicted, and in the right side, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed. It depicts the situation that is prevailing to remain in the territory. In a specific operation-related presentation, such inferiority / predominance situations are constantly changing as time passes.

  FIG. 333 (d) shows that the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c) and the button image BTG is left in the display area. The effect that portrays is performed (the first effect result). When progressing to the contents of this effect, the effect accepting period for the sword decorative body 5001 does not occur, and only the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (Fig. 332 (b), (c)) is performed which suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is permitted to receive effects. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 333 (d)) By being executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted (the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays for prompting the operation (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is capable of accepting effects (being in the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, the operation to the operation button 410 is also prompted by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the light emitting state.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is a case where the effect is developed and progressed through a specific operation related effect (such as FIG. 332 (b), (c)), or without passing through the specific operation related effect. In some cases, there is a case in which the rendering progress (for example, the rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 332 (a)) is made. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for giving a benefit be higher than that.

  Further, with regard to the length of the effect reception period, when the effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 after the specific operation related effect is performed, the specific operation related effect The ratio in which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed without passing Should be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the effect during the specific operation-related effects, which will be described later.

  In FIG. 333 (e), as the result of the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means being performed while the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed according to the operation It is a depiction of how an effect at the time of operation is being performed.

  The effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 333 (e) is the same as that of FIG. 331 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is performed in the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, although the operation by the player is performed on the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second according to the reception of the effect. The same applies to the point that control to reciprocate between the positions and control (control to put in an operating state) is enabled. In addition, as a predetermined display effect, for example, "chance !!" suggested to be a relatively low expectation, and "superheat !!" suggested to be a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of effect modes such as the above, and displaying any of these effect modes according to the effect reception, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit. Similarly to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, it is possible to have an effect mode that does not perform an operation to displace the display area to the front side, and cause any of the effect modes to appear according to the effect reception Then, it may be made to suggest the degree of expectation concerning privilege grant. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 333 (e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 333 (f), a reach state is formed and reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 may be performed during the execution period of the reach effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation effect is performed (the reach effect is started Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the non-operation state (sword state)). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side and returns to the initial position (non-driven position) for the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable for the operating state (reciprocation or maintenance in the cutting state) to be continued for a period of time. In addition, with regard to the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state so that the driving force is not applied is earlier than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position). More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 334 (g), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decorative image SYG is in the display area. A presentation depicting the situation left is being performed (second presentation result). When progressing to this effect content, no effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs, and only an effect accepting period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (Fig. 332 (b), (c)) is performed which suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is permitted to receive effects. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 334 (g)) By being executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted among a plurality of operation means (a generation accepting period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as "Keep out sword" or a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Then, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (that is, during the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit (the sword decoration 5001 itself may be made to emit light) having the sword decoration 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is made to emit light. Also by doing this, the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is urged.

  Incidentally, the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is not limited to the case where the effect is developed through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.), or without the specific operation-related effect In some cases, there is a case in which the rendering progress (for example, the rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 332 (a)) is made. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for giving a benefit be higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is possible that the degree of expectation for the provision of benefits is higher than in the case where the expectation for the provision of benefits is lower than in the case where the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed after the specific operation related effect. desirable.

  In FIG. 334 (h), as the result of the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means being performed while the effect shown in FIG. It is a depiction of how the production at the time of operation is being performed.

  Similarly to the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the operation effect shown in FIG. 334 (h) is basically similar to the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), while displacing the specific decoration member SDY to the front side of the display area At 1600, a predetermined display effect is performed. In addition, here, although it is made to display the production | presentation aspect such as "superheat !!" which is suggested that it is a relatively high expectation degree according to presentation reception, it is suggested that it is a relatively low expectation degree “Chance !!” may be displayed. Similarly to this, with regard to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode in which the operation for displacing the display area to the front side is not performed is provided, and any of these effect modes is made to appear according to the effect reception In this case, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for awarding a benefit. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 334 (h), the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself is changed to any of the plurality of modes described above based on the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 From stage 0 form shown in FIG. 311, it is possible to change from stage 1 form to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form), and depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation for awarding a bonus such as a big hit Height is to be suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 334 (i), even when the effect during operation (FIG. 334 (h)) is ended and the specific decoration member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driven position), The sword decorative body 5001 is not returned to the state of the sword, but is kept in the state of the sword. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the scrapped state, and thereafter (during the period when reach production is performed, etc.), the sword decorative body 5001 is put into the katto state An operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and at that time, it is possible to further execute an operation effect according to the operation to the knife state.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) in two steps, and the first step operation (operation to the scraping state) and the second step operation Since the effect at the time of operation comes to be performed according to each operation (operation to the state of sword), not only when the operation to the operation means (the sword decorative body 5001) is performed, but also the first step In the non-operation period until the second-step operation (operation to the sword state) is performed after the operation (operation to the sword state) is performed, it is expected to preferably maintain the game entertainment for the operation Become so. Note that it is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation are operation modes different from each other (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). Moreover, it is desirable that the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the first step and the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the second step have different effect contents.

  In addition, when the effect at the time of operation according to the operation of the first step (FIG. 334 (h)) is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extraction state, and is not maintained in the extraction state In such a case, it is desirable not to give the second operation opportunity. In the operation effect according to the first step operation, is it possible to maintain the sword decorative body 5001 at a position (surgery state) at which the second stage operation opportunity (operational opportunity from the sword state to the sword state) can be given? It may be performed as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation of no. That is, when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the scraped state but is returned to the scout state, it is substantially impossible to provide the second stage operation opportunity (operational opportunity from the scout state to the scout state) It is clear that it will be taken. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, as a result of performing the effect at the time of the operation according to the operation of the first step (FIG. 334 (h)), when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the scrapped state, when the predetermined time has passed (reach effect Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword state)). In this case, however, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated (reciprocated for at least half of a period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position)). It is desirable to keep the operation or the maintenance in the cutting state). In addition, with regard to the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state so that the driving force is not applied is earlier than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position). More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 335 (j), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 333 (d) Thus, an effect is depicted in which the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) or FIG. 334 (g) Or the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears. Note that which of the rendering contents appears is determined in advance in the determination processing of the rendering pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) (Here, the lightning image IZ) is continued, and it is made to indicate that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), the instruction display for prompting the operation (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed either, as shown in FIG. It is different from the case of the effect shown in). As a result, although the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize something.

  FIG. 335 (k) shows that the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG as a result of the effect shown in FIG. There is a production that will be broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), all the effect elements (button image BTG) that have suggested that the operation on the operation button 410 can be effect accepted are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) that the operation to the operation button 410 is enabled to be accepted, the effect shown in such FIG. 335 (k) appears This makes it possible to question whether the effect reception period for the operation button 410 will occur and occur.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (is about to disappear), and the remaining time until it is clearly indicated to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs is reduced. Suggest that

  As the result shown in FIG. 335 (k) is developed, the outer shape of 靄 MY approaches not the operation button 410 (button image BTG) but the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). A presentation depicting the situation has been made.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed yet, it may be suggested that the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 may occur instead of the operation button 410 due to the outer shape of the eyelid MY. You will be able to

  Also in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation related effects (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately disappearing) than in FIG. 335 (k), and it is clearly shown to which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs. It is suggested that the remaining time of

  Then, in the example of the effect (the second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i) is further developed and the eyelid MY is not displayed, the sword decorative image SYG is displayed and the image is displayed as shown in FIG. The effect shown in (g) is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effects (FIG. 332 (b), (c)) being performed, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even in the case (FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 335 (j)), since there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur, it is intended to maintain the game interest. Will be able to

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed in the effect display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 335 (j)) The effect on the sword decorative body 5001 by confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ appearing in the specific operation-related effect (FIG. 332 (b), (c)) is still continued. It is possible to grasp whether the possibility that the reception period will occur is left, and this also makes it possible to maintain the game interest.

  In this presentation example (second presentation mode), when the presentation shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears, the button image BTG is not displayed by に よ っ て MY (FIG. 335 (k)), When the effect is developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) is not to display the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and to display the button image BTG. It can also be said that the effect suggests that the effect reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) progresses, the outline of the eyebrows MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) The effect pattern approaching the outer shape of) may be set to appear, and when the effect pattern appears, then the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) may be performed. When such a rendition pattern can be performed, the rendition shown in FIGS. 335 (j) and (k) conceals which of the plurality of operation means is available for rendition It will be performed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, after providing the operation button 410 as the operable operation means, also in the effect situation shown in FIG. 334 (h) among the effect examples (second effect aspect), FIG. 333 (e). Similar to the effect situation shown in, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side on which the player has not performed the operation may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side on which the player has not operated, and in this case, the operation means on the side on which the player has operated is also operated. It may be designed appropriately as to whether or not it is.

  When the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying a driving force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying a driving force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Third presentation mode]
FIGS. 336 to 339 are basically the same as the second rendering mode as to the specific operation-related rendering, but are diagrams showing another rendering example (third rendering mode) different from the second rendering mode. It is.

  In FIG. 336 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 336 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 336 (a) is being performed. However, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), in the specific operation related rendering according to this rendering example (third rendering mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the rendering display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that either of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 be made available for presentation soon.

  In particular, in this presentation example (third presentation mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated respectively. This makes it easy for any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 to be able to receive an effect immediately when the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is made to be recognizable. In this case, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 from the initial position to the operation position, but in comparison with the operation position to be operated when giving the operation opportunity Each one at a slower speed.

  According to such a configuration, the operation means still having time until the effect reception period occurs, or the operation means in which the effect reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol variation ends Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) will each operate. Therefore, since there is still time remaining until the effect reception period occurs, or from the time when the effect reception period does not occur in the first place until the end of the symbol variation, game interest for those operations is It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  And in this effect example (the third effect mode), not the effect display in the effect display device 1600 but the specific operation related effect is thus performed by each operation (FIG. 336 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 After the start, basically, the same rendering progress as the second rendering mode is performed.

  For example, among the effects shown in FIG. 336 (c), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is displayed except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410” The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 332 (b).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the state where the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated from the initial position (position when not driving) It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), it is suggested that any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted as a result of such a movable effect as well.

  Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), for the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, after the specific operation related effect is started, a position different from the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) respectively And it is made to position as an operation state (state to which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is extended compared to the case where the operation opportunity is immediately given without the operation-related effect being performed. When the operation means is employed, even if such an operation related effect is finally finished, it is necessary for the operation means on the side where the effect can be accepted to be operated at least to the operation position. Therefore, an operation-related effect will be further extended by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such an interval will reduce the fun of the game.

  Therefore, in this presentation example (third presentation mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are both in the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation related presentation is performed. It is made to position as an operation state (a state where a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is ended and the effect receiving period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect receiving period has occurred is operated to the operation position only in a shorter time, or the effect receiving period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operation means on the other side to the initial position only in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the extension during the operation related effects. In addition, until the effect reception period occurs, the operation accepting side of the operation target is positioned as the operating state at a position different from the operating position, so that the effect receiving period of the operating state is It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not occurred yet.

  Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c) is developed and the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed using the button image BTG Except for the display corresponding to "410", the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 332 (c). However, even in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively in the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position It is made to position as an operation state (state to which driving force was given) at a position different from any of the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 336 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the state when they are at the initial position (non-driven position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). As described above, by intentionally changing the modes of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the modes of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, their alignment can be made in the near It can be suggested that the effect to be made (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 operate) is generated.

  In addition, when the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is that the button image BTG The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 333 (d), except that they are displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the operation button 410 is in the state of operating at the operation position, and the sword decorative body 5001 is at the initial position. It is in the state operated at a position different from (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), extension during the operation related effects is suitably suppressed. Become so.

  As the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is firstly After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display for generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 and prompting the operation (character display such as “press”, effect You may make it display the bar display which shows the remaining time of a reception period. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed as "a mode moved to the operation position", but the operation button at the time of the display 410 is a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. In this manner, by causing the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect to be displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the deviation of these modes will be filled soon In this case, it can be suggested in advance that the operation button 410 moves to the operation position.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f) is to be performed, and the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 333 (e). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state where it is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). The sword decorative body 5001 is operated at a position different from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 337 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 337 (g), a reach state is formed and reach effect may be performed. Is also as described with reference to FIG. 333 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is performed, the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword decorative body 5001. Is the same as the one described with reference to FIG. 334 (g) except that the instruction content regarding is "pushed in" and that the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode moved to the operation position". It is the contents.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. It is in the operating state, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword decorative body 5001 is moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), extension during the operation related effects is suitably suppressed Will be

  In addition, even as the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode moved to the operation position)”. First, after performing the display effect, move the sword decorative body 5001 to the operation position, and generate an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 to prompt the operation (a character such as “push in” A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, while the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is in a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. In this manner, by causing the sword decorative image SYG appearing as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect to be displayed as a mode different from the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes is achieved. It can be suggested in advance that it will be buried soon (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i) is to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 334 (h). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. The sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driven position).

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 338 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 338 (j), a reach state is formed and reach effect may be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), the effect display in the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 "at one time, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 335 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), unlike the effects shown in FIG. 335 (j) and the effects shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are at initial positions ( It is in the state operated at a position different from the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. It is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred and that the possibility of the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 still remains by making such an operation condition as well. Will be able to

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) comes to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (k) The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively at the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. Both are operating at different positions.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) being performed, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is to be performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (l). The street presentation content will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively at the initial position (the position at the non-driving time) and the operation position. Both are operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m), it is more desirable to make the outline of the eyelid MY approach the sword ornament 5001 in the operation position, not the sword ornament 5001 in the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is further developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) is not to display the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and to display the button image BTG. It can also be said that the effect suggests that the effect reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) progresses, the outline of the eyelid MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) The effect pattern approaching the outer shape of) may be set to appear, and when the effect pattern appears, thereafter, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 339 (k) and (l) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. It will be performed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In this rendering example (third rendering mode), the driving source for applying the driving force to the operation button 410 is different from the driving source for applying the driving force to the sword decorative body 5001. It may be the same drive source.

  In each of the above-described presentation modes and their other examples, it is basic when “a button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410” appears as a presentation result of performing a specific operation-related presentation. The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, the effect at the time of operation on the button side is performed. Become. In addition, basically, when the “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration 5001” appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration Of the body 5001, an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decorative body 5001, and when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted for rendering, an effect at the time of operation on the sword character side is performed. In this respect, in the operation effect on the button side, based on the result of the effect drawing according to the big hit judgment, the effect on success (operating the specific decorative member SDY) and the effect on failure (the specific decorative member SDY not operating) While it is supposed that one is made to appear, the effect at the time of operation on the sword character side is also the effect at the time of success (operating the specific decorative member SDY) and the effect at the time of failure based on the result of the effect drawing It is supposed that either (with the specific decoration member SDY not operated) is made to appear, and the contents of those effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition to effect on whether or not the specific decoration member SDY operates, operation effect on the button side and effect on the sword character side are the same as each other for the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600. The contents may be used.

  Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to specific operation-related effects, effects are given to which of the plurality of operation means is provided with the operation opportunity, and the operation means according to the result is An opportunity for operation was given. However, there may be a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed by the effect contents to which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, even if any effect results appear, such as a specific operation means being pressed by each other It may be made to be.

  For example, in any mode (for example, operation in a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the cutting state is put into the scraping state with respect to one operation means, and in a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the cutting state is put into the sword state The effect of whether or not the operation opportunity is given may be performed by the operation of, and the operation opportunity may be given to the operation means in a mode according to the result. In this case, while the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated in a state different from either the sword state or the sword state, and the operation in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword decorative body 5001 in the inserted state or the extracted state when the rendering result of the setting is indicated.

  Also, when the symbol variation in the holding state is digested, it is determined that a specific operation related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation when the symbol change is in the holding state (digested before this) The effect suggested from within the execution period of the symbol variation may be performed. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given only to any of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given It will be possible to maintain the game-related fun of operation for a longer period of time for both. In addition, as such an effect, when the design variation in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in the hold state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to operate a plurality of provided operating means.

  In the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images (button images BTG, etc.) corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) Although the sword decorative image SYG is displayed, these images may not necessarily be displayed. The point is that when a specific operation-related effect is executed, one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the effect reception period occurs for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, those operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to conceal with respect to which of the means the presentation acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is not necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different kinds of operation means, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration A presentation image different from any one of the images SYG may be made to appear as a specific operation-related presentation, without appearing any of the images SYG.

  However, even when adopting the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while the specific operation related effect is being performed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation related effect is ended. One of BTG (image corresponding to operation button 410) and sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate to which of these operation means the effect reception period occurs. It will be. Then, in this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation related effect. In order to execute the specific operation-related effect, the specific operation related effect may be performed for which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs in which the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ or the like) has been It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping a lightning toward one of two rocks, and when a lightning falls on one of the rocks, a button image BTG is made to appear from the rock, and the other By making the sword decoration image SYG appear from the inside of the rock when lightning falls on the rock on the side, it is possible to make the stage progress to the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) or FIG. 334 (g) . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping the lightning toward one rock, and when the lightning falls on the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. It is also possible to cause the effect to progress to the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) or FIG. 334 (g). The point is that it is desirable to make the rendering progress as rendering content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the rendering result of the specific operation related rendering.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, a specific case is available in the case where the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and in the case where the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (execution of effects) to the occurrence of those effect reception periods to be the same. In addition, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs only for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and the effect reception period enabling generation of a specific effect (operation effect at the time of operation) depending on in which of the effect modes the effect is performed The ratio set for the specific operation means among the plurality of operation means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and their other examples, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect When operating the operation means on the side (eg, FIG. 333 (e)), control is performed to return the operation means on the side not operated to the initial position after the elapse of a predetermined time based on the time of the operation. You may However, from when the operation means is not used as a reference, depending on at which timing of the effect reception period the user operates the operation means on the side not operated, until the operation is ended. It is desirable to make the time lengths of

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the less the remaining time of the effect reception period is, the more the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated. It can be said that the player is likely to have a conflict as to whether to operate the operation means on the side not indicated in the specific operation-related presentation. Therefore, according to which timing of the effect reception period is operated (according to the level of possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side not operated is operated and then the operation is ended. The length of time up to (a possibility that "when the operation means on the side indicated by a specific operation-related effect is operated, the effect reception has been generated and the effect at the time of operation has been performed") By making the length of time of appealing to the player different), it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, when any of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is not operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. All may be operated.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is started and before the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect A predetermined effect may be provided to indicate the proportion of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) to be displayed. Although a movable object effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, in this case, a specific movable object (here, a movable object that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed , Moving the movable body different from the specific decoration member SDY) operates the specific movable body more reliably based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed It is desirable to make it possible.

  In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the rendering result (the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, etc.) after the specific operation-related rendering starts. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is used to generate the effect reception period regarding the specific effect (effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY) While related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. This makes it possible to create a special effect aspect as if the effect is shown and the effect is ended despite the fact that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect is performed. It is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment while playing a game. In addition, when the operation with respect to one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means is received while the specific operation related rendition is being performed, a predetermined effect is to be performed based on the effect reception. Then, it is desirable to indicate a rate at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the high expectation side is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the above-mentioned specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given in the middle of execution of a specific operation-related effect, there is a relatively high degree of expectation among a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) It is preferable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game entertainment when the player is aware that it was in the middle stage of a specific operation-related effect .

  In addition, in the middle of a stage where the specific operation-related effects related to a plurality of operation means are being performed, when the effect reception period is generated only for the operation buttons 410 of those operation means, within the effect reception period When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in step S, a special operation effect is performed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is performed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Even if any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) appears as a rendering result, the degree of expectation for giving a benefit may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the effect as the specific operation-related effect during the time from when the specific operation-related effect is started until the effect result is indicated, As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low degree of expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and it is possible to grant the privilege more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable that the degree of expectation be high.

  In addition, in each effect reception period described above, usually, when there is an operation by the player, the effect is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the effect reception period elapses Alternatively, an automatic button effect mode may be set in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed before. According to such an automatic button effect mode, since the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the forgetting the operation. Become. And, when the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect is performed while such an automatic button effect mode is set, the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect Even if there is an effect, the same effect during operation as when the operation means is operated is performed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

  However, even when the automatic button effect mode is set, the effect reception period is generated only for the operation buttons 410 in the middle of a specific operation related effect being performed. In the case of causing the special operation effect to be performed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, it is desirable that the automatic operation function not be performed. After this, even if the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related effects being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. It is desirable that the same effect at the time of operation as that at the time of operating the operation means be performed without the operation (the automatic button function is made to function). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the specific operation related rendition is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function works, and it becomes possible to enjoy the game entertainment It will be expected to suppress the decline of

  In addition, about the setting change concerning ON / OFF of automatic button production mode, it is possible not only in the period when symbol variation is not executed by the operation of operation button 410 but also during the period when symbol variation is executed, for example. It is desirable to For example, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated, when the operation button 410 is operated, the setting of the automatic button effect mode can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs. When the operation button 410 is operated, the automatic button effect mode can be set and changed from the off state to the on state in addition to the effect upon operation being performed according to the operation. is there. However, even if the automatic button effect mode is turned on, it may be thought that it may be desirable to occasionally generate an effect at the time of operation by the player, so for example, the automatic button effect mode is Within the effect reception period for the operation button 410 when it is turned on, the operation for the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled as well as the operation button 410, and the operation for the other operation means is performed. Unlike when the operation button 410 is operated, the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated is generated while the automatic button effect mode is maintained in the ON state, unlike when the operation button 410 is operated. desirable.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect mode is switched from the off state to the on state and when it is switched from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the second and third effect modes described above and their other examples, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 as an effect result of performing a specific operation-related effect. In the state where the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the operation opportunity corresponding to them is given, but it is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (effect reception for operation button 410 is received If the operation opportunity (rendering acceptance period) is given to the sword decorative body 5001 when the second display mode is given and the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode Any display content may be adopted as

  For example, in the above-described second and third effect modes, the effect image CG (first one) shown in FIG. 340 (a) in place of the effect images shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 337 (e). The display mode is displayed, and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b) is displayed instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 334 (g) and 338 (h). It is also good. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect portion and the other background image (a portion that has been displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect or the effect image TG (second display mode) (substantially the entire effect in the display area is Partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) shown in FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 334 (g), FIG. 337 (e) and FIG. Unlike in the case where the decoration image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the giving of the operation opportunity is performed using the substantially entire area of the display area (until displaying other effect images such as the background portion which may be expected) By being done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (a), a shield (a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) in which the operation button 410 is incorporated in the design is held. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b), the sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it is suggested that the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) should be operated. Thus, there is no need to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 itself. It is desirable to display as an effect image incorporating an aspect such as at least a partial shape or a partial design of the operation means.

  Further, with regard to the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this manner, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG Depending on which of the (second display mode) is displayed, it may be performed with an effect that suggests different degrees of expectation. For example, when the effect image TG (the second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for giving the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (the first display mode) appears. In addition, a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared as effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG (second display mode), and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. It may also indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, the expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears when displayed in a specific display mode. You may

  In addition, with regard to the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (it is desirable that the effect status is relatively high), There is a case where it is desirable that the operation-related effect is not executed (for example, after a prophecy effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed) (it is preferable that the effect has a relatively low expectation) It may be made to be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the effect, an effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being performed (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect being performed). When displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, the effect reception period also for another operation means (for example, sword decoration 5001 etc.) not corresponding to the button image BTG May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is performed. It becomes possible to impart an interest different from that of the case where the button image BTG appears with respect to the operation while the effects are relatively high in expectation, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Another operation means may be an operation means different from that of the sword decoration 5001.

  In addition, when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, an operation on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG in the effect reception period is performed. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, “a specific operation-related effect is executed and the relative It is desirable that it is suggested that the presentation status has a higher expectation than in the production status in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production status with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the button image BTG appears in the effect status with a relatively low degree of expectation, the operation means (operation button corresponding to the button image BTG in the effect reception period) When 410) is operated, the special effect presentation period is not executed by ending the effect reception period for another operation means occurring at the same time, and according to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410) It is desirable that an effect at the time of operation be performed.

  On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not performed and the effect is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG in the effect reception period is When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended, and the special operation effect is to be executed when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not performed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated, and the operation is not performed. Even when the operation means different from the means is operated, the effect at the time of operation when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the above-mentioned automatic button effect mode is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect being performed Even when the effect reception period occurs with respect to the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period. It is desirable to make the automatic button function work. However, when the button image BTG appears without a specific operation-related effect being executed when the above-mentioned automatic button effect mode is set, operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG Even when the effect reception period is generated for both of the operation means and the operation means other than the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is used even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same effect at the time of operation as that at the time of operation is performed, and the special operation effect that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated is not performed.

  However, within the effect reception period, another operation is performed prior to the specific timing at which the effect at the time of operation (the effect when the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-mentioned automatic button function. In the case where the operation is performed on the operation means and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and the specific timing has arrived. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect when the operating means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, although the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function in the effect reception period, the automatic button effect mode is continued in the on state even after the effect reception period ends. Is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, after the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are reversed, each effect described above (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, in the case where the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without performing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not the specific operation-related effect being performed). When a sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being performed (for example, after a prophecy effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect being performed). In addition to the operation means (the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, the effect reception period is generated also for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410 etc.) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It becomes.

  Further, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes described above and other examples thereof, “a button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410” or an effect result of performing a specific operation related effect, or In the case where any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration 5001" is displayed, and the effect is accepted by the displayed operation means, relative The first operation effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggested to have a relatively low degree of expectation. It is possible to cause any of the second operation effects (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) to be made to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation time effect, which is the effect content that suggests the, is to be executed. However, when the first operation effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period which occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the first operation effect is the button image BTG (first operation effect). When the display mode is displayed is executed based on the effect reception on the operation button 410 and when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the effect reception on the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable to indicate the same expectations as when implemented on the basis of. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, the effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) having a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. Even if the first operation effect is executed based on that the effect is accepted, the effect image (sword decoration) having a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of effecting that a specific operation related effect is performed As compared with the case where the image SYG (the second display mode) is displayed, any disadvantage is not generated on the rendering result, so that the decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described timer effect (FIGS. 148 to 207), it is possible to set “the assignment of the operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect object (one of the plurality of effect modes to be the timer object) is there. That is, in the timer effect directed to "providing an operation opportunity to the operation means", when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), an operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means This makes it possible to enjoy the effects at the time of operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect target of the timer effect, when the operation with respect to the operation means is performed, the effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery Make it possible for any of the adverse effects to appear. However, when the “operation opportunity to the operation means” is given as the target of the timer effect, the proportion of the effect result that is advantageous for the player is high, as compared with the case where the timer effect is not the target. It is more desirable to The percentage may be 100%.

  In this respect, when the effect pattern for which the timer effect is executed for which the effect is directed to the operation means (for example, giving the operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001)) appears, the operation effect for the operation means In addition, a specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears to give an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect on which one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is performed.

  According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation related effect are performed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). It is possible to improve the fun of the game when played.

  However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed until just before that one effect target (the operation of the sword decoration 5001). There is a concern that it is not possible to understand which of the effects should be closely watched, the attention is distracted, and the entertainment interest drops in reverse.

  Therefore, in the case where a specific timer effect and a specific operation related effect are respectively performed on one effect target (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value becomes a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), "specific operation related effect" is not executed and the count value It is desirable that the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced after it becomes a predetermined value (here, the count “0”).

  FIG. 341 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively performed on one effect target (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001). Note that the following timer effect corresponds to the above-described notice-side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processing according to the timer effect.

  In FIG. 341 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the state of the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  341 (b) shows that the timer effect has been started (here, the countdown is displayed) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) while the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. Indicates the situation. In addition, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 341 (b), "specific operation related rendering" is not yet executed, and it is unclear whether the timer rendering is intended for any of the renderings. There is.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (while it is unclear which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates prepared for the effect is being executed). Here, the count "0" is reached and this is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” as the count value is displayed in this way, the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced as shown in FIG. 341 (d). In addition, when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not "0", and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) A specific operation-related effect on which one of the two is displayed is performed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (the assignment of the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001), those effects are still Since overlapping in sequence is avoided, it is possible to enjoy each of the different effects.

  However, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) when a specific operation-related effect is in an unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it will not be recognized that the game is played as a game, and the amusement of the game will be reduced. Therefore, in this rendering example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), between the count display reaching a predetermined value (here, the count "0") and the start of a specific operation-related rendering, An effect is suggested that indicates the type of effect (the assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001) that the timer effect is directed to.

  In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the display of “Kana” is performed first on the effect display device 1600. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect is directed to the effect of "the giving of the operation opportunity (the operation opportunity by the" Kado ") to the sword decorative body 5001."

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed ("Katou" Because "specific operation related effects" are started to be produced while the player side recognizes that the operation opportunity is given by "", it is possible to improve the game interest. become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when “納” is displayed in the effect display device 1600 It may also be displayed continuously.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the sword decorative body 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, Reciprocating motion in the up and down direction) is performed, and this also indicates that "the opportunity to operate the sword decorative body 5001 (operational opportunity by I try to suggest it.

  In addition, about the predetermined operation | movement by such a sword decorative body 5001, not only when timer production is making "a grant of the operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001" a production target, count display also when making other production targets It may be performed when 0 becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is targeted for, but functions as an effect that indicates that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined action by the sword decorative body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the start of the effect to be the effect target, and the timer effect is the effect target It is performed at the same time as the timing when the effect that suggests the effect type is started is started or before this, and during the execution state, the effect that indicates the effect type that the timer effect is targeted for is also being executed It can be said that it is important to

FIG. 341 (d) shows an effect situation in which “specific operation related effect” is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, in addition to the fact that the count value has already been hidden, the effect that suggests the type of effect for which the timer effect is the effect is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is also completed. However, with regard to effects that indicate the type of effect that the timer effect is targeted for, or a predetermined action by the sword decorative body 5001, it is important to execute before a specific operation-related effect is started, so The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

  Then, after the “specific operation-related effect” is started in this way, the effects will be developed in the order of FIGS. 341 (e) to (h). Because the contents are substantially the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 334 (g) to (i) or FIGS. 336 (d) and 338 (h) to (j), the details will be omitted.

  In addition, as a timer effect performed in connection with a specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 and another timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of the predetermined effect drawing. It may be made feasible. That is, another timer effect is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 in that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, but the specific operation-related effect is an effect. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) according to the timing to be started (strictly, slightly before this), and continues even after the specific operation-related effects are started It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, a privilege is awarded ( Expectations for the jackpot) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect will be simultaneously developed, but at the same time when the effect situation where the effect is simultaneously developed appears, the specific operation-related effect is Regardless of which of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are shown as the rendering result, their rendering value is the same as the expectation for the same bonus award (big hit) Will be the same. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to substantially lose the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, any of the effects It is not possible to understand what should be focused on, and it will be avoided that the situation where the attention is distracted occurs. However, in order to improve the game interest, in the case where an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are simultaneously developed appears, it is more advantageous than in the case where the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341 appears. It is desirable that the degree of expectation be high.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), first, a display that suggests the type of the effect target in the effect display device 1600 ( Although "Kado" is performed, the display indicating such an object of effect may be performed also when another effect mode is selected as the effect of timer effect. However, among a plurality of effects that may be targeted by the timer, when a specific effect is targeted by the timer, it may not be displayed that suggests which effect the timer effect targets.

  In addition, in each of the effect modes described above and their other examples, prior to giving an operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, the operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. We decided to perform a specific operation-related presentation about whether it will be granted. However, prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the generation of the effect reception period), the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 It does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 (prior to the generation of the effect reception period). An effect pattern for performing the second precursor effect may appear. In the case of performing these omen effects (first omen effect, second omen effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for awarding benefits when a rendition appears, in order to enhance the fun of the game when a specific operation-related rendition is performed.

  Here, for example, as the precursor effect, for example, the fog is generated before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given Display a specific image, such as expressing the appearance of entering. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (position on the layer behind the specific image) which is difficult to be recognized by overlapping with the specific image. After that, the button image BTG is gradually made to gradually change the specific image to non-display (by increasing the transmittance, decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.). It is possible to carry out as an effect etc. which are made to be exposed. In addition, an example of a specific depiction mode according to such a precursor effect will be described later.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) having different degrees of expectation for awarding a bonus (big hit), It is possible to have an interest as to which display mode the button image BTG appears in while the precursor image gradually developing the button image BTG is developed.

  It should be noted that the first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decorative body 5001, and the operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 It is important to make it executed as different presentation contents. Moreover, it is desirable to make not only the contents of the effect but also the time required for the effect different.

  In such a prophetic effect, in the meaning of "when giving an operation opportunity to a specific operation means, what is performed as an effect associated with the application of the operation opportunity", the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" It can be said that it is a high-level concept that includes. Then, including the “specific operation-related effects”, the precursor effects are prepared in a plurality of effect modes as described below with reference to FIG. 342, and the effect effects are performed in any of these effect modes. By suggesting how long the effect reception period generated in response to the anticipation effect is based on the duration of the anticipation effect, it is possible to improve the amusement when the anticipation effect is performed. It is more desirable to make it happen.

  FIG. 342 is a time chart for explaining an example of the contents of effects for each type with regard to effects when a plurality of types (prompt effects A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a omen effect.

  First, in the example (provisional effect A) shown in FIG. 342 (a), when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the predictive effect A is started. The precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the precursor effect When A is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a) (prediction effect A), when prognostic effect A is performed, the same time length is given regardless of which operation means is to be given the operation opportunity. The effect reception period (effective period) T1 that is held will occur.

  In the effect reception period (effective period) T1, an instruction display for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the admonition effect A (character display such as "press", and bar display showing remaining time of the effect reception period Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, the above-described operation effect (for example, FIG. 331 (d), (f) or 333 (e), 334 (h), 337 (f), 338 (i), etc. are executed, and the processing for ending the period T1 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (b) (precursor effect B1), when the second predetermined time has elapsed, not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The omen effect B1 is to be started. The precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation related effect” but is executed prior to an operation opportunity being given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation The operation is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) Is supposed to occur.

  In the effect reception period (effective period) T2, an instruction display (a character display such as "press" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the aura effect B1 is displayed Be done. Then, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, based on the effect reception, a predetermined operation effect different from the operation effect described above is executed At the same time, processing for ending the period T2 is performed.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect, the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the accompaniment effect B1 is an effect reception period corresponding to the adjective effect A as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). Thus, depending on which aspect (prediction effect A, prediction effect B1) is performed, it indicates how long the effect receiving period generated in response to the prognostic effect has a length. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the precursor effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (c) (precursor effect B2), when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the progant effect B2 is started to be produced. Like the omen effect B1, this omen effect B2 is also executed prior to the operation when given an operation opportunity to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), not the “specific operation related effect”. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the omen effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from that of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the omen effect B1. Effect reception period) T3 is to occur.

  In addition, also in this effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display for prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the aura effect B2 (a character display such as “press”, a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period Is displayed. In addition, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, based on the effect reception, the effect at the time of operation that is different from the case where the adjective effects A and B1 are performed Is performed, and processing for ending the period T3 at that point is performed.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect, the effect reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the accompaniment effect B2 is an effect reception period corresponding to the accompaniment effect A as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (c). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation related presentation with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed although the precursor effect B2 having a relatively low degree of expectation for awarding a bonus (big hit) is performed. Since it is suggested that the effect reception period (effective period) T3 with a length will be generated, the effect situation as if a specific operation related effect was performed will be produced, and the prognostic effect B2 is It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for awarding benefits differs between when the effect reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, for the prognostic effects B1 and B2, the same effect mode is made to appear from the start of the effect to the timing on the way, and a different effect mode is made to appear after the timing has passed, thereby specifying For the operation means of the above, it may be possible to have an effect on which of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 and the effect reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not necessary to have such effect, and it is also possible to start the effect when different time has passed since the start of the symbol variation even as the timing when the effect B1 and B2 are started. The precursor effects B1 and B2 may have mutually different time lengths.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (precursor effect C), when the third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the precursor effect C is started. The precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation related effect" regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given, and the precursor effect C When C is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (prediction effect C), when the prediction effect C is performed, the same time length is given regardless of which operation means is given to the operation means. The effect reception period (valid period) T4 that is held will occur.

  Even in the effect reception period (effective period) T4, an instruction display for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the admonition effect C (character display such as “press” Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is made by the operation to the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, the effect at the time of the operation described above (for example, FIG. 331 (d), (f) or 333 (e), 334 (h), 337 (f), 338 (i), etc. are executed, and the processing for ending the period T4 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  In this respect, in this example of the effect, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the accompaniment effect C is an effect reception period corresponding to the adjective effect A, as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (d). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the “specific operation-related effect described above” Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as in the case of the accompaniment effect A occur, the game entertaining when the admonition effect C is performed is suitably maintained You will be able to

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 342, the effects of the effect reception period (effective period) are associated with the types of the accompaniment effects A, B1, B2, and C by a one-to-one relationship. Indicated the length of (effective period). However, the effect reception period (the effective period (the effective period) can be set by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period (for example, effect reception period T2 or the like) having a predetermined length to be different for each type of precursor effect The length of) may be suggested.

  Moreover, in each of the above-described presentation modes and their different examples, after a specific operation-related presentation is performed, for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the presentation When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to simulate the same state as that of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 is in the operating state at the operating position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as operating at the operating position. In the example shown in (h), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state at the operating position (strap state), but the sword decorative image SYG is also displayed as the state (strap state) operating at the operating position. It is done.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating that appearance. If a certain operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed, the width as the effect will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the effect, and the game interest will be lowered. I am concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) as described below with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344. With regard to BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

  FIG. 343 is a diagram showing an example of effects of the accompaniment contents when the accompaniment effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the accompaniment contents when the accompaniment effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 343 (a) to (c) show the contents of an effect when a pro-end effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, now, in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination with the number of reservations being 0 Suppose that you are in a situation. Then, in the rendering situation, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), it does not correspond to the “specific operation related rendering” but corresponds only to the sword decorative body 5001 side among the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Assuming that the admonition effect is performed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decorative body 5001 soon. In addition, in the omen effect (as for the omen effect in the other example as well), the effect image imitating the operation means, provided that the predetermined display corresponding to the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given soon will be made. Does not have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decorative body 5001 soon when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the effect reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

  In the aura of effect shown in FIG. 343 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa covering a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and a sword decoration image SYGb covering a red ala with a relatively high degree of expectation Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect contents about which one of them is finally left in the display area appear. Therefore, in this rendering situation, although it can be recognized that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decorative body 5001 soon, the sword decorative image SYGa having a low degree of expectation as the sword decorative image SYG or an expectation of It is concealed as to which of the high sword decoration image SYGb is displayed.

  FIG. 343 (b) shows the rendering result in which the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left, and thus the sword decoration 5001 is in a relatively highly expected rendering situation. It will be suggested that the presentation acceptance period for In the display shown in FIG. 343 (b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that the sword decoration image SYGb covering the red aura is not changed to another effect image (such as the sword decoration image SYGa). .

  FIG. 343 (c) shows an example of effect when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, the instruction display for prompting the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 The character display such as "" and the bar display which shows the remaining time of an effect reception period are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the sword, but the sword decorative image SYGb is also extracted from the state of the sword according to this. It is made to change the state to the state. In addition, when the effect reception is made within the effect reception period, a predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the state of the sword Maintained. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the accompaniment effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, if the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, The effect image (in this case, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration 5001) is displayed in the same state (in a scraped state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) imitating an operation means on the operation object side and an operation means (here, a sword decoration 5001) on the operation object side Are all stopped at predetermined positions.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) show the contents of effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a prognostic effect. For example, now, in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination with the number of reservations being 0 Suppose that you are in a situation. Then, in the rendering situation, as shown in FIG. 343 (d), assuming that the prognostic effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started, either of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 It will be possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to か soon.

  FIG. 343 (e) shows a rendering situation in which the prognostic rendition as the “specific operation related rendition” has progressed and the rendition result appears. In this rendering situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 as a result of the “specific operation related rendering”. It is done. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (e), a final effect is displayed that suggests that the sword decorative image SYG is not changed to another effect image (such as a button image BTG).

  FIG. 343 (f) shows an example of effect when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, the instruction display for prompting the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 The character display such as "" and the bar display which shows the remaining time of an effect reception period are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the state of the sword to the state of the sword, and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the state of the sword.

  In this example, in the example shown in FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration 5001 is in the state of the sword in the effect reception period. While the sword decorative body 5001 continues to be displaced upward gradually over the period until the end of the effect reception period, and different from each other. I am trying to

  In the effect reception period, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is at any position, the effect reception will be performed when the operation target role object 141 is operated to the sword state, and the effect is received. While a predetermined operation effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decorative image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the state of the sword. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is provided for the effect. While the other side does not operate, it will be able to play a role in accurately transmitting the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is kept in the stop state during the effect reception period, and the sword decoration 5001 is continuously operated, but the invention is not limited thereto. The decorative image SYG may be operated continuously, and the sword decorative body 5001 may be stopped.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 343, in the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (c)) that occurs without passing through a specific operation-related effect, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG are While in the stopped state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (f)) generated after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is put in the stopped state. On the other side, it is made to continue as a dynamic state so that it is possible to provide for presentation. Therefore, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the width of the effect can be expanded, and the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation reception period for the operation button 410 is generated after a specific operation-related effect. While the button 410 itself is put into a stopped state, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction thereof is continued, a specific operation-related presentation is performed. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs is greatly improved.

  Note that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red ala with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a prognostic effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a prognostic effect is performed. That is, in this case, in a specific operation-related effect, any one of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decorative image SYG imitating the sword decorative body 5001 will be displayed, When the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (the button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation Can be provided further. About this method, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also in each presentation aspect mentioned above other than the example of a production | presentation of FIG. 343, and those other examples.

  Then, in the case of giving such two renditions to a specific operation-related rendition, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG is the rendition result of the particular operation-related rendition It is unclear whether or not the appearance of the effect image that appears or can be recognized and whether the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has high expectation (for example, only the outline with the effect image imitating the operation means outlined Make a recognizable display state etc.) appear by presentation progress. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is a high expectation (for example, the white of the effect image imitating the operation means It is desirable to release the state so that the color can be confirmed, etc.) to appear sequentially by further rendering progress. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after such effect development, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is a high expectation (for example, the operation means After canceling the whiteout state of the imitation effect image etc.), the button image BTG is further hidden, and it is possible to recognize that the sword decorative image SYG appears as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect To an unknown state (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined and only the outline can be recognized) whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is high. In addition, an effect pattern may be generated to cause the effect to further advance. Note that after this, it is possible to recognize whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is a high expectation (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG To make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), the display mode on the side where the expectation is low (for example, blue) is more Also, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further developments occur.

  FIGS. 344 (a) to 344 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) as the effect contents when a specific operation related effect is performed as a prognostic effect. That is, in FIG. 344 (a), a pro-end effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started, but in the pre-end effect, a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is held. The first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and the second character (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) possessing a sword imitating the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration image SYG) Of the character is displayed, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. It is like that.

  FIG. 344 (b) is in a rendering situation in which the rendering result of the precursor rendering as “specific operation related rendering” appears. In this rendering situation, the first character (the rendering image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001, but the second character (sword decoration) An effect image corresponding to the body 5001 is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 344 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 340 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the sword decorative body 5001 is in a non-display state). While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (a confrontation between the characters) and the other background image (the portion that has been displayed before the start of the specific operation-related effect) The effect image (display image shown in FIG. 344 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  FIGS. 344 (c) to (e) show examples of effects when the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, it is first shown in FIG. 344 (c) In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (a character display such as “press down” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 344 (c), the sword decorative body 5001 starts to move from the knapsack state to the sculpting state when the effect reception period occurs, As shown in FIG. 344 (d), only when a relatively short time has passed since the start of the effect reception period, the sword decorative body 5001 completes the movement (movement) from the sword state to the sword state. It is supposed to After that, as shown in FIG. 344 (e), the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the scraped state until at least the effect reception period is ended, unless the player performs an operation, and the player It will wait for the operation (operation from the cutting state to the cutting state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 344 (c) to (e), the movement (rotational movement) is completely different from such movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decorative body 5001. In the draw-down operation, the second character swings down on the sword decoration image SYG, and the sword decoration image SYG continues continuously even after the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the sword cutting state. It is supposed to work. The sword decorative image SYG according to this production example is a series of displays from the start of the swing down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)) in a loop within the production reception period. It is designed to be repeated by the process.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected, and the display change is progressed by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time. In addition, with regard to the sword decorative body 5001, the state is extracted while the series of displays from the start of the swing down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. However, even if loop processing is performed, it will be maintained as it is without being affected. In addition, when operation to the sword state is performed to the operation subject role item 141 within the effect reception period, the effect reception will be made, and while the predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, The loop processing is ended, the sword decorative image SYG is hidden, and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the state of the sword. Further, processing for ending the effect reception period is performed at that time.

  According to such a configuration, when the aura effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG operate within the effect reception period, but The operation modes (operations for accurately transmitting the current situation (operations for moving to the operating position) and loop operations provided for rendering) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is ended. Even after that, the sword decorative image SYG is allowed to continue without ending its operation. Thereby, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) occurs after the specific operation related effect occurs, the effect contents of the specific operation related effect continue until after the effect reception period occurs ( It is possible to expand the range of the effects such as making the background continuous and possible to execute, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment.

  Also, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 344, the effect content (the display in which the characters face each other) that appeared when the prognostic effect (FIG. 344 (a)) as a specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effect (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs is performed in a form in which both of the background image and the background image are changed. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, while the dedicated background (full moon) is displayed, the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character (sword decoration image SYG) different from the specified Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both of the image and the image), it is possible to improve the presentation during the effect reception period. In this sense, at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the operation means and the character is used to perform the effect also in the omen effect, and the effect in the predense effect and the effect reception period It can be said that it is more desirable in order to have a connection between stage effects and to further improve the stage effect. The dedicated background (full moon) may have a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for awarding a benefit, and may be displayed by any of these display modes.

  In the aura of production as a specific operation-related production, and in the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as the production, and depending on which one of the production modes appears, the production reception A suggestion may be made as to whether an aspect with a high degree of expectation appears as an effect at the time of operation when the effect reception is made in a period. The background image appearing when the aura effect is performed may be used to indicate the degree of expectation for giving a benefit.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 344, when a pro-end effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect is received in a form that changes both the contents of the effect and the background image that were appearing in the pre-effect effect. When it is decided to execute the effect within the period, but the above-mentioned admonition effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a form in which both the effect contents and the background image that appeared in the admonition effect are changed The presentation may be performed when the presentation reception period occurs.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 344, although the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is started after the effect reception period occurs, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is started before the effect reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decorative body 5001 started before the effect reception period occurs may be completed before the effect reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation). The operation carried out may be completed before the effect reception period occurs), and thereafter the stopped state may be maintained.

  Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001), a display for changing the background image when the effect reception period occurs, and a change of the background image In some cases, there may be a case in which no display is made. Then, in this case, if display is performed to change the background image when the effect reception period occurs, the degree of expectation regarding benefit provision is higher than when display is not performed to change the background image when the effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to

  Moreover, in each of the above-described presentation modes and their different examples, after a specific operation-related presentation is performed, the operation is performed on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the presentation When the effect reception is made, the specific decoration member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an effect at the time of operation based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 331 (d), FIG. 333 (e), and FIG. 334 (h), the sword decorative body 5001 (or operation button as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side) By also operating 410), it is intended to improve the effect of the operation-related effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. As described above, in order to improve the effect of the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed is performed according to the result of the effect. The effect state at the time of success when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) appear, or the movement provided on the game board 5 side While the rendering situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, an operation-time rendering (for example, a specific one In the operation effect effect after the precursor effect effect which is not the operation related effect effect), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable object provided on the door frame 3 side according to the result of the effect Only when it works, the stage production status at the time of success appears, or the game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  In addition, in the specific operation-related effects according to each of the above-described effect modes and their other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, a button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The degree of expectation for granting benefits is set to be higher than that. In this respect, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (a), the button in the mode (specific effect mode) to which the princess character is added. The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for giving a privilege than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related effect When the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the specific operation-related effect, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 345 (b), the mode (specific rendering mode) in which the princess character is displayed may be applied to the sword decorative image SYG. In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the expectation for awarding a privilege is higher than when it is displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (see FIG. 1) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed). 345 (a) and a second effect pattern (FIG. 345 (b) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of the specific operation related effect being performed. And) may be prepared respectively. And in this case, the case where the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, and the case where the second effect pattern appears, it is set so that the degree of expectation for awarding of benefits becomes the same It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related effects being performed. It becomes possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific rendering mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of which one of the decorative image SYG appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 345 (c), when the effect result of a specific operation-related effect (which one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared in the specific effect mode This may be displayed in advance (for example, during the production of a specific operation-related effect). According to such a configuration, the specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed even though the specific operation related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed. The button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG are made to have the same effect value (the same degree of expectation) by the appearance of That is, in this case, since the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it may be said that "precursor effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide an effect with a completely different meaning.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples is configured such that the sword portion (the handle 5012 and the blade 5011) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be operated vertically. In addition to the operation mode 1 (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 301, a second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath 5020) of the sword decorative body 5001 is operable in the lateral direction It is provided to have an aspect (second operation aspect) as well. Therefore, in each of the effect modes described above, and in other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode gives an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 provided as one operation unit? The above-mentioned specific operation related presentation may be performed as a presentation about. The sword part (the handle 5012, the blade 5011) and the sheath part (the sheath 5020) are both supported by the main body supporting part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be operable (operable), and Even if one side of the sword part (the handle 5012, the blade 5011) and the sheath part (the sheath 5020) is in the operation (operation) state, the other side can be operated (operation) It is formed.

  However, when a specific operation related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different even if any effect result appears, and the operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that the possibility of an operation error occurring on the player side increases. In particular, even when an operation opportunity is given to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, a rendering image (and its image imitating a sword region in the sword decoration 5001) In the case where the instruction display for prompting the operation is displayed, there is a further concern that the player side may cause an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. That is to say, in this case, while the remaining time of the effect reception period gradually decreases, let the player first perform the operation of correcting the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. If it is difficult to do so and the effect reception period ends before the effect reception is made even though the specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. , There is a concern that the game interest will decline.

  Further, in the sword decorative body 5001, there are an aspect such as “movement in the vertical direction” by the sword part and an aspect such as “movement in the lateral direction” by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not in such reverse relationship In the operation unit capable of providing an aspect, if an operation on the wrong side is performed when an operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform an operation on the appropriate side, and the effect reception period ends. Risk of loss of operation opportunities.

  Therefore, when performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect as an effect on whether the operation opportunity is given by the first operation mode or the second operation mode to the sword decorative body 5001 provided as one operation unit As described below with reference to FIGS. 346 and 347, an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode occurs on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed from the state as it is, it is desirable that the effect reception be properly performed and that the operation effect according to the effect reception be performed.

  FIGS. 346 and 347 show an example of effect in the case where an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which the specific operation related effect is performed. FIG.

  FIG. 346 (a) shows that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in the normal gaming state with the number of reservations being 0 Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 346 (b) shows the effect status in which a specific operation-related effect has been started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 346 (a) is being performed.

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b), a first effect simulating a first operation mode in which the sword portion of the sword decorative body 5001 is operated from the extraction state to the insertion state. An image OX and a second effect image TX imitating a second operation mode for moving the sheath part of the sword decorative body 5001 in the lateral direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is simultaneously displayed to indicate that an operation opportunity by any of the operation modes will be made available for presentation soon. In this respect, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword portion of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX In both effect images TX, the sword site is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 346 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b) is developed, and the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and the second corresponding to the second operation mode The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to perform an effect of pushing the other party out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect reception period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect When the result is displayed, an effect reception period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 346 (c), when the first effect image OX is left to be dominant, a display such as "press-in" is visible. When it comes to a state where the second effect image TX is left to be dominant, a display such as “slide” is made visible. The details of the operation content can be easily recognized in accordance with the state of the effect. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that they may be mistakenly recognized as prompting the operation at the timing at which the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 346 (d), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 346 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. A presentation depicting the situation left behind is being performed (the first presentation result). When progressing to this effect content, even when the operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY) does not occur, and in the first operation mode When the operation is performed, the effect reception is made, and a specific operation effect (a movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY, etc.) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

  That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 346 (d), an effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side among the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as “depress”, or the remaining time of the effect reception period is shown. Bar display will be displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 operates from the state of the sword to the state of the sword so that the operation in the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 347 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (incorrect operation) by the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. It shows the rendering situation when performed by the player.

  That is, in this effect example, even in the case where the effect reception period regarding the specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side among the first operation mode and the second operation mode, Operation mode 2 The operation detection itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected in the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification can not appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received. (Here, "As it is good") is done.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 347 (f), such specific notification is changed in the content of notification according to the passage of time so that the player can recover calmness (here, “settled down”). It is supposed to be. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, since it becomes possible to sequentially notify in short words, it is preferable even if the player side is in a panic state. It will be expected to suppress. As a result, even if an operation by the first operation mode is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player can appropriately receive the effect. You will be able to make them aware.

  FIG. 347 (g) shows that the operation (first operation mode) on the appropriate side is performed in the rendering situation (a rendering acceptance period when in the erroneous operation state) in FIG. 347 (e) or 347 (f). As a result, it is depicted that the effect has been accepted, and the above-described operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is being performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decorative body 5001 (when the operation is ended), the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated from the state of the second operation mode (normal state Will be returned to).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is not corrected and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even when the game is performed from the state (the operation error state), the effect reception is properly made, so that the decrease in the game entertainment when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above presentation example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, the notification to the effect that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error is performed. However, the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error as it is The detailed notification for the purpose) should not necessarily be performed. That is, as described above, since there is a possibility that the player has panicked in a situation in which an erroneous operation has been performed, it may be counterproductive to perform notification of complicated contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player in the effect reception period, as an indication that can not appear when an operation in a proper mode is accepted, not an indication by a message but an indication by an effect or a sound alone It is desirable to make a simple notification such as In this case, although there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that an operation error has been made, a special situation is confirmed that a specific notification is performed and no effect at the time of operation is performed based on the operation being performed. It can be said that it is possible to expect to switch the operation to the appropriate operation.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (in particular, an elderly player or the like), it may be assumed that a situation may occur in which an operation is mistakenly performed before the generation reception period of the specific operation related effects occurs. For example, when an operation (for example, lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed on the second operation portion although the operation instruction for the second operation portion (for example, the sheath portion) is not made. It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which an effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the side of the operation unit (for example, sword part) of the case, and also in this case, There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize what is good.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is given to which of the first operation unit (sword portion) and the second operation portion (sheath portion) the operation opportunity is given, The second operation unit is in the situation (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 346 (b) and (c)) in which the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) to the operation unit 2 side is not made Even when the operation is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that can not appear when an operation in a proper manner is accepted. The specific notification may be “display of a message indicating that it is acceptable to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which the operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state” or in the display by the message. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as a notification only by sound. In any case, even after the operation is performed, by confirming the special situation that the specific notification is performed based on the operation and the presentation at the time of the operation is not performed, the operation is subsequently performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to expect that it will be kicking off.

  In this case, for example, while the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being performed (the sword decorative body 5001 is moved in the left direction), for example, the first operation unit (for example, A state (sword decoration body) in which an operation on a second operation unit (for example, a sheath portion) is performed even when the effect reception period regarding a specific operation effect occurs only on the side of the sword portion) When the first operation unit (for example, sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state where 5001 has moved leftward, the effect reception is made and the above-mentioned operation effect according to the operation is performed It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the state as it is, since the effect reception will be properly performed, the operation error before the effect reception period occurs Even when a game occurs, the decline in gaming interest is suppressed.

  However, among the periods in which a specific operation-related effect is given to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit the operation opportunity is given, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of an event, information will be mixed up with the content to be notified (instruction display etc.) within the effect reception period, and the player will be further confused. There is a concern Therefore, in the specific operation related rendition in which the rendition result which suggests that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, the period until the rendition result is displayed And the specific notification described above is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed despite the fact that the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the specific notification described above is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, the second period It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described effect example, when performing the specific notification, the degree of expectation for giving the benefit may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, the effect mode of the sword decorative body 5001 itself is changed to any of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. Step 0 form shown in FIG. 2) is possible to change from Step 1 form to any of Step 3 form. In this respect, after the specific operation related rendition is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed to any of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it Alternatively, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 in the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (character display such as “press down” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period); The sword decoration image SYG imitating the is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode (step 0 form to step 3 form shown in FIG. 311) as the sword decoration 5001 at that time. It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to have any interest in checking the sword decoration image SYG. In addition, the rendering performance when in the rendering reception period becomes poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a mode different from that of the sword decoration 5001 at that time. It is desirable to secure the stage effect when it is in the stage for accepting stage effects.

  At this time, making the aspect represented by the sword decoration image SYG have a higher expectation than the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 makes the stage performance during the stage for accepting rendering more It is desirable for ensuring it suitably. For example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Make it visible. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, by confirming the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher. As a result, the amusement of the game when being in the effect reception period is suitably maintained.

  In order to obtain such effects, the number of effect modes on the sword decoration image SYG side may be larger than the number of effect modes on the sword decoration 5001 side. The number of effect modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side may be one. Further, when preparing a plurality of effect modes as the sword decorative body 5001, the form may not necessarily be changed as the effect modes.

  However, if the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG are simply made to differ in this manner, some players may have an unpleasant feeling that false display is made. There is concern that this may reduce the interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, as a mode of sword decoration image SYG, a special mode different from any of the modes prepared as a mode of sword decoration 5001 (here, stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 311). Are prepared, and when the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword are displayed by displaying the sword decorative image SYG in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the aspect of the decorative image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the external appearance is changed by further deforming and uniting the sword decorative image SYG, or the sword decorative body 5001 operates in a mode not appearing or the sword decorative body 5001 It may emit light in a mode that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering of the sword decorative body 5001 which is structurally difficult is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, thereby suppressing the concern of being offensive due to the false display. Not only can it be done, but it will be expected to improve the fun of the game by providing an effect beyond the imagination of the player when looking at the structure of the sword decorative body 5001.

  Incidentally, even in the case where the sword decorative image SYG has a special mode as described above, the respective modes provided as the sword decorative body 5001 for the sword decorative image SYG (here, shown in FIG. 311). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in step 0 form to step 3 form). That is, in this case, while the sword decoration image SYG is basically displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. In addition, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable that it is suggested that the degree of expectation for giving a privilege is higher than that when displayed in another mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Further, as to the method of enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 312 to FIG. 319) It may be applied.

  For example, if it is now in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 315 (X1), then, as the next rendering progress destination, in addition to the rendering situation shown in FIG. 315 (X2), to the rendering situation shown in FIG. A presentation pattern will be prepared to be produced. Then, when the effect is advanced to the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operation is performed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. A continuous image (image with samurai's eyes closed) showing that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second state of extraction is in the state of insertion while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Will be returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped in the pseudo link mode, and the player is informed that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is performed (FIG. 348 (b) ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, and specifically shows the form and effect level (the number of pseudo continuous fluctuation) of the sword decorative body 5001. The player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) by displaying the pseudo continuous sword symbol of the aspect.

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the fourth pseudo run variation (re-variation) in the pseudo run figure displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although a sword image showing (special mode) is displayed, this special mode can be displayed only with a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself has become immutable. The special mode according to this presentation example is an aspect in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 in the display area is changed to the special mode, the sword decoration 5001 is in the stage 3 form. The state is changed from the state of the sword to the state of the second sword.

  After that, an operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 in a special mode is displayed, while the sword decoration 5001 is in the second state (step 3 form), An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with a message of "Please put a sword!" (FIG. 348 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 348 (e), when the player's operation is detected in the operation effective period, the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (chairman) is made according to the set effect pattern. While the expectation degree notification effect is performed, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended.

  Further, in each of the effect modes described above and their other examples, for example, when symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is executed within the symbol variation. The first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation decoration is not given to the sword decorative body 5001 can be performed. In addition, when the design variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 within the design variation and the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 The second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given is made executable. In addition, when design variation is performed with the third effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 The effect (specific operation-related effect) can be performed.

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as different effect contents, but as such effect contents, for example,
A specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion where the effect image appears before the effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display region,
Thereafter, an effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed at a position where visual recognition is difficult by the specific image,
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display (by increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area in which the specific image is displayed) You may make it For example, in the first precursor effect, display effect by “cloud effect” (display effect for making it easy to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means gradually) is performed as the specific image, and in the second precursor effect, “flame Display effect by “effect” (display effect to make it easy to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means gradually, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by “water effect” as the specific image (effect image imitating the operation means If the types of specific images are made different, such as providing display effects that make it easier to view them gradually, it is possible to make their precursor effects different from one another. When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the first precursor effect is being performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is being performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decorative body 5001, and by the "water effect" When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third precursor effect (specific operation related effect) is performed on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given Will be

  Then, when performing omen effects (at least one of the first omen effects, the second omen effects, and the third omen effects) with such effects, the effect image imitating the operation means with the specific image is It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize. When such a configuration is applied to any of the first antecedent effect and the second antecedent effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a low expectation and a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where it can not be sure with which display mode (for example, blue) it is displayed, the effect when it is in the effect reception period It will be possible to improve the In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 the operation opportunity is given to Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where it can not be held, it is possible to improve the rendering when it is in the effect reception period.

  FIG. 349 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the first antecedent effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 350 is an example of an effect when the first antecedent effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 349 and FIG. 350, an example of effect when the first anticipation effect is performed will be described, but for this effect example, the second anticipation effect or the third is not the first anticipation effect. It is also possible to apply to omen effects.

  FIG. 349 (a) shows that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed in the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination with the number of reservations being 0 in the normal gaming state Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 349 (b) shows the effect status in which the first precursor effect is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 349 (a) is being executed.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (b), the display effect by “cloud effect” is performed in a large range in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After the effect is started at timing t1 shown in FIG. 350, the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display (increase the transmittance of the specific image itself). Or to reduce the area in which a specific image is displayed.

  And in this production example, as shown in FIG. 350, at timing t2 when the display production by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display, the production reception period for the operation button 410 is While being generated, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (a bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed respectively ( FIG. 349 (c).

  In this presentation example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, the second display mode) , And blue), the ratio at which the effect at the time of operation is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this respect, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), the “cloud effect” can not be confident that the button image BTG is displayed in either the first display mode or the second display mode. Even though the operation button 410 is operated, the effect is accepted when the operation is performed on the operation button 410, and the effect at the time of operation according to the effect acceptance is performed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, since the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the effect content is switched from such a omen effect, the button image BTG has a first display mode and It becomes possible to advance the rendition without being sure of which of the two display modes.

  Further, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), it can not be convinced that the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. However, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to indicate that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rendering situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), the “cloud effect” continues while the rendering reception period occurring at the timing t2 continues. Is completely hidden (FIG. 349 (d)). In such a situation, it is possible to operate the operation button 410 while the user can easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the effect at the time of operation comes to be executed in a form in which the content of the effect is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 349 (d).

  According to such a configuration, during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), a period until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden from being displayed (timing t2 to t3) after the button image BTG is displayed. ), It is possible to provide an effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that in order to enhance the effect during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4) in the entire period, the period during which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4) It is desirable to perform effect display which is not performed in the period of the above-mentioned timing t2-t3 when it is in the above. In this effect example, when it is in a period (timing t3 to t4) in which "cloud effect" is completely hidden, a message such as "press" is displayed. For example, timings t2 to t3 are displayed. If an effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period in the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, it is possible to more suitably enhance the rendering in the period (the timing t3 to t4). Will be able to

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are simultaneously displayed (when the effect reception period occurs), The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the occurrence of the effect reception period. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is hard to be recognized first appears, and it is determined that the effect is hard to recognize after a predetermined time. Until the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, an instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in a rendering situation where the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize before the rendering reception period occurs, a rendering pattern in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor In the case of the effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG may be made to appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an enjoyment in which the value to which the button image BTG is closely watched is increased as the button image BTG is less likely to be visually recognized. It becomes possible to maintain suitably.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 is affected by the “cloud effect”. We decided to display it so that its visibility would be maintained. This makes it possible to enjoy with confidence the visibility of the button image BTG changing while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 may also be made difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 under the influence of the "cloud effect". That is, in this case, it is possible for the player to have a conflict as to whether or not the operation button 410 should be operated without certainty of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect reception period can not be grasped well. It will be able to provide unprecedented new stage effects.

  In addition, in the case of applying such an effect to any of the first antecedent effect, the second antecedent effect, and the third antecedent effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the antecedent effect is started. Even if the length of time until the visual recognition is made visible (time until the specific image is not displayed) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed It is desirable to set the time until it is made visible to (the time until the specific image is hidden) to be set to the same time. In addition, when applying such an effect to any one of the first omen effects, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the omen effect is started. With regard to the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is not displayed), a plurality of these are prepared to give a plurality of renditions with different degrees of expectation However, the same applies to the time from when the effect image simulating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is not displayed). It is desirable to set it to time.

  Moreover, it is not necessary to necessarily use another image (specific image) as a method of making it hard to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means. For example, the effect image imitating the operation means is changed in setting of the transmittance of the operation itself, etc. so that the effect image imitating the operation means appears in a display mode (timing t2) which is relatively difficult to visually recognize. It may be made to change gradually towards the display mode (timing t3) which is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operation means appears in the display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be timing before the timing t2, and in this case, appearing in such a display mode is itself May be performed as a precursor effect, and in a display other than this as a precursor effect, an effect image imitating an operation means is made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize. It is also good.

[Movement effect triggered by the establishment of another condition different from the condition of the symbol game]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when the gaming ball is received in the starting opening (the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004), the determination regarding the hit is performed. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed in which a large number of game balls can be acquired after executing the symbol variation displayed while the jackpot symbol is displayed, and after the jackpot game, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to control the game state (time reduction state, probability change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is played, in peripheral control MPU 1511a, effects (for example, timer effects, various effects such as timer effects, operation effects, pre-reading effects, etc. in addition to effect patterns) are made according to the result of the judgment regarding hits. As described above, it is possible to execute, etc., and thereby to maintain the game interest until the big hit game is performed.

  However, only by performing effects according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back decoration unit 3100, the back movable display unit 3200, specific There is a concern that it becomes difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate over a long period of time because the decorative members SDY (such as a prison object) become monotonous.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the display contents and the movable in the effect display device 1600 are also performed when another condition that is not related to the determination processing concerning the progress of the game and the symbol variation (the symbol game start condition) is satisfied. It is possible to execute a process that is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the decoration. That is, in this case, display change and movable body movement appear in a mode beyond the category of symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, thereby maintaining the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate for a long period of time Can be expected.

Here, it changes to the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition not related to the judgment processing concerning the progress of the game and the symbol variation (symbol game start condition) according to it is satisfied. As a method of causing, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. It should be noted that any of the following methods can be used to cause changes in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition not related to the symbol game start condition is satisfied. It is also possible to adopt a method different from any of the methods listed below, but the situation where symbol variation is not temporarily executed (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is “0” and the number of reservations) Even if the condition is “0”, the above-mentioned other condition must be satisfied, and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, the display content on the effect display device 1600 or It should be possible to make changes in the behavior of the movable decoration.
・ A technique to regularly execute an effect lottery not related to symbol variation, and to obtain that a specific result is obtained in this effect lottery as the above “satisfaction of another condition” • The number of times of cumulative operations for a specific operation means The above-mentioned method of making it reach the predetermined number as “the establishment of another condition” The time is measured (for example, the power is turned on) by the RTC (real time clock) function or the arithmetic processing in peripheral control MPU 1511a (or main control MPU 1310a) Method of measuring the time from the end of

  In general, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured by using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is determined that another condition is satisfied, and the display contents in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, when a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition not related to the symbol game start condition is satisfied, the change timing is reached. In general, it takes a relatively long time (eg, at least several hours) to cause changes in the behavior of the display content or the movable decoration even though such a long time is required. It is feared that the entertainment interest may be reduced if a situation that can not be made occurs.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which a movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is preset is a symbol game start condition. Can be generated based on the establishment of another specific condition (for example, that the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). And, in the situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position although it should be in the original position, etc.) and the specific state is not generated, While it is possible to start processing for causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation when the corresponding restoration operation time has arrived, the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In a certain situation, even if a predetermined restoration operation time has arrived, processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation can be started without starting processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation, and performing predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined timing in a specific state. .

  That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the symbol game start condition, the processing for performing a predetermined restoring operation according to the symbol fluctuation side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state, movable body abnormality can be performed in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation It is expected that the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably performed by restoring.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 351, an example of processing contents when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 351, for convenience of explanation, “RTC state in which display contents different from before appear when it is determined that the elapsed time since power on has reached a predetermined time using the RTC function ( "It is possible to execute the process of causing the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C to operate sequentially in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state)". It is not limited to this as a method of causing a change in the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) not related to the game start condition is satisfied. As described above, it is possible to appropriately adopt each technology described below even when other methods are adopted.

  Now, assuming that it is in a state before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, in peripheral control MPU 1511a, the remaining time until the elapsed time from power on reaches the predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs) The remaining time of) will be updated regularly. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 351, at timing Rt2, the elapsed time from power on reaches a predetermined time to generate an RTC state (specific state), and an RTC state (specific state) occurs. Based on the above, it is possible to execute processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C. As described above, the flow of gaming up to now is achieved by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C being sequentially operated based on the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) that is not related to the situation of symbol variation. It will be possible to have a sense of expectation as if it changes. At this time, the display content in the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more suitably enhance the sense of expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as a rendering period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the rendering If a jackpot wins during the period (RTC state) from the occurrence to the end, progress of the rendering by the effect character that can not appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) It is more desirable to provide presentation benefits such as enabling special presentation mode).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 351, a condition not related to the situation of symbol variation is established at timing Rt1 slightly earlier than such timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before), Based on the satisfaction of the condition (the satisfaction of the first condition), it is possible to execute the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is met). That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example, whether the timing Rt1 has arrived or not in addition to the timing Rt2 is determined by periodically checking the lapse of time since the power is turned on, and the timing Rt1 is determined. When it is determined that the has arrived, the previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing (behavior of the movable decoration) corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed . The “previous display” can be executed as, for example, a display such as “immediately RTC status” or a countdown display toward timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body motions are the result of the big hit determination Because it is suggested in advance to the player that they are not based on (no big hit expectation), it is suitably avoided that the game's interest is reduced due to a recognition error by the player You will be able to

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 351, only a display (a display not conforming to the symbol variation) appears without any expectation as a display content in the effect display device 1600 at least in a period of timing Rt1 to Rt2. The decorative pattern (rendering pattern) is not displayed so as not to be displayed. That is, in this case, three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display not conforming to the symbol variation) appears as the display content in the effect display device 1600 without any expectation. Since the process of causing the player to start the game is started, it is expected to more preferably avoid the decrease in the game interest due to the recognition error by the player.

  Here, “previous display appearing at timing Rt1” and “movable body movement appearing at timing Rt2” respectively correspond to “display not conforming to symbol variation” and to “behavior of movable ornament not conforming to symbol variation” It is Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the behavior of the display and the movable body respectively occurs regardless of the execution situation (including the presence or absence of execution) of the symbol variation at those timings. However, depending on the state of execution of the symbol variation, the movable ornaments A, B and C are not ready to operate (the movable ornaments A, B and C are in the original position even though the timing Rt2 has arrived) There is a concern that it may not be possible to position the movable decorative bodies A, B and C in sequence even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

  For example, when any of several variation patterns is selected as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the movable ornament A, the movable ornament B, There are cases where the movable effect using the movable decorative body C is executed, but the movable body operation timing (here, at the time of occurrence of the RTC state) in the above-mentioned RTC state comes during the execution of such movable effects. In some cases, at least the movable decorative body among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C which is in the process of execution can not be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to design variation" Can be assumed.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes, the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as well as various movable modes provided in the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to execute movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, if it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state (abnormal determination) in this movable abnormality determination, the movable decorative body to be determined is determined in a predetermined manner following the processing of the abnormal determination. By performing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (for example, an operation of moving to the original position), it is possible to make an early restoration of the movable decorative body in an abnormal state possible. Therefore, the movable body operation timing in the above-mentioned RTC state comes in the middle of executing the restoration processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation (the movement to move to the original position, etc.) to the movable decoration. If there is at least one of the movable ornaments A, B, and C at least in the middle of the restoration operation, it can not be used as the above-mentioned “behavior of the movable ornament not conforming to the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  In addition, as "restoration operation time corresponding to design change", for example, start time of design change (time to acquire the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when design change is started), and design change It can be executed (execution of restoration processing based on acquisition of a command) at least one of the stop timing (timing to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when symbol variation is stopped) It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 351, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after at least the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives. When it is in the period until the movement in the mode (in this case, the sequential movement by the three movable decorations A, B and C), the movable decoration used in the period (movable decoration A, movable decoration B) By prohibiting the movable decorative body C) from being used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable ornament not conforming to the symbol variation) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the behavior of the body can not be performed by the movable effect on the symbol variation side.

  However, at this time, even if the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern, there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be lowered. In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at timing Rt1, only a display (a display not conforming to symbol variation) is displayed, which does not show any degree of expectation as the display content in the presentation display device As mentioned above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 351, when there is a symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss) in the process of being executed) when the timing Rt2 arrives, “whatever expected was displayed Do not hide the display (display from timing Rt1) that is not shown at all at this point in time, and keep this over the period up to the timing Rt2a when the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (loss) is stopped) I try to maintain it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol variation is actually performed, the effect display device 1600 is decorated Only the display in which the rendition pattern by the symbol is hidden and no expectation degree is shown will appear. And while such a display appears, the action by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential movement by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C) is developed, It is expected to preferably suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the movable effect according to the effect pattern not being executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 351, when the symbol variation (in the figure, B variation (loss) in the figure) is ended (stopped) when the timing Rt2 arrives (when the timing Rt2a comes) , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable ornament according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display without any degree of expectation (display from timing Rt1)" which has been displayed until then is not displayed at this time It is possible to appear a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (the specific state). Then, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started after that, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation It is made to start as usual the display in which the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern or the notice effect is indicated.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started in this way and the effect pattern is displayed, the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes After that, as long as the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode (here, sequentially operated by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the movable body movement time in the RTC state, It goes without saying that the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, although the movable effect on the symbol variation side is strictly prohibited, since the movable body operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol variation side The decline in interest will be suppressed.

  As such prohibition processing, it is judged whether it is in the situation where it should be prohibited at the start of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), and when it is judged that it is in the situation where it should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (figure Among them, C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibition target of movable representation (movable representation using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes in the middle of the corresponding symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), the movable decorative body Even if the period until the movement in the specific mode (here, the sequential movement by three movable decorations A, B and C) is completed is completed, until the pattern variation is ended, the movable presentation ( At least the movable decoration A, the movable decoration B, and the movable decoration C) can not be performed.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 351, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) to appear after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is the game interest due to the timing Rt2a later than the original timing Rt2 There is a concern that the However, although the RTC state itself occurs at timing Rt2, the effect bonus due to the occurrence of the RTC state is controlled to the special effect mode when the jackpot is won between the time when the RTC state occurs and the end) Etc.) because only symbol variation (C, D variation in the figure) after symbol variation that was first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state is targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to cause a specific background (for example, in an RTC state) to appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, during the period until the timing Rt2a comes (during the timing Rt2 comes) the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) which was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 comes is finished (stopped) ), “The movable decorative body operates in a specific mode according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state since the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can also be assumed that "the period until the end of the sequential operation by C" ends. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display showing no expectation degree (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. In the example shown in FIG. 351, this is a symbol variation (in the figure, B variation) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after timing Rt2) the target of the presentation privilege of the RTC Not because

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), the movable decorative body is specified by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state at least after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes. In the period until the operation (in this case, the three movable ornaments A, B, and C sequentially operate) is completed, the restoration processing is triggered by this even if the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation has come By prohibiting (preventing a process to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state) so as to prevent this from being performed, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not conforming to the design variation) It is possible to suppress that the behavior of the movable decoration can not be performed by the restoration process on the design fluctuation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the game start condition, a predetermined restoring operation according to the symbol fluctuation side is performed. Processing is disabled, and processing that causes a predetermined restoration operation to be performed at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be performed. It is expected that the movable body abnormality is restored according to a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without being received, and the operation in the above-described specific mode by the movable decorative body is more reliably performed. .

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 351, it is controlled to the normal gaming state, and when it is in the middle of the stage where symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (loss)) is being performed according to the big hit determination. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 comes. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, a display such as “immediately RTC status” appears on the background display on the effect display device 1600 as a display not conforming to the symbol variation, for example. Then, the symbol variation (in the figure, A variation (losing)) is ended and a new symbol is displayed from the time when the display such as "immediately RTC status" is performed until the timing Rt2 at which the RTC status occurs comes. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 comes when the symbol variation is being performed, and at the timing Rt2, as the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation, three movable A process of operating the decorative bodies A, B and C sequentially is performed. Note that “display not conforming to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued for a period until a new symbol variation (in the drawing, variation B (loss)) is stopped.

  Further, although this is also described above, in the example shown in FIG. 35, “the three movable decorative objects A, depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives In the period until the sequential operations by B and C are completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5 ') ", at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, It is decided to prohibit this so that the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C and the restoration process on the symbol variation side are not performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 351, in the period from timing Rt2 to Rt2a, the effect display on the symbol fluctuation side (despite the symbol fluctuation (in the drawing, B fluctuation (loss) is being executed) It is controlled as a period in which none of the display showing the expectation degree, the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side (the movable body motion indicating the expectation degree), and the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is executed (No. One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 351, in the period of timings Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol fluctuation side (display showing the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on symbol fluctuation side (expectation is expected) It is controlled as a period during which neither the movable body operation in which the degree is shown nor the symbol fluctuation side restoration processing is performed (the second limitation).

  It should be noted that the control at such timings Rt2 to Rt2a (no effect display on symbol variation side (display showing expectation) and movable effect (movable body operation showing expectation) is not performed) It is executed even if the symbol variation in the period is not the lost variation but the one performed based on the jackpot win (big hit variation). That is, in this case, the jackpot symbol suddenly appears when the timing Rt2a at which the operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the middle of execution is not performed at all. Therefore, as a player who has been expecting to be in the RTC state, it is possible to enjoy the enjoyment as a surprise effect that exceeds the expectation. In addition, after the jackpot symbol appears in this way, a jackpot gaming state will occur while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C are sequentially operated.

  Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, with respect to the display from timing Rt1 (only the display in which no change in the decorative symbol is performed and any expectation is not shown), the symbol fluctuation in the process of being executed when the timing Rt2 arrives It will be made non-displayed at the timing Rt2a to be stopped, and instead, a specific background (such as "in RTC state") after the RTC state is generated will be displayed. In addition, when symbol variation (in the figure, variation pattern C) is newly started in a state in which a specific background (such as "in the state of RTC") is displayed, effect display (the degree of expectation is indicated according to the variation pattern) Display will be executed as usual. However, after the timing Rt2a has arrived for the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the processing for operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is sequentially completed Will also be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, even when the effect pattern in which the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative members A, B, and C is performed is temporarily selected based on the result of the big hit determination, it is at the time of the movable effect The in-liquid-crystal display, sound, lamp lighting, etc. are normally performed, but the corresponding movable decorative body is not operated.

  Further, although this is also described above, in the example shown in FIG. 35, three movable decorative bodies A and B are generated according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs comes. And C, the restoration operation timing (here, start of symbol fluctuation) corresponding to symbol fluctuation in a period until normal operation by C, C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5 ') " Even if the time and the stop time have arrived, it is prohibited to carry out the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decoration in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation) triggered by this. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 351, at timing Rt2a, stop timing (restoration operation timing) of symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) or symbol variation (C variation (loss in the figure) Although the start timing (restoration operation timing) of)) comes, at these restoration operation timings, even if there is a movable decoration in an abnormal state, restoration with respect to the movable decoration is performed. Processing is never performed.

  However, in the period from timing Rt2 to Rt5 (when abnormal, timing Rt2 to Rt5 '), instead of prohibiting the restoration processing on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state It is determined whether or not Then, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in the abnormal state, and the movable decorative body A is operated in the normal operation mode based on the result of the determination. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (first position), and then at the predetermined effect position. It is possible to realize as the operation mode of moving the movable decorative body A to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends, it is determined whether the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in the abnormal state, and the movable decorative body B is operated in the normal operation mode based on the result of the determination. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B in the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position), and then in the predetermined effect position. It is possible to realize as the operation mode of moving the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Then, next, at timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B ends, it is determined whether the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in the abnormal state, and the movable decorative body C is operated in the normal operation mode based on the result of the determination. A process to operate (operation when normal) is performed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then at the predetermined effect position. It is possible to realize as the operation mode of moving the movable decorative body C to the original position.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (e), when the timing Rt5 after the operations by the movable decorative members A, B and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) occurs “The behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state by any of the abnormality determinations, processing for causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation Is made executable. However, while a series of movable body operations (here, the sequential movement by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) are being performed at the time of occurrence of the RTC state, a predetermined value is set for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that he or she is performing the restoration operation of the game, it may be a surprise, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoring operation for the movable decoration in an abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movables) when the RTC state occurs. It is made to execute as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable ornament in an abnormal state, instead of being performed independently as an operation separate from the sequential objects A, B and C). . That is, in this case, the predetermined restoring operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state. It is possible to preferably avoid a decrease in the game fun when performing a predetermined restoring operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is finished. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, it is not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (operation at normal time) but an operation including an operation of restoring the movable decorative body B (restoration) It is possible to execute processing to operate (special operation) in the operation mode of. Then, after that, the movable decorative body B restored (restored) is not operated (normal operation) in the normal operation mode, and timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. 351 (e) is not performed. As with the timing after the normal operation by the decoration B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decoration C is in the abnormal state, and when the movable decoration C is not in the abnormal state, the movable decoration A process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is performed. The time required for the normal operation of the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation of the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration B after the occurrence of the RTC state (for example, during the operation of the movable decoration A, etc.), the movable decoration B causing the abnormality While the timing to operate should be reached, regardless of the situation on the symbol variation side, it will be left in an abnormal state and left. Then, when the timing at which the movable decorative body B should be operated comes, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the operation mode at the time of normal operation. It is possible to restore the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred while suitably maintaining the rendering mode at the time of occurrence of the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, C”. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as an operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state is executed, so that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. A drop in gaming interest when doing a game is preferably avoided.

  In addition, the symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially executed by the three movable ornaments A, B and C according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It is started when it is in the middle stage and is continued until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C is completed. Therefore, the stop timing (restoration operation timing) of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the drawing) and the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the drawing) come. When you do, because the prohibition state for restoration processing on the symbol fluctuation side has already been released, when there is a movable decoration that is in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration processing is executed for the movable decoration The Rukoto.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 351 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoring operation”, the “special mode including the restoring operation” is “the normal operation”. The movable decorative body B may be restored (original position return) according to an operation mode different from the “mode”, and may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 351, at timing Rt1, only a display (for example, “soon, RTC status” or the like) in which no degree of expectation is shown as the display content in the effect display device 1600 appears. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display content is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC preparation state”, etc.) It may be switched to. However, even if the display content is switched at timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, a display (symbol variation) in which no degree of expectation is shown as the display content in the effect display device 1600 in the period of timing Rt2 to Rt2a It is important to make it appear that it does not conform to

  In the example shown in FIG. 351, although the case where abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B has been described, the operation mode at the time of normal is also when abnormal judgment is made in operating the movable decorative bodies A and C. Alternatively, it may be desirable to operate each in a special manner, including a restore operation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 351, the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in the specific mode is set as the generation time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the RTC state (specific state) occurs.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 351, “not conforming to symbol variation based on arrival of timings Rt1 and Rt2 satisfied based on the function (RTC function) not conforming to symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side It was decided to start "display" and "the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the design variation". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function not conforming to the symbol variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, "a display not conforming to a symbol variation" or "behavior of a movable decorative object not conforming to a symbol variation" May be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 351, “the movable decorative body operates in the specific mode according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives (here, 3 It is something which prohibits this so that the restoration processing on the design fluctuation side is not performed when it is "the period until the end of the sequential operation by two movable ornaments A, B and C)", thereby the RTC state It is made difficult to cause a situation where the movable body operation (behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in (specific state) can not be performed due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if restoration processing for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may be started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration processing is put into the execution state. Among them, the RTC state (specific state) may occur, and the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the design variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). There is concern that it will not be earned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 351, even during the period from timing Rt1 to Rt2, restoration processing for at least three movable decorative objects A, B, and C among various movable decorative objects included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is desirable to prohibit this from being performed.

  FIG. 352 shows a modification to the example shown in FIG. 351: “during a period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, at least three of the movable decorative bodies A, B and C among various movable decorative bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 This is different from the example shown in FIG. 351 in that the restoration processing is not executed.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 352, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), the abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, C , Restore process) not to execute itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state in a display (such as "soon, RTC state") not based on the symbol variation is restored. No, it will be left in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 352, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs is reached, first, three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are executed prior to executing processing relating to the movable body movement in the RTC state. It is determined that an abnormality determination (a first abnormality determination) is performed as to whether or not any one of them is in an abnormal state.

  If it is determined that no abnormality is found in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of the abnormality determination, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has come, as shown in FIG. The processing as described above (the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state) is performed with reference to FIG. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not the movable decorative body to be operated has an abnormality is separately executed again, and there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 351 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 351 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed prior to the start of the processing related to the movable body movement in the RTC state, and the processing related to the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. The second abnormality determination will be executed prior to operating the movable decorative body B even after the second decoration.

  On the other hand, prior to the execution of the processing relating to the movable body movement in the RTC state, as a result of the abnormality determination being made, it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C When this happens, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed by delaying the arrival of the movable body operation time in the RTC state. That is, the condition in which the abnormality determination is made is "a condition where the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet been started". By restoring the movable decorative body in the abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be performed in the “normal mode” instead of the “special mode” described above. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 352 (f), at the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body It is assumed that it is determined that one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality as a result of the abnormality determination when "a situation where is not yet started" is performed. Then, the movable decorative body determined as abnormal is maintained while "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not arrived yet and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started". Will perform the restoration process for

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 352 (e) and (f), it is determined in the RTC state as compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C are abnormal. The mobile operation timing is delayed (in the figure, from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b), but using the period (timing Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) generated by such a delay Then, after the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is restored, the movable body operation time in the RTC state can be made to come. After that, when the movable body operation time in the RTC state comes, the process as described above with reference to FIG. 351 is performed.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 352 (f), it is assumed that when moving three movable decorative bodies A, B and C sequentially, it is determined that no abnormality occurs in any of the movable decorative bodies. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the manner described with reference to FIG. 351 (e). Then, when timing Rt5b after three movable decorative bodies A, B and C have sequentially operated in the normal mode respectively comes, “a movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) The behavior of “1” is ended, and the prohibition state (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 352 (g), when operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in sequence, it is determined that the movable decorative body B is abnormal (timing (timing) After abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), it is assumed that an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the manner described with reference to FIG. 351 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in a mode according to the determination results (the movable decorative bodies A and C are in the normal mode, and the movable decorative body B is in the special mode) When the timing Rt5b arrives, "the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation" at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (specific condition) is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing of the symbol variation side ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B also in the first abnormality determination, the restoration processing (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination The operations in the special mode are respectively executed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the movable abnormality occurs immediately before the start of the RTC state or during the movable body operation immediately after the start, a series of movable body operations (here, three) occur when the RTC state occurs. It becomes possible to appropriately execute (sequential operation by the movable ornaments A, B, C), and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the RTC state can be suitably maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 352, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at timing Rt2, restoration processing is sequentially performed on the movable decorative bodies in these abnormal states, and the RTC state It is desirable to carry out a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by three movable decorative bodies A, B and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, a series of movable body movements at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are performed as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored) increase. Although the timing at which the) is started is delayed for a longer time, it becomes possible to execute the series of movable body operations at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state in the normal mode. The restoring operation for a plurality of movable ornaments may be performed in parallel, and in this case, it is possible to suppress a delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 352, it is interesting to see that the player may feel that the predetermined restoring operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state, and the game is entertaining. There is a concern that the Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 352 (f) and (g), when the "restoration operation" is ended, "sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, C" is executed subsequently (sequential execution ) So that a series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be viewed as "a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state", It is made difficult to recognize that the predetermined restoring operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the case of the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormal occurrence situations, a display (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body can be displayed. In the example shown in FIGS. 352 (f) and (g) in the example shown in FIG. 352 (f) as well as in the example shown in 351 (f), the restoration operation (restoration process) is performed on the movable decoration in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body (during recovery operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during a period in which the movable decorative body B is operated in the special mode (during operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality determination) There is no indication (such as an error code) to indicate that you are doing. In addition, the timing when the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode ends, the timing when the operation in the normal mode starts after the operation in the special mode ends, and FIG. f) The display contents in the effect display device 1600 triggered by the occurrence of these timings at the timing when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C start the sequential operation after the restoration operation shown in f), (g) is over There is no such thing as causing Also in these cases, it is assumed that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state so that only "a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state" is performed. It can be said that it is important to make it hard to recognize.

  In FIG. 351 and its different examples, and in FIG. 352 and its other examples, it is assumed that three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate sequentially as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state. The movable decorative body (one, two, three or more, etc.) which is not limited to the above but is also used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side, based on the establishment of a specific condition other than the game start condition (starting condition) What is necessary is to operate in a specific mode at the movable body operation time within the specific state that occurs.

  In addition, as a movable decorative body operable at the movable body operation timing in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, provided so as to be operable) Operation buttons 410, sword decoration 5001 and the like, and a panel-side movable decoration (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific decoration member SDY (ceiling object) provided on the game board 5 side Etc.) may be used respectively.

  However, for example, in FIG. 351 and the other examples thereof, and in FIG. 352 and the other examples thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies operable at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) In the case of using the frame-side movable decorative body (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) which is also used, the frame-side movable decorative body also used as such an operation means after the timing Rt2a arrives. A situation may occur where "operation not conforming to symbol variation" is taking place.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display which has been displayed up to that time "Display" is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made to appear. Then, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started after that, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation It was also mentioned above that the display in which the expected degree such as the presentation pattern or the notice presentation is indicated is started as usual. Therefore, within the period when such a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the drawing) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative member (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative member 5001) which is also used as the operating means Although in the state of being provided for the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, depending on the effect pattern, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body which is also used as the operation means, Confusion may occur in the stage. In addition, in the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (and further, the period of the timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), a display not conforming to symbol variation (a display not showing any degree of expectation) appears. Even if symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, no operation opportunity is given within the period.

  Therefore, although the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in the state of being provided for the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, according to the result of the big hit determination for the specific operating means When the effect time for providing the operation opportunity has arrived, the effect display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) prompting the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means, It is desirable not to accept the effect even if the specific operation means in the state of performing the specific operation is operated. According to such a configuration, when the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being executed, it is possible to play the game that the operation operation was originally provided to the specific operation means. It is possible to suggest to the In addition, by not accepting an operation for a specific operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or an abnormality due to the operation being performed for the specific operation means in the operating state. It will be expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted although the specific display prompting the user to perform the operation for the specific operation means is performed. If such things happen frequently, the entertainment interest may decline due to the fact that the presentation is not developed. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably, the sword decorative member 5001, etc.), the operation effect within the symbol variation according to the big hit judgment The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies operable at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) It is desirable to do. In this case, within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation ratio of the operation effect in the symbol variation. When it is applied, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the reception of the effect when it is operated (the predetermined effect according to the reception of the effect) be performed as usual.

  That is, of the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably (for example, vibration or the like), the sword decorative member 5001, and the like) The movable decorative body in which the specific operation means (for example, sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low generation ratio of the operation effect in the inside is operable at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) By using it as one, the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state. For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the presentation time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the big hit determination to the sword decorative body 5001) will occur.

  In addition, a frame-side movable decorative member provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably, a specific operating means having a relatively low generation ratio of operation effects in the symbol variation) is movable in the RTC state (specific state) When it is used as one of the movable ornaments that can be operated at the operation time, an operation independent of the sequential movement by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is performed when the RTC state occurs. It is desirable that the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. According to such a configuration, the special operation (see FIG. 351) or the restoration operation (see FIG. 352) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Also, it is possible to perform the operation not conforming to the symbol variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without receiving the influence (such as delay) by the operation. In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C be used as a board-side movable decorative body. Thereby, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility of interference occurring with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and provided on the door frame 3 side. It becomes possible to execute the operation by the frame side movable decorative body in parallel.

  Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body having a relatively low generation ratio of operation effects in symbol variation) When the time taken to complete the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) not conforming to the symbol variation according to 5001)) is made “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the big hit judgment are executed Even in this case, a predetermined operation opportunity provision timing (here, the frame side movable decoration) in the effect pattern, unless “specific time” has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation (the effect pattern starts). It is desirable to perform such settings for each effect pattern (timing of operation opportunity provision within) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, in FIG. 351 and the other examples thereof, and in FIG. 352 and the other examples thereof, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, the symbol variation is within the symbol variation. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state Since the operation has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, it is possible to enhance the effect upon occurrence of the RTC state without sacrificing the effect on the symbol variation side.

  Also, as described above, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the frame side movable decoration body (for example, With regard to an operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) which does not conform to the symbol variation by the sword ornament 5001), while the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation that is first digested after that must be started behind this, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, sword decorative body 5001) for that delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a) ) Can be made to have a margin for completing the operation not conforming to the symbol variation by the.

  Moreover, also when performing operation | movement at the time of generation | occurrence | production of the RTC state by a frame side movable decorative body (for example, sword decorative body 5001) as operation | movement independent of sequential operation by said 3 movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, At the time of execution, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable that the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed as the operation of (1) or the operation of the normal mode is performed in the form following the restoration operation. Note that the “special mode including the restoration operation” in this case also restores the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) according to the operation mode different from the “normal operation mode” (return to the original position). For example, it may be the minimum operation mode required to return to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001).

  Then, the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is “normal mode”, “special mode including restoration operation”, and “restoring operation”. Even when the operation is performed in any of the following modes, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as long as the operation is not completed. It is more desirable that the setting according to each effect pattern be performed so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, when any of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) Regardless of whether the operation is performed in the normal mode or in the abnormal mode, only after the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) It becomes possible to be able to give an operation opportunity to.

  In addition, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, an operation (RTC by the frame-side movable decorative body) Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C is still in the process of execution, the operation opportunity is It becomes impossible to receive the effect, and there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required for the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B and C to be completed when performed sequentially in the normal time mode is the big hit judgment Even if any of the effect patterns according to is executed, unless the "specific time" and the "special time" have passed since the start of the symbol variation (start of the effect pattern) And each effect pattern (operation opportunity provision timing in the inside) so that a predetermined operation opportunity provision timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001) does not arrive) It is desirable to make settings for

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) It is desirable for the timing Rt2 to arrive while keeping the abnormal state dare.

  On the other hand, among the above three movable decorative bodies A, B and C, this is the case for a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A with a fast operation order, a movable decorative body with a long time required for the restoration operation, etc.) If an abnormal state occurs within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is prohibited, but a movable decoration different from a specific movable decoration (for example, the operation sequence is delayed) With respect to the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C, a movable decorative body requiring a short time for the restoration operation, etc.), when this is an abnormal state within the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration for the movable decorative body The processing (restoration operation) may be performed without being prohibited. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) does not have to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A performs the movement when the RTC is generated. It is because it is possible to execute the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in the normal mode if it can be completed during this period.

  Also, the timing at which a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the RTC state occurs, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is started. It may be different from the timing.

[Recovery processing for movable abnormality with less influence on movable presentation]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), it is possible to cope with symbol variations when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more precisely, in a state where the specific state is not generated). When the recovery operation time to perform (for example, start time or stop time of symbol variation) comes, it is possible to execute processing for performing a predetermined recovery operation on the specific movable decorative body. However, regardless of the state of presentation, it is exciting to perform such restoration processing, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "pattern change start time" is set as "the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change". And now, as shown in FIG. 353, assuming that a timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least each of the following processes Will be performed.
-Based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a is acquired when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern according to the symbol variation is set, and the symbol variation is performed on the set effect pattern Processing to make the effect progress in the inside ・ Identify based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side is acquired when the symbol variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) Of performing predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament of

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 353, it is assumed that "a specific effect pattern that can cause a specific movable decorative body to operate at a specific timing tm2 in symbol variation" is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 comes, progress of rendering according to “a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” and a predetermined restoring operation for the specific movable decorative body A situation appears in which the processing to be performed is parallel to each other.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern is executable, an effect pattern (relatively with a degree of expectation) in which the effect is paired with the specific effect pattern. A low performance pattern is prepared. Then, in the effect pattern (a effect pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation) which is a pair relationship, although the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, it is directed to the specific timing tm2. The same effect as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (a relatively high expected effect pattern) capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within symbol variation" is performed. Ru. As described above, at the specific timing tm2, two presentation patterns (a presentation pattern for operating a specific movable decorative body, a presentation pattern for not operating a specific movable decorative body) having a pair relationship in a presentation are prepared. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect with an effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display about whether to operate or not) Is made feasible, and such entertainingness is suitably maintained by such an expressiveness.

  However, if there is still a situation where processing for causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation even at the time when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the start of the symbol variation, the specific timing It becomes clear that the particular movable decorative body is in a situation where it can not perform rendering operation even though tm2 has arrived. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect with the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the game interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 353, the progress of rendering according to “a specific effect pattern that can cause a specific movable decorative object to operate at a specific timing tm2” in the effect pattern, and a predetermined for the specific movable decorative object. When a situation occurs in which the process of performing the restoration operation (the restoration processing based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) appears in parallel, the “specific” process is performed until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration condition. The process of causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation is ended. In addition, although it is possible to employ | adopt various methods as "the process which performs a predetermined | prescribed decompression | restoration operation | movement with respect to a specific movable decoration body", in the following description, "an abnormal state is eliminated, or It is assumed that the process of repeatedly performing the restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body until the predetermined upper limit number is reached is executed.

  More specifically, with regard to “the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoring operation”, the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decorative body is abnormal. The time it takes to be done will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is eliminated and the original position is restored by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, “a predetermined restoration for the specific movable decorative body is performed. The timing tx at which the processing to perform the operation is completed will also arrive relatively early, but the number of times this is repeated before the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration fails and is restored (restoration) The more the timing tx at which the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is completed, is advanced in a delayed manner to a later time. And at the latest, if the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and it is not yet restored (restoring) but another restoration operation is executed, the timing tx will be exceeded. By ending the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation while the body is in the abnormal state, the processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation during the specific timing tm comes to an end regardless of the state of the restoration. It will be.

  In addition, if it takes x hours to perform one restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body, one pattern is performed so that the relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoring operation within the fluctuation is set, and the processing for causing the predetermined restoring operation to end even if not restored (restoring) when the upper limit number n is reached is ended. By doing this, the process for causing the predetermined restoration operation to be performed may be ended before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the state of restoration.

  According to such a configuration, the development of the specific effect pattern that can operate the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation and the predetermined restoring operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When a specific situation appears, the process of causing a predetermined restoration operation to be performed is completed before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decoration is restored before the specific timing tm2 arrives but also when the specific movable decoration is not restored, the specific timing tm2 Since the movable decorative body comes to be in the stop state, it can be suitably maintained as to the effect on whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 comes. become. For example, even if a specific movable decorative body is stopped at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 comes, it may cause some behavior or the movable decorative body does not operate. Also, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (when the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the rendering operation by the movable decoration is performed), etc. .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is in a restoring operation while the predetermined effect is being performed, it has an effect as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which “the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed is ended before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It is more desirable to maintain the game interest.

  In addition, as the predetermined effect, for example, when a specific display result (for example, a display result hit by an attack) appears in a specific movable decorative object, the operation is performed unless the specific display result appears. When it is provided as "does not exist", it is possible to illustrate "a display effect that appears in advance in a form that asks whether a specific display result appears or not", and a specific movable decorative body is " When it is provided as one that operates based on the effect received by the player's operation (or the effect is accepted but it does not operate), "the effect that causes the specific display to prompt the operation by the player to appear" It is possible to illustrate.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 353, the specific movable decorative body recovers from the abnormal state (restoration) at the timing tx when the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed. Is assumed to be normal. In this way, even if the abnormal state is at the start of fluctuation (or "restoration operation time such as the previous symbol stop"), the specific timing tm2 within the fluctuation of the symbol comes under restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to render a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is completed, the specific movable decoration can not be restored (restored) from the abnormal state, and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) until the symbol variation is ended and the next restoration operation timing comes. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to cause the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the rendering performance as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thus providing a surprise effect. Will be able to

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines are becoming equipped with movable ornaments that perform multi-step movement with more complicated structures, and such movable ornaments have a longer process until their completion as their restoration processing. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation or a effect pattern that is paired with this, etc., when those effect patterns are started Within a time shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive (more preferably, the time for the predetermined effect to be performed) even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state It has been mentioned above that it is required to end the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoring operation. That is, in this case, it is only possible to restore the specific movable decorative body in an emergency and simple manner every time it becomes abnormal, and this accelerates the deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It may also be.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment prepares a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and from the main control MPU 1310a side when symbol variation starts When the special effect pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, while the special effect pattern is being developed (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), the specific movable Control is performed so as not to operate the decorative body and prevent the appearance of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display on whether or not to operate). Then, as shown in FIGS. 354 (a) and 354 (d), as a result of the timing tm11 when symbol variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, rendering progress according to a special rendering pattern And a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (period until symbol stop) Will allow this to continue without terminating the restore process.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body. Even if this is the case, the restoration process is not completed at least while the special rendering pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is performed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, restoration processing in a more serious manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state Since it becomes possible to perform additional implementation, etc., this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration and diagnosis, and the player will be carefully restored in this way as well. You will be able to watch the situation and enjoy the subsequent production with confidence. In this sense, it is desirable that a special effect pattern be prepared to be selectable only when it is determined to be a big hit. In addition, as a display content on the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to make a unique display mode such as "It is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while".

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 354 (a) and (d), the timing tm 11 arrives when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is continued without ending it even after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the restriction that "the recovery processing is forced to be performed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed although the abnormality occurs in the specific movable decorative body" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform restoration processing in a more serious manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, if there is a case that the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol variation is performed without interruption of the reserve process, the next restoration operation time (here, next time Design fluctuation start time will come. At this time, assuming that the restoration process started at timing tm 11 is still continued, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (eg, not located at the original position). It will be done. Then, if it is possible to newly start the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only the restoration process can not be performed, the contents of the process are naturally limited, and the inability to sufficiently cope with the abnormality may accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 354 (b) and (d), the restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is being performed. When the next restoration operation time (here, next symbol fluctuation start time) comes, it is made to continue this in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time without ending the restoration processing in the execution state . According to such a configuration, "despite the occurrence of an abnormality in the specific movable decorative body, regardless of the status under which the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is being performed is under any circumstances. With regard to the restoration process, the restriction that “the pattern change must be performed for each unit to be performed” is eliminated, so that the restoration process can be performed in a more serious manner.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol variation being started when the restoration process for a specific movable decorative object is being performed, the new symbol variation As, "a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 354 (a) to 354 (c), regardless of the status of the game or performance (and the status of restoration, etc.) after the special rendering pattern is ended, the timing is started from timing tm11. For the timing tx at which the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is completed, the time required for the next specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation to arrive (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (the time required for the special effect pattern to be digested), a specific movable over a relatively long time until the time of timing tm12 to tx is ended It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the decoration.

  When a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is ended, the situation appears. Do not end the restoration process within the new special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), straddle three or more times of the symbol variation (effect pattern) (after the one restoration process is started, One restoration process may be continued in the form of two or more restoration operation timings).

  In the example shown in FIG. 354, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal at the timing tx when the “processing for causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoring operation” is completed. It is assumed that it will be in the state. As described above, by continuing the one restoration process in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored conventionally. However, this can be made recoverable, and it becomes possible to perform a rendering operation of a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, in spite of the fact that one restoration process is continued in the form of straddling the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), at the time tx, the specific movable decorative body is abnormal When the state can not be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained from timing tx until the symbol variation is ended and the next restoration operation time further arrives. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to cause the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the rendering performance as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation at the specific timing tm2, thus providing a surprise effect. Will be able to

  It should be noted that in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific operation is performed each time the restoration operation time (here, symbol fluctuation start time) arrives. When the restoration process for the movable ornament of the present invention is started several times, if the specific movable ornament is broken to an unrecoverable degree, the specific movable ornament can not be restored. There is a concern that the fun of the game may be reduced by repeating the recovery process for the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is put in an abnormal state, the number of execution times of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number although the restoration operation timing has arrived for the predetermined upper limit number Although it is not restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes after that.

  However, on the other hand, only after a specific effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decorative body is put in an abnormal state. If there is a situation where an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and its condition One restoration process may be continued in the form of straddling the next rendering pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is put in the abnormal state, although the restoration operation timing has arrived by the predetermined upper limit number, it is not restored from the abnormal state. Even when the “1” th restoration operation time has come, this will be continued without ending the restoration process for the specific movable decoration. In this manner, with regard to the aspect in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set even if the number of times the restoration operation time arrives while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable to treat as one count of recovery processing so that it is not terminated so as not to prevent the recovery processing in a more serious manner from being prevented.

  By the way, about such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation), the board side movable decorative body (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, the back, etc. provided on the game board 5 side) In addition to the medium movable effect unit 3200, the specific decoration member SDY (such as a pottery), etc., basically, it is executed in the manner as described above also for the frame side movable decoration provided on the door frame 3 side. Ru. However, among the frame-side movable decorative members provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative members that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation button 410 provided movably, the sword decorative member 5001, etc.) In some cases, restoration (restoring) may be performed in a manner different from that in the case of the specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which symbol variation is performed, movable operation in which the operation opportunity imparting effect of giving the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed. An effect pattern of a system (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “a process of moving the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 341 (f))”; "Process of generating effect reception period for sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))", further "display for prompting operation (character display such as" press down ", bar display showing remaining time of effect reception period Processing (refer to FIG. 341 (f)) is performed. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 moved to the operation position is operated (here, an operation to be pushed in) and this is received as an effect, “specific decoration member SDY And the like (see FIG. 341 (g)) and “the process of causing a change in display content (see FIG. 341 (g))” are respectively performed. Become. Note that the board-side movable decorative body subjected to the rendering operation in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described in FIG. 353 or FIG. 354.

  However, in the “process to move the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” in such an operation opportunity giving effect, it is not executed when the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state with respect to the “processing to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001” and “the processing to display prompting for operation”. It can be executed at any time or in an abnormal state. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by the player who saw the “display prompting the operation” and the effect is accepted, A process of performing a rendering operation of a panel-side movable decorative body such as a specific decoration member SDY (a jumbo object) and a process of causing a change in display content in the effect display device 1600 are respectively performed. Moreover, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the abnormal state is that the sword decorative body 5001 receives an external force by the operation by the player and the operation part operates. It may also occur if the problem is resolved by itself.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 etc. provided movably provided) which is also used as operation means In the case of an abnormal state, a return process for applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative member (operation means) to the original position (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 353 and 354) The restoration process) is performed at each timing of “the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)” and “after the effect is accepted by the player operation in the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. It is made feasible.

  According to such a configuration, when the panel-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the panel-side movable is aimed at timings such as start time and stop time (more strictly, after start and stop) of the symbol variation. When the frame side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state while the process of restoring the decorative body is performed, the original timing (during the fluctuation period) is different from the original timing of the start or stop of the design change. The frame-side movable decoration (operation by the player) may be applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means), and the frame-side movable decoration (operation may be canceled). Since the process of restoring (removing) means is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be realized early. .

  FIG. 355 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the original position when the sword decorative body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decorative body (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 355, now, the effect pattern of the movable operation system (the effect pattern in which the operation opportunity imparting effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 while the symbol variation is performed) is executed At timing tm21, it is assumed that "a process of moving the sword decorative body 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is performed. Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operation position, “processing for generating a presentation reception period for the sword decorative body 5001”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ pressing in ”, and effect reception period If the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 and the effect is accepted while the bar display showing the remaining time of the is being executed (timing tm 22), “specific decorative member SDY (circumstances) etc. A process of causing the board-side movable decorative body to perform rendering operation and a process of causing a change in display content of the presentation display device 1600 are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 355, based on the fact that the effect has been accepted, the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 353 and 354 is operated as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 355, an abnormality occurs in the sword decorative body 5001 at the timing tm22 when the effect is received in this way, and this is not returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (the movable decoration on the panel side) and the abnormality is not returned to the original position. At this time, the determination that the abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 and the determination that the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration will be made respectively, but the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration. With regard to the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound and the display notification that accompany it are executed, but also the specific notification sound and the display with regard to the determination that the abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 It is desirable that at least one of the notification be performed. This is that the sword decorative body 5001 is "placed in the place where the player can reach (door frame 3)," and if it is notified that this is an abnormal state, repair work from the abnormal state will be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is "placed out of the reach of the player (the game board 5)", which has become abnormal. The player can not help anything as a player, and simply emphasizing that the movable effect is not performed may promote a decrease in the amusement of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 355, an abnormality is detected in the specific movable decorative body while performing the “process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform rendering operation” based on the fact that the effect is accepted at timing tm22. Although this will occur, the process of causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600 is performed as usual, thereby recognizing that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, with the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body both kept in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 355, at timing tm23, the symbol variation which is already in the holding state is immediately digested (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is started. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 353 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. That is, in a specific effect pattern, a specific movable decorative body is rendered to operate at a timing tm2 at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, at the time of symbol variation start The timing tx at which “the process of causing the specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is started is started within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the state of restoration). It is as mentioned above that it is made to be finished by the time it is until a predetermined production is started.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) according to this embodiment, “specific movable decoration is made based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, at the time of symbol variation start) for the sword decorative body 5001 as well. It is possible to execute a process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoring operation and a process of applying (driving force) to return it to the original position in parallel with at least a part of the operation. Moreover, the timing at which the “process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed is also similarly within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, the predetermined effect regardless of the state of restoration). Until it is started)).

  According to such a configuration, the recovery operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm2. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a rise when the restoring operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 355, the timing when the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is started and ended is the same as the timing when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is started and ended. However, only one of the timings may be the same, or any of the timings may be different.

  Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 354, “the process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation”, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration and diagnosis) appears, It is possible to continue even after the special effect pattern is over, and of course, the symbol variation that is on hold after the special effect pattern is over is immediately digested (started after 0.6 seconds, for example) In the situation where it is possible to carry out by continuing this process (one restoration process) without ending it when straddling the next restoration operation time (here, next symbol variation start time), It is desirable that the “process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation” can also be performed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 354). That is, in this case, also in the "process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation", when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoring operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it should be finished regardless of the situation of restoration between the start of the next symbol fluctuation and the time required for the timing tm2 to arrive. Become.

  In addition, after this is made abnormal also for the sword decorative body 5001, only a special effect pattern (a effect pattern for restoration and diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then a special effect pattern ( When a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the subsequent effect pattern are straddled It is also possible to continue one restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 in question.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 355, it is assumed that at timing tx, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration processing for the sword decorative body 5001 are ended, but both restoration fails. Therefore, at timing tm2, the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the abnormal state. As a result, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force is applied to a specific movable decorative body (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even when returning to the original position (in a normal state) due to, the rendering operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at timing tm2. That is, it can be said that the application of an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2 is itself an abnormal situation. In such a low-reliability situation, it is highly possible that it will not fail even if the rendering operation is performed by a specific movable decorative body, so that not doing this suppresses the decline of the game entertaining It is desirable to do it.

  Moreover, when the restoration process with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification associated with this be performed. That is, if there is a case where the recovery process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and notification is made every time the abnormal state occurs again, a misunderstanding is given as if it is the player's responsibility that the abnormal state is not eliminated. Since there is a risk that the above-mentioned notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and a display notification) is performed only when the first abnormality occurs from the normal state to the abnormal state, the player is urged to perform a repair operation. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 355, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are restored by the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, symbol variation start time) arriving after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state. Then, now, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again while only the sword decorative body 5001 is in the abnormal state, and as shown in FIG. 355, the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state at timing tm 25 is Assuming that the effect is accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect the possibility that the abnormality occurring in the sword decorative body 5001 is eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state at timing tm 25 is accepted for presentation by the operation of the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is It is possible to apply a driving force so as to return to the position (retain in the original position). In this case, in view of the fact that the movable decorative effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed based on the effect reception, the period during which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed (once The period when it succeeds in the return operation) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended (the specific movable decorative body is returned to the original position) It is desirable to make it finish before it is returned, in order to make it hard to recognize that such return processing is being performed. However, in view of the fact that there are few chances for recovery of the sword decorative body 5001 that has been unable to return so far due to such external force (operation by the player), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to its original state (return operation to the sword decorative body 5001) fails, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended. By continuing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (execution of the return operation to the sword decorative body 5001 again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation, thereby the player It is desirable to prompt for help. However, it is desirable that, even if the return processing fails, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated with the return processing is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 355, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decorative body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful, and thereafter While the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are kept in the normal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 355, the frame-side movable decorative member (sword decorative member 5001) which is also used as the operation means is set for the panel-side movable decorative member (specific movable decorative member) In addition to the restored operation timing (when symbol variation starts), the restoration operation timing (timing after the effect is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operation means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it is directly contacted by the player, but it is an original state even if it is an abnormal state. An abnormal state is eliminated since a large number of opportunities for position return are given and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning using at least an external force) are also used as a method of returning. The possibility of game play is also high, and the decline in

  In addition, about processing which gives driving force for returning to the original position to the sword decorative body 5001 after the effect is accepted by the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 which is in the abnormal state, the symbol fluctuation start A driving force may be applied to the sword decorative body 5001 with contents (different operation modes) different from the restoration processing performed when the time (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the sword decorative body 5001 is returned using the external force (operation by the player), the processing is performed with contents different from the processing when the external force is not used. It is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, regarding the processing, it is decided to execute in a simple mode that the return processing is ended within the symbol variation regardless of the status of the return, and when the return fails, it becomes more serious at the next restoration operation timing. It is desirable that a proper recovery process be performed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 355, the restoration operation timing (here, symbol variation start timing) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing on the sword decorative body 5001 has been executed the number of times. Even if the situation is not restored from the abnormal state, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) comes. Even when the effect-related effect pattern of the operation system is started and effects are accepted by the player's operation on the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state at timing tm 25, after the effect is received, the sword decorative body 5001 is It is desirable to perform processing for applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (retain in the original position). That is, as described above, the return processing after the effect is accepted is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decorative body 5001 which has not been able to return so far due to an external force (operation by the player) is increased. From the fact that it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-mentioned situation where return without external force is given up. Therefore, “process to generate effect reception period for sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))” and “display for prompting operation (“ press down ”character display or bar indicating remaining time of effect reception period It is important that the process of performing the display) (see FIG. 341 (f)) is performed as usual also in the above-mentioned situation where the return without external force is collected.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 is pushed in a state of being located at the operation position (when moving to a specific detection position) when a first operation opportunity is given and when it is in an original position (pushing to a specific detection position When the operation means is provided such that there is a case where the second operation opportunity is given so as to operate), even if the effect reception has occurred in the second operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, but the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the effect reception is generated at the first operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the second operation opportunity is given, even if the effect is accepted, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, and the possibility that the abnormal state is eliminated is also expected to be naturally low.

  In addition, the process for applying the driving force for returning to the original position to the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword decorative body 5001 which has been in the abnormal state is accepted by the operation of the player is not necessarily the effect reception It does not need to be performed on condition that it is done, for example, it may be made to execute after completion of the effect reception period.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 351 to 355, the symbol variation start timing (further, the timing after receiving the effect) is illustrated as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. The predetermined timing may be determined on the condition that symbol fluctuation is executed at least, and may be used as at least one of symbol fluctuation start timing and symbol fluctuation stop timing, for example. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration processing is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start Allowing the restored processing to end until the timing tm 2 in the specific effect pattern that has been reserved is reached, or to execute it so as to extend over after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved The above-described respective processes are performed.

  Further, the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different according to the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the movement frequency of the movable decorative body is high occurs, an abnormal state is more likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is high. Therefore, in the special effect state, a normal effect state It is desirable to make the game possible so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 etc.) used as an operation means or a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the above special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 354, the abnormal state over the period until the next effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is started. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body in the above. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a symbol variation start time) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is renewed again Because it does not start it, and it will continue this without ending one restoration process that is already in the running state, it can be moved separately from the movable ornament that is the target of the restoration process. When the decorative body newly becomes abnormal, it becomes a problem at which timing the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 354, the restoration process for a specific movable decorative object started at timing tm 11 is a new restoration operation time (next time) after time tm 12 when a special effect pattern is ended. It is continuously executed without ending even when crossing over the start time of symbol variation. In this respect, an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body other than the specific movable decorative body between the time when the timing tm 11 elapses and the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) comes In the case where at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or “both method 1 and method 2” or “both method 1 and method 3” is used, the restoration process for the other movable ornament It is desirable to do

  Method 1: In the case where at least a specific movable decorative body is provided as a panel-side movable decorative body while the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body When a new restoration operation time (the next design change start time) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (the next design change start time) Is newly started on another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) based on the arrival of.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state, It will be treated as effective for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) for which restoration processing is not yet executed, and the other movable decorative body will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation timing) It is possible to newly start the restoration process on the body (frame-side movable decoration). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) and restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously performed, There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early return of the movable decorations will be expected.

  Method 2: When at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body continues Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) arrives during the execution, at that time, the specific movable process (frame side movable decoration) is not started and the specific process is not started. After waiting for completion of one restoration process for the movable decoration, another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) Start the restoration process for the body).

  According to the method 2, although the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state, It will be treated as an effective thing with respect to another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) in which the restoration processing is not yet executed. In this respect, when starting the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration), the process waits for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decoration. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of the movable ornaments will be expected.

  Method 3: When at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body continues Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) comes in execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). Is not executed, and another movable decorative body (frame side movable is activated after waiting for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body, and then the restoration operation timing that arrives thereafter). Start the restoration process for the decoration body).

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is the restoration process for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state, and another movable decoration that is not yet in the execution state It is treated as invalid for either of the restoration process for the object, and even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration, unless one restoration process for the specific movable decoration is ended. No processing for an abnormal state is performed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being performed, those movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to sufficiently cope with the abnormality, and it is expected to suppress the progress rate of deterioration as the movable decorative body.

(Operation check period of operation button)
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), operations such as the operation button 410 and the sword effect operation unit 5000 (the sword decoration 5001) can be performed as effects according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a. As described above, it is possible to execute an effect at the time of operation using a drive type operation means (such as an effect in which an expectation of the awarding of a benefit is suggested not only by the operation but also by the operation). However, although it is possible to execute such an effect at the time of operation, if some kind of abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means can not operate normally, the player experiences the operation time effect in the manner intended by the designer. It becomes difficult to make it happen, and as a result, there is a concern that it will lead to a decrease in the game interest. Therefore, this pachinko machine 1 generates an operation confirmation period (an arbitrary operation confirmation period and an automatic operation confirmation period), which will be described later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, as a part of maintenance relating to the executability of operation effects. It is confirmed that the player can feel the effect at the time of operation of the mode intended by the designer, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

  Specifically, an operation confirmation period in which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, for convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described, but a similar operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword rendering operation unit 5000. The operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decorative member 5001 may be generated in parallel or sequentially. In addition, in order to realize a confirmation operation more reliably for each member, a period overlapping the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decorative body 5001 is not provided (a period overlap is avoided). Preferably) sequentially. FIG. 356 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period).

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operating position) protruding from the rendering operation unit 400. Specifically, the rendering operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined projection start condition is satisfied. When it does, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push it to the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state from a state in which the operation button 410 protrudes, and a predetermined projection is performed in a state in which the operation button 410 protrudes. In the case where the operation state is not returned to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied and the predetermined time elapses), the operation button 410 is normally operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a projection position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state, and in such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projection start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the projecting state, and in such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projection position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a pressure detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. Such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440 makes it possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state or that the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state. .

  Further, as effects set in the fluctuation pattern, effects using the operation button 410 in the normal state and effects using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, by pressing or continuously hitting the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction, during the execution of the effect in the game board side effect display device 1600, The pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, for example, while the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 is being executed, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruded state and By pressing the operation button 410 in the projecting state to the normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Note that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is a effect having a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a projecting state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with expectation than in the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 356, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the operation confirmation period, the operation confirmation of whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in the state of protruding from the normal state is made by the worker (player or player It is possible to realize it at the discretion of the administrator. Specifically, when the occurrence condition of the operation confirmation period described later is satisfied, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is started, and the operation button 410 is in the normal state for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this embodiment) which is the occurrence period. When the pressing detection status (operation detection status) is monitored and pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the state where the operation button 410 is protruded based on the pressing detection (operation detection) Change to On the other hand, pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is not detected for a predetermined time even after the occurrence condition of the arbitrary operation confirmation period is satisfied (while generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period) In this case, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended by the passage of a predetermined time. According to this, for the player who wants to confirm whether the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated or the hole manager, it suffices to press the operation button 410 during the occurrence of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and by the depression It is possible to give confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, and to safely execute / provide an operation effect using the operation button 410.

  When it is detected that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed and the normal state is pressed before the predetermined time elapses after the operation button 410 is pressed to be in the protruding state. Then, it returns to the normal state again, and ends the optional operation confirmation period when a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, when the depression of the operation button 410 in the projecting state is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forced to be in the normal state by driving when the predetermined time elapses. It will be returned. In addition, after generating the optional operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is depressed to be in a projecting state, and when the operation button 410 is depressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary time until the predetermined time passes after confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated.

  The operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) described above occurs when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, as the occurrence condition of the operation confirmation period, the occurrence condition is established at the time of execution of the demonstration effect in order to avoid overlapping with the operation effect. Specifically, in the demonstration effect, there is no entry into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain period of time after the effect set in the variation pattern is finished, and the effect set in the variation pattern is It is an effect of waiting for a guest when the game is not started (the information regarding the progression of the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a is not received by the peripheral control MPU 1511a for a certain period of time), and it is suitable for avoiding the overlapping occurrence with the operation effect. In this manner, by using the demonstration effect execution time to generate the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the inspection operation period, the boring time that the effect set in the fluctuation pattern is not started is the operation button 410. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time whether or not it normally detects and operates.

  In addition, the start of the demonstration effect is an instruction by the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the demonstration effect when the ball entry into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 does not take a certain time while the symbol game is not progressing The start command may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a may generate a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) by receiving the start command. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, an instruction (for example, demonstration effect start command) by the main control MPU 1310a is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, and by receiving it, the peripheral control MPU 1511a side confirms the operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation Period may be generated, thereby avoiding duplication with the effect during operation and confirming whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts playing the game It is possible to perform and provide the effect at the time of operation using the operation button 410 with greater confidence.

  In addition, an LED (each LED of the decoration member 432 in the operation button) is mounted on the operation button 410, and it is determined whether or not the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred, or the progress stage of the arbitrary operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period In accordance with the state of the operation button 410), the light emission mode is changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is in the extinguished state. Then, when an arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is of a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined light amount (emission period A for confirmation period indicating that an arbitrary operation is possible Light up with). This makes it possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and that pressing of the operation button 410 is requested. Then, after the occurrence of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed to protrude, the LED of the operation button 410 has the same color as the case where the operation button 410 is not pressed even once. However, light is emitted in a mode (light emission mode B for confirmation period suggesting during arbitrary operation) in which the light quantity of one step is increased. As a result, even after the operation button 410 is pressed and projected, it is possible to notify the outside that the pressing of the operation button 410 is further requested. Thereafter, when the operation button 410 is brought into the normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 once are performed at least until the remaining optional operation confirmation period (predetermined time) has elapsed. Light is emitted in the mode (the light emission mode C for confirmation period which suggests the completion of the arbitrary operation) in which the light amount is weaker than that of the light emission modes A and B for the confirmation period described above. This makes it possible to notify the outside that the confirmation work in the optional operation confirmation period has been normally performed. Note that even when the optional operation confirmation period has not occurred, the operation button 410 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner, for example, light is emitted in a manner different from any of the operation confirmation period light emission aspects A to C Can be illustrated.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 356, after a predetermined standby period has elapsed since the end of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the depression of the player, and the position of the operation button 410 is normal. An automatic operation confirmation period is provided to confirm the origin so as to be located at. In the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated to move up and down several times in the vicinity of the normal state, and the normal position sensor is used to detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. The origin has been confirmed. Then, after confirmation of the origin, the operation button 410 is in a projecting state, and is operated to return from the projecting state to a normal state. At this time, when the normal position sensor detects that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, it can be understood that the operation button 410 is operating at the normal position. According to this, it is possible to secure that the operation button 410 operates at the normal position, and to prevent the operation button 410 from being displaced when the effect using the operation button 410 is executed.

  Further, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period, a period longer than the automatic operation confirmation period is set. Specifically, while the predetermined time of "10 seconds" is set as the arbitrary operation confirmation period as described above, a short time of "5 seconds" as the time taken for a series of operations as the automatic operation confirmation period Is set. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 operates to confirm the origin regardless of the depression of the player. In other words, the operation confirmation of the drive system is automatically advanced. On the other hand, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period, if the player does not press the button, the operation button 410 in the normal state does not change to the projecting state, and if the player does not press in the projecting state, The protruding state is maintained until the optional operation confirmation period elapses. Therefore, by changing the arbitrary operation confirmation period to be longer than the automatic operation period, the pressing of the operation button 410 is not missed, and the appearance of the operation button 410 in the projecting state, etc. is changed by driving. It is possible to allow players and hall managers to check carefully over a long period of time without having a problem, but to quickly end the operation check (automatic operation period) of the drive system with a low need for such long-term check. It is possible to increase the efficiency of a series of checking operations of the drive-type operating means.

  In the standby period between the optional operation confirmation period and the automatic operation confirmation period, the frame side lens 417 or the second provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 A periphery confirmation period is provided in which lighting confirmation can be performed as to whether or not the button decoration part 411b (each LED of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423) is lit. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and the player's operation can be accepted at the time of effect presentation. Further, in the peripheral confirmation period, when one of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are lighted, but either is pressed The mode (for example, the light emission mode such as the brightness and the color) in which the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are lighted is different depending on the light. Therefore, in the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pressing is recognized normally, and at the same time, the frame side lens 417 or the It can be confirmed whether the two-button decoration part 411b lights normally, and a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period) confirm the drive type operation means itself Not only that, but also confirmation of related members around it can be performed together.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is not pressed in the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the projection state is not made, the periphery confirmation period may not be provided after that. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are not lighted, and a series of operation check periods are shortened. It becomes.

  Also, prior to the series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which vibration confirmation can be made as to whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 is operated by the operation of the operation button 410 There is. In the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates to vibrate the effect operation unit 400. For this reason, in the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether the vibration motor 424 operates and the rendering operation unit 400 vibrates normally. In addition, by causing a series of operation check periods to occur at a time that does not overlap with the vibration check period, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the series of operation check periods from being disturbed by the vibrations in the vibration check period, and efficiently perform various check operations. realizable.

  Further, when the predetermined protrusion start condition established in the progress of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state, but due to some abnormality, the operation button 410 is operated by the normal position sensor. The normal state may not be detected, and the operation button 410 may not be in the normal position. As a cause, for example, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state when the predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, the case where the malfunction occurs or the player intentionally does not return the operation button 410 to the normal state. If you do In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded, and control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 357 (A), other than a series of operation check periods, when the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (when the effect based on the fluctuation pattern is started), the special corresponding to the end of symbol game Whether the operation button 410 is abnormally projecting at the end of the fluctuation of the symbol (at the end of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) or at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above (the timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods) If it is determined that it is in the abnormal projecting state (not the normal position), control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed. It will be. According to this, even when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing unrelated to the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern This prevents the misunderstanding that the operation button 410 has operated as part of the effect based on the above. In addition, after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, even if the effect using the operation button 410 is performed, it ensures that the operation button 410 operates normally, and the curiosity decline for the effect occurs To prevent.

  In addition, as described above, when it is set to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period using the demonstration effect execution time, the operation button 410 is abnormal when the demonstration effect is started. When the control button 410 is in the projecting state and control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control for returning to the normal position) is performed, the start of the series of operation check periods may be delayed. For example, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormal projecting state at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect (the timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), the operation confirmation period even if it is the start timing of the series of operation confirmation periods When priority is given to control to return the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) without starting the operation button, and the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (when it returns to the normal position) Alternatively, the entire series of operation confirmation periods may be started in a delayed manner based on that.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 357 (B), in a series of operation check periods, it corresponds to the start of variation of special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (at the start of effect based on variation pattern) and the end of symbol game At the timing of the end of fluctuation of special symbol (at the end of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), it is not judged whether the operation button 410 is in the abnormal projecting state (is not the normal position) or not. Even in the protruded state (not in the normal position), at that time, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed. This is in order to give priority to the operation confirmation as to whether or not the operation button 410 in the above-described optional operation confirmation period is pressed and projected in particular, and the operation button generated arbitrarily in the arbitrary operation confirmation period It is for maintaining the projecting state of 410 so as not to end by progress of the symbol game. As described above, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded in the operation confirmation period, the operation is performed at the end of the operation confirmation period, as in the case where the player presses and protrudes. Control for returning the button 410 will be performed. If the operation button 410 in the abnormal state is pressed to the normal state before the predetermined period as the operation check period elapses, the abnormality does not have to wait for the predetermined period to elapse. The operation button 410 in the protruded state is to be returned to the normal state.

(Detection of abnormality of sword decoration)
Next, an abnormality when the sword portion 5011 (see FIG. 278 to FIG. 281) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword rendering operation unit 5000 described above should not be in the knapsack state despite being a state that should be in the knives state. Detection will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 358 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the sword decorative body 5001 and abnormality detection.

  The sword decorative body 5001 can be changed into an inserted sword state in which the blade portion 5011 is stored and a removed sword state (second removed blade state) in which the blade portion 5011 is exposed. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the state between the knapsack state and the sculpting state (first scraping state) is used as the effect using the sword decorative body 5001, but in this example, such a state is It shall not be used. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided with an insert position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in the inserted state, and a removal position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in the removed state. ing. In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the blade portion 5011 from the removal state to the removal state. In this example, the state of the sword corresponds to an operable state in which the player can remove the sword 5011, and the state of the sword corresponds to the inoperable state in which the player can not remove the sword 5011. .

  Further, as the effect set to the variation pattern, an effect using the sword decorative body 5011 is set. As shown in FIG. 358 (A), in the effect using the sword decorative body 5001, an operation reception period in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the knapsack state can be removed is generated within the rendering time, and Within the operation reception period, a predetermined effect is achieved by setting the blade 5011 in the katakana state according to an instruction (for example, display of "Shut up sword", etc.) in the display area etc. of the game side effect display device 1600. You can get the result. Then, if the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period and puts the blade portion 5011 into the removed sword state, control is made to return the blade portion 5011 to the inserted sword state at the end of the rendering time. To be done. Further, if the player does not remove the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period and the blade 5011 is kept in the state of the sword, the state of the sword 5011 at the end of the operation reception period. Hold. It should be noted that the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in at least the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410 described above. There is. That is, when the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 can be removed with more expectation than when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed.

  As shown in FIG. 358 (B), the blade portion 5011 should be positioned in the state of the sword except in the operation reception period, but the period other than the operation reception period is not in the state of the sword is a predetermined period (in this example, If it is determined that 2 seconds have been reached, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, and a restoration restoration control for returning the blade 5011 to the state of the sword is performed. That is, other than the operation reception period, it can be determined that abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 when the blade portion 5011 is in the scraped state or in a state between the scraped state and the inserted sword state. It has become. In this example, since the detection state of the above-mentioned set position sensor is in the OFF state (the state where the blade 5011 is not set), the set state described above (other than the operation reception period) It is assumed that the measurement of the period is not started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 358 (C), in the operation reception period, the sword 501 should be positioned in the state of the sword unless the player removes the sword decorative body 5001, but the period is not the state of the sword. If it is determined that the time has reached a predetermined period (two seconds in this example), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, and the restoration recovery control for returning the blade 5011 to the state of the sword is To be done. That is, in the operation reception period, when the player removes the sword decorative body 5001, the blade portion 5011 is positioned in the removed state, so the sword decorative body is only in the state between the removed state and the inserted state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001, and in this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the insertion sword position sensor is in the ON state (the sword 5011 is in the insertion sword state) . In this example, the processing time of one cycle for returning the blade unit 5011 to the state of the inserted sword is set to "0.5 seconds" in the inserted sword restoration control.

  Further, as the operation reception period, a period (4 seconds in this example) longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 is set. During the operation reception period, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, the restoration recovery control for returning the blade 5011 to the state of the sword is performed. However, the operation reception is performed after returning to the state of the sword. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and in the remaining period, the player can remove the sword decorative body 5001. Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation reception period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of removing the sword decorative body 5001 from being inhibited.

  As described above, the judgment as to whether or not the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded (whether or not it is a normal position) is at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern At the start of the effect production), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), it is performed only at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above. That is, during the operation receiving period of the operation button 410 capable of pressing the operation button 410, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded (is not a normal position). Not. On the other hand, the judgment as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 is made to be made also in the operation reception period in which the sword decorative body 5001 can be removed. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation reception period, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player can not remove the sword decorative body 5001 as much as possible. In addition, among the effects using the operation button 410, the effect using the sword decorative body 5001 has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in at least the normal state. , It is possible to prevent the omission of the rendering result in the rendering with such a high degree of expectation.

  In this example, the period when the blade 5011 is not in the state of the sword has reached a predetermined period (two seconds in this example), except in the case where the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, but among them, the abnormality occurs in the sword decorative body 5001 only when the blade 5011 is not in the state of the sword at the start of the operation reception period. It may be determined. For example, at the start of the operation reception period, the blade 5011 is in the inserted state, and after the start of the operation reception period, it is unclear whether the player should completely remove the sword decorative body 5001 or not. There is a possibility that the state between the state and the state of the sword can be left for a predetermined period, but in such a case, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001. .

  In addition, when giving an instruction in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 and the like regarding the removal of the sword decorative body 5001, the instruction is continuously continued regardless of the occurrence and cancellation of the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period. It may be performed. For example, in the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, a restoration recovery control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the state of the removal knife is performed. Even during the period until “to do” and “the remaining period of the operation reception period after returning the blade portion 5011 to the state of the sword”, the instruction in the display area or the like of the game-side effect display device 1600 is continued. Also, temporarily, if the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 according to the instruction “before the end of the restoration control of the sword”, the sword portion 5011 is in the removed state, so that the restoration of the sword is performed. The control is forcibly terminated and the instruction is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the timing of participation in the effect of removing the sword decorative body 5001 from being disturbed by the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition, although the restoration restoration control for returning the blade 5011 to the state of the sword is performed in this example, it is possible that the blade 5011 can not return to the state of the sword due to the catching of a foreign object or the like. In this case, one cycle of the restoration control of the cycle, which should normally be completed in “0.5 seconds”, may be repeated for a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the restoration restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the state of the sword continues beyond the operation reception period, but in such a case, the operation is performed while the restoration restoration control is being performed. The effect presentation may be derived at the end of the reception period, and the recovery control may be continued even after the derivation of the result presentation. Thereby, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 can not be eliminated, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the game interest will be reduced without preventing the progress of the effect.

(Error judgment timing of operation button)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 359 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decoration provided on the operation button 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 which can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body which can not be operated by the player.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player and is in a normal state (initial position) not projecting from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operating position) projecting from the rendering operation unit 400 And can be changed. Specifically, the rendering operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined projection start condition is satisfied. When it does, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push it to the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a projecting position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a projecting state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state from the protruded state.

  As shown in FIG. 359 (A), at the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (at the start of presentation based on the variation pattern), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of symbol game (variation pattern (At the end of the rendering based on), at the timing of the start of the demonstration rendering described above, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state without the predetermined projection start condition being established, but at those timings, It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the abnormal projection state (is not the normal position), and when it is determined that the abnormal projection state is not (the normal position), the operation button 410 Control is performed to restore the normal state. As described above, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded, it is returned to the normal state at least at the start of the change of the special symbol, so the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as the effect based on the change pattern. When being turned on, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being inhibited.

  In the game board 5, around the game board side effect display device 1600, the back down back movable effect unit 3100, the back up left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back up middle movable effect unit 3400, back down A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as a front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that can not be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a standby state around the game-side effect display device 1600 (standby position), and the game-side effect display device It can be changed to an operation state (exposure position) exposed to the front of the display area 1600. In addition, these movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In the back down movable effect unit 3100, back up left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back up middle movable effect unit 3400, and back down front movable effect unit 3500, each movable decorative body is not A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In the back down movable effect unit 3100, the back up left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back up middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower movable effect unit 3500, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state A drive mechanism (e.g., a drive motor) is provided to operate between the and the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 359 (B), at the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (at the start of presentation based on the variation pattern), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of symbol game (variation pattern (At the end of the rendering based on), at the timing of the start of the demonstration rendering described above, the movable decorative body should be positioned in the non-operating state without a predetermined operation start condition being established, but at those timings If it is determined that the movable decorative body is in the non-operating state (whether or not it is the normal position), and it is determined that the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state (not the normal position) Control is performed to determine and return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. As described above, when the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is returned to the non-operating state at least at the start of the variation of the special symbol. The movable decorative body does not operate when the game is performed, and it is possible to prevent the curiosity of the presentation from being scraped. In addition, during the execution of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, if the movable decorative body remains positioned in front of the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the visual recognition of the display area is hindered. However, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation by returning to the non-operating state at least at the start of the change of the special symbol.

  The operation button 410 is a member which can be touched by the player, and the player can inhibit the change to the normal state or the timing of controlling the projecting state, while the movable decorative body It is a member which can not be touched by the player, and the player can not inhibit the change to the state at the timing of controlling the inoperative state or the operative state. For this reason, the operation button 410 is more likely to be abnormal than the movable decorative body. In this respect, the operation button 410 increases the chances of the abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred more than the movable decorative body, so that even if the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is at an early stage. It is possible to return to the normal position. For this reason, there is a high possibility that an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, but when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on a fluctuation pattern, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 is It can be prevented from being inhibited.

  In addition, as the effect set in the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, and an effect using the movable decorative body are performed However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, the operation button 410 has a problem at the timing of controlling the operation button 410 in a normal state or a protruding state. There is a high probability that an abnormality will occur. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has many opportunities for abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body. For this reason, although the frequency of using the operation button 410 is high, when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the occurrence of the abnormality inhibits the participation in the effect. It can be prevented.

(Abnormal occurrence of the operation button in operation production)
Next, an effect at the time of operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361. FIG. 360 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the projecting state, and FIG. 361 is the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button 410 in.

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operating position) protruding from the rendering operation unit 400. Specifically, the rendering operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined projection start condition is satisfied. When it does, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push it to the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state from a state in which the operation button 410 protrudes, and a predetermined projection is performed in a state in which the operation button 410 protrudes. In the case where the operation state is not returned to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied and the predetermined time elapses), the operation button 410 is normally operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a projection position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state, and in such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projection start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the projecting state, and in such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projection position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a pressure detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. Such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440 makes it possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state or that the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state. .

  Further, as effects set in the fluctuation pattern, effects using the operation button 410 in the normal state and effects using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. Note that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is a effect having a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a projecting state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with expectation than in the normal state.

  First, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a projecting state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start time, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether it is the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 360A, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (is in the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button in the normal state Change 410 into a projecting state. In addition, in the operation reception period, an instruction by display on the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, an instruction effect A at the time of the projecting operation instructing the operation of the operation button 410 in the projecting state An indication of copying the operation button 410 in the state, a message display of "Push the operation button pushed out!", An instruction by sound from a speaker (for example, a voice of "Push the operation button pushed out!", Etc.) Is performed in combination.

  In the above-described operation reception period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the projecting state to the normal state, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. As described above, when the operation button 410 in the projecting state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. When the operation button 410 in the projecting state is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed when the operation reception period ends. To be done. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the projecting state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect A at the time of the projecting operation described above may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 360 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (is not the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is judged that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded. Further, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as the case where the abnormality does not occur. The instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation is to notify the player that the abnormal projection is equivalent to the regular projection, but for example, an instruction by the display on the display area of the game effect display device 1600 (For example, a display that duplicates the operation button 410 in a projecting state, a message display such as "This is a real thing! Press the operation button without worry!", Etc.) , "This is the projection of the real thing! Press the operation button without worrying!" As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an operation of changing to a state in which the operation button 410 in the normal state is protruded is not performed. It is not possible to recognize whether an effect using an operation button 410 is being performed or an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state can not be recognized, and an operation in a further protruding state There is a possibility that the player may hesitate to operate the button 410. However, the instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation is performed by the display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 or the sound from the speaker, so that the operation button 410 at least protrudes from the display or the sound. It can be recognized that the effect used is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the expectation of the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. Note that the indication effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those configured with different effect contents as described above, but informing the player that the abnormal protrusion is equivalent to the regular protrusion. The instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect contents, as long as

  In addition, at the time of execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is pressed to the normal state By doing this, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism, and the normal state is restored. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state is normally displayed at the end of the operation reception period. Control is performed to return to the state. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect B at the time of the above-described protruding operation may be ended.

  Next, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start of the process, it is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether it is the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 361A, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (is in the normal position) when the operation reception period starts, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. Maintain. In addition, in the operation reception period, an instruction by display on the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, normal) as the instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation instructing the operation button 410 in the normal state to be operated. The display showing a copy of the operation button 410 in the state, the message display of “Press the operation button!”, Etc., and the voice instruction from the speaker (for example, the sound of “Press the operation button!”) It will be. Further, in the operation reception period, when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 361 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (is not the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is judged that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded. Further, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation described above is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as the case where the abnormality does not occur. The instruction effect D for the normal operation is to inform the player that the current protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion, for example, the instruction by the display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (( For example, a display showing a copy of the operation button 410 in a normal state, a message display such as "This projection is not related but press the operation button!", Or an instruction by voice from a speaker (for example, this projection does not matter) Is performed by combining the voices of “press the operation button!” And the like. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation in which the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded occurs, but the display in the display area of the game effect display device 1600 is performed. Or, by performing the instruction effect at the time of normal operation by the sound from the speaker, it is possible to recognize from the display or the sound that at least the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed. . In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect D at the normal operation described above may be ended. In addition, the indication effects C and D at the time of the normal operation can inform the player that the present protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion without being limited to the one configured with different effect contents as described above. If it is, the instruction effects C and D at the time of normal operation may be configured with the same effect contents.

  In addition, at the time of executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormal projecting state is pressed to the normal state By doing this, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike the time of executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state, the operation is performed even when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period. The button 410 is not locked to the locking mechanism, and its abnormally projecting state is maintained. In addition, even at the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state to the normal state is not performed.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the projecting state, the operation button 410 in the abnormal projecting state is displayed within the operation reception period. When pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism and returned to the normal state. On the other hand, at the time of executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked. The mechanism is not locked, and its abnormally projecting state is maintained. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, is the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state being performed from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state? Although it is not possible to recognize whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is being performed, depending on whether the normal state is restored when the operation button 410 in the abnormal protruding state is pressed. It can be recognized that the effect of is being performed.

  It should be noted that when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in an abnormally projecting state is generated outside the operation reception period, as in the operation reception period when executing effects using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even when pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism, and the abnormally projecting state is maintained. In this manner, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded, as described later, at the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (at the start of effect based on the variation pattern), symbol game At the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above.

  Further, in the present example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect at the time of the normal operation described above is performed in the operation reception period at the time of executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. However, such an instruction effect during normal operation may not be performed. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is a effect with a lower degree of expectation than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and therefore, the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed. This is because the player hardly suffers a disadvantage even if the expectation for the effect can not be confirmed due to the failure.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in an abnormally protruding state is in a normal state in an operation reception period in executing an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state. When pressed down, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. However, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked. It is possible not to be locked to and to maintain its abnormally projecting state. That is, even when any of the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state and the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are performed when the operation button 410 has an abnormality, the abnormal protrusion When the operation button 410 in the above state is depressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not return to the normal state. This is because the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state when returning the operation button 410 to the normal state as a cause for the occurrence of an abnormality in the operation button 410, etc. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state comes, it is possible for such an actor to leave a trace that an abnormal projecting state has occurred in the operation button 410. You can call attention.

(Notice of abnormal operation button)
Next, a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 362 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player and is in a normal state (initial position) not projecting from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operating position) projecting from the rendering operation unit 400 And can be changed. Specifically, the rendering operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined projection start condition is satisfied. When it does, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push it to the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a projecting position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a projecting state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state from the protruded state.

  As shown in FIG. 362 (A), when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a projecting state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. However, at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruded state. Then, when the operation button 410 in the projecting state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality despite the fact that the operation button 410 in the projecting state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is established. Dont return. In such a case, the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded. However, at the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed. Even when the operation button 410 in the projecting state is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. To be done.

  In addition, even when control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is not normally locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality. It does not return to the state. In this manner, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded after the end of the operation reception period, as will be described later, when the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (based on the variation pattern At the start of the effect), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), at the start of the demonstration effect described above Then, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation reception period. To be done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 as described later is not performed. That is, in the operation reception period, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and there is a high possibility that the player is not intentional. It is trying to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making the occurrence conspicuous.

  On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 other than the operation reception period, the correspondence is different in the operation reception period compared to when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. For example, at the time of executing the demonstration effect described above, other than the operation acceptance period, the above-mentioned automatic operation confirmation period is also provided, and during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's depression. The origin is checked so that the operation button 410 is positioned at the normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 362 (B), in the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated to move up and down several times in the vicinity of the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is Usually, the origin is checked by a position sensor so that it can be detected as being in the normal position. Then, after confirmation of the origin, the operation button 410 is in a projecting state, and the operation button 410 is locked in the lock mechanism by operating to return to the normal state from the projecting state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruded state is operated to return to the normal state within the automatic operation confirmation period, It does not return to the normal state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in the abnormal projection state, and the abnormal projection operation button 410 is returned to the normal state unless the operation button 410 in the abnormal projection state returns to the normal state. Control is repeatedly performed. Then, when control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 back to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (five times in this example), the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state, The automatic operation confirmation period is ended, and after the automatic operation confirmation period is ended, control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 to a normal state is not performed. That is, even if the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation check period, and the abnormality continues after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period, the symbol is as after the end of the operation reception period described above At the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern) At the timing at the start (the timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally projecting state to the normal state is not performed.

  In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 is performed. Specifically, a notification by display on the display area of the game effect display device 1600 (for example, a display of "an error occurred in the operation button", etc.), and a blinking of a lamp or an LED provided on the main frame 4 By making notification (for example, the lamp or LED blinks more violently than in normal rendering), it is appealed to the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, control for returning the abnormally projecting operation button 410 to a normal state is performed after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period. It does not happen. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 is performed. That is, except for the operation confirmation period, although the operation of the operation button 410 is not requested as in the automatic operation confirmation period, there is a high possibility that the player operates the operation button 410 and an abnormality occurs. Since there is a high possibility that the player is intentional, the operation button 410 leaves a trace that a state of abnormal projection has occurred, and warns such an actor.

  In the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is performed You may However, in such a case, in the automatic operation confirmation period, it is preferable to perform in a mode in which the degree of appealing to the outside is suppressed rather than the effect to be notified when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. As a result, even after the end of the operation reception period, it is not disturbed by the effect notifying that the abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, and can be made to pay attention to the effect (effect based on the variation pattern) concerning the game progression it can.

(Confirmation effect at the time of abnormality occurrence of movable decoration)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 363 is a time chart showing the flow of effects when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

  In the game board 5, around the game board side effect display device 1600, the back down back movable effect unit 3100, the back up left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back up middle movable effect unit 3400, back down A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as a front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that can not be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a standby state around the game-side effect display device 1600 (standby position), and the game-side effect display device It can be changed to an operation state (exposure position) exposed to the front of the display area 1600. In addition, these movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In the back down movable effect unit 3100, back up left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back up middle movable effect unit 3400, and back down front movable effect unit 3500, each movable decorative body is not A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In the back down movable effect unit 3100, the back up left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back up middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower movable effect unit 3500, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state A drive mechanism (e.g., a drive motor) is provided to operate between the and the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 363, at the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of symbol game (at the start of presentation based on the variation pattern), at the end of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of symbol game (based on the variation pattern At the end of the rendering) and at the timing of the start of the demonstration described above (timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), the movable decorative body should be positioned in the non-operating state without a predetermined operation start condition being established. However, at those timings, it was judged whether or not the movable decorative body was in a non-operating state (whether or not it was a normal position), and it was judged that it was not in a non-operating state (not a normal position) In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the inoperative state.

  However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the movable decorative body can not move back to the non-operating state despite the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. An effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the decoration is performed. Specifically, the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image being displayed are changed to non-display. In addition, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 is made to blink vigorously. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the occurrence of the abnormality in the movable decorative body is appealed to the outside.

  Also, if the movable decorative body has not returned to the non-operating state, in addition to the effect notifying that the movable decorative body has an abnormality, it is confirmed whether or not to proceed the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600, a display such as "Please press the operation button when ending the abnormal notification and continue the game" is performed. Then, unless the operation button 410 is depressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but the display contents such as the decorative symbol and the background image remain undisplayed in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. It is made for the effect accompanying display contents, such as lighting of the lamp and LED provided in the main body frame 4 and sound from a speaker, not to be performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is depressed in the confirmation effect, an effect notifying of the occurrence of an abnormality in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect confirming whether to advance the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred End the Then, after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but display contents such as a decorative symbol and a background image are displayed in the display area of the game effect effect display device 1600 Is returned, and effects associated with the display contents such as lighting of the lamps and LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and sounds from the speakers are performed. For example, when an effect for operating the movable decorative body is performed after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, display of the display area, the lamp, and the like, as compared with the case where no abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body Although there is no change in the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker, the movable decorative body does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decorative body. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the confirmation effect is performed, and it is recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed, and then the game is advanced. Thus, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the inoperable movable decorative body. In addition, not only when the movable decorative body in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state, but also when an abnormality occurs such that the movable decorative body stops operating from the non-operating state, the same confirmation effect is performed. It is

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect is performed in which the movable decorative body can operate by pressing the operation button 410. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the operation reception period in the effect using the operation button 410 (period in which the detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is effective when the operation button 410 is pressed) Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not move from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be displayed by performing an effect notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect confirming whether to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Even when the used effect is performed, even if the operation button 410 is pressed, it can be recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate.

  In the present example, as the effect using the operation button 410, an effect capable of deriving a predetermined effect result without the movable decorative body operating by pressing the operation button 410 is also performed. As described above, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the display of the display area, the lighting of the lamp and the LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected, so that the movable decorative body operates. With no effect, it is possible to perform the same effect as when there is no abnormality in the movable decorative body.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed, and when the movable decorative body is not returned to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body In order to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the case, and to confirm whether or not to proceed the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred, a confirmation effect has been performed, but when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, You may make it perform. In such a case, control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed after the start of the confirmation effect, for example, when the movable decorative body returns to the non-operating state during execution of the confirmation effect, Even before the operation button 410 is pressed, the confirmation effect may be ended.

(Interference avoidance operation of multiple movable bodies)
Next, an interference avoiding operation when an abnormality occurs in any one of the plurality of movable bodies in a state in which they can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 364 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button cover 419 and the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation reception period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 which can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 as an opening / closing member as to whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated is provided. Will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper portion of the operation button 410 in the normal state, and the closed state in which the operation button 410 is sealed so that the operation button 410 can not be operated, and the operation button 410 It can be changed to the open state where the operation button 410 is exposed as it can be. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in a closed state, and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in an open state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning from the open state to the closed state.

  The operation button 410 is changeable between a normal state (initial position) not projecting from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operating position) projecting from the rendering operation unit 400, as with the operation buttons 410 other than this example. It has become. Specifically, the rendering operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined projection start condition is satisfied. When it does, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is in a state of being projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player operates to push it to the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a projecting position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a projecting state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state from the protruded state.

  Further, as the effect set in the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 is set. As shown in FIG. 364 (A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation reception period occurs, The operating button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. Then, when it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the state of being protruded. In the operation reception period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruded state up to the normal state according to the instruction.

  When the operation button 410 in the projecting state is depressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored, but the operation button 410 in the projecting state is in the normal state. If the user does not press the button, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state when the operation reception period ends. Further, at the end of the operation reception period, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed.

  In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is protruded, and the operation button 410 in the protruded state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, problems such as a stop of the operation button cover 419 between the closed state and the open state may occur. That is, when the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to be in a projecting state without opening the operation button cover 419, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 which are going to protrude interfere with each other, and the operation button Further problems may occur in 410 and the operation button cover 419. For this reason, when the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state, control for avoiding the interference is performed so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 364 (B), at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, control is performed to open the operation button cover 419 in the closed state, but when the operation button cover 419 is open If it is determined that there is no error, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and control for causing the operation button 410 in the normal state to protrude is not performed (control for causing the operation button 410 to protrude) To ban). Thereby, when the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state, interference between the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 can be prevented. Even when the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, as long as the operation button cover 419 does not open when the operation reception period occurs. In this case, the control for causing the operation button 410 in the normal state to protrude is not performed (the control for causing the operation button 410 to protrude) is prohibited.

  In addition, even when the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, thereafter, when the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the finger touch of the player itself, Then, it is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been eliminated, and control is performed to allow the operation button 410 in the normal state to be in a protruding state, while allowing the operation button 410 to be in a protruding state. As described above, even though the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a situation where they interfere with each other, when the situation where the interference occurs is eliminated by the contact, the operation button 410 is in a state of being protruded. Then, in the remaining period of the operation reception period, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in the protruded state. For this reason, even when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the protruded state is performed by the player's self-help effort. It is possible to prevent the inhibition of participation. After pressing the operation button 410 in the projecting state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the abnormal state to the closed state, and the operation button cover 419 is returned to the normal state, and the operation is performed later. The situation where the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other is prevented in advance.

  When the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the finger touch of the player itself even though the operation button cover 419 has not been opened at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, normally When the operation button 410 in the state of is projected but not pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation reception period are sequentially terminated. The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, at the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state, and thereafter, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, the operation button in the released state Control is performed to return the cover 419 to the closed state. This prevents, in advance, the situation where the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other again.

  On the other hand, when the operation reception period occurs, the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state, and when the player is left in that state after that, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not in the protruding state. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state. Further, at the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred back to the closed state, so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is resolved. And the operation button cover 419 prevent the occurrence of interference.

(Operation at the time of abnormality occurrence of the operation button according to the game state)
Next, an operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 365 is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-time-short state and the time-short state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 which can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 as an opening / closing member as to whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated is provided. Will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper portion of the operation button 410 in the normal state, and the closed state in which the operation button 410 is sealed so that the operation button 410 can not be operated, and the operation button 410 It can be changed to the open state where the operation button 410 is exposed as it can be. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in a closed state, and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in an open state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning from the open state to the closed state.

  The operation button 410 is changeable between a normal state (initial position) not projecting from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operating position) projecting from the rendering operation unit 400, as with the operation buttons 410 other than this example. It has become. The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, in the non-time-short state (normal state), the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude and is located in the normal state, whereas in the time-short state, the lock mechanism is locked. The operating button 410 is located in a projecting state by the spring mechanism. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a projecting position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a projecting state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state from the protruded state.

  In this example, in the non-time-short state (normal state), an effect can be performed using the operation button 410 in the normal state. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and the operation in the closed state when the operation reception period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in the normal state. Then, in the operation reception period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state in accordance with the instruction. At the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed.

  In the non-short time state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation acceptance period. However, as shown in FIG. 365 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the projecting state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After the operation button 410 in the protruded state is returned to the normal state, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state at the predetermined abnormality determination timing, only control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state. Is done. In addition, with specified abnormality decision timing, same as other than this example, at the time of the fluctuation start of special symbol which corresponds at the time of the start of the symbol game (at the time of the effect start based on fluctuation pattern), of the special symbol which corresponds at the end of the symbol game It is a timing at the start of the demonstration effect described above at the end of the change (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern).

  On the other hand, in the time saving state, an effect can be performed using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and the operation reception period is in the protruding state when the operation reception period occurs By depressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined rendering result can be obtained. In addition, as long as it is in the short time state, even if the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed to the normal state, the lock is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the operation button 410 is returned to the protruded state. Become.

  In the short time state, the operation button cover 419 should be in the open state and the operation button 410 should be in the protruded state. However, as shown in FIG. 365 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the operation button cover 419 in the closed state to the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruded state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at the predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the projecting state Only

  As described above, in the non-time-short state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state, whereas in the time-short state, the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. In addition to the above, the operation button 410 should be in a projecting state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-time-short state and the time-short state. However, any one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 When an abnormality occurs in the above, by changing the position of the return destination of the member in which the abnormality has occurred, when the effect using the operation button 410 at the position according to the gaming state is performed, the operation button It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of operating 410 from being blocked.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  The discrete component is an electronic component in which only a single functional device (a device having one electrical function (such as a resistive device)) is sealed. For example, two or three devices having a specific function are used. It is a concept including parts that are enclosed in one package.

  That is, although the embodiment shows the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 1st special symbol indicator 1404 1st special reserve number indicator 1405 2nd special symbol indicator 1406 2nd special reserve Number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Special winning opening

Claims (1)

A determination unit that makes a determination based on the establishment of the game start condition;
Symbol variation means for performing symbol variation based on the result of the determination;
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to the player when a predetermined result is derived in the symbol variation;
Production control means for performing control related to production;
An operation means operable by the player;
The operating means can be changed to a normal state and a specific state different from the normal state,
The effect control means can execute an operation effect requiring an operation of the operation means,
For the operation effects,
Is capable of executing a notification informing that it is possible to accept the operation to the operating means, a normal operation effect capable of undergoing an operation on the operation means of at least the normal state,
Wherein it is capable of executing a notification informing availability for operation to the operating means, a specific operation effect that is capable of undergoing an operation to the operating means before Symbol specific state, are included,
Wherein the condition for executing a specific operation effect that the operating means holds said normal state near Ru case, the operation means is changed to the specific state by performing the specific operation effect, the specific operation effect after the operation means by operation on the operation unit is movable in, a process for returning the operating means to the normal state,
Wherein the normal operating conditions for executing effect is regardless the operation means also is met the have field if such a normal state, the operation means performs the normal operation effect while not in the normal state, the gaming machine, characterized in that said operation means by operation on the operation means in normal operation effect can be allowed movement and does not perform the processing for returning the operating means to the normal state.